Final Construction Dcpl2009r0019 Specifications

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

DOCUMENT 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 Project Title Page 00010 Table of Contents 00015 List of Drawings BIDDING AND CONTRACTING INFORMATION Solicitation Standard Contract Provisions Jan 2007 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary - ADDED 01125 Summary of Multiple Contracts 01210 Allowances 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 01270 Unit Prices 01290 Payment Procedures 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01322 Photographic Documentation 01330 Submittal Procedures 01350 Qualifications of Restoration Artisans and Craftsmen Subcontractors 01351 Special Procedures for Historic Treatment 01352 LEED Requirements 01400 Quality Requirements 01420 References 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01524 Construction Waste Management 01600 Product Requirements 01635 Substitution Procedures 01700 Execution Requirements 01732 Selective Demolition 01770 Closeout Procedures 01781 Project Record Documents 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 01810 General Commissioning Requirements 01820 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02080 Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

MJA MJA MJA

DCPL/SRS DCPL/SRS

CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA CS/MJA CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS CS/MJA/SRS SRS/Cx CS/MJA/SRS

AMT

00010 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

02230 02231 02260 02300 02361 02371 02510 02530 02620 02630 02751 02764 02780 02781 02826 02870 02920 02930

Site Clearing Tree Protection and Trimming Excavation Support and Protection Earthwork Termite Control Micro Piles Water Distribution Sanitary Sewerage Subdrainage Storm Drainage Cement Concrete Pavement Pavement Joint Sealants Unit Pavers Porous Unit Paving Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates Site Furnishings Lawns and Grasses Exterior Plants

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 03541 Gypsum Underlayment

AMT LPA MJA AMT MJA RSD AMT AMT MJA AMT LPA LPA LPA LPA MJA LPA LPA LPA

RSD MJA

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04720 Cast Stone - DELETED 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04860 Stone Masonry 04901 Clay Masonry Cleaning and Restoration 04902 Cast Stone Cleaning and Restoration 04903 Marble Cleaning and Restoration. 04904 Masonry Efflourescence Removal

LPA MJA/RSD LPA MJA MJA MJA MJA

DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05310 Steel Deck 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications 05511 Metal Stairs 05521 Pipe And Tube Railings 05700 Ornamental Metal 05710 Monumental Stairs and Railings

RSD RSD MJA/RSD RSD/MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

00010 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

05720 05721 05811 05910

New Cast-Iron Railings to Match Historic Ornamental Railings Architectural Joint Systems Ornamental Metal Cleaning

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06160 Sheathing 06202 Interior Finish Carpentry 06400 Interior Woodwork Refinishing 06401 Exterior Architectural Woodwork 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06410 Architectural Wood Casework 06416 Stone Countertops - DELETED 06614 Composite Countertops 06642 GFRP (Cornice)

MJA MJA MJA MJA

MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA HWA MJA MJA MJA

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07123 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing (Concrete Deck & Between Slabs) 07131 Self-adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07140 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing (Concrete & CMU) 07162 Crystalline Waterproofing 07210 Building Insulation 07271 Self-adhering Sheet Air Barriers 07315 Slate Shingles 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07811 Sprayed Fire-resistive Materials 07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07920 Joint Sealants

MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Frames - ADDED 08113 Glass Firewall Window and Door System 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08290 Wood Door Refinishing 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08335 Self-Opening Coiling Grilles 08352 Accordion Fire Door System 08450 All-Glass Entrances 08550 Wood Windows

MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

00010 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

08592 08710 08716 08800 08892

Historic Treatment of Wood Windows Door Hardware Automatic Door Operators for Historic Doors Glazing Glazing Repair

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 Non-load-bearing Steel Framing 09210 Plaster Cleaning and Repair - ADDED 09215 Gypsum Veneer Plaster 09250 Gypsum Board 09265 Gypsum Board Shaft-wall Assemblies 09280 Ornamental Plaster Replacement 09310 Ceramic Tile 09512 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09545 Ceiling Fabric Panels – DELETED 09629 Cork Flooring 09641 Bamboo Flooring - DELETED 09651 Resilient Floor Tile 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09654 Linoleum Floor Coverings & Desk Tops 09680 Carpet 09851 Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units - DELETED 09911 Exterior Painting 09912 Interior Painting 09931 Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes 09991 Encapsulation Coating System DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10101 Visual Display Surfaces 10155 Toilet Compartments 10185 Unit Shower 10200 Louvers and Vents 10410 Directories 10431 Exterior Signage 10436 Exterior Post and Panel Signs 10449 Interior Signage 10505 Metal Lockers 10522 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 10523 Fire Extinguishers 10671 Metal Storage Shelving

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

MJA Hardware Consultant MJA MJA MJA

MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA MJA

MJA MJA MJA MJA TBD by DCPL TBD by DCPL TBD by DCPL TBD by DCPL MJA MJA MJA MJA

00010 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

10801

Toilet and Bath Accessories

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11054 Library Stack Systems 11130 Audio-Visual Equipment 11132 Projection Screens 11451 Residential Appliances 11510 Library Equipment (Book Trucks & Book Return Carts) 11511 Library Book and Media Depository DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12355 Institutional Casework 12356 Kitchen Casework 12484 Floor Mats and Frames 12560 Library Furniture and Equipment

MJA

HWA Poly Poly MJA HWA MJA

MJA MJA MJA MJA

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13730 Security Access DCPL’s Consultant ADT 13760 Video Surveillance DCPL’s Consultant ADT 13850 Fire Detection and Alarm DELETED AND REPLACED BY 16721 JJC DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 Hydraulic Elevators

MJA

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials 15055 Motors 15075 Mechanical Identification 15100 Valves 15125 Pipe Expansion Joints 15135 Meter and Gages 15145 Hangers and Supports 15181 Hydronic Piping 15241 Mechanical Vibration Controls 15260 Pipe Insulation 15290 Duct Insulation 15326 Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems 15411 Water Distribution Piping 15420 Drainage and Vent Piping 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures

JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

00010 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

15452 15460 15496 15513 15540 15545 15575 15628 15763 15785 15830 15835 15855 15891 15899 15900 15910 15940 15970 15990 15995

Plumbing Pumps – ADDED Water Heaters Natural Gas Piping Condensing Boilers HVAC Pumps Chemical Water Treatment Breechings, Chimneys And Stacks Air Cooled Packaged Chiller with Integral Pump Modules Fan-Coil Units Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Untis Fans Unit Heaters Diffusers, Registers And Grilles Metal Ductwork Variable Frequency Drive Units Direct Digital Control Systems Duct Accessories HVAC Instrumentation and Controls – Sequences of Operation HVAC Controls Testing, Adjusting And Balancing Mechanical Systems Commissioning

Division 16 – Electrical 16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods 16051 Electrical System Protective Device Study 16111 Conduit Systems 16112 Busway 16126 Cables, High Voltage (Above 600 Volts) 16127 Cables, Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) 16140 Wiring Devices 16150 Motors 16160 Panelboards 16170 Disconnect Switches (Motor and Circuit) 16430 Metering 16450 Grounding 16460 Transformers (General Purpose) 16464 Switchgear, Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) 16500 Lighting Fixtures Cutsheets and Schedule 16510 Building Lighting, Interior 16511 Ornamental Lighting Cleaning and Restoration - DELETED 16520 Site Lighting

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC Cx

JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC JJC MCLA JJC MCLA JJC

00010 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

SECTION TITLE

16670 16721 16740 16995

Lightning Protection System Fire Detection and Alarm – ADDED (replacing 13850) Communications and Data Electrical Systems Commissioning

JJC JJC Poly Cx

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.

00010 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16740 - COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA.

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and any Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This section covers the installation of a structured telecommunications cabling plant (voice and data communications cabling) as described in the attached specifications and drawings. The contractor will be responsible for all parts, labor and other hardware directly associated with the structured cabling system including, but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Project Management, Scheduling and Quality Assurance Permits, Licenses, Inspection Scheduling and Fees Periodic Field Observations Reports Inspections and Tests Final Acceptance and Work Closeout

Work specified in this Section consists of all elements related to horizontal (station) and backbone (riser) cabling for voice, data and video including, but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Installation of Structured Telecommunication Cable Plant Routing and Termination of all Station, Riser for Voice and Data Cabling Installation of Workstation Faceplates and Jack Inserts Installation of Floor Box Bezel Panels and Jack Inserts Installation of Equipment Racks, Wall Racks, Patch Panels and Wiring Blocks Installation of Vertical and Horizontal Wire Management Installation of Cable Route Support (J-Hangers/Bridle Rings) All Cable Testing, Labeling and As-Built Documentation Firestop installation at all cable-related Penetrations of Fire-Rated Barriers Provision of all Patch-Cords Bonding of Racks and Frames to the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) in the Main Equipment Room and to the TGB’s in the Telecom Closets.

C.

Work specified also applies to the installation of small horizontal sleeves or firestop material that will, from time to time, when not previously provided by others, be required when a cable or cable bundle must penetrate a fire rated barrier while routing to a main or intermediate wiring closet or equipment room (MDF/IDF). Coordinate the placement of all such work with the Architect/Owner’s Representative prior to installation.

D.

Related Work - Not Covered - in this Section or is “by Others”: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

Coring, Sleeves, Stub-Ups and Poke-Through Installation Plywood Backboards Installation of Trench-duct or Walker Ducts Electrical Circuits, Building Grounding System, Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus (TMGB), Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) and TGB’s in the telecom closets. Equipment Room HVAC (Cooling / Heat Dissipation)

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 1 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6. 7. 1.3

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Telephone and Data Equipment, Switches, Routers, Servers, Wireless Access Points, UPS or other active electronic devices. Final Cross Connection Placements (Patching) for Voice and Data systems.

SCOPE OF WORK A.

This specification documents materials and installation requirements for the structured cable plant with specified quantities for horizontal and backbone cabling, terminations and related hardware to be included in the bid price.

B.

A listing of the cable/outlet quantities by riser closet has been included in this section (below) to facilitate gaining an overall understanding of the scope of work outlined herein. Quantities and configurations of Cable Outlets and Cables shown on the contract documents are the best estimates currently available. It is the responsibility of the bidder to verify the correct final quantities from the construction drawings. A complete range of unit prices for additions is specified in the bid form.

C.

The system is based upon the installation of horizontal cable runs composed of a quantity of 1 to 6 (see contract drawings for actual cable count per outlet) four-pair Category-6 UTP plenum-rated workstation cables at workstation outlets allowing 1 Gigabit Ethernet (1 GbE) transmissions up to 90 Meters. Copper riser and vacant fiber optic innerduct (with pull rope) to the Telco Entrance Demarcation is also part of this system.

D.

Cable System Design Option 1.

Pricing Option No.1 for Cabling will be to price (in lieu of conventional Category-6 UTP) the use of 10-Gigabit Station Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP shielded cable for voice and data this will include all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded jacks, patch panels and patch cords for a complete compatible 10-GIG system.

OUTLET TYPE AND CABLE QUANTITY BY FLOOR         

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 2 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submittals shall be according to Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

B.

Manufacturer's Literature: Submit three copies of the manufacturer's technical data for the floor boxes to be used on this project.

C.

Product Data: Upon contract award, submit complete list of all materials, components, equipment, systems, and products proposed.

D.

Design Drawings: In addition to the requirements of Section for “Submittal Procedures” provide Floor plan drawings documenting working station outlet locations and jack quantities in each building area with outlet/jack numbering identified.

E.

Project Management Organization Chart: 1.

F.

Project Documentation: As part of the installation, the Contractor shall provide detailed documentation of the structured wiring system to facilitate system administration, system maintenance and future system changes. This requirement includes: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

1.5

Include the proposed Project Manager's (RCDD) resume. The Project Manager is to be assigned for the duration of the project; any reassignment to be pre-approved by the Owner. Provide a listing of any sub-contractors to be used on this project, contact information and synopsis of background, experience particularly on Contractor's past projects.

Record drawings with all cables and cable routes identified and a cable record document, which facilitates the cross-connection of the voice riser system to the station, cable system and the fiber optic data riser to the network electronics. All labeled infrastructure shall be shown in the documentation. Provide documents electronically in AutoCAD and PDF, Spreadsheets in Excel and Text in MS Word format as most suited to the material. System test data signed and dated by the Contractor shall also be provided to establish the baseline performance of the system. All test documentation shall be printed out, bound and formally submitted for acceptance. An electronic copy shall also be provided in Owner approved electronic format with accompanying software used to create report. All cable test documentation shall be printed out, bound and formally submitted for acceptance. An electronic copy shall also be provided in Owner approved electronic format with accompanying software used to create report and shall include, but limited to run, length, jack number and actual passing test results.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: The Contractor shall have prior successful experience on a minimum of three (3) projects preferred similar in size and scope to this offer. In terms of the Cable Pricing Option 001 for Cat-6A F/UTP 10-GIG cabling, in lieu of the F/UTP experience, successful Category-6 experience will be acceptable if, along with references, the Contractor submits a statement from the Cable Manufacturer stating that the Manufacturer’s standard warranties will apply.

B.

Labeling Requirements: Raceways, boxes and fittings shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed and labeled. UL listing and labeling will not be required if it can be shown that raceways and boxes meet the requirements of another nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).Required licenses and permits including any required bonding or insurance

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 3 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract documentation. C.

Project Manager/Project Designer Qualifications: A qualified individual(s) with current certification by BICSI as a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD®).

D.

All work performed on this project will be installed in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards which are incorporated by reference: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

Warranty will be in effect at Substantial Completion.

B.

All materials and workmanship hereinafter specified and furnished shall be fully warranted by the contractor and/or manufacturer for a minimum or fifteen (15) years against any defects which may occur as the result of faulty materials or workmanship after installation acceptance by the Owner. Any such defects shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The Manufacturer’s standard warranties will remain otherwise.

1.7

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION / STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A.

The structured cabling system will be deemed acceptable when the Contractor delivers to the Owner: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

1.8

Passing Transmission test results on the Riser cabling. Passing Transmission test results on the Horizontal Station Cabling. Passing Transmission test results on the Fiber Optic Backbone cables (if any). As-Built Documentation showing cable routing and cable numbering.

Acceptance will be deemed "in full" upon receipt by the Contractor of a Notice of Acceptance issued by the Owner upon beneficial use and full implementation of the Terms and Conditions and Technical Specifications of the Contract. INSPECTION

A.

1.9

The National Electric Code The National Electrical Safety Code The National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) - NFPA 70 ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Standard for Installing Commercial Telecommunications Cabling ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-10 for Augmented Category-6 Cabling ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard ANSI/J-STD-607-A Grounding and Bonding Requirements ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A Standard for Communications Pathways BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) BICSI Cabling Installation Manual All local codes and ordinances.

The Owner shall, at all times, have access to the work. The Contractor shall not close up any work until the Owner has been given an opportunity to inspect the work or waive the opportunity to inspect. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing when the work is ready for inspection. The Owner, or its Agent, will inspect the work as expeditiously as possible after receipt of notification from the Contractor. INQUIRIES

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 4 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Any questions relating to the technical scope of work or requirements of this specification during the bidding process shall be placed in writing and submitted through: 1.

B.

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

James Reigle AIA, LEED A.P. Martinez + Johnson Architecture [email protected]

Following the Bid Award, all RFI’s will be submitted through the formal contract established procedure inclusive of the contracting officer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

COMMUNICATION CABINETS, RACKS, AND FRAMES A.

Main Equipment Room – Main Distribution Frame (MDF) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Heavy-Duty, Open 4-post Free Standing Server Racks Provide Two (2) in the MDF Room 309 (Final Layout to be Provided) Size: 84” High, 20.6” Wide (19” Rails), 29.50” Deep Color: Black Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics, CPI, APC, Great Lakes or Equivalent

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 5 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

2.2

COMMUNICATIONS COPPER PATCH PANELS A.

MDF Room 309 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

2.3

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Patch panels shall meet TIA/EIA channel requirements for Category-6 cabling systems. Separate patch panels for each floor’s cable. Color: Black 48 Port Increments Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics or equivalent As noted in Section 1.3 Paragraph D, Cable Pricing Option No. 1 will be to price the use of 10-Gigabit Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP shielded cable for voice and data including all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded jacks, patch panels and patch cords.

CABLE SUPPORT AND FIRESTOPPING

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 6 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

A.

Ladder Rack (Mounted above MDF Racks in Room 309) 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Arlington Loop Cable Hanger or Equivalent or Erico CableCat CAT64 J-Hook or Equivalent

Firestop 1. 2. 3.

2.4

Color: Black Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics Cable Management Panel with Cover 2U (OR-MM6HMF2RU) or equivalent.

Cable Support Hangers - For Routing small cable bundles to hallway cable tray. 1.

E.

Color: Black Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics MM6 Vertical Cable Mgmt. “Cage” with door (OR-MM6VMD710) or equivalent

Horizontal Wire Management 1. 2.

D.

VE 1, Class 20C Ladder type tray made from formed Aluminum. Provide with 12” Wide path with 6” Rung Spacing on center. Color: Black or Gray Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide B-Line, CPI, Homaco or equivalent

Vertical Wire Management 1. 2.

C.

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

UL-1479 approved caulk, putty, strip or sheets that shall be specifically designed to fill holes, spaces, and voids at communications penetrations. Shall provide adhesion to substrates and maintain fire and smoke seal under normal expected movements of substrates, conduits and cables. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Nelson, 3M, Hilti or equivalent

RACK-MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION STRIPS A.

Vertical Power Strip 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

2.5

Compatible with 4-Post Free-Standing Racks Provide (1) Per Free Standing Rack 125 Volt, type NEMA 5-15P Maximum Output - 20 AMP rating with 20 AMP breaker UL-1449 Rating Cord length Minimum of 3-meter. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Geist Manufacturing VSSA104-102S20 (10 Outlets 39”) 125V/20A or equivalent

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE COPPER CABLE (MDF TO TELCO DEMARCATION IN BASEMENT) A.

Backbone Copper Cabling (Riser) 1. 2.

Cable shall be two (2) 25-Pair Category-5, UTP 24 AWG, CMP (Plenum Rated). Route From MDF (RM 309 to Basement Demarc Rm 026) in conduit down thru chase.

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 7 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4.

2.6

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Terminate all cable ends in 110-100 type wall-mounted Connector Block with C5 wiring chips Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide General, Superior or Equivalent

COMMUNICATIONS FIBER OPTIC SPARE INNERDUCT (MDF RM 309 TO DEMARC RM 026) A.

Fiber Optic Innerduct: 1.

2.7

Place for future use. 1.25”, PVC, Color – Orange with pull rope. Installed in EMT conduit provided by others.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLE (WORKSTATION CABLE) A.

Horizontal Copper Cabling 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.8

Cable shall be Category-6, 4-Pair UTP, CMP All station cable will be a consistent color sheath. Cabling will be Category 6 with Channel performance parameters as specified in TIA/EIA standards. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Belden, Mohawk or Equivalent As noted in Section 1.3 Paragraph D, Cable Pricing Option No. 1 will be to price the use of 10-Gigabit Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP shielded cable for voice and data including all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded jacks, patch panels and patch cords.

COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS A.

Faceplates: 1. 2.

3. 4.

B.

RJ-45 Jack Inserts 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.9

Provide Single-Gang Faceplates with 4 Port or 6-Port Capacities as needed. Outlets with a less number of cables will use blank inserts to full unjacked faceplates ports. Faceplates include pressure-release designation label covers for quick, tool-less removal. Sheets of designation labels can be ordered to use with printers. Use blank inserts as needed. It is the Cabling Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate all faceplate and insert colors prior to any materials ordering or installation. For floor box, millwork or modular furniture workstations, coordinate faceplates and connectors with Owner’s Representative. Floor boxes to be used are Resource RFB Multi-Service Recessed Floor Boxes. Cover is Model # S38CCTCBS (Wiremold Legrand).

8-Pin T-568B pin/pair configuration. UV resistant, high impact plastic to prevent color fading and provides durability. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Leviton, Ortronics, Panduit or Equivalent Note: Cable Pricing Option 001 for 10GIG cabling system requires using Cat-6A F/UTP shielded inserts.

COMMUNICATION PATCH CORDS AND X-CONNECTS A.

Modular Cords

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 8 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

B.

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Stranded Category 6 UTP RJ-45 Closet patch cord All patch cords shall be the "snag free" type UL type CM. Patch cords shall be used in workstation to data network patch panels and shall meet TIA/EIA 568 B.2 1 Category 6 UTP requirements. Provide one (1) patch cord for each Category 6 horizontal UTP cable installed broken out as follows. 20% will be 10 foot length (Black) 35% will be 7 foot length (Black) 35% will be 5 foot length (Black) 10% will be 3 foot length (Black) 100% of the total number of horizontal cables Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Belden, Mohawk or Equivalent

RJ-45 to 110 4-Pair Cords 1. 2.

Provide (4) four. 10-Foot length or sufficient to reach from IDF 110-Block on wall to rack mounted RJ-45 patch panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

GENERAL A.

Coordinate all installation work with the General Contractor to minimize conflicts including: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Review building plans with the Owner and/or Owner’s representative to determine and document all workstation outlet locations and jack quantities in each building area. Develop and document a numbering and labeling plan for horizontal and backbone cabling in coordination with Owner and based on ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards. Participate in design review meetings with the Owner and incorporate design revisions as directed. Fully install, test, and label all horizontal and backbone cabling and terminations for the specified voice and data structured cable plant. Provide record drawings documenting all workstation outlets, jack quantities, and numbering in each building area. Provide record drawings in the form of fiber optic and copper backbone cable one-line diagrams with cable numbering.

B.

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which related work is specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

C.

Remove and reinstall any obstacles that may be in the way of the work (i.e. ceiling tiles, carpet, etc.). Repair and/or Report any damages to in-place materials that may occur due to the work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D.

Provide a schedule identifying when work is to commence, the expected duration of the activities and the location of the work effort.

E.

The Owner is not responsible for loss, theft or damage to any stored or in-place materials.

3.2

INSTALLATION, MANAGEMENT A.

The Contractor performing the work shall provide a supervisory work force sufficient to efficiently and effectively execute the Contractor's responsibilities. The Contractor’s Project

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 9 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Manager shall be an RCDD and will act as a single point of contact for all activities regarding this project. The Project Manager must be on the job at any time that work is being performed or workers are present B.

Installation personnel shall meet manufacturer's training and education requirements for implementation of the warranty program.

C.

The Contractor’s Project Manager shall provide a weekly progress report.

D.

Provide all new materials that are of the best grade for each, unless otherwise specified herein.

E.

The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or repair any work found by the Owner’s Representative not to conform to contract requirements. The Contractor shall promptly remove rejected materials from the premises. Inspections of the work shall be performed in a manner as to not cause delay to the work other than delays caused due to required work repair or replacement.

F.

Follow specifications for all required cable slack storage as detailed in this section. Cables with insufficient slack will be reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense.

G.

Floor Boxes 1.

2. 3.

General: Install boxes as indicated or as necessary, complying with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of codes and standards, and according to recognized industry practices. Finished installation shall have a 4 hour minimum fire rating. Room Locations: Install boxes per plans. Adjustments: Under the following condition and with the approval of the Contracting Officer, move raceways and boxes from the shown location as follows: a.

4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

Knockouts: Open only knockouts which will be used for a conduit. Install tight fitting knockout closers in holes from which conduits have been removed. Box Supports: Fasten raceways and boxes securely in place, using any approved spring clips and other fasteners, required in Section 16072 - Supporting Devices. No Extension Rings: Install boxes which provide the required volume without the use of extension rings. Masonry Boxes: Install masonry boxes where boxes are recessed in wood, concrete block or brick or wood paneling. Saw-cut the opening for the boxes so that they will fit snugly in the opening. Install boxes with front edges flush with adjacent surfaces. Cast Metal Boxes: Install cast metal boxes with weatherproof covers under any of the following conditions: a. b. c.

9. 10.

Where box locations shown would interfere or cause associated electrical equipment to interfere with architectural, structural or mechanical features, install the box in a location which eliminates interference but with the smallest deviation from the location shown.

Exterior locations Where exposed to moisture In exposed rigid steel conduit systems

Boxes for Receptacles: Shall be equipped with a grounding terminal screw. Communication, Signal and Alarm Outlets: Install boxes for telephone, intercom, public address and fire alarm outlets. Grounding terminal is not required for these boxes.

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 10 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 11.

Box Covers: Install box covers appropriate for the box, type of outlet and device, and with additional requirements as follows: a. b. c. d.

12. 13. 14. 3.3

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

For boxes recessed in gypsum wallboard, install raised device covers. For exposed, surface mounted boxes, install covers deep drawn 1/2 inch, with height and width dimensions identical to the associated box. Terminate and install plates specified in Section 16140 - Wiring Devices and per plans. For cast metal boxes, install gasketed, cast metal covers.

Care for Insulation: Replace any thermal insulation cut or damaged during installation of boxes. Floor Box Adjustment: Adjust floor boxes and covers so that cover plates are flush with the finished floor around the entire circumference. Carpet Plates: In carpeted areas, install a carpet plate at each floor box.

COMMUNICATION CABINETS, RACKS, AND FRAMES A.

Bonded to TGB with No. 6 AWG.

B.

Securely fasten side by side racks to each other using manufacturer hardware.

C.

Mount with 36” of clear access area at front and rear of rack (and open end of a rack row)

3.4

COMMUNICATIONS PATCH PANELS A.

Install patch panels per manufacturer’s instructions to ensure a manufacturer-certified Category-6 solution.

B.

8-Pin T568B pin/pair configuration. All 4 pairs are to be terminated.

C.

Patch panels shall mount to standard floor-mounted EIA 19” grounded equipment racks with tops at 84” high.

D.

Industry-standard, single wire, punch-down tools shall be used for terminations.

E.

Cables shall be neatly dressed to their respective patch panel and within rack cable management using Velcro ties and/or rack cable management loops.

F.

Provide Identification labels for each panel and panel port.

3.5

CABLE SUPPORT and FIRESTOPPING A.

Vertical Wire Management 1. 2. 3.

B.

Install between racks in MDF At outer end of any Rack Row install (OR-MM6VMD706). Size for no more than 40% Fill.

Ladder Rack 1. 2. 3.

VE 1, Class 20C Ladder type tray. Formed Aluminum, painted with gray epoxy. Provide with 12” Wide path with 6” Rung Spacing on center. Mount in MDF above four post equipment cabinets. Use Manufactured approved wall bracket to secure to wall and J-bolt hardware to affix to top of cabinets. Bond to TGB system using No. 6 AWG copper wire.

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 11 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. C.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Small miscellaneous EMT sleeves may be needed when a cable route requires a through-penetration in a non rated or fire rated barrier. Coordinate placement and installation of all sleeves with the General Contractor. Seal voids between sleeve and building construction with joint sealant. Penetrations of any fire rated partition must be properly fire-stopped.

Firestop 1.

2. 3.

3.6

Obtain pre-approval for all attachment methods and routes. Install cable supports above ceiling grid using a rigid support to a structural element or by attaching directly to a structural element. Maintain at least a 3” minimum height above ceiling grid. Do not fasten to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling hangers or conduit. Install on average 60” centers with irregular intervals to avoid a standing wave induction of interference on cable. Do not exceed the manufacturer’s recommend cable fill capacity for the type of cable being installed in the support device. Do not strap additional or subsequent cables to the supports using cable ties. Close hooks with manufacturer provided “bars” not cable ties.

Sleeves 1.

E.

Provide compatible cable drop out trays from ladder rack to each equipment cabinet.

Cable Hangers (to route smaller bundles of horizontal cables to hallway cable tray or to IDF) 1. 2.

D.

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Fire-stopping products may be in the form of UL 1479 approved caulk, putty, strip or sheets that shall be specifically designed to fill holes, spaces, and voids at communications penetrations. Fire-stopping materials shall also provide adhesion to substrates and maintain fire and smoke seal under normal expected movements of substrates, conduits and cables. All telecommunications-related penetrations through fire rated partitions, including those in floor sleeves (used and unused) and poke-thru's must be properly firestopped.

RACK-MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION STRIPS A.

Coordinate type of power strip with the Owner’s Project Manager based on the anticipated requirements.

B.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.

C.

Mount so that the receptacles face the rear of the rack.

D.

Secure all power cords so that they do not pose any hazard and cannot be disconnected accidentally.

3.7

COPPER BACKBONE CABLE A.

MDF to Telco Demarcation Intra-Building Riser Cabling 1. 2. 3.

Provide (2) 25 Pair Cat-5 Cable from the MDF to Telco Demarc. CMR rated and ran in EMT conduit provided by others. Cable will be continuous without splicing. Secure vertical weight of cables at MDF. Review fasteners, strain relief and routing with Owner’s Representative.

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 12 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

3.8

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide 10 feet of Slack at both ends. In the MDF, Terminate one of the two Cat-5 copper riser cables in a rack mounted 24Port Patch Panel, 1 Pair per Port on Pins 4-5 with spare pair coiled. Terminate the other in a 110-100 wall connecting block using C5 wiring chips, located within patch cord reach of the station patch panels. At the Telco Demarc, terminate both riser cables with 110-100 type block and C-5 chips. Test and Label all cables. Submit testing and labeling plan within ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards for approval by Owners prior to cable placement. Cross Connections and Patch Cord Patching will be handled by the Owner and/or the Owner’s PBX Contractor. Coordinate the placement of 110-100 Blocks and cable-support hardware in the MDF with the Owner’s Representative and the Owner’s PBX Contractor(s).

FIBER OPTIC INNERDUCT A.

Innerduct will be placed from MDF to Telco Demarcation via an EMT conduit (by others) for future use.

B.

Innerduct will be labeled with identifying markings at both ends.

C.

Install innerduct in a manner that will prevent any kinks or damage to future fiber optic cable installed in it.

D.

Cap or Cover both ends of the innerduct, also securing pull rope and pull rope slack for easy access in the future.

3.9

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLE A.

Horizontal Copper Cabling (All cables ran from outlet location to MDF - Room 309) 1.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

3.10 A.

Cable shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All work shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electric Code. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.1 through ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.3, NECS/BICSI 568, ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 A and ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 shall be adhered to during all installation activities. This also includes EIA/TIA TSB 67, ICEA S 83 596 and UL. All cable termination shall be in the proper order and sequence. Horizontal station cable runs shall not exceed a cable drop distance limitation of 292.5 feet (90 meters) from the serving wiring closet IDF to the workstation outlet. The contractor will leave 4 meters of slack at the workstation outlet’s conduit stub-out in the ceiling above the outlet and a 3 meters slack loop at the IDF. The slack loop’s shape or securing mechanism should not degrade the cable performance in any way. The contractor will secure cables and cable bundles via Velcro Strips so as not to squeeze or deform the cable sheath shape from excessive binding pressure. Manufacturer’s and TIA/EIA instructions and standards for installation, bending radius, pulling tension, clearances and terminations will be followed as a minimum. Submit a testing and labeling plan for the Owner’s approval prior to placement, using current ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards. Cables ran to Wi-Fi Access Point locations shall be provided with a 25-foot slack coil. Cable for elevator phone will be ran to the elevator machine room. The elevator contractor will make the connection to the traveling cable assembly serving the elevator car.

COMMUNICATION FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS Faceplates:

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 13 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.

2.

B.

It is the Cabling Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate all faceplate and insert types and colors with wall, floor or millwork colors or types prior to any materials ordering or installation. For Floor boxes, Millwork, or Modular Furniture installed by work of other sections and/or by others, the Cable Contractor will supply all bezels, faceplates and jack inserts compatible with installed in-floor hardware.

Jack Inserts 1. 2.

C.

8-pin T-568B pin/pair configuration. All pairs are terminated. A 54” AFF note appearing next to a triangle indicates a wall phone type of outlet is required and the faceplate installed should be of a type and design that is able to support the installation of a wall phone.

Workstation Outlet/Cable Labeling 1.

2.

Labeling shall be in accordance to TIA/EIA 606-A standard for infrastructure (including but not limited to all cable runs, trays, 110 blocks, firestops, patch panels, station faceplates). Numbering will consist of the Floor Number (0-1-2-3) followed by a two digit identifier that should be sequential with no numbers skipped in the sequence. Each sequence for each Floor will start at cable number 01 (starting over for each floor). At a minimum, each cable shall be labeled at the junction box prior to jack termination and at the patch panel prior to termination: a.

3.11 A.

041 (Cable 41)

Modular Cords

2.

A.

Example:

COMMUNICATION PATCH CORDS AND X-CONNECTS

1.

3.12

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Patch cords shall be used in workstation to data network patch panels and shall meet TIA/EIA 568 B.2 1 Category 6 requirements. The Owner’s Network personnel and/or the Owner’s PBX Contractor shall perform the final patching and/or cross connections tasks.

TESTING Station Cable 1.

2.

3.

4.

Each communication outlet tested should include the Cat 6 patch panel port, a 3-foot "factory" patch cord (Cat 6), device jack (Cat 6) and a 2-meter (Cat 6) "factory" launch or workstation stranded connect cord. Testing shall be end to end using a tester that meets the TIA/EIA accuracy performance requirements as specified in TIA/EIA 568B.2-1 (for Cat-6A Add Alternate - draft addendum #1 to TIA/EIA-B.1 for Category 6A F/UTP cabling). Test results should clearly identify the tested cable and its IDF point of origin. Links which report a "Fail" for any of the individual tests shall result in an overall link fail. All individual tests must result in a Pass to achieve an overall Pass. Testing reports shall include testing results for wire map (continuity, shorts, crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs), total physical cable length including test equipment cords, attenuation and near end cross talk. The Contractor shall submit, prior to testing, a copy of their step by step copper cabling test procedure for review and approval.

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 14 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Voice Riser 1.

3.13 A.

3.14 A.

3.15 A. B.

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Test each riser pair end to end. Test results shall be submitted in writing. Testing should diagnose, at a minimum, the presence of all open loop conductors, shorts, crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs and any other problems which would preclude pair use for telecommunications applications.

FIRESTOPPING The Contractor shall be responsible for the fire-stopping of all telecommunications related conduits and sleeves and/or any penetrations of fire rated walls to facilitate the installation of communications cabling. The fire-stopping of all fire rated wall penetrations shall meet UL 1479 standards. CHANGES Any changes or modifications to the scope of work shall conform to the requirements of Division 1 Specification Section “Product Requirements”. PRICING – GENERAL A detailed materials and labor pricing listing should be submitted as part of the RFP response for approval. All pricing submitted shall be a fully itemized material listing (showing product description and manufacturer’s name, unit cost and quantity proposed) and also a fully itemized labor cost listing (showing description, unit cost and quantity proposed for all labor tasks). Please use the following sub-headings for the itemized listing: 1.

MATERIALS 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0

Station Cable Riser Cable – Copper Riser Cable - Fiber Optic and Innerduct Station Cable Faceplates and Inserts Copper Riser Termination Fiber Optic Riser Termination Equipment Racks, Wall Cabinets, Cable Support, Bonding Patch Panels, Patch Cords Miscellaneous

SUBTOTAL INSTALLATION 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

Horizontal Station Cable Routing, Placement and Termination Riser Cable - Copper Routing, Placement and Termination Riser Cable - Fiber Optic Innerduct Placement and Termination Equipment Room and IDF Closet Build-Out Testing, Certification and Documentation Miscellaneous

SUBTOTAL 1.0

Administration, Logistics, Insurance or Additional Mark-Up

SUBTOTAL

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 15 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

GRAND TOTAL C.

Optional pricing requested shall also be fully itemized. Also include any freight or administrative costs and any supervisory mark-ups to the base price of the entity doing the actual work and providing materials.

D.

Any bid that is not fully itemized will be deemed to be unacceptable and will be rejected.

E.

All pricing shall be signed off on by an officer of the bidding company and show any applicable time limitations e.g. “Pricing good for 120 days”.

3.16 A.

3.17 A.

CABLE PRICING OPTION 001 – 10-GIGABIT STATION CABLE CAT-6A F/UTP Provide a fully itemized alternate price to replace all Category-6 station cable, including all termination hardware, shielded inserts, patch panels, patch cords and testing with a 10Gigabit Category-6A F/UTP shielded cabling system (SIEMON or equivalent). CABLE PRICING – ALLOWANCES & ADDS/UNIT PRICING Assume standard removable ceiling, with an average cable route distance of 175’(53.34m). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a Wall Outlet & 1 Cable Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a Wall Outlet & 2 Cables Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a Wall Outlet & 4 Cables Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a 4-Port Floor Outlet & 2 Cables Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a 4-Port Floor Outlet & 4 Cables Provide a cost for a Stainless Steel Faceplate - 1, 2 and 4 Port Capacities

Provide the same Adds pricing for Cable Pricing Option 001- 10 GIG Cat-6A F/UTP Cable as well.

END OF SECTION 16740

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

16740 - 16 / 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16721 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified. B. Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of NFPA 72 unless variations to NFPA 72 are specifically identified within these contract documents by the following notation: "variation". The design, system layout, document submittal preparation, and supervision of installation and testing shall be provided by a technician that is certified NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified technician shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide additional technical support at the site as required by the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative. Installers shall have a minimum of two years experience installing fire alarm systems. C. Fire alarm signals: 1. Building shall have an automatic digitized voice fire alarm signal with emergency manual voice override to notify occupants to evacuate. The digitized voice message shall identify the area of the building (smoke zone) from which the alarm was initiated. 2. Building shall have a general evacuation fire alarm signal in accordance with ASA S3.41 to notify all occupants in the respective building to evacuate. D. Alarm signals (by device), supervisory signals (by device) and system trouble signals (by device not reporting) shall be distinctly transmitted to the main fire alarm system control unit located in the main electrical room. E. The fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed central station using a digital alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA 72.

1.2 SCOPE

A. A new fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 1/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements for items which are common to other Division 26 sections. B. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits and boxes for cables/wiring. C. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW: Cables/wiring. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit 4 copies and 1 reproducible in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. B. Drawings: 1. Prepare drawings and include all contractors information. Bid drawing files will be provided to the Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical dimensions shown on the drawings. 2. Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show any removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions. 3. Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser raceways and conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per floor and zone. Show door holder interface, elevator control interface, HVAC shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system interface, and all other fire safety interfaces. Show wiring styles on the riser diagram for all circuits. 4. Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors, wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment configuration. 5. Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the DCPL one (1) set of reproducible, as-built drawings. As-built drawings (floor plans) shall show all conduit used for the fire alarm system.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 2/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts. a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion and maintenance. b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment. c.

Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including the input/output matrix chart.

d. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations. e. Complete listing of all digitized voice messages. f.

Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.

D. Certifications: 1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s representative who makes the certification. 2. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components being furnished are compatible with the control unit. 3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72 requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer. 1.6 GUARANTY PERIOD SERVICES A. Complete inspection, testing, maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be provided by a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 3/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required inspection, testing, maintenance and repair. C. All inspection, testing, maintenance and permanent records required by NFPA 72, and recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided by the contractor. Work shall include operation of sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices. It shall include all interfaced equipment including but not limited to elevators, HVAC shutdown, and extinguishing systems. D. Maintenance and testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment. E. Non-included Work: Repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use, accidents, or negligence for which the contractor is not responsible. f.

Emergency Service: 1. Warranty Period Service: Service other than the preventative maintenance, inspection, and testing required by NFPA 72 shall be considered emergency call-back service and covered under the warranty of the installation during the first year of the warranty period, unless the required service is a result of abuse or misuse by the Government. Written notification shall not be required for emergency warranty period service and the contractor shall respond as outlined in the following sections on Normal and Overtime Emergency Call-Back Service. Warranty period service can be required during normal or overtime emergency call-back service time periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative. 2. Normal and overtime emergency call-back service shall consist of an on-site response within two hours of notification of a system trouble. 3. Normal emergency call-back service times are between the hours of 7:30 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, exclusive of federal holidays. Service performed during all other times shall be considered to be overtime emergency call-back service. The cost of all normal emergency call-back service for years 2 through 5 shall be included in the cost of this contract. 4. Overtime emergency call-back service shall be provided for the system when requested by the Government. The cost of the first 40 manhours per year of overtime call-back service during years 2 through 5 of this contract shall be provided under this contract. Payment for overtime emergency callback service in excess of the 40 man hours per year requirement will be handled through separate purchase orders. The method of calculating overtime emergency call-back hours is based on actual time spent on site and does not include travel time.

H. The contractor shall maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit. The log shall list the date and time of all examinations and trouble calls, condition of the system, and name of the technician. Each trouble call shall be fully described, including the nature of the trouble, necessary correction performed, and parts replaced.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 4/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC). 72-2002 ...................................... National Fire Alarm Code. 90A-2002 ................................... Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 101-2003 .................................... Life Safety Code C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 2000-2000...............Fire Protection Equipment Directory D. Factory Mutual Research Corp (FM): Approval Guide, 2005 Edition E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): S3.41-1996 ................................ Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal F. International Code Council, International Building Code (IBC) 2003 Edition PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL A. All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall certify that the installation complies with all manufacturer's requirements and that satisfactory total system operation has been achieved. 2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIRE A. Conduit shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS and as follows: 1. All conduit shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area. 3. All conduit shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) minimum. B. Wire: 1. Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760, Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW), and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits. 2. Addressable circuits and wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer in writing. 3. Any fire alarm system wiring that extends outside of a building shall have additional power surge protection to protect equipment from physical damage and false signals due to lightning, voltage and FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 5/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

current induced transients. Protection devices shall be shown on the submittal drawings and shall be UL listed or in accordance with written manufacturer's requirements. 4. All wire or cable used in underground conduits including those in concrete shall be listed for wet locations. C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets: 1. Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements. 2. All new and reused boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70. 3. Covers shall be painted red in and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) high. 4. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70. Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes. 5. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified or as approved by the COTR. 2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. General: 1. All circuits shall be monitored for integrity. 2. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main power failure, grounds and system wiring derangement. 3. Transmit digital alarm information to the fire alarm control unit. B. Enclosure: 1. The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to provide control for the system. C. Operator terminal at main control unit: 1. Operator terminal shall consist of the central processing unit, display screen, keyboard and printer. 2. Display screen shall have a minimum 15-inch diagonal non-glare screen capable of displaying 24 lines of 80 characters each. 3. Keyboard shall consist of 60 alpha numeric and 12 user/functional control keys. 4. Printer shall be the automatic type, printing the date, time and location for all alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. D. Power Supply: 1. The control unit shall derive its normal power from a 120 volt, 60 Hz dedicated supply connected to the emergency power system. Standby power shall be provided by a 24 volt DC battery as hereinafter

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 6/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

specified. The normal power shall be transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the standby battery and charger. 2. Door holder power shall be arranged so that momentary or sustained loss of main operating power shall not cause the release of any door. 3. Power supply for smoke detectors shall be taken from the fire alarm control unit. 4. Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning or voltage and current transients. 5. Provide new separate and direct ground lines to the outside to protect the equipment from unwanted grounds. E. Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off switch. F. Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator valves (PIV), and main gate valves shall be supervised for off-normal position. Closing a valve shall sound a supervisory signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch. The specific location of all closed valves shall be identified at the control unit. Valve operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches and duct detectors shall be monitored as supervisory signals. The power supply to the elevator shunt trip breaker shall be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory signal. G. Trouble signals: 1. Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (non-latching). 2. System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door. H. Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches required for the system: 1. Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all signals to the main fire alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system trouble signal shall be energized when switch is in the off position. 2. Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local building alarm system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in the off position. 3. Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence switch is operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal. 4. Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has been reset. The system shall lock in alarm until reset. 5. Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be provided to test the indicator lamps. 6. Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm transmitter. This switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified herein. 7. Door Holder By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent doors from releasing during fire alarm tests. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when switch is in the abnormal position. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 7/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

8. Elevator recall By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent the elevators from recalling upon operation of any of the devices installed to perform that function. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when the switch is in the abnormal position. 9. HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from shutting down and/or smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating device designed to interconnect with these devices. I.

Remote Control Capability: Each building fire alarm control unit shall be installed and programmed so that each must be reset locally after an alarm, before the main fire alarm control unit can be reset. After the local building fire alarm control unit has been reset, then the all system acknowledge, reset, silence or disabling functions can be operated by the main fire alarm control unit

K. System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be expanded in the future (to include the addition of twenty percent more alarm initiating, alarm notification and door holder circuits) without disruption or replacement of the existing control unit and secondary power supply. 2.4 STANDBY POWER SUPPLY A. Batteries: 1. Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal. 2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours plus five minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.14 volts per cell, upon a normal AC power failure. 2.5 ANNUNCIATION A. Annunciator, Alphanumeric Type (System): 1. Shall be a supervised, LCD display containing a minimum of two lines of 40 characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2. Message shall identify floor, zone, etc on the first line and device description and status (pull station, smoke detector, waterflow alarm or trouble condition) on the second line. 3. The initial alarm received shall be indicated as such. 4. A selector switch shall be provided for viewing subsequent alarm messages. 5. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application. B. Printers: 1. System printers shall be high reliability digital input devices, UL approved, for fire alarm applications. The printers shall operate at a minimum speed of 30 characters per second. The printer shall be continually supervised. 2. Printers shall be programmable to either alarm only or event logging output. a. Alarm printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of all alarm information that occurs within the fire alarm system. Alarm information shall include the date, time, building number, floor, zone, device type, device address, and condition. b. Event logging printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of every change of status that occurs within the fire alarm system. Status information shall include date, time, building number, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 8/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

floor, zone, device type, device address and change of status (alarm, trouble, supervisory, reset/return to normal). 3. System printers shall provide tractor drive feed pins for conventional fan fold 213 mm x 275 mm (8-1/2" x 11") paper. 4. The printers shall provide a printing and non-printing self test feature. 5. Power supply for printers shall be taken from and coordinated with the building emergency service. 6. Each printer shall be provided with a stand for the printer and paper. 7. Spare paper and ribbons for printers shall be stocked and maintained as part of the five (5) year guarantee period services in addition to the one installed after the approval of the final acceptance test. 2.6 VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (VCS) A. General: 1. An emergency voice communication system shall be installed throughout the building. 2. Upon receipt of an alarm signal from the building fire alarm system, the VCS shall automatically transmit a pre-recorded fire alarm message throughout the building. 3. A digitized voice module shall be used to store each prerecorded message. 4. The VCS shall be arranged as a dual channel system capable of transmitting two different messages simultaneously. 5. The VCS shall supervise all speaker circuits, control equipment, remote audio control equipment, and amplifiers. B. Speaker Circuit Control Unit: 1. The speaker circuit control unit shall include switches to manually activate or deactivate speaker circuits grouped by floor in the system. 2. Speaker circuit control switches shall provide on, off, and automatic positions and indications. 3. The speaker circuit control unit shall include visual indication of active or trouble status for each group of speaker circuits in the system. 4. A trouble indication shall be provided if a speaker circuit group is disabled. 5. A lamp test switch shall be provided to test all indicator lamps. 6. A single "all call" switch shall be provided to activate all speaker circuit groups simultaneously. 7. A push-to-talk microphone shall be provided for manual voice messages. 8. A voice message disconnect switch shall be provided to disconnect automatic digitized voice messages from the system. The system shall be arranged to allow manual voice messages and indicate a system trouble condition when activated. C. Speaker Circuit Arrangement: 1. Speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is one speaker circuit per smoke zone. 2. Audio amplifiers and control equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal and abnormal conditions. 3. Speaker circuits shall be either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with a minimum of 50% spare power available. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 9/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. Speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any one speaker circuit will not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system. D. Digitized Voice Module (DVM): 1. The Digitized Voice Module shall provide prerecorded digitized evacuation and instructional messages. The messages shall be professionally recorded and approved by the COTR prior to programming. 2. The DVM shall be configured to automatically output to the desired circuits following a 10-second slow whoop alert tone. 3. Prerecorded magnetic taped messages and tape players are not permitted. 4. The digitized message capacity shall be no less than 15 second in length. 5. The digitized message shall be transmitted three times. 6. The DVM shall be supervised for operational status. 7. Failure of the DVM shall result in the transmission of a constant alarm tone. 8. The DVM memory shall have a minimum 50% spare capacity after those messages identified in this section are recorded. Multiple DVM's may be used to obtain the required capacity. E. Audio Amplifiers: 1. Audio Amplifiers shall provide a minimum of 50 Watts at either 25 or 70.7 VRMS output voltage levels. 2. Amplifiers shall be continuously supervised for operational status. 3. Amplifiers shall be configured for either single or dual channel application. 4. Each audio output circuit connection shall be configurable for Style X. 5. A minimum of 50% spare output capacity shall be available for each amplifier. F. Tone Generator(s): 1. Tone Generator(s) shall be capable of providing a distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern fire alarm signal as well as a slow whoop. 2. Tone Generator(s) shall be continuously supervised for operational status. 2.7 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Speakers: 1. Shall operate on either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0W and originally installed at the one-half watt tap. Speakers shall provide a minimum sound output of 80 dBA at ten feet with the one-half watt tap. 2. Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ. 3. 100 mm (4 inches) or 200 mm (8 inches) cone type speakers ceiling mounted with white colored baffles in areas with suspended ceilings and wall mounted in areas without ceilings. B. Strobes: 1. Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other areas with a flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 10/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Backplate shall be red with 13 mm (1/2 inch) permanent red letters. Lettering to read "Fire", be oriented on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions. 3. Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of twenty (20) percent spare capacity. 4. Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein. 2.8 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations: 1. Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type. 2. Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal or high impact plastic. Stations shall be semi-flush type. 3. Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions provided on front in raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE". 4. Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever shall lock in alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain front access for resetting, or conducting tests and drills. 5. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth, hard, durable finish. B. Smoke Detectors: 1. Smoke detectors shall be UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being furnished. 2. Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards for system type detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 72. 3. Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote indicator lamps and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view. Locate the remote indicator lamps and identification plates flush mounted on walls so they can be observed from a normal standing position. 4. All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type. 5. Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The sensitivity of any photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25 percent obscuration per foot. 6. Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity level upon testing. Detectors, along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed for testing the sensitivity of the detectors. C. Heat Detectors: 1. Heat detectors shall be of the addressable restorable rate compensated fixed-temperature spot type. 2. Detectors shall have a minimum smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet. 3. Intermediate temperature rated (200 degrees F) heat detectors shall be utilized. D. Water Flow and Pressure Switches: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 11/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Wet pipe water flow switches and dry pipe alarm pressure switches for sprinkler systems shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of an address reporting interface device. 2. All water flow switches shall be of a single manufacturer and series and non-accumulative retard type. 3. All switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. Timing shall be recorded and documented during testing. 2.9

SUPERVISORY DEVICES A. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting interface device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct, and shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector placement shall be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct. 2. Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as specified hereinafter under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION". 3. Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g. "DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so that they can be observed and operated from a normal standing position. B. Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches: 1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve, and each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches. 2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. 3. Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of address reporting interface device. // See Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new switches to be added. Connect tamper switches for all control valves shown on the approved shop drawings. // 4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing that shall provide a 19 mm (3/4 inch) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves. 5. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting. 6. Where dry-pipe sprinkler systems are installed, high and low air pressure switches shall be provided and monitored by way of an address reporting interface devices.

2.10 ADDRESS REPORTING INTERFACE DEVICE A. Shall have unique addresses that reports directly to the building fire alarm panel. B. Shall be configurable to monitor normally open or normally closed devices for both alarm and trouble conditions. C. Shall have terminal designations clearly differentiating between the circuit to which they are reporting from and the device that they are monitoring. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 12/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Shall be UL listed for fire alarm use and compatibility with the panel to which they are connected. E. Shall be mounted in weatherproof housings if mounted exterior to a building. 2.11 SMOKE BARRIER DOOR CONTROL A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: 1. New Door Holders shall be standard wall mounted electromagnetic type. In locations where doors do not come in contact with the wall when in the full open position, an extension post shall be added to the door bracket. 2. Operation shall be by 24 volt DC supplied from a battery located at the fire alarm control unit. Door holders shall be coordinated as to voltage, ampere drain, and voltage drop with the battery, battery charger, wiring and fire alarm system for operation as specified. B. Door holder control circuits shall be electrically supervised. C. Smoke detectors shall not be incorporated as an integral part of door holders. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS , Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW), and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be protected as required by FIRESTOPPING method. B. All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. C. All exposed conduit shall be painted to match surrounding finished areas and red. D. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. E. Speakers shall be ceiling mounted and fully recessed in areas with suspended ceilings. Speakers shall be wall mounted and recessed in finished areas without suspended ceilings. Speakers may be surface mounted in unfinished areas. F. Strobes shall be flush wall mounted 2,000 mm (80 inches) above the floor or 150 mm (6 inches) below ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 900 mm (36 inches) clearance from side obstructions. G. Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 1050 mm (42 inches) or more than 1200 mm (48 inches) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 1500 mm (60 inches) of a stairway or an exit door. I.

Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 300 mm (12 inches) from a fitting that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 900 mm (36 inches) from a valve.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 13/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC J.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjust to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.

3.2 TYPICAL OPERATION A. Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector, kitchen hood suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall cause the following operations to occur: 1. Operate the emergency voice communication system in the Building. Flash strobes continuously only in the zone of alarm. 2. Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and Flash all strobes in the building in alarm until reset at the fire alarm control unit. 3. Release only the magnetic door holders in the smoke zone after the alert signal. 4. Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire department. 5. Unlock the electrically locked exit doors within the zone of alarm. B. Heat detectors in elevator machine rooms shall, in addition to the above functions, disconnect all power to all elevators served by that machine room after a time delay. The time delay shall be programmed within the fire alarm system programming and be equal to the time it takes for the car to travel from the highest to the lowest level, plus 10 seconds. C. Operation of a smoke detector at a corridor door used for automatic closing shall also release only the magnetic door holders // on that floor // in that smoke zone //. //Operation of a smoke detector at a shutter used for automatic closing shall also release only the shutters // on that floor // in that smoke zone //. F. Operation of duct smoke detectors shall cause a system supervisory condition and shut down the ventilation system and close the associated smoke dampers as appropriate. G. Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air pressure switch, or fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition. 3.3 TESTS A. Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. B. When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection, furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the COTR. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire alarm systems meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 14/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches. Submit a report listing all water flow switch operations and their retard time in seconds. 4. Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates. 5. Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals. 3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burn-in" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burn-in" period and where the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction. B. At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect. 3.5 INSTRUCTION A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire system for submittal to the VA. The sequence of operation will be shown for each input in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder. When reading the sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what output will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix format shall be as shown in Appendix A to NFPA 72. PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.1 LOCATION OF VOICE MESSAGES: Upon receipt of an alarm signal from the building fire alarm system, the voice communication system shall automatically transmit a 3 second tone alert and a pre-recorded fire alarm message throughout the building. - - - END - - -

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

16721- 15/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16670-LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a complete master labeled lightning protection system, complying with NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16. B. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground faults. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS, submit the following: B. Shop Drawings: 1. Isometric and plan views showing layout and connections to the required metal surfaces. 2. Show the methods of mounting the system to the adjacent construction. C. Qualifications: Submit proof that the installer of the lightning protection system has had suitable and adequate experience installing other lightning protection systems, and is capable of installing the system as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment. D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification that the lightning protection system has been properly installed and tested. 2. Certification that the lightning protection system has been inspected by a UL representative and has been approved by UL without variation. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC) LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

16670-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

780-00..................Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 96-94...................Lightning Protection Components 96A-01..................Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Attach master labels "A" or "B" to each item by its manufacturer as evidence that the materials have been manufactured in conformance with the UL Standards for master label lightning protection materials. B. In additional to conformance to UL 96, the component material requirements are as follows: 1. Conductors:

Electrical grade copper.

2. Air terminals: Solid copper, not less than 3/8 inch diameter, with sharp nickel-plated points. 3. Ground rods: Copper clad steel, not less than 1/2 inch diameter by 8 feet long. 4. Ground plates: Solid copper, not less than 1/16 inch thick. 5. Tubing: Stiff copper or brass. C. Anchors and fasteners: Bolt type which are most suitable for the specific anchor and fastener installations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the conductors as inconspicuously as practical and with the proper bends. B. Install the vertical conductors within the concealed cavity of exterior walls. Run the conductors to the exterior at elevations below the finished grade and make the ground connections to the earth outside of the building or stack perimeter. C. Make connections of dissimilar metal with bimetallic type fittings to prevent electrolytic action. D. Use the exothermic welding type connections that form solid metal joints in the main vertical and horizontal conductors, and for connections that are not exposed in the finish work. E. Protect copper conductors with stiff copper or brass tubing, which enclose the conductors from the top to the bottom of the tubing, between one foot below and seven feet above the finished grade. F. Sheath copper conductors, which pass over cast stone, cut stone, architectural concrete and masonry surfaces, with not less than a 1/16 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

16670-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

inch thickness of lead to prevent staining of the exterior finish surfaces. G. For the earth connections, install ground rods and ground plates, and the conductor connections to them and the main water pipes in the presence of the Resident Engineer. For the conductors located outside of the building or stack, install the conductors not less than two feet below the finished grade. H. For structural steel buildings, connect the steel framework of the buildings to the main water pipe near the water system entrance to the building. I. Connect exterior metal surfaces, located within three feet of the lightning protection system conductors, to the lightning protection system conductors to prevent flashovers. J. Grounding:

Test the ground resistance to earth by standard methods and

conform to the ground resistance requirements specified in Section, GROUNDING. K. Where shown, use the structural steel framework or reinforcing steel as the main conductor: 1. Weld or bond the non-electrically-continuous sections together and make them electrically continuous. 2. Verify the electrical continuity by measuring the ground resistances to earth at the ground level, at the top of the building or stack, and at intermediate points with a sensitive ohmmeter. Compare the resistance readings. 3. Connect the air terminals together with an exterior conductor connected to the structural steel framework at not more than 60 foot intervals. 4. Install ground connections to earth at not more than 60 foot intervals around the perimeter of the building. 5. Weld or braze bonding plates, not less than eight inches square, to cleaned sections of the steel and connect the conductors to the plates. 6. Do not pierce the structural steel in any manner. Connections to the structural steel shall conform to UL Publication No. 96A. L. When the lightning protection systems have been installed, have the systems inspected by a UL representative.

Obtain and install a UL

numbered master label "C" for each of the lightning protection systems at the location directed by the UL representative and the Resident Engineer. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

16670-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

- - - E N D - - -

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

16670-4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16520-SITE LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior luminaries, controls, poles and supports. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16. B. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits, fittings, and boxes for raceway systems. C. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage power and lighting wiring. D. Section 16402, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground handholes and conduits. E. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaries, lamps and controls. C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of operating and maintenance manuals to the Resident Engineer. Include technical data sheets, wiring and connection diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

SITE LIGHTING

16520-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA): AAH35.1-2006 ...........Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): LTS-4-2003 .............Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaries and Traffic Signals C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 318-2005 ...............Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C57.12-2000.............General Requirements For Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers C81.61-2005 ............Electrical Lamp Bases E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A123/A123M-2002 ........Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products A153/A153M-2001.........Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware – AASHTO No.: M232 B108-03a -2003 .........Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings D3487-2000..............Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus F. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA): AC 70/7460-IK CHG 1-2000......Obstruction Lighting and Marking AC 150/5345-43E-1995....Specification for Obstruction Lighting Equipment G. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) HB-9-2000...............Lighting Handbook RP-8-2000 (R-2005)......Roadway Lighting

SITE LIGHTING

16520-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): C78.41-2001.............Electric Lamps – Guidelines for Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps C78.42-2004 ............Electric Lamps – Guidelines for High-Pressure Sodium Lamps C78.43-2005 ............Electric Lamps – Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps C78.1381-1998...........(R 1997) Electric Lamps – 70-Watt M85 MetalHalide Lamps C82.4-2002 .............Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and LowPressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type) C136.17-2005

..........Roadway Lighting Equipment – Enclosed SideMounted Luminaries for Horizontal-Burning HighIntensity-Discharge Lamps

ICS 2-2005 .............Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts ICS 6-2001 .............Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2005 ................National Electrical Code (NEC) J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 496-2004 ...............Edison-Base Lamp holders 773-1995................Plug-in, Locking Type Photo controls, for Use with Area Lighting 773A-2006 ..............Non-industrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control 1029-1994...............High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts 1598-2004 ..............Luminaries 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Poles: Do not store poles on ground.

Store poles so they are at least

305 mm (one foot) above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and as shown on the drawings and specified.

SITE LIGHTING

16520-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.2 POLES A. General: 1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified. 2. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite hand hole openings. 3. Provide a base cover matching the pole in material and color to conceal the mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.

2.3 FOUNDATIONS FOR POLES A. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete. B. Foundations shall support the effective projected area of the specified pole, arm(s), and luminaire(s) under wind conditions previously specified in this section. C. Place concrete in spirally wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations, and construct forms for square foundations. D. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately 1/4 inch radius. E. Concrete shall have 3000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength. F. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be as shown on the drawings and meet ACI 318.

Anchor bolts shall be in a

welded cage or properly positioned by the tie wire to stirrups. G. Prior to concrete pour, install a copperclad steel ground rod, not less than 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet long, below each foundation. Drive the rod vertically under the foundation so not less than 6 feet of rod is in contact with the earth. pour.

Remainder of rod may be in the concrete

Where rock or layered rock is present, drill a hole not less

than 2 inches in diameter and 6 feet deep, backfill with tamped fine sand and drive the rod into the hole.

Bond the rod to the pole with

not less than number 6 AWG bare copper wires.

The method of bonding

shall be approved for the purpose. 2.4 LAMPS A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed. B. Lamps to be general-service, outdoor lighting types. C. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage as indicated. Lamps shall have average rated life of 16,000 hours minimum for 35 watt lamps and 24,000 hours minimum for all higher wattages. D. Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.41. E. Metal-Halide Lamps: NEMA C78.43 or NEMA C78.1381 F. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.

SITE LIGHTING

16520-4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactors. Rate contactors as indicated. Provide in NEMA enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactors shall have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor] and shall require no arcing contacts. Provide contactors with on-off selector switch. 2.6 CONTROLS A. Each Lighting System: 1. Shall be controlled by one of the following methods as shown for each system on the drawings: a. A photocell to act as the pilot device. The photocell shall be the type which fails safe to the closed position meeting UL 773 or773A 2. Mount and connect photocells as shown on the drawings. 3. Photocells shall have the following features: a. Quick-response, cadmium-sulfide type. b. A 15 to 30 second, built-in time delay to prevent response to momentary lightning flashes, car headlights or cloud movements. c. Energizes the system when the north sky light decreases to approximately 1.5 footcandles, and maintains the system energized until the north sky light increases to approximately 3 to 5 foot candles.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Poles: 1. Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 1.57 rad 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide galvanized nuts, washers, and ornamental covers for anchor bolts. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.

SITE LIGHTING

16520-5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. After the poles have been installed, shimmed and plumbed, grout the spaces between the pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink concrete grout material. Provide a plastic or copper tube, of not less than 3/8-inch inside diameter, through the grout tight to the top of the concrete base for moisture weeping. C. Foundation Excavation: Depth shall be as indicated. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 150 mm 6 inch maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away. D. Photocell Switch Aiming: Aim switch according to manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.2 GROUNDING Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaries, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable and listed for this purpose.

- - - E N D - - -

SITE LIGHTING

16520-6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16510-BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the interior lighting systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16. B. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. C. Section 16140, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used as part of the lighting systems. D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Refer to Paragraph, GUARANTY, in Section 01001, GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL), submit the following: B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, lenses, louvers, lamps, and controls. 3. When catalog data and/or shop drawings for fluorescent fixtures are submitted for approval, photometric data from an independent testing laboratory shall be included with the submittal, indicating average brightness and efficiency of the fixture, as specified in specification or as shown on the drawings. Coefficient of utilization data will not be considered a suitable substitute. C. Samples:

BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Simultaneously with the shop drawing and catalog cut submittal, deliver to the Resident Engineer a sample of each lighting fixture types: ____________, ______________, ______________ for approval. The approved samples shall be installed in the location directed by the Resident Engineer and shall be removed, repackaged and turned over to the Resident Engineer after final inspection. D. Manuals: 1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts. 2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Resident Engineer. E. Certifications: 1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer: a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. b. Include with shop drawings, certification from the manufacturers that all electronic high-frequency ballasts meet the transient protection required by IEEE C62.41, Cat. A. Include with initial shop drawing submittal. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C78.1-91................Fluorescent Lamps - Rapid-Start Types Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics C78.2-91................Fluorescent Lamps - Preheat-Start Types Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics C78.3-91................Fluorescent Lamps - Instart Start and ColdCathode Types - Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics C78.376-91..............Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps (ANSI/NEMA C78/376-96) C. Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM): Requirements for Ballast Certification.

BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): C62.41-91...............Recommended Practice on Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC) 101-00..................Life Safety Code F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) C82.1-97................Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications C82.2-02................Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4-02................Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and LowPressure Sodium Lamps C82.11-02...............High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 496-96..................Edison-Base Lampholders 542-99..................Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps 844-95..................Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 924-95..................Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 935-01..................Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts 1029-94.................High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts 1598-00.................Luminaires H. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES) A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, UL 1598 and shall be as shown on drawings and as specified. B. Sheet Metal: 1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as designed. 2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring. 3. Where lighting fixtures are detailed with minimum 20 gauge housing, minimum 22 gauge housings will be acceptable provided they have

BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

strengthening embossed rib and break formations, which give the equivalent rigidity of a 20 gauge housing. 4. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner. 5. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixture is in the installed position, and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools. C. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified. D. Lamp Sockets: 1. Fluorescent: Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type or phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 542. Contacts for recessed double contact lampholders and for slimline lampholders shall be silver plated. Lampholders for bi-pin lamps, with the exception of those for "U" type lamps, shall be of the telescoping compression type, or of the single slot entry type requiring a one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion. 2. Incandescent: Shall have porcelain enclosures and conform to the applicable requirements of UL 496. 3. High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures. E. Recessed incandescent fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings. F. Fluorescent fixtures with louvers or light transmitting panels shall have hinges, latches and safety catches to facilitate safe, convenient cleaning and relamping. Vapor tight fixtures shall have pressure clamping devices in lieu of the latches. G. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance. H. Metal Finishes: 1. The manufacturer shall apply his standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking. 2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing. 3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings. I. Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding their metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor. J. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures: 1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed, crystal glass. 2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) of average thickness. The average thickness shall be determined by adding the maximum thickness to the minimum unpenetrated thickness and dividing the sum by 2. 3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, diffusers and louvers shall be retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking. K. Lighting Fixtures in Hazardous Areas: Fixtures shall be suitable for installation in flammable atmospheres (Class and Group) as defined in NFPA 70 and shall comply with UL 844. L. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified. 2.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. Where applicable, fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall comply with the National Energy Policy Act of 1992. B. Ballasts shall comply with NEMA 82.1, 82.2 and 82.11, NFPA 70, and UL 935 unless otherwise specified. C. Lamp types F32T8 and F32T8/U shall be operated by electronic, high frequency ballasts. All other fluorescent lamp types shall be operated by the standard energy saving electromagnetic core-and-coil ballasts. For these applications, the lamps shall be operated by core-and-coil ballasts where specifically required on the drawings as "core-and-coil". D. Electronic high-frequency ballasts: 1. Ballasts shall operate the lamps at a frequency between 20 and 60 KHz from an input frequency of 60Hz. BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Ballast package: a. Size: The ballast case shall be sized to be physically interchangeable with standard core-and-coil ballasts and suitable for standard mounting in new or existing lighting fixtures. b. Case marking: Mark the ballast to indicate the required supply voltage, frequency, RMS current, current surge during starting, input watts, and power factor at the design center voltage, open circuit voltage, crest factor and efficacy. 3. Performance: a. Light output: 1) At the design voltage, the light output shall be at least equal to that obtained by a core-and-coil ballasted system meeting ANSI, NEMA and CBM standards. The comparison test shall be measured in the same fixture at 25 degrees C (plus or minus one degree) ambient room temperature. 2) Tests shall be made in fixtures designed only for the number of lamps being tested. 3) For other applications (higher ambients, etc.) the tests should be operated with equivalent lamp wall temperatures plus or minus 4 degrees C. b. Efficacy: The efficacy of the high-frequency, electronically ballasted system shall be at least 15 percent greater than the equivalent CBM core-and-coil ballasted system (see "Light output" above). c. Starting: The ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation of lamps at an ambient temperature of 10 degrees C (50 degree F) or more for an input voltage of plus or minus 10 percent about the center design voltage unless otherwise indicated. The ballast shall never be started in the instant start mode at any temperature. d. Operation: 1) The ballast shall safely and reliably operate in a room ambient temperature from 10 degrees C (50 degree F) to 40 degrees C (105 degree F). 2) The light output shall not vary by more than plus or minus 5 percent for a plus or minus 10 percent variation of the input voltage about the center design voltage. Light output shall remain constant for a plus or minus 5 percent variation of the input voltage. BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3) The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not adversely curtail the normal life of the lamp. e. Transient protection: The ballast shall comply with IEEE C62.41, Cat. A. f. Flicker: The flicker shall be less than 5 percent and without visible flicker. g. Noise: The audible noise levels should be equivalent to or better than the Class A rating of CBM certified ballasts. h. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI): The EMI and RFI limits shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations (CFR 47 Part 18). i. Rated life: The ballast shall have a rated life of 10 years or 30,000 hours (based on a 10 hour day). j. The two-lamp ballast shall safely operate two F32T8 RS, 32- watt lamps or two F32T8/U lamps. The single lamp ballast shall safely operate one F32T8 RS, 32-watt lamp or one F32T8/U lamp. k. Power factor: Not less than 95 percent. l. Reliability: 1) Labels: Ballasts must be labeled or listed by UL and CBM/ETL. 2) Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a certified test report by an independent testing laboratory showing that the electronic ballasts meet or exceed all the performance requirements in this specification. m. Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 10 percent. E. Core-and-coil ballasts (for lamps other than F32T8 and F32T8/U or where shown on drawings as "core-and-coil"): 1. Shall be rapid starting type. 2. Shall comply with NEMA 82.1 and UL 935. 3. Shall be UL Class P with automatic-resetting, internal, thermal protection. 4. Shall be CBM/ETL certified. 5. Power factor shall be not less than 95 percent. Capacitors in ballasts shall not contain PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyl) fluids or other fluids recognized as hazardous when discharged into the environment. 6. Sound ratings shall be Class A or better, except for ballast sizes which are not available with Class A ratings, as standard products

BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

from any manufacturer. Ballasts which are not available with Class A ratings shall have the quietest ratings available. 7. Where core-and-coil ballasts are specified or detailed in lieu of the normally required electronic high-frequency types, two lamp ballasts shall be energy-saving type, UL listed to operate F40T12 rapid start lamps for both standard 40 watt lamps and the reduced wattage 35/34 watts energy-saving lamps. Lamp output shall be within 5 percent of nominal rating. When operating energy-saving lamps, the input watts to the ballast shall not exceed 78 watts at 120 V.A.C. or 79 watts at 277 V.A.C. Energy-saving type ballasts should not be used in ambient temperatures below manufacturer's recommendations. F. Ballasts for lighting fixtures controlled by dimming devices shall be the electronic, high frequency type as specified herein, equipped for dimming and conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the associated dimming devices to assure satisfactory operation of the lighting system. G. All ballasts serving straight or "U" type lamps shall be mounted by four non-turning studs (or captive bolts) equipped with lock washers and nuts or locking type nuts, or by four thread cutting (TC) sheet metal screws which are firmly secured against the fixture body (or wireway) to maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noise. Exception: electronic high-frequency ballasts may be mounted at a minimum of two points, one at each end of unit. H. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified. I. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled. J. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a single-lamp ballast for operation of the center lamp. BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.3 BALLASTS FOR HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES: A. Shall comply with NEMA 82.4 and UL 1029. B. Shall have individual overcurrent protection sized in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Shall have integral thermal protection where the fixture is recessed in an interior ceiling. D. Shall be the constant wattage, high power factor type or the reactor high power factor type. Capacitors shall not contain PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyl) fluids or other fluids recognized as hazardous when discharged into the environment. E. Shall have not less than Class B sound ratings for interior fixtures, when available. Ballasts which are not available with Class B ratings shall be of the next standard rating. 2.4 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; preheatstart type shall comply with ANSI C78.2; and instant-start and coldcathode lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.3. 2. Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376. 3. The lamps shall include the F32T8, F32T8/U 32 watt energy saving type and EPACT approved F40T12 type if specifically required by contract drawings for special applications. 4. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be energy saving type, have a color temperature between 3500 and 4100°K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of not less than 75, and an initial lumen output not less than 2800. "U" tube lamps shall have the same color temperature and CRI limits as the above. a. In utility areas (Electrical, Communication and Mechanical) Service rooms and closets), maintenance closets and non-medical storage spaces, utilize energy saving light-white lamps. b. In areas with ambient temperatures below 60 degrees use the 40 watt version of the lamp above. c. Over the beds in Intensive Care, Coronary Care, Recovery, Life Support, and Observation and Treatment areas; Electromyographic, Autopsy (Necropsy), Surgery, and certain dental rooms (Examination, Oral Hygiene, Oral Surgery, Recovery, Labs, Treatment, and X-Ray) use color corrected lamps having a CRI of 90 or above and a correlated color temperature between 5000 and 6000°K. BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

d. Other areas as indicated on the drawings. B. Incandescent lamps shall be the general service, inside frosted type rated 130 volts except where otherwise shown on the drawings. C. High Intensity Discharge Lamps: 1. Mercury vapor lamps shall be ANSI type "DX". Lamps in open or louvered fixtures mounted less than 4500 mm (15 feet) above the finished floor (or grade) shall be of the safety type in which the arc will automatically extinguish if the outer glass envelope becomes broken. 2. Multi-vapor lamps shall be as defined on the detail drawings. 3. High pressure sodium lamps shall be as defined on the detail drawings. 2.5 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 101 and UL 924. B. Housing and Canopy: 1. Shall be made of cast or extruded aluminum, or rolled steel. 2. Optional steel housing shall be a minimum 20 gauge thick or equivalent strength aluminum. 3. Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resistant, matte black or ivory white primer. C. Door frame shall be cast or extruded aluminum, and hinged with latch. D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum. E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures. F. Fixtures: 1. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 2.25 mm (0.090 inch) thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous red Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass. The LED shall be rated minimum 25 years life; maximum of 3.5 watts for single face and 7 watts for double-faced fixtures that do not use diffuser panels in front of the LEDs. LED exit light fixtures that use diffuser panels shall require a maximum of 1.0 watt per fixture for single or double face fixtures. 2. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on drawings. 3. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required or as shown on drawings. Directional BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101. G. Voltages: Fixtures shall be wired for // 120-volt // 277-volt // operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified. B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly. C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where the indicated locations for the lighting fixtures conflict with the locations for equipment, change the locations for the lighting fixtures by the minimum distances necessary as approved by the Resident Engineer. D. For suspended lighting fixtures, the mounting heights shall provide the clearances between the bottoms of the fixtures and the finished floors as shown on the drawings. E. Fluorescent bed light fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls. Attachment to gypsum board only is not acceptable. F. Lighting Fixture Supports: 1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling. 2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping. 3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect. . 4. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures: a. Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structural members, or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into the ceiling system. b. Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support the fixture from the building structure at four points.

BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

5. Hardware for surface mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended ceilings: a. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to a grid ceiling system at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. The bolts shall be not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) secured to channel members attached to and spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members. Non-turning studs may be attached to the ceiling structural grid members or spanning channels by special clips designed for the purpose, provided they lock into place and require simple tools for removal. b. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to a plaster ceiling at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. Pre-positioned 6 mm (1/4 inch) studs or threaded plaster inserts secured to ceiling structural members shall be used to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In lieu of the above, 6 mm (1/4 inch) toggle bolts may be used on new or existing ceiling provided the plaster and lath can safely support the fixtures without sagging or cracking G. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures installed and all existing lighting fixtures reinstalled under this project. H. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed. I. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING. J. At completion of project, relamp all fixtures which have failed/burnedout lamps. Clean all fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt during construction. - - - E N D - - -

BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR

16510-12

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

RF3 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

SF1/SF2 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

SF3/SF3a FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

SF4 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

SF5 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

TR1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

TR1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

TT1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

TT1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

TT1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

TT1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

WC1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

WF1a thru WF1b FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

WF2a thru WF2h FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

WF3 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

WF4 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

WF4 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OC1

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OC1

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OC2

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

OC3/OC3a FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OM1

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OM2

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OM2

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OM2

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

OM2

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY Lighting Fixture Schedule 29 APRIL 2009 Type

Mounting

Lamps

AR1

Recessed Ceiling

1 x 39CDMT6/830 G12 Base

CF1

Surface Wall

2 x F14T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN Manufacturer and Series

Notes

Gotham Lighting #DTH-T6-39MHC-4BC-T20-*-TRW

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Architect to verify fixture flange finish. Fixture to be provided with full microprism lens trim.

Schmitz # 28950.25

Voltage per Electrical Engineer. Finish per Architect Verify mounting height and location with elevation drawings

NOT USED

CF2

JL1

Surface Bench

1w LED included Warm white

ProLume #XLA-26'F-2-WW-B

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Remote driver to be located underneath bench or in millwork bookcase Fixtures mount underneath bench and will need to be segmented for radius curve.

JL1a

Surface Cove

1w LED included Warm white

ProLume #XLA-24.5'F-2-WW-B

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Remote driver to be located underneath bench or in millwork bookcase Fixtures mount behind letters in a cove on the lower level.

JL2

Surface Stair

1w LED included Blue

ProLume #XLA-4.5'F-2-B-L

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Remote driver to be located in an accessible back of house location Fixtures mount behind perforated panels of stair risers.

JL2a

Surface Stair

1w LED included Warm White

ProLume #XLA-4.5'F-2-WW-B

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Remote driver to be located in an accessible back of house location Fixtures mount behind perforated panels of stair risers.

NF1

Recessed Wall

1 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

a.Light # D5-3-S-volt-A-XP-A(Black)-*MOD*

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture mounts in millwork panel to uplight behind bench

MOD: Fixture to be mounted in half wall as lensed uplight

PC2a

Pendant Ceiling

6 x FT36W/2G11/830 2G11 Base

GLighting # G-10063 Qvolts F YY G 3 072 MOD: Modify fixture so that there are no visible connectors or hardware. MOD: Modify fixture suspension for 6'-0" overall height

PC2b

Pendant Ceiling

6 x FT36W/2G11/830 2G11 Base

GLighting # G-10063 Qvolts F YY G 3 036 MOD: Modify fixture so that there are no visible connectors or hardware. MOD: Modify fixture suspension for 3'-0" overall height

PC3

Pendant Ceiling

2 x FT18W/2G11/830 2G11 Base

Schmitz # 26982.06/2831 MOD MOD: Non-Standard Cable and Power Cord Lengths

PC4

Pendant Ceiling

8x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Pendant Ceiling

2 x CFQ26W/G24q/830 G24q-3 Base

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval. Provide fixture with no visible hardware or connectors. Architect to verify suspension length. Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Architect to verify finish. Overall fixture heights vary from 14' to 51'. Provide a shop drawing for review

Crenshaw # Custom SCUS pendant - oil rubbed bronze

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture. Architect to verify suspension length. Provide oiled rubbed bronze finish on metal

Visa #CP4516-finish-OAH

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval. Architect to verify overall height and finish Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.

4x CFTR18W/GX24q/830 GX24q-2 Base

PC5

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval. Provide fixture with no visible hardware or connectors. Architect to verify suspension length. Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.

MOD: Overall height is 4'-0"

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY Lighting Fixture Schedule 29 APRIL 2009

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

Type

Mounting

Lamps

Manufacturer and Series

Notes

PC6

Pendant Ceiling

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Brass Light Gallery #CN-411-A8-03M-D303-Brnz-36"-MOD

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamping and integral electronic ballast. Architect to verify finish and overall height

PC7

Pendant Ceiling

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Brass Light Gallery #CN413-A6-03M-C314-Brnz-30"-Mod

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamp and integral ballast Architect to verify finish and stem length.

PF1

Pendant Ceiling

4 x F24T5HO/830 Mini Bipin Base

Artemide # MOUETTE SYMMETRICAL

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Fixture comes with 72" of cable - field shorten to approximately 30" overall height - verify with Architect in field

PF3

Pendant Ceiling

PF5

Pendant

10 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

RC1

Recessed Ceiling

RC2

NOT USED

Focal Point # FTWS M12T5 1C volts D J12 WH 20'

Voltage per Electrical Enginner Architect to verify finish Bottom of fixture to hang flush with dropped ceiling in public meeting room Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Kurt Versen # H8632-SZ-WT-FLT6MP-volt

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish. Fixture to be provided with full microprism lens trim.

Recessed Ceiling

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Kurt Versen # WH432-WHP-LP-volt

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish. Fixture to be provide with large prism lens.

RC3

Recessed Ceiling

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Kurt Versen # H8653-SZ-WT-volt

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish.

RF1

Recessed Ceiling

2 x F24T5HO/830 Mini Bipin Base

Ledalite # 9722-D1-ST-H224-S-1-volt-E

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Ceiling type and mounting per Architect.

RF2

Recessed Ceiling

10 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

a.Light # D5-R20-2-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and sanded to provide trimless finish. Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.

RF2a

Recessed Ceiling

2 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

a.Light # D5-R4-D-volt-A-G-finish

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and sanded to provide trimless finish. Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.

RF2b

Recessed Ceiling

4 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

a.Light # D5-R8-2-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and sanded to provide trimless finish. Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.

RF3

Recessed Ceiling

3 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

a.Light # D5-R11-S-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON-*MOD*

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and sanded to provide trimless finish. Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.

MOD: Provide fixture with one lamp staggered lamping.

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY Lighting Fixture Schedule 29 APRIL 2009

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

Type

Mounting

Lamps

Manufacturer and Series

Notes

SF1

Surface Cove

1 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Birchwood # WP-T5-DS-volt-STD-128-HRW-0

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Fixture to be installed in architectural detail.

SF2

Surface Cove

1 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Birchwood # WP-T5-DS-volt-STD-121-HRW-0

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Fixture to be installed in architectural detail.

SF3

Surface Ceiling

1 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Birchwood # WP-T5-S-AC-volt-STD-121-HRW-*MOD* MOD: Provide fixture with UV filtering lens with a minumum filtering of 99.9%.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Fixture to be installed in architectural detail. Provide UV filter sleeve

SF3a

Surface Ceiling

1 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Birchwood # WP-T5-S-AC-volt-STD-121-HRW-0

Voltage per Electrical Engineer

SF4

Surface Millwork

2 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Birchwood # WP-T5-US-ACP-volt-EB-228-HRW

Voltage per Electrical Engineer

SF5

Surface Millwork

1 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Sistemalux # ST 128 ST 109-opal lens

Fixture to be surface mounted in cabinet for internal illumination. Provide opal lens and have part of lens masked to diminish glare Provide UV filter sleeve

Provide fixture with UV filtering lens with a minumum filtering of 99.9%.

TR1

Track Mounted

1 x 50MR16/NFL25

LSI # 260-00-WL-finish/ AAA962/AAA990

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Provide UV and beam symmetric spead lens Finish per Architect

LSI # One Ckt Recessed Flangeless Track

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Recessed track mounted into molding detail to be confirmed by Architect Finish per Architect

Brass Light Gallery # CN-201-A4-(2) B100-Bronze-MOD

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamps and integral ballast Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards. Provide etched fantail furn shades

Ushio Ultraline Titan GU 5.3 Base

TT1

Recessed Ceiling

n/a

WC1

Surface Wall

2 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

MOD: Modify fixture for 32W CFL lamping

WF1a

Surface Bookcase

5 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-12'-12"-00-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 12'-0" overall length

WF2a

Surface Wall

3 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-12'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 12'-0" overall length

WF2b

Surface Wall

1 x F14T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-30"-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 2'-6" overall length

WF2c

Surface Wall

4 x F28T5/830 1 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-19'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE-0-0 19'-0" overall length

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards. Mount ballast on top of bookcases within 5' of fixture

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards. Fixture mounts at entry vestibule.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards. Fixture mounts at entry vestibule.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY Lighting Fixture Schedule 29 APRIL 2009 Type

Mounting

Lamps

WF2d

Surface Wall

1 x F14T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN Manufacturer and Series

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-2'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE-0-0 2'-0" overall length

WF2e

Surface Wall

1 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-3'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE3-0-0 3'-0" overall length

WF2f

Surface Wall

6 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-18'-6"-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE3-0-0 18'-6" overall length

WF2g

Surface Wall

6 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-17'-6"-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE3-0-0 17'-6" overall length

WF2h

Surface Wall

1 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Vode # WG-01-LA-WA-4'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 4'-0" overall length

WF3

Surface Wall

2 x F21T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

WF4

Surface Wall

2 x F28T5/830 Mini Bipin Base

Notes

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

Winona #5622-36-volt-WLG-Bronze

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect

Ledalite #7328-F02-I-G-4-1-volt-E-W

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8" to comply with ADA standards.

4'-0" overall length

1 x CFTR32W/GX124q/830 Gardco GX24q-3 Base

# 111-MT-32TRF-volt-finish

OC1

Surface Wall

OC2

Recessed Wall

1 x CFTR18W/GX24q/830 GX24q-2 Base

BEGA # 2225P

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect

OC3

Surface Wall

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Existing Decorative Sconce to be refurbished

Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification. Refurbish exterior metal and repaint Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution.

OC3a

Surface Wall

1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 GX24q-3 Base

Crenshaw - Reproduction of Existing Decorative Sconce

Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification. Refurbish exterior metal and repaint Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution.

OM1

Surface Wall

1 x CMH39/T6/830 G12 Base

Refurbish Decorative pier mount fixture

Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification. Refurbish exterior metal and repaint Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution. Fixture is to be mounted to existing pier. Surface conduit required. Conduit to be painted to match brick wall.

OM2

Pole

1 x 150HPS Med. Base

AAL # CLL-H2-150HPS-TRA-1L-WRZ-LDL-CHM

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Pole finish to match fixture finish.

POLE: SSA4-STB-10'-D4-finish

Voltage per Electrical Engineer Finish per Architect Electrical Engineer to determine if energency is required for fixture.

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY Lighting Fixture Schedule 29 APRIL 2009 Type

Mounting

Lamps

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN Manufacturer and Series

General Notes: 1. Electrical engineer shall verify voltages. 2. All fixture substitutions shall have a working sample provided for review within 10 working days upon request from the design team. 3. Judgment of fixture quality and optics, as equal, shall be determined by the Architect or Lighting Designer. 4. All transpositions of the specifications in this schedule must be complete and accurate in order to be considered valid. 5. Low-temperature ballast must be capable of starting at -18 degrees Celsius.

Notes

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

AR1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

CF1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

JL1 thru JL2a FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

JL1 thru JL2a FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

NF1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PC2a/b FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PC2a/b FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

PC3

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PC4 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PC5 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PC6 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PC7 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PF1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PF5 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

PF5 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

RC1

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

RC2

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

RC3

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

RF1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

RF1 FIXTURE TYPE:

mcla ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN

GEORGETOWN PROJECT:

RF2 thru RF2b FIXTURE TYPE:

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16464-SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage indoor switchgear. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 13081, SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Requirement for Seismic Restraint for Nonstructural Components. B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16. C. Section 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY: Coordination study of overcurrent protection devices. D. Section 16111, CONDUITS: Conduct and outlet boxes. E. Section 16112, BUSWAYS: Feeder Busways and Fittings. F. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and Wiring. G. Section 16312, UNIT SUBSTATION, SECONDARY: Unit secondary substation. H. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible fault currents. 1.3 FACTORY INSPECTION: A. The Government shall have an option to witness factory tests. All expenses of the Government Representative's trip to witness the testing will be paid by the Government. B. Notify the VA Central Office through the Resident Engineer not less than 30 days prior to the scheduled factory tests. C. Witness tests shall be a repeat of production tests as indicated in IEEE C37.20 and ANSI C37.51. Tests shall include, but not be limited to, power frequency dielectric, mechanical, grounding of instrument transformer case, electrical operation and control wiring, calibration, control and wiring, dielectric withstand, and no-load operation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): A. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances, terminations, weight, temperature rise, wiring and connection diagrams, plan, front, side, and rear elevations, sectional views, bus work, circuit breaker frame sizes, trip and short-circuit rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous and ground fault settings, coordinated breaker and fuse curves, accessories, and device nameplate data. 3. Show the size, ampere-rating, number of bars per phase and neutral in each bus run (horizontal and vertical), bus spacing, equipment ground bus, and bus material. B. Manuals: 1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, maintenance, and operation. b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between the items of equipment. c. Provide a clear and concise description of operation, which gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment. d. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop drawings. 2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals to the Resident Engineer. a. The manuals shall be updated to include any information necessitated by shop drawing approval. b. Complete "As Installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included which show all items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring. c. Show all terminal identification. d. Include information for testing, repair, trouble shooting, assembly, disassembly, and recommended maintenance intervals. e. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes. f. Furnish manuals in loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard binder. C. Certifications: SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: a. Certification by the Contractor that the assemblies have been properly installed, adjusted and tested, including circuit breaker settings. b. Certified copies of all of the factory design and production tests, field test data sheets and reports for the assemblies. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata), form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B. Institute of Engineering and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): C37.13-95...............Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures C57.13-93...............Instrument Transformers C62.41-95...............Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): SG-3-90.................Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. SG-5-90.................Power Switchgear Assemblies. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC). E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 977-94..................Safety Fused Power Circuit Devices 1053-99.................Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Low voltage switchgear shall be in accordance with IEEE, NEMA, NFPA and UL. B. Provide complete switchgear including, but not limited to housing, buses, draw out air circuit breakers, instruments and related transformers, relays fuses and wiring. C. Switchgear dimensions shall not exceed the space provided as shown on the drawings. D. Manufacturer’s nameplate shall include complete ratings of switchgear in addition to date of manufacture.

SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.2 HOUSING: A. Construction: Provide housing of structural or formed steel frame braced to maintain alignment and resist damage during shipment, erection, and by stresses resulting from short circuits. Enclose the frame on all sides, top, and bottom (except cable compartment) with sheet steel covers, doors and panels and equip with interior barriers. Provide rear access panels of the hinged type with provisions for padlocking. Provide ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature rise of current carrying parts. Provide breakers with hinged covers and cutouts for control mechanism. Protect all openings against entrance of falling dirt, water or foreign matter. Isolate each breaker in its own compartment. Metering transformers and instruments shall be similarly isolated. B. Painting: Enclosure shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphate treated and primed by a phosphate or similar treatment, and followed immediately with a rust-inhibiting paint. Final finish coat shall be the manufacturers standard gray. Supply a quart of finish paint for touch-up purposes. C. Breaker Compartments: The breaker compartments shall include stationary primary contacts, stationary secondary contacts as required, barriers, and rails for the drawout elements. D. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following: 1. Utility metering compartment that complies with utility company requirements. 2. Bus transition sections. 3. Incoming-line pull sections. 4. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments. 5. Pull box on top of switchgear for extra room for pulling cable, with removable top, front, and side covers and ventilation provisions adequate to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchgear. a. Set pull box back from front to clear circuit-breaker lifting mechanism. b. Bottom: Insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable drops into switchgear. c. Cable Supports: Arranged to ease cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation. SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E. Cable Compartment: Provide adequate space for feeder cables and connections including spare breakers or spaces. 2.3 BUSES: A. General: Arrange buses for 3 phase, 4 wire distribution. The phase buses (through bus), neutral bus, and ground bus shall be full capacity and shall extend the entire length of the switchgear. Make provisions for future extensions by means of bolt holes or other approved method. Brace bus to withstand short circuit current available at the particular location. No magnetic material shall be used between buses to form a magnetic loop. B. Material and Size: Buses and connections shall be hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. Bus size and arrangement shall be such that the temperature rise of the buses shall not exceed IEEE standards.

Bus

connections to circuit breakers shall be copper. Size feeder busing to the line side of breakers based on IEEE. Bus laminations shall have a minimum of 1/4 inch spacing. C. Bus Connections: Provide bolted or welded connections. All contact surfaces are of copper. A minimum of two plated bolts per splice or connection is required for nonwelded bus except where physical bus size permits only one bolt; the joint shall include an approved means, other than friction, to prevent turning, twisting, or bending. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer. D. Neutral Bus: Provide bare neutral bus mounted on insulated bus supports. Provide neutral disconnect links to permit isolation of the neutral bus from the common ground bus and service entrance conductors. E. Ground Bus: Provide an uninsulated 1/4 inch by 2 inch copper equipment ground bus bar the length of the switchgear and secure to each unit frame. F. Main Bonding Jumper: An uninsulated 1/4 inch by 2 inch copper bus shall interconnect the neutral and ground buses, when the secondary service equipment is incorporated within the switchgear to establish the system common ground point. 2.4 INTERNALLY INTEGRATED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES: A. Integral Surge Suppressor: 1. SPD (Surge Protective Devices) shall be Component Recognized and listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition to include Section 37.3 highest fault category testing on devices intended for service entrance use. SPD shall also be UL 1283 listed. 2. SPD shall be UL 67 listed, installed by and shipped from the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer’s factory. SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-N, L-G, N-G, in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA systems. 4. SPD shall be modular in design. Each mode shall be fused with a 200kAIC UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout device. 5. SPD shall be integrally mounted to the bus bars of the switchboard. 6. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shall be provided as well. 7. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be: 1) Service Entrance Switchboard 250 kA. 2) Distribution Panelboards 160 kA. 3) Branch Panelboards 160 kA. 4) Service Entrance MCC 240 kA specified. 5) Distribution Class MCC 160 kA. b. UL 1449 Second Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression Voltage Ratings (SVR’s) for Service Entrance and Distribution Location equipment shall not exceed the following: c. Voltage Let-Thru values for Solidly Grounded Systems:

VOLTAGE

L-N

L-G

N-G

480Y/277

800V

800V

800V

8. SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of –50Db at 100 kHz with an insertion ration of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology. 9. SPD shall have the following diagnostic features: transient counter, status lights on each phase, and one set of 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary dry contacts for alarming. 10. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if transients destroy them during the warranty period. Warranty shall be the responsibility of the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be supported by their respective field service division.

SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.5 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS: A. Nameplates: Provide laminated black phenolic resin with core with 1/4 inch engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker to indicate the feeder, panelboards and equipment served. Plates shall be mounted with plated screws on front of breaker or control station. B. Mimic Bus: Provide an approved mimic bus on front of each switchgear assembly. Color shall be blue (480Y/277 Volt) or black (208/120 Volt), either factory painted, plastic or metal strips. Plastic tape shall not be used. Use symbols similar to a one line diagram. (Refer to drawings). Plastic or metal strips shall be mounted with plated screws. 2.6 METERS AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13. 1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y. 2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments. B. Power Circuit Monitoring and Control System: The Power Circuit Monitor shall be a multi-functional, digital, data acquisition and control device.

The Power Circuit Monitor shall be metered over 50 values and

extensive Min/Max data can be viewed on the LED display. Each Circuit Monitor shall offer true RMS metering and communications standard. Provide 0.2% accuracy true RMS metering and other powerful features such as automatic relay control, waveform capture, on-board event and data logging, and programmable logic for special applications like custom data logging and control function. On-board memory can be expanded to add 512 K or 1024K. Provide input/output modules, status inputs, a pulse output, relay outputs and analog inputs and outputs. 1. Power Circuit Monitor shall be: a. Certified ANSI C12.16 revenue accuracy b. True RMS Metering through the 31st harmonic c. High accuracy: 0.2% on current and voltage d. Power quality readings displayed: THD and K-Factor e. Harmonic Analysis Data through 63rd harmonic f. Automatic Alarm/Relay control g. On-board event and data logging h. Waveform capture i. UL listed, CSA Approved, CE Marketing, NOM Approved j. MV-90 compatible C. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with test blocks and plugs. SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1: 1. Install in cable termination compartments and connect in each phase of circuit. 2. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage. 2.7 SPACE FOR FUTURE: Where "provision for”, “future”, or “space” is noted on drawings, equip the compartment with rails, mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and any appurtenances necessary for ready insertion of a future breaker. A blank door shall close off the front of the compartment. Design buses for the breaker ampere rating as indicated on the drawings. 2.8 BREAKER REMOVAL EQUIPMENT: Furnish a portable elevating carriage or switchgear mounted device for installation and removal of circuit breakers. 2.9 CONTROL WIRING: Switchgear control wiring shall be 600 volt Class B stranded SIS. Install all control wiring complete at the factory, adequately bundled and protected. All conductors size No. 8 and smaller, all conductors across hinges, and all conductors for interconnection between shipping units shall be Class C stranded. Size conductors in accordance with the NEC. Provide separate control circuit fuses in each breaker compartment and locate for ease of access and maintenance. 2.10 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. General: Circuit breakers shall be dead front, drawout, stored energy type with solid state trip devices. Arcing contacts shall be renewable. Circuit Breakers shall be UL listed (Category PAQX). B. Rating: Circuit breakers shall be 3 pole, 600 volts AC and below, 60 cycle with indicated frame size, trip rating and system voltage. Interrupting rating shall be without instantaneous trip. Breakers shall have 30 cycle short time current ratings. C. Drawout Mounting: Provide a racking mechanism to position and hold the breaker in the connected, test, or disconnected position. Provide an interlock to prevent movement of the breaker into or out of the connected position unless the breaker is tripped open. D. Trip Devices: Breakers shall be electrically and mechanically trip free and shall have trip devices in each pole. Unless otherwise indicated, each breaker shall have overcurrent, short-circuit and integral ground fault trip devices. Trip devices shall be of the solid state type with SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

adjustable pick-up settings, with both long time and short time elements, and integral trip unit testing provisions. Devices shall have time-delay band adjustment of minimum, intermediate, and maximum setting. Long-time delay element shall have inverse time characteristics. Main circuit breakers shall have short-time trips, in lieu of instantaneous trips. Final settings, of pick-up and time bands shall be as recommended by the manufacturer as reflected by the Electric System Protective Device Study as shown on the drawings. E. Position Indicator: Provide a mechanical indicator visible from the front of the unit to indicate whether the breaker is open or closed. F. Trip Button: Equip each breaker with a mechanical trip button accessible from the front of the door, which shall permit tripping of the breaker. G. Padlocking: Provisions shall be included for padlocking the breaker in the open position. H. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, breakers 1600 ampere frame size and less shall be manually operated. Breakers larger than 1600 ampere frame size shall be electrically operated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the switchgear in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Anchor switchgear to the floor with plated 1/2 inch minimum anchor bolts as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor the switchgear on two 4 inch minimum channel iron sills with plated 1/2 inch bolts. Furnish sills to suit the switchgear. Coordinate installation of sills with concrete pour of floor. Sills shall be level and grouted flush with floor. 3.2 INSTRUCTION: Furnish the services of a competent instructor for one 4 hour period for instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the switchgear on the date requested by the Resident Engineer. 3.3 SPARE FUSES: Furnish two spare sets of current-limiting fuses of each size and rating for fused circuit breakers. Each set shall consist of three currentlimiting fuses and three trigger fuses. A steel compartmented wall mounted box or cabinet for fuse storage shall be provided and located in the switchgear room where directed. Mark the cabinet with 1/4 inch high letters "SPARE FUSES". - - - E N D - - -

SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below)

16464-9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PDF TO BE MADE.DOC SECTION 16460-TRANSFORMERS (GENERAL PURPOSE)

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the dry type general-purpose transformers. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 13081, SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Requirements for seismic restraint of nonstructural components. B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16. C. Section 16111, CONDUITS: Conduits and outlet boxes. D. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. E. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL), submit the following Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, impedance, dimensions, weight, mounting details decibel rating, terminations, temperature rise, no load and full load losses, and connection diagrams. 3. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s name and catalog number. C. Manuals: 1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets and wiring diagrams. 2. Two weeks prior to final inspection submit four copies of updated maintenance and operating manuals to the Resident Engineer. D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification by the manufacturer that the transformers conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. 2. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS TRANSFORMERS (GENERAL PURPOSE)

16460-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (FPA): 70-ional Electrical Code (NEC) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): ST 20-19921997 ........................ Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 1.Unless otherwise specified, dry type transformers shall be in accordance with NEMA, NEC and as shown on the drawings. Transformers shall be UL listed or labeled. 2. Rating and winding connections shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. Transformers shall have copper windings. 3.

Ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous-duty without the use of cooling fans.

4.

Insulation systems: a. Transformers 30 KVA and larger: UL rated 220 degree C system having an average maximum rise by resistance of 150 degree C in a maximum ambient of 40 degree C. b. Transformers below 30 KVA: Same as for 30 KVA and larger or UL rated 185 degree C system having an average maximum rise by resistance of 115 degree C in a maximum ambient of 40 degree C.

5.

Core and coil assemblies: a. Rigidly braced to withstand the stresses caused by short circuit currents and rough handling during shipment. b. Cores shall be grain oriented, non-aging, and silicon steel. c. Coils shall be continuous windings without splices except for taps. d. Coil loss and core loss shall be minimum for efficient operation. e. Primary and secondary tap connections shall be brazed or pressure type. f.

Coil windings shall have end fillers or tie downs for maximum strength.

6. Certified sound levels determined in accordance with NEMA, all not exceed the following:

Transformer Rating

Sound Level Rating

0

-

9 KVA

40 dB

10

-

50 KVA

45 dB

51

-

150 KVA

50 dB

TRANSFORMERS (GENERAL PURPOSE)

16460-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

.

151 - 300 KVA

55 dB

301 - 500 KVA

60 dB

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Nominal impedance shall be as shown on the drawings. If not shown on drawings, nominal impedance shall be as permitted by NEMA.

7. Single phase transformers rated 15 KVA through 25 KVA shall have two, 5 percent full capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage. All transformers rated 30 KVA and larger shall have two, 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above, and four, 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage. 8.

Core assemblies shall be grounded to their enclosures by adequate flexible ground straps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of transformers, as shown on drawings, shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. Install the transformers with adequate clearance at a minimum of 4 inches from wall and adjacent equipment for air circulation to remove the heat produced by transformers. D. Use flexible metal conduit to contain the conductors from the transformer to the raceway systems. - - - E N D - - -

TRANSFORMERS (GENERAL PURPOSE)

16460-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16450-GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of electrical and telecommunication installations for personnel safety, equipment operations and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, lightning protection system and telecommunications system grounding electrodes. C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16. B. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low Voltage power and lighting wiring. C. Section 16670, LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM: Requirements for a lightning protection system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors. C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance. D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested. GROUNDING 16450 - 1 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B1-2001 ...................................... Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire B8-2004 ...................................... Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 81-1983 ...................................... IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) 99-2005 ...................................... Health Care Facilities D. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA) J-STO-607-A-2002 ..................... Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 44-2005 ..................................... Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables 83-2003 ..................................... Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 467-2004 ................................... Grounding and Bonding Equipment 486A-486B-2003 ....................... Wire Connectors PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm² (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC. B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 10 AWG and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire. C. Electrical System Grounding: Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater. 2.2 GROUND RODS A. Copper clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet long, conforming to UL 467. B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.

GROUNDING 16450 - 2 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s). 2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors. B. Above Grade: 1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers. 2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts. 3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners. A. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection. 2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinetenclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 3/8 inch x ¾ inch. 2.6 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where racktype ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks. 2.7 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 6 AWG insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B. System Grounding: 1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers. 2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral. 3. Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded. C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded. GROUNDING 16450 - 3 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld. 3.3 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS A. Switchgear: Provide a bare grounding electrode conductor from the switchgear ground bus to the grounding electrode system. B. Lightning Arresters: Connect lightning arresters to the equipment ground bus or ground rods as applicable.

C. Metallic Conduit: Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to an electrical equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings. Connect bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus. 3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used. 3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

3.6 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Bond the lightning protection system to the electrical grounding electrode system. 3.7 ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING Building Earth Ground Busbars: Provide ground busbar hardware at each electrical room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring. 3.8 WIREWAY GROUNDING A. Ground and Bond Metallic Wireway Systems as follows: 1. Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout the wireway system by connecting a 6 AWG bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions. 2. Install insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers between the wireway system bonded as required in paragraph 1 above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 16 meters (50 feet).

GROUNDING 16450 - 4 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Use insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and cross all section junctions. 4. Use insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 meters. 3.9 GROUND RESISTANCE A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met. B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-ofpotential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided. C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements. D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection. 3.10 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth. B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors. C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance. ---END---

GROUNDING 16450 - 5 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16430-METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, complete installation, and connection of the electric meters for special loads. 1.2 RELATED WORK Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 16. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting details and clearances required for servicing. C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Complete maintenance, operating and testing manuals including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement parts: D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification by the manufacturer that the meter conforms to the requirements of the drawings and specifications, and the meter has been properly calibrated. 2. Certification by the contractor that the meter has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C12.1-01 .................................... Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering C12.10-04 .................................. American National Standard for Watt-hour Meters C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): METERING 16430 - 1 of 2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C37-90.1-02 ............................... Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protection Relays and Relay Systems D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 414-04 ........................................ Standard for Safety Meter Sockets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMETERING EQUIPMENT FOR SPECIAL LOADS A. The equipment shall meter all of the single phase and three phase electrical service used by the equipment shown on the drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings. B. Install circuits and make connections as required for the metering equipment. ---END---

METERING 16430 - 2 of 2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16170-DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of low voltage disconnect switches. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS. C. Cables and wiring: Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW). D. Motor rated toggle switches: Section 16155, MOTOR STARTER. E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground faults: Section 16450, GROUNDING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include sufficient information, clearly presented to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, enclosure types, fuse type and class. 3. Show the specific switch and fuse proposed for each specific piece of equipment or circuit. C. Manuals: 1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals for disconnect switches, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. Deliver four copies to the Resident Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection. 2. Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate maintenance and operation. 3. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring and any interlocking. D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16170 - 1 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): KS l-01 ....................................... Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum) C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 98-98 .......................................... Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches 198C-89 ..................................... High-Interrupting-Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Types 198E-94 ...................................... Class R Fuses 977-99 ........................................ Fused Power-Circuit Devices PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS A. Shall be quick-make, quick-break type in accordance with UL 98, NEMA KS 1 and NEC. B. Shall have a minimum duty rating, NEMA classification General Duty (GD) for 240 volts and NEMA classification Heavy Duty (HD) for 277/480 volts. C. Shall be horsepower rated. D. Shall have the following features: 1. Switch mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type. 2. Copper blades, visible in the OFF position. 3. An arc chute for each pole. 4. External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF position and shall have lock-open padlocking provisions. 5. Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when the switch is in the OFF position, defeatable by a special tool to permit inspection. 6. Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses specified. 7. Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which includes a neutral conductor. 8. Ground Lugs: One for each ground conductor. 9.

Enclosures: a. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the switches. b. Where the types of switch enclosures are not shown, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the switches are being installed. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, all outdoor switches shall be NEMA 3R. c.

Shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel paint over pretreated steel (for the type of enclosure required).

DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16170 - 2 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.2 LOW VOLTAGE UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, but no fuses. 2.3 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED OVER 600 AMPERES TO 1200 AMPERES Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, except for the minimum duty rating which shall be NEMA classification Heavy Duty (HD). These switches shall also be horsepower rated. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Install nameplate identification signs on each disconnect switch to identify the equipment controlled. B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core, with engraved lettering, a minimum of 1/4-inch high. Secure nameplates with screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings. B. Fusible disconnect switches shall be furnished complete with fuses. 3.2 SPARE PARTS Two weeks prior to the final inspection, furnish one complete set of spare fuses for each fusible disconnect switch installed on the project. Deliver the spare fuses to the Resident Engineer. ---END---

DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16170 - 3 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16160-PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of panelboards. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900, PAINTING: Identification and painting of panelboards. B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of Division 16. C.

Section 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY: Requirements for the over current protective devices to be installed to ensure proper equipment and personnel protection.

D. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlet boxes. E. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. F. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, wiring diagrams accessories and weights of equipment. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s name and catalog number. C. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications has been properly installed, and that the loads are balanced. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): PB-1-2006 .................................. Panelboards PANELBOARDS 16160 - 1 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

AB-1-2002 .................................. Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2005 ..................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) 70E-2004 .................................... Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the Workplace C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 50-2003 ...................................... Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 67-2003 ...................................... Panel boards 489-2006 .................................... Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, and as shown on the drawings. B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboards shall be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be of the same manufacturer. C. All panelboards shall be hinged “door in door” type with: 1. Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access to circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized ports. 2. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts, screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are not acceptable. 3. Push inner and outer doors shall open left to right. D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers. Include one-piece removable, inner dead front cover independent of the panelboard cover. E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed, and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings. F. Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB-1, NEMA AB-1 and UL 67 and have the following features: 1. Nonreduced size copper or aluminum bus bars, complete with current ratings as shown on the panel schedules connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported on molded insulators. 2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or “phase sequence” type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard busing shall be such that when any two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be such that when any three PANELBOARDS 16160 - 2 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases, two-or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. Current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as shown. 3. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped or machined metal alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected thereto. 4. Neutral bus shall be 100% rated, mounted on insulated supports. 5. Grounding bus bar equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of grounding wires. 6. Buses braced for the available short circuit current, but not less than 22,000 amperes symmetrical for 120/208 volt panelboards, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical for 277/480-volt panelboards. 7. Branch circuit panels shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers. 8. Protective devices shall be designed so that they can be easily replaced. 9. Where designated on panel schedule "spaces", include all necessary bussing, device support and connections. Provide blank cover for each space. 2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS A. Cabinets: 1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. 2. Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating openings. 3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with end and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Breakers shall be UL 489 listed and labeled, in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified. B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar or branch circuit bar. 1. Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating as indicated but not less than: a. 120/208 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetrical. b. 277/480 Volt Panelboard: 14,000 amperes symmetrical. 2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100-ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable from 3X to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher. Breaker trip setting shall be set in the field based on the approved protective device study as specified in Section 16051. Factory setting shall be HI, unless otherwise noted. C. Breaker features shall be as follows: 1. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material. PANELBOARDS 16160 - 3 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Silver alloy contacts. 3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole. 4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms. 5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator. 6. Electrically and mechanically trip free. 7. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions. a. Line connections shall be bolted. b. Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current available at the line terminals as indicated on the drawings, as shown on the electrical system protective device study as required in Section 16051. 8. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the breaker to open. 9. Shunt trips shall be provided where indicated PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions, the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified. B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected. Coordinate the sizes of cabinets with designated closet space. C. Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard after being submitted to and approved by the Resident Engineer. Schedules, after approval, shall be typed on the panel directory cards and installed in the appropriate panelboards, incorporating all applicable contract changes pertaining to that schedule. Include the room numbers and items served on the cards. D. Mount the panelboard fully aligned and such that the maximum height of the top circuit breaker above finished floor shall not exceed 78 inches. For panelboards that are too high, mount panelboard so that the bottom of the cabinets will not be less than 6 inches above the finished floor. E. Directory-card information shall be typewritten to indicate outlets, lights, devices, and equipment controlled and final room numbers served by each circuit and shall be mounted in holders behind protective covering.

---END---

PANELBOARDS 16160 - 4 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16150-MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of motors. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements that are common to more than one Section of Division 16. B. Section 16155, MOTOR STARTERS: Starters, control and protection for motors. C. Section 16480, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Multiple motor control assemblies, which include motor starters. D. Other sections specifying motor driven equipment in Divisions 14 and 15. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL), submit the following: B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, horsepower, RPM, enclosure, starting characteristics, torque characteristics, code letter, full load and locked rotor current, service factor, and lubrication method. C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets and application data. D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, unless otherwise noted, submit four copies of the following certification to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification that the motors have been properly applied, installed, adjusted, lubricated, and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1-98 ..................................... Motors and Generators

16150 - 1 of 4 MOTORS

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MG 2-01 ..................................... Safety Standard and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS: A. For alternating current, fractional and integral horsepower motors, NEMA Publications MG 1 and MG 2 shall apply. B. Voltage ratings shall be as follows: 1. Single phase: a. Motors connected to 120-volt systems: 115 volts. b. Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts. c.

Motors connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460 volts, dual connection.

2. Three phase: a. Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts. b. Motors, less than 74.6 kW (100 HP), connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460 volts, dual connection. c.

Motors, 74.6 kW (100 HP) or larger, connected to 240-volt systems: 230 volts.

d. Motors, 74.6 kW (100 HP) or larger, connected to 480-volt systems: 460 volts. e. Motors connected to high voltage systems: Shall conform to NEMA Standards for connection to the nominal system voltage shown on the drawings. C. Number of phases shall be as follows: 1. Motors, less than 373 W (1/2 HP): Single phase. 2. Motors, 373 W (1/2 HP) and larger: 3 phase. 3. Exceptions: a. Hermetically sealed motors. b. Motors for equipment assemblies, less than 746 W (one HP), may be single phase provided the manufacturer of the proposed assemblies cannot supply the assemblies with three phase motors. D. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulation. E. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torque. F. Motor Enclosures: 1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 16150 - 2 of 4 MOTORS

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types, which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. 3. Enclosures shall be primed and finish coated at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. G. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. H. Energy-Efficient Motors (Motor Efficiencies): All permanently wired polyphase motors of 746 Watts or more shall meet the minimum full-load efficiencies as indicated in the following table, and as specified in this specification. Motors of 746 Watts or more with open, drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled enclosures shall be NEMA premium efficiency type, unless otherwise indicated. Motors provided as an integral part of motor driven equipment are excluded from this requirement if a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency requirement is indicated for that equipment by the provisions of another section.

Minimum Efficiencies

Minimum Efficiencies

Open Drip-Proof

Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled

Rating

1200

1800

3600 RPM

Rating

1200

1800

3600

kW (HP)

RPM

RPM

kW (HP)

RPM

RPM

RPM

0.746 (1)

82.5%

85.5%

77.0%

0.746 (1)

82.5%

85.5%

77.0%

1.12 (1.5)

86.5%

86.5%

84.0%

1.12 (1.5)

87.5%

86.5%

84.0%

1.49 (2)

87.5%

86.5%

85.5%

1.49 (2)

88.5%

86.5%

85.5%

2.24 (3)

88.5%

89.5%

85.5%

2.24 (3)

89.5%

89.5%

86.5%

3.73 (5)

89.5%

89.5%

86.5%

3.73 (5)

89.5%

89.5%

88.5%

5.60 (7.5)

90.2%

91.0%

88.5%

5.60 (7.5)

91.0%

91.7%

89.5%

7.46 (10)

91.7%

91.7%

89.5%

7.46 (10)

91.0%

91.7%

90.2%

11.2 (15)

91.7%

93.0%

90.2%

11.2 (15)

91.7%

92.4%

91.0%

14.9 (20)

92.4%

93.0%

91.0%

14.9 (20)

91.7%

93.0%

91.0%

18.7 (25)

93.0%

93.6%

91.7%

18.7 (25)

93.0%

93.6%

91.7%

22.4 (30)

93.6%

94.1%

91.7%

22.4 (30)

93.0%

93.6%

91.7%

29.8 (40)

94.1%

94.1%

92.4%

29.8 (40)

94.1%

94.1%

92.4%

37.3 (50)

94.1%

94.5%

93.0%

37.3 (50)

94.1%

94.5%

93.0%

44.8 (60)

94.5%

95.0%

93.6%

44.8 (60)

94.5%

95.0%

93.6%

56.9 (75)

94.5%

95.0%

93.6%

56.9 (75)

94.5%

95.4%

93.6%

74.6 (100)

95.0%

95.4%

93.6%

74.6 (100)

95.0%

95.4%

94.1%

93.3 (125)

95.0%

95.4%

94.1%

93.3 (125)

95.0%

95.4%

95.0%

16150 - 3 of 4 MOTORS

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 112 (150)

95.4%

95.8%

94.1%

112 (150)

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 95.8%

95.8%

95.0%

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, the NEC, NEMA, as shown on the drawings and/or as required by other sections of these specifications. 3.2 FIELD TESTS Megger all motors after installation, before start-up. All shall test free from grounds. ---END---

16150 - 4 of 4 MOTORS

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16140-WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16. B. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlets boxes. C. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL), submit the following: B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade and termination information. C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: Technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement units. D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: Certification by the Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and specifications, and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent

WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): WD 1-99.................General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6-02 ................Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 5-96....................Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 20-00...................General-Use Snap Switches 231-98..................Power Outlets 467-93..................Grounding and Bonding Equipment 498-01..................Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 943-03..................Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECEPTACLES A. General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-grounding feature. Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal. 2. Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal clamp type terminals (four min.) and side wiring from four captively held binding screws. B. Duplex receptacles shall be single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole, 3-wire, and conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The duplex type shall have break-off feature for two-circuit operation. The ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal. 1. Bodies shall be black in color. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box. a. Ground fault interrupter shall be hospital grade and consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. It shall be rated for operation on a 60 Hz, 120 volt, 20-ampere branch circuit. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

milliamp) on the load side of the device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a second. Devices shall meet UL 943. 3. Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the as follow: a. Bodies shall be black phenolic compound supported by a plated steel mounting strap having plaster ears. b. Shall be NEMA WD 1 heavy duty type. C. Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete with appropriate cord grip plug. Devices shall meet UL 231. D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted in box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or hospital grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. 2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES AND DIMMERS A. Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic compound. Toggle handles shall be black in color unless otherwise specified. The rocker type switch is not acceptable and will not be approved. 1. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty general-purpose use with an integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and provisions for back wiring with separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held binding screws. 2. Shall be color coded for current rating, listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and meet the requirements of NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty and UL 20. 3. Ratings: a. 277 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC. 4. The switches shall be mounted on the striker plate side of doors. 5. Incorporate barriers between switches with multigang outlet boxes where required by the NEC. 6. All toggle switches shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type smooth nylon. Oversize plates are not acceptable. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Color shall be black unless otherwise specified. C. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be interchangeable. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be accordance with NEMA WD1. D. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common for each group of receptacles or switches. E. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in the associated specification. 2.4 SURFACE MULTIPLE-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Assemblies shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 5. B. Shall have the following features: 1. Enclosures: a. Thickness of steel shall be not less than 0.040 inch steel for base and cover. Nominal dimension shall be 1-1/2 by 2-3/4 inches with inside cross sectional area not less than 3.5 square inches. The enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and painted at the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard baked enamel or lacquer finish. 2. Receptacles shall be duplex. See paragraph 'RECEPTACLES' in this section. Device cover plates shall be the manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant finish and shall not exceed the dimensions of the enclosure. 3. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, spacing of the receptacles along the strip shall be 24 inches on centers. 4. Wires within the assemblies shall be not less than No. 12 AWG copper, with 600 volt ratings. 5. Installation fittings shall be designed for the strips being installed including bends, offsets, device brackets, inside couplings, wire clips, and elbows. 6. Bond the strips to the conduit systems for their branch supply circuits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings. B. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper, and also connected to the green equipment grounding conductor. - - - E N D - - WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16127-CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and lighting wiring. B.

Definitions: The term HCF Type AC cable, as used in this specification, shall mean Type AC cable in accordance with the National Electrical Code with an insulated equipment grounding conductor, an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum and the outer metal armor or sheath of the assembly shall be approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. Excavation and backfill for cables that are installed in conduit: Section 02200, EARTHWORK. B. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS. C. General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). D. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS. E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following: 1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating. 2. Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed. 3. Where Type AC cable is used, manufacturer's literature shall indicate that the outer metal sheath is approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM): LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 1 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D2301-04 ................................... Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): A-A-59544-00 ............................. Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 4-01 ............................................ Armored Cable 44-02 .......................................... Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables 83-03 .......................................... Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 467-01 ........................................ Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment 486A-01 ...................................... Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors 486C-02 ..................................... Splicing Wire Connectors 486D-02 ..................................... Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locations 486E-00 ...................................... Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors 493-01 ........................................ Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable 514B-02 ...................................... Fittings for Cable and Conduit 1479-03 ...................................... Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLE AND WIRE (POWER AND LIGHTING) A. Cable and Wire shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. A-A-59544, except as hereinafter specified. B. Single Conductor: 1. Shall be annealed copper. 2. Shall be stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller. 3. Shall be minimum size No. 12 AWG, except where smaller sizes are allowed herein. C. Insulation: 1. THW, XHHW, or dual rated THHN-THWN shall be in accordance with UL 44, and 83. 2. Direct burial: UF or USE shall be in accordance with UL 493. 3. Isolated power system wiring: Type XHHW with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. D. Color Code: 1. Secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows: LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 2 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

208/120 volt

Phase

480/277 volt

Black

A

Brown

Red

B

Orange

Blue

C

Yellow

White

Neutral

Gray *

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

* or white with colored (other than green) tracer. a. The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have color coding unique and distinct (i.e. pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above. The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Field coordinate for a final color coding with the Resident Engineer. 2. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG branch circuit conductors and neutral sizes. 3. Phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one of the following methods: a. Solid color compound or solid color coating. b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above. c.

Color as specified using 3/4 inch wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a minimum of three inches for terminal points, and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs, manholes, and handholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation type.

4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring system. 5. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. 2.2 ARMORED CABLE: HCF TYPE AC A. Cable assembly shall in accordance with Fed Spec J-C-30B, NEC and UL 4. B. Assembly shall include an insulated green equipment grounding conductor, sized in accordance with the NEC in addition to an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum in intimate contact with the armor for its entire length. Minimum size bonding strip shall be No. 16 AWG. The outer metal armor or sheath of the assembly shall be approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path. C. Armored Cable Fittings: 1. Fed Spec W-F-406E and UL 514B, except only steel or malleable iron material is acceptable. LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 3 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Clamp type with insulating throat. D. Supports: 1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coated or equivalent corrosion protection. 2. Individual hangers: Straps, hangers or similar fittings shall be used and installed at intervals so as not to damage the cable. Staples are not permitted to be used for supports. 3. Cable trays: In lieu of individual hangers, a single cable tray may be used to support all armored cable runs within an area. 4. Color Coding: Color coding for conductors shall be in accordance with paragraph 2.1D above. 2.3 SPLICES AND JOINTS A. In accordance with UL 486A, C, D, E and NEC. B. Branch circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller): 1. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 degree C with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors. 2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires. 3. The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturers packaging shall be strictly complied with. C. Feeder Circuits: 1. Connectors shall be indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material. 2. Field installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 kcmil and larger shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents per wire. 3. Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulate with not less than that of the conductor level that is being joined. 4. Plastic electrical insulating tape: ASTM D2304 shall apply, flame retardant, cold and weather resistant. 2.4 CONTROL WIRING A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG. B. Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the controls. 2.5 COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING A. Shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturers of the communication and signal systems; however, not less than what is shown. B. Wiring shown is for typical systems. Provide wiring as required for the systems being furnished. LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 4 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Multi-conductor cables shall have the conductors color coded. 2.6 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND A. Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive. B. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems. 2.7 FIREPROOFING TAPE A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flame-retardant elastomer. B. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc-proof and fireproof. C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light. D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds. E. Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 7 mils thick, and 3/4 inch wide. 2.8 WARNING TAPE A. The tape shall be standard, 3 inch wide, 4-Mil polyethylene detectable type. B. The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install in accordance with the NEC, and as specified. B. Install all wiring in raceway systems, except where direct burial or HCF Type AC cables are used. C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes, or handholes. D. Wires of different systems (i.e. 120V, 277V) shall not be installed in the same conduit or junction box system. E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight. F. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train, and tie the cables in individual circuits. G. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit where the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound. H. Wire Pulling: 1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables. 2. Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.

LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 5 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the Resident Engineer. 4. Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit. I.

No more than (3) single-phase branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.

J.

The wires shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310. Neutral wires, under conditions defined by the NEC, shall be considered current-carrying conductors.

3.2 ARMORED CABLE SYSTEM INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation: Shall be in accordance with UL, NEC, as shown on drawings and as hereinafter specified. B. Install HCF Type AC cable as follows: 1. Flattened, dented, deformed, or opened armor is not permitted. If damaged during installation, damaged cables shall be replaced with new undamaged material. 2. Assure that cable installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways. 3. Cut square with manufacturer's armor stripping tool and remove burrs. 4. Remove enough armor from cable to permit sufficient conductor to extend into the enclosure. 5. Cable shall be mechanically and electrically continuous. 6. Secure cable to cabinets, junction boxes, and outlet boxes with fittings approved for grounding. 7. Cables shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. C. Bends: Bends shall be made so that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than five times the diameter of the cable. D. Concealed Work Installation: Cables installed above furred or suspended ceilings or in walls shall be supported as specified below. E. Exposed Work Installation: Cables may be run exposed only in unfinished areas such as electrical closets or mechanical rooms. Where installed exposed, cables shall closely follow the surface of the building finish and be supported as specified below. F. HCF Type AC cable shall not be installed embedded in concrete. G. Cable Identification: HCF Type AC cable shall be marked in accordance with the NEC except the cable shall have ready identification of the manufacturer by distinctive external markings on the cable sheath throughout its entire length. H. Cable Supports, Installation: 1. The cable shall be secured by approved straps, hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed as to not damage the cable.

LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 6 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Independently support the cable or install in cable trays. Do not use other supports i.e., suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts. 3. Where independent supports are used for the cable, support at intervals not exceeding 1350 mm (4 1/2 feet) and within 300 mm (one foot) of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting. 4. Where cable trays are used to support the cables, each cable shall be securely fastened to transverse members of the cable trays. Cable trays shall be independently supported in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NEC. 5. Through Metal Framing: Cable shall be supported in accordance with the NEC where run through metal framing members. 6. Fished Cables: Cables may be fished in existing structures only. Supports are not required where cables are fished through existing walls or above non-removable ceilings. Where cables are installed in new structures, appropriate supports shall be provided. I.

Penetrations: 1. Cutting of Holes a. Cut holes in concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited working space. 2. Fire Stops: Where HCF Type AC cable passes through fire partitions, fire walls or smoke partitions, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gasses as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between cables and openings with the fire stop material. Penetrations shall meet the requirements of UL 1479. 3. Waterproofing: Where Type AC cable passes through floors, floors shall be core drilled and appropriately sized sleeves shall be installed for the cables. Sleeves shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches) above floor slabs and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below. Completely seal clearances between the cable and sleeve and make watertight as specified in section, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.

3.3 SPLICE INSTALLATION A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. B. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the Government.

LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 7 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.4 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified. B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems. C. Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation. D. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental de-energizing of the systems. E. System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required by the NEC. 3.5 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination. B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems. C. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning. D. In each manhole and handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served and function. 3.6 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION A. In each interior pulbox and junction box, install metal tags on each circuit cables and wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage. 3.7 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE INSTALLATION A. Tops of the cables: 1. Below the finished grade: Minimum 24 inches unless greater depth is shown. B. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to prevent any damage. C. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly: 1. Excavating and backfilling is specified in Section, EARTHWORK. 2. Place a 3 inch layer of sand in the trenches before installing the cables. 3. Place a three inch layer of sand over the installed cables. 4. Install continuous horizontal, 25 mm by 1 inch by 8 inch preservative impregnated wood planking three inches above the cables before backfilling. D. Provide horizontal slack in the cables for contraction during cold weather. E. Install the cables in continuous lengths. Splices within cable runs will not be accepted. F. Connections and terminations shall be submersible type designed for the cables being installed. LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 8 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above the buried cables. 3.8 FIELD TESTING A. Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before connection to utilization devices such as fixtures, motors, or appliances. B. Tests shall be performed by megger and conductors shall test free from short-circuits and grounds. C. Test conductor phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. D. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for these tests. 3.9 INSTRUCTIONS A. Furnish the services of a competent factory trained engineer or technician for two, 2-hour periods for instructing VA personnel in the use and installation of HCF Type AC cable. Sessions shall be accomplished at the job site and the location will be determined by the VA. The first 2-hour session shall be presented after submittal approval, but before installation of any of the cable. Session may be attended by Contractor's staff (maximum of 4 personnel) in addition to VA personnel. The second 2-hour session shall be accomplished two weeks prior to the final inspection and shall be attended by VA staff only. ---END---

LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16127 - 9 of 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16126-CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (ABOVE 600 VOLTS)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the high voltage cables. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Bedding of conduits: Section 02200, EARTHWORK. B. General electrical requirement and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). C. Conduits for high voltage cables: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS. D. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS and Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include splice and termination kit information prior to purchase and installation. 3. Provide cable minimum bend radius, and flammability data. C. Samples: 1. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with a 300 mm (12 inches) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils or reels from which the samples were taken. The sample shall contain the manufacturers markings. D. Certifications: 1. Factory test reports: Prior to installation of the cables, deliver four copies of the manufacturers certified NEMA WC 71 or WC 74, standard factory test reports to the Resident Engineer. Certified copies of test data shall show conformance with the referenced standards and shall be approved prior to delivery of cable. 2. Field Test Reports: Test Reports on the following shall be in accordance with the paragraph entitled “Field Tests for High Voltage Cables” and include the following tests: a. High Potential Tests b. Dielectric Absorption Tests c.

Radiographic Tests 16126 - 1 of 14

CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

After testing, submit four certified copies of each of the graphs specified under field testing, to the Resident Engineer. Adequate information shall be included identifying the cable locations, types, voltage rating and sizes. 3. Splices and terminations, after having been installed and tested, deliver four copies of a certificate by the Contractor to the Resident Engineer which includes the following: a.

A statement that the materials, detail drawings and printed instructions used, are those contained in the kits approved for this contract.

b. A statement that each splice and each termination was completely installed without any overnight interruption. c.

A statement that field made splices and terminations conform to the following requirements: 1) Pencil the cable insulation precisely. 2) Connector installations: a) Use tools that are designed for the connectors being installed. b) Round and smooth the installed connectors to minimize localized voltage stressing of the insulating materials. 3) Remove contaminants from all surfaces within the splices and terminations before installing the insulating materials. 4) Solder block throughout stranded grounding wires that will penetrate the splicing and terminating materials. 5) Use mirrors to observe the installation of materials on the backsides of the splices and terminations. 6) Eliminate air voids throughout the splices and terminations. 7) Stretch each layer of tape properly during installation.

d. List all of the materials purchased and installed for the splices and terminations for this contract including the material descriptions, manufacturer's names, catalog numbers and total quantities. E. Power Company Approval: Prior to construction, obtain written approval from the power company that will supply electrical service for the following items: 1. Service entrance cables. Obtain the power company’s written approval on the submittal papers for the cables before submitting them for VA approval. 2. Employees who will splice and terminate the service entrance cables. F. Installer Approval: 1. Employees who install the splices and terminations and test the cables shall have not less than five years of experience splicing and terminating cables which are equal to those being spliced and terminated, including experience with the materials in the kits.

16126 - 2 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each employee who splices or terminates the cables. G. Cable Voltage Ratings 1. Medium voltage power cables shall include multiple and single-conductor cable rated as follows: a) 5000 Volts shall be used on 4160 3-phase 60hz distribution systems. b) 15000 volts shall be used on 12,470, 13,200 and 13,800V 3 phase 60hz distribution systems. H. Shipment 1. Cable shall be shipped on reels such that cable will be protected from mechanical injury. Each end of each length of cable shall be hermetically sealed and securely attached to the reel. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the designation only. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B3-2001 ...................................... Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 386-95 (R2001) .......................... Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems above 600 V 400.2-2005 ................................. Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems 404-2000 .................................... Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500-500,000 Volts C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): WC 71-1999 ............................... Standard for Non-Shielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for Use in the Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-96-659) WC 74-2000 ............................... 5-46 KV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-93-969) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1072-2006 ................................. Medium-Voltage Power Cables PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE A. High voltage cable shall be in accordance with the NEC and NEMA WC71, WC74 and UL 1072. 16126 - 3 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Shall be single conductor stranded copper conforming to ASTM B3. C. Insulation: 1. Insulation level shall be 133 percent. 2. Types of insulation: a. Cable type abbreviation, EPR: Ethylene propylene rubber insulation shall be thermosetting, light and heat stabilized. B. Cable type abbreviation, CCLP: Polyethylene insulation shall be thermosetting, light and heat stabilized, chemically crosslinked. c.

In wet locations, anti-tree CCLP or EPR shall be used.

d. Cable type abbreviation, XLPE cross-linked polyethylene insulated shielded shall be thermosetting, light and heat stabilized chemically cross-linked. //e.

For series type outdoor lighting systems, install the direct burial, series lighting system type cables shown on the drawings. The cables shall be designed for direct burial whether or not they are installed in underground raceways.//

D. Conductors and insulation shall be wrapped separately with semiconducting tape. E. Insulation shall be wrapped with non-magnetic, metallic shielding except for cables for series type lighting systems. F. Heavy duty, overall protective jackets of chlorosulphonated polyethylene, neoprene or polyvinyl chloride shall enclose every cable. G. Cable temperature ratings for continuous operation, emergency overload operation and short circuit operation shall be not less than the NEC, NEMA WC71 or NEMA WC74 Standard for the respective cable. H. Manufacturer's name and other pertinent information shall be marked or molded clearly on the overall outside surface of the jackets, or incorporated on marker tapes within the cables at reasonable intervals. 2.2 MATERIAL, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. The materials shall be compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the cables and wires. B. The splices shall insulate and protect the conductors not less than the insulation and protective jackets on the cables and wires that protect the conductors. In locations where moisture might be present, the splices shall be watertight. In manholes and handholes the splices shall be submersible. C. Splicing and Terminating Fittings: Shall be in accordance with IEEE 386, 404. 1. Shall be heavy duty, pressure type fittings, which will assure satisfactory performance of the connections under conditions of temperature cycling and magnetic forces from available short circuit currents.

16126 - 4 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. The fittings shall be suitably designed and the proper size for the cables and wires being spliced and terminated. Terminations to bus shall be with two hole lugs. 3. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory fittings have been installed, contractor shall replace the unsatisfactory installations with approved fittings at no additional cost to the Government. D. Splicing and Terminating Kits: 1. General: a. Shall be assembled by the manufacturer or supplier of the materials and shall be packaged for individual splices and terminations or for groups of splices and terminations. b. Shall consist of materials designed for the cables being spliced and terminated and shall be suitable for the prevailing environmental conditions. c.

Shall include detail drawings and printed instructions for each type of splice and termination being installed, as prepared by the manufacturers of the materials in the kits.

d. Detail drawings, and printed instructions shall indicate the cable type, voltage rating, manufacturer's name and catalog numbers for the materials indicated. e. Voltage ratings for the splices and terminations shall be not less than the voltage ratings for the cables on which they are being installed. f.

Shall include shielding and stress cone materials.

2. Taped splices and terminations with insulating and semi-conducting rubber tapes shall withstand 200 percent elongation without cracking, rupturing or reducing their electric and self-bonding characteristics by more than 5 percent. 3. Epoxy resin kits shall be as follows: a. Compatible with the cable insulations and jackets and make the splices watertight and submersible. b. Thermosetting and generate its own heat so that external fire or heat will not be required. c.

Set solid and cure in approximately 60 minutes in 21 degree C (70 degree F) ambient temperature.

d. Not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage and fungus. e. Furnished in pre-measured quantities, sized for each splice and each termination, with two resin components in an easy mixing plastic bag which will permit mixing the resin without entrapping air or contaminants. Other methods of packaging and mixing the epoxy resin components will be considered for approval, provided they include adequate safeguards to assure precise proportioning of the resin components and to prevent entrapping air and contaminants. f.

Use snap-together, longitudinally-split, interlocking seam, transplant mold bodies or taped frameworks, injection fittings and injection gun or pouring equipment. Completely fill voids within the splices and terminations. 16126 - 5 of 14

CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E. Pre-molded Rubber Splices and Terminations: 1. Splices and terminations shall be in accordance with IEEE 386, and 404. 2. Pre-molded rubber devices shall have a minimum of 3 mm (0.125 inch) semi-conductive shield material covering the entire housing. Test each rubber part prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Grounding of metallic shields shall be accomplished by a solderless connector enclosed in a watertight rubber housing covering the entire assembly. The grounding device and splice or terminator shall be of same manufacturer to insure electrical integrity of the shielded parts. 4. The pre-molded parts shall be suitable for indoor, outdoor, submersible, or direct-burial applications. 2.3 MATERIAL, FIREPROOFING TAPE A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flame-retardant elastomer. B. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc proof and fireproof. C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus. It shall be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light. D. The finished application shall withstand a 200 ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds. E. Securing tape: Shall be glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide. SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use non-detectable type for cemeteries only. 2.4 MATERIAL, WARNING TAPE A. The tape shall be standard, 76 mm (3 inch) wide, 4-Mil polyethylene // detectable// //nondetectable// type with aluminum backing. B. The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings. B. Contractor shall ensure that radii of bends fittings, cable risers, and other conditions are suitable for the cable and conform with the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. C. Cable shall be installed in underground duct banks, in conduit above and below grade; inside buildings, on insulator hooks; on racks in wall and ceiling mounted cable trays in utility tunnels and manholes; and by direct burial. D. Cables shall be secured with heavy duty cable ties in existing or new trays mounted horizontally, where cable rests on tray bottom.

16126 - 6 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E. Cables shall be secured with PVC coated metallic non-metallic cable clamps, straps, hangers, or other approved supporting devices to tunnel walls, ceilings, and in new or existing cable trays mounted vertically, where tray bottom is in a vertical plane. F. Contractor shall ensure that all cable tray is properly secured and supported prior to installing new armored cable. Contractor shall add new permanent and/or temporary tray support devices as required to preclude cable tray failure during cable pulling or after cable is installed. G. Cable or conductors of a primary distribution system shall be rejected when installed openly in cable trays or openly racked along interior walls; in the same raceway or conduit with AC/DC control circuits or ac power circuits operating at less than 600 volts; or in a manner allowing cable to support its own weight. H. Use suitable lubricating compounds on the cables and wires to prevent damage to them during pulling-in. Provide compounds that are not injurious to the cable and wire jackets and do not harden or become adhesive. I.

Splice the cables and wires only in manholes and accessible junction boxes. Ground shields in accordance with Section 16450, GROUNDING.

J.

In manholes, trenches and vaults install the cables on suitable porcelain insulators with steel cables racks. Ground cable racks in accordance with Section GROUNDING 16450.

K. In manholes, underground raceways and other outdoors locations: 1. Seal the cable ends prior to pulling them in to prevent the entry of moisture. 2. For ethylene propylene rubber and polyethylene insulated cables, use bags of epoxy resin that are not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) larger in diameter than the overall diameter of the cable. Clean each end of each cable before installing the epoxy resin over it. 3.2 PROTECTION DURING SPLICING OPERATIONS Blowers shall be provided to force fresh air into manholes or confined areas where free movement or circulation of air is obstructed. Waterproof protective coverings shall be available on the work site to provide protection against moisture while a splice is being made. Pumps shall be used to keep manholes dry during splicing operations. Under no conditions shall a splice or termination be made with the interior of a cable exposed to moisture. Conductor insulation paper shall be moisture-tested before the splice is made. A manhole ring at least 150 mm (6 inches) above ground shall be used around the manhole entrance to keep surface water from entering the manhole. Unused ducts shall be plugged and water seepage through ducts in use shall be stopped before the splice is started. 3.3 PULLING CABLES IN DUCTS, MANHOLES AND UTILITY TUNNELS A. Medium-voltage cables shall be pulled into ducts and utility tunnels with equipment designed for this purpose, including power-driven winch, cable-feeding flexible tube guide, cable grips, and lubricants. A sufficient number of trained personnel and equipment shall be employed to ensure the careful and proper installation of the cable. 16126 - 7 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Cable reel shall be set up at the side of the manhole or tunnel hatch opening and above the duct or hatch level, allowing the cable to enter through the opening without reverse bending. Flexible tube guide shall be installed through the opening in a manner that will prevent the cable from rubbing on the edges of any structural member. C. Pulling force for a cable grip on lead-sheathed cable shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendation. A dynamometer shall be used in the pulling line to ensure that the pulling force is not exceeded. Pulling force for a nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall not exceed the smaller of 4400 Newton (1,000 pounds) or a value computed from the following equation: TM = 0.008 X N X CM Where: TM = maximum allowable pulling tension in Newton pounds N = number of conductors in the cable CM = cross-sectional area of each conductor in square millimeter circular mils. D. Cable shall be unreeled from the top of the reel. Payout shall be carefully controlled. Cable to be pulled shall be attached through a swivel to the main pulling wire by means of a //pulling eye// suitable cable grip permitted only on cables less than 60 mm (200feet) long and less than 50 mm (2 inches) in diameter//. E. Woven-wire cable grips shall be used to grip the cable end when pulling small cables and short straight lengths of heavier cables. F. Pulling eyes shall be attached to the cable conductors to prevent damage to the cable structure. G. Pulling eyes and cable grips shall be used together for nonmetallic sheathed cables to prevent damage to the cable structure. H. Cables shall be liberally coated with a suitable cable-pulling lubricant as it enters the tube guide or duct. Grease and oil lubricants shall be used only on lead-sheathed cables. Nonmetallic sheathed cables shall be covered with wire-pulling compounds when required which have no deleterious effects on the cable. Rollers, sheaves, or tube guides around which the cable is pulled shall conform to the minimum bending radius of the cable. I.

Cables shall be pulled into ducts at a reasonable speed not in excess of maximum permissible pulling tension specified by the cable manufacturer. Cable pulling using a vehicle shall not be permitted. Pulling operations shall be stopped immediately with any indication of binding or obstruction and shall not be resumed until such difficulty is corrected. Sufficient slack shall be provided for free movement of cable due to expansion or contraction.

J.

Cable splices made up in manholes or utility tunnels shall be firmly supported on cable racks as indicated. No cable splices shall be pulled in ducts. Cable ends shall overlap at the ends of a section to provide sufficient undamaged cable for splicing. Cables to be spliced in manholes or utility tunnels shall overlap the centerline of the proposed joint by not less than 600 mm (2 feet).

K. Cables cut in the field shall have the cut ends immediately sealed to prevent entrance of moisture. Nonleaded cables shall be sealed with rubber tape wrapped down to 75 mm (3 inches) from the 16126 - 8 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

cable end. Rubber tape shall be cover-wrapped with polyvinylchloride tape. Lead-Covered cables shall be sealed with wiping metal making a firm bond with the end of the sheath or with a disk of lead fitted over the end and wiped to the sheath. 3.4 INSTALLATION, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Install the materials as recommended by their manufacturer including special precautions pertaining to air temperature during installation. B. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE), Ethylene Propylene Rubber and Polyethylene Insulated Cables: 1. Cables rated 5000 volts or less: Install epoxy resin splices and terminations, or pre-molded rubber splices and terminations. 2. Cables rated more than 5000 volts: Install taped splices and terminations, or pre-molded rubber splices and terminations. C. Installation shall be accomplished by qualified personnel trained to accomplish high voltage equipment installations. All instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed in detail. D. Splices shall be made in manholes or tunnels except where cable terminations are specifically indicated. Splicing and terminating of cables shall be expedited to minimize exposure and cable deterioration. E. Cables shall be terminated in potheads. Dry terminations with medium voltage pennants, preformed, and hand wrapped stress cones may be used for terminating cables. Potheads shall be provided with adequate means for making external connections to the cable conductors of single or multiple conductor cables; protecting the cable insulation against moisture, oil, or other contaminant; physically protecting and supporting cables, and maintaining the insulation level of the cable. F. Pothead terminations shall be field fabricated from termination kits supplied by and in accordance with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations for the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable. G. Installation shall include built-up or prefabricated heat or cold shrink stress-relief cones at the terminals of all shielded cables and at the terminals of single-conductor lead-covered cables rated 15 kV and above, ungrounded. H. Cable splices shall be field fabricated from splicing kits supplied by and in accordance with cable manufacturer’s recommendations for the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable specified. Cable splices in manholes shall be located midway between cable racks on walls of manholes and supported with cable arms at approximately the same elevation as the enclosing duct. I.

Cable splices in the tunnel that are not installed in cable trays shall be installed on cable racks or by other approved methods that will minimize physical stress on the splice connections. Splices

16126 - 9 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

shall be supported at approximately the same elevation as the installed cable except where space limitations or existing cable length limitations make this method impractical or impossible. J.

Universal demountable splices shall be supported in such manner so as to minimize physical stress on the splice connections. Each cable end termination shall be supported using a pair of saddle type supports under the cable end termination and/or cable with a minimum 300 mm (12 inches) and a maximum 750 mm (30 inches) separation between the supports. Cable end termination and cable shall be secured to the supports in such a manner as to prevent movement of termination or cable at the support. Saddle type supports shall be installed on galvanized steel framing channel anchored to the wall or securely fastened to the cable tray or installed by other approved methods.

3.5 MULTIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS A. Multiple-conductor potheads shall be hermetically sealed cap-nut type and shall be suitable for the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable. Potheads shall consist of bells or bodies with bell caps lids, bushing, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance fittings. B. Pothead bells or bodies shall be cast iron aluminum with mounting brackets as required, pipe plugs for filings and vent holes, machine-flanged surfaces for bell caps lids, and cable entrance fittings. Pothead bell caps lids for cables up to 130 mm² (250 Kcmils), 250 amperes shall be cast iron aluminum; and for cables of larger size and higher current ratings shall be cast aluminum bronze nonmagnetic metal casting. Bell caps Lids shall have matching machined flanged surfaces for sealing with gasket and cap-screw connections. C. Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insulators, factory assembled and hermetically sealed to bell cap lid. D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined and threaded for internal and external electrical connections. Cross-sectional and contact areas shall be adequate to carry the full-load current rating of the conductors. Cable connectors shall be solder type with gasket seal between the connector and bushing. E. Cable-entrance fittings shall be cast-bronze wiping-sleeve type for lead-covered cable, and castaluminum positive-sealed stuffing boxes for non-lead-covered cables. Conduit couplings and armor base fittings shall be cast iron. F. Three-conductor potheads with a neutral stud and lug may be used in lieu of four-conductor potheads in four-wire grounded neutral systems. G. Potheads shall be completely filled, leaving no gaps or voids, with an insulating compound suitable for the type of cable, insulation, voltage rating, and ambient operating temperatures in accordance with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations. Pothead parts that do not carry current shall be grounded.

16126 - 10 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.6 SINGLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS A. Single-conductor potheads shall be the hermetically sealed cap-nut type and shall be suitable for the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable specified. Potheads shall consist of cast bodies, bushings, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance fittings. B. Pothead bodies shall be metal castings with mounting brackets, when required, pipe plugs for filling and vent holes, and machined flanged surface for cable-entrance fitting. Bodies shall be cast iron for cables up to 130 mm² (250 kc mils) 250 amperes, and cast aluminum bronze nonmagnetic metal casting for cable of larger size and higher current ratings. C. Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insulators, factory assembled and hermetically sealed to the pothead body. D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined and threaded for internal and external electrical connections. Cross-sectional and contract areas shall be adequate to carry the full-load current rating of the conductors. Cable connectors shall be solder type with gasket seal between the connector and bushing. E. Potheads shall be completely filled, leaving no gaps or voids, with an insulating compound suitable for the type of cable, insulation, voltage rating, and ambient operating temperatures in accordance with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations. Pothead parts that do not carry current shall be grounded. 3.7 INSTALLATION, FIREPROOFING A. Cover all power cables located in manholes, handholes and junction boxes with arc proof and fireproof tape. B. Apply the tape in a single layer, one-half lapped or as recommended by the manufacturer. Install the tape with the coated side towards the cable and extend it not less than 25 mm (one inch) into each duct. C. Secure the tape in place by a random wrap of glass cloth tape. 3.8 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION In each manhole and pullbox install permanent tags on each circuit's cables and wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage. In manholes the tags shall be the embossed brass type and shall also show the cable type and voltage rating. Position the tags so they will be easy to read after the fireproofing is installed. 3.9 INSTALLATION, DIRECT BURIAL CABLE A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC. B. Tops of the cables shall be: 1. Not less than 750 mm (30 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings below the finished grade. 2. Not less than 60 mm 750 mm (24 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings below road and other pavement surfaces. 16126 - 11 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Do not install them under railroad tracks. C. Under road and paved surfaces, install the cables within bituminous coated, galvanized steel, rigid conduits, not less than 50 mm (2 inch) trade size, with bushings at each end of each conduit run. D. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to prevent any damage. E. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly: 1. Excavating and backfilling is specified in Section, EARTHWORK 02200. 2. Place a 75 mm (3 inch) layer of sand in the trenches before installing the cables. 3. Place a 75 mm (3 inch) layer of sand over the installed cables. 4. Install continuous, horizontal, 25 by 200 mm (1 by 8 inch), preservative impregnated wood planking three inches above the installed cables before backfilling. F. Provide horizontal slack in the cables for contraction during cold weather. G. Install the cables in continuous lengths. Splices within cable runs will not be accepted. H. Connections and terminations shall be submersible type designed for the cables being installed. I.

Warning tape shall be continuously placed 300 mm (12 inches) above buried cable.

3.10 FIELD TESTS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE A. New Cable: 1. Acceptance tests shall be performed on new and service aged PE XLPE, PVC and paper cables in accordance with IEEE 400.2 and as specified herein. 2. Test new cable after installation, splices, and terminations have been made, but before connection to equipment and existing cable. 3. Test equipment, labor and technical personnel shall be provided as necessary to perform the electrical acceptance tests. Arranges shall be made to have tests witnessed by the Resident Engineer. B. Service Age Cable: 1. Maintenance tests shall be performed on service-aged cable interconnected to new cable. See test voltages below. 2. After new cable test and connection to an existing cable, test the interconnected cable. Disconnect cable from all equipment that might be damaged by the test voltages. C. Dielectric Absorption Test: Both new and service aged power cable shall be completely isolated from extraneous electrical connections at cable terminations and joints. Safety precautions shall be observed. Each cable shall be given a full dielectric – absorption test with a 5000v insulation resistance test set. Test shall be applied for a long enough time to charge the cable. Readings shall be recorded every 15 seconds during the first 3 minutes of test and at 1 minute intervals thereafter. Test shall continue until three equal readings 1 minute apart are obtained. Minimum

16126 - 12 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

readings shall be 200 megohms at an ambient temperature 20 degrees C (68 degrees F). Readings taken at other temperatures shall be corrected accordingly. D. High Potential Test: High potential test shall not be applied to the XLPE new or service aged cables. All other cables shall be subjected to the test but only upon successful dielectric absorption test. 1. Leakage current test shall be by high potential dc step voltage method. 2. High potential test shall measure the leakage current from each conductor to the insulation shield. Use corona shields, guard rings, taping, mason jars, or plastic bags to prevent corona current from influencing the readings. Unprepared cable shield ends shall be trimmed back 25 mm (1 inch) or more for each 10 kV of test voltage. Upon the successful completion of the high potential test on new and service aged PE CCLP, PC PVC cables a second dielectric test will be run on the HV cable system to ensure the cables have not been damaged by the hi-pot test E. Safety Precautions: 1. Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior to, during, and after the high potential tests, including placing warning signs and preventing people and equipment from being exposed to the test voltages. F. Test Voltages: 1. New shielded EPR and CCLP cable dc test voltages shall be as follows:

Rated Circuit Voltage Phase-to-Phase Volt

Wire Size AWG or MCM

2001-5000

8-1000

25

5001-8000

6-1000

35

8001-15000

2-1000

65

15001-25001

1-1000

100

25001-28000

1-1000

-

28001-35000

1/0-1000

-

Test Voltage KV

2. Existing cable of all types interconnected to a new cable shall be tested at 1.7 times the existing cable rated voltage (maintenance test). G. High Potential Test Method: 1. Apply voltage in approximately 8 to 10 equal steps. 2. Raise the voltage slowly between steps. 3. At the end of each step, allow the charging currents to decay, and time the interval of decay.

16126 - 13 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. Read the leakage current and plot a curve of leakage currents versus test voltage on graph paper as the test progresses. Read the leakage current at the same time interval for each voltage step. 5. Stop the test if leakage currents increase excessively or a "knee" appears in the curve before maximum test voltage is reached. a. For new cable, repair or replace the cable and repeat the test. b. For existing cable interconnected to new cable, notify the Resident Engineer for further instructions. 6. Upon reaching maximum test voltage, hold the voltage for five minutes. Read the leakage current at 30 second intervals and plot a curve of leakage current versus time on the same graph paper as the step voltage curve. Stop the test if leakage current starts to rise, or decreases and again starts to rise. Leakage current should decrease and stabilize for good cable. 7. Terminate test and allow sufficient discharge time before testing the next conductor. H. Test Data: Test data shall be recorded and shall include identification of cable and location, megohm readings versus time, leakage current readings versus time, and cable temperature versus time. I.

Final Acceptance: Final acceptance shall depend upon the satisfactory performance of the cable under test. No cable shall be energized until recorded test data have been approved by the Resident Engineer. Final test reports shall be provided to the Resident Engineer. Reports shall have a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the words “Final Test Report” Forward to the Resident Engineer for inclusion in the Maintenance Database.

J.

Radiographic Tests: Radiographic tests shall be performed on all potheads at the discretion of the Resident Engineer to determine if voids exist in the pothead. Unacceptable terminations shall be reworked at no additional expense to the Government. SPEC WRITER NOTE: Include the following paragraph for projects with series outdoor lighting systems.

//K.

Series Outdoor Lighting Cables: Test the series outdoor lighting system cables by standard megger methods in lieu of testing by high potential methods. //

L. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests. ---END---

16126 - 14 of 14 CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16112- BUSWAY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the busways to form a complete coordinated system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction. B. Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING: Sealing around busway penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building. C. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16. D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL), submit the following: B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details and position, mounting method, vertical supports, materials, fire stops, weather stops, and layout of the busway runs. 3. Show the detailed coordinated connections to equipment terminations such as switchgear, switchboards, transformers and panelboards. C. Manuals: 1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts. 2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the manuals to the Resident Engineer. D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.

BUSWAY

16112 - 1 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 857-01 ........................................ Busways C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-02 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): BU 1-99 ...................................... Busways BU 1.1-00 ................................... General Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less BU 1.2-02 ................................... Application Information for Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Busway shall be in accordance with UL 857 and NEMA BU 1, BU 1.1 and BU 1.2. B. Busway shall be rated as shown on the drawings for the positions in which they are being installed, and have the following features: 1. For indoor locations, they shall be totally enclosed, low impedance type and moisture resistant. 2. Ratings shall not be less than required by the NEC and NEMA BU 1 and not less than shown on the drawings. Short circuit current ratings shall not be less than 42,000 amps, as required by NEMA BU 1 or as required for the available fault current, whichever is higher. 3. Busway shall be 3-phase, 4-wire, full neutral except where 3-phase, 3-wire is shown on the drawings. 4. Busway shall include an internal ground bus bar, not less than 50 percent of the phase bus. 5. All bus bars for each busway shall be within a single housing. Paralleled or multiple busways will not be accepted. 6. Bus Bars: a. Shall be copper. b. Bus bar and interconnection joints shall be silver plated, constant high-pressure type with high strength, copper silicon alloy bolts, nuts and washers. c.

Shall be completely insulated with flame-retardant, track-resistant, self-extinguishing insulation.

d. Temperature rises shall not exceed NEMA Standards.

BUSWAY

16112 - 2 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

7. Housings: a. Shall be steel or aluminum with continuous mounting rails. b. Bus bar assemblies and housing shall be products of the same manufacturer. c.

Shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted at the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard finish.

d. Shall have rustproof metal hardware. e. At busway entrances to buildings, install external flanges and weatherproofing. f.

For busways that pass through floors or firewalls, incorporate fire stops within the busway housings and external flanges to close the openings in the walls or floors adjacent to the busways.

g. Install expansion fittings in the busway runs in compliance with the manufacturer's standard recommendations. 9. Busway shall not be reduced in size at any point. C. Storage: All busway shall be stored at the job site as recommended in NEMA BU 1.1. D. Dimensions and Configurations: 1. Configure within the spaces designated for their installation. 2. Coordinate the routing of equipment installations by other trades to avoid conflicts. 3. Make final field measurements and check them with the shop drawings for the busways prior to authorization of fabrication of the busways. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install busways as required by the NEC, UL, manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: B. Support the busways as required by the NEC with not less than 3/8 inch steel rods. C. Install side bracing to prevent swaying or movement of the busways. In seismic zones, bracing shall be installed as per details on drawings. D. When the installations are complete, inspect the busway joints and eliminate any strains and stresses on the bus bars and housings. E. Coordinate all of the busway terminations to equipment to insure proper phasing, connection and lugs. F. Tighten all of the bolt connections in the busways with a torque wrench as recommended by the manufacturer of the busways. After the busways have been energized for not less than 30 days, repeat the torque wrench tightening of all bolt connections. 3.2 FIELD TESTS A. Perform tests per NEMA BU 1.1 and as follows: 1. After installation but prior to energizing, busways shall be tested for continuity, phasing and insulation resistance.

BUSWAY

16112 - 3 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Insulation resistance shall be measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with a 500 volt megger and values shall not be less than one megohm. B. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests. ---END---

BUSWAY

16112 - 4 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16111- CONDUIT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or specified otherwise. B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Bedding of conduits: Section EARTHWORK. B. Mounting board for telephone closets: Section ROUGH CARPENTRY. C. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS. D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations: FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. E. Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building: Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING. F. Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section PAINTING. G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of DIVISION 16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL). H. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS In accordance with Section, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Size and location of main feeders; 2. Size and location of panels and pull boxes 3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements. 4. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts. B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 1 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC) C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1-03 ............................................ Flexible Metal Conduit 5-01 ............................................ Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings 6-03 ............................................ Rigid Metal Conduit 50-03 .......................................... Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 360-03 ........................................ Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 467-01 ........................................ Grounding and Bonding Equipment 514A-01 ...................................... Metallic Outlet Boxes 514B-02 ...................................... Fittings for Cable and Conduit 514C-05 ..................................... Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers 651-02 ........................................ Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit 651A-03 ...................................... Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit 797-03 ........................................ Electrical Metallic Tubing 1242-00 ...................................... Intermediate Metal Conduit D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): TC-3-04 ...................................... PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing FB1-03 ....................................... Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 1/2 inch flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures. B. Conduit: 1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1. 2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5. 3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6. 4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 4 inch and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less. 5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1. CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 2 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360. 7. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene (PE). 8. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5. C. Conduit Fittings: 1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1. a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable. b. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure. c.

Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.

d. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited. e. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the room. 2. Rigid aluminum conduit fittings: a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings. Aluminum fittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited. b. Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit. c.

Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.

3. Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1. b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. c.

Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 2 inches and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 2 inches. Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 3 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited. e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited. 4. Flexible steel conduit fittings: a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. b. Clamp type, with insulated throat. 5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1. b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. c.

Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

6. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3. b. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer. 7. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer. 8. Expansion and deflection couplings: a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B. b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections. c.

Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.

d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps. D. Conduit Supports: 1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection. 2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod. 3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods. 4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion. E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes: 1. UL-50 and UL-514A. 2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes. 3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 4 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers. F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown. SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use non-detectable type for cemetery projects only. G. Warning Tape: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape // detectable // nondetectable // type, red with black letters, and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PENETRATIONS A. Cutting or Holes: 1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural sections. 2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited working space. B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material. C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section, SEALANTS AND CAULKING. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as hereinafter specified. B. Essential (Emergency) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of other raceway systems, except where specifically "accepted" by NEC Article 517. C. Install conduit as follows: 1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires. 2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material. 3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways. CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 5 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight. 5. Mechanically and electrically continuous. 6. Independently support conduit at 8’.0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts). 7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and 1 foot of each enclosure to which connected. 8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in. 9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited. 10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers. 11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. 12. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations. 13. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings. D. Conduit Bends: 1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines. 2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits. 3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited. E. Layout and Homeruns: 1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown. 2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the Resident Engineer. F. Fire Alarm: 1. Fire alarm conduit shall be painted red (a red “top-coated” conduit from the conduit manufacturer may be used in lieu of painted conduit) in accordance with the requirements of Section 13850-“Fire Alarm Systems” 3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION A. In Concrete: 1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers. 2. Align and run conduit in direct lines. 3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs: CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 6 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Where shown on the structural drawings. b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration. 4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 3 inches thick is prohibited. a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited. b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings. c.

Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 3/4 inch of concrete around the conduits.

5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited. B. Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls: 1. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts: a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum. b. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited. 2. Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below: a. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited. 3. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. 4. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum six feet of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture. 5. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited. 3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms. B. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts: 1. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum. 2. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited. C. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below: 1. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited. D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps. F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over eight foot intervals. CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 7 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown. H. Painting: 1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section, PAINTING. 2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using two inch high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 20 foot intervals in between. 3.5 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION A. Exterior routing of Lighting Systems and Other Branch circuits (600 Volt and Less, and 5 feet from the buildings): 1. Conduit: Thick wall PVC or high density PE, unless otherwise shown. 2. Mark conduit at uniform intervals to show the kind of material, direct burial type, and the UL approval label. 3. Install conduit fittings and terminations as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. 4. Tops of conduits shall be as follows unless otherwise shown: a. Not less than 24 inches below finished grade. b. Not less than 30 inches below road and other paved surfaces.

5. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities to avoid damaging them. 6. Excavation for conduit bedding and back-filling of trenches is specified in Section, EARTHWORK. a. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly. b. Do not kink the conduits. 7. Seal conduits, including spare conduits, at building entrances and at outdoor terminations for equipment with a suitable compound that prevents the entrance of moisture and gases. 8. Where metal conduit is shown, install threaded heavy wall rigid steel galvanized conduit or type A20 rigid steel galvanized conduit coated with 20 mil bonded PVC, or rigid steel or IMC, PVC coated or standard coated with bituminous asphaltic compound. 9. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above conduits or electric lines. B. Exterior routing of lighting systems and other branch circuits (600 volts and less-under buildings slab on grade to 5 feet from the building): 1. Pre-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit in accordance with the requirements of Section 16402-“Underground Electrical Construction.”

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 8 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.6 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS A. Use rigid steel conduit only, notwithstanding requirements otherwise specified in this or other sections of these specifications. B. Install UL approved sealing fittings, that prevent passage of explosive vapors, in hazardous areas equipped with explosive proof lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles, as required by the NEC. 3.7 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS A. Unless otherwise shown, use conduits of rigid steel or IMC. B. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, i.e., (refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air conditioned spaces building exterior walls, roofs) or similar spaces. C. Unless otherwise shown, use rigid steel or IMC conduit within 5 feet of the exterior and below concrete building slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. Conduit shall include an outer factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC or field coat with asphaltum before installation. After installation, completely coat damaged areas of coating. 3.8 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT A. Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission. B. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity laden atmosphere, corrosive atmosphere, water or spray wash-down operations, inside (air stream) of HVAC units, and locations subject to seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water. Provide a green ground wire with flexible metal conduit. 3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Conduits 3 inches and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide conduits smaller than 3 inches with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5 inch vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 15 inches and larger conduits are acceptable. C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown. 3.10 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 9 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 8 foot on center. C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 200 pounds. Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners. D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars, angle supports, and similar items. E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete: 1. Existing Construction: a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 1/4 inch bolt size and not less than 1-1/8 inch embedment. b. Power set fasteners not less than 1/4 inch diameter with depth of penetration not less than 3 inches. c.

Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable. H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application. I.

Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.

J.

Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.

K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls. L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars. 3.11 BOX INSTALLATION A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits: 1. Flush mounted. 2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish. B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations. C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 10 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are prohibited. A minimum 24 inch, centerto-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.) E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved. F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIG-FA JB No. 1". G. On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker. 3.12 TELEPHONE CONDUIT A. Install the telephone raceway system as shown on drawings. B. Minimum conduit size of 3/4 inch, but not less than the size shown on the drawings. C. All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings. D. All four inch conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC. E. Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 3 inches below the floor and not less than 3 inches below the ceiling of the floor below. F. Terminate conduit runs to/from a telephone backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter telephone closets next to the wall and be flush with the backboard. G. Where drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams. H. All empty conduits located in telephone closets or on telephone backboards shall be sealed with a standard non-hardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements. I.

Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of telephone conduit bends shall be as follows (special long radius):

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 11 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

Sizes of Conduit

Radius of Conduit Bends

Trade Size

Inches

3/4

6

1

9

1-1/4

14

1-1/2

17

2

21

2-1/2

25

3

31

3-1/2

36

4 J.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

45

Furnish and install 3/4 inch thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section, ROUGH CARPENTRY on the wall of telephone closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge one foot above the finished floor.

K. Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions). ---END---

CONDUIT SYSTEMS 16111 - 12 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16051 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies the requirements of the Electrical System Protective Device Study. B. A short circuit and coordination study shall be prepared for the electrical over current devices to be installed under this project to assure proper equipment and personnel protection. C. The study shall present an organized time-current analysis of each protective device in series from the individual device back to the utility and the on-site generator sources. The study shall reflect the operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16. B. Section 16160, PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboards. C. Section 16462, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Low voltage distribution switchboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL), submit the following: B. Complete short circuit and coordination study as described herein. C. Protective equipment shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously with or after the protective device study. Protective equipment shop drawings will not be accepted prior to protective device study. D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer: 1. Certification by the Contractor that the protective devices have been adjusted and set in accordance with the approved protective device study. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS The protective device study shall be prepared by qualified engineers of the low voltage switchgear manufacturer or an approved consultant. The Contractor is responsible for providing all pertinent information required by the preparers to complete the study. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS A. The complete study shall include a system one line diagram, short circuit and ground fault analysis, and protective coordination plots. B. One Line Diagram: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY

16051 - 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Show, on the one line diagram, all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the overcurrent devices installed under this project. Clearly show, on the one line, the schematic wiring of the electrical distribution system. 2. Also show on the one line diagram the following specific information: a. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short circuit values at each bus. b. Breaker and fuse ratings. c.

Generator kW and Transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios, and wiring connections.

d. Voltage at each bus. e. Identification of each bus. f.

Conduit material, feeder sizes, length, and X/R ratios.

C. Short Circuit Study: 1. Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short circuit and ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor contribution in determining the momentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices. 2. The study shall be calculated by means of a computer program. Pertinent data and the rationale employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study. 3. Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format. Include the following: a. Device identification. b. Operating voltage. c.

Protective device.

d. Device rating. e. Calculated short circuit current. 1.6 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Necessary final field adjustments, settings and minor modifications shall be made to conform with the protective device study without additional cost to the Government. B. All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the protective device study. ---END---

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY

16051 - 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 16050 - BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section, Basic Methods and Requirements (Electrical) applies to all sections of Division 16. B. Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, cable, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings. C. Electrical service entrance equipment (arrangements for temporary and permanent connections to the power company's system) shall conform to the power company's requirements. Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the power company's system, and obtain power company approval for sizes and settings of these devices. D. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are prohibited. E. All energized electrical work shall be in compliance with VHA Directive 2006-056. 1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are minimum installation requirement standards. B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards. 1.3 TEST STANDARDS A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings. B. Definitions: 1. Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned which: a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of production of such equipment. b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.

BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

16050 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Labeled; equipment or device is when: a. It embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. b. The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment. c.

The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.

3. Certified; equipment or product is which: a. Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner. b. Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. c.

Bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.

4. Nationally recognized testing laboratory; laboratory which is approved, in accordance with OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years. B. Product Qualification: 1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years. 2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval. C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations. 1.5 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available. B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer. C. Where applicable, equipment shall comply with Energy Star or FEMP designated products. D. Equipment Assemblies and Components: 1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer. 2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.

BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

16050 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service. 4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer. E. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams. F. When Factory Testing Is Specified: 1. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests. 2. When equipment fails to meet factory test and reinspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses. 1.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with Section 01001, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods. 1.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain: 1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required. 2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement. 3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal. 4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious. 1.8 WORK PERFORMANCE A. All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, OSHA Part 1910 subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 subpart S and OSHA Part 1910 subpart K in addition to other references required by contract. B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor. C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following requirements are mandatory: 1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.

BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

16050 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E. 3. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the contractor with a peer review conducted and documented by the Resident Engineer. The work plan must include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be used and exit pathways. D. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences. 1.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings. B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified. C. Inaccessible Equipment: 1. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways. 1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment. B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions. 1.11 SUBMITTALS A. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site. B. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted. C. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval. 1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".

BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

16050 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers. 3. Submit each section separately. D. The submittals shall include the following: 1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required. 2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams. 3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part. F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01010, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion. 2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment. 3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. 4. The manuals shall include: a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment. b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown. c.

Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.

d. Installation and maintenance instructions. e. Safety precautions. f.

Diagrams and illustrations.

g. Testing methods. h. Performance data. i.

Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.

BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

16050 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC j.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.

k.

Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.

H. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings. G. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of the following: 1. A 12 inch length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken. 2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting. 3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports. 4. Duct sealing compound. 5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, outlet box, manual motor starter, device plate, engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material and single pole molded case circuit breaker. 6. Each type of light fixture specified in Section 16510 or shown on the drawings. 1.12 SINGULAR NUMBER Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings. ---END---

BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)

16050 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

SECTION 15995 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01

DESCRIPTION A.

The purpose of this section is to specify Division 15 responsibilities in the commissioning process.

B.

Refer to Section 01810 and 16995 for other commissioning requirements. C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 15 shall be familiar with all parts of Division 01 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents. D. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall: Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this and other Cx sections and the Preliminary Cx Plan posted in Div.1, in the quoted price. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA. Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all mechanical and electrical systems provided. Provide mechanical and electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional performance testing as required by the CxA. Review specification Division 1 and 16 to fully understand their responsibilities as they pertain to the commissioning processes.

1.02

RESPONSIBILITIES A.

Mechanical. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the contractors of Division 15 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):

Construction and Acceptance Phases 1. Include cost of commissioning in the contract price. 2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data and training. 3. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the Cx process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a regular agenda item during the normal construction meetings, and minutes submitted to CxA for review. 4. Contractors shall provide the CxA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of commissioned equipment.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

5.

Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the CxA for development of start-up, review and functional testing procedures. a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and startup, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the CxA. b. The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process. c. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.

6.

Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval. O&M’s are to be equipment specific and clearly identified to indicate equipment installed. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures. Submit to CxA for review and approval prior to start-up. Refer to Section 01810 for further details on start-up plan preparation. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the mechanical-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. Startup will not be considered complete until documentation is complete and approved by the CxA. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CxA. Address current A/E punch and Action list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist the functional performance tests for all commissioned equipment. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CxA and A/E and retest the equipment. Prepare equipment specific O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD as-builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of commissioning (excluding deferred testing). Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified.

7.

8.

9.

10. 11.

12.

13. 14.

15.

16.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 17.

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.

Warranty Period 1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and asbuilt drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. B.

Mechanical Contractor and TAB. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical and TAB contractors, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are: 1. 2.

3

4.

Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment, and for the building automation control system. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CxA by: a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required. b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB. Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use by the CxA. Update the schedule as appropriate. Notify the CM/GC when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, startup of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the CM/GC ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that commissioning processes are executed and that the CxA has the scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.

C. TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (A) are: 1.

2.

Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the CxA, CM/GC and the Controls Contractor six weeks prior to starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system. The submitted plan will include: a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system. b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The Controls Contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct drawings during the process. d. Final test report forms to be used. e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue: terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser proportioning, branch / submain proportioning, total flow calculations, rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

f.

g. h. i. j. k. l.

m. n. 3.

4.

5.

6. 7. 8.

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors will be discussed. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. Specific procedures that will ensure that the air side is operating at the lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify this. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity will be checked. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency). Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency). Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).

A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians. Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA and CM/GC at least weekly. Communicate in writing to the Controls Contractor all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect the control system setup and operation. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be provided to the CxA. The report will contain a full explanation of the methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, ASHRAE Standard 111. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft reports. Provide a final TAB report for the CxA with details, as in the draft. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as specified for TAB in Division 1 and 15.

D. Architect, Owner, Electrical and Mechanical Designer. Refer to Section 01810 E. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Contractor: Refer to Division 01 and 23. ATC Contractor is responsible to act as a Cx team member and issue to the CxA for review and comment, their prefunctional plan (point to point and startup) and be onsite and available to perform all required system commissioning.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

All ATC/BAS graphics and sequences are to be demonstrated to the CxA prior to functional testing.

1.03

1.04

RELATED WORK A.

Refer to Division 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are found.

B.

Refer to Division 1 for sections involving related commissioning work; for functional testing requirements, and preliminary Cx Plan.

COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS A.

The following systems and equipment (including all integral equipment controls) will be commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to be commissioned. Refer to Division 01810 for systems to be commissioned

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01

TEST EQUIPMENT A.

Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division.

B.

Refer to Division 1 for additional Division 15 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01

SUBMITTALS A.

3.02

Division 15 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in this Division 1.

START-UP / PREFUNCTIONAL COMMISSIONING A.

The HVAC mechanical Contractor shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this Division 1. Division 15 has start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner. It is the contractors responsibility to create the start-up / prefunctional documents and submit to the CxA for review and comment within two weeks of system startup.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

B.

3.03

Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the CxA and CM/GC. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including all prefunctional checklists as soon as possible.

TAB A.

3.04

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Refer to the TAB responsibilities in Part 1 and 2 above.

FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS A.

Refer to this section and the Cx Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned.

B.

The CxA shall create the functional performance procedures and guideline after review and comment of the equipment startup documents supplied by the contractor. The CxA is to witness and document the functional performance testing. All hands on testing and equipment required by the CxA is to be supplied and performed by the contractor. The contractor’s fees are to be included in their base bid.

C.

D.

If more than one return visit is required by the CxA due to failed systems, the contractor is responsible for the CxA team hourly rate and expenses. NOTE; THAT FUNCTIONAL TESTING IS A VERIFICATION THAT SYSTEMS ARE FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY PER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THIS IS NOT A PERIOD OF SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING, AND THE CxA SHALL HAVE THE AUTHORITY TO SUSPEND FUNCTIONAL TESTING UNTIL SYSTEMS ARE COMPLETE AND OPERATING AS PER THE DESIGN AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION.

3.05

TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS

A.

Refer to Section 01810 for issues relating to functional performance tests.

A.

Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the Specifications.

3.06

1.

2.

Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test conditions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

B.

3.07

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall be made by the A/E and by the CxA. Refer to Division 1 for details.

TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A.

The CM/GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed.

B.

TAB:The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1.

After completion of TAB, TAB shall meet with facility staff for the number of hours specified in the contract documents, and shall instruct them on the following: a) Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type. b) Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect the proper delivery of air. c) Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that are close to or are not meeting their design capacity. d) Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not finished. e) Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB.

CxA does not oversee or document training

3.08

WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS A.

Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan described in Section 01810 and the executed start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional checklists. END OF SECTION 15995

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

15995-7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.2

Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including sub-mains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. Measuring sound and vibration. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment. Field quality control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

DEFINITIONS A.

Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B.

Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub-mains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.

C.

Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D.

Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

E.

Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

F.

Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

G.

Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

H.

System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 1/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

I.

System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J.

Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

K.

Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

L.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

M.

AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

N.

AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

O.

CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

P.

NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

Q.

SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A.

Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

B.

Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

C.

Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D.

Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

E.

Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.

F.

Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 2/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1.

Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

C.

Submittal distribution requirements. Contract Documents examination report. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan. Work schedule and Project site access requirements. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. 2.

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's standard forms approved by the Architect.

E.

Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards or as described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F.

Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

B.

Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 3/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B.

Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C.

Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.7

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

C.

Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. 2.

The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. 2.

Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 4/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C.

Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

D.

Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E.

Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F.

Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

G.

Examine system and equipment test reports.

H.

Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I.

Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J.

Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K.

Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L.

Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M.

Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N.

Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

O.

Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P.

Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 5/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Q.

Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R.

Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10. S.

3.2

Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multi-zone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values. Interlocked systems are operating. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

PREPARATION A.

Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B.

Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.3

Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A.

Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC national standards and this Section.

B.

Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" or according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 6/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

D.

Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.4

FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A.

Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B.

Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C.

For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D.

Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E.

Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F.

Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G.

Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H.

Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I.

Check for airflow blockages.

J.

Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K.

Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5

CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A.

The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multi-zone, dualduct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.

B.

Adjust fans to deliver total design airflow within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer. 1.

Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 7/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a.

b. c.

d.

2.

4.

5.

6.

C.

Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a.

2.

Where sufficient space in sub-mains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

Re-measure each sub-main and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust sub-mains and branch ducts to design airflow within specified tolerances.

Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1.

E.

Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub-main ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflow within specified tolerances. 1.

D.

Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component. a.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflow within specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 8/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

MOTORS A.

Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

3.7

Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. Motor horsepower rating. Motor rpm. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

TEMPERATURE TESTING A.

During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B.

Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C.

Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.8

TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A.

Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B.

Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C.

Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D.

Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E.

Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F.

Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 9/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G.

Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H.

Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I.

Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J.

Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.

K.

Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.9

TOLERANCES A.

Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. 2.

3.10

Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

REPORTING

A.

Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B.

Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.11

FINAL REPORT

A.

General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B.

Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1.

C.

Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Fan curves. Manufacturers' test data. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 10/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Title page. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. Project name. Project location. Architect's name and address. Engineer's name and address. Contractor's name and address. Report date. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. Summary of contents, including the following: a. b. c.

11. 12. 13. 14.

f. g. h.

Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. Conditions of filters. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

F.

Design versus final performance. Notable characteristics of systems. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following: a. b. c. d. e.

E.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflow. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. Terminal units. Balancing stations.

Roof top Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1.

Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 11/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC i. j. k. 2.

Make and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

G.

Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). Number of belts, make, and size. Number of filters, type, and size.

Motor Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Fan rpm. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Outside airflow in cfm (L/s). Return airflow in cfm (L/s). Outside-air damper position. Return-air damper position. Vortex damper position.

Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following: 1.

Coil Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

2.

System identification. Location. Coil type. Number of rows. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.). Make and model number. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). Tube size in NPS (DN). Tube and fin materials. Circuiting arrangement.

Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C). e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C). f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C). TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 12/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC g. h. i. j. k. H.

Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C). Leaving-water temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa). Refrigerant suction temperature in degrees F (degrees C).

Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1.

Unit Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n.

2.

System identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and unit size. Manufacturer's serial number. Fuel type in input data. Output capacity in Btuh (kW). Ignition type. Burner-control types. Motor horsepower and rpm. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o.

I.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Entering-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Leaving-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Air temperature differential in degrees F (degrees C). Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Low-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). High-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). Manifold pressure in psig (kPa). High-temperature-limit setting in degrees F (degrees C). Operating set point in Btuh (kW). Motor voltage at each connection. Motor amperage for each phase. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW).

Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1.

Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 13/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC h.

2.

g.

Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Fan rpm. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1.

Report Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

K.

Make and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). Number of belts, make, and size.

Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. b. c. d. e.

J.

Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

Motor Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

System and air-handling unit number. Location and zone. Traverse air temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Duct size in inches (mm). Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). Design airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Design velocity in fpm (m/s). Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following: 1.

Unit Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

2.

System and air-handling unit identification. Location and zone. Test apparatus used. Area served. Air-terminal-device manufacturer. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. Air-terminal-device type and model number. Air-terminal-device size. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 14/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b. c. d. e. f. g. L.

2.

System and air-handling unit identification. Location and zone. Room or riser served. Coil make and size. Flow meter type.

Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Entering-water temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Leaving-water temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). Entering-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C). Leaving-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C).

Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following: 1.

Report Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

3.12

For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the

Unit Data: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

M.

Air velocity in fpm (m/s). Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Final velocity in fpm (m/s). Space temperature in degrees F (degrees C).

System-Coil Reports: following: 1.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Instrument type and manufacturer. Serial number. Application. Dates of use. Dates of calibration.

ADDITIONAL TESTS

A.

Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B.

Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 15/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15970 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.2

"Intrusion Detection" for building intrusion detection system. "Clock Control" for building clock control system. "Lighting Controls" for building lighting control system. "Fire Alarm" for fire and smoke detectors mounted in HVAC systems and equipment. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operations" for requirements that relate to this Section. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

DEFINITIONS A.

1.3

DDC: Direct-digital controls.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

B.

Control system includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.4

Building intrusion detection system specified in "Intrusion Detection." Building clock control system specified in "Clock Control." Building lighting control system specified in "Lighting Controls." Fire alarm system specified in "Fire Alarm."

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1.

B.

Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 1/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. Written description of sequence of operation. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data conductors. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

C.

ASHRAE BACnet Statement: PICS for each DDC system component (panel, zone controller, field devices, and operator workstation) proposed.

D.

Samples: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover.

E.

Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Software operating and upgrade manuals. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. Device address list. Printout of software application and graphic screens. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

F.

Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power system revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

G.

Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

H.

Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed air station. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. Calibration records and list of set points.

I.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

J.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 2/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an approved installer of the automatic control system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperaturecontrol systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D.

Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."

E.

Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system control components.

F.

Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.7

Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B.

Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Intrusion Detection" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

C.

Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Clock Control" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

D.

Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Lighting Controls" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

E.

Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

F.

Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation.

G.

Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panel Boards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

H.

Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 3/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC I.

1.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B.

Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjustment key.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Control Systems Components: a. b. c.

2.

DDC Systems: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

2.2

Air Monitor Corporation Honeywell, Incorporated; Home & Building Control Johnson Controls, Incorporated; Controls Group

Alerton Technologies, Incorporated Andover Controls Corporation Automated Logic Corporation Auto-Matrix, Incorporation; Auto-Flow Division CSI Control Systems International, Incorporated. Danfoss Automatic Controls Delta Controls Incorporated EDA Controls Corporation Electronic Systems USA, Incorporated Honeywell, Incorporated; Home & Building Control Johnson Controls, Incorporated; Controls Group Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group

DDC EQUIPMENT A.

Operator Station: Microcomputer station with printer.

B.

Workstation: IBM-compatible microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Processor: Intel Pentium MMX, MHz. Random Access Memory: 32 MB. Cache Memory: 256 kB.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 4/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Graphics: Super video graphic adapter (SVGA), minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels, 2.0MB EDO video memory. Monitor: 17 inches (432 mm), non-interlaced, color, with maximum 0.28-mm dot pitch. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. Floppy-Disk Drives: 1.44 MB. Hard-Disk Drive: 4.0 GB. CD-ROM Drive: 24x. Mouse: Three-button type. Modem: Auto-dial, internal, minimum 56-kBaud. Tape Backup Internal Zip-drive, 100 MB. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 95 or later. BACnet Conformance: Workstation shall support BACnet device and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas: a. b. c. d.

C.

4.

Print Head: 24 pin, 360 x 360 dpi resolution. Carriage: Wide, 132 characters per line of paper. Paper Handling: Fan-fold paper, with 2 cartons containing minimum of 2500 sheets each. Print Speed: Minimum of 120 characters per second.

Application Software: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

E.

Network. Functional groups. Standard application services supported. Standard objects supported.

Printer: Dot-matrix type as follows: 1. 2. 3.

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Input/output capability from operator station. Operator system access levels via software password. Database creation and support. Dynamic color graphic displays. Alarm processing. Event processing. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. Data collection. Graphic development on workstation. Maintenance management.

Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1.

2.

Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator station. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. b. c. d.

HVAC CONTROLS

Global communications. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. 15970 - 5/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4.

Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator station. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN in Ethernet IEEE 802.3, Class 3, minimum, with routers between LAN and other panels, with at least one communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas: a. b. c. d.

F.

Network. Functional groups. Standard application services supported. Standard objects supported.

Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. 2.

electronically

Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from or upload to operator station. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. b. c.

2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Global communications. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

CONTROL PANELS A.

Central (Master) Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel-rack-type cabinet with locking doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multicolor graphic displays, schematically showing system being controlled.

B.

Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting, located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels. 1.

2.

3.

4.

C.

Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, furniture-quality steel, or extrudedaluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and automatic switches; except safety devices. Mount devices with adjustments accessible through front of panel. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper-positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gages. Graphics: Color-coded graphic, laminated-plastic displays on doors, schematically showing system being controlled, with protective, clear plastic sheet bonded to entire door.

Alarm Panels: Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted in hinged-cover enclosure.

1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. 2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady. 3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady. 4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished. 5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company. HVAC CONTROLS 15970 - 6/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ANALOG CONTROLLERS A.

Step Controllers: Six- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.

B.

Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 degrees F (minus 23 to plus 21 degrees C), and single- or doublepole contacts.

C.

Electronic Controllers: Wheat-stone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. 1.

D.

2.5

Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.

Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. TIME CLOCKS

A.

Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts.

B.

Solid-state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs; 24-hour battery carryover; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; and system fault alarm.

2.6

SENSORS A.

Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. 1.

Thermistor temperature sensors as follows: a. b. c.

d.

e. f. g. HVAC CONTROLS

Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 degree F (0.3 degree C at calibration point. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches (20 cm) long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m). Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches (91 cm) long, flexible use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m); length as required. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting shielded from direct sunlight. 15970 - 7/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC h.

2.

d.

e. f. g. h.

c.

Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output. Room Sensors: With locking cover matching room thermostats, span of 25 to 90 percent relative humidity. Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.

Static-Pressure Transmitter: Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. b. c. d.

Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. Output: 4 to 20-mA. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25-inch wg (0 to 62 Pa). Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).

5.

Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; proportional output 4 to 20-mA.

6.

Space and Duct Humidity Transmitters: One pipe, directly proportional, with minimum sensing span of 20 to 80 percent relative humidity for 3- to 15-psig (21to 103-kPa) output signal, corrosion resistant and temperature compensated, and with factory-calibrated adjustment. a.

B.

Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches (20 cm long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m). Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches (91 cm) long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m); length as required. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting shielded from direct sunlight. Room Security Sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.

Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element. a. b.

4.

Room Security Sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws.

Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum. a. b. c.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Space Mounting: With covers to match thermostats.

Equipment operation sensors as follows: 1. 2.

Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa). Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60-psig (55 to 414-kPa).

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 8/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers, adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

C.

Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

D.

Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless steel or bronze paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vapor-proof type.

E.

Carbon-Monoxide Detectors: Single or multi-channel, dual-level detectors, using solidstate sensors with 3-year minimum life, maximum 15-minute sensor replacement, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F (minus 5 to plus 55 degrees C), calibrated for 50 and 100 ppm, with maximum 120-second response time to 100-ppm carbon monoxide.

F.

Carbon-Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F (minus 5 to plus 55 degrees C), calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20mA output, and wall mounted.

G.

Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state zircon cell sensing, suitable over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 degrees F (0 to 593 degrees C), calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20mA output, and wall mounted.

H.

Refrigerant Detectors: Dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors, with alarm preset for 300-ppm, alarm indicator light, alarm silence light and button, alarm test light and button, and trouble light. Provide auxiliary relay preset for 150-ppm.

I.

Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.

2.7

THERMOSTATS A.

Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-, or four-position, push-button or lever-operated fan switch. 1.

B.

Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF," "FAN HIGH-MED-LOWOFF." Provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.

Electric solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Automatic switching from heating to cooling. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. Short-cycle protection. Programming based on weekdays, Saturdays and Sundays Selection features include degree F or degree C display; 12- or 24-hour clock; keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto. Battery replacement without program loss. Thermostat display features include the following:

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 9/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Time of day. Actual room temperature. Programmed temperature. Programmed time. Duration of timed override. Day of week. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

C.

Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.

D.

Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral manual on-off-auto selector switch. 1. 2.

E.

Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature, with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

F.

Reset: Manual.

Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

H.

Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit, adequately supported. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches, with electrical ratings required by application. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

Fire-Protection Thermostats: UL listed with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) above normal maximum operating temperature, with the following: 1.

G.

Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. Dead Band: Maximum 2 degrees F (1 degree C).

Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. Thermometer: Exposed Color: Color from manufacturer's standard colors. Orientation: Horizontal.

Room thermostat accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: Locking, solid metal, ventilated. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Aspirating Boxes: For flush-mounted aspirating thermostats. 5. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, adjustment knob. HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 10/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

I.

Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

J.

Air stream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type, with adjustable set point in middle of range and adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

K.

Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or below set point. 1. 2.

L.

Electric High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or above set point. 1. 2.

M.

2.8

Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m). Quantity: One thermostat for every 20-sq. ft. (2-sq. m) of coil surface.

Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m). Quantity: One thermostat for every 20-sq. ft. (2-sq. m) of coil surface.

Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig (172-kPa), and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.

HUMIDISTATS A.

2.9

Duct-Mounted Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable 2 percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, single- or double-pole contacts.

ACTUATORS A.

Electric Motors: Sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. 1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

B.

Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. Non-spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m) and breakaway torque of 300-in.-lbf (33.9 N m). Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m). Non-spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m) and breakaway torque of 300-in.lbf (33.9 N m). Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m).

Electronic Damper Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 fullstroke cycles at rated torque.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 11/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

2.10 A.

Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20-mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. Temperature Rating 40 to 104 degrees F (4 to 40 degrees C). Run Time: 120 seconds.

Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.1084-inch (2.8-mm) minimum, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).

2. 3. 4.

A.

Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. (86.8 kgcm/sq. m) of damper.

DAMPERS

1.

2.11

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zincplated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 degrees F (minus 40 to plus 93 degrees C). For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg (995-Pa) when damper is being held by torque of 50-in.lbf (5.6 N m); when tested according to AMCA 500D.

CONTROL CABLE Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

B.

Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping are installed before proceeding with installation.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 12/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INSTALLATION A.

Install equipment level and plumb.

B.

Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

C.

Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

D.

Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches (1524 mm) above the floor. 1.

E.

Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. 2. 3.

Entrances. Public areas. Where indicated.

F.

Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

G.

Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

H.

Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

I.

Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

J.

Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping."

K.

Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts.

L.

Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

M.

In concealed locations, such as pipe chases and suspended ceilings with easy access, install copper tubing. Electrical metallic tubing materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."

3.3

ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A.

Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."

B.

Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C.

Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 13/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Install exposed cable in raceway. Install concealed cable in raceway. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables.

D.

Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E.

Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

3.4

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 1.

B.

Ground equipment. 1.

3.5

Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment, and retest. Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.

B.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

C.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 14/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

D.

Start, test, and adjust control systems. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control sequences. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation specified.

Verify DDC as follows: 1. 2. 3.

3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset controls, and occupied/unoccupied cycles. Verify operation of operator workstation. Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.

ON-SITE ASSISTANCE A.

Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

END OF SECTION 15970

HVAC CONTROLS

15970 - 15/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15940 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – SEQUENCES OF OPERATION Part 1 – GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: Division 15900 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements.

1.3

DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct digital control. B. VAV: Variable air volume.

1.4

CHILLED WATER SYSTEM A. General - The chiller plant control system shall monitor and control the chilled water system including the chiller(s), pump(s), and variable speed drive(s) as appropriate. B. The chiller plant control system shall have a fully editable user interface set-up via point and click on a standard windows screen. It shall not require special software tools or a building automation system technician to operate. C. The chiller plant control system shall include the following features: 1. Operator interface 2. System Start/Stop 3. Chiller and pump sequencing 4. Failure Status 5. Energy optimization routines 6. Chiller freeze protection 7. System and chiller status reports

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 1/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Operator interface - The chiller plant control system shall include the following operator interface elements: 1. Operational status screen to include: − Chiller System Status (Off/Soft Start/Normal/Ambient Lockout/Shutdown in Progress) − Chiller Plant Supply Water Setpoint − Chilled Water System Supply Water Temperature − Chilled Water System Return Water Temperature − Predictive chiller addition / subtraction status messages (i.e. “Next Compressor will be added if the system supply water temp [ 41.7 ] exceeds [ 43.5 ] degrees for [ 10 ] minutes.” Or “Next Compressor will be subtracted if there is no add request and the actual system Delta T [ 10.7 ] degrees is less than [ 7.5 ] degrees for [ 10 ] minutes.”) 2. Screen that allows editing of the following data (to be performed without entering program code editor): − − − − − − −

Supply Water Setpoint System Soft Loading Parameters Ambient Lockout Parameters Chiller Compressor Addition Parameters Chiller Compressor Subtraction Parameters Alarm Handling Setup Security Setup

3. Individual Chiller Graphic(s) to include all data listed on the supplementary Chiller System Point List, including: − − − − − − −

Chiller Name Chiller Operating Mode Chilled Water Setpoint Chiller RLA % Entering Chiller Water Temperature Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Evaporator Flow Status

E. System Start/Stop - The chilled water system shall start in response to a binary signal from an external source such as the building automation system, with the option to use outside ambient temperature lockout. 1. Upon the start of the chilled water system the chiller plant control system shall automatically start Trend Log Reports to include: a. Hourly logging of system shall include the following points: − Outside Air Dry Bulb − System Chilled Water Setpoint − System Chilled Water Supply Temperature − System Chilled Water Return Temperature − Operating Status of each chiller − Operating Status of pumps HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 2/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F. Module Sequencing - The chiller plant control system will start and stop the chilled water pump(s) and chillers based upon system load. 1. When the chilled water system is enabled the chiller plant control system shall: a. Send an Enable signal to the lead chiller. b. Upon receiving the enable signal the chiller shall enable its chilled water pump. c. Upon confirmation of evaporator water flow the chiller shall continue its prestart sequence and start its compressor(s). d. Upon the start of each chiller the Chiller Plant Control system shall automatically start chiller specific Trend Log Reports to include: i. Hourly logging of chiller − Unit Chilled Water Setpoint − Compressor(s) RLA − Evaporator Entering Water Temp − Evaporator Leaving Water Temp − Evaporator Approach Temp ii. Five-minute logging of chiller: − Unit Chilled Water Setpoint − Compressor(s) RLA − Evaporator Entering Water Temp − Evaporator Leaving Water Temp 2. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the start of the next chiller in the sequence whenever insufficient chilled water capacity exists continuously, as indicated by supply water temperature deviation from system chilled water temperature setpoint, is not met for [ 20 ] minutes. a. The chiller plant control system will unload operating chillers to an operator editable current limit prior to starting a lag chiller. b. Lag chillers shall start in a similar manner to the lead chiller start sequence. 3. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the shut down of the next chiller in the sequence whenever excess chilled water capacity, as determined by the system supply and chiller return water temperatures, exists for [ 20 ] minutes. a. The chiller shall shut down its pump when the chiller determines it is safe to do so. 4. Upon sensing a chiller failure the chiller plant control system shall shut down the failed chiller immediately and initiate the start of the next chiller in the rotation sequence. 5. The chiller plant control system shall control individual chiller setpoints to maintain the system supply water temperature at setpoint. 6. The design system chilled water setpoint shall be [ 42 ] degrees F and editable by the operator. 7. Reset of the system chilled water supply temperature upward shall be allowed only when a single chiller is operating. The maximum reset chilled water setpoint shall be [ 5 ] degrees F above the base setpoint. Reset shall be accomplished using critical valve position OR system return chilled water temperature OR outside air dry bulb. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 3/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. The system chilled water supply temperature shall not be reset if the space relative humidity rises above [ 60% ].

G. Air-cooled chiller freeze protection 1. If required by the chiller manufacturer the chiller shall be permitted to start its pump for unit freeze protection. H. Diagnostics/Protection - the Building Automation System shall be able to alarm from all sensed points and diagnostic alarms monitored by the chiller controller. I.

Chiller Status Report - Provide an operating status report for each chiller. The report(s) shall provide the present status for the following information to provide the operator with critical chiller operating data. − − − − − − − − − − − −

J.

1.5

Compressor On/Off Status Compressor Starts/Run Hours Compressor Phase 1/2/3 Percent RLA - separate for each compressor Compressor Current Draw - RLA Percent Active Chiller Diagnostics or Alarms Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Entering Chilled Water Temperature Chilled Water Setpoint Refrigerant Temperature Evaporator - Separate for each circuit Operating Mode Chiller Model and Serial Number Outside Air Dry Bulb

Demand Limiting - As part of the demand limiting scheme on the building, the chiller plant control system shall be able to monitor and reduce peak power demand through the limiting of chiller current draw.

AIR COOLED MODULAR CHILLER A. MECHANICAL COOLING MODULES 1. The Master Controller operates the independent refrigeration circuits based on the inputs from its integrated chilled water sensors. Every 24 hours the master controller will select a new lead compressor. 2. The Master Controller utilizes return water temperature control. Based on the set points (which are field programmed into the controller) and the return water temperature of the system the chiller will enable and disable all refrigerant circuits to meet the system load. All compressors are either on or off and do not modulate. For a full description of the available system set points and how they affect system operation please see the Airstack User’s Manual.

B. PUMP SEQUENCE OF OPERATION HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 4/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. The Pump Module incorporates a lead and a standby pump. The lead pump may be selected and rotated manually by the “Lead-Lag” switch located in the pump control panel. Whenever the Pump Module is enabled (by applying power to the module and closing the dry-contact start signal to the control system) the lead pump will start. 2.

Once the system is in operation a proof of flow signal is monitored by the control system. This signal is received from an integrated differential pressure switch installed across the pumping system’s common inlet and outlet. If this signal is interrupted for more than 4-seconds the control system will automatically shutdown the lead pump and start the stand-by pump. An associated 24vac alarm signal will be enabled and may be monitored by the customer.

3. During a loss of flow situation the Mechanical Cooling Modules will be automatically shut down by the Master Controller. Once flow is reestablished the Mechanical Cooling Modules will automatically restart. An alarm will be generated at the Master Controller for troubleshooting purposes but will not affect the operation of the system as long as flow has been successfully reestablished. 4. During a loss of flow situation, as indicated by the differential pressure switch across the pumping system, the chiller system will shut-down and the stand-by pump will be engaged. Once flow is reestablished the chiller system will automatically restart. If during standby pump operation there is again an indication of a loss of flow by the differential pressure switch the stand-by pump will be shut down as well as the chiller system. In order to restart the system after this second loss of flow the cause of the fault must be corrected and the pumping system must be reset manually. (Note: Once the stand-by pump is engaged flow must be re-established within 4-seconds to avoid a second loss of flow indication by the control system.)

C. SEQUENCE TIMING 1.

The pump module and mechanical cooling modules may be started and stopped remotely through a two-wire dry contact interlock. Additionally, both the pump module and master mechanical cooling module can provide a 24cvac, 5va feedback signal for an alarm condition. If a BAS System is sequencing the Airstack Chiller the following timing is recommended:

D. START-UP 1.

Enable the chilled water pump via the two-wire dry contact interlock at the Airstack Pump Modules Terminal Strip. This must be done no less than 10-seconds before enabling the Mechanical Cooling Modules. a. Note: If pumps are provided by others, insure they are started at least 10 seconds prior to initiating the start signal to the Airstack Chiller.

1. Enable the Airstack Mechanical Cooling System via a two-wire dry contact interlock (EX2) at the chiller Master Controller Terminal Strip. 2. Monitor the fault signal at both the Airstack Pump Module Terminal Strip (if applicable) and the Mechanical Cooling System’s Master Controller Terminal HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 5/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Strip. These are both 24vac signals. E. Shut-Down 1. Disable the Mechanical Cooling System by opening the two-wire interlock (EX2) at the chiller Master Controller Terminal Strip. 2. Shut Down the chilled water pumps no sooner than 10-seconds after the chiller has been disabled.

1.6

HOT WATER SYSTEM A.

Boiler System: The boiler system shall be selected for operation and shall remain in constant operation while building has a need for heating.

B.

Refer to diagrams on drawings regarding operation of system.

C.

Pumps: Pumps HWP-1, HWP-2, shall be capable of being started and stopped manually, or automatically by the BAS, through an H-O-A switch on the starter.

D.

Existing boiler controller shall be upgraded if necessary to provide points new DDC controller with BACnet Interfaces.

E.

Boilers 1 and 2 will be operated with Lead-Lag control. The Lead Boiler shall maintain supply water temperature setpoint. If the Lead Boiler fails, the Lag Boiler shall be energized. Provide weekly alternation of the Lead Boiler.

F.

To prevent short cycling, the boiler system shall run for a minimum of 5 min (adj) and be off a minimum of 1 min (adj) unless shutdown on safeties or outside air conditions. The boiler shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls.

G.

Refer to boiler specification section for additional information.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 6/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

1.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT A.

Occupied Mode:

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 7/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

15940 - 8/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

B.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Unoccupied Mode:

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 9/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

1.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FAN COIL UNITS A.

B.

Occupancy - The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the ASC via a binary input. Valid Occupancy modes for the ASC shall be: 1.

Occupied: Normal operating mode for occupied spaces or daytime operation. When the unit is in the occupied mode the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the ASC.

2.

Unoccupied: Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime operation. When the unit is in unoccupied mode the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The hardwired or communicated setpoint is not used in unoccupied. When the space temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the ASC shall bring on 100% of the primary heating or cooling capacity.

3.

Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time. During the override the unit shall run in occupied mode.

Heat Cool Mode - The Heat Cool mode can be set by a communicated value or automatically by the ASC. In standalone or auto mode the ASC shall automatically determine the Heat Cool mode by integrating over time between the active setpoint and the space temperature. 1.

Heat Cool Setpoint- The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local hardwired setpoint, the ASC default setpoint or a communicated value. The ASC uses the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local hardwired setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a hardwired setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the ASC shall use the communicated value. a) The occupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be limited by adjustable parameters in the ASC to prevent them from being set too low or too high. These limits do not apply in the unoccupied mode. In the Unoccupied mode the ASC shall always use the stored default (Unoccupied) setpoints. These setpoints shall be widened to accommodate night setback and shall be adjustable. Setpoint Heating Setpoint Low Limit Cooling Setpoint Low Limit Heating Setpoint High Limit Cooling Setpoint High Limit

C.

Default Value 40°F 40°F 105°F 110°F

Cooling Operation - When the unit is in cooling mode, the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the active cooling setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Cooling Setpoint Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

Default Value 74°F 85°F 15940 - 10/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

78°F

The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity. D.

Heating Operation - When the unit is in heating mode, the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Heating Setpoint Unoccupied Heating Setpoint Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint

Default Value 71°F 60°F 67°F

The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. E.

Transition from Unoccupied to Occupied - When the unit transitions from unoccupied mode to the occupied mode, morning warm-up/cool down and random start routines shall be activated. 1. Morning Warm-Up - When there is a call for heating and the space temperature is three degrees F or more below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warmup sequence shall be activated. During warm-up the fan shall be turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating capacity shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the occupied heating setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode. 2. Morning Cool-down - When there is a call for cooling and the space temperature is three degrees F or more over the occupied cooling setpoint a morning cooldown sequence shall be activated. During morning cool-down the fan shall be turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the cooling capacity shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the occupied cooling setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode. 3. Random Start - A randomly generated 3-32 second delay shall be activated when electric power is applied to the ASC or after receiving a communicated occupied command.

F.

Fan Operation - The fan shall be configurable to operate continuously or cycling in all occupied modes. During Unoccupied operation, the fan shall cycle between off and high regardless of the fan configuration. The fan can be configured to run continuous at a configured speed, cycling or off. When configured for cycling the ASC shall cycle on and off based on the required capacity.

G.

Hydronic Cooling Valve Control- If the unit is in the cooling mode the ASC shall cycle on and off the cooling valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain space comfort. The cooling valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the heating capacity is enabled.

H.

Hydronic Heating Valve Control- If the unit is in the heating mode, the ASC shall cycle on and off the heating valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain the space comfort. The heating valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the cooling capacity is enabled.

I.

Generic Binary Output - The controller shall have a 24V output to be controlled from a BAS.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 11/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

J.

Discharge Air Temperature - The ASC shall be capable of passing a discharge air temperature to the BAS.

K.

The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the ASC the occupied space heating and cooling temperature setpoints. The BAS shall also send the following commands: Occupied Unoccupied Heat/Cool Mode Priority Shutdown Commands If communication with the BAS is lost, the ASC shall use predetermined default setpoints and operate in the occupied mode.

L.

SAFETIES AND ALARMS 1. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it shall be feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown. 2. Fan Status - The ASC shall monitor the fan outputs to determine fan status. 3. Filter Status - A maintenance timer shall be incorporated into the ASC to signal a filter change after a configurable number of fan run hours. 4. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service tool, BAS, or by cycling power to the unit. Some diagnostics can only be reset by cycling power or replacing the failed sensor. 5. Fan Off Delay - After heating has being controlled off, the ASC shall keep the fan energized for an additional 30 seconds. The purpose of this action is to remove residual heat from the heating source. 6. Condensate Overflow - When the condensate overflow switch trips, the ASC shall shut the unit down, close all valves and close the outside air damper (if present). 7. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following ASC diagnostics. The ASC shall initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition. Diagnostic Condensate Overflow Low Coil Temperature Detection Space Temperature Failure Entering Water Temp Failure Discharge Air Temperature Local Setpoint Failure Local Fan Mode Failure Maintenance Required

M.

Manual Reset required Yes No Yes No No No No Yes

TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for troubleshooting. This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of additional tools.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 12/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Unit Identification - The ASC shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a command from a service tool or BAS. The ASC shall also be able to send the unit neuron ID and the program ID to a service tool or BAS for unit identification from the controller board or space sensor with no need of additional tools. 3. Water Valve Override - This command from a service tool or BAS shall cause all valves to stroke fully open for water balancing. N.

COMMUNICATIONS 1. Data Sharing - All ASC's shall be able to communicate in a peer-to-peer environment over a twisted pair of communications wire. Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single space sensor. The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool mode, occupancy, fan speed, entering water temperature, economizer, and capacity control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure seamless cooperation between the units.

1.9

BLOWER COIL UNITS A.

B.

Occupancy - The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the ASC via a binary input. Valid Occupancy modes for the ASC shall be: 1.

Occupied: Normal operating mode for occupied spaces or daytime operation. When the unit is in the occupied mode the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the ASC.

2.

Unoccupied: Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime operation. When the unit is in unoccupied mode the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The hardwired or communicated setpoint is not used in unoccupied. When the space temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the ASC shall bring on 100% of the primary heating or cooling capacity.

3.

Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time. During the override the unit shall run in occupied mode.

Heat Cool Mode - The Heat Cool mode can be set by a communicated value or automatically by the ASC. In standalone or auto mode the ASC shall automatically determine the Heat Cool mode by integrating over time between the active setpoint and the space temperature. 4.

Heat Cool Setpoint- The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local hardwired setpoint, the ASC default setpoint or a communicated value. The ASC uses the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local hardwired setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a hardwired setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the ASC shall use the communicated value.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 13/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a) The occupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be limited by adjustable parameters in the ASC to prevent them from being set too low or too high. These limits do not apply in the unoccupied mode. In the Unoccupied mode the ASC shall always use the stored default (Unoccupied) setpoints. These setpoints shall be widened to accommodate night setback and shall be adjustable. Setpoint Heating Setpoint Low Limit Cooling Setpoint Low Limit Heating Setpoint High Limit Cooling Setpoint High Limit C.

Default Value 40°F 40°F 105°F 110°F

Cooling Operation - When the unit is in cooling mode, the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the active cooling setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Cooling Setpoint Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint

Default Value 74°F 85°F 78°F

The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity. D.

Heating Operation - When the unit is in heating mode, the ASC shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Heating Setpoint Unoccupied Heating Setpoint Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint

Default Value 71°F 60°F 67°F

The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. E.

Transition from Unoccupied to Occupied - When the unit transitions from unoccupied mode to the occupied mode, morning warm-up/cool down and random start routines shall be activated. 5. Morning Warm-Up - When there is a call for heating and the space temperature is three degrees F or more below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warmup sequence shall be activated. During warm-up the fan shall be turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating capacity shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the occupied heating setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode. 6. Morning Cool-down - When there is a call for cooling and the space temperature is three degrees F or more over the occupied cooling setpoint a morning cooldown sequence shall be activated. During morning cool-down the fan shall be turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the cooling capacity shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the occupied cooling setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode. 7. Random Start - A randomly generated 3-32 second delay shall be activated

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 14/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

when electric power is applied to the ASC or after receiving a communicated occupied command. F.

Fan Operation - The fan shall be configurable to operate continuously or cycling in all occupied modes. During Unoccupied operation, the fan shall cycle between off and high regardless of the fan configuration. The fan can be configured to run continuous at a configured speed, cycling or off. When configured for cycling the ASC shall cycle on and off based on the required capacity.

G.

Hydronic Cooling Valve Control- If the unit is in the cooling mode the ASC shall cycle on and off the cooling valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain space comfort. The cooling valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the heating capacity is enabled.

H.

Hydronic Heating Valve Control- If the unit is in the heating mode, the ASC shall cycle on and off the heating valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain the space comfort. The heating valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the cooling capacity is enabled.

I.

Generic Binary Output - The controller shall have a 24V output to be controlled from a BAS.

J.

Discharge Air Temperature - The ASC shall be capable of passing a discharge air temperature to the BAS.

K.

The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the ASC the occupied space heating and cooling temperature setpoints. The BAS shall also send the following commands: Occupied Unoccupied Heat/Cool Mode Priority Shutdown Commands If communication with the BAS is lost, the ASC shall use predetermined default setpoints and operate in the occupied mode.

L.

SAFETIES AND ALARMS 8. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it shall be feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown. 9. Fan Status - The ASC shall monitor the fan outputs to determine fan status. 10. Filter Status - A maintenance timer shall be incorporated into the ASC to signal a filter change after a configurable number of fan run hours. 11. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service tool, BAS, or by cycling power to the unit. Some diagnostics can only be reset by cycling power or replacing the failed sensor. 12. Fan Off Delay - After heating has being controlled off, the ASC shall keep the fan energized for an additional 30 seconds. The purpose of this action is to remove residual heat from the heating source. 13. Condensate Overflow - When the condensate overflow switch trips, the ASC shall shut the unit down, close all valves and close the outside air damper (if present).

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 15/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

14. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following ASC diagnostics. The ASC shall initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition. Diagnostic Condensate Overflow Low Coil Temperature Detection Space Temperature Failure Entering Water Temp Failure Discharge Air Temperature Local Setpoint Failure Local Fan Mode Failure Maintenance Required M.

Manual Reset required Yes No Yes No No No No Yes

TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for troubleshooting. This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of additional tools. 5. Unit Identification - The ASC shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a command from a service tool or BAS. The ASC shall also be able to send the unit neuron ID and the program ID to a service tool or BAS for unit identification from the controller board or space sensor with no need of additional tools. 6. Water Valve Override - This command from a service tool or BAS shall cause all valves to stroke fully open for water balancing.

N.

COMMUNICATIONS 2. Data Sharing - All ASC's shall be able to communicate in a peer-to-peer environment over a twisted pair of communications wire. Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single space sensor. The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool mode, occupancy, fan speed, entering water temperature, economizer, and capacity control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure seamless cooperation between the units.

1.10

OUTSIDE AIR TERMINAL UNITS A.

The Building Automation System (BAS) shall perform the following VAV Air System (VAS) control strategies, appropriate to the given occupancy mode of the system, as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day schedule for the system. 1. The BAS will intitiate the Normal Start mode when it receives an Occupied command from the schedule associated with the VAV Air System. The VAS shall enable ventilation functions for the associated ERU and VAV boxes. The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 16/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The ERU shall control to either its cooling occupied setpoints, as determined by the Outside Air Temperature and BAS. Each VAV box in the VAV Air System shall modulate its air damper to control to its local occupied setpoints. 2. Occupied Mode a) The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into Off/Standby mode as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day schedule for the system. The VAV boxes shall control to their individual unoccupied temperature setpoints, and all ventilation functions shall be disabled. b) Each VAV box that is associated with the VAS shall control its local reheat source to control to the occupied heating setpoint, and shall modulate box airflow to maintain the space CO2 setpoint for the zone being served by the VAV box. 3. Unoccupied Mode a) The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into Off/Standby mode as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day schedule for the system. b) After the VAV boxes have been commanded to unoccupied, the VAS shall command the associated ERU to Unoccupied mode. Supply fan shall be shut down, heating and cooling shall be disabled, outdoor air damper shall be closed, and all ventilation functions shall be disabled. 1.11

ELECTRICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN A.

1.12

1.13

The Electrical Room Exhaust Fan shall be thermostatically controlled by a wall mounted thermostat and shall cycle on and off to control temperature setpoint.

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A.

The unit shall come equipped with manufacturer provided microprocessor controls and wall-mounted temperature sensor.

B.

The unit shall be controlled by the wall-mounted sensor and shall cycle on and off to control temperature setpoint.

UNIT HEATER A.

The unit heater shall come equipped with unit mounted thermostat and shall cycle on and off to control temperature setpoint. END OF SECTION 15940

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 - 17/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, D.C.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

15940 - 18/18

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15910 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.2

Backdraft dampers. Manual-volume dampers. Fire dampers. Duct silencers. Turning vanes. Duct-mounted access doors and panels. Flexible ducts. Flexible connectors. Duct accessory hardware.

Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors and panels Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric damper actuators. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Backdraft dampers Manual-volume dampers Fire dampers Duct silencers Duct-mounted access doors and panels Flexible ducts

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loading, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection. Detail the following: 1. 2.

Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations. Fire damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and panels.

DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

1.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards: 1. 2.

1.4

NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SHEET METAL MATERIALS A.

Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B.

Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish.

C.

Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts.

D.

Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E.

Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm) length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.2

BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A.

Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.

B.

Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D.

Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS A.

General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1.

B.

Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside air stream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1.

2. 3. 4. C.

2.4

Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flange-less frames where indicated for installing in ducts. Blade Seals: Neoprene. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 1.

D.

Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple-damper assembly.

Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch(2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

FIRE DAMPERS A.

General: Labeled to UL 555.

B.

Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.

C.

Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of air stream fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel. DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) or 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick as indicated, and length to suit application. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.

E.

Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F.

Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.

G.

Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.

H.

Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 or 212 degrees F (74 or 100 degrees C) rated as indicated.

2.5

DUCT SILENCERS A.

General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.

B.

Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested according to ASTM E 84.

C.

Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, solid sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, perforated sheet metal for inner casing.

D.

Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thickness for diameters listed below: 1. 2. 3.

Up to 24 Inches (600 mm): 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). 26 through 40 Inches (660 through 1000 mm): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). 42 through 52 Inches (1060 through 1300 mm): 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

E.

Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.

F.

Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5 percent compression.

G.

Non-fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Moisture-proof non-fibrous material.

H.

Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.

I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests: DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

3.

2.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both directions through silencer. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity. Leak Test: Test units for air-tightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6-inch wg (1500-Pa) static pressure, whichever is greater.

TURNING VANES A.

Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible."

B.

Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o/c; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o/c; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.

C.

Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.7

DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A.

General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B.

Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

C.

Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

D.

Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E.

Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.8

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.

General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

B.

Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

C.

Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with poly-chloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26-oz./sq. yd. (880-g/sq. m). DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

D.

Tensile Strength: 480-lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp, and 360-lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling.

Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone environment. 1. 2.

2.9

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Minimum Weight: 26-oz./sq. yd. (880-g/sq. m). Tensile Strength: 530-lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp, and 440-lbf/inch (77 N/mm) in the filling.

FLEXIBLE DUCTS A.

General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B.

Flexible Ducts, Un-insulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.

C.

Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

2.10

Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500 Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.

ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A.

Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B.

Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zincplated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head set screw.

C.

Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.

D.

Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.

B.

Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

C.

Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

D.

Install fire dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. 1.

E.

Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 1. 2.

F.

3.2

Install fusible links in fire dampers.

Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.

Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B.

Adjust fire dampers for proper action.

C.

Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

END OF SECTION 15910

DUCT ACCESSORIES

15910 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15900 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL 1.0

SECTION INCLUDES

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12

Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section Products Not Furnished or Installed But Integrated with the Work of this Section Related Sections Description Approved Control System Contractor Quality Assurance Codes and Standards System Performance Submittals Warranty Ownership of Proprietary Material

1.1

PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A.

Division 15 - Hydronic Piping: 1. Control Valves 2. Flow Switches 3. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets 4. Flow Meters

B.

Division 15 - Refrigerant Piping: 1. Pressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets

C.

Division 15 - Ductwork Accessories: 1. Automatic Dampers 2. Airflow Stations 3. Terminal Unit Controls

1.2

PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A.

Division 15 - Refrigeration Equipment: 1. Refrigerant Leak Detectors

B.

Division 15 - Rooftop Air Handling Equipment: 1. Thermostats 2. Sensors 3. Controllers

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 1/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.3

PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

A.

Division 15 – Heat Generation Equipment 1. Boilers

B.

Division 15 – Refrigeration Equipment 1. Chiller controls

C.

Division 15 – Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment 1. Discharge Air Temperature Control 2. Economizer Control 3. Air volume control

D.

Division 15 – Variable Frequency Drives 1. Pump controls

E.

Division 16 – Utility Metering Equipment 1. Electrical meters

1.4

RELATED SECTIONS

A.

The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements are a part of these Specifications and shall be used in conjunction with this Section as a part of the Contract Documents. Consult them for further instructions pertaining to this work. The Contractor is bound by the provisions of Division 0 and Division 1.

B.

The following sections constitute related work: 1. Division 1 - Commissioning 2. Division 15 - Basic Mechanical Requirements 3. Division 15 - Air Distribution Materials and Methods 4. Division 15 - Refrigeration Piping 5. Division 15 - Valves, Fittings, and Piping Accessories 6. Division 15 - Refrigeration Equipment 7. Division 15 - Air Handling Equipment 8. Division 15 - Air Distribution 9. Division 15 - Test and Balance 10. Division 16 - Basic Electrical Requirements 11. Division 16 - Basic Electrical Materials 12. Division 16 - General Wiring 13. Division 16 - Equipment and Motor Wiring 14. Division 16 - Uninterruptible Power Supply 15. Division 16 - Emergency Systems 16. Division 16 - Fire Alarm Systems

1.5

DESCRIPTION

A.

General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications, and consist of a peer-to-peer network of digital building control panels and operator workstation(s). The operator workstation shall be a personal computer (PC) including a color monitor, mouse and keyboard. The PC shall provide users an interface with the system though dynamic color graphics of building areas and systems.

B.

Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of systems defined for control on this project.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 2/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited by operator password. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation of the control system and have access to all designated data.

D.

The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected equipment.

E.

Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A modem or network communications card shall be provided to for remote access to the system.

1.6

APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS

A.

Approved Control System Contractors and Manufacturers:

Manufacturer Name

Product Line

Trane

Tracer Summit

Johnson Controls

Metasys

Siemens

Apogee

1.

Contractor Name/Address Trane Johnson Controls Siemens -

Contact

The above list of manufacturers applies to operator workstation software, controller software, the custom application programming language, Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, and Application Specific Controllers. All other products specified herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.

1.7

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

System Installer Qualifications 1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System Manufacturer of not less than three years. 2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. 3. The installer shall have an office within [50] miles of the project site and provide [24-hour] response in the event of a customer call.

1.8

CODES AND STANDARDS

A.

Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. International Building Code (IBC) 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 4. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed. 5. [Optional] ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 (BACnet) 6. [Optional] ANSI/EIA/CEA-709.1 (LonTalk)

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 3/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.9

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A.

Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following: 1. 2. 3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

8. 9.

Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of [20] dynamic points with current data displayed within [20] seconds of the request. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within [30] seconds. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be [10] seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within [10] seconds. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will be current, within the prior [60] seconds. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed [45] seconds. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every [5] seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every [5] seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within [5] seconds of each other. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values reported by the specified system. Table 1 Reporting Accuracy Measured Variable Space Temperature Ducted Air Outside Air Water Temperature Delta-T Relative Humidity Water Flow Air Flow (terminal) Air Flow (measuring stations) Air Pressure (ducts) Air Pressure (space) Water Pressure Electrical Power Carbon Monoxide (CO) Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

Reported Accuracy ±0.5°C [±1°F] ±1.0°C [±2°F] ±1.0°C [±2°F] ±0.5°C [±1°F] ±0.15°C[±0.25°F] ±5% RH ±5% of full scale ±10% of reading *Note 1 ±5% of reading ±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.] ±3 Pa [±0.01 "W.G.] ±2% of full scale *Note 2 ± 5% of reading *Note 3 ± 5% of reading ± 50 PPM

Note 1: (10%-100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%) Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure Note 3: * not including utility supplied meters

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 4/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.10

SUBMITTALS

A.

Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and specifications. [Six (6)] copies are required. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats.

B.

Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.

C.

Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed.

D.

Submit the following within [60] days of contract award: 1.

A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer and model number. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include:

2. 3. 4.

a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Building Controllers Custom Application Controllers Application Specific Controllers Operator Interface Computer(s) Portable Operator Workstation Auxiliary Control Devices Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling h) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled i) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names j) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project k) Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 5/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

E.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (asbuilt) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include: 1.

2. 3.

Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual shall include: a) Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. b) Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables. c) Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor. d) Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware. e) A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided. f) One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the project. g) Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. h) Complete original issue media for all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software. i) Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems. j) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions.

F.

Training Materials: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training material for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 6/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.11

WARRANTY

A.

Warrant all work as follows: 1.

2.

3.

4.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips, upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.

1.12

OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A.

All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These items include but are not limited to: 1. Project graphic images 2. Record drawings 3. Project database 4. Project-specific application programming code 5. All documentation

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 7/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.0

SECTION INCLUDES

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10

Materials Communication Operator Interface Application and Control Software Building Controllers Custom Application Controllers Application Specific Controllers Input/Output Interface Auxiliary Control Devices Radio Frequency (RF) Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System

2.1

MATERIALS

A.

All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. The installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

2.2

COMMUNICATION

A.

This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed BACnet for communications between Building Controllers and PC Workstations. LonTalk sub-networks shall be used for communications between Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers and Application Specific Controllers.

B.

The controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the DDC system internetwork.

C.

All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator interfaces. This may be either a network interface node for connection to the Ethernet network or an RS-232 port for Point to Point connection.

D.

Remote operator interface via a 56K baud modem shall allow for communication with any and all controllers on this network as described in the following paragraph.

E.

Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows: 1.

Connection of an operator interface device to any one building controller on the internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other building controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all building controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one building controller on the internetwork.

2.

All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one building controller shall be readable by any other building controller on the internetwork. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform internetwork value passing.

F. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 8/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.3

OPERATOR INTERFACE

A.

Operator Interface. Furnish [1] PC based workstations as shown on the system drawings. Each workstation shall be able to access all information in the system. Workstations shall reside on the same high-speed network as the building controllers, and also be able to dial into the system.

B.

Workstation information access shall use the BACnet Protocol. Communication shall use the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Remote communications shall use the BACnet Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol.

C.

Hardware. Each operator workstation shall consist of the following: 1.

2.

D.

System Software 1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

E.

Personal Computer. Furnish IBM-compatible PCs to be used as DDC system workstation. The CPU shall be a minimum of an Intel Pentium 4 or AMD Athlon 64 processor and operate at a minimum 2.2 GHz. Include a minimum 512 Megabytes of RAM, 48X CD ROM drive, 80 Gigabyte hard disk, and two-button mouse. Furnish all required serial, parallel, and network communication ports, and all cables for proper system operation. The PC shall include a minimum 17", color monitor with 1024 x 768 screen resolution. Modems. Furnish auto-dial telephone modems and associated cables as required for communication to remote buildings, and workstations. The modem shall be capable of transmitting at up to 56K baud, and communicate over voice-grade telephone lines.

Operating System. Furnish a commercially available, concurrent multi-tasking operating system. Acceptable operating systems are Microsoft Windows XP Professional. System Graphics. The Operator Workstation software shall be graphically oriented. The system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between graphic displays and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen. The system graphics shall be able to be modified while the system is on line. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic points on a graphic. Dynamic points shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation of equipment. Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a sequence of images reflecting the position of analog outputs, such as valve or damper positions (V17). Graphics shall be capable of launching other PC applications. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of commonly available graphics packages such as Corel Paint Shop Pro. The graphics generation package shall create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as BMP, GIF and JPEG. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators, including 2dimensional and 3-dimensional graphic depictions. The library shall include a minimum of 300 such files available for use by the Owner. This library shall also include standard graphical representations of equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program. Engineering Units. Allow for selection of the desired engineering units (i.e. Inch pound or SI) in the system. Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the desired units for each measurement. Engineering units on this project shall be Inch Pound.

System Applications. Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation. 15900 - 9/31 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall be updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the database for that panel. 2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on magnetic media. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system. 3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a graphical method of configuring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices, and assign modems to devices. This shall allow for future system changes or additions. 4. On-Line Help and Training. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all system functions and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help shall be available through the use of hypertext links onscreen. 5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’s access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 6. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. 7. Alarm Notification. Alarm messages shall use full language, easily recognized descriptors for alarm. System shall allow the user to have up to 10 popup windows appear for incoming alarms. The popup dialog shall allow the user to silence and acknowledge alarms, view an expanded message or graphic, and add and save comments for the alarm. 8. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and reactions for each object in the system. 9. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to be taken, by object, during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, start a custom control program, displaying messages, dialing out to remote workstations, paging or text message to a cell phone, forwarding to an e-mail address, providing audible annunciation or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by workstation and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternate operator specified alarm receipt device. For text messaging, the system shall support TAP protocol including parities 7-E-1 and 8-n-1, such that if the system fails to dial out/connect with one parity it will automatically try the other one. 10. Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from any location in the system. The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms from events. Alarms shall be sorted in up to 5 color-coded categories based on Owner preference (V17). Include an alarm count summary for each alarm category on the system toolbar. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation. Provide a comment field in the event log that allows a user to add specific comments associated with any alarm. 11. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a trend log for any data in the system. This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend intervals of 30 15900 - 10/31 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

12.

13.

14.

15.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

seconds,1, 5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, once a week, and once a month shall be selectable. Each trend shall accommodate up to 64 system objects. The system operator shall be able to determine how many samples are stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and be archived on the workstation hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be viewed and printed from the operator interface software. Trends must be viewable in a text-based format or graphically. Trends shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages. Dynamic Graphical Trending. The system shall have the ability to save the data collected by a trend object and display that collected data in a graphical chart. Trend viewing capabilities shall include the ability to show up to 10 points on a chart, to include live and/or historical data. Each data point trend line shall be an individual color, and include on-graph icons that represent associated events/alarms, manual overrides, and automated changes that have occurred over the time frame represented on the chart. Navigation and viewing functions shall include scrolling and zooming of x and y axes, and a trace display of the associated time stamp, and values for any selected point along the x-axis. Trend data shall be able to be stored for up to 10 years on the PC workstation.

Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs. Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building controllers and workstations shall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able to automatically synchronize all system clocks; daily from any operator designated device in the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects. Reports and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. The operator shall be able to designate reports that shall be printed or stored to disk at selectable intervals. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user.

i.

ii. iii. iv. v.

a)

Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title.

b)

Standard Reports. The following standard system reports shall be provided for this project. These reports shall be readily customized to the project by the owner. Electrical Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand for each building meter. Provide an annual (12 month) summary report showing the monthly electrical consumption and peak demand for each meter. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current alarms. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides in effect. Schedule Report: Provide a summary of all schedules including Holiday and Exception schedules. Commissioning Report: Provide a one time report that lists all equipment with the unit configuration and present operation.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 11/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC vi.

F.

Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum, maximum and average outdoor air temperature and the number of heating and cooling degree days for each day. Provide an annual (12 month) report showing the minimum, maximum and average outdoor air temperature for the month and the number of heating and cooling degree days for the month.

Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstation shall support dedicated screens for editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels. 1.

2.

3.

4.

Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type custom application, and application specific controller that shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and system set-points. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several related objects to follow a schedule. An advance and delay time for each object shall be adjustable from this master schedule. An operator shall be able to modify the schedule. Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and/or dates. Manual Control and Override. Provide a means of manually controlling analog and binary output points. Control overrides shall be performed through a simple, graphical on-offauto editor for binary points, and auto-manual selector for analog control. Provide a icon indicator of override status when a point, unit controller or application has been overridden manually. Air System Equipment Coordination. Provide editor screens with monitoring and control functions that group together and coordinates the operation of air handling equipment and associated VAV boxes as specified in the sequence of operations. For each air system, the editor pages shall include: a) b) c) d) e)

5.

System mode of the air handling system Listing and assignment of the associated air handler and VAV boxes AHU supply air cooling and heating setpoints AHU minimum, maximum and nominal static pressure setpoints VAV box minimum and maximum flow, and drive open and close overrides

Chiller System. A chiller plant control application shall be configured using a full screen editor and shall provide operating status for the system. The display shall include: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l)

G.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

System mode of the chiller plant Chiller enable/disable status System supply water setpoint System supply and return water temperature System Chilled water pump status System Chilled water flow Bypass pipe flow rate (if applicable) Messages as to when an additional chiller modules will be added or removed from operational sequence Chiller or system failure information Run Status Override capabilities to force an added chiller, subtract a chiller, or change of sequence. Control to remove a chiller from a sequence temporarily for service purposes.

Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded. 15900 - 12/31 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.4

APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE

A.

Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation.

B.

System Security 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.

Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to [10] events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: 1. 2.

3.

4.

Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit.

D.

Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to transmit alarms to multiple associated alarm receivers. Receivers shall include PC Workstations, email addresses, cell phones and alphanumeric pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system utilizing the system Ethernet communications, or dial up communications via modem, in the same format and method used on site as described under the Operator Interface section of this specification.

E.

Demand Limiting. The demand limiting program shall monitor building power consumption from signals generated by a pulse generator (provided by others) mounted at the building power meter, or from a watt transducer or current transformer attached to the building feeder lines. 1.

The demand limiting program shall be based on a predictive sliding window algorithm. The sliding window duration and sampling interval shall be set equal to that of the local Electrical Utility.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 13/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Control system shall be capable of demand limiting by resetting HVAC system setpoints to reduce load while maintaining a widened band of comfort control in the space. Input capability shall also be provided for an end-of-billing period indication.

F.

Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits.

G.

Chiller Sequencing. Provide applications software to properly sequence the chiller plant to minimize energy use. This application shall perform the following functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

The chiller plant control application shall have the ability to control up to 25 chillers as detailed in the sequence of operations. This application shall be able to control both constant and variable flow systems as well as parallel, series and decoupled piping configurations. The chiller plant control application shall be able to control multiple chiller plants per site. Diagnostics/Protection - The chiller plant application program shall be able to integrate individual chiller diagnostics into control action decisions. Event Processing - All chiller plant control and status events shall be recorded, at the operator’s selection, in the building management system event log to facilitate troubleshooting. Alarm Indications - The chiller plant control status screens shall display chiller plant and individual chiller alarm messages. Add/Subtract actions - The status screens shall provide information on when the next chiller add or subtract action will occur. The operator shall have the ability to manually force a chiller addition or a chiller subtraction.

H.

PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set-point, and PID gains shall be user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule.

I.

Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, workstation, or the operator display. The amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the workstation.

J.

Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts shall be user-selectable.

K.

System Calculations. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g. KW), flow rates (e.g. L/s [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window KW demand value. Provide an algorithm that calculates energy usage and weather data (heating and cooling degree days). These items shall all be available for daily, previous day, monthly and the previous month.

L.

Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

2.5

BUILDING CONTROLLERS

A.

General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section. 2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 15900 - 14/31 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers. The Building Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for communication to unit controllers. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: a) Assume a predetermined failure mode. b) Generate an alarm notification. c) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the failure. d) Automatically reset the Building Controller to return to a normal operating mode.

A.

Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet internetwork using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Each Building Controller shall also perform routing to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers. Each Building Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers using LonTalk FTT-10 and LonMark profiles.

B.

Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].

C.

Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. The Building Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. The primary logic board shall be removable without disconnecting field wiring.

D.

Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

E.

Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage

2.6

CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A.

General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. 2. 3.

4.

The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode, and generate an alarm notification.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 15/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

B.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. 2.

Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F]. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 70 C [-40 F to 158 F].

C.

A local operator interface shall be provided at building locations where specified in the sequence of operations or point list. The operator interface shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. A system security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and display.

D.

Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring.

E.

Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

F.

Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

2.7

APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A.

General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. 1. 2.

B.

Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1.

2.

Controller used in conditioned ambient spaces shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type rated enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by building activity (such as above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum-rated enclosures and non-enclosed wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F]. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 65 C [-40 F to 150 F].

C.

Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable.

D.

Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.

E.

Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 16/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

G.

Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10 transceivers. All communications shall follow LonMark profiles. ASCs which do not have a profile that applies must comply with LonMark standards, utilize SNVTs for all listed points, and be provided with a XIF file for self-documentation.

2.8

INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

A.

Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application Specific Controllers.

B.

All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller.

C.

Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices.

D.

Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of Binary Input points, and also accept up to 3 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.

E.

Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

F.

Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation. Terminal unit and zone control applications may use 2 outputs for drive-open, drive-close (tri-state) modulating control.

G.

Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the output device.

2.9

AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A.

Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

B.

Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 6 CFM per square foot at 4" w.c. differential pressure. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per section.

Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 17/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Electric damper/valve actuators. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7. 8.

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque.

Control Valves 1. 2.

Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service as scheduled or shown. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings: a) Water Valves: i. Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head. ii. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head. b) Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.

3.

Water Valves: a) Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service. b) Sizing Criteria: i. Two-position service: Line size. ii. Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 5 psi, whichever is greater. iii. Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load), 5 psi maximum. iv. Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball. v. 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflon packing.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 18/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

c) Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows: i. Heating coils in air handlers - normally open. ii. Chilled water control valves - normally closed. iii. Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation. d) Zone valves shall be sized to meet the control application and they shall maintain their last position in the event of a power failure. 4.

E.

Binary Temperature Devices 1.

2.

3.

F.

Low-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover. Low-Limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

Temperature Sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

G.

Steam Valves: a) Body and trim materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions and service. Linear ports for modulating service. b) Sizing Criteria: i. Two-position service: pressure drop 10% to 20% of inlet psig. ii. Modulating service 15 psig or less: pressure drop 80% of inlet psig. iii. Modulating service 16 to 50 psig: pressure drop 50% of inlet psig. iv. Modulating service over 50 psig: pressure drop as scheduled on plans.

Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5m [5 feet] in length. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on the drawings. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. Differential accuracy shall be within 0.1 C [0.2 F].

Humidity Sensors 1. 2. 3. 4.

Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 80% with accuracy of ±5% R.H. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% R.H. It shall be suitable for ambient conditions of -40 C to 75 C [-40 F to 170 F]. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1% of full scale per year.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 19/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

H.

Static Pressure Sensors 1. 2. 3.

4.

I.

2.

3.

4.

Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure unless otherwise specified: Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snapacting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.

Relays 1. 2.

M.

Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy shall be +/- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.

Flow Switches 1. 2.

L.

Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft] minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot section. Low limit shall be manual reset only.

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors 1.

K.

Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus 50% greater than calibrated span without damage. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.

Low Limit Thermostats 1.

J.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

Transformers and Power Supplies 1.

Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service. 2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peakto-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection. 3. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C. 4. Unit shall be UL recognized. 15900 - 20/31 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

N.

Current Switches 1.

O.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system.

LOCAL CONTROL PANELS 1. 2.

3.

All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged door,and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel.

2.10 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM A. General 1.

Provide a wireless zone temperature sensing system for use in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems. The wireless system shall work with any controller that accepts a 10k thermistor temperature input.

2.

The ambient operating temperature range for the RF wireless transmitter shall be 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C). The ambient operating temperature range for the RF receiver shall be -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C). The ambient storage temperature range for the RF wireless transmitter and the RF receiver shall be -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).C. The ambient operating and storage humidity range shall be 5 to 95% non-condensing.

B. Approved Manufacturers 1. Trane Model WZS 2. Siemens Model WRTS 3. Approved Equal

C. Components 1. A RF wireless zone temperature, set point and timed override transmitter. 2. A RF receiver that connects directly to the zone controller. D. Accuracy 1. Zone temperature sensing accuracy shall be +/- 0.5F (+/- 0.28C). 2. Temperature sensing and transmission shall occur at least once each 30 seconds under conditions of rapid space temperature change or if the sensor is programmed with a fixed 15900 - 21/31 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

transmission period. Maximum time between transmissions shall be 15 minutes. E. Communication 1. RF Type: Sensor system shall use spread spectrum technology. 2. Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet; open range shall be 2,500 ft (762 m) with less than 2% packet error rate. 3. Sensor shall include a readily visual on-sensor signal strength meter. Acceptable metering shall be a minimum of three-level RF signal strength Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs). 4. Two-way communications shall be used between the zone sensor and controller receiver to allow channel switching based on varying channel traffic and verification of signal strength at the zone sensor. 5. One-to-one topology with zone/receiver address set by physical switches or held in nonvolatile memory to ensure operating through system voltage disturbances. F. Power Requirements 1. Zone Sensor battery life shall provide at least 5 years life under normal operating conditions and must be readily available for replacement through retail stores. 2. Zone sensor shall include a readily visual indication of battery condition. The battery indication lights shall flash periodically for a minimum of 5 days to indicate the need for battery replacement prior to failure. No site survey tools shall be required. 3. Sensor system RF receiver shall operate on 24VAC power, provided by the associated unit controller transformer. G. Installation and Configuration Tools 1. A set of all site survey and installation tools as well as software shall be provided to the contractor use for system installation and commissioning for the duration of the warranty period. 2. A set of all site survey and installation tools as well as software shall be provided to the owner for permanent possession for ongoing system maintenance and trouble shooting.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 22/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.0

SECTION INCLUDES:

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16

Examination Protection General Workmanship Field Quality Control Wiring Fiber Optic Cable Installation of Sensors Flow Switch Installation Actuators Warning Labels Identification of Hardware and Wiring Controllers Programming Cleaning Training Acceptance

3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B.

The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

3.2

PROTECTION

A.

The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

B.

The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.3

GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A.

Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B.

Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

C.

Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.

D.

Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 23/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.

B.

Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.

C.

Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.5

WIRING

A.

All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 16 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

B.

Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:

C.

Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.) All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.

D.

E.

Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

F.

Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.

G.

All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

H.

Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.

I.

All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

J.

Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.

K.

Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 24/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

L.

Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures.

M.

Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.

N.

Adhere to Division 16 requirements for installation of raceway.

O.

This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

P.

Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used.

3.6

INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A.

Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B.

Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.

C.

Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

D.

All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

E.

Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.

F.

Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

G.

All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.

H.

Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms.

I.

Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 25/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.7

FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A.

Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

B.

Install and adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

C.

Assure correct flow direction and alignment.

D.

Mount in horizontal piping - flow switch on top of the pipe.

3.8

ACTUATORS

A.

Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions. 1.

2. 3.

To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.

3.9

WARNING LABELS

A.

Affix labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the DDC System. Warning label shall indicate the following:

CAUTION This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to “Off” position before servicing.

B.

Affix labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. Labels shall indicate the following:

CAUTION This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects. Disconnect all power sources before servicing.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 26/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.10

IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A.

All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.

B.

Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

C.

Identify control panels with minimum 1-cm (1/2”) letters on nameplates.

D.

Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.

3.11

CONTROLLERS

A.

Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. A custom application controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement.

B.

Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of 10% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, 10% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 10% of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used. 1.

Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.

3.12

PROGRAMMING

A.

Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use.

B.

Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.

C.

Software Programming 1.

Provide programming for the system as written in the specifications and adhere to the sequence strategies provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 27/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Operators' Interface 1.

2.

3.

Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the points list. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of 16 hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative.

E.

Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.

3.13

CLEANING

A.

This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor.

B.

At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.

C.

At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 28/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.14

TRAINING

A.

Provide a minimum of 2 classroom training sessions, 4 hours each, throughout the contract period for personnel designated by the Owner. Computer-based audio-visual training may be substituted for up to 8 hours of hands on training.

B.

Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for the system, and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.

C.

Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending on the level of knowledge required: 1. 2. 3.

Day-to-day Operators Advanced Operators System Managers/Administrators

D.

Provide course outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide one copy of training material per student.

E.

The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material.

F.

Classroom training shall be done using a network of working controllers representative of the installed hardware or at the customer’s site.

G.

This training shall be made available in addition to the interactive audio-visual tutorial, provided with the system.

3.15

ACCEPTANCE

A.

The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 29/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION A.

Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to ensure compatibility with pipe design.

B.

All control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60 degrees from the vertical up position.

C.

Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

D.

Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that actuators may be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipes and/or equipment.

E.

Isolation valves shall be installed such that control valve body may be serviced without draining the supply/return side piping system. {Note to designer: this must also be shown.} Unions shall be installed at all connections to screwed type control valves.

F.

Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1-1/2" in diameter, with 1/4" high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identification numbers as shown on approved controls shop drawings.

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION A.

Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with sheet metal design.

B.

Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger than damper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.

C.

Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ±1/8".

D.

Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

E.

Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.)

F.

Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously.

G.

Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.

H.

Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.

I.

After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 30/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS DUCT SMOKE DETECTION A.

Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke detector interface to HVAC systems. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as the HVAC equipment to be controlled.

END OF SECTION -

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

15900 - 31/31

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15899 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS A.

The Contractor shall conform to the General Conditions.

B.

Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions.

1.2

WORK INCLUDED A.

1.3

Variable frequency drive units

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

All components to be UL listed or labeled.

B.

All wiring to conform to the NEC.

C.

All enclosures to be NEMA rated.

D.

Consult VFD manufacturer on outdoor installations.

E.

All units shall conform to Part 15 of the FCC regulations on RFI/EMI emissions.

F.

The VFD and any associated hardware are to be "run in" at rated ambient temperature and rated load on variable speeds at the manufacturers plant prior to shipment to minimize field start-up problems.

G.

After installation the manufacturer's representative of the equipment provided in this section shall certify in writing to the Owner's representative that the equipment has been assembled and installed within the guidelines of the manufacturer's written installation instructions and that its performance meets or exceeds the operating characteristics specified and/or scheduled and that its emissions are within the limits set by the aforementioned regulations.

H.

A Field Service Engineer is to be provided for start up assistance for the drive and its related motor. Start up assistance shall consist of verifying factory performance standards for the drive and aiding in establishing reference speed points for control of the motor.

I.

Variable frequency drive units shall comply with IEEE 519-1992 for requirements for harmonic control in electrical power systems.

J.

Electronic harmonic analysis to be performed by manufacturer prior to installation.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS

15899 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SUBMITTALS A.

Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions.

B.

Submit complete performance and dimensional data along with construction details and wiring diagrams.

C.

Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.

Variable Frequency Drive Units: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

Trane Yaskawa Magnetek Square D

EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES) A.

The VFD’s are to be selected for operation with the motors provided for this project. The drive system shall provide an input power factor of 95% throughout the entire speed range. The VFD shall not contribute 5th or 7th harmonic current to the power distribution system or contain the appropriate filter network to limit those harmonics to not more than 5% of the theoretical value.

B.

The VFD’s shall be as per UL 508C (Component listing are not sufficient) pulse width modulating type for maximum reliability and provide inherent short circuit protection. The VFD shall be capable of withstanding an output phase to phase, phase to ground short circuit and VFD semi-conductor short circuit, without causing a failure to the VFD. The drive system shall provide a near unity power factor. It is to provide operation of the fan and pump motors as scheduled. Units shall be mounted in a NEMA I enclosure or better. The following equipment and features are to be incorporated: 1.

Fully range minimum and maximum speed adjustment with ability to automatically select speeds. 2. Adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration, each separately adjustable. 3. Field adjustable or automatic current limit. 4. Inherent short circuit protection. 5. All units shall operate from 4-20 MA or 0-10VAC Signal in automatic mode. 6. Under voltage and over voltage protection. 7. Over temperature protection. 8. Be rated to provide 100% of rated current, minimum 110% breakaway current. 9. The VFD is to be rated for an input line voltage variation of +10% and -5%. 10. The VFD shall include a line reactor. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS

15899 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

11. The VFD is to include a door interlocked disconnect switch or circuit breaker. If integral disconnect is not supplied, the manufacturer shall furnish a separate disconnect with the VFD. 12. The following are to be included in the VFD cabinet: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

C.

Filtered ventilation louvers or heat sinks. Door mounted analog or digital speed indicator calibrated 0-100%. Power on light. Fault light. Fault reset button. Manual speed potentiometer for operation in the manual mode. Manual-off-automatic switch. Manually switched bypass circuit to bypass power feed around the VFD.

Unit to include automatic restart circuitry in the event of a power outage, with no more than a 60 second delay after power is reapplied. Unit shall try at least three re-starts before shut down and alarm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B.

The contractor shall assume the responsibility for coordinating the purchased equipment with the motor served and with the automatic temperature control system, paying specific attention to the signal sent and received, the ground source and the required speed range.

C.

Start up shall be by a factory trained field service engineer representing the manufacturer of the equipment purchased. Start up shall be done in the presence of the controls contractor and the engineer.

D.

Variable frequency drives shall be supplied by Division 15 and installed and wired by Division 16.

END OF SECTION

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS

15899 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1.2

Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors for access to concealed ducts. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for automatic volumecontrol dampers and operators. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting of manual-volume dampers.

DEFINITIONS A.

Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W. 1.

1.3

Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

1.4

Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 1/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans. Fittings. Reinforcement and spacing. Seam and joint construction. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Ceiling suspension assembly members. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required for access to dampers and other operating devices. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

D.

Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E.

Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F.

Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding CodeSteel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B.

Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure classifications higher than 2-inch wg (500 Pa). Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work: 1.

2.

Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct system. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 2/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. b. c. d.

3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

1.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Five transverse joints. One access door. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and apparatus.

Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting Work. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B.

Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

C.

Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SHEET METAL MATERIALS A.

Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B.

Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts.

C.

Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm) length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.2

DUCT LINER A.

General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 3/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to air stream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. 1.

Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 degrees F (0.037 at 24 degrees C) mean temperature.

2.

Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smokedeveloped rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

3. 4.

a. b. c.

2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) into air stream. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.

SEALANT MATERIALS A.

Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. 1. 2.

3. 4.

2.4

Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.

Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. 1. 2.

B.

Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concrete or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweightaggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. 1. 2.

Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 4/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D.

Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1.

2.5

Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A.

General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. 2.

B.

Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

2.6

Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discoloration.

Supply Ducts: 3-inch-wg (750 Pa). Return Ducts: 2-inch-wg (500 Pa) negative pressure. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch-wg (500 Pa) negative pressure.

Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of un-braced panel area, unless ducts are lined.

ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION A.

General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B.

Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following: 1. 2. 3.

Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg (750 Pa) positive pressure.. Return Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa) negative pressure. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa) negative or positive pressure.

C.

Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

D.

Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with buttwelded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible."

E.

Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside.

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 5/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

3.

4.

Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and insulation, and in metal thickness specified for single-wall duct. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to singlewall duct or un-insulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner diameter. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal having 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use the following sheet metal thickness and seam construction: a. b. c.

5.

2.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Ducts 3 to 8 Inches (75 to 200 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) with standard spiral seam construction. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches (225 to 1070 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) with single-rib spiral seam construction. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches (1120 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.022 inch (0.55 mm) with single-rib spiral seam construction.

Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.

Retain

ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION A.

90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thickness specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B.

Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

C.

Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: 1.

2.

Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa): a. b. c.

3.

Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa): a. b. c.

4.

Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm). Ducts 27 to 36 Inches (685 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).

Ducts 3 to 14 Inches (75 to 355 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm). Ducts 15 to 26 Inches (380 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).

Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct.

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 6/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5.

6.

7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

D.

90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes. Round Elbows, 8 Inches (200 mm) and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm): Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm), and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) and All Pressures: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick with two-piece welded construction. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct specified above. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) and Pressures through 10Inch wg (2490 Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm).

Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside. 1. 2.

3.

4. 5.

Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and insulation. Use the same metal thickness for outer duct as for un-insulated fittings. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to singlewall duct or un-insulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to nominal single-wall size. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of thickness listed below: Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal having 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use the following sheet metal thickness: a. b.

6.

2.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Ducts 3 to 34 Inches (75 to 865 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm). Ducts 35 to 58 Inches (890 to 1475 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).

Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.

Retain

SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A.

Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.

B.

Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 7/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping.

E.

Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F.

Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s).

G.

Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.

H.

Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the air stream with metal nosing that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: 1. 2. 3.

I.

Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation. 1.

J.

Fan discharge. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.

Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

Terminate liner with duct build-outs installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated build-outs (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure build-outs to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B.

Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C.

Install round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m), unless interrupted by fittings.

D.

Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E.

Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F.

Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

METAL DUCTWORK

Drawings

15891 - 8/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC G.

Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H.

Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I.

Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J.

Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.

K.

Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

L.

Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M.

Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

N.

Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

3.2

3.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B.

Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C.

Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section.

D.

Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-inches-wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10inches-wg(500 to 2490 Pa).

E.

Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

F.

Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

ADJUSTING

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 9/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.

B.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.

3.4

CLEANING A.

After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

END OF SECTION 15891

METAL DUCTWORK

15891 - 10/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles.

DEFINITIONS A.

Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B.

Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a side-wall, ceiling, or floor.

C.

Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components.

B.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings and walls.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLES

15855 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

1.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

B.

NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURED UNITS A.

2.2

Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A.

3.2

Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION A.

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B.

Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure

DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLES

15855 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C.

3.3

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

ADJUSTING A.

3.4

After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

CLEANING A.

3.5

After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.

DIFFUSER SCHEDULE A.

3.6

Diffuser: See Schedule.

REGISTER SCHEDULE A.

3.7

Register: See Schedule.

GRILLE SCHEDULE B.

Grille: See Schedule.

END OF SECTION 15855

DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLES

15855 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15835 - UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

1.3

This Section includes propeller unit heaters.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.

B.

Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Plans, elevations, sections, and details. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

C.

Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

D.

Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1.

1.4

Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.5

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

UNIT HEATERS

15835 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

2.2

Airtherm Manufacturing Company. Carrier Corp. Dunham-Bush, Inc. Engineered Air. International Environmental Corp. McQuay International. Rosemex Products. Ruffneck Heaters, Starozik Industries Ltd. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group. U S A Coil & Air Inc.

UNIT HEATERS A.

2.3

Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge configuration with radial louver diffuser in draw-through

MATERIALS A.

Casing: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.

B.

Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.

2.4

COILS A.

2.5

Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch (0.78-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering water temperature of 325 deg F (163 deg C), with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 375 psig (2690 kPa) underwater.

FAN A.

2.6

2.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor.

FAN MOTORS A.

Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller: Shaded-pole Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral thermal-overload protection.

B.

Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings.

ACCESSORIES

UNIT HEATERS

15835 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

2.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Vertical Configuration: Louver cone diffuser.

CONTROLS A.

2.9

Control Devices: Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and thermostat.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before propeller unit heater installation.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

B.

Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

C.

Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

D.

Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls.

3.3

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange on each connection.

C.

Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

D.

Ground equipment.

E.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

UNIT HEATERS

15835 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing: 1. 2. 3.

B.

3.5

After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

CLEANING A.

After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B.

After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Install new filters in each propeller unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.6

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15835

UNIT HEATERS

15835 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

SECTION 15830 - FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B.

Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1. 2.

1.2

"Basic Mechanical Requirements." "Basic Materials and Methods."

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following types of Fans: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1.

7.

Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties and Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment supports. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration hangers and supports Division 15 Section "Central-Station Air Conditioning Units" for package units that include fans. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for electronic control devices Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operations" for control sequence descriptions. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air- handling systems testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements and procedures. Division 16 Section "Circuit and Motor Disconnects" for disconnect switches.

8. 9.

Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for motor starters Division 16 Section "Motor Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

C.

1.3

Inline centrifugal fans. Ceiling-mounted ventilators. Mixed-Flow, Induced Dilution Roof-mounted exhaust fans.

Products furnished but not installed under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted exhaust fans.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:

1.

Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: a. b. c.

FANS

Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan sound power ratings. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 15830 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION d. e. 2.

3. 4. 5.

1.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Materials gages and finishes including color charts. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed wiring and field- installed wiring. Product certificates, signed by manufacturers of air-handling units, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. Maintenance data for air-handling units, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators."

B.

UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

C.

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D.

NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E.

Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

F.

The mixed-flow, induced dilution fan shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 210-85 Laboratory Methods of Testing fans. Provide documentation with submission of equipment.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B.

Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

1.6

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.

Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.

B.

Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7.

FANS

15830 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION C.

1.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Inline Centrifugal Fans: a. b. c.

2.

Centrifugal Roof Ventilators: a. b. c.

3.

Carnes Company, Incorporated Cook (Loren) Company Greenheck Fan Corporation

Mixed-Flow, Induced Dilution Fans: a.

2.2

Carnes Company, Incorporated Cook (Loren) Company Greenheck Fan Corporation

Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators: a. b. c.

4.

Cook (Loren) Company Greenheck Fan Corporation ILG Industries, Incorporated

Strobic Air Corporation

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:

1.

2.

2.3

Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

FANS, GENERAL A.

FANS

General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory 15830 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics. B.

Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 1.

C.

Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.

Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1.

Service Factor: 1.4.

D.

Belts: Oil-resistant, non-sparking, and non-static.

E.

Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. 1.

Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

F.

Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA (L50)) of 200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

G.

Factory Finish: The following finishes are required: 1. 2.

2.4

Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A.

General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.

B.

Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C.

Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect located on outside of fan housing.

D.

Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.

E.

Wheel: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

F.

Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.

FANS

Volume Control Damper: Manual operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to 50 percent of fan air delivery. 15830 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 2.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

MOTORS A.

Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.

B.

Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.

C.

Temperature Rating: 50 degrees C maximum temperature rise at 40 degrees C ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).

D.

Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.

E.

Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. Provide permanent-split capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor start classification for belted fans. 1. 2.

Bases: Adjustable. Bearings: The following features are required: a. b. c.

3.

Enclosure Type: The following features are required: a. b.

Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.

4. 5.

Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection. Noise rating: Quiet.

6.

Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and special features.

7.

F.

Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. Grease lubricated. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.

Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.

B.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

FANS

15830 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 3.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls." 1. 2. 3.

Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. a.

4.

B.

3.3

Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.

Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs.

Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air- handling units for service and maintenance.

EQUIPMENT BASES A.

Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

3.4

Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000-psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer.

CONNECTIONS A.

Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

B.

Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply: 1. 2. 3.

3.5 FANS

Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 15 Section “VAC Instrumentation and Controls.” Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 15830 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION A.

Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory- authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. 2.

3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork and electrical connections. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A.

Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B.

Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.7

COMMISSIONING A.

Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up: 1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. B.

Remove shipping blocking and bracing. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position. Disable automatic temperature control operators.

Starting procedures for fans: 1.

Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM. a.

2.

Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

C.

Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.

D.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.8

DEMONSTRATION A.

Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following: 1.

FANS

Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts. 15830 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 2.

B.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15830

FANS

15830 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN

SECTION 15785 – DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2.

Heat wheels. Packaged energy recovery units.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs for mounting rooftop equipment. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control wiring and control devices connected to energy recovery units.

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1. 2. 3.

4.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: manufacturer.

Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a single

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air-to-air energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

15785 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for energy recovery devices shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers." E. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to recommendations of NRCA.

1.5

COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.6

EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.

Filters: Furnish two sets of each type of filter specified. Fan Belts: Furnish two sets of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units. Wheel Belts: Furnish two sets of belts for each heat wheel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

B. Manufacturer[s]: 1. Trane Company, Model CDQ 2. Advanced Thermal Technologies. 3. Munters; Cargocaire Division.

DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

15785 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN

C. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel. D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved centrifugal fan with restrained, spring isolators and flexible duct connections. 1.

Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable base, and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.

2.

Integral variable frequency drive on the supply and exhaust fans.

E. Filters: [1-inch- (25-mm-) thick] [2-inch- (50-mm-) thick] disposable type, in galvanized steel frame, mounted upstream of unit in both supply and exhaust airstreams. F. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation. G. Standalone factory mounted DDC controls including all actuators sensor wiring and control logic. H. Unit shall be pre-programmed to provide variable air volume control, dehumidification control, CO2 monitoring and ventilation reset control, chilled and hot water control. BAS manufacturer shall provide all necessary interface capability required to communicate to the BAS front end.

2.2. DEHUMIDIFICATION CASSETTE 1. The CDQ dehumidification wheel shall be placed in the air handler as shown in the air handler unit drawings. The dehumidification wheel shall not require an additional regeneration airflow stream or the use of a high heat source. If any preheat is required it shall not exceed the scheduled capacity. 2. The CDQ dehumidification wheel shall not utilize exhaust air. The CDQ wheel shall have no exhaust air transfer. 3. Cassette casing shall be constructed of heavy duty G90 galvanized steel. Cassettes up to 7000 cfm shall be single face panel construction for easy service access to the wheel drive motor and belt. Larger cassettes shall be double face panel with removable side panel for access to belt and drive motor. Small amounts of casing deflection shall have no significant impact on wheel performance or life. Casings shall have a 1”-1 1/2" perimeter flange to facilitate mounting inside AHU cabinet with self-tapping sheet metal screws. Alternatively, cassettes may be mounted using “safeoff’ blanking to the side, top, and bottom of the cassette. 4. The CDQ dehumidification wheels shall be constructed of synthetic matrix with an adsorbent integrally bound into the matrix. The adsorbent shall be selected for its high affinity for water vapor at the CDQ operating conditions. The adsorbent shall be a type III desiccant. Construction of the wheel shall be corrugated, fluted design, which provides distinct air passageways and prevents internal wheel bypass. The desiccant is intimately, permanently bound and uniformly disDUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

15785 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN

persed throughout the wheel matrix. Because the desiccant is not applied as a glued on surface coating, it is not susceptible to erosion, abrasion, or delamination of the desiccant. The wheel matrix shall be rigid and glued layer-to-layer, and not susceptible to sagging or separation of the layers. The wheel shall be structurally reinforced with a spoking system to minimize wheel deflection. Because the product is nonmetallic, it offers complete resistance to corrosion. The media shall meet the flammability requirements governing this class of products and be UL recognized components in accordance to UL 1812 and UL1995 5. All cassettes shall include both a circumferential seal as an air block-off around the perimeter, and an inner diametric seal separating regeneration and supply sides. Seals shall be full contact nylon brush seals, which minimizes leakage. Seals are factory set and field adjustable and make intimate contact with the wheel on all surfaces. CDQ cassette, wheel and seal configuration allows for operation at high differential pressures. Seal replacement should not be necessary during the life of the product. 6. The drive system shall consist of a heavy-duty fractional horsepower A/C gear motor mounted in the cassette and cooled by the AHU air stream. Motor location shall be as required. All motors have permanently lubricated bearings. Minimal amp draw will be required and all motors shall be 115V/1PH/60Hz or 230V/1PH/60Hz. Drive belts shall be high performance v-belt multilink belts. The multilink belt allows for replacement of individual links(1” each) if a section of belt becomes worn or breaks. Belts are installed under tension, require no mechanical tensioner, and do not require adjustment after startup. The rotation speed of the wheel shall not exceed the scheduled value. 7. The wheel matrix shall be cleanable by vacuuming or pressurized air blowing, or alternatively with low temperature steam, hot water, light detergent. 8. Cassettes shall be provided with bearings which support rotation of the wheel around a center shaft driven by a perimeter belt. The bearings shall be internal ball bearings press fitted into the bored wheel hub for all wheels up to and including 72” diameter. Internal bearings are permanently lubricated, no maintenance bearings which support fixed shaft operation of the wheel assembly. Flanged or pillow block bearings which support rotating shaft operation of the wheel assembly are used for all units larger than 72” diameter. Outboard bearings are provided with grease fittings for periodic lubrication. L10 bearing life is greater than 400,000 at design conditions. 9. The wheel cassette shall be capable of continuous operation over ambient temperatures ranging from -40F to 200F at any relative humidity without adversely affecting wheel performance or life. 10. Performance shall be as predicted by CDQ selection software as scheduled. The performance shall be based on testing conducted on the wheel cassette installed in the air handler configuration as shown in the AHU drawings. Performance based on stand-alone desiccant wheel cassette or tests with two independent air streams are unacceptable. Performance data shall be from tests of a complete unit per-formed by an ISO 9000 certified laboratory. Temperature measurements shall be taken using instrumentation whose calibration is traceable to NIST standards. Dry bulb and wet bulb temperature measurements shall be accurate to +/- 0.1 Deg F. Performance prediction for the CDQ air handler shall be available for multiple conditions as required. DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

15785 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN

11. Warranty : The dehumidification wheel shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years from date of manufacture (terms and conditions apply). The warranty applies to all parts and components in the cassettes with the exception of the motor, which is warranted for a period of eighteen (18) months.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is from exhaust side to purge section to supply side. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building side for bypass during startup. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.

3.2

CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Duct and fan installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and specialties.

Drawings

D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

15785 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust seals and purge. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

3.4

DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures Demonstration and Training."

3.5

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.

Meet requirement of section 4-7 of ASHRAE 62.1-2004

B. Coordinate with commissioning requirements of Division 1 Section and 15 Commissioning. C. Installation adhesives and sealants must meet California Department of Health Services emissions standard, with documentation. D. Refrigerant shall meet LEED Eac4 requirements. E. Coordinate with requirements of Division 1 Section “Construction Indoor Air Quality Management” including use of minimum MERV 8 filters if system used during construction and installation of MERV 13 filters prior to occupancy

END OF SECTION 15785

DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT

15785 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15763 - FAN-COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

1.3

This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.

B.

Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Ceiling suspension assembly members. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed units. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

D.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E.

Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

F.

Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1.

1.4

Plans, elevations, sections, and details. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

FAN-COIL UNITS

15763 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

COORDINATION A.

1.6

Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.

Manufacturers: following:

1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

Trane Company (Basis of Design) Carrier Corp. International Environmental Corp. McQuay

CONFIGURATION A.

2.3

Vertical Units: An assembly chassis, coil, Plastic drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic four pipe cooling coil and heating coil.

MATERIALS A.

Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.

B.

Coil Section Insulation: ½ inch closed cellular insulation.

FAN-COIL UNITS

15763 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Drain Pans: Stainless steel or plastic, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be removable and insulated with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection.

D.

Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels. 1.

E.

2.4

Vertical Unit Panels: Removable, galvanized steel, with integral bar grilles discharge grilles and channel-formed edges and with insulation on back of panel.

Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and tested fan-coil unit before shipping].

WATER COILS A.

2.5

Primary Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 300 psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F.

FAN A.

2.6

Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to the motor.

FAN MOTORS A.

Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.

B.

Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

2.7

2.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FACTORY INSTALLED A.

Four-Pipe, Valve Control: Vertical units shall be provided with unit-mounted thermostat, with manual fan-speed switch and three way modulating electric valves. Horizontal units shall be provided with wireless wall mounting thermostat, with manual fan-speed switch and three way modulating electric valves.

B.

DDC Controller: Factory installed DDC Controller shall modulate the three way valve and stage the fan speed from low to medium to high to satisfy the space setpoint. DDC controller shall communicate via Lontalk.

C.

Piping Package: Provide factory installed piping package in accordance with the detail drawing on the plans.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

FAN-COIL UNITS

15763 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Test and rate units according to ARI 440.

B.

Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fancoil unit installation.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install fan-coil units level and plumb.

B.

Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C.

Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

D.

Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls.

3.3

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

C.

Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

D.

Ground equipment.

E.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing: 1.

After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

FAN-COIL UNITS

15763 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. B.

3.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

CLEANING A.

After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B.

After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.6

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15763

FAN-COIL UNITS

15763 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15628 - AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes rotary cooled air-cooled water chillers.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints” for chiller vibration isolation requirements. Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for chiller piping requirements. Division 15 Section “Refrigerant Piping” for chiller piping requirements. Division 15 Section “Chemical Water Treatment” for chemically treating chilled and condenser water. Division 15 Section “HVAC Controls” for temperature-control devices for chillers. Division 15 Section “Sequence of Operation” for temperature-control sequence for chillers.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include refrigerant; rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B.

Shop Drawing: Signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer.

1. 2.

3.

C.

Design Calculation: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for design vibration bases. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Details fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slide and rails, and base weights. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with the following:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Structural supports. Piping roughing-in requirements. Wiring roughing-in requirements. Determine space reserved for electrical equipment. Access requirements around other work, including working clearance to mechanical controls and electrical equipment.

D.

Product Certificates: Certification of performance according to ARI 550 and those chillers have been started and function properly.

E.

Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 1/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Articles 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASHRAE 15 for chiller design, construction, leak installation.

C.

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels” for constructing and testing evaporator and condenser pressure vessels. Stamp ASME label.

D.

UL Compliance: Comply with UL 465.

E.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5

testing, and

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver scroll water chiller with protective crating and covering.

B.

Store chillers to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, and construction debris.

C.

Handle chillers according to manufacturer’s written rigging and installation instructions for unloading, transporting, and setting in final location.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provision of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Manufacture’s Special Warranty on Refrigerant Compressor: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to replace compressor. 1.

Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than five years after date of Substantial Completion, parts only.

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 2/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Operating Conditions

A.

Provide outdoor packaged air-cooled liquid chiller with the capacity as scheduled on drawings at job site elevation listed in Section 15050.

B. Chiller shall be designed to operate using R-410-A Refrigerant. C. Chiller shall be designed for parallel evaporator water flow. D. The liquid to be chilled will be water containing corrosion inhibitors and antifreeze solution as required.

2.2 Outdoor Packaged Air-Cooled Chiller A. Approved manufacturer is AIRSTACK. B. System Description: Chiller shall incorporate Scroll type compressors and consist of multiple independent refrigerant circuits. Each refrigerant circuit shall consist of an individual compressor set, evaporator, thermal expansion valve, liquid line solenoid valve, filter drier, fin and tube condenser, and control system. Each circuit shall be constructed to be independent of other circuits from a refrigeration and electrical stand-point. The multi-circuit chiller must be able to produce chilled water even in the event of a failure of one or more refrigerant circuits. C. General 1. Chiller Modules shall be ETL listed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, CSA certified per Standard C22.2#236, and bear the ASME UM stamp on all water-torefrigerant heat exchangers. 2. Modules shall ship wired and charged with refrigerant. All modules shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.

3. Compressors, heat exchangers, condenser fans, piping and controls shall be mounted on a heavy gauge steel frame. Electrical controls, contactors, and relays for each module shall be mounted within that module. Module shall be provided within a steel enclosure suitable for outdoor use. Exposed steel surfaces shall be provided with a powder coat paint finish.

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 3/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Chilled Water Mains: Each module shall include supply and return mains for chilled water. Grooved end connections are provided for interconnection to four inch standard (4.5” outside diameter) piping with Victaulic type couplings.

E.

Evaporators: Each evaporator shall be a brazed plate heat exchangers constructed of 316 stainless steel; designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME code for 360 psig water-side working pressure. Evaporator heat exchanger shall not be mounted above the compressor, to prevent the effect of migration of refrigerant to the cold evaporator with consequent liquid slugging on start-up.

F.

Compressor: Each module shall contain two hermetic scroll compressors in a tandem piping arrangement mounted to the module with rubber-in-shear isolators. Each system also includes high discharge pressure and low suction pressure safety cutouts.

G. Condenser Fans: Each module shall contain dual condenser fans for each refrigerant circuit. These fans shall be multi-blade vane-axial type made of plastic composite material for quiet operation. Fans shall be direct drive at maximum RPM of 1,150. Fan motors shall all be pressure controlled and suitable for outdoor use. Fan speed control shall be provided by integral variable frequency drives. H. Central Control System. 1. Scheduling of the various compressors shall be performed by a microprocessor based control system (Master Controller). A new lead compressor is selected every 24 hours to assure even distribution of compressor run time. 2. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the following on each refrigeration system: a. b. c. d. e.

Discharge Pressure Fault Suction Pressure Fault Compressor Winding Temperature Suction Temperature Evaporator Leaving Chilled Water Temp.

3. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the following system parameters: a. Chilled Water Entering and Leaving Temperature b. Discharge Refrigerant Temperature c. Chilled Water Flow 4. An out of tolerance indication from these controls or sensors shall cause a “fault” indication at the Master Controller and shutdown of that compressor with the transfer of load requirements to the next available compressor. In the case of a System Fault the entire chiller will be shut down. When a fault occurs, the Master Controller shall record conditions at the time of the fault and store the data for recall. This information shall be capable of being recalled through the keypad of the Master Controller and displayed on the Master Controller’s LCD. A history of faults shall be main-

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 4/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

tained including date and time of day of each fault (up to the last 20 occurrences). 5. Individual monitoring of leaving chilled water temperatures from each refrigeration system shall be programmed to protect against freeze-up. 6. The control system shall monitor entering and leaving chilled water temperatures to determine system load and select the number of compressor circuits required to operate. Response times and set points shall be adjustable. The system shall provide for variable time between compressor sequencing and temperature sensing, so as to fine tune the chiller to different existing building conditions. I.

Chiller shall communicate via Bacnet to be compatible with the building management system.

J.

Each refrigerant circuit shall include all refrigerant specialties including a properly sized refrigerant receiver to provide reliable operation down to 0°F Ambient.

L. SINGLE POINT POWER CONNECTION Chiller shall be provided with a single point power connection. This will include pre-engineered wiring for field installation and connection to a factory mounted chiller junction box. Junction box shall include individual fusing for each Module Set and provide a single point of connection to building power.

M. FREE COOLING MODULE Free Cooling Modules shall interconnect through the common chiller header system and require no additional water connections. Free Cooling Modules shall include glycol cooling coils, temperature controlled fans and an automatic 3-way bypass valve to eliminate the need for mechanical cooling underlow ambient conditions. Module shall be completely factory assembled and tested before shipment.

O.

PUMP MODULE WITH EXPANSION TANK Provide a Pump Module of size and capacity indicated on the drawings and schedules. The Pump Module shall be interconnected though the common chiller header system and require no additional water connections. Pump Module will become an integral part of the chiller system. Pump Module shall incorporate dual in-line centrifugal pumps in a Primary/Standby pumping arrangement. Pump starters and controls shall be provided to enable manual selection of lead pump. In addition, in the event of a loss-of-flow failure of the chilled water system, the Pump Module controls

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 5/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

shall disable the lead pump and automatically start the standby pump. Module shall be completely factory assembled and tested prior to shipment. Expansion tank shall be welded steel with butyl rubber diaphragm and capable of a maximum operating temperature of 240 F and maximum working pressure of 100 psig. Tank shall be interconnected through the common chiller header system and require no additional water connections. Module shall be completely factory assembled and tested prior to shipment.

2.3 SAFETIES, CONTROLS AND OPERATION A. The chiller safety controls shall be provided (minimum) as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Low evaporator refrigerant pressure Loss of water flow through the evaporator High condenser refrigerant pressure High compressor motor temperature Low suction gas temperature Low leaving evaporator water temperature

B. Failure of chiller to start or chiller shutdown due to any of the above safety cutouts shall be enunciated by display of the appropriate diagnostic description at the unit control panel. This annunciation will be in plain English. Alphanumeric codes shall be unacceptable.

C.

The chiller shall be furnished with a Master Controller as an integral portion of the chiller control circuitry to provide the following functions:

1.

Provide automatic chiller shutdown during periods when the load level decreases below the normal operating requirements of the chiller. Upon an increase in load, the chiller shall automatically restart.

2.

Provisions for connection to automatically enable the chiller from a remote energy management system.

3. The control panel shall provide alphanumeric display showing all system parameters in the English language with numeric data in English units. D. Normal Chiller Operation 1. When chiller is enabled, the factory supplied Master Controller modulates the chiller capacity from minimum to maximum as required by building load. 2. The Chiller control system shall respond to Entering Water

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 6/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Temperature and will have an integral reset based on entering water temperature to provide for efficient operation at part-load conditions.

2.4 ACCOUSTICAL SOUND ATTENUATION

A. The chiller shall be provided with sound attenuation with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Low RPM condenser fans Condenser fan Variable Frequency Drives Compressor sound wraps Integral sound attenuating casing Low noise scroll compressor design Integral sound attenuator

B. Sound levels shall meet the sound levels as listed below and in accordance with the with the neighborhood noise sound levels as calculated by the owners acoustical consultant.

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 7/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING PROCEDURE A. Prior to connecting the chiller to the building chilled water loop, the piping shall be flushed with a detergent and hot water (110-130° F) mixture to remove previously accumulated dirt and other organic residue. In old piping systems with heavy encrustation of inorganic materials consult a water treatment specialist for proper passivation and/or removal of these contaminants. B. During the flushing a 30 mesh (max.) Y-strainers (or acceptable equivalent) shall be in place in the system piping and examined periodically as necessary to remove collected residue. The flushing process shall take no less than 6 hours or until the strainers, when examined after each flushing, are clean. Old systems with heavy encrustation shall be flushed for a minimum of 24 hours and may take as long as 48 hours before the filters run clean. Detergent and acid concentrations shall be used in strict accordance with the respective chemical manufacturers instructions. After flushing with the detergent and/or dilute acid concentrations the system loop shall be purged with clean water for at least one hour to ensure that all residual cleaning chemicals have been flushed out. C. Prior to supplying water to the chiller the Water Treatment Specification shall be consulted for requirements regarding the water quality during chiller operation. The appropriate chiller manufacturer’s service literature shall be available to the operator and/or service contractor and consulted for guidelines concerning preventative maintenance and off-season shutdown procedures.

3.2 Water Treatment Requirements A. Supply water for the chilled water circuit shall be analyzed and treated by a professional water treatment specialist who is familiar with the operating conditions and materials of construction specified for the chiller’s heat exchangers, headers and associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be controlled such that recirculated water quality for modular chillers using 316 stainless steel brazed plate heat exchangers and carbon steel headers is maintained within the following parameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

pH Greater than 7 and less than 9 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Less than 1000 ppm 30 to 500 ppm Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 500 ppm Alkalinity as Ca CO3 Chlorides Less than 200 ppm Sulfates Less than 200 ppm

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1

EXAMINATION

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 8/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Examine areas to receive chillers for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance and other conditions affecting chiller performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrections have been corrected.

B.

Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact location before roughing-in piping and electrical connections.

4.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

4.3

Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled components and chiller installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. Manufactures local service agency shall provide chillers start up and labor warranty.

CLEANING C.

4.4

Upon completion of installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

COMMISSIONING D.

Verify that installation complies with the Contract Documents.

E.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1.

Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.

F.

Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and check for the following items: 1. No physical damage to unit 2. Unit is level. 3. Chiller vibration isolation and flexible pip connection are installed 4. Clearance has been maintained and piping is installed for easy removal for service and tube cleaning. 5. Chilled-water pips have been connected to correct ports. 6. Labels and safety instructions are clearly visible. 7. Oil levels are as recommended by manufacturer. 8. Refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak-tested. 9. Shipping skids, blocks, and straps are removed. 10. Refrigerant and pressure relief is vented to outside. 11. Thermometers and pressure gages are installed. 12. Controls and safety interlocks are installed and connected. 13. Pumps are installed, connected, and operational.

G.

Check and record performance of chiller protection devices

H.

Check and record performance of chiller-water flow and low-temperature interlocks.

I.

Operate chiller for run-in period as recommended by manufacturer.

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 9/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

J.

Check static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup and shutdown.

K.

Check refrigerant charge. Check oil level.

4.5

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers as specified below: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedule for starting up and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining chillers. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.” Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.” Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days’ advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15628

AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES

15628 - 10/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15575 – BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2.

1.3

Breeching

Division 15 Section for insulation of breeching, chimneys, and stacks. Division 16 Sections for power supply wiring from power source to vent fans.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product data for each type of product specified. Include materials, dimensions, weights, and accessories.

C.

Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of breeching and stacks, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction elements. Detail connections to equipment.

D.

Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

E.

Engineering report certifying that stacks meet the design wind and seismic loads.

F.

Maintenance data for vent fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Welder Qualifications: Certified according to AWS D9.1.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing breeching, chimneys, and stacks similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

C.

Comply with NFPA 211 for components and installation

BREECHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACK

15575 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabricated breeching.

E.

Comply with SMACNA "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction."

F.

Comply with AWS D1.1 for welder qualifications, welding details, and workmanship standards

G.

Comply with ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook," Chapter 31 for "Chimney, Gas Vent, and Fireplace Systems," for material requirements and design criteria.

H.

Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. 2.

I.

The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 211. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain all Type B vent system components from 1 source and by a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Type B Gas Vents: a. b. c.

2.

Steel, Positive-Pressure, Double-Wall Vents: a. b. c.

2.2

Metal-Fab Selkirk Metalbestos Van-Packer Company

TYPE B GAS VENTS A.

Description: Double-wall gas vents, conforming to NFPA 211, Type B. Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized-steel sheet, each with the following minimum thickness: 1. 2.

B.

2.3

Metal-Fab Selkirk Metalbestos Van-Packer Company

Round, 6-Inch (152-mm) Inside Diameter and Smaller: 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) inner pipe; .187-inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe. Round, 7- to 18-Inch (178- to 457-mm) Inside Diameter: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm) inner pipe; .0187-inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe.

Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire-stop spacers, and fasteners, fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.

STEEL, POSITIVE-PRESSURE, DOUBLE-WALL VENTS

BREECHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACK

15575 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Description: Double-wall metal stacks conforming to NFPA 211, suitable for use with building heating equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels.

B.

Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 1-inch (25-mm) airspace, with positive sealing joints.

C.

Inner Shell: Type 304 stainless steel of the following thickness: 1.

D.

Outer Jacket: Aluminum-coated steel of the following thickness: 1.

E.

6- to 36-Inch (152- to 914-mm) Size: 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick.

6- to 24-Inch (152- to 610-mm) Size: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick.

Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire-stop spacers, and fasteners fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL CONNECTORS, BREECHING, AND VENTS A.

Install gas vents as indicated, according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. Locate to comply with stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles.

B.

Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's installation instructions, using only sealants recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight of the vent and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.

3.2

INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS A.

3.3

Install barometric and thermostatically operated dampers according to manufacturer's instructions. Locate as close to draft hood collar as possible.

CLEANING A.

Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B.

Clean breeching internally during installation to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.

3.4

PROTECTION A.

Temporary Closure: Provide at ends of breeching and chimneys that are not completed or connected to equipment.

BREECHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACK

15575 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 15575

BREECHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACK

15575 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15545 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Hot water heating systems Chilled water systems.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

Closed System: One bypass feeder on each system, with isolating and drain valves installed around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. Performance: Water treatment sized and equipped to treat raw water available at Project site to sustain the following water characteristics:

a. Ph b. Corrosion Inhibitor

1.4

Chilled Water

Hot Water

7.0 to 10.0 50 to 100 PPM

7.0 to 10.0 100 to 150 PPM

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup instructions

C.

Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loading, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

D.

Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

E.

Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified requirements.

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

15545 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Supplier Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity and that is or employs an experienced consultant, available at reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about water treatment.

B.

Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.

C.

Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation

D.

Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. 2.

1.6

The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

MAINTENANCE A.

Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program for period of one year from startup date of equipment, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.7

Initial water analysis and recommendations. Start-up assistance Training of operating personnel. Periodic field service and consultation Customer report charts and log sheets Laboratory technical assistance

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.

B.

Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 50 percent of amount initially installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Chemical Water Treatment Products:

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

15545 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Aqua-Chem, Incorporated; Cleaver-Brooks Division Barclay Chemical Company, Incorporated Nalco Chemical Company ARC Stewart-Hall Chemical Corporation Watcon, Incorporated

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM A.

Bypass (Pot) Feeders: steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel, shutoff valve on top, air release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and re-circulating shutoff valves on sides. 1. 2. 3.

Capacity: 5 gallons. (19 L). Working Pressure: 125-psi (860-kPa). Working Pressure: 175-psi (1210-kPa).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

3.2

Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. 2.

B.

Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. 1.

3.3

3.4

Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. Hot Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping."

Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality control testing.

B.

Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality control testing.

ADJUSTING

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

15545 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Sample boiler water at 1-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of 5 weeks and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Silica: ASTM D 859. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. Iron: ASTM D 1068. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. Particulate and Dissolved Matter: ASTM D 1888.

CLEANING A.

Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B.

Ensure that system is operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Place terminal control valves in OPEN position during cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.

C.

Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer. 1.

2.

3.

3.6

Hot-Water Heating System: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising system to design temperature; maintain for a minimum of 12 hours. Remove heat and allow to cool. Drain and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperature, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. Chilled-Water System: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water; circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. Open System: Flush with clean water for a minimum of one hour. Drain completely and refill.

COMMISSIONING A.

Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.

B.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C.

Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water treatment system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required steady-state characteristics of feed-water.

3.7

DEMONSTRATION A.

Provide services of supplier's technical representative for half a day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of boiler water treatment system.

B.

Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

15545 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. "Contract Closeout."

Refer to Division 1 Section

D.

Schedule training with Owner, through the Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15545

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

15545 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following categories of HVAC pumps for hydronic systems: 1. 2.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

In-line circulators End-suction pumps.

Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers and pressure gages, connector plugs, and devices. Division 15 Section "Motors" for pump motors. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for inertia pads, isolation pads, spring supports, spring hangers, and flexible pipe connectors. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for interlock wiring between pumps and between pumps and field-installed control devices. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field installed disconnect-switches, required electrical devices, and motor controllers.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.4

Pump Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system's maximum operating pressure at point where installed, but not less than specified.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product data including certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

C.

Shop drawings showing pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchors.

D.

Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiating between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

E.

Product certificates signed by manufacturers of pumps, certifying accuracy under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

HVAC PUMPS

15540 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Maintenance data for pumps to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include startup instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for piping materials and installation Hydraulic Institute's "Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary & Reciprocating Pumps" for pump design, manufacture, testing, and installation. UL 778 "Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps" for construction requirements. Include UL listing and labeling. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators" for electric motors. Include NEMA listing and labeling. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical components and installation.

B.

Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of pumps from 1 source and by a single manufacturer.

C.

Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of pumps from 1 source and by a single manufacturer. Include responsibility and accountability to answer questions and resolve problems regarding compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance of pumps.

D.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profile, connections, and dimensional requirements of pumps and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions."

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store pumps in dry location.

B.

Retain shipping flange-protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

C.

Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

D.

Extended Storage Longer than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or vacuum-producing device. Coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze after drying. Dismantle bearings and couplings; dry; coat with acid-free, heavy oil; tag; and store in dry location.

E.

Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

In-Line Circulators: a. b.

HVAC PUMPS

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated 15540 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. d. e. 2.

Buffalo Pumps, Incorporated Burks Pumps, Incorporated; Weinman Pump Crane Company; Deming Pump Company Division Gould Pumps, Incorporated Paco Pumps, Incorporated Peerless Pump Company Taco, Incorporated Weil Pump Company

Supported-Volute, Separately Coupled, End Suction Pumps: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

Dunham-Bush, Incorporated ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; Bell & Gossett Division Taco, Incorporated

Separately Coupled, End-Suction Pumps: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated Dunham-Bush, Incorporated General Signal; Aurora Pump ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; Bell & Gossett Division Taco, Incorporated

PUMPS, GENERAL A.

General: Factory assembled and tested.

B.

Base-Mounted Pumps: Include pump casings that allow removal and replacement of impellers without disconnecting piping.

C.

Types, Sizes, Capacities, and Characteristics: As indicated.

D.

Motors: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B, except Design C where required for high starting torque. Furnish single-, multiple-, or variable-speed motors, with type of enclosures and electrical characteristics indicated. Include built-in thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Select each motor to be non-overloading over full range of pump performance curve.

E.

Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.

F.

Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before shipping.

G.

Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed-machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

2.3

IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A.

Description: Horizontal, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Include the following:

HVAC PUMPS

15540 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.

Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than 2-1/2 inches (DN65) and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections. a.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Connection Option: Include unions, instead of threaded companion flanges, at connections for casings that are not available with threaded companion flanges.

Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated, sleeve type. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.

SEPARATELY COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS A.

Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, separately coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Include back-pull-out design, except where other design is indicated, and the following: 1.

B.

Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug in bottom of volute, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections

Description: Supported-volute, centrifugal, separately coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Include back-pull-out design, except where other design is indicated, and the following: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

8.

9.

HVAC PUMPS

Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug in bottom of volute, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections. Include integral feet or other means on volute to support weight of casing and attached piping. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw. Wearing Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket. Seals: Stuffing-box type. Include at least 4 rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center 2 graphite rings, and bronze packing gland. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. Include flexible-spacer type, with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or motor, where indicated. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment for motor sizes of 100 hp (74.6 kW) and less. Include flexible-spacer type, with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or motor, for sizes larger than 100 hp (74.6 kW). Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. Include flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or motor. 15540 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 10. 11.

Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory-fabricated from ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupling guard, and motor. Grind welds smooth before application of factory finish. Field-drill motor mounting holes for field-installed motors. a.

12.

2.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Option: Frame may be cast iron instead of steel.

Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A.

Include the following pump specialty fittings with end connections matching pump and piping, where indicated: 1.

2.

2.6

Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. Include bronze startup and bronze or stainless steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field-fabricated support. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. Include drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES A.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of pumps.

B.

Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C.

Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

3.2

CONCRETE A.

3.3

Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

INSTALLATION A.

Install pumps according to manufacturer's written installation and alignment instructions.

HVAC PUMPS

15540 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Install pumps in locations indicated and arranged to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C.

Support pumps and piping such that piping is not supported by pumps.

D.

Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers of sufficient size to support weight of pump independent of piping system.

E.

Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed. 1.

2.

3.4

Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.

ALIGNMENT A.

Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have been made.

B.

Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers written instructions

C.

Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by 1 of 2 methods specified in the HI's Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary & Reciprocating Pumps, "Instructions for Installation, Operation and Maintenance."

D.

After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill base plate completely with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

E.

Alignment Tolerances: According to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5

CONNECTIONS A.

General: Install shutoff valve and strainer on pump suction and check valve and shutoff valve on pump discharge, except where other arrangement is indicated.

B.

Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are the same size as piping connecting to pumps.

C.

Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of pump nozzles.

D.

Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators

E.

Install non-slam check valve and globe valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.

HVAC PUMPS

15540 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line pumps.

G.

Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.

H.

Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.

I.

Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.

J.

Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps and where indicated. Install between pump casing and valves, except where other arrangement is indicated.

K.

Install thermometers where indicated.

L.

Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure gage tappings where provided.

M.

Install temperature and pressure gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping around each pump.

N.

Install flow check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

O.

Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

P.

Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

3.6

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Check pump suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.

B.

Clean pump strainers

C.

Set pump controls

3.7

COMMISSIONING A.

Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before startup: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. B.

Lubricate bearings. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's recommendations. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction marked on pump casing. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Pumps for handling hot liquids shall be free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or even drags slightly until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. Check that pump controls are correct for required application.

Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power: 1.

HVAC PUMPS

Prime pumps, opening suction valve, closing drains, and preparing pumps for operation. 15540 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Open cooling water supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where applicable. Open cooling water supply valves if stuffing boxes are water-cooled. Open sealing liquid supply valves if pumps are so fitted. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at operating temperature. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff. Start motors. Open discharge valves slowly. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes; then tighten glands. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating.

C.

When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves open, steps are the same, except that discharge valves are opened sometime before motors are started

D.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.

END OF SECTION 15540

HVAC PUMPS

15540 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15513 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes high-efficiency boilers for heating hot water and accessories used for heating hot water.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Division 15 Section "Chemical Water Treatment" for boiler feed-water treatment and connections Division 15 Section "Breeching" for connections to breeching, chimneys, and stacks Division 15 Section "Feedwater Equipment" for connections to condensate and boiler feed-water piping and equipment Division 15 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.

Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C.

Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements before shipping.

D.

AGA design certificates, for information.

E.

Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F.

Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

Condensing Boilers

15513 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1. 2.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B.

AGA Compliance: Design certified by AGA; tests and ratings according to AGA requirements.

C.

ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, "Heating Boilers."

D.

Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation

1.5

COORDINATION A.

1.6

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat exchanger. 1.

Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering boilers that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following:

1.

Sealed-Combustion Boilers: a. b. c.

2.2

A.O. Smith Viessmann Fulton

PACKAGED UNITS A.

Description: Factory-assembled and –tested modules include combustion-air inlet chamber, pre-purge and post-purge blower assembly, air-gas fuel control valve, combustion chamber, heat exchanger, and exhaust; with insulated jacket around module and unit-mounted electrical control panel with operation sequence indicator lights.

Condensing Boilers

15513 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Type: Sealed-combustion, gas-fired, condensing-type hot-water boiler with capacities and accessories as scheduled.

C.

Fuel: Natural gas.

2.3

CONTROLS A.

Controller: Solid state, with pressure-sensing flame safeguard system, ignition transformer, spark plug, manual gas shutoff valve, system-pressure-controlled regulator, automatic redundant control valves, high-limit water temperature controller, ASMEapproved safety-relief valve, and temperature and pressure gauge.

B.

Operating Temperature Control: Electric indoor/outdoor controller maintains boiler water temperature with outdoor temperature reset.

2.4

BOILER ACCESSORIES A.

All boilers are to come equipped with the following accessories piped and wired at the factory. 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.5

Exhaust mufflers Air-supply mufflers McDonnell Miller No. 750-MT-120 probe type low water cut-off with manual reset. ASME safety relief valve (s).

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

2.6

Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV for low-pressure boilers.

EMERGENCY SHUT OFF SWITCHES A.

The contractor will install at least 2 emergency shut off switch(s) as required by code authorities. All electrical devices and equipment required to enable the operations of the switch(s) shall be provided and installed by the contractor. The switch shall shut down all power to the burners, oil pumps and gas valves. It shall be of design that does not require manual resetting in the event of a power failure. The locations of the switches shall be approved by the Owner and the applicable regulatory agencies. A vandalism resistant pre-alarm cover acceptable to the Owner shall protect such switches. Affix proper signage to identify said switches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Condensing Boilers

15513 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INSTALLATION A.

Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced standards.

B.

Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54

C.

Support boilers on 4 inch (100-mm) thick concrete base, 4 inches (100-mm) larger on each side than base of unit. Dowel base to floor on 18-inch (450-mm) centers along perimeter of base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts through base into floor

D.

Assemble units and parts shipped loose or disassembled.

E.

Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3

CONNECTIONS A.

Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.

B.

Connect air-intake and exhaust piping to boiler, size as recommended by manufacturer. Pitch piping toward boiler minimum of 2 percent or as indicated. Provide termination as indicated.

C.

Connect hot=water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

D.

Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

E.

Ground equipment. 1.

Tighten electrical connectors according to manufacturer’s published torquetightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

F.

Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.

G.

Install piping from safety-relief valves to nearest floor drain.

H.

Install piping from safety valves to drip pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.

I.

Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet.

. 3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1.

B.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Condensing Boilers

15513 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

3.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

CLEANING A.

Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.

3.6

COMMISSIONING A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.

B.

Verify that installation is as indicated and specified. 1.

C.

Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Boiler is level on concrete base. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure. Adjust as required. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports. Labels are clearly visible. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris. Burner blower rotates in correct direction. Pressure and temperature gages are installed. Control installations are completed.

D.

Ensure pumps operate properly.

E.

Check operation of pressure reducing valves on gas train, including venting.

F.

Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.

G.

Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners for maximum operating efficiency. 1. 2. 3. 5. 6. 7. 8.

H.

Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and firing sequences. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and hightemperature interlocks. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer. Measure and record gas pressure on manifold. Measure and record combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner. Measure and record flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.

Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each boiler.

Condensing Boilers

15513 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

I.

Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve, water level, and backflow preventer.

J.

Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners and for 100, 66, and 33 percent load for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate. Measure and record the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.7

Gas pressure on manifold. Combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner. Flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge. Flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration Natural flue draft.

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15513

Condensing Boilers

15513 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15496 - NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within building and to point indicated on the contract drawings.

B.

The gas system operation pressures are identified on the contract drawings with the symbols: LPG (Low Pressure Gas) MPG (Medium Pressure Gas) HPG (High Pressure Gas) The Contractor will select the materials and execution methods as applicable in accordance with the operation pressures, piping, specialties and accessories indicated on the contract drawings.

C.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2.

1.3

1.4

Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems" for natural gas service piping. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and fittings.

DEFINITIONS A.

LPG: (Low Pressure Natural Gas Piping) operating pressure of 1-psig or less.

B.

MPG (Medium-Pressure Natural Gas Piping) Operating pressure greater than 1-psig, but not greater than 2-psig.

C.

HPG (High Pressure Natural Gas Piping) operating pressure greater than 2-psig, but not greater than 5-psig.

D.

Gas Service: Operating pressure indicated, on contract drawings.

E.

Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source to gas point of delivery for building being served. Piping includes gas service piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar or meter support, and gas meter.

F.

Gas Delivery Point: Gas meter or service pressure regulator outlet, or gas service valve if gas meter is not provided.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 1/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, minimum pressure requirements are as follows: 1. 2.

B.

Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft. Specific Gravity: 0.6. Service Line Pressure: Contractor shall contact Natural Gas Supplier.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product Data for each type of natural gas specialty and special-duty valve. pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models.

C.

Coordination Drawings for natural gas piping, including required clearances and relationship to other services for same work areas. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.

D. E.

1.6

Include

Maintenance data for natural gas specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," for gas piping materials and components; installations; and inspecting, testing, and purging.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices.

C.

Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.

D.

Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. 2.

E.

1.7

Low Pressure Natural Gas Piping: 1-psig. Medium Pressure Natural Gas Piping: 2-psig.

Approximate values of natural gas supplied for these systems are as follows: 1. 2. 3.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of natural gas piping equipment, specialties, and accessories and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment and components with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 2/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

1.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from drips in existing gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of next day.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.

Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be turned off.

B.

Work Interruptions: Leave gas-piping systems in safe condition when interruptions in work occur during repairs or alterations to existing gas piping systems.

1.9

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.

Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.10 A.

International Mechanical Code 1996 Edition International Plumbing Code 1997 Edition Montgomery County Plumbing and Gas Fitting Regulations Code of Maryland Regulations 09.20 Montgomery County Amendments to BOCA Code 1991 Local Gas Supplier Requirements

SPARE PARTS Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all manufactured equipment and devices, included in its scope

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.

Hammond Valve Corporation Jomar International, Limited Maxitrol Company McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Manufacturing Company Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated Mueller Company National Meter

Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: a. b. c. d.

Conbraco Industries, Incorporated; Apollo Division Core Industries, Incorporated; Mueller Steam Specialty Division Huber: J.M. Huber Corporation; Flow Control Division McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Manufacturing Company

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 3/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC e. f. g. h. i. j. 3.

Atkomatic Valve Company, Incorporated Automatic Switch Company Goyen Valve Corporation Honeywell, Incorporated; Skinner Valve Division ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Controls Magnatrol Valve Corporation

Gas Pressure Regulators: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.2

Core Industries, Incorporated; Mueller Steam Specialty Division Huber: J.M. Huber Corporation; Flow Control Division Milliken Valve Company, Incorporated Nordstrom Valves, Incorporated Olson Technologies, Incorporated Xomox Corporation

Solenoid Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f.

5.

Milliken Valve Company, Incorporated Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated Mueller Company National Meter Nordstrom Valves, Incorporated Olson Technologies, Incorporated

Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: a. b. c. d. e. f.

4.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

American Meter Company Equimeter, Incorporated Fisher Controls International, Incorporated Maxitrol Company National Meter Richards Industries, Incorporated; Jordan Valve Division Schlumberger Industries; Gas Division

PIPES AND TUBES A.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E, electric-resistance welded or Type S, seamless; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.

B.

Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper

2.3

PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 standard pattern, with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1

B.

Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

C.

Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250.

D.

Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt-welding type; and ASME B16.11 forged steel.

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 4/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

F.

Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, streamlined pattern.

G.

Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

H.

Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.

I.

Refer to Section 15050 for dielectric fitting requirements.

2.4

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining materials not included in this Section.

B. C.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. phosphorus is prohibited. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

D.

Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

2.5

Filler metal containing

VALVES A.

Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed or, where appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15

B.

Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, bronze-body, plug type with bronze plug, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal, for 2-psig or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or square head or lever handle, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1. 1.

Locking Device: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.

C.

Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 150-psig WOG, bronze body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

D.

Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125-psig WOG, cast-iron body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

E.

Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: 125-psig WOG minimum, equivalent to ASME B16.33, lubricated, straightaway pattern, and cast-iron or ductile-iron body. Include tapered plug, O-ring seals, square or flat head, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

F.

Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: 125-psig WOG minimum, equivalent to ASME B16.33, non-lubricated-plug type with poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) lining or sleeve, straightaway pattern, cast-iron body. Include square or flat head and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1. 1.

G.

Locking Device: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.

Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, 350-psig non-shock, bronze-body, butterfly valve with stainless steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal, for 2-psig or less

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 5/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

natural gas. Include AGA stamp, lever handle, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1. H.

Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or Class 175 WOG, nonlubricated-plug type with poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) lining or sleeve, semi-steel body, wrench operated, with flanged ends. 1.

2.6

Locking Device: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.

SPECIALTY VALVES A.

Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21, for operation by appliance automatic shutoff device. 2-inch NPS and smaller with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 and 21/2-inch NPS and larger with flanged ends. 1. 2.

B.

2.7

Operation: Mechanical. Operation: Electrical.

Solenoid Valves: Bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body; 120 VAC, 60 Hz, Class B continuous-duty molded coil; UL labeled and FM approved. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, and coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position is normally closed. Include threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.

PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, single-stage, steel-jacketed, corrosion-resistant pressure regulators. Include atmospheric vent, elevation compensator, with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger. Regulator pressure ratings, inlet and outlet pressures, and flow volume in cubic feet per hour of natural gas at specific gravity are as indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Service Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than natural gas distribution system service pressure. Line Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure. Appliance Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure, with capacity and pressure setting matching appliance Gas Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed corrosion-resistant screen in opening when not connected to vent piping.

B.

Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

C.

Strainers: Y pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch (1.2-mm) perforations, except where other screens are indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam or 175-psig WOG working pressure, except where otherwise indicated. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body, with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends. Screwed screen retainer with centered blow-down and pipe plug.

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 6/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

2.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Quick Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, ANSI Z21.41a, and ANSI Z21.41b convenience outlets and matching plug connector.

PROTECTIVE COATING A.

Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere. Coating properties include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.9

Applied to pipe and fittings treated with compatible primer before applying tape. Overall Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm), synthetic adhesive. Water-Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.10 gallons/100 square inches (0.59 L/sq. m) Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.

CONCRETE BASES A.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for concrete bases for gas meters, gas pressure regulators, and specialties.

B.

Concrete Bases: Pre-cast, reinforced, made of 3000-psig minimum 28-day compressive strength concrete, and of dimensions not less than those indicated

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

B.

Comply with NFPA 54 Paragraph "Prevention of Accidental Ignition."

3.2

SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A.

Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service) piping in location and size indicated for gas service entrance to building. 1.

B.

3.3

Install shutoff valve, downstream from gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance.

CONCRETE BASES A.

3.4

Gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and gas meter are specified in Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems."

Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, where indicated, for gas meters, gas pressure regulators, and specialties.

PIPING APPLICATIONS

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 7/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where otherwise indicated.

B.

LPG (Low Pressure, 1-psig or Less, Natural Gas Systems): Use the following: 1. 2.

3. C.

1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints or Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 1-1/4- to 4”-Inch NPS: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints or steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints, or steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded. 4-Inch NPS and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.

MPG (Medium-Pressure, 1 to 2-psig Natural Gas Systems) Use the following: 1. 2.

1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints or Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 1-1/4-Inch NPS (DN32) and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.

D.

Underground Natural Gas Systems, All Pressures: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints. Encase gas carrier piping in containment conduits.

E.

Underground Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.

3.5

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

Use gas stops for shutoff to appliances with 2-inch NPS or smaller low-pressure gas supply.

B.

Use gas valves for shutoff to appliances with 2-1/2-inch NPS or larger low-pressure gas supply and all sizes for medium-pressure gas supply.

C.

Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated.

3.6

PIPING INSTALLATIONS A.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements.

B.

Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap. 1.

2.

Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves in such spaces. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quickset additives or cinder aggregate.

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 8/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

4.

In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. a.

5.

6.

Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.

In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. a.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where water may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where water would be subject to freezing. 1.

Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.

D.

Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels, except where indicated to be exposed to view.

E.

Install gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

F.

Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

G.

Connect branch piping to top or side of horizontal piping.

H.

Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

I.

Install corrugated stainless-steel tube and fittings according to manufacturers written instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move.

J.

Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated.

K.

Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with ferrous and brass or bronze end connections, separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals is joined, at outlet from gas meter and, where indicated, for ferrous piping.

L.

Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger connections.

M.

Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. expansion joints, expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated.

NATURAL GAS PIPING

Install

15496 - 9/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

N.

Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.

O.

Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gas-tight conduits extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC-Paint 16.

3.7

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B.

Use materials suitable for natural gas service. 1.

3.8

Brazed Joints: Make joints with brazing alloy having melting point greater than 1000deg F (540-deg C). Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.

VALVE INSTALLATION A.

Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag indicating piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain. 1. 2.

B. C.

3.9

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for valve tags. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags.

Install gas valve upstream from each gas pressure regulator. Where 2 gas pressure regulators are installed in series, valve is not required at second regulator. Install pressure relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in closed position.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B.

Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

C.

1/2-Inch NPS Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 3/4- and 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 1-1/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch 4-Inch NPS and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch

Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1.

3/8-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 10/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. D.

3.10

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1/2- and 5/8-Inch NPS (DN15 and DN18): Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 3/4- and 7/8-Inch NPS (DN20 and DN22): Maximum span, 84 inches, minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch

Support vertical pipe and tube at each floor.

CONNECTIONS

A.

Install gas piping next to equipment and appliances using gas to allow service and maintenance.

B.

Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install gas valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using gas. Install union or flanged connection downstream from valve. Include flexible connectors when indicated.

C.

Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom forming drip, as close as practical to inlet for appliance using gas.

D.

Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16 Sections.

3.11

ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING

A.

Install aboveground portions of natural gas piping systems that are upstream from equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous, and bonded to grounding electrode according to NFPA 70.

B.

Do not use gas piping as grounding electrode.

3.12

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging" and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.

C.

Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties.

E.

Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.

F.

Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

3.13 A.

ADJUSTING Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 11/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 15496

NATURAL GAS PIPING

15496 - 12/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15460 - WATER HEATERS

SECTION 15460 - WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes residential electric water heaters.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Division 3 Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties”

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections.

C.

Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type-wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed.

D.

Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

UL Standards: Provide water heaters complying with the following:

WATER HEATERS

15460 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

UL 174, "Commercial Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters."

B.

Electrical Component Standard: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

C.

Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled. 1. 2.

The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D.

ASME Code Compliance: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves that comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and that bear the appropriate code symbols.

E.

ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than prescribed in ASHRAE 90A, "Energy Conservation in New Building Design." Design Concept: The drawings indicate types and capacities of water heaters and are based on specific descriptions and manufacturers indicated. Water heaters having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in capacities, dimensions, operation, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of water heaters is on the proposer.

F.

G.

1.5

NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for electrical components.

WARRANTY A.

Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, and burners. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1.

Warranty period is 10 years.

WATER HEATERS

15460 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Commercial Electrictial Water Heaters: a. b. c. d.

2.2

A.O. Smith Water Products Company Division; A.O. Smith Corporation Lockinvar Water Heater Corporation State Industries, Incorporated Rheem Manufacturing

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A.

Description: Automatic, Commercial Electric, ASME labeled, 160-psig-rated tank; with integral controls, brass drain valve, and (T&P) relief valve.

B.

Jacket: Heavy gauge steel, with baked-on enamel finish.

C.

Controls: Adjustable thermostat.

D.

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and labeled.

H.

Vacuum Relief Valve: ANSI Z21.22.

I.

Size and capacity as indicated on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A.

General: Install water heaters on concrete bases. Set and connect units in accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturers recommended clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.

B.

Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping; thermometers are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

WATER HEATERS

15460 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

3.2

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. 2.

Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and maintenance. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Extend relief valve discharge to closest floor drain. a.

b. 3.

B.

3.3

Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1.

B.

Install drain valve at low point in water piping, for water heaters not having tank drain.

Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16. Arrange wiring to allow for unit servicing. 1.

A.

Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric fittings or dielectric unions specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods." Install vacuum relief valve in cold water inlet piping.

Install drain as indirect waste to spill into open drain or over floor drain. a.

Test and adjust operating and safety controls. malfunctioning controls and equipment.

Replace damaged and

Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 1. 2.

3.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Section "Project Closeout." Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice.

Refer to Division 1

COMMISSIONING

WATER HEATERS

15460 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

A.

Perform the following before start-up final checks: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Fill water heaters with water. Piping systems test complete. Check for piping connection leaks. Test operation of safety controls and devices.

Perform the following start-up procedures: 1. 2. 3.

Energize circuits. Adjust operating controls. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting.

END OF SECTION 15460

WATER HEATERS

15460 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15452 - PLUMBING PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following types of pumps for permanent installation in plumbing systems: 1.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

In line recirculating pump.

Division 15 Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. Division 15 Section 15170 Motors. Division 15 Section 15411 Water Distribution Piping. Division 16 Electrical Sections as applicable.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

1.4

Product data including certified performance curves, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories; include startup instructions Shop drawings showing layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages. Installation, and operations and maintenance manuals Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems differentiating between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Product certificates signed by pump manufacturers certifying accuracy under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for piping materials and installation. HI. "Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps" for pump design, manufacture, and installation. UL 778 "Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps" for construction requirements. Include UL listing and labeling. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators" for electric motors. Include NEMA listing and labeling. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical components and installation.

PLUMBING PUMPS

15452 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Pumps having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof for equality of pumps is on the proposer.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULE A.

1.6

As indicated in specifications 15411.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.7

Refer to contract drawing schedule.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store pumps in a clean, dry location.

B.

Retain shipping flanges, protective covers, and protective coatings during storage.

C.

Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.

D.

Extended Storage Longer Than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or a vacuum-producing device. After drying, coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze. Dismantle bearings and couplings, dry and coat with an acid-free heavy oil, and tag and store in a dry location.

E.

Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.

1.8

SPARE PARTS A.

Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's recommended spare parts for all equipment provided under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: 1.

In-line recirculating: a. b. c. d.

2.2

Bell & Gossett Series 60 Taco 1600 Thrush 6T Aurora

PUMPS, GENERAL

PLUMBING PUMPS

15452 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Plumbing Pumps: Factory assembled and tested, and of construction required for permanent installation.

B.

Motors: NEMA MG 1; Motor shall meet all characteristics indicated on drawings. Include built-in thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Motors are non-overloading within full range of pump performance curves.

C.

Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested plumbing pump unit prior to shipping.

D.

Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed-machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

2.3

IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMP A.

Design: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Connections: 1. 2.

C.

Cast iron casing designed for 175-psig working pressure. Bronze fitted with bronze impeller. Carbon steel shafts and stainless steel or brass shaft sleeves. Provide gauge tappings on both suction & discharge of pump casing or flange. Back pull out feature to permit disassembly without disconnecting piping. Provide companion flanges. Spring type coupler is acceptable.

2" and smaller: Screwed 2 1/2" and larger: 125-psi ANSI flanges

Seals (provide standard type): 1.

Mechanical seals: a. b. c. d.

2.

Designed for closed system with positive suction pressure. Select temperature, pressure and service as recommended manufacturer. Provide 1 spare set of seals per pump for post warranty replacement. Provide additional seals during warranty period.

by

Packing seals: a. b. c.

Seal shaft sleeves through stuffing box with teflon-asbestos packing rings, and locking type throat bushings. Provide lubricant piping connection. Provide galvanized drain pan with NPT connection for drain.

D.

Bearings: Regreaseable ball bearings with grease fittings.

E.

Wearing Rings: Bronze, with renewable casing and impeller wearing rings

PLUMBING PUMPS

15452 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of pumps. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B.

Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations and event of piping connections prior to pump installation

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

General: Comply with pump manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B.

Install pumps in locations indicated and arrange to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C.

Support piping so that weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

3.3

CONNECTIONS A.

General: Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are same size as piping connecting to pumps.

B.

Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

C.

Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

D.

Electrical power connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

3.4

ADJUSTING A.

Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, alternating and alarm operation as required for system application

B.

Follow the instructions in the installation Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.5

COMMISSIONING A.

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals tasks precedent to this section

B.

Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before startup: 1. 2.

3.

Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush bearings with kerosene and thoroughly clean. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's recommendations. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper rotation. Rotation shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.

PLUMBING PUMPS

15452 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump, if bound or even drags slightly, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 1.

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Check that pump controls are correct for required application.

Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Start motors. Open discharge valves slowly. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valves for proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes; then tighten glands. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

PART 4 - QUALITY CONTROL A.

Conform to all applicable provisions indicated in General Instructions of this contract.

END OF SECTION 15452

PLUMBING PUMPS

15452 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

Part – 1 GENERAL 1.1

PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The Contractor shall conform to the General Conditions

1.2

WORK INCUDED A. The work of this section shall include furnishing all labor and material for complete installation of all plumbing fixtures with fittings, trim, supports and appurtenances as specified herein and shown on the drawings. B. All fixture and trim shall comply with the International Plumbing Code.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Submit plumbing fixture information in an assembled brochure, showing cuts and full detailed description of each fixture.

1.4

APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): A112.6.1M-02 ……………..Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures For Public Use A112.19.1M-04……………..Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing fixtures A112.19.2M-03……………..Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures A112.19.3-2001…………..Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed For Residential Use) C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): NAAMM AMP 500-505 Metal Finishes Manual (1988) D. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE): 1016-05…………………..Performance Requirements for Individual Thermostatic, Pressure Balancing and Combination Pressure balancing and Thermostatic Control Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings E. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61-2000 F. American with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.) Section 4-19.4 Exposed

Pipes and Surfaces PART 2 – PRODUCTS

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The manufacturers referenced herein are those in which the specifications and drawings are based. Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered provided they are equal in every respect to those listed. 2.2 STOPS A. Provide lock-shield loose key or screw driver pattern angle stops, straight stops or stops integral with faucet, with each compression type faucet whether specifically called for or not, including sinks and lavatories. Locate stops centrally below fixture in accessible location. B. Furnish keys for lock shield stops to Resident Engineer

C. Supply from stops not integral with faucet shall be chrome plated copper flexible tubing or flexible stainless steel with inner core of non-toxic polymer. D. Supply pipe from wall to valve stop shall be rigid threaded IPS copper alloy pipe, i.e. red brass pipe nipple. 2.3 ESCUTCHEONS Heavy type, chrome plated, with set screws. Provide for piping serving plumbing fixtures and at each wall, ceiling and floor penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. 2.4 CARRIERS A. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, with adjustable gasket faceplate chair carriers for wall hung closets with auxiliary anchor foot assembly, hanger rod support feet, and rear anchor tie down. B. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, lavatory, chair carrier for thin wall construction steel plate. All lavatory chair carriers shall be capable of supporting the lavatory with a 250pound vertical load applied at the front of the fixture.

C. Where water closets, lavatories or sinks are installed back-to-back and carriers are specified, provide one carriers to serve both fixtures in lieu of individual carriers. The drainage fitting of the back to back carrier shall be so constructed that it prevents the discharge from on fixture from flowing into the opposite fixture. 2.5 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Water Closet: WC-1 1. Vitreous China wall hung flushometer toilet with elongated rim consumption 1.6 Gallon per flush,1-1/2 top spud inlet. Model TOTO CT708 2. 3.

Seat: TOTO SC534 Open Front Seat Less Cover Flush Valve: Sloan Ecos – 8111-1.6 / 1.1

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Water Closet: WC-2 (ADA) 1. Vitreous China wall hung flushometer toilet with elongated rim. Low consumption 1.6 Gallon per flush,1-1/2 top spud inlet. Model TOTO CT708 2. Seat: TOTO SC534 Open Front Seat Less Cover 3. Flush Valve: Sloan Ecos – 8111-1.6 / 1.1

E. Urinal: UR-1 1. Vitreous China Wall Hung, Wall Hanger, Color Cotton White Outlet Connection Bolts and Washer. Sloan WES-500 Waterless. F. Lavatory: L-1 1. Fire Clay Lavatory Undermount, TOTO LT156 2. Faucet Sloan ETF-660 3. Drain: Cast or Wrought Brass with Flat Grid Strainer, Offset Tailpiece, Brass, Chrome Plated. 4. Stop: Angle Type 5. Trap: Cast copper alloy ( 1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with connected elbow and 17 gauge tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set Trap parallel to the wall. G. Lavatory: L-2 (ADA) 1. Fire Clay Lavatory Undermount, TOTO LT156 2. Faucet Sloan ETF-660 3. Drain: Cast or Wrought Brass with Flat Grid Strainer, Offset Tailpiece, Brass, Chrome Plated. 4. Stop: Angle Type 5. Trap: Cast copper alloy ( 1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with connected elbow and 17 gauge tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set Trap parallel to the wall. 6. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per ADA.

H. Lavatory: L-3 (ADA) 1. Vitreous China Wall Mounted Kohler Model K-2084 SOHO 2. Faucet Sloan ETF–660 3. Drain: Cast or Wrought Brass with Flat Grid Strainer, Offset Tailpiece, Brass, Chrome Plated. 4. Stop: Angle Type 5. Trap: Cast copper alloy (1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with connected elbow and 17 gauge tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set Trap parallel to the wall. 6. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per ADA. I.

Electric Water Cooler: EWH-1 1. Elkay EDFP217RAC

J.

Mop Sink: MS-1 1.Acorn TSH-24-KF24 2.Mop and Broom Holder Bobrick B-223

K. Kitchen Sink: KS-1

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Dayton 23321 2. Faucet Delta 29C2801

L. Kitchen Sink: KS-2 1. Dayton GE12521L 2. Faucet Delta 29C2801

M. Wall Hydrant: WH1 1. Zurn Model Z-1300

N. Shower: Sh-1 1. Bricor B150CH-HH PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES A. All plumbing fixtures and trim shall be new as manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufactured of plumbing fixtures and trim of type style and configuration required, whose products have been in satisfactory use and similar service.

B. Provide protection of all fixtures during construction from damage. Replace all damaged fixtures as directed by the Architect.

C. Each water supply connection to each fixture and each item of water consuming equipment shall be equipped with an accessible stop valve. D. All flush valves shall be quiet diaphragm type with integral screwdriver stops, vacuum breakers and have non-hold-open water-saving feature.

E. All wall-hung fixtures shall be supported with floor mounted fixture supports designed and fitted to suit the fixture and building construction.

F. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate and assemble proper selection and installation of all necessary sleeves, stiffeners, nailing strips, supports, wall hangers, trap assemblies, supplies, drainage fittings and electronic flushing requirements for all fixtures and trim furnished.

G. All exposed bolt heads on water closets shall be covered with acorns or covers made from china, stainless steel, or chrome plated brass.

H. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be provided with all necessary stops, valves, traps, supplies and appurtances required, except where specifically provided for by another contract.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC I.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

All handicapped fixtures indicated and shown on the plumbing and Architectural drawings shall comply with ADA.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A.

Examine roughing-in for portable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

B.

Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 APPLICATION A.

Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on Drawings.

B.

Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required: 1.

Carriers for following fixtures: a. b. c.

Wall-hanging urinals Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A.

Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.

B.

Fasten wall hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction.

C.

Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.

D.

Install stop valve in an accessible location on each water supply to each fixture.

E.

Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.

F.

Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

G.

Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

H.

Install floor mounted and floor outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Operate and adjust faucets and controls. fixtures, fittings, and controls.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning

B.

Operate and adjust disposers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.

C.

Adjust water pressure at electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.

D.

Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E.

Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.

F.

Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section "Project Closeout".

3.6 PROTECTION A.

Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B.

Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the COTR.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

4.1

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B.

Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.

4.2

TEST OF WATER COOLERS A.

General: Start-up, adjust and test equipment performance.

B.

Verity performance of refrigeration compressor including proper operation of automatic reset overload protection.

C.

Check compressor mountings for vibration free operation.

D.

Verify proper operation of condenser fan including obstruction free rotation, cleanliness and lubrication.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Inspect air circulation through condenser coil; remove dirt, lint, and vacuum coil clean.

F.

Inspect electrical wiring termination for tightness and/or corrosion including relays, and aquastats.

G.

Adjust factory setting of water adjustment valve to obtain optimum bubbler operation.

H.

Inspect water piping and reservoir for evidence of leaks.

I.

Inspect and clean drain pan.

4.3

INSPECTIONS A.

Contractor shall coordinate with the Quality Control Engineer before the installation of plumbing fixtures. The Contractor shall seek the guidance in any installation procedures he is unfamiliar with.

B. Periodic inspections of the installations of the materials specified in this section shall be performed and reported in writing to the Contractor, including any deviation from good installation practice observed. C.

On completion of installation the Quality Control Engineer shall inspect the complete system and report in writing any installation error, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the system that could impair the performance of the system.

D.

A report shall be submitted by the Contractor to the COTR, including the final report of the Quality Control Engineer, indicating all materials reported as properly installed or requiring correction. The Contractor shall also report on steps taken to properly complete the work.

END OF SECTION 15440

PLUMBING FIXTURES

15440 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following plumbing specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and pressure gages.

DEFINITIONS A.

The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.4

Backflow preventers Water regulators. Balancing valves. Thermostatic water mixing valves. Water tempering valves. Strainers. Outlet boxes. Washer-supply outlets. Hose stations. Key-operated hydrants. Wheel-handle wall hydrants. Trap seal primer valves. Drain valves. Backwater valves. Miscellaneous piping specialties. Sleeve penetration systems. Flashing materials. Clean-outs Floor drains. Roof drains.

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. PE: Polyethylene plastic. PUR: Polyurethane plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 1/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Domestic Water Piping: 125-psig (860-kPa) Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30-kPa). Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30-kPa).

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Backflow preventers and water regulators. Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems. Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets. Backwater valves, clean-outs, floor drains, open receptors, trench drains, and roof drains. Air-admittance valves, vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies. Sleeve penetration systems.

B.

Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C.

Field test reports.

D.

Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.6

Backflow preventers and water regulators. Water filters. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves. Trap seal primer valves and systems. Hose stations and hydrants.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements."

B.

Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D.

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping," for piping materials and installation.

E.

NSF Compliance:

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 2/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

1.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking “NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and “NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects, Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.

Water Filter Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount installed for each type and size indicated. Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each keyoperated hose bibb and hydrant installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. 2. 3.

2.2

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Ames Company, Incorporated Sparco, Incorporated Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Wilkins Division

General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers. 1. 2.

NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or Stainless steel body with flanged ends. a.

3. 4. 5.

Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel body.

Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 3/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and atmospheric vent.

D.

Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with non-removable and manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

E.

Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Back-flow preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.

F.

Reduced-Pressure-Principle Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 airgap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves. 1.

G.

Double Check Back-flow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and two positive-seating check valves. 1.

H.

Pressure Loss: 12-psig (83-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

Pressure Loss: 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

Anti-siphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test cocks, and atmospheric vent. 1.

Pressure Loss: 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

I.

Dual-Check-Valve-Type Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include union inlet and two independent check valves.

J.

Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved or UL listed and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressuredifferential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between two positiveseating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure back-flow preventer. 1.

Pressure Loss: 12-psig (83-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

K.

Hose-Connection Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3-gpm (0.19L/s) flow and applications with up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure. Include two check valves; intermediate atmospheric vent; and non-removable, ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet.

L.

Back-Siphonage Back-flow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for continuous pressure and back-flow applications. Include shutoff valves, check valve, test cocks, and vacuum vent.

2.3

BALANCING VALVES A.

Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting indicator. Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 4/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Available Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2. 3. 4.

B.

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated Armstrong-Yoshitake, Incorporated Flow Design, Incorporated ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Division Taco, Incorporated Tour & Andersson, Incorporated Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division

NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and threaded ends. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and flanged or grooved ends.

Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard or full-port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded or solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device. 1.

Available Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

2.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Conbraco Industries, Incorporated Crane Company; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves Crane Company; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves Crane Company; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division Grinnell Corporation Hammond Valve Milwaukee Valve Company NIBCO Incorporated Red-White Valve Corporation

THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting, and thermometer. 1. 2.

C.

Lawler Manufacturing Company, Incorporated Leonard Valve Company Mark Controls Corporation, Powers Process Controls Symmons Industries, Incorporated T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Incorporated

Type: Bimetal thermostat, operation and pressure rating 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum Type: Liquid-filled motor, operation and pressure rating 100-psig (690-kPa) minimum.

Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 5/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

2.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Piping, valves, and unions. Piping Component Finish: Rough bronze. Cabinet: Recessed-mounting steel box with steel hinged door, white enameled finish, and thermometer in front.

WATER TEMPERING VALVES A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Heat-Timer Corporation Holby Valve Company, Incorporated Sparco, Incorporated Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division

B.

General: Manually adjustable, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve; bronze body; and adjustable temperature setting.

C.

System Water Tempering Valves: Piston or discs controlling both hot- and cold-water flow, capable of limited anti-scald protection. Include threaded inlets and outlet. 1.

D.

2.6

Finish: Chrome plated

Limited-Volume, Water Tempering Valves: Solder-joint inlets and NPS 3/4 (DN 20) maximum outlet.

STRAINERS A.

Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch (1.2-mm) round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDAapproved, epoxy coating and flanged ends. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blow-down. a.

5. 6.

T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access end cap with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle. a. b.

B.

Drain: Factory- or field installed, hose-end drain valve.

Type: Simplex with one basket. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.

Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted flange or clamp cover and drain with plug. 1. 2.

Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16-inch- (3.2- or 4.8-mm-) diameter holes and lift-out handle. Female threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, and flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 6/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

OUTLET BOXES A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Acorn Engineering Company Gray, Guy Manufacturing Company, Incorporated IPS Corporation LSP Products Group Oatey Plastic Oddities, Incorporated Symmons Industries, Incorporated Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Jonespec Division

B.

General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying with ASME A112.18.1M. Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment connections, and wood-blocking reinforcement.

C.

Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hot- and cold-water hose connections, drain, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

2.8

Box and Faceplate: Stainless steel. Shutoff Fittings: Two hose bibbs Supply Fittings: Two NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing. Drain: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) standpipe, P-trap, and direct waste connection to drainage piping. Inlet Hoses: Two ASTM D 3571, 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female hose-thread couplings. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- (1200-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked end.

WASHER-SUPPLY OUTLETS A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Description: Surface-mounting, washer-supply outlet fittings ASME A112.18.1M and with reinforcement. Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

B & K Industries, Incorporated Conbraco Industries, Incorporated IMI Cash Valve Symmons Industries, Incorporated Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Jonespec Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation complying

with

Shutoff Fitting: Combination, single lever. Supply Fittings: Two NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing. Inlet Hoses: Two ASTM D 3571, 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female hose-thread couplings.

Reinforcement: 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking between studs.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 7/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.9

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

KEY-OPERATED HYDRANTS A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-draining with flushmounting box with cover, integral non-removable hose-connection vacuum breaker or back-flow preventer, casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, concealed outlet, and wall clamp. 1. 2.

C.

2.

A.

Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.

Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Ground Hydrants: Draining type with flush-mounting box with cover, casing and operating rod of at least length required for burial of valve below frost line, drain hole, and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet. 1.

2.10

Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed. Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.

Hot and Cold, Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: With deep flush-mounting box with cover; hot- and cold-water casings and operating rods to match wall thickness; concealed outlet; wall clamps; and factory- or field-installed, non-removable and manual drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or back-flow preventer complying with ASSE 1052. 1.

E.

Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed. Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.

Moderate-Climate, Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-draining with flushmounting box with cover, integral non-removable hose-connection vacuum breaker or back-flow preventer, and concealed outlet. 1.

D.

Josam Company Murdock, Incorporated Simmons Manufacturing Company Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company Tyler Pipe; Wade Division Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division Woodford Manufacturing Company

Box and Cover Finish: Rough bronze.

TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following characteristics: 1.

Available Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f.

E & S Valves Josam Company MIFAB Manufacturing, Incorporated Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company Tyler Pipe; Wade Division

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 8/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC g. h. i. j. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.

Available Manufacturers: a.

2.

Chrome-plated, cast-brass, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup connection.

Available Manufacturers: a.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

A.

Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company

Trap Seal Primer System: Factory-fabricated, automatic-operation assembly for wall mounting with the following: 1.

2.11

Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Jonespec Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation

Drainage-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1044, fixture-trap, waste-drainage-fed type, with the following characteristics: 1.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated

Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water tubing inlet and manifold with number of NPS 1/2 (DN 15) outlets as indicated. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

DRAIN VALVES Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, rated for 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinylcovered steel handle. 1. 2.

Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.

B.

Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.

C.

Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side drain outlet and cap.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 9/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.12 A.

BACKWATER VALVES Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

2. 3.

2.13 A.

Josam Company Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation

Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removable bronze swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover. 1.

C.

Closed-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang closed unless subject to back-flow condition. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field-modified to hang open for airflow. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class, full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-installed clean-out at floor, instead of cover.

Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float, threaded inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet for installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.

MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 1.

Available Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.

B.

Josam Company Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company Tyler Pipe; Wade Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Incorporated

Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125-psig (860-kPa); integral or field-installed, non-removable, drain-able hose-connection vacuum breaker; and gardenhose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet. 1. 2.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze, chrome or nickel-plated.

Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm, designed to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer gas into building. 1.

Available Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.

B & K Industries, Incorporated Durgo, Incorporated IMI Cash Valve IPS Corporation J & B Products

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 10/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC f. g. h. i. 2.

3.

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Magic Vent Company, Incorporated Oatey Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Incorporated Studor, Incorporated

Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste, and vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100). Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead of vent connection, for single fixture, in NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50).

Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch- (2.4-mm-)] thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) from pipe with galvanized steel boot reinforcement, and counter-flashing fitting. 1.

Available Manufacturers: a.

2. 3. 4.

Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Division

Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

E.

Open Drains: Shop or field-fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

F.

Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and clean-out trap seal primer valve connection. 1. 2.

NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.

G.

Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.

H.

Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semi-open top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

I.

Stack Flashing Fittings: Counter-flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extension of vent pipe.

J.

Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.

K.

Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch (25-mm) enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counter-flashing.

L.

Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.

M.

Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron casting, with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet; shop-applied bituminous coating; and inlet size to match downspout.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 11/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

N.

Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.

O.

Conductor Nozzles: Bronze body with threaded inlet for connected conductor size, and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. 1.

2.14 A.

SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS Available Manufacturers: 1.

B.

Finish: Nickel bronze.

ProSet Systems, Incorporated

Description: UL 1479, through-penetration fire-stop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack fitting with fire-stopping plug. 1. 2.

Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron, hub-less pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug. a.

2.15 A.

FLASHING MATERIALS Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weight and thickness, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.

General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.

Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152 (ASTM B 152M), of the following minimum weights and thickness, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

General Applications: 12-oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness). Vent Pipe Flashing: 8-oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).

C.

Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D.

Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01mm) minimum thickness.

E.

Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F.

Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G.

Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 12/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC H.

2.16

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

CLEANOUTS

A.

Clean-outs: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M] [ASME A112.3.1.

B.

Traffic area floor clean-out: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

Non-traffic area floor clean-out: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Cast iron body. Spigot or non-hub connection Internal gasketed ABS clean-out plug Adjustable ABS housing Heavy duty cast iron tractor cover with round top

Cast iron body. Spigot or Non-hub connection. Internal gasketed Clean-out plug. Adjustable ABS housing. Nikaloy cover and round top.

Inline cast iron pipe clean-outs: 1. 2.

Cast iron with straight body for spigot connection or inside caulk with bronze plug. Use No-hub cap for clean-out on No-hub piping.

E.

In line screwed pipe clean-out: Cast bronze countersunk plug.

F.

Stack clean-outs: Clean-out tee with cast bronze countersunk threaded plug.

G.

Wall clean-outs: 1. 2. 3.

2.17

Clean-out tee with cast bronze countersunk threaded plug. Square Nikaloy frame. Cover with minimum 6” by 6” opening.

FLOOR DRAINS

A.

Floor Drains, Comply with ASME A112.21.1M, ASME A112.21.1M with ASME A112.14.1, backwater valve, or ASME A112.3.1 as applicable..

B.

FD-1: Cast iron floor drain, two piece body with double drainage flange, invertible nonpuncturing flashing collar, weep holes, bottom outlet and adjustable round extended rim strainer. Similar to Josam 3000-E1.

C.

FD-2: Similar to FD-1 without extended rim strainer with EJ tractor strainer.

2.18

ROOF DRAINS

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 13/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Roof Drain type designations and sizes indicated on Drawings (RD-1 through RD-36)

B.

RD-1 Roof Drain: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.19

Bottom outlet cast iron body. Clamping ring and gravel guard. Aluminum dome enclosing entire drain sum. Expansion joint. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Josam Series 21500.

INLINE CIRCULATING PUMP

A.

Circulation pump shall be of the electric motor driven “in-line” type, having a capacity of not less than indicated on the drawings.

B.

Pump shall be of the centrifugal type and shall be designed in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute, including latest modifications. Pump shall operate at a speed not in excess of 1750 rpm and shall be designed for quiet operation. Pump shall be designed to permit complete servicing without breaking the piping connections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure. Impeller: Bronze Shaft: Alloy steel, with integral thrust collar and two lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. Drive: Flexible couplings

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B.

Install back-flow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

3.

Locate back-flow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. Install drain for back-flow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under back-flow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. Do not install bypass piping around back-flow preventers.

C.

Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D.

Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.

E.

Install draining-type ground and ground post hydrants with 1 cu. yd. (0.75 cu. m) of crushed gravel around drain hole.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 14/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade. Set post hydrants in concrete paving or in 1 cu. ft. (0.03 cu. m) of concrete block at grade.

F.

Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap with a minimum slope of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

G.

Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.

H.

Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.

I.

Install clean-outs in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger clean-out is indicated. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

J.

Install clean-out deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor clean-outs for piping below floors.

K.

Install clean-out wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for clean-outs located in concealed piping.

L.

Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and clean-out passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

M.

Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions.

N.

Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

O.

Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2.

Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. b. c.

Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1-percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1-percent slope. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1-percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 15/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4.

P.

Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. 2.

Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

Q.

Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.

R.

Fasten recessed type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

S.

Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounted and recessed-type plumbing specialties.

T.

Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.

U.

Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet [and drain piping from outlet to floor drain].

V.

Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

W.

Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2

3.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C.

Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.

D.

Ground equipment.

E.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

F.

Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.

FLASHING INSTALLATION

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 16/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1.

2. B.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. 2. 3.

Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.

C.

Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D.

Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E.

Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter-flashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F.

Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having caulking recess.

G.

Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4

LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.

Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each back-flow preventer, thermostatic water mixing valve, water tempering valve, and trap seal primer system. 1.

2.

3.5

Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Refer to Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification” for nameplates and signs.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled trap seal primer systems and their installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. 2.

3.

Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 17/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PROTECTION A.

Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B.

Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.7

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain trap seal primer systems. Refer to Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures.”

END OF SECTION 15430

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15430 - 18/18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems, including drains and drainage specialties.

B.

Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product data for plumbing piping products including piping specialties and drains.

C.

Coordination drawings, drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations.

D.

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information for all products in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01730.

1.4

1.5

Division 2 Division 7 Division 9 Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification." Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports"

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.

Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing, and roof penetrations.

B.

Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining substrate work.

C.

Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.

D.

Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains with drainage piping systems.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 1/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Requirements and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction International Plumbing Code 1997 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulations American National Standards (ANSI) Institute “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook."

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.7

Comply with the provisions of ASME B 31.9 “Building Services Piping" for materials, products and installation.

TRAINING A.

Training shall be in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01731.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to: 1.

Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains, trap primers, and vent caps: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Non-Metallic Trench Drains: a. b. c.

2.2

Josam Company Smith (Jay R) Manufacturing Company Tyler Pipe; Subsidiary of Tyler Corporation Zurn Industries Incorporated; Hydromechanics Division MIFAB Incorporated

Polydrain ABT Incorporated Quazite Corporation ACO Drain Incorporated

ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTING A.

Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. 1.

B.

Clamps and compression gaskets: ASTM C564 neoprene rubber gasket.

Hub-less Cast Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. Stainless steel worm-drive clamps.

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 2/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION C. Galvanized steel: ASTM A-53, schedule 40, fittings, black cast iron. Joints shall be screwed ASME B 16.12. Threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1

2.3

UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Heavy weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces. 1.

B.

Force-Main Pipe: Ductile iron AWWA C 151, class 50 with mechanical joint. 1. 2.

2.4

Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.

Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends conforming to AWWA C 110 or AWWA C 153. Encase in polyethylene film.

DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a maximum 1/4-inch clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.

B.

Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2-inch connections matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.

C.

Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts.

D.

Clean-out Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head.

E.

Floor Clean-outs: Cast-iron body and frame, with clean-out plug and adjustable round top as follows: 1.

Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns: a. b. c. d.

2.

Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8-inch thick resilient floor finish. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1-inch thick terrazzo floor finish. Exposed finish type, standard mill finish. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.

Cast iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns: a. b.

Exposed flush type, standard mill finish. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finishes.

F.

Wall Clean-outs: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass clean-out plug; stainless steel cover including screws.

G.

Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide under-deck clamp and sleeve length as required.

H.

Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks.

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 3/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 2.5 FLOOR DRAINS

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

A.

Floor drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.

B.

Floor Drain: FD-1: 1.

Cast iron, two-piece body, double drainage flange-flashing collar, weep holes, bottom outlet, with the following features: a. b. c.

2. C.

Josam 30000 - A Series

Floor Drain: FD-2: 1.

Cast-iron, double drainage flange, weep holes, bottom outlet, with the following features: a. b. c.

2.

3.

Adjustable nickel bronze round strainer in adjustable nickel bronze clamping collar. Deep seal trap. Secure grate, vandal-proof.

Josam 30200 - AD Series a.

2.6

Adjustable nickel bronze round strainer. 1/2" primer tap. Secure grate, vandal-proof.

Secure grate, vandal-proof

Josam 30000 - D Series

ROOF DRAINS A.

Roof drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.

B.

Roof Drain: RD-1: 1.

Cast-iron body, large polypropylene locking dome, clamp ring, with integral gravel stop, with the following features: a. b. c. d.

2. C.

Support ring. Adjustable top with wide roof flange. Large sump with anchor flange and bottom outlet Deck clamp assembly.

Josam 21,000 Series

Roof Drain: RD-2 (For Canopy Roof) 1.

Coated cast iron, sill drain, secured low bronze dome, bronze clamp ring shallow sump with flashing flange and side outlet threaded connection. a. b.

Deck clamp assembly. Vandal-proof dome

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 4/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 2. Josam 24520 Series D.

2.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Vertical Expansion Joint: Coated cast iron body, packing gland and silicone bronze sleeve with preformed neoprene packing gasket. Zurn Z-190.

PIPE SLEEVE ABOVE CEILING A.

PVC plastic pipe: ASTM D1785-83, schedule 40.

B.

Fittings: Field fabricated.

2.8

VALVES A.

Refer to Division 15 Section “Plumbing Valves."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.

B.

Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

C.

Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.

D.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS A.

Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout the length of the pipe.

B.

Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.

C.

Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference. Fill unevenness with tampered sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.

3.3

PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING A.

Install hub and spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with compression gasket joints for larger than 3-inch drainage and vent pipe.

B.

Install hub-less, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe.

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 5/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION C. Install galvanized steel pipe for storm system piping, unless otherwise indicated. D.

3.4

JJCA/7590

Install galvanized steel pipe for vent piping systems. (Optional)

PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING A.

3.5

Install hub-and-spigot, extra heavy weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasket joints for 15 inches and smaller drainage pipe.

PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, OUTSIDE BUILDING FOUNDATION DRAIN. A.

3.6

Install 4-inch diameter schedule 40, PVC perforated drainage pipe placed within the granular sub-base.

INSTALLATION A.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

B.

Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

C.

Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted.

D.

Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

E.

Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

F.

Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G.

Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.

H.

Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity.

I.

Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes, half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

J.

Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fitting Handbook. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 6/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1.

K.

Install drains pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inch smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 3 inch to 6 inch. 1.

Where noted or required, install at 1/16 inch per foot for piping 8 inch or larger.

L.

Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. Sewer piping is specified in a separate section.

M.

Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation.

3.7

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.

Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports"

B.

Install hangers at intervals indicated in plumbing code.

3.8

INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Contractor shall provide roof drains, floor drains and all specialties as specified or shown, with all required accessories for a complete installation.

B.

Install expansion joints on vertical risers as required by the plumbing code. Special attention shall be required for roof drains and rain leaders draining the high dome / skylight roof areas.

C.

Above Ground Clean-outs: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated and as required by plumbing code. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.9

Keep drainage pipe starts at a minimum to ensure maintenance of noted invert elevations.

At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees; At minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" smaller and 100' for larger piping; At base of each vertical soil or waste stack; Ceiling clean-outs are not permitted.

D.

Clean-outs Covers: Install floor and wall clean-out covers for concealed piping, types as specified.

E.

Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and clean-out passing through waterproof membranes.

F.

Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks through roof, secure over stack flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 7/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. B.

Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.

C.

Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper slope to drain.

D.

Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer, drain traps shall be deep seal type except as noted.

E.

Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

F.

Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

3.10 A.

3.11

INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS Install trap primers with piping towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.

INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS

A.

Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof manufacturer's installation instructions.

B.

Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

C.

Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

3.12 A.

3.13

EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Piping Run-outs to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping run-outs to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B.

Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.

3.14 A.

PROTECTION Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 8/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

3.15 A.

3.16

JJCA/7590

LEAK PROTECTION For piping located at or above ceiling of electrical rooms, telephone equipment rooms or rooms with electronic equipment, such as Tracon areas, install pipes inside PVC plastic pipe sleeve.

INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A.

Install valves for duty indicated, where shown on drawings.

B.

Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL 4.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

4.2

Conform to all applicable provisions of Section “Contractor Quality Control Program".

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Inspections 1. 2.

Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner, at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the COTR or his representative. a. b.

3. 4. B.

Rough-in Inspection: Arrange the inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the Owner to observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.

Re-inspection: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections, and arrange for re-inspected by the Owner. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Contractor.

Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures indicated by the Authority, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows: 1.

2.

3.

Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test segment, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 9/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and watertight. Plug the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1" water column. Use a "U" tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6.

4.3

Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.

INSPECTION A.

Contractor shall coordinate with the Quality Control Engineer before the installation of the drainage and vent systems. The contractor shall seek the guidance in any installation procedures he is unfamiliar with.

B.

Periodic inspections of the installations of the materials specified in this section shall be performed and reported in writing to the contractor, including any deviation from good installation practice observed.

C.

On completion of installation the Quality Control Engineer shall inspect the complete system and report in writing any installation error, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the system that could impair the performance of the system.

D.

A report shall be submitted by the Owner, including the final report of the Quality Control Engineer, indicating all materials reported as properly installed or requiring correction. The contractor shall also report on steps taken to properly complete the Work.

END OF SECTION 15420

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

15420 - 10/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes potable cold-water, hot water, and circulation hot water piping, pipefittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.

B.

Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

1.3

Division 2 Division 9 Division 15 Section “Valves" Division 15 Section “Meters and Gauges" Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification" Division 15 Section “Plumbing Pumps" Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” Division 15 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing"

SUBMITTALS A

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.4

Product data for each piping plumbing piping products including specialty and valve specified. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in “Quality Assurance" Article. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified below. Laboratory analysis of water samples taken after disinfecting and flushing the piping system. Laboratory shall be certified and licensed by the state of Maryland. Test reports specified in Part 4 of this Section. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information for all products in accordance with the requirements of specification.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.

Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 1/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION B.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.

QUALIFICATIONS A.

1.6

Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.

Comply with the provisions of the following codes: 1. 2. 3.

1.7

International Plumbing Code/1997 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing" Board of Health State of Maryland.

SPARE PARTS A.

1.8

Contractor shall furnish spare parts for all manufactured equipment or devices.

TRAINING A.

Training of maintenance personnel shall be per requirements of Section “Training."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to: 1.

Strainers: a. b. c.

2.

Special Duty Valves: a. b.

3.

Josam Company Metraflex Company Smith (Jay R.) Manufacturing Company

ITT Bell and Gossett Spirax Sarco, Incorporated

Hose Bibbs: a. b. c.

Nibco, Incorporated Watts Regulator Company Woodford Manufacturing Company

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 2/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 4.

Backflow Preventers: a.

5.

Watts Regulator Company Conbraco Industries, Incorporated Cash (A. W.) Valve Manufacturing Corporation

Flexible Connectors a.

2.2

Josam Company Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated Smith (Jay R.) Manufacturing Company Wade Division, Tyler Pipe Watts Regulator Company Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Hydromechanics Division

Vacuum Breakers for Hose Connections: a. b. c.

8.

Watts Regulator Company Conbraco Industries, Incorporated Cash (A. W.) Valve Manufacturing Corporation Zurn Industries, Incorporated Wilkins Regulator Division

Water Hammer Arresters: a. b. c. d. e. f.

7.

Watts Regulator Company

Relief Valves: a. b. c. d.

6.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Metra-Flex

PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS A.

Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper.

B.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.

C.

Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C 151 class (52), mechanical joint, with cement mortar lining per AWWA C 104.

2.3

FITTINGS A.

Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

B.

Galvanized Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.

C.

Ductile-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, 150-psi rating, with cement mortar lining and AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.

D.

Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B161.1, Class 125, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 3/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

E.

Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.

F.

Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit application; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.

G.

Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze wire reinforced protective jacket; minimum 150-psig working pressure, maximum 250 degrees F operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

2.4

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B-32, Lead Free Solder and Anticorrosive Flux.

B.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

C.

Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design temperatures and pressures.

2.5

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES A.

2.6

General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section “Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3 Article “Valve Application" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

SPECIAL DUTY VALVES A.

Circuit Setter: Calibrated balance valve, bronze body, brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Differential read-out ports across valve seat area. EPT inserts and check valve. 1/4 NPT tapped drain port. Memory stop. Designed for positive shut-off.

B.

Maximum working pressure 300-Psi, maximum operating temperature 2500F

C.

Manufacturer: ITT Bell & Gossett Model CB, or as acceptable to the Authority.

2.7

PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250-psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.

B.

Hose Bibbs: Hexagonal shoulder with tee handle, 3/4" I.P. inlet, hose end.

C.

Strainers: 1. 2.

3" and larger, cast-iron body, 125-psi flanges, bolted-type with removable noncorrosive perforated strainer having 1/8-inch perforations. 2-1/2" and smaller, 250-lb iron body, furnished with 20-mesh stainless steel screen, threaded ends.

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 4/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

D.

Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to ASME B1.20.7.

E.

Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011, with finish to match hose connection.

F.

Back-flow Preventers: Standard reduced pressure zone, consisting of two in-line independent check valves with an intermediate relief valve. Furnished with ball type test cocks and quarter turn, full port resilient seated bronze ball valve shutoffs: 1. 2.

G.

Tested and certified under ASSE Standard No. 1013, AWWA Standard No. C511 and FCCCHR of USC manual, Section 10. Watts 909 type RPZ

Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes for indicated capacity of the appliance for which is installed. 1.

Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Temperature relief valves shall be factory set at 210 degrees F and pressure relief at 150-psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

3.2

Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

PIPE APPLICATIONS A.

Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 4 inches and smaller, above ground, within building

B.

Install galvanized steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 5 inches and larger, above ground, within building.

C.

Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with grooved ends or flanged ends within the building.

D.

Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with mechanical joints below ground, inside and outside building.

3.3

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

B.

Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections.

C.

Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted.

D.

Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 5/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

insulation applications. E.

Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

F.

Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G.

Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

H.

Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple, cap, and chain.

I.

Install vents at high points in risers and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting 3/4" ball valve and short 3/4" threaded nipple and pipe cap and chain.

J.

Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior wall with sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be galvanized steel sheet metal.

K.

Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes though fire-rated wall, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire-rated integrity.

L.

Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot downward slope towards drain point.

3.4

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.

Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hanger and Supports."

B.

Pipe Attachments: Install the following: 1. 2.

Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C.

Install hangers for horizontal piping as required by the plumbing code.

D.

Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor, where applicable.

3.5

PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Solder Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Soldering Manual."

B.

Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Brazing Manual." 1. 2.

Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping specialties before soldering and brazing. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 6/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

3. C.

carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.

Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. Align threads at point of assembly. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. a.

D.

3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

Flanged Joints: Align Flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

SERVICE ENTRANCE A.

Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.

B.

Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation.

C.

Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building complete with strainer and pressure gage.

D.

Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C-600. Pipe below ground inside building and to a point 5 feet outside of building shall have restrained joints.

3.7

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. 2.

3.8

Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves. Throttling duty: Use globe and ball valves.

INSTALLATION OF VALVES A.

Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

B.

Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 7/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

supply to each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. C.

Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain equipment completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution-piping system completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For drain valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

D.

Check Valves: Install check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated.

E.

Balancing Valves: Install in each hot water re-circulating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated.

F.

Hose-Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker.

3.9

INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Back-flow Preventers: All water supply lines shall be designed and equipped with back-flow preventers as mandated by the Rules and Regulations of the Board of Health of Maryland. 1.

2.

3.10

Installing contractor shall be responsible for certification of all back-flow prevention devices. Certification shall be performed by individual or company certified to test such devices. Documentation of individual or company certification shall be provided to the Owner prior to final acceptance. Install back-flow preventers at each connection to plumbing equipment and systems and in compliance with the plumbing codes, and the authority requirements.

EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A.

Piping Run-outs to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run-outs to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.

B.

Plumbing Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment and fixtures as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inches and larger, use flanges instead of unions.

3.11 A.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. 2.

Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the Authority. If a method is not prescribed by the Authority follow the procedure described below: a. b.

Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 8/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

c.

d. e.

B.

3.13 A.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

and allow to stand for 24 hours. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to a certified testing laboratory. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the laboratory shows evidence of contamination.

Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities and submit to the Owner for approval.

COORDINATION For balancing the Hot Water Circulating System refer to Division 15 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing".

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL 4.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

4.2

Conform to all applicable provisions of Specifications Section “Contractor Quality Control Program".

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 1. 2.

Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the Owner. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Owner. a.

b.

3. 4. B.

Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before being concealed or closed in after system before concealed or closed in after system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.

Re-inspection: Whenever the Owner finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for re-inspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports for the Owner review and approval.

Test water distribution piping as follows:

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 9/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Test all water distribution piping systems for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. (Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved). Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50-psig above the operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and required corrective action. Prepare reports for all required tests, including corrective actions and submit to Owner.

END OF SECTION 15411

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

15411 - 10/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

SECTION 15326 - STANDPIPE AND WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section specifies standpipe and sprinkler systems for buildings and structures.

B.

Products specified in this Section with installation include sprinkler cabinets with spare sprinklers and sprinkler wrenches. Deliver to the Owner's maintenance personnel.

C.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for fire barrier sealers Division 10 Section “Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories” for fire extinguishers and cabinets for fire extinguishers, hose valves, and rack and hose assemblies. Division 15 Section “Hanger and Supports” Division 16 Section “Fire Alarm Systems” for alarm devices not specified in this Section.

DEFINITIONS A.

Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches. Tube sizes are standard tube size specified in inches.

B.

Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents prepared pursuant to requirements in NFPA 13 and 14 for obtaining preliminary approval of authority having jurisdiction, Contractor shall be responsible for developing installation plans and calculation for approval of the Fire Marshall.

C.

Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.

1.4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: System with automatic sprinklers attached to piping system containing water and connected to water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened by fire.

B.

Sprinkler System Protection Limits: All spaces. Include closets, toilet and locker room areas, each landing of each stair, and special applications areas.

C.

Standpipe Systems: Systems that are wet type have water supply valve open and pressure maintained at all times and include branches extending from standpipes to sprinkler zone valves. 15326 - 1/19 Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION D. Class I, Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Arrangement of piping, valves, hose connections, and accessories for use by persons trained in use of heavy fire streams. Hose valves are 2-1/2-inch size.

1.5

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Contractor shall design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for a complete fire protection system specified.

B.

Minimum Pipe Sizes: Not smaller than sizes indicated for connection to water supply piping and standpipes.

C.

Contractor shall be responsible for conducting fire hydrant flow tests as required to obtain hydraulic data needed to prepare design for hydraulically calculated systems.

D.

Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to the following criteria: 1.

Sprinkler System Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As follows: a. b. c. d.

2.

Minimum Density Requirements for Automatic Sprinkler System Hydraulic Design: As follows: a. b. c.

3.

Office and Public Areas: Light hazard. Storage Areas: Ordinary hazard. Group 2. Equipment Rooms: Ordinary hazard. Group 2. Service Areas: Ordinary hazard. Group I.

Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authority having jurisdiction.

Maximum Sprinkler Spacing: As follows: a. b. c. d. e.

Office Space: 225-sq. ft./sprinkler Storage Areas: 130-sq. ft./sprinkler Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130-sq. ft./sprinkler Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130-sq. ft./sprinkler Other Areas: According to NFPA 13

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 2/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION E.

Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise. 1. 2.

1.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Sprinkler Systems: 175-psig. Standpipe and Hose Systems: 175-psig.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit under provisions of Section 01300 and as modified herein.

B.

Product data for fire protection system components. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

Back-flow preventers Valves Specialty valves, accessories, and devices. Alarm devices. Include electrical data. Fire department connections. Include type of fire department connection; number, size, type, and arrangement of inlets; size and direction of outlet; and finish. Hose valves. Include size, type, and finish. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish, and other data.

Shop Drawings: 1.

2. 3.

4.

Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, details, and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0". Provide larger scale details as necessary. Show elements of reflected ceiling plans, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions, diffusers, registers, grilles, fire dampers, sleeves and other aspects of construction as necessary for coordination. Highlight all firewalls and smoke partitions for appropriate coordination. Shop drawings showing manufacturer's engineering and product data shall contain detailed dimensional drawings, accurate and complete description of materials and construction, manufacturer's published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to the following: a.

b.

c.

Sprinkler work layout, including sprinkler head type, dimensioned location and sizes of piping, heads, guards, flushing connections, drains, test stations, alarm valves, and all other accessories as required by NFPA #13 Chapter 6. Hydraulic calculations, including piping data and municipal flow test results shall be per applicable NFPA Standards and Owner's Insurer. Chapter 6 of NFPA #13 shall be the minimum requirement. Equipment Cuts for: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Alarm valves. Inspector's test valves Valves, gauges, drains, fittings, and piping. Head guards, spare head cabinet. Fire Department Connections with ball drip and check valves.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 3/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION (6) Hangers and supports. (7) Sprinkler heads, escutcheons. (8) Flow switches, tamper switches and other switches. (9) Access panels. (10) Fire Department valves. 5. 6.

7.

D.

3.

2. 3. 4.

1.7

Prepare in accordance with requirements of Sections 01041 and 15050. Before materials are purchased, fabricated or work is begun; prepare coordination drawings for all floor areas, including buried services. Show all sprinkler heads, piping, equipment, etc. and circulate drawings to any and all subsubcontractors so they can indicate their work to result in a fully coordinated installation.

Working Plans: 1.

F.

Submit samples of all sprinkler heads. Prior to final shop drawing submittals, prepare "Head Location Drawings" depicting all sprinkler head locations and submit them to Architect for approval. Show location of all heads, all required dimensions, and lights, diffusers and ceiling tile patters indicated on Architectural Drawings. Disposition of shop drawings shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from the responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications, unless he has submitted, in writing, a letter itemizing or calling attention to such deviations at the time of submission and secured written approval from the Architect, nor shall such disposition of shop drawings relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings or schedules.

Coordination Drawings: 1. 2.

E.

JJCA/7590

Contractor shall be responsible for determining exact number of sprinkler heads, and type as well as other required components including wiring but not limited to electrical services. Submit required number of sets to authority having jurisdiction for review, comment, and approval. Include system hydraulic calculations where applicable. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by registered engineer licensed in the District of Columbia. Licensed engineer's sprinkler system drawings specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to authority having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations. Licensed engineer's installation report specified in “Field Quality Control” Article. Test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13. Include “Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and “Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping.”

Maintenance data for each type of fire protection specialty specified, for inclusion in “Operating and Maintenance Manual” specified in Division 1 Section “Project Closeout.”

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval Guide and that conform to other requirements indicated.

B.

Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Marking: On equipment, specialties, and accessories made to specified standards

C.

Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 4/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D.

Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals, materials, hose threads, installation, inspections, and testing.

E.

Comply with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals, materials, installation, inspections, and testing.

F.

Sprinkler Contractor's Licensed Engineer: Submit design drawings, design calculations, and installation inspection reports. Include seal and signature of registered engineer licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.

G.

Installer's Qualifications: Firms qualified to install and alter fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and service equipment. A qualified firm is one that is experienced (minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project) in such work, familiar with precautions required, and in compliance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Submit evidence of qualifications to the Architect upon request. Refer to Division 1 Section “Reference Standards and Definitions” for definition of “Installer.”

H.

NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

NFPA 13 “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.” NFPA 14 “Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.” NFPA 26 “Recommended Practice for the Supervision of Valves Controlling Water Supplies for Fire Protection.” NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.” NFPA 231 “Standard for General Storage.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Specialty Valves and Water Motor Alarms Devices: a. b. c. d.

2.

Central Sprinkler Corporation Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation Star Sprinkler Corporation Viking Corporation

Detector Check Valves: a. b. c.

Ames Company, Incorporated Cla-Val Company Hersey Products, Incorporated, Grinnell Corporation

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 5/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION d. Viking Corporation e. Watts Regulator Company 3.

Back-flow Preventers: a. b. c. d.

4.

Croker Division, Fire-End and Croker Corporation Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Incorporated Potter-Roemer Division, Smith Industries, Incorporated Sierra Fire Equipment Company

Fire Protection Service Gate and Check Valves: a. b. c. d.

9.

Central Sprinkler Corporation Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation Star Sprinkler Corporation Viking Corporation

Hose Valves: a. b. c. d.

8.

Croker Division, Fire-End and Croker Corporation Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Incorporated Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation Potter-Roemer Division, Smith Industries, Incorporated Sierra Fire Equipment Company

Sprinklers: a. b. c. d.

7.

Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation System Sensor Division, Pittway Corporation Victaulic Company of America Watts Regulator Company

Fire Department Connections: a. b. c. d. e.

6.

Ames Company, Incorporated Hersey Products, Incorporated, Grinnell Corporation Watts Regulator Company Wilkins Regulator Division, Zurn Industries, Incorporated

Water flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches: a. b. c. d.

5.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation Nibco Incorporated Stockham Valves and Fittings, Incorporated Victaulic Company of America

Grooved Couplings for Steel Piping:

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 6/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION a. Grinnell Supply Sales Company, Grinnell Corporation b. Gustin-Bacon Division, Tyler Pipe Subsidiary, Tyler Corporation c. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Incorporated d. Victaulic Company of America

JJCA/7590

10. Grooved Couplings for AWWA Ductile-Iron Piping: a. b.

Gustin-Bacon Division, Tyler Pipe Subsidiary, Tyler Corporation Victaulic Company of America

11. Grooved Couplings for Copper Tubing: a.

Victaulic Company of America

12. Press-Seal Fittings for Steel Piping: a.

2.2

Victaulic Company of America

PIPES AND TUBES A.

Refer to “Sprinkler System Piping Applications” and “Standpipe System Piping Applications” for identification of systems where pipe and fitting materials specified below are used.

B.

Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile-iron barrel with iron-alloy threaded flanges, 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure rating, and AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. 1.

Option: Pipe may be AWWA pattern, cut-grooved for grooved-coupling joints.

C.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6- inches and smaller and Schedule 30 in sizes 8inches and larger, black and galvanized, plain and threaded ends, for welded, threaded, cut-groove, and rolled-groove joints.

D.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5-inch sizes and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness for 6-inch through 10-inch sizes, with plain ends, black and galvanized, for rolled-groove and welded joints.

E.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, thread-able light wall, black and galvanized, for threaded joints.

F.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795, black and galvanized, for joints listed and for use with fittings for plain-end steel pipe. 1. 2. 3.

2.3

Type: Standard-weight pipe, Schedules 30 and 40, for cut-groove, rolled-groove, threaded, and welding joints. Type: Lightweight pipe, Schedule 10, for rolled-groove and welding joints. Type: Extra-lightweight pipe, thickness less than Schedule 10, for rolled-groove and welding joints.

PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A.

Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 250, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 7/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION B. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. C.

Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 250 standard pattern with threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

D.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300 standard pattern with threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

E.

Grooved-End Fittings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron, AWWA pipe-size, designed to accept AWWA C606 grooved couplings. Include cement lining or Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-approved interior coating.

F.

Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, seamless or welded; ASME B16.9, butt-welding type; or ASME B16.11, socket-welding type for welded joints.

G.

Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

H.

Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Pipe: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings.

I.

Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, streamlined pattern.

J.

Cast-Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24 Class 300 raised ground face with bolt holes spot faced.

2.4

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for joining materials not included in this Section.

B.

Flanged Joints for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast Iron Fittings: AWWA C115 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts.

C.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.

D.

Couplings for Grooved-End Steel Pipe and Grooved-End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C606, ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing, with enamel finish. Include synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design; ASTM A 183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

2.5

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES A.

2.6

Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.

FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE VALVES

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 8/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION A. General: UL-listed and FM-approved, with 175-psig non-shock minimum working pressure rating. 1.

Option: Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type.

B.

Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: UL 262, cast-bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem.

C.

Indicating Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded ends, and integral indicating device. 1. 2. 3.

Indicator: Visual. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts AC, pre-wired, single-circuit, and supervisory switch. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts AC, pre-wired, 2-circuit, and supervisory switch.

D.

Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends.

E.

Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger for Use with Indicator Posts: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem with operating nut and flanged ends.

F.

Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends.

G.

Butterfly Check Valves, 4 Inches and Larger: UL 213, split-clapper style, cast-iron body with rubber seal, bronze alloy discs, stainless steel spring and hinge pin.

2.7

SPECIALTY VALVES A.

Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175-psig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, and fill line attachment with strainer. 1.

B.

Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, separate from main drain piping.

Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 400-psig minimum rating, brass, and pressure-regulating type. Include female NPS inlet and outlet and adjustable setting feature. Size 1-1/2 inches or 2-1/2 inches, and straight or 90 degree angle (1.57-rad) pattern design as indicated. 1.

Optional Finish: Rough chrome plate.

C.

Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, 3/4-inch size, spring-loaded, ball check device with threaded ends.

D.

Master Test Module: 175-psig, UL and FM listed.

2.8

CONTROL PANELS A.

Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with electrical contractor for all electrical wiring to fire alarm control.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 9/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.

General: ASSE standard back-flow preventers of size indicated for maximum flow rate indicated and maximum pressure loss indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

2.10 A.

Working Pressure: 150-psig minimum except where indicated otherwise. Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless steel body with flanged ends. Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating, for back-flow preventers having cast-iron or steel body. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. Strainer on inlet, where strainer is indicated

Double Check Valve Back-flow Preventer: ASSE 1048 consisting of OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous pressure application.

SPRINKLERS Sprinkler Heads - general: 1. 2.

Provide heads of type required for service indicated. Standard 165 degrees F rating except when application requires higher rating. a. b.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

Rooms without ceilings: Type 1. Finished rooms: Type 2 or 3. Basement corridor: Type 8, 10 and 11.

Provide sprinklers with 1/2-inch orifice unless specifically noted otherwise.

Sprinkler Head Type 1: 1. 2.

C.

Use 212 degrees F rating for sprinkler heads in mechanical equipment rooms. Use 212 degrees F rating for sprinkler heads in elevator machine rooms.

In no case use heads rated less than 50 degrees F higher than anticipated ambient temperature. Sprinklers UL listed. Metallic fusible link type. Quick response type. Head application: a. b. c.

B.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Upright or pendent design as required. Standard bronze finish.

Sprinkler Head Type 2: 1. 2. 3.

Pendant design. Satin chrome finish with escutcheon plate. Provide extended escutcheon where necessary due to surface mounted light fixtures.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 10/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION D. Sprinkler Head Type 3: 1. 2. 3. 4. E.

Horizontal sidewall design. Satin chrome finish.

Sprinkler Head Type 7: 1. 2.

I.

Adjustment flush concealed. Ceiling plate flush with finished ceiling. 1/2-inch housing adjustment White finish.

Sprinkler Head Type 6: 1. 2.

H.

Recessed design, deflector 1 to 1-1/2 inches below finished ceiling. 2 piece recessed escutcheon with 1/2-inch adjustment. Satin chrome finish.

Sprinkler Head Type 5: 1. 2. 3. 4.

G.

Recessed design, deflector 1 to 1-1/2 inches below finished ceiling. 2 piece recessed escutcheon with 1/2-inch adjustment. Allow removal of escutcheon ceiling title without disturbing head and drop assembly. Chrome finish.

Sprinkler Head Type 4: 1. 2. 3.

F.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Extended coverage horizontal sidewall design. Satin chrome finish.

Sprinkler Head Type 9: 1. 2. 3.

Recessed design, pendent type, "Quick Response". 160-degrees F temperature rating Chrome finish.

J.

Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.

K.

Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for following sprinkler mounting applications: Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. 2.

Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 2-piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 1-piece, flat

L.

Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

M.

Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for minimum of 6 spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench, suitable for wall mounting. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and 1 wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each style sprinkler on Project.

N.

Provide and install dry sprinkler heads in unheated areas as required.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 11/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 1. Sprinkler head shall have a thermo-sensitive glass bulb spray sprinkler, suitable for use in areas subject to freezing. This assembly shall feature a sealed brass inlet, and a durable threaded steel barrel with an electrode posted epoxy base coating, a 5mm glass bulb sealed at the threaded end of the assembly, shall be held in place by force transmitted from the compression screw, through the glass bulb and internal parts. 2. Contractor shall coordinate final dimension of unheated ceiling space before ordering dry sprinkler head. 3. Provide and install flow alarm where indicated on contract drawings on water supply branch line feeding dry sprinkler heads.

2.11 A.

2.12 A.

SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS Sprinkler Alarm Test Fittings: Ductile-iron housing with 1-1/2-inch (40 mm) inlet and outlet, integral test valves, combination orifice and sight glass, and threaded or locking-lug ends.

NON-ADJUSTABLE HOSE VALVES General: UL 668, 300-psig minimum rating, brass, nonadjustable type, hose valve for connection of fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design, female NPS inlet and male hose outlet, and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Size or 2-1/2 inches as indicated. Hose valve threads are according to NFPA 1963 and match local fire department threads. 1.

2.13 A.

FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS Flush, Wall-Type Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body; NH-standard thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads; and threaded NPS outlet. Include lugged cap, gasket, and chain; lugged swivel connection, extension pipe nipples, and clappers for each hose connection inlet; and wall escutcheon plate with marking “AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.14

Finish: Polished brass.

Connections: Two 2-1/2-inch inlets and 6-inch outlet. Inlet Alignment: In line, horizontal. Direction of Outlet: Back. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular. Finish: Polished brass.

ALARM DEVICES

A.

Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections.

B.

Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical operation type, 10-inch diameter, and cast-aluminum alarm gong, with red enamel factory finish. Include Pelton-wheel-type operator with nylon shaft bearings, and shaft length and sleeve to suit wall thickness and construction; 3/4-inch inlet and 1-inch drain.

C.

Water flow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision type, vane-type water flow detector, rated to 250-psig, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single-pole, double-throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125 volts AC. (7 A, 125 V AC) and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts DC.; complete with factory-set,

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 12/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamper-proof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed. D.

Pressure Switches: UL 753, water flow switch with retard, electrical-supervision type, SPDT (single-pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to operate on rising pressure and signal water flow.

E.

Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for indicator posts, electrical-supervision type, SPDT (single-pole, double throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full open position.

F.

Alarm pressure switch: 1. 2. 3.

G.

Alarm Bell: 1. 2. 3. 4.

H.

A.

2.16

Audible horn/visible light alarm signal; electrically operated. For use with water flow detector systems. 10 inch diameter bell UL listed and FM approved.

Water motor gong: 1.

2.15

UL listed and FM approved. Designed to signal fire alarm system upon sensing of pressure in fire system valve. Switch shall automatically reset when pressure drops. Service: Normal.

2. 3.

175-psi iron body mechanical alarm device with 8 inch diameter gong, 5 inch water motor. Drive shaft length compatible with wall thickness encountered. Red hood finish with nameplate.

4. 5.

For use with alarm valve systems. Provided wye strainer upstream of motor.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL Provided in Division 16.

PRESSURE GAGES

A.

Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch diameter dial with dial range of 0-250-psig.

B.

Automatic Ball Drips: 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT.

C.

Inspector's Tests: Inspectors alarm tests module style 718 or 719 test master by Victaulic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 13/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing cabinets. B.

Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing for cabinets, and other conditions where cabinets are to be installed.

C.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS A.

3.3

Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications on pipe and fittings products.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B.

Grooved-End Pipe and Grooved-End Fitting Joints: Use grooved-end fittings and grooved couplings that are made by the same manufacturer and that are listed for use together. Groove pipe and assemble joints with grooved coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.

Groove Type: Cut. Groove Type: Rolled.

C.

Locking-Lug Joints: Follow manufacturer's written instructions.

D.

Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both piping materials.

3.4

WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION A.

Connect fire protection piping to water supply piping of size and in location indicated on contract drawings.

B.

Install shutoff valve, back-flow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water supply piping.

3.5

PIPING INSTALLATIONS A.

Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

B.

Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1.

Deviations from approved “working plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval from authority with jurisdiction. File written approval with the Architect prior to deviating from approved “working plans."

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 14/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D.

Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipe 2 inches and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved couplings.

E.

Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch and larger connections.

F.

Install “Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G.

Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H.

Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain headers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipe.

I.

Install drain valves on standpipe systems, of sizes and in locations indicated.

J.

Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves, and where indicated. Drain to or outside building.

K.

Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L.

Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13. Install according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. 1.

2.

M.

3.6

Install hanger at support spacings and locations for steel piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.

Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than 1/4 inch and with soft metalseated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

VALVE INSTALLATIONS A.

Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for installation of general-duty valves. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, manufacturer's written instructions, and the authority having jurisdiction.

B.

Gate Valves: Install fire-protection service valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Where there is more than 1 control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C.

Install check valve in each water supply connection. Install back-flow preventers instead of check valves in potable water supply sources.

D.

Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 15/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC CONSTRUCTION 3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A.

3.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL

Install back-flow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Comply with plumbing code and authority with jurisdiction. Install air-gap fitting on units with atmospheric vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around back-flow preventer.

SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS A.

Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

B.

Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Flush sprinklers.

C.

Wall Mounting: Side wall sprinklers and drywall ceiling sprinklers.

D.

Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent dry-type, and sidewall dry-type sprinklers.

E.

Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers where indicated.

F.

Unheated Area: Dry sprinkler heads.

G.

Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with following finishes: 1.

2.

3.9

Upright, Pendent, and Side wall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax-coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS A.

Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.

B.

Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of 2' x 2' acoustical panels and tiles. Install sprinkler a minimum of 1'-0" from edge of 2' x 4' acoustical panels and tiles.

C.

Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type sprinklers heads, water supplied from heated space.

3.10

HOSE VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A.

Hose Outlet Valves: Install 2-1/2 inch hose outlet valves at each standpipe outlet for hose connections for use by fire department.

B.

Install hose valves in cabinets at angle required for connection of fire hose.

3.11

FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 16/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated in locations indicated. B.

3.12

Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains and where indicated. Drain outside building.

CONNECTIONS

A.

Connect to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.

B.

Connect water supplies to standpipe and sprinkler systems. Include back-flow preventers.

C.

Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.

D.

Connect alarm devices to fire alarm system.

3.13 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform field acceptance tests of each fire protection system. 1. 2.

B.

Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures specified. Then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 1. 2.

3.14 A.

3.15 A.

Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler-piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter "System Acceptance." Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14 Chapter "Tests and Inspection."

Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect. Report test results promptly and in writing to authority having jurisdiction when required.

CLEANING Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited.

COMMISSIONING Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If manufacturer prescribes no procedures, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been installed correctly and operate correctly. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete. Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and have guards where required for applications. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of back-flow preventer.

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 17/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 6. Check that hose valves and fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department equipment and have correct pressure rating. 7. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler systems with water. 8. Fill wet standpipe systems with water. 9. Check for correct type and size hose valves. 10. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. B.

3.16

Coordinate with fire alarm system tests. Operate systems as required.

DEMONSTRATION

A.

Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance information.

B.

Schedule demonstration with at least 7 days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 15326

Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler

15326 - 18/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15290 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - SUMMARY A.

This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Removable insulation sections at access panels. Application of field-applied jackets. Applications at linkages for control devices.

Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of each sample material. 1.

1.3

Division 7 Section “Firestopping” for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Division 15 Section “Equipment Insulation” for insulation materials and application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment. Division 15 Section “Metal Ducts” for duct liner.

Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field-applied finish material indicated.

D.

Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

E.

Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

DUCT INSULATION

15290 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2.

1.4

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped rating of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped rating of 150 or less.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.5

Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

COORDINATION A.

1.6

Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.

SCHEDULING A.

Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

CertainTeed Manson Knauf FiberGlass GmbH Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation Schuller International, Incorporated Rubatex Corporation

INSULATION MATERIALS A.

Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from Kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

DUCT INSULATION

15290 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturers that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A.

Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. 2. 3.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates per square foot for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a.

b.

c. d.

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o/c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm): Space 16 inches (400 mm) o/c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

4. 5.

Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

6.

Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13 mm) staples, 1-inch (25 mm) o/c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Overlap un-faced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o/c. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7.

8.

DUCT INSULATION

15290 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 9.

10.

B.

Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm) wide strips of the same material used to insulate the duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o/c. Apply vapor retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. 2. 3.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Space anchor pins as follows: a.

b.

c. d. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints and 16 inches (400-mm) o/c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space 116 inches (400 mm) o/c each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13 mm) staples, 1-inch (25 mm) o/c, and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch (150-mm) wide strips of the same material used to insulate the duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o/c. Apply vapor-retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.

Insulation material and thickness is specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B.

Materials and thickness for systems listed below are specified at the end of this Section.

C.

Insulate the following plenums and duct systems: 1.

Indoor concealed supply, return, and outside air ductwork.

DUCT INSULATION

15290 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. D.

Indoor exposed supply, return, and outside air ductwork.

Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Metal ducts with duct liner Factory-insulated flexible ducts. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. Flexible connectors. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

FINISHES A.

Glass- Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section “Painting.”

B.

Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow for visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.5

SCHEDULES A. Duct Insulation: For use in locations other than public areas. Insulation Thickness (Inches) Duct Type

Insulation Type

2. 3.

Outdoor Air Intake Ducts and Plenums Exhaust Air Return Air Section

4.

Supply Air

Rigid Fiberglass Insulation None Required Blanket Fiberglass (Duct Wrap) Blanket Fiberglass (Duct Wrap)

1.

Notes 2

2 2 Insulation Thickness (Inches)

Duct Type

DUCT INSULATION

Insulation Type

Notes

15290 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

5.

Round Branch Duct to Diffuser and Diffuser Back

Blanket Type (Duct Wrap)

2

6.

Medium Pressure S.A.

2

7.

Supply and Return Air Plenums

Blanket Fiberglass (Duct Wrap) Blanket Fiberglass (Duct Wrap)

8.

Grease Duct

Refractory Ceramic Fiber

1 1/2

2

Apply in layers to meet code required rating.

B. Piping and Equipment Insulation Above Grade:

*

Pipe Size - Inches

Insulation Thickness and Inches

Insulation And Jacket* Type

All Sizes to 3 4 and Above

1 1 1/2

1 or 1A

All Sizes Domestic Cold Water Piping, Horizontal Storm st and 1 Elbow Turned Down, and Roof Drain Bodies

1/2

1 or 1A

3.

Domestic Hot Water Piping

All Sizes

1

1 or 1A

4.

Hot Water Heating

1/2 to 2 2 1/2 and larger

1 1/2 2

1 or 1A

5.

Cold Condensate Drains

All Sizes

1

1A

6.

Duct Coils and Terminal Box Coils

1 1/2

2

7.

Boiler Flues and Breeching All Sizes

4

3B

8.

Exterior Cooling Tower Condensing Water Piping

¾

5B

Piping and Equipment 1.

Chilled Water Piping (Inside Building)

2.

All Sizes

Letter designation references field applied jackets only. See paragraph 2.2 Materials for Factory Jackets. INSULATION AND JACKET DESIGNATIONS Number Designation

DUCT INSULATION

Insulation Type 15290 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1 2 3 4 5

Rigid Fiberglass Blanket Fiberglass Calcium Silicate Foamed Plastic Flexible Elastomeric

Letter Designation A B

Jacket Type Glass Cloth Lagging Aluminum

END OF SECTION 15290

DUCT INSULATION

15290 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15260 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for fire-stopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Division 15 Section “Equipment Insulation” for insulation materials and application for other equipment. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. Application of field-applied jackets.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2.

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped rating of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped rating of 150 or less.

PIPE INSULATION

15260 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.5

Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports.”

B.

Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C.

Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.6

SCHEDULING A.

Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. b. c. d.

2.

Cellular-Glass Insulation: a.

3.

Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated Rubatex Corporation

Polyolefin Insulation: a. b.

5.

Pittsburgh-Corning Corporation

Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. b.

4.

Certain Teed Manson Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation Schuller International, Incorporated

Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated IMCOA

Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: a.

PIPE INSULATION

Kooltherm Insulation Products, Limited 15260 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6.

Calcium Silicate Insulation: a. b. c.

2.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation Pabco Schuller International, Incorporated

INSULATION MATERIALS A.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1. 2. 3.

Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retardant jacket. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades: a.

b. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Vapor-Retardant Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retardant mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. 1. 2.

2.3

Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to un-faced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to un-faced glass-fiber insulation. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

PIPE INSULATION

15260 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

3.3

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A.

Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B.

Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

C.

1. 2. 3.

Seal penetrations with vapor-retardant mastic. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4.

Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retardant mastic.

Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1.

D.

Fire-stopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping.”

Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly. 1.

3.4

Apply insulation continuously through

For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retardant mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION A.

Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retardant mastic. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o/c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retardant mastic.

PIPE INSULATION

15260 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.

Insulation materials and thickness are specified in schedules at the end of the Section 15081.

B.

Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.6

Flexible connectors. Vibration-control devices. Fire-suppression piping. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform field qualitycontrol inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 15260

PIPE INSULATION

15260 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15241 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Vibration Isolators Isolation Bases Equipment Connectors

Pipe and Pipe Fittings

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

The materials and systems specified in this section shall all be purchased by the Mechanical Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer, to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials used.

B.

The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring rates to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections for all spring and pad type isolators based on the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.

C.

The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural steel beam bases and concrete inertia bases to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a supplementary base.

1.4

APPLICATION A.

This work in general includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. 2.

3.

All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolators. All piping over 1 inch outside diameter located in mechanical equipment rooms, and for a minimum of fifty (50) feet or 100 pipe diameters, whichever is greater, from connection to vibration isolated mechanical or electrical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers. All piping in the building that is connected to vibration isolated equipment shall be noise isolated at connections to the building structure. All piping vertical risers shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports.

MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

15241 - 1/6

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4.

1.5

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

All piping and ductwork shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or ductwork and maintain a minimum of 3/4 inch and maximum of 1-1/4 inch clearance around the outside surfaces. This clearance space shall be tightly packed with 1.58 P.C.F. fiberglass, and caulked airtight, after installation of piping and ductwork.

SYSTEM DESIGN A.

The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring rates to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections, for all spring and pad type isolators, based on the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.

B.

The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural design of steel beam bases, and concrete inertia bases, to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a supplementary base.

C.

The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of approved shop drawings, of all mechanical and electrical equipment to receive vibration isolation devices, to the vibration isolation materials manufacturer based upon which the selection of vibration isolators and design of supplementary bases will be completed. The shop drawings to be furnished shall include operating weight of the equipment to be isolated and the distribution of weight to support points.

D.

The Contractor shall furnish a complete layout of piping and ductwork to be isolated, including vertical risers, showing size or weight and support points of the piping and ductwork system, to the vibration isolation materials manufacturer, for selection and layout of isolation hangers.

1.6

SUBMITTALS A.

Submittals are required and shall include product data noting calculations, materials, sizes, dimensions, and load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.

B.

Vibration isolation shop drawings shall show isolator locations, and load on each isolator, deletion, compressed spring height, solid spring height, spring diameters and color-coding.

C.

Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section “Roof Accessories.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.

Vibration Isolators: 1.

Kinetics Noise Control, Incorporated

MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

15241 - 2/6

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. B.

Kinetics Noise Control, Incorporated Mason Industries, Incorporated Vibration Mountings and Controls, Incorporated

Flexible Pipe Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

Mason Industries, Incorporated Vibration Mountings and Controls, Incorporated

Vibration Bases: 1. 2. 3.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Metraflex Company Mercer Rubber Company Flex-Hose Company, Incorporated Flex-weld, Incorporated (Keflex)

MATERIALS A.

Vibration Isolators: 1.

Type C - Restrained Spring Type Mount: a.

2.

Type D - Vibration Hangers: a.

B.

Spring type isolators shall be laterally stable with housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base-plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. A housing shall be used that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when height is removed. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around retraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized.

Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing thru a 30-degree arc before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.

Isolation Bases: 1.

Type 1 - Structural Steel Base (without inertia pad): a.

2.

All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest dimensions of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one inch.

Type 3 - Roof Curb:

MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

15241 - 3/6

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1" minimum deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4" so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible duct-like EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details.

Flexible Pipe Connectors: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Pipe connectors shall be constructed of type 321 stainless steel corrugated hose and type 304 stainless steel-braid with steel flanges. Pipe connectors shall be rated for a working pressure of 150-psi at 70 degrees F, and maximum operating temperature of 850 degrees F. Connectors 1/2 inch I.D. through 2 inches I.D. shall be provided with N.P.T. nipples with malleable iron ferrules with wrench flats. Connectors 2-1/2 inch I.D. and larger shall be provided with 150 pound welded forged steel fixed flanges. Overall length and face to face dimensions shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations, but no shorter than 18". Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions, including all required anchors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Installation of vibration isolation, piping connections, and inertia bases shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

B.

Rigid connections between vibrating equipment and the building shall not be permitted.

3.3

INSPECTION A.

The local representative of the vibration isolation equipment manufacturer shall conduct periodic inspections of the installation of equipment herein specified, and shall report in writing to the Contractor any deviations from good installation practice observed.

MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

15241 - 4/6

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

3.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The contractor shall submit a report to the Contracting Officer including the manufacturer's representatives’ final report indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or requiring correction, and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation work.

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

B.

Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C.

Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D.

Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.5

VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE A.

Fans, Belted Vent Sets, Roof: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Fans, Belt Vent Sets, Floor Mounted: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Base Type: “1” Isolator Type: “C” Deflection: 2.5" Accessories: Type “E”

Air Compressor: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Base Type: “1” Isolator Type: “C” Deflection: 0.75"

Fans, Vane Axial: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Base Type: “1” Isolator Type: “C” Deflection: 0.75"

Base Type: “1” Isolator Type: “C” Deflection: 0.75"

Terminal Boxes: 1.

Base Type: None required

MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

15241 - 5/6

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. F.

Base Type: None required Isolator Type: “C” Deflection: 1"

Centrifugal Roof Exhausters: 1. 2. 3.

I.

Base Type: None required Isolator Type: “D” Deflection: 0.75"

Packaged Air Handling Units: 1. 2. 3.

H.

Isolator Type: “D” Deflection: 0.75"

Piping: (Location as specified in this section) 1. 2. 3.

G.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Base Type: Type “3” Isolator Type: Integral with Base Deflection: 1.0"

Base mounted Centrifugal Pumps: 1. 2. 3.

Base Type: Type “1” Isolator Type: “C” Deflection: 1.0"

END OF SECTION 15241

MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

15241 - 6/6

PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, makeup water, blow-down drain lines, and condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

1.3

Pipes, fittings, and specialties Special-duty valves Hydronic piping specialties

Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through exterior walls. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for general piping materials and installation methods. Division 15 Section “Valves” for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves. Division 15 Section “Meters and Gages” for thermometers, flow meters, and pressure gages. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe supports. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification” for labeling and identifying hydronic systems Division 15 Section “HVAC Pumps” for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic systems. Division 15 Section “Control Systems Equipment” for temperature-control valves and sensors Division 15 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for hydronic system adjusting and balancing.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

1.4

Hydronic systems are hot water systems. SUBMITTALS

A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic specialty and special-duty valve specified

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 1/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves, based on manufacturer's testing.

C.

Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

D.

Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with performance requirements specified in Part 3 of this Section.

E.

Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions: 1. 2. 3.

1.6

ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations

B.

Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.

C.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

D.

Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

E.

Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and form-work requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.

F.

Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for fire-stopping specified in Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.

1.7

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 2/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: a. b.

2.

3.

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett Taco, Incorporated

Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: a. b.

8.

Griswold Controls

Compression Tanks: a. b. c. d.

7.

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated Conbraco Industries, Incorporated ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT McDonnell & Miller

Automatic Flow-Control Valves: a.

6.

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated Grinnell Supply Sales Company ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Handling Division

Safety Relief Valves: a. b. c. d.

5.

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated Flow Design, Incorporated Gerand Engineering Company ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett Taco, Incorporated

Pressure-Reducing Valves: a. b. c. d.

4.

Grinnell Supply Sales Company Victaulic Company of America

Calibrated Plug Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated

Air Separators: a. b. c. d.

2.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Amtrol, Incorporated Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett Taco, Incorporated

PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 3/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

General: Refer to Part 3 “Pipe Applications” Article for identifying where the following materials are used.

B.

Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)

C.

Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A)

D.

Steel Pipe, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.

E.

Steel Pipe, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN300): ASTM A 53, Type E (electricresistance welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends. 1.

Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, carbon steel, seamless for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for 21/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger.

F.

Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.

G.

Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.

H.

Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe: ASTM D 2310, Type I (filament-wound pipe), Grade 1 (glass-fiber-reinforced, epoxy-resin pipe), Class A (no liner).

2.3

FITTINGS A.

Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

B.

Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

C.

Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.

D.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

E.

Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

F.

Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

G.

Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234 (ASTM A 234M), Standard Weight.

H.

Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. 2. 3.

I.

Material Group: 1.1 End Connections: Butt-welding Facings: Raised face

Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 4/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. J.

Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Consist of ductile- or malleable-iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

K.

Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe-fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.

L.

Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

M.

Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, 250-degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.

N.

Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body, steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) and pressures up to 150-psig (1035-kPa).

O.

Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.

2.4

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.

B.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (silver).

C.

Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.

D.

Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493

E.

Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

F.

Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures.

2.5

VALVES A.

Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section “Valves.”

B.

Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

C.

Calibrated Plug Valves: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250-degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature, bronze body, and plug valve with calibrated orifice. Provide with connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valve shall have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 5/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

of valve opening. Valves 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller shall have threaded connections and 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) valves shall have flanged connections. D.

Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.

E.

Safety Relief Valves: Brass or bronze body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; to suit system pressure and heat capacity; according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.

F.

Brass, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) cold working pressure (CWP), 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature, brass housing, stainlesssteel operating parts; for soldered, threaded, or compression connections. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating-pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and flow rate.

G.

Cast Iron, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Class 150, cast-iron housing, stainless steel operating parts; threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operatingpressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and flow rate.

H.

Plastic Ball Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP, 73 degrees F (22.7-degrees C) maximum operating temperature, full port design, CPVC body and ball, poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) seats, EPDM seals, tee handle; threaded, socket, union, or flanged connections.

I.

Plastic Butterfly Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP, 73-degrees F (22.7-degrees C) maximum operating temperature, 1- or 2-piece body design, PVC body and ball, poly-tetrafluoro-ethylene (PTFE) seats, lever lock handle, wafer style for installation between flanges.

2.6

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A.

Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 225 degrees F (107 degrees C) operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with 1/8-inch NPS (DN6) discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) inlet connection.

B.

Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 240 degrees F (116 degrees C) operating temperature; with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) discharge connection and 1/2inch NPS (DN15) inlet connection.

C.

Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 375 degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Provide taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting; taps in end of tank for gage glass. Factory test tank with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Furnish with the following fittings and accessories:

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 6/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless steel ball check, 100-gal. (379-L) unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Design tank fittings for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 250degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 240 degrees F (116 degrees C) maximum operating temperature; designed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) diameter gage glass, and slotted metal glass guard.

D.

Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 375 degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting, and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Fabricate and test tank with taps and supports, and label according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

E.

Air Separators: Welded black steel, ASME construction and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and 375-degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Separators shall have perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into compression tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections, threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, with flanged connections for 1-1/2-inch NPS (DN40) and larger, threaded blow-down connection. Provide units in sizes for fullsystem flow capacity.

F.

Chemical Feeder: Bypass-type chemical feeders of 5-gal. (19-L) capacity, welded steel construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1.

Chemicals: Specially formulated to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping system and connected equipment, and based on a water analysis of makeup water.

G.

Diverting Fittings: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting.

H.

Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, threaded connections for 2inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

I.

Basket Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

J.

T-Pattern Strainers: 750-psig (5170-kPa) working pressure; ductile-iron or malleable-iron body, grooved end connections, Type 304 stainless-steel strainer basket with 57 percent free area; removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PIPE APPLICATIONS

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 7/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Hot Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawntemper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints. Below ground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tube with soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.

B.

Hot Water: Above ground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Below ground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tube with soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.

C.

Hot Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: RTR pipe with mechanical joints.

D.

Hot Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.

E.

Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.

3.2

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types: 1. 2.

Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.

B.

Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

C.

Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

D.

Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.

E.

Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage

F.

Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required for flow direction control.

G.

Install safety relief valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge to floor without valves. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

H.

Install pressure-reducing valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required for system pressure regulation.

3.3

PIPING INSTALLATIONS A.

Install piping according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B.

Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

C.

Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4inch NPS (DN20) ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) threaded nipple and cap.

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 8/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

E.

Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

F.

Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of main, except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.

G.

Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

H.

Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger connections.

I.

Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line pumps) and other vibration-producing equipment.

J.

Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, pressureregulating valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS (DN50) and larger.

K.

Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.

3.4

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports.” Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.

B.

Install the following pipe attachments: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping runs less than 20 feet (6 m) in length. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.

Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm) 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm) 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm)

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 9/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

D.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 (10 mm) 4-Inch NPS (DN100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m), minimum rod size, 1/2 (13 mm) 6-Inch NPS (DN150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m), minimum rod size, 1/2 (13 mm) 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Maximum span, 19 feet (5.8 m), minimum rod size, 5/8 (16 mm) 10-Inch NPS (DN250): Maximum span, 20 feet (6.1 m), minimum rod size, 3/4 (19 mm)

inch inch inch inch inch

Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm) 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm) 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm) 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm)

E.

Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space pipe hangers according to pipe manufacturer's recommendations for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the least practical number of rigid anchor points.

F.

Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC piping.

B.

Mechanical Pipe Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Heat-Fusion Joints in RTR Pipe: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A.

Install manual air vents at high points in piping system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B.

Install automatic air vents at high points in system, heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. Do not install above finished ceilings.

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 10/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.

D.

Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS (DN50) and larger.

E.

Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blow-down piping with gate valve; extend to nearest drain.

F.

Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.

G.

Install compression tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1.

H.

3.7

Support tank as detailed on Drawings. In the absence of details, provide support from floor or structure above sufficient for weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.

Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design requirements.

TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.

Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.

B.

Install control valves in accessible locations close to equipment.

C.

Install by-pass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one by-pass is required.

D.

Install pressure-gage at coil inlet connections.

3.8

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. 2.

3. 4.

Leave joints, including welds, un-insulated and exposed for examination during test. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 11/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5.

B.

Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows: 1.

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

3.9

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with piping system components. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times “SE” value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, “Building Services Piping.” After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. Prepare written report of testing.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B.

Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic-piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

C.

Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

D.

Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by chemical treatment supplier to determine type and level of chemicals required to prevent scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completing system testing.

3.10

COMMISSIONING

A.

Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.

B.

Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water.

C.

Perform these steps before operating the system:

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 12/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or bleed air completely (manual type). Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements Lubricate motors and bearings.

END OF SECTION 15510

HYDRONIC PIPING

15181- 13/12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

DEFINITIONS A.

MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B.

Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, “Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.”

1.3

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B.

Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C.

Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.4

1.5

Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints” for vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

C.

Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”

B.

Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Pipe Hangers: a. b. c.

2.

Channel Support Systems: a. b. c.

3.

Carpenter & Patterson, Incorporated Michigan Hanger Company, Incorporated PHS Industries, Incorporated

Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems: a. b. c. d.

2.2

B-Line Systems, Incorporated Grinnell Corporation; Power-Strut Unit GS Metals Corporation

Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: a. b. c.

4.

AAA Technology and Specialties Company, Incorporated B-Line Systems, Incorporated Carpenter & Patterson, Incorporated

Gunnebo Fastening Corporation Hilti Incorporated ITW Ramset/Red Head Masterset Fastening Systems, Incorporated

MANUFACTURED UNITS A.

Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to “Hanger and Support Applications” Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. 2.

B.

Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have fieldapplied finish. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. 2.

Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. 2.

2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellenttreated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellenttreated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B.

Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C.

Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

D.

Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and packaged, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. Properties: Non-staining, non-corrosive, and nongaseous. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A.

Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

C.

Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750). Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 degrees F (49 to 232 degrees C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 8.

D.

2. 3. 4. 5.

2.

Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.2

Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1.

H.

Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1.

G.

Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).

Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1.

F.

Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1.

E.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Pre-set to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building steel structure.

B.

Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems. 1.

C.

Field-assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Heavy Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 1.

2.

Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D.

Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed. Fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E.

Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1.

Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. b. c.

2.

Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a.

3.

Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a.

4.

Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. b. c.

NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.

All equipment, ducts, pipes, motors, should be supported by way of building steel structure.

B.

Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor.

C.

Grout: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4

METAL FABRICATION A.

Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

B.

Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.5

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

ADJUSTING A.

3.6

Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

PAINTING A.

Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.

Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B.

Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

C.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 15145

HANGER AND SUPPORTS

15145 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAGES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters installed outside the building.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

C.

1.2

Division 2 Section “Water Distribution” for water meters outside the building. Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of factoryfabricated equipment.

Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B.

Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings, and location for each meter and gage.

C.

Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracy under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

D.

Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.

E.

Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include data for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Flow-measuring systems. Flow meters Thermal-energy flow meters. Water meters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS A.

Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.

B.

Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter, glass lens.

C.

Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.

DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

METERS AND GAGES

15135 - 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for attaching thermometer. 1. 2.

2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than thickness of exterior insulation. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than thickness of insulation lining.

PRESSURE GAGES A.

Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection, dry type, unless liquid-filled-case type is indicated.

B.

Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter glass lens.

C.

Connector: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN8).

D.

Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

E.

Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

F.

Range: Comply with the following: 1. 2.

2.4

Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15-psig of pressure (100-kPa of vacuum to 103-kPa of pressure). Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS A.

System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.

END OF SECTION 15135

METERS AND GAGES

15135 - 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15125 – PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS A.

The Contractor shall conform to the General Conditions.

B.

Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions.

1.2

WORK INCLUDED A.

Expansion Joints

B.

Guides

C.

Anchors

1.3

DESIGN CRITERIA A.

Base expansion calculations on 60 degrees F installation temperature and include 30 percent safety factor. 1. 2. 3.

B.

1.4

Design for hot water heating at 200 degrees F maximum temperature. Design for domestic hot water at 140 degrees F maximum temperature. Design for chilled water at 37 degrees F to 80 degrees f maximum temperature.

Piping system expansion compensation based on Metraflex expansion joints.

REFERENCES A.

1.5

Conform to standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.

SHOP DRAWINGS A.

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions.

B.

Expansion joint shop drawing data shall include maximum allowable temperature and pressure rating and maximum expansion compensation. Provide a five-year warranty and service guarantee and five year leak free warranty.

C.

Submit Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required expansion joint.

PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS

15125 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Submit thrust force and expansion calculations for all piping systems. certified by a registered structural engineer.

E.

Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe alignment guide, and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.

F.

Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

G.

Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

1.6

Calculations shall be

INSPECTION A.

Provide any additional anchors or means of compensating for expansion and contraction as required by actual field conditions and as necessary to protect piping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.

Expansion Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Guides: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

Adsco Manufacturing Company Hyspan Precision Products, Incorporated Advanced Thermal Systems Metraflex Company

B-Line Systems, Incorporated Adsco Manufacturing Company Advanced Thermal Systems Pipe Shields

EXPANSION JOINTS A.

Expansion joints in hot water and chilled water piping based on Metraflex TYPC dual weld end internally, externally guided joint with connections.

B.

Body fabricated steel with flanged ends.

C.

External guides bronze for axial guiding of slip.

D.

Slip to be Schedule 80 seamless steel with chromium over nickel plate on ground surface.

E.

Externally mounted ram to permit injection of semi-plastic packing material into packing chamber while under pressure.

PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS

15125 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Packing material shall be for service to 300 degrees F.

G.

Outward limit stop to prevent disengaging joint in event of anchor failure.

H.

Joints to be single type with base suitable for use as intermediate anchor.

I.

Service connection.

J.

Fully packed with sealing rings at front and rear of stuffing box and semi-plastic Teflon derived packing between sealing rings.

K.

Arranged to permit removal of packing, with line pressure off, without removing joint or section of piping from line.

L.

Suitable for 150 psig working pressure.

M.

Include all necessary external pipe alignment guides to ensure only axial motions.

N.

Provide packing nut extension to allow accessibility for tightening after installation.

2.3

GUIDES A.

Guides shall have spider type, two-piece pipe clamps.

B.

Guides shall be rated for 750 degree F maximum service.

C.

Guides shall be fabricated of black carbon steel.

D.

Guides shall be B-Line Figure B238 size D for insulation thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Expansion Joints: 1. 2.

B.

Provide expansion joints where required to control expansion and contraction of piping per manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer of expansion joints shall review piping layout, location of anchors and guides to ensure compatibility with expansion joints.

Guides: 1. 2. 3.

Install piping guides per expansion joint manufacturer's recommendations to constrain pipe movement to an axial plane. Bolt spider guide to piping per manufacturer's recommendations and before insulation is installed. After insulation is applied to guide, weld the body of the pipe guide to the mounting plate or rigid structure.

PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS

15125 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Anchors 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

3.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators. Pipe Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required, accommodating both expansion and contraction of piping. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.

TESTING A.

Expansion Joints: 1. 2. 3.

Test expansion joint for adequacy of travel and freedom of movement. Verify joint and installation acceptable. Provide one (1) year warranty on expansion joint parts and labor. After start-up, pack joints as required to stop leakage.

END OF SECTION

PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS

15125 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15100 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2.

1.3

Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification.”

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.

C.

Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Materials and Equipment,” under “Source Limitations” Paragraph.

B.

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

C.

MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

VALVES

Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 15100 - 1/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6. B.

Block check valves in either closed or open position.

Use the following precautions during storage: 1. 2.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Maintain valve end protection. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand wheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to: 1.

Gate Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.

Ball Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f.

3.

Grinnell Corporation NIBCO Incorporated Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated Victaulic Company of America

Globe Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

VALVES

Hammond Valve Corporation Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated NIBCO Incorporated Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated Tyler Pipe Victaulic Company of America

Plug Valves: a. b. c. d.

4.

Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division Hammond Valve Corporation Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated NIBCO Incorporated Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The) Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated

Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division Hammond Valve Corporation Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated NIBCO Incorporated Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The) Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated 15100 - 2/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

5.

Butterfly Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

6.

Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division Grinnell Corporation Hammond Valve Corporation Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated NIBCO Incorporated Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated Tyler Pipe Victaulic Company of America

Swing Check Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Cla-Val Company Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division Hammond Valve Corporation Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated NIBCO Incorporated Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The) Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated Victaulic Company of America

7.

Wafer Check Valves:

8.

a. Cla-Val Company b. Hammond Valve Corporation c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated d. NIBCO Incorporated e. Red-White Valve Corporation f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated g. Tyler Pipe h. Victaulic Company of America Lift Check Valves: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated NIBCO Incorporated Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The) Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated

BASIC, COMMON FEATURES A.

Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below. 1.

Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.

B.

Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the “Application Schedule” of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

C.

Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Operators: Use specified operators and hand wheels, except provide the following special operator features:

VALVES

15100 - 3/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1. 2.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Hand wheels: For valves other than quarter turn. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches (DN150) and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches (DN100) and larger, installed 96 inches (2400 mm) or higher above finished floor elevation.

E.

Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.

F.

Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

G.

Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

H.

Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

I.

Solder Joint: ASME B16.18. 1.

VALVES

Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 degrees F (450 degrees C) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 degrees F (216 degrees C) for ball valves.

15100 - 4/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

GATE VALVES A.

Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 castbronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflonimpregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron hand wheel.

B.

Gate Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron hand wheel.

2.4

BALL VALVES A.

Ball Valves, 4 Inches (DN100) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch (DN15) valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch (DN20) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.5

Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle. Operator: Lever operators with lock. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. Memory Stop: For operator handles.

PLUG VALVES A.

Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or Teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections: 1.

2.6

Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.

GLOBE VALVES A.

Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron hand wheel.

B.

Globe Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron hand wheel.

2.7

BUTTERFLY VALVES A.

Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style: 1. 2.

VALVES

Disc Type: Manufacturer's standard. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches (DN50) to 6 Inches (DN150): Standard lever handle. 15100 - 5/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

2.8

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Operator for Sizes 8 Inches (DN200) to 24 Inches (DN600): Gear operator with position indicator.

CHECK VALVES A.

Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:

B.

Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi (1380kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.

C.

Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.

D.

Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered end connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B.

Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C.

Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operation.

D.

Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E.

Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

F.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C.

Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

D.

Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

VALVES

15100 - 6/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or below the center of the pipe.

F.

Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G.

For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches (1500 mm) above finished floor elevation.

H.

Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: 1. 2. 3.

3.3

Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

SOLDERED CONNECTIONS A.

Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B.

Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.

C.

Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D.

Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.

E.

Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

F.

Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

G.

Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.4

THREADED CONNECTIONS A.

Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B.

Align threads at point of assembly.

C.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.

D.

Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

3.5

FLANGED CONNECTIONS A.

Align flange surfaces parallel.

B.

Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

VALVES

15100 - 7/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and retention.

VALVE END SELECTION A.

Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. 2. 3.

3.7

Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

APPLICATION SCHEDULE A.

General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B.

Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.8

Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or Teflon disc. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.

Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension and memory stop. Plug Valves: Viton or Teflon packing. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze disc. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 150 with bronze seat ring.

ADJUSTING A.

VALVES

Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

15100 - 8/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 15100

VALVES

15100 - 9/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

1.2

Equipment nameplates. Equipment markers. Equipment signs. Access panel and door markers. Pipe markers. Duct markers. Stencils. Valve tags. Valve schedules. Warning tags.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C.

Valve numbering scheme.

D.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.4

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems,” for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.1

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1.

Data: a. b. c.

2. 3. B.

Location: Accessible and visible. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. permanent adhesive. 1. 2.

3.

3. 4.

Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200 mm) in length, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) center hole for attachment. 1.

2.2

Name and plan number. Equipment service. Design capacity. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed

Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub-core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. 2.

D.

Include contact-type,

Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Data: a. b. c. d.

C.

Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. Labels of tested compliance.

Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 1.

Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4.

5.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B.

Pre-tensioned Pipe Markers: Pre-coiled semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C.

Shaped Pipe Markers: Pre-formed semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

D.

Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, and selfadhesive back.

E.

Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. 1.

2.3

Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): 3/4-inch (19 mm) minimum.

DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

2.4

Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

STENCILS A.

Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4-inch (19 mm) for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions. 1. 2. 3.

2.5

Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

VALVE TAGS A.

Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener. 1.

Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel.

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

VALVE SCHEDULES A.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. 2. 3.

2.7

Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws. Frame: Extruded aluminum. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, and singlethickness glass.

WARNING TAGS A.

Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A.

3.2

Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.

Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:

1. 2. 3. 4. B.

Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.

Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1.

Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

C.

Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

D.

Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible. 1.

Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: a. b. c. d.

2.

3.

4.

Green: For cooling equipment and components. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components.

Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminatedplastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

F.

Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3

PIPING IDENTIFICATION A.

Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow. 1. 2.

3. 4.

B.

Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping system.

1. 2. C.

Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.4

Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): Pre-tensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6-inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 3/4 inch (19 mm) 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6-inches (150 mm) and larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6-inches (150 mm) and larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

Near each valve and control device. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

DUCT IDENTIFICATION A.

Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Green: For cold-air supply ducts. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

B.

Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C.

Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5

VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A.

Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B.

Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1.

Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

3.

Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square Condensate: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square Hydronic Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square

Valve-Tag Color: a. b. c. d. e.

Cold Water: Blue. Hot Water: Green Fire Protection: Red. Condensate: Black Hydronic Hot Water: White

Letter Color: a. b. c. d. e.

3.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Cold Water: White. Hot Water: Black. Fire Protection: White. Condensate: White Hydronic Hot Water: Black

VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

3.7

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.

WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A.

3.8

Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

ADJUSTING A.

3.9

Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

CLEANING A.

Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.

END OF SECTION 15075

MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION

15075 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 15055 - MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.2

Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls” for mounting motors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for motor-driven equipment.

DEFINITIONS A.

Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a component of equipment.

B.

Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral component of motorized equipment.

1.3

SUBMITTAL A.

Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes.

B.

Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

Each installed unit's type and details. Nameplate legends. Diagrams of power and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of motor and for each control scheme.

C.

Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around field-installed motors. Show motor layout, mechanical power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D.

Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.” Include the following: 1.

MOTORS

Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 15055 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a.

2. 3.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.”

Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Motorized Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E.

Qualification Data: For testing agency.

F.

Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3.

G.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C.

Product Options for Field-Installed Motors: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements.”

D.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are: 1.

Compatible with the following:

a. b. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Multi-speed controllers. Reduced-voltage controllers.

Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning.

MOTORS

15055 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A.

Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows: 1. 2.

2.2

Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another Section. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.

MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A.

Motors HP and Larger: Three phase.

B.

Motors Smaller Than 1/2HP: Single phase.

C.

Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

D.

Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected.

E.

Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip-proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

F.

Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 degrees F (40 degrees C) and at altitude of 3300 feet (1005 m) above sea level.

G.

Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

H.

Enclosure: Open drip-proof.

2.3

SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A.

Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. 2. 3.

Permanent-split capacitor. Split-phase start, capacitor run. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B.

Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

C.

Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

MOTORS

15055 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, pre-lubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

E.

Source Quality Control: NEMA MG 1: !. 2. 3. 4.

Perform the following tests on each motor according to

Measure winding resistance. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. Perform high-potential test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine roughing-in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

MOTOR INSTALLATION A.

Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer link.

B.

Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3.

C.

Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration Controls.”

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. 2.

C.

Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at motor design load. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.

Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

Manufacturer's Field Service: perform the following:

MOTORS

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 15055 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Verify bearing lubrication. Verify proper motor rotation. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. b. c.

3.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance.

ADJUSTING A.

3.5

Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions. CLEANING

A.

After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B.

Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 15055

MOTORS

15055 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

100% SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

B.

1.3

Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems Concrete base construction requirements Escutcheons Dielectric fittings Flexible connectors Mechanical sleeve seals Equipment nameplate data requirements Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." Non-shrink grout for equipment installations Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections Cutting and patching Touchup painting and finishing

Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.

DEFINITIONS A.

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, un-excavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B.

Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C.

Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D.

Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E.

Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F.

The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 1/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G.

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic NP: Nylon plastic PE: Polyethylene plastic PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic

The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.

1.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

CR: Chlorosulfonated-polyethylene synthetic rubber EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-dieneter-polymer rubber

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification materials and devices.

B.

Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.

C.

Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.

D.

Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

E.

1.5

Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance Equipment and accessory service connections and support details Exterior wall and foundation penetrations Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during construction Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items

Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

B.

Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 2/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B.

Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

C.

Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D.

Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.

Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components

B.

Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

D.

Schedule installation of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.

E.

Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.

F.

Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors.”

G.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Dielectric Unions: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Capitol Manufacturing Company Central Plastics Company Eclipse, Incorporated; Rockford-Eclipse Division Epco Sales Incorporated Hart Industries International, Incorporated Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Wilkins Division

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 3/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

Dielectric Flanges: a. b. c. d.

3.

General Rubber Corporation Mercer Rubber Company Metraflex Company Proco Products, Incorporated Red Valve Company, Incorporated Uniflex, Incorporated

Mechanical Sleeve Seals: a. b. c.

2.2

ANAMET Industrial, Incorporated Central Sprinkler, Incorporated Flexicraft Industries Flex-Weld, Incorporated Grinnell Corporation; Grinnell Supply Sales Company Hyspan Precision Products, Incorporated McWane, Incorporated; Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Division Mercer Rubber Company Metraflex Company Proco Products, Incorporated Uniflex, Incorporated

Rubber, Flexible Connectors: a. b. c. d. e. f.

8.

Grinnell Corporation; Grinnell Supply Sales Company Perfection Corporation Victaulic Company of America

Metal, Flexible Connectors: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

7.

Calpico, Incorporated Lochinvar Corporation

Dielectric Nipples: a. b. c. d.

6.

Calpico, Incorporated Central Plastics Company

Dielectric Couplings: a. b.

5.

Capitol Manufacturing Company Central Plastics Company Epco Sales Incorporated Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division

Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: a. b.

4.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Calpico, Incorporated Metraflex Company Thunderline/Link-Seal

PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 4/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

B.

Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings

2.3

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Refer to individual Division 15 piping Section for special joining materials not listed below.

B.

Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated a. b.

2.

Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

F.

Type and material recommended by piping system

Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead content Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. 2.

BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys. BAg1: Silver alloy.

G.

Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H.

Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I.

Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

J.

Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts.

K.

Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 5/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.4

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. Gaskets: Rubber. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. Finish: Enamel paint.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.

General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

B.

Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous with threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials.

C.

Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

D.

Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 degrees F (82 degrees C).

E.

Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

F.

Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1.

Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

G.

Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

H.

Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 degrees F (107 degrees C).

2.5

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.

General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connections. Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following: 1. 2. 3.

2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Flanged. Option for 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.

B.

Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends; braze welded to hose.

C.

Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe with Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 6/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

2.6

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating at 220 degrees F (104 degrees C). Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.

MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A.

2.7

Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.

PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7.

B.

Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water-stop, unless otherwise indicated. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. a. Under-deck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. PVC: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. PE: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup shaped, smooth outer surface, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. 2. 3.

ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. OD: Completely cover opening. Cast Brass: One piece, with setscrew a. b.

4.

Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and setscrew a. b.

5. 6.

2.8

Finish: Rough brass in non-public areas. Finish: Polished chrome-plate in public areas.

Finish: Rough brass in non-public areas. Finish: Polished chrome-plate in public areas.

Stamped Steel: One piece, with setscrew and chrome-plated finish. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A.

General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 7/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened to equipment. 1. 2.

C.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliance, and similar essential data. Location: Accessible and visible location.

Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch- (30-mm-) high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions 1. 2. 3.

Material: Fiberboard or brass. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.

D.

Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid, snap on, color-coded, complying with ASME A13.1.

E.

Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.

F.

Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Green: Cold air. Yellow: Hot air. Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air. For hazardous exhausts use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. Nomenclature: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

G.

Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub-core, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

H.

Direction of airflow Duct service Duct origin Duct destination Design cubic feet per meter (liters per second)

Fabricate in sizes required for message. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification. Punch for mechanical fastening. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code: 1.

Green: Cooling equipment and components.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 8/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Yellow: Heating equipment and components. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above. For hazardous equipment use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. b. c. d.

8.

I.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Name and plan number. Equipment service. Design capacity. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and rpm.

Size: Approximately 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100-mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that indicates individual system number and service such as “Boiler No. 3,” “Air Supply No. 1H,” or “Standpipe F12.”

2.9

GROUT A.

Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psig (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Pre-mixed and factory packaged

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.

General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

B.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C.

Install piping at indicated slope.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 9/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E.

Conceal piping in interior and exterior locations except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

G.

Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

H.

Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I.

Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearance around insulation.

J.

Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

K.

Install piping fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L.

Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M.

Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wallboard partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with setscrew, and polished chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping. Un-insulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with setscrew. Un-insulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with setscrew or spring clips.

N.

Sleeves are not required for all core-drilled holes.

O.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE removable sleeves.

P.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.

2. 3.

Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. b. c. d.

PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150). Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150). Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS (DN150) and larger, penetrating gypsumboard partitions. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 10/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for flashing. 1) 4. 5. Q.

Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealant. Refer to Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for materials. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve to provide for installation of mechanical sleeve seals. 1. 2. 3.

R.

Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink, non-metallic grout.

Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter and larger. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber-sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve to provide for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve to allow for installation of mechanical sleeve seals. 1.

Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber-sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S.

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for materials.

T.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U.

Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

V.

Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping specification Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Soldering Manual,” Chapter “The Soldering of Pipe and Tube”; or CDA's “Copper Tube Handbook.” Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's “Brazing Handbook,” Chapter “Pipe and Tube.” Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows: a. b. c. d. e.

Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading is specified. Align threads at point of assembly. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 11/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6.

7.

8.

Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, “Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe,” using qualified processes and welding operators according to “Quality Assurance” Article. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

9.

Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672. PVC Non-pressure Piping: ASTM D 2855. PVC to ABS Non-pressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement according to ASTM D 3138.

Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturers written instructions. a. b.

X.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.2

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.

Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.

B.

Install equipment according to approved submittal data. diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.

C.

Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

Portions of the Work are shown only in

15050 - 12/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F.

Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if possible.

3.3

LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.

Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. 2. 3.

Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. Plastic markers, with application systems: Install on insulated segment if required for hot, un-insulated piping. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior non-concealed locations: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

B.

Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. 1.

2.

C.

3.4

Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) high lettering for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow. 1.

D.

Near each valve and control device. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced at maximum of 50-foot (15-m) intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.5 m) in congested areas of piping and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m).

Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.

PAINTING AND FINISHING A.

Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting” for painting materials, surface preparation, and application.

B.

Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Interior, Ferrous Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. undercoat and primer.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

Include finish coat over enamel

15050 - 13/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Interior, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over galvanized metal primer. Interior, Ferrous Support: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel undercoat and primer. Exterior, Ferrous Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rustinhibiting metal primer. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over galvanized metal primer Exterior, Ferrous Support: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rustinhibiting metal primer.

C.

Do not apply paint to piping specialties with factory-applied finish.

D.

Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5

CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressivestrength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

3.6

ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A.

Cut, fit, and erect miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code-Steel.”

3.7

ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A.

Cut, fit, and erect wood grounds, nailing strips, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B.

Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C.

Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.8

CUTTING AND PATCHING A.

Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 14/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

3.9

JJCA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

GROUTING A.

Install nonmetallic, non-shrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D.

Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F.

Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G.

Place grout around anchors.

H.

Cure placed grout in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF SECTION 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15050 - 15/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes hydraulic passenger and service elevators.

B.

Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for disposition of excavated material from cylinder well hole.

C.

See Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for finish flooring in elevator cars.

D.

Unit Prices: Rock excavation for cylinder well holes will be paid for under the unit price indicated in the Contract and as specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.2

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C.

Samples: For exposed finishes.

D.

Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

E.

Operation and maintenance data.

F.

Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

1.3 A.

As required by

QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7]. 1.

ASME A17.1[ and

elevator

design

Effective peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is less than 0.10 (seismic risk zones 0 and 1) .

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

1.4 A.

Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section [4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."] [407 in ICC A117.1.] WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1.

1.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.2

Fujitec America, Inc. KONE Inc. Otis Elevator Co. Schindler Elevator Corp.; “330A Holeless Hydraulic Elevator.” (Basis of Design) ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

A.

General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems, including standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B.

Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following: 1.

Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch- thick, glass-fiber insulation board.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

D.

Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable, fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment. 1.

Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.

E.

Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch clearance from cylinder and extending above pit floor. Provide means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with ASME A17.1.

F.

Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymer-coated, nonlubricated guides.

2.3

OPERATION SYSTEMS

A.

General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated.

B.

Single-Car Auxiliary Operations: 1. Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, car is lowered to the lowest floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. 2. Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars are lowered to the lowest floor, open their doors, and shut down.

C.

Security Feature: Security feature shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1.

2.4

Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car control stations to authorize calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require authorization by card reader. Provide stripe-swipe card reader integral with each car control station.

DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A.

Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B.

Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FINISH MATERIALS

A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.

B.

Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

C.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D.

Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E.

Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

F.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

2.6 A.

CAR ENCLOSURES General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 2.7 A.

HOISTWAY ENTRANCES General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. 1.

B.

Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.

Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections.

Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.8

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A.

General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.

B.

Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

D.

Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet telephone jack in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."

E.

Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1.

Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.

F.

Hall Push-Button Stations: indicated.

G.

Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows. 1. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame.

H.

Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

I.

Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.9 A.

Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as

ELEVATORS Elevator Description: 1. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, single-acting, dual cylinder. 2. Rated Speed: 100 fpm. 3. Operation System: Single automatic operation. 4. Auxiliary Operations: a. Standby-powered lowering. b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. 5.

e. f. g. h. i.

Inside Width: 84 inches from side wall to side wall. Inside Depth: 80 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). Inside Height: 96 inches to underside of ceiling. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door frames. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish . Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides of car. Floor prepared to receive ceramic tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile").

Hoistway Entrances: a. b. c. d. e. f.

7. 8.

Nuisance call cancel.

Car Enclosures: a. b. c. d.

6.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Width: 42 inches . Height: 96 inches. Type: Single-speed side sliding. Fire-Protection Rating: 2 hours. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

Hall Fixtures : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Additional Requirements: a. b.

Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s) of full-height protective blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Excavation for Cylinder: Drill well hole in elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinder; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

B.

Provide waterproof well casing to retain walls of well hole.

C.

Install cylinder in protective casing within well hole. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well hole and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of well casing. 1.

Align cylinders and fill space around protective casing with fine sand.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

E.

Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides.

F.

Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.

G.

Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

3.2 A.

3.3 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 14240

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

14240 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 12560 – LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes the following free-standing library furniture and equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

B.

1.2

Bulletin Boards; EQ-1, EQ-2 and EQ-3. Filing Cabinets; EQ-5, EQ-10, EQ-11, EQ-12 EQ-13. Computer Stand; EQ-8. Computer Workstations; EQ-9. Worksurface Basket: EQ-18. Clock: EQ-16. Stepping Stools: EQ-17. Waste Basket: EQ-18. Recycling Bins: EQ-19. Film Scanner: EQ-20. Step Ladder; EQ-14 Chairs. Tables.

RELATED SECTIONS 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. 2. Section 06400 “Interior Woodwork Refinishing” for restoration of existing furniture. 3. Section 06402 “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for mahogany custom built furniture. 4. Section 11101 “Visual Display Surfaces” for marker boards, EQ-4. 5. Section 11510 “Library Equipment” for book trucks and book return carts; EQ-6 and EQ-7. 6. Section 11511 “Library Book and Media Depository” for through-wall drop system. 7. Refer to Equipment Schedule on Drawings. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals:

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.

Seating Layout: Show seating layout, aisle widths, row-lettering and chairnumbering scheme, chair widths, and chair spacing in each row.

LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

12560 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Accessories: Show accessories, including locations of left- and right-hand tablet arms, electrical devices, accessibility provisions, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each seating component and for each color and texture required.

E.

Product Certificates: manufacturer.

F.

Maintenance Data.

G.

Warranty.

1.3

For each type of flame-retardant treatment of fabric, from

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Upholstery Fabric Source Limitations: Obtain fabric of a single dye lot for each color and pattern of fabric required.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Upholstered Chairs: 1. 2. 3.

C. 1.4 A.

1.5 A.

Fabric: Class 1 according to DOC CS 191 and 16 CFR 1610.61, tested according to California Technical Bulletin 117. Padding: Comply with California Technical Bulletin 117. Full-Scale Fire Test: Comply with California Technical Bulletin 133.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. COORDINATION Coordinate installation of electrical wiring and devices with seating layout to ensure that floor junction boxes for electrical devices are accurately located to allow connection without exposed conduit. WARRANTIES Chairs: Manufacturers Standard 12 year, 3-shift warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A.

GENERAL Refer to Furniture Schedule and Equipment Schedule on Drawing Sheet A-5.51 for quantity, location and color. FILING CABINETS; EQ-5 Mobile Pedestal Filing Cabinets: HON “Embark” Series with “M” pull.

LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

12560 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.3 A.

2.4 A.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Model: HON 1623MP. Dimensions: 15 W x 20 D x 28 H inches. Casters: Locking. Color: Black.

COMPUTER PRINTER STANDS; EQ-8 Mobile Under Desk Machine Stand: SAFECO; SAF 1855BL. 1. Dimensions: 20-1/2 W x 16-1/2 D x 14-1/2 H inches. 2. Casters: 4, 2 locking. COMPUTER WORKSTATIONS; EQ-9 Mobile Laptop Z-Frame Computer Workstation: SAFCO; TIF 944. 1. Dimensions: 23-1/2 W x 19-1/2 D x 28-1/2 H inches. 2. Finish: To be selected by Architect. CHAIRS

A.

Ergonomic Chairs: 1. Manufacturer: Herman Miller “Aeron Chairs.” 2. Style: Work Chair. 3. Seat & Back Textile: “Waves Pellicle.” a. Color: “Carbon.” 4. Armrest Material: Plastic. 5. Frame: Steel. 6. Recycled Content: 62% a. Post Consumer: 41% b. Pre Consumer: 21%

B.

Molded Plastic Chairs: 100% recyclable, High-density polyethylene or polypropylene, blow or injection molded, with smooth and perforated surfaces that ares mar and dent resistant. 1. Manufacturer: Herman Miller “Caper Chairs.” 2. Chair Styles: a. Stackers. 1) Floor saver glides. 2) Casters. b. Multipurpose. 3. Recycled content: 21% recycled content. a. Post consumer: 15%. b. Pre consumer: 6%. 4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C.

Upholstered Chairs: 1. Manufacturer and Product: Lee Industries; #3088-01 Chair. 2. Upholstery Material: European, full grain, aniline dyed cowhide. a. Manufacturer: Teddy & Arthur Edelman, Limited; “Dream Cow.”

LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

12560 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b.

2.6 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Colors: 1) Brownie DRC20. 2) Cola DRC15. 3) Soft Green DRC03.

TABLES Tables: As shown on Drawings. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Install furniture in locations indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION 12560

LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

12560 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 12484 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Entrance mats in recessed frames. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of floor mat and frame.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including:

C.

1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. 2. 3.

Items penetrating floor mats and frames. Divisions between mat sections. Perimeter floor moldings.

D.

Samples: For each floor mat and frame member.

E.

Maintenance data.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." Sections 302 and 303 in ICC A117.1. WARRANTY Manufacturer’s Standard Warranty: 5 years.

FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

12484 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

ENTRANCE MATS; CPT-5 Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.; “EnvironTread II” Model G-218D or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

B.

C.

Entrance Mats: 11/16-inch- thick, reversible double-sided buffed rubber-tire mats alternating with 6063-T52 aluminum alloy divider bars spaced 1-1/2 inches o.c. 1.

Recycled Content:

2.

Color:

As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Recessed Frames: 1.

2.2

American Floor Products Company, Inc. C/S Group. Durable Corporation. Matco International. Mats, Inc. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division. Tennessee Mat Company, Inc. U.S. Mat & Rubber Corporation.

Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52.

FABRICATION

A.

Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

B.

Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 1.

C.

Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.

FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

12484 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2 A.

INSTALLATION Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. PROTECTION After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 12484

FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

12484 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 12356 - KITCHEN CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.

B.

1.2 A.

Kitchen cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops and backsplashes.

Related Sections: 1. Section 12355 “Institutional Casework”: Coordinate PLM-3 and PLM-4 with this section. Plastic laminate for kitchen casework in Meeting Room closet will match plastic laminate for Meeting Room casework. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3.

Cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops. Cabinet hardware.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4.2: For adhesives, documentation indicating that products meet the testing and product requirements of the Section 01353 “LEED Requirements.”

C.

Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

D.

Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

E.

Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain cabinets from a manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

KITCHEN CASEWORK

12356 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

CABINETS

A.

Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on Merillat “Essentials Rutland II”. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

B.

Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1. 1.

KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard.

C.

Face Style: Flush overlay.

D.

Cabinet Style: Frameless.

E.

Door and Drawer Fronts: PVC edge banding.

F.

Face Frames: 5/8-inch- thick particleboard with plastic laminate on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

G.

Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Plastic laminate.

2.2

1/2-inch- thick, plastic-laminate-faced particleboard, with

CABINET MATERIALS

A.

General: 1. Adhesives and Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Do not use products that contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Adhesives: Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. 3. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. 4. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 5. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 6. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 7. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 8. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

B.

Exposed Materials:

KITCHEN CASEWORK

12356 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. Plastic Laminate, PLM-2 and PLM-4: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. a.

4.

2.3

As indicated in Finish Schedule on

Color: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range.

Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. a.

D.

Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Drawings.

PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere. a.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Colors, Textures, and Patterns: If not indicated on Drawings, as selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range.

Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard. CABINET HARDWARE

A.

General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B.

Pulls: Back-mounted decorative pulls.

C.

Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing hinges.

D.

Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091.

2.4

PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A.

Quality Standard: KCMA A161.2.

B.

Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash), backsplash, and endsplash style: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Front: Rolled. Cove: Applied (backsplash rests on top forming seam at inside corner). Backsplash: Square edge. Endsplash: Square edge.

KITCHEN CASEWORK

12356 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

COUNTERTOP MATERIALS Plastic Laminate, PLM-1 and PLM-3: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Grade: HGS. Provide through-color plastic laminate. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.

B.

Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

C.

Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

D.

Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

E.

Adhesives: Use adhesives that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.

B.

Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings, are aligned, and are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

C.

Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

D.

Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1.

2.

E.

Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board.

Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose.

KITCHEN CASEWORK

12356 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 12356

KITCHEN CASEWORK

12356 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 12355 - INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Wall shelving.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.2 A. 1.3

Section 12356 “Kitchen Casework”: Coordinate PLM-3 and PLM-4 with this section. Plastic laminate for kitchen casework in Meeting Room closet will match plastic laminate for Meeting Room casework.

DEFINITIONS MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material indicated.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B.

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements for modular cabinets in AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."

INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK

12355 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

1.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of manufactured wood casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.

2.

Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. Warping of components. Failure of operating hardware. Deterioration of finishes.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Manufactured Casework: Architectural Cabinet Systems; a division of Windham Millwork, Inc. a. Fisher Hamilton L.L.C. b. Hausmann Industries, Inc. c. Merillat. MATERIALS, GENERAL

A.

Low-Emitting Materials: Provide manufactured wood casework, including countertops, made with adhesives and composite wood products containing no urea formaldehyde.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.

C.

Hardwood Plywood: otherwise indicated.

D.

Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK

HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core unless

12355 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

F.

MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 .

G.

Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

H.

Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.

I.

Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate matching adjacent surfaces .

2.3

CABINET MATERIALS

A.

Exposed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.

B.

Semiexposed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS. a. b.

2.4

Provide plastic laminate for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Provide plastic laminate for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts.

DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH

A.

Design: Provide manufactured wood casework of the following design: 1. Flush overlay with wire pulls.

B.

Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes; PLM-3 and PLM-4: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.

2.5 A.

CASEWORK HARDWARE Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish , commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware. 1.

Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.

B.

Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semiconcealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips.

C.

Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): closing.

D.

Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls.

E.

Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catch.

F.

Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK

BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, self-

12355 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC G.

2.6

Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Mortise type, 5-pin tumbler, complying with

COUNTERTOPS

A.

Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.

B.

Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded to both sides of 3/4-inch plywood or particleboard. 1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

2.7 A.

WALL SHELVING Plastic-Laminate Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Grade HGL or HGP, shop bonded to both sides of plywood. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded. 1. 2.

B.

Plastic Laminate for Flat Tops: Grade HGS. Plastic Laminate for Backing: Grade BKL. Provide plastic-laminate edgings of the same material as top on front edge of top, on top edges of backsplashes and end splashes, and on ends of tops and splashes. Construct top and backsplash from one piece of plastic laminate with rolled edges and coved intersection. Where indicated, provide separate end splashes fitted to top. Use exterior plywood or exterior glue particleboard for countertops containing sinks.

Shelf Thickness: 1 inch or as indicated. Edge Treatment: Finish both edges with plastic laminate that matches faces.

Adjustable Shelf Supports: Powder-coated steel standards and shelf brackets, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112, surface mounted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

CASEWORK INSTALLATION

A.

Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where manufactured wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

B.

Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.

INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK

12355 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, or framing, blocking, or reinforcements in walls or partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.

D.

Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 A.

INSTALLATION OF TOPS Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1.

Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

B.

Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back.

C.

Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF SHELVING

A.

Securely fasten shelf standards to masonry, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

B.

Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.

C.

Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

3.4

CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A.

Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

B.

Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 12355

INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK

12355 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 11511 – LIBRARY BOOK AND MEDIA DESPOSITORY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes through wall single drop library depository. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.

C.

Samples: For exterior finish.

D.

Product test reports.

E.

Maintenance data.

F.

Warranty.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: manufacturer.

An employer of workers trained and approved by

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of depository that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2.

Failures include, but are not limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear. Limited Warranty Period: Life of building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

LIBRARY DEPOSITORY Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kingsley “Kwik Drop Standard Book Return Faceplate” #10-8950-BK with “Stainless Steel Standard Chute” #50-8500.

LIBRARY BOOK AND MEDIA DEPOSITORY

11511- 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

3.

2.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

General Features: a. Weather-resistant. b. Theft-deterrence. c. Wording: 1) “BOOK RETURN” on faceplate. Exterior Materials and Features a. Material: 16 gage stainless steel exterior faceplate, depository doors and cover plate. #4 finish. b. Features: 1) Built-in weather shroud and door flap. 2) Depository Doors: Flush mounted spring loaded doors which open inward and down. Doors are field replaceable. Interior Materials and Features: a. Materials: 1) Chute Housing: 20 gage stainless steel 2) Entry Chute: 16 gage stainless steel. 3) Interior Trim: 16 gage stainless steel.

ACCESSORIES Transport Carts: As specified in Section 11510 “Library Equipment.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2

PREPARATION Inspect wall opening and verify dimensions prior to installation. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Install depository according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install using anchorage or bracing as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability. Complete installation to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 11511

LIBRARY BOOK AND MEDIA DEPOSITORY

11511- 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 11510 - LIBRARY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes 1. Book Trucks 2. Under Counter Book Return Carts SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A.

BOOK TRUCKS – Provide 8 Book Trucks Aluminum Book Trucks as manufactured by DEMCO 1.

Fully welded aluminum construction

2.

300 lb. capacity, 100 lbs. per shelf

3.

12-1/2” between shelves

4.

5” diameter “LibraryQuiet” casters, 2 locking

5.

Color to be Light Beige

UNDER COUNTER BOOK RETURN CARTS – Provide 4 Carts Under Counter Cushion Drop Book Return Cart as manufactured by Kingsley. 1.

190 Book/475 DVD/CD capacity

2.

26” maximum height

3.

Ball bearing casters

LIBRARY EQUIPMENT

11510 - 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

DELIVERY Deliver library equipment to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against damage.

END OF SECTION 11510

LIBRARY EQUIPMENT

11510 - 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment including microwave ovens. 2. Refrigerator/freezers. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EA 1.4: For appliances, documentation indicating that products are ENERGY STAR rated.

C.

Samples: For each exposed finish.

D.

Maintenance data.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C.

Residential Appliances: Comply with NAECA standards.

D.

Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.

1.4 A.

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for defects in the magnetron tube. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system.

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A.

2.3 A.

MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. COOKING APPLIANCES Microwave Oven: a. Hotpoint. b. KitchenAid. c. Maytag. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: GE “Profile” Countertop Microwave Oven, Model #PEB1590SMSS or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Hotpoint. b. KitchenAid. c. Maytag. 3. Oven Capacity: 1.5 cu. ft.. 4. Exhaust Fan: Nonvented, recirculating-type with charcoal filter. REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES Refrigerator/Freezer: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE “Profile” Energy Star Side by Side Refrigerator, Model #PSFW3YGXSS or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Hotpoint. b. KitchenAid. c. Maytag. 2. Type: Freestanding, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer. 3. Storage Capacity: a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 14.55 cu. ft.. b. Freezer Volume: 8.61 cu. ft.. 4. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front and lower access panel.

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

B.

Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.

END OF SECTION 11451

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section includes: 1.

B.

Related sections: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.2 A.

Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications: Metal rods, chains, bracing, fasteners and other support components for suspending projection screens. Section 06105 – Miscellaneous Carpentry: Wood blocking for installation of projection screens. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings to contain recessed projection screens. Section 16400 – Electrical supply, conduit, and wiring for motorized projection screens.

SUBMITTALS Submit in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Roll-up, electrically projected screens.

List of proposed products and product data. Shop drawings showing dimensions, method of attachment, structural support, bracing, and electrical wiring. Samples of finishes for selection by Architect. Manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Source limitation: Obtain projection screens from single manufacturer as a complete unit including necessary mounting hardware, motor, controls, limit switches, and accessories.

B.

Motorized projection screens shall be certified for use in the United States and Canada by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc. and shall bear UL label.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete and installation of screens is ready to begin.

B.

Deliver products in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact.

PROJECTION SCREENS  

11132 - 1 / 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 A.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES Draper, Inc., 411 South Pearl Street, Spiceland, IN 47385. 1.

B.

2.2

Draper Access Series V.

Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01630 – Product Substitution Procedures.

MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS

A.

Type: Electrically operated projection screen for ceiling installation consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, electric brake, limit switches, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for complete installation.

B.

Method of installation: Recessed ceiling mounted with 3/8 diameter threaded steel suspension rods.

C.

Screen case: 1.

2. 3.

Extruded aluminum housing with white paint finish and stamped steel end caps suitable for installation in return air plenums. Bottom closure panel forms slot for passage of viewing surface and is removable for access to operating mechanism and viewing surface. Bottom perimeter flange provides trim for gypsum board ceiling. Housing is symmetrical allowing for left and right hand motor locations and for viewing surface to unroll off front or back of roller. Housing designed with internal junction box and plug-in wiring connections to allow housing to be installed and connected to building power supply separately from motor and viewing surface.

D.

Roller: Factory installed 3 inches diameter steel or aluminum tube mounted on zinc plated brackets with double row radial ball bearings. Roller mounted on vibration insulators.

E.

Viewing surface securely attached to roller at top and at bottom to weighted dowel. Provide each side of viewing surface with black masking borders and tab-guide cable tensioning system to maintain even lateral tension and to hold surface flat. Top of screen masked by 12” (30 cm) black drop.

2.3

VIEWING SURFACE

A.

Material: Matt white vinyl surface laminated on woven fiberglass base and surface is washable, flame resistant, and mildew resistant; Fiberglass Matt White Surface as manufactured by Draper, Inc.

B.

Size of viewing surface: 1.

Public Meeting Room: 58 inches high by 104 inches wide.

PROJECTION SCREENS  

11132 - 2 / 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

Children’s Program Room: 45 inches high by 80 inches wide.

C.

Joints: Viewing surface shall contain no seams.

D.

Edge treatment: 2 inches wide black masking borders.

E.

Extra drop: 12 inches, black. A/V contractor to determine and verify.

2.4

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

MOTOR

A.

Type: 110-120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3 wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.

B.

Mount inside screen roller on rubber vibration insulators.

2.5

CONTROLS

A.

Provide 1 control stations to lower, raise, stop and reverse projection screen at any point.

B.

Single station control: 3-position rocker switch with cover plate, accepting 110V current, and operating by sustained contact.

C.

Low voltage control: Control station without switches for interface with master control system. Wiring from switches or receivers to low voltage control unit to be 24 V.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with ceiling construction and related components penetrating or above ceilings such as lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment, ductwork, and fire-suppression system.

B.

Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, and bracing to ensure adequate means for installation of screens.

C.

Coordinate requirements for power supply conduit, and wiring required for projection screen motors and controls.

D.

Coordinate interface and installation of screen and masking controls with provision of video projector/projector control system.

E.

Prior to installation, verify type and location of power supply.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

Install projection screens and controls at locations and heights indicated on drawings.

B.

Comply with screen manufacturer’s written instructions and shop drawings.

PROJECTION SCREENS  

11132 - 3 / 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

C.

Install screens securely to supporting substrate so that screens are level and back of case is plumb.

D.

Provide required brackets, hanger rods and fasteners.

3.3

TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A.

Test motorized projection screens to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure, and other operating components are functional. Ensure that screen is level and viewing surface plumb when extended. Correct deficiencies.

B.

Demonstrate operation of screen to Owner’s designated representatives.

3.4 A.

PROTECTING Protect projection screens after installation from damage from construction operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition.

END OF SECTION 11132

PROJECTION SCREENS  

11132 - 4 / 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC  

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 11130 – AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1

SECTION INCLUDES A.

General: Comply with all Contract Documents, including Divisions 0, 1, and 15 of the general contract specifications.

B.

Statement of Work: the work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Provide and install complete and operational Audiovisual System(s) as outlined in these specifications and related drawings and documentation requirements as set forth in this documentation. 2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all wiring, plates, connections, and miscellaneous equipment for complete and operational System(s) even if specified in this or other related documents or not.

C.

Coordination, provision, installation, inspection, testing, instruction, and warranties of the Audiovisual System(s).

D.

All facilities, materials, equipment, transportation, and necessary labor for a complete and operational Audiovisual System(s).

E.

Additional section information: 1. Required licenses and permits including any required bonding or insurance requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract documentation. 2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site. 3. Installation in accordance with the contract documentation, applicable installation procedures or codes as set forth by the state or county of the project or manufacturers’ recommendations. 4. Submittal information and provisions. 5. Documented Audiovisual System(s) testing procedures. 6. Instruction of operating personnel. 7. Manuals and provisions thereof. 8. Maintenance and warranties.

F.

Definitions: 1. “Contractor” – Installer who has been awarded the contract to perform the work. 2. The term “shall” is mandatory, the term “will” is informative, and the term “should” is advisory. 3. “Provide and install” – To supply, install, and connect up complete and ready for safe and regular operation. 4. “Indicated”, “shown”, or “noted” – As indicated, shown, or noted on drawings or specifications. 5. “Equivalent”, “similar”, or “equal” – Of base bid manufacturer, equal in materials, size, color, design, and efficiency of specified product, conforming to base bid manufacturers.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 1 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   6. “Reviewed”, “satisfactory”, “accepted”, “approved”, “directed” – As reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, approved, or directed by the Owner. 7. “Professional grade” – Equipment that is intended for commercial, not residential, use and is rated for continuous duty. 8. “User-friendly controls” – Controls that are designed and laid out for ease of use in a logical, easily recognizable, format that utilizes industry standard symbols wherever applicable. 9. “Labels” – All labels on audio-visual equipment and racks shall be self-adhering black laminate with white engraved letters as specified in Sections 3.03 and 3.04. G.

Below is a listing of specification standards, tests, or recommended installation methods and procedures or applicable installation or safety codes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.2

1.3

National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Electronics Industries Association (E.I.A.) American National Safety Institute (ANSI) Audiovisual System Engineering, by Davis and Davis Second Edition published by SAMS

SCOPE OF WORK A.

The Contractor shall provide Audiovisual System(s) compatible with the Owner’s communications systems (i.e. telephone, video, and computer systems) and operations.

B.

The Contractor shall provide equipment that, where required, shall conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., local codes, the National Electrical Code and any other governing codes. Such items shall bear a label or mark indicating their conformance to the above requirements.

C.

The Contractor shall provide complete and operational system(s) configured and installed for user-friendly operation and low maintenance. On-site factory technical support shall be provided if necessary, to assure performance.

D.

The Contractor shall restore finish hardware to original condition including painting, ceiling modifications, and attachments.

E.

Work shall be in compliance with all applicable standards listed above and all governing codes and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and the Contract Documents.

F.

Coordinate exact location and installation of the equipment, power, conduit, and raceway systems with the Owner and electrical contractor.

SYSTEM(S) DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS A.

The following is a basic system(s) description and is not intended to be exhaustive in nature and is not complete for proper installation or operation of system(s). The AV specification and the AV drawings need to be fully reviewed together to ensure that the design intent and list of design intent equipment is completely covered. 1. The Public Meeting Room is an easy to operate audio visual system with a recessed, ceiling mounted, front projection screen at the front of the room. The system will include

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 2 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   one wireless microphone, a CD/MP3 player, and six microphone inputs located throughout the room as shown on the TA drawings. Each input shall be split through a distribution amplifier and sent to an analog mixer and an automixer for easy automated operation. A button control panel shall be located at the rear of the room in order to control the projection screen, CD player, and basic audio controls. A press plate shall be located at the rear of the room as shown in the AV drawings. 2. The Lobby shall have a 32” portrait oriented, wall mounted, flat panel video screen for public information display. The Pre-function area shall have a 32” portrait oriented, ceiling mounted flat panel video screen for public information display. The Pre-function flat panel will be housed in a custom wood enclosure. Graphics still store and DVD player will be located in a rack in the information desk area. 3. The Children’s Program area shall have a recessed ceiling mounted, front projection screen. 4. The Staff Lounge shall have a 32” wall mounted flat panel video screen with external speakers. The system will include a DVD player located in the information desk area. 5. A separate 70 Volt general paging system shall be installed in the building for coverage of the public areas and hallways. Paging shall be utilized via the phone system and shall interface with the phone system as appropriate for easy use from any handset. The speaker locations are shown on the drawings and each floor shall have its own zone. The paging equipment shall be located on the third floor in the Technology Room. General paging shall be muted in the Public Meeting Room when the AV systems are in use. 6. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and installation for all conduit, outlet boxes, raceway and floor boxes suitable for installation of the Audio and Video device locations as shown on the AV drawings. This would also include all power circuits notated; coordinate with the electrical and data drawings. The AV contractor will be responsible for providing and installing the AV equipment and AV cabling as noted in this specification.

1.4

RELATED WORK A.

Conduits: 1. Review all conduit runs, junction boxes, and electrical outlets provided and installed by the electrical contractor and provide fit-up drawings based on these. 2. Verify and inspect rough-in of all necessary conduits and outlets. 3. Provide a written acceptance of all field conditions or a list of any discrepancies within ten (10) working days from Notice to Proceed.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.

The Contractor shall carefully control handling and installation of all items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware or equipment losses before, during, and after installation. The Contractor is responsible for all items until Final Acceptance.

B.

The Contractor shall, prior to installation, protect exposed surfaces with material which is easily removed without marring finishes.

C.

The Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, replace any products damaged during storage or handling.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 3 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   1.6 SCHEDULING

1.7

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

A.

The Contractor shall submit a schedule to the Owner for approval. The schedule shall show sequence of work, etc. from time of Notice to Proceed to final sign off of project. This schedule shall be submitted on Microsoft Project, both paper and electronic format, with submittals.

B.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the installation of the system(s) to be compatible with the work of the other trades. The Contractor shall attend weekly progress meetings and provide continuous on-site project management.

C.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange with the Owner a mutually acceptable time for Acceptance Testing, based upon the dates provided in the Solicitation.

D.

The Contractor shall provide operating personnel with extensive training for each system type and room type as outlined in Section 1.03.

BID/TECHNICAL PROPOSALS A.

A pre-bid site visit will be utilized to allow the contractor to see the current jobsite conditions. This meeting will be scheduled in advance with the Owner.

B.

The Contractor shall be experienced in the provision of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project and shall at least meet the following criteria: 1. The primary business of the Contractor/Installer shall be the installation of audio or video systems. 2. At least five (5) years experience with the specified equipment and systems. 3. Experience with at least one project of similar size and complexity as outlined in these specifications. 4. Be a franchised dealer and service facility for the products furnished. 5. Maintain a fully staffed installation crew and service crew for maintenance and installation of the specified system(s). 6. Lead Installer shall have attended factory trained DSP and digital format classes for equipment specified in this specification. 7. Audiovisual System(s) shall be approved by the Owner, Architect and Consultant. 8. At the request of the Owner, Contractor shall demonstrate that he has: a) Adequate facilities and equipment for this work. b) Adequate staff with the appropriate technical expertise and experience for this project.

1.8

C.

Provide a list of five (5) references with locations, names of contacts, and contact phone information with brief system descriptions and dollar amounts for each reference. References shall be no more than three (3) years old.

D.

A detailed equipment list in Microsoft Excel format (both hard copy and disk) showing Item Number, Item Description, Manufacturer, Part Number, Quantity, Heat (BTU/hr.), Power (Watts), Weight, and Price. Include manufacturer’s specification sheets for each piece submitted. This shall be generated from this document and related drawings.

SUBMITTALS

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 4 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   A. Provide the following for approval thirty days after Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of work: 1. A complete list of all products to be incorporated within the work with all quantities listed. Each product shall be listed with specification section references in Excel format. 2. Complete functional diagrams of each system required for a complete and operational system with descriptive narratives of any deviations from the specified system design. 3. All shop drawings as defined in the section. B.

Shop Drawings: 1. Shall not be smaller than 24”x36” and shall be sized as appropriate for thorough understanding of system(s). 2. Shall be scaled appropriately but not less than 1/8” =1’. 3. Shall show detailed schematic wiring diagrams showing interconnection of Contractorprovided components and fabricated products, wiring and cabling diagrams depicting cable types, and device designators. Each component shall have a unique designator and use same designator throughout the project. 4. Shall show location of all equipment in racks, consoles, or on tables, with complete dimensions, wire routing, and cabling within housing. 5. Shall show all A.C. power outlet locations and terminal strip locations within each equipment rack. 6. Shall show plans and sections of the building and adjacent grounds with the location of all installed equipment such as loudspeakers, racks, consoles, plates/panels, antennas, (etc.). 7. Shall show patch panel layouts and labeling strips, including color schemes, as necessary. 8. Shall show full fabrication detail of custom enclosures and millwork indicating dimensions, material, finish, and openings for equipment. 9. Shall show all speaker mounting details including hardware types and load capacity. Structural information with design calculations and a copy of the PE’s certifications for each item/drawing. 10. Shall provide complete drawings for all fabricated plates and panels. Drawings shall include dimensional locations of components, component type, engraving information, plate color information, and a complete bill of materials for each plate. 11. Shall show complete labeling schemes for all cabling and equipment components for project. Include font size and styles along with a sample cable label and equipment label. All labeling shall be consistent within the project scope. 12. Shall show a complete wire schedule showing source and destination and indicating conduit location and sizing. Provide conduit sizing and layout with at least a 20% oversize for project utilization for future system growth. 13. Shall show a complete conduit riser and associated conduit plans for a complete conduit system. Include a Junction Box schedule showing type, size, mounting style, and location of each box.

C.

Submittal Format: 1. Each submittal shall be in three-ring binders no larger than 3” spines and sized for 150% of material enclosed. Use multiple volumes if necessary. 2. Arrange product data in alphanumeric order. 3. Separate major groupings with labeled binder tabs. 4. Index product data sheets by manufacturer and model or part number. 5. Each submittal shall include a unique numbering scheme and be numbered in consecutive order. 6. Reference addendum or change order numbers as applicable.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 5 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   7. Reference specification section, part, article, paragraph, and/or drawing reference as applicable. 8. Each submittal shall include a complete table of contents with the following information: a) Project title and number. b) Submittal number. c) Date of submission.

1.9

1.10

1.11

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Verify conditions on the job site applicable to this work. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing of discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions promptly upon discovery.

B.

If conditions exist on the jobsite which make it impossible to install work as shown on the drawings or detailed in the specifications, recommend solutions and submit drawings showing how the work may be installed to the Consultant and Owner for approval.

FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING A.

Upon completion of installation and Contractor commissioning (as outlined in Section 3), the Consultant shall perform system(s) inspection and testing.

B.

To assist the Consultant, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of one person for inspection and two persons for testing who are familiar with all aspects of the system(s).

C.

The process of testing the system(s) may necessitate moving and adjusting certain components such as speaker aiming and transformer tap values.

D.

Testing will include operation of each system and any components deemed necessary. Provide required test equipment, tools, and materials required to perform necessary repairs and/or adjustments.

E.

In the event that further adjustments or work is required during testing, the Contractor shall continue his work until the system(s) is (are) acceptable at no addition to the contract price. If approval is delayed due the defective equipment, and/or failure of equipment or installation to meet the requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall pay for additional time and expenses of the Owner at the rate specified by the Owner.

F.

All Control Systems shall be fully tested prior to Final Testing. Once the Control Programming is “finalized” all source code, programming, and touch panel software shall be “burned” on to a CD ROM and delivered to the owner. All Control System programming (including source, files, touch panel design), and DSP is the property of the owner.

G.

Infrastructure Labeling Requirements: Raceways, boxes and fittings shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed and labeled. UL listing and labeling will not be required if it can be shown that raceways and boxes meet the requirements of another nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).Required licenses and permits including any required bonding or insurance requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract documentation.

WARRANTY

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 6 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   A. All equipment provided by the Contractor shall be installed per manufacturer’s specifications and warranted by the Contractor for a period of one (1) year from the date of written acceptance to meet all performance requirements outlined herein. Warranties shall not be pro-rated. For all Owner-provided equipment, include pricing for an initial one year service contract.

1.12

B.

During the warranty period, no charges shall be made for any labor, equipment, or transportation to maintain performance and functions.

C.

The Contractor shall respond with remedy to a trouble call within twenty-four (24) hours after receipt of such a call, and shall provide a 24-hour service phone number. Downtime for system(s) shall be no longer than a 24-hour period. All replacement parts/components shall be of equal or higher level for service.

D.

Equivalent replacement equipment shall be temporarily provided when immediate on-site repairs cannot be made.

E.

At least one routine inspection and adjustment visits will be scheduled for the first year. Submit reports to the Owner.

F.

Provide a separate price for an optional yearly service contract for five (5) years, to begin at the end of the initial warranty and service contract. Provide details on coverage and options.

G.

The Contractor shall be present at the first use of the system (scheduled by the owner), and (one) additional event as requested by the owner.

INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A.

After final inspection and completion, provide instruction to Owner-designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the system(s).

B.

Develop an instructional course based on the use of the system(s) and manufacturers’ recommendations. Provide a minimum of six (6) hours of instruction. Arrange course so that operational and maintenance classes are separate.

C.

Submit an outline of the course with sample instructional aids for approval thirty (30) days prior to scheduled instruction sessions.

D.

The Contractor shall be present at first system use and one (1) additional event as requested by the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Electronic component models shall be commercially available for a least one (1) year prior to bid, or be approved by the Owner.

B.

All equipment and material shall be new.

C.

All equipment must be UL listed or built to UL standards, where required.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 7 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   2.2 GENERAL

2.3

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

A.

All equipment shall be professional grade and rated for continuous duty. Basic guidelines have been prepared with manufacturer names, makes, and model numbers included as minimum performance requirements. These must be satisfied, unless a variance (separate document) is submitted and approved by the Owner.

B.

System(s) shall be installed and configured for simplicity of operation, with user-friendly controls.

C.

Product quantity is as required for complete and operable system(s). If any quantities are given, the Audiovisual System Contractor shall provide at least the given amount. Some of the product listed under this section may not be required to fulfill the work as outlined.

D.

Regardless of the length or completeness of the descriptive paragraphs listed herein, each device shall meet published manufacturer’s specifications.

E.

Remove all manufacturer’s nameplates or logos from product, such as found on speaker(s), within the public sight lines or spaces.

F.

Paint all wall and ceiling mounted speaker grilles and enclosures as directed by the Architect.

G.

The Contractor is responsible for providing a fully operational turnkey system. The following equipment list and attached drawings are for design intent purposes. It is the responsibility of the AV contractor to review the AV specification and drawing package to ensure that the design intent, quantities and equipment is captured in the bids proposal.

EQUIPMENT – PUBLIC MEETING ROOM A.

CD/MP3 Player 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

B.

CD-R/RW playback compatibility. Instant start. Direct track select buttons. CD-Text. Auto cue. +/- 12% Pitch control. Folder/title search. Repeat mode (Single track/all tracks/program and random repeat) RCA Stereo outputs and Coaxial RCA Digital output (SPDIF). Headphone output. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) Denon DN-C615 or equal by Tascam (provide one)

CD Record Deck 1. CD-R and CD-RW Recorder and Player. 2. Compatible with CD-R data, CD-R for digital audio, CD-RW data, and CD-RW for digital audio. 3. CD-Text and ID3 tag display. 4. Input CD-Text to recorded tracks from front panel. 5. Play unfinalized CD-Rs and CD-RWs

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 8 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   6. Analog and Coaxial/Optical (SPDIF) digital inputs and outputs. 7. Auto fade-in and out with programmable time. 8. Sync (level dependent) recording. 9. Headphone output. 10. Auto-cue feature for playback. 11. Rack mounted. 12. Acceptable product: a) Marantz CDR633 or equal by Tascam (provide one) C.

Wireless Microphone 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

D.

Eight Channel Microphone mixer 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

E.

Four balanced mic/line inputs (XLR). 15V Phantom power. Bi-color signal present/overload indicators. Trimless mic stage preamplifiers. Four balanced stereo line inputs (TRS). Independent mono switch. 12dB of line gain. Two balanced outputs (XLR). Independent overload indicators. Independent level controls. Internal pad for mic level output. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) Rane MLM 82S (provide one)

Automixer 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

F.

1440 frequencies within a 36 MHz switching bandwidth. Robust metal construction. Pilot tone squelch. Audio signal metering on transmitter LCD display. XLR and ¼ inch outputs. Handheld transmitter. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) Sennheiser ew135G2 or Equal by Shure (provide one)

Eight balanced mic-line input channels (Phoenix block connectors) One unbalanced ¼” aux level input. Eight unbalanced ¼” direct line level outputs. One balanced master line level output (Phoenix block connectors) Selectable 48V phantom power per channel. Level selectable peak output limiter. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) Shure SCM810 (provide one)

DSP 1. 2. 3. 4.

Four balanced analog I/O plus AES3 stereo digital I/O. Up to 48-bit precision processing. 106 dB dynamic range for line levels. Studio grade mic/line preamplifiers on all analog inputs.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 9 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   5. 48 volt phantom power. 6. Presets recall via contact closures’. 7. Versatile input port for remote control via voltage. 8. Versatile output port provides relay drive. 9. 10Base-T Ethernet control. 10. RS-485 control. 11. Acceptable product: a) Rane RPM 44 (provide one) G.

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

Assistive Listening System 1. 2. 3. 4.

Field strength maximum 8000 micro volts. Transmitter input balanced with level of -55dBu to +21dBu. Antenna type 50 ohm BNC. Receiver to be battery powered and have approximately a 30 hour life when used with alkaline batteries. 5. Four receivers with ear speakers. 6. Acceptable product: a) Listen LS03 (provide one) H.

Two Channel Audio DA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

I.

Amplifier 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

J.

Two operation modes: stereo and combine. Four outputs per channel. Balanced line level XLR connectors. Ground lift, level control, and clip indicator light on each output. Input signals are monitored by signal-present LEDs and clip LEDs. Headphone circuit to monitor either channel. Acceptable product: a) Whirlwind DA-2 (provide four)

Switching power supply. 2 RU chassis. Solid state two channel. Protection circuits: shorted, open, mismatched loads, overheating, DC, high-frequency overload, under/over voltage, and internal faults. Channel specific fault protection. Front panel power switch. Rear-mounted level controls and mode switch. 300 watts per channel at 70V Acceptable product: a) Crown CTs 600 or equal by QSC (provide one)

Speaker 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Consistent 120 degree broadband pattern control. Coaxial design. Kevlar-reinforced 6.5 inch woofer and 1 inch compression driver. 150 watts power handling. 70V taps: 68W, 34W, 17W, 8.5W Back can. Acceptable product: a) JBL Control 227CT (provide eight) b) JBL MTC-200BB6 (provide eight)

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 10 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   K. Wall Mount Control 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

L.

15 Programmable buttons with LED feedback. Customizable backlit button labels. Five way navigation pad. Volume control knob and LED bar graph. Built-in IR receiver and light sensor. Two RS-232, two IR, four inputs and six relay control ports. Cresnet, 10/100 Ethernet and built-in webserver. Acceptable product: a) Crestron MPC-M25 (provide one)

Rack 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

2.4

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

21 RU and 20 inches deep. Welded construction with up to 300 lb. weight capacity. Abundant Velco and internal cable tie points. 10-32 threaded rack rails with marked rack space increments. Grounding/bonding stud in top and bottom of center section and backpan. 16-guage steel construction with 1/8 inch think laser-cut corner braces. Reversible padlackable center section. Power distribution. Acceptable product: a) Middle Atlantic DWR-21-22PD (provide one) b) Middle Atlantic DWR-FK22 (provide one) c) Middle Atlantic PD-815SC (provide one)

EQUIPMENT – STAFF LOUNGE A.

DVD Player 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

B.

DVD, DVD+/-RW, CD, CD-r/RW, VCD Playback. MP3, WMA, DivX Playback. JPEG Playback, Kodak Photo CD compatible. HDMI Interface. NTSC/PAL Conversion. IR, RS-232 Control. Simultaneous output from all analog video outputs. Optical, Coaxial digital outputs. Programmable DVD playback. Changeable wallpaper. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) Denon DN-V210 (provide one)

Flat Panel Display 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

32” LCD. 2000:1 Contrast ratio. 500 cd/m2 brightness. 1366 x 768 native resolution. Built-in expansion slots. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), SVideo, HDMI, Component BNC.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 11 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   7. RS-232 control. 8. TV tuner. 9. Power conditioner. 10. Tilt wall mount. 11. Attached speakers. 12. Acceptable product: a) NEC LCD3215 (provide one) b) NEC SP4020-4620 (provide one) c) Furman AC-215 (provide one) d) Chief MTR6045 (provide one) C.

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

UTP Receiver 1. Female RJ-45 input. 2. Female HD-15 output, one 1/8 inch captive screw connector, one female RJ-45 loop through connector. 3. Receives high resolution video and mono audio signals 600 feet or more over single UTP cable. 4. Supports RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video, S-video, and composite video. 5. Compatible with HDTV component video, bi-level or tri-level sync. 6. Separate variable level and peaking controls. 7. Additional buffered UTP output for daisy-chaining up to eight receivers. 8. LED power indicator on front panel. 9. Rack mountable. 10. Acceptable Product: a) Extron MTP RL 15HD A (provide two)

2.5

EQUIPMENT – PRE-FUNCTION AREA A.

Flat Panel Display 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

B.

32” LCD. 2000:1 Contrast ratio. 500 cd/m2 brightness. 1366 x 768 native resolution. Built-in expansion slots. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), SVideo, HDMI, Component BNC. RS-232 control. TV tuner. Power conditioner. Tilt wall mount. Attached speakers. Custom enclosure w/ceiling mount (mahogany finish) Acceptable product: a) NEC LCD3215 (provide one) b) NEC SP4020-4620 (provide one) c) Furman AC-215 (provide one) d) Chief MTR6045 (provide one) e) Forbes AV Custom 8938 – ceiling mount (provide one)

UTP Receiver 1. Female RJ-45 input.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 12 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   2. Female HD-15 output, one 1/8 inch captive screw connector, one female RJ-45 loop through connector. 3. Receives high resolution video and mono audio signals 600 feet or more over single UTP cable. 4. Supports RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video, S-video, and composite video. 5. Compatible with HDTV component video, bi-level or tri-level sync. 6. Separate variable level and peaking controls. 7. Additional buffered UTP output for daisy-chaining up to eight receivers. 8. LED power indicator on front panel. 9. Rack mountable. 10. Acceptable Product: a) Extron MTP RL 15HD A (provide two)

2.6

EQUIPMENT – LOBBY VIS A.

DVD Player 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

B.

Flat Panel Display 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

C.

DVD, DVD+/-RW, CD, CD-r/RW, VCD Playback. MP3, WMA, DivX Playback. JPEG Playback, Kodak Photo CD compatible. HDMI Interface. NTSC/PAL Conversion. IR, RS-232 Control. Simultaneous output from all analog video outputs. Optical, Coaxial digital outputs. Programmable DVD playback. Changeable wallpaper. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) Denon DN-V210 or equal by Tascam (provide one)

32” LCD. 2000:1 Contrast ratio. 500 cd/m2 brightness. 1366 x 768 native resolution. Built-in expansion slots. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), SVideo, HDMI, Component BNC. RS-232 control. TV tuner. Power conditioner. Tilt wall mount. Acceptable product: a) NEC LCD3215 (provide one) b) Furman AC-215 (provide one) c) Chief MTR6045 (provide one)

Graphic Still Store 1. Stores BMP or JPEG format high resolution graphic files. 2. Plays back stored images as an automated, programmable slide show. 3. Smooth image transitions including cut and variable-rate dissolves.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 13 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   4. RGBHV or RGBS pass-through BNC inputs. 5. RGBHV or RGBS BNC outputs. 6. Upload graphic files from a PC via Ethernet. 7. 16 MB internal image storage. 8. RS-232 control. 9. Rack mountable. 10. Acceptable product: a) Extron GSS 100 (provide one) D.

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

UTP Transmitter 1. Female HD-15 input. 2. Female RJ-45 output. 3. Transmits high resolution video and summed mono audio signals over a single UTP cable. 4. Supports RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video, S-video, and composite video. 5. Compatible with HDTV component video, bi-level or tri-level sync. 6. Pre-peaking circuit for optimizing video signal on long cable runs. 7. LED power indicator on front panel. 8. Rack mountable. 9. Acceptable Product: a) Extron MTP T 15HD A (provide two)

E.

UTP Receiver 1. Female RJ-45 input. 2. Female HD-15 output, one 1/8 inch captive screw connector, one female RJ-45 loop through connector. 3. Receives high resolution video and mono audio signals 600 feet or more over single UTP cable. 4. Supports RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video, S-video, and composite video. 5. Compatible with HDTV component video, bi-level or tri-level sync. 6. Separate variable level and peaking controls. 7. Additional buffered UTP output for daisy-chaining up to eight receivers. 8. LED power indicator on front panel. 9. Rack mountable. 10. Acceptable Product: a) Extron MTP RL 15HD A (provide two)

F.

Rack 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.7

High-quality black wood grain laminate finish. 12 RU by 18 inches deep. Power distribution. Acceptable product: a) Middle Atlantic BRK12 (provide one) b) Middle Atlantic PD-815SC (provide one)

EQUIPMENT – PAGING A.

Amplifier

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 14 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   1. Switching power supply. 2. 2 RU chassis. 3. Solid state four channel. 4. Protection circuits: shorted, open, mismatched loads, overheating, DC, high-frequency overload, under/over voltage, and internal faults. 5. Channel specific fault protection. 6. Front panel power switch. 7. Rear-mounted level controls and mode switch. 8. 220 watts at 70V by four channels. 9. Acceptable product: a) Crown CTs 4200 USP/CN or equal by QSC (provide two) B.

Matrix Processor: 1. All system parameters shall be software controllable via serial port. 2. Software shall be supplied with DSP. 3. System signal processing shall include crossover functions, parametric, and graphic equalization, delay, compression, limiting, and feedback suppression. 4. Software shall allow for easy and flexible configuration of the DSP. 5. DSP shall have at least eight (8) with up to then (10) outputs configurable in any configuration. 6. DSP shall include user definable preset configurations. 7. All inputs and outputs shall be electronically balanced. 8. Provide appropriate serial cables as required for computer interface. 9. Contractor shall utilize software configuration as supplied by Consultant and shall submit finals for approval 10. Provide the latest release version of software. 11. Processor shall be rack-mounted. 12. Acceptable product: a) Ashly ne24.24m (provide one) b) Ashly ne24.24m Input (provide three)

C.

Backup Power Supply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Speakers 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

E.

1850 Watts / 2200 VA output power capacity. Nine NEMA 5-15R and 2 NEMA 5-20R receptacles, RS-232, Smart-Slot, and USB interface ports. Rack mounted. Acceptable product: a) APC SUA2200XL (provide one)

4” ceiling type with self contained enclosure. Speaker shall have a 4 inch woofer and tweeter. Formed steel back can. Wattage Taps: 3.7, 7.5, 15, 30 Acceptable product: a) JBL Control 24CT (provide fifty-five)

Rack 1. 2. 3. 4.

Welded construction with up to 10000 lb load capacity. Cable pass-through Standard locking rear door Electrical knockouts on removable split rear plates

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 15 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   5. Provide with vented front and rear door, keylock side panels, fan top with 10” fan and rear rack rails. 6. 1/8” thick internal steel braces 7. Acceptable product: a) Middle Atlantic WRK-44-32 (provide one) b) Middle Atlantic VFD-44 c) Middle Atlantic MW-VRD-44 d) Middle Atlantic SPN-44-312 e) Middle Atlantic MW-10FT-550CFM f) Middle Atlantic CBS-WRK-32 g) Middle Atlantic WRK-RR44 h) Furman PL-8C or approved equal

2.8

PLATES, PANELS, CONDUIT AND FLOOR BOXES A.

Provide plates and panels as described in the drawings and as required for fully operable system(s).

B.

Custom plates shall be 1/8” thick aluminum, standard EIA sizes, brushed black anodized finished unless otherwise noted.

C.

Plastic plates are not allowed.

D.

Lettering shall be in all caps and numbers engraved with a color contrasting to the base material with a minimum size of 0.25”.

E.

Acceptable manufacturers of custom plates and panels: 1. FSR or approved equal 2. RCI Custom 3. Panel Crafters

F.

Conduit and Outlet Box System: 1. Empty Conduit and outlet box system complying with sections 16050 and 16820 2. Not less than ¾” conduit size and larger conduit sizes as indicated.

G.

Outlet Boxes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

H.

1 gang box – 2-1/8 inches deep by 2-1/8 inches high with 1 gang ring. 3 gang box – 2-1/8 inches deep by 2-1/8 inches high with 1 gang ring 12” x 12” NEMA Type 1 enclosure 24” x 24” NEMA Type 1 enclosure Others as required or per manufacturer’s recommendation

Cover Plates 1. Comply with Section 16050 and 16820. 2. Provide blank plates for all outlet boxes that are not utilized for each phase.

I.

Floor Boxes: Shall be as follows: 1. Acceptable Product: The product shall be the FSR or Wiremold.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 16 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   a) FSR FL-710 in Meeting Room b) FSR-710-BLK-C c) Wiremold RFB4 in Conference Room d) Wiremold S38CCTCBS

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

2. Type: Unless otherwise indicated, floor boxes shall be fully adjustable, UL listed, CUL listed, scrub water approved and not less than 480 in3 in volume. Adjustment leveling feet shall provide 1/8 inch (minimum) vertical or angular (tilting) adjustment. 3. Cover Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, cover plates for floor boxes shall be made of heavy steel not less than 11-gauge thick and each shall be provided with a 0.25 inch aluminum ring (SLP-type) or flange permanently attached to the adjusting ring.

2.9

CABLES AND WIRING A.

All audio cable shall be stranded copper.

B.

Shielded cables located in raceways shall have aluminum foil shield with drain wire.

C.

Where speaker cables are run exposed in return plenum space, provide plenum rated cable.

D.

Where cables are routed through cable tray, provide tray rated cable of equal gauge.

E.

Provide the following as required for fully operable system(s). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

2.10

Microphone level cables: No. 22 shielded jacketed – West Penn 452 with gray jacket. Line level cables: No. 22 shielded jacketed – West Penn 452 with gray jacket. Constant voltage speakers: amplifier to zone: Min No. 14 gauge – West Penn 226. Constant voltage speakers: plenum rated amplifier to zone: No. 14 gauge jacketedWest Penn 25266. Constant voltage speakers: within zone No. 16 gauge jacketed – West Penn 225. Constant voltage speakers: within zone plenum No. 16 gauge jacketed – West Penn 252225. Communication outlet cables: No. 20 shielded – Belden 83559 Plenum. Ethersound cables (runs under 105m): No. 24 – Belden 1304A. Control cables: No. 20 shielded – Belden 83559 Bladen. Communication outlet cables: No. 22 shielded – Belden 83559 Plenum. RGB video cable: Belden 1406B, 1407B, 1417B as required. RGB riser: Belden 7710A, 7711A, 7712A, 7713B as required. RGB plenum rated: Belden 1824A, 1825A, 1826A as required. SVHS cables: Belden 1808A as required. Precision video cable: Gepco VSD200ITS Plenum as required. RGB sync cable: West Penn wire WP6355as required. Loudspeaker cable: No. 10 THHN provide different colors for each pass band type, supply plenum as required. Antenna cable: RG-59 minimum refer to manufacturer’s specification and recommendations as required.

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS A.

Where specific equipment is described, it is not the intention to discriminate against the products of other manufacturers, but rather to establish a standard of quality. All proposed substitutions should be submitted as alternates with complete data.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 17 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   B. The Owner requires manufacturer’s original specification tests. The owner will evaluate and approve all substitutions. C.

Items designated “no substitutions” will be specified item only. Submission of items other than specified shall not be considered.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

G.

A.

Electronic equipment shall be permanently mounted in equipment racks.

B.

Follow ASDI standards as a minimum.

C.

Provide shaft locks or security covers on non-user operated equipment having front panel access.

D.

Install XLR-type connectors wired as follows: Pin 2 High, Pin 3 Low, and Pin 1 Shield.

E.

Mount all equipment, speakers, plates and panels, plumb and level.

F.

Permanently install all equipment to be firmly mounted and held in place. Provide necessary equipment supports to hold and support loads with at least a 5:1 safety factor.

Raceway

1. Install raceway and outlet box system continuous from outlet to junction box and to equipment location with no more than four (4) quarter bends (360 degrees total). 2. Install raceway from outlet boxes to cable ladder in corridor as indicated. Bush and ream conduit ends and terminate with insulated bushings. Clamp conduit to ladder as required for proper support. Provide fittings. 3. Install raceway from outlet boxes to accessible ceiling spaces. Bush and ream conduit ends and terminate with insulated brushings. 4. Where cable tray/ladder is not utilized, make continuous runs from box to box with isolation from building systems as required. H.

Floor Boxes 1. General: Install boxes as indicated or as necessary, complying with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of codes and standards, and according to recognized industry practices. Finished installation shall have a 4 hour minimum fire rating. 2. Room Locations: Install boxes per plans. 3. Adjustments: Under the following condition and with the approval of the Contracting Officer, move raceways and boxes from the shown location as follows: a) Where box locations shown would interfere or cause associated electrical equipment to interfere with architectural, structural or mechanical features, install the box in a location which eliminates interference but with the smallest deviation from the location shown. 4. Knockouts: Open only knockouts which will be used for a conduit. Install tight fitting knockout closers in holes from which conduits have been removed.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 18 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   5. Box Supports: Fasten raceways and boxes securely in place, using any approved spring clips and other fasteners, required in Section 16072 - Supporting Devices. 6. No Extension Rings: Install boxes which provide the required volume without the use of extension rings. 7. Masonry Boxes: Install masonry boxes where boxes are recessed in wood, concrete block or brick or wood paneling. Saw-cut the opening for the boxes so that they will fit snugly in the opening. Install boxes with front edges flush with adjacent surfaces. 8. Cast Metal Boxes: Install cast metal boxes with weatherproof covers under any of the following conditions: a) Exterior locations b) Where exposed to moisture c) In exposed rigid steel conduit systems 9. Boxes for Receptacles: Shall be equipped with a grounding terminal screw. 10. Communication, Signal and Alarm Outlets: Install boxes for telephone, intercom, public address and fire alarm outlets. Grounding terminal is not required for these boxes. 11. Box Covers: Install box covers appropriate for the box, type of outlet and device, and with additional requirements as follows: a) For boxes recessed in gypsum wallboard, install raised device covers. b) For exposed, surface mounted boxes, install covers deep drawn 1/2 inch, with height and width dimensions identical to the associated box. c) Terminate and install plates specified in Section 16140 - Wiring Devices and per plans. d) For cast metal boxes, install gasketed, cast metal covers. 12. Care for Insulation: Replace any thermal insulation cut or damaged during installation of boxes. 13. Floor Box Adjustment: Adjust floor boxes and covers so that cover plates are flush with the finished floor around the entire circumference. 14. Carpet Plates: In carpeted areas, install a carpet plate at each floor box.

3.2

EQUIPMENT HOUSING A.

Install amplifiers in equipment racks according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B.

Provide adequate ventilation fans to maintain a rack temperature of less than 92 degrees Fahrenheit.

C.

Provide rear support for housing mounted equipment greater than 15” deep.

D.

Allow a minimum of 20% open rack space.

E.

Fill all empty spaces with blank panels, sizing as required, painted to match housing.

F.

Locate operator useable equipment and patch panels at an appropriate operating height.

G.

Key all door locks for each housing type (front, rear) alike.

H.

Looking at the equipment racks from the rear of the racks, install all AC power and ground cabling on the left and audio and video cabling on the right.

I.

Provide lights mounted in the top of each rack to illuminate the interior for service or maintenance. Lights shall be individually switch-able and placed so as to provide maximum illumination throughout the rack.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 19 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   J. Provide rear-mounting rails as required for proper mounting.

3.3

3.4

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

LABELING A.

Provide, for each piece of rack-mounted equipment, an engraved lamicoid label and attach to the front of the equipment. Install in a plumb, level, and permanent manner. Provide rear mounted labeling for all rack-mounted equipment.

B.

Provide engraved label over each user-operated control that describes the function or purpose of the control. Adjust size of label to appropriate size for location.

C.

Provide custom project plates at the top of each equipment rack designating consultant and installation contractor (see rack elevations for details).

D.

Provide each terminal strip with a unique descriptor and numerical designator for each strip. Show strip information on the drawings.

E.

Provide logical and legible cable and wiring labels permanently attached for easy identification to each cable on both ends.

F.

Label on cables shall be adhesive style striping covered with clear, heat shrink tubing, sized appropriately for the cable.

G.

Wiring designator shall be alphanumeric code, unique for each cable.

H.

Each cable type shall be labeled starting with different destinations (i.e. mic series “Mxxx”, speaker series “Sxxx”, etc.).

I.

Locate the cable designator at the origination and the destination of each circuit. Locate cable designator within 2” of connection point.

CONTRACTOR COMMISSIONING A.

Prior to energizing or testing the system(s), ensure the following: 1. All products are installed in a proper and safe manner per the manufacturers’ instructions. 2. Insulation and shrink tubing are present where required. 3. Dust, debris, solder, splatter, etc. is removed. 4. Cable is dressed, routed, and labels and all connections are consistent with regard to polarity. 5. All labeling has been provided and installed. 6. All products are neat, clean, unmarred and securely fastened. 7. All debris has been cleaned and removed from the site. 8. All electronic devices are properly grounded.

B.

Perform the following test. Record all results in the final project manual. 1. Test each AC power outlet for proper connections for hot, neutral and ground. 2. Measure and record the DC resistance for the technical ground in the equipment racks and console. Resistance should be 0.15 ohms or less. 3. Measure the impedance of each speaker line from the amplifier rack.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 20 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC   C. Speaker Verification Test:

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

1. Provide a low level distinctive tone to each amplifier input. 2. Systematically turn on each amplifier, one by one, and verify that the correct speaker is being driven. Correct wiring as required for proper operation. D.

Constant Voltage Speaker test: 1. Provide a low level distinctive tone to each amplifier input. 2. Systematically turn on each amplifier, one by one, and verify that the correct speaker is being driven. Correct wiring as required for proper operation. 3. Walk the areas covered by the speakers and check for even level volume coverage. Adjust any speakers that are not correct by changing tap values as required for even volume level.

E.

Speaker Polarity: 1. Use an electronic polarity checker to test each reinforcement speaker. All speakers should have the same relative polarity.

F.

System(s) Gain Adjustment: 1. Adjust each active device to have unity gain from the console output to the input of the amplifiers. 2. With all amplifiers turned off, connect a sine wave and pink noise to an input of the console. Using a RMS voltmeter, adjust the scale to an output between -10 and 0dBu. Once level has been established, it should remain unchanged throughout the testing.

G.

Signal Delay Adjustment: 1. Adjust the delay speakers to ensure proper synchronization between the main speakers and the delayed speakers. 2. Using TEF20 or SMARRT Live measure and adjust the arrival times of each speaker to be fully synchronized.

H.

Amplifier Level Adjustment: 1. Adjust the gain of each amplifier to provide consistent and appropriate levels throughout the seating areas/facilities. 2. With the console and other electronic devices feeding the amplifiers adjusted as described above, adjust the output of the console to be -10dB on the output VU meter. 3. Adjust the appropriate amplifiers to achieve 85dBA in the area covered by one of the speakers. Use a calibrated sound level meter to make the adjustments. 4. If the speaker is utilizing an active crossover, mute the individual bandpass sections to adjust each section independently. 5. Start with the speaker closest to the stage area or the booth location as appropriate. Once that speaker has been adjusted to the above criteria, repeat this procedure for each speaker cabinet. 6. Amplifiers should be set to provide an average of 85dBA plus or minus 1.5dB throughout each seating section.

I.

Amplifier Level Adjustment 70 volt System: 1. Adjust the level of the 70 volt systems to achieve a volume level appropriate for their location and intended use.

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 21 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590 Washington, DC 100% Final Construction   2. After initial amplifier adjustment, walk all areas utilizing the 70 volt systems and check for volume uniformity. If any changes of 3dB or more occur, adjust that specific area or speaker as required for even coverage. J.

Input Verification Test: 1. Using a microphone, portable signal generator, or CD player, send signal from every microphone input to the console. Check every connection location in the facility. 2. Verify video signal presence at each component input with test equipment and verify the proper signal and uniform strength. 3. Verify that the receptacle under test appears at the correct position on the patch bay and is operating properly. 4. In a similar manner, check any other inputs or tielines, as appropriate.

K.

Video Path Tests: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

L.

Insertion Gain. Line Time Waveform Distortion. Short time Waveform Distortion (2T pulse). Chrominance-Luminance Gain Inequality. Gain/Frequency Distortion, Differential Gain and Phase

Notification: 1. Once all of the above is complete, the system(s) is (are) ready for inspection. Formally notify the Owner at least seven (7) days prior to desired inspection date. 2. Final adjustments and equalization will be conducted at the time of inspection.

3.5

APPLICABLE FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS A.

The list below forms only a part of this specification. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

J-C-30A &Am-1 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, fixed installations) W-C-3735B Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit, and Service W-C-586C Conduit outlet boxes, bodies, and entrance caps, electrical: cast metal W-C-596E/Gen Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specifications W-F-406B Fittings for Cable, Power, Electrical and Conduit, Metal, Flexible W-F-408C Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Thick wall and EMT) W-J-800D Junction Box: Extension, Junction Box; Cover, Junction Box (Steel, Cadmium, or Zinc Coated) HH-I-553C Insulation Tape, Electrical (Rubber, Natural, or Synthetic) HH-i-595C Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive, Plastic WW-C-0054OC Conduit, Metal, Rigid: and Coupling, Elbow, Nipple, Electrical Conduit: Aluminum WW-C-566C Conduit, Metal, Flexible WW-C-581 E Conduit, Metal, Rigid, and Intermediate: and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple Electrical Conduit: Steel Zinc Coated C2-1990 National Electrical Safety Code C97.1-1972 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600v or less Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 142-1982 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

END OF SECTION 11130

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

11130 - 22 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC  

AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT  

POLY*/7590 100% Final Construction

11130 - 23 / 23

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 11054 - LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes 1. Cantilever bracket metal library stack shelving system PRE-APPROVED MANUFACTURES Spacesaver Corporation, Fort Atkinson, Wisconsin The above manufacturer is pre-approved by the Owner as meeting the quality, features and components required. Other manufacturers offering products which are equal to or exceed these requirements may submit product information for approval.

1.3

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Seismic requirements: Shelving units must meet, or be modified by the manufacturer to meet local seismic code requirements. Contractor to provide an affidavit certifying that the installation meets or exceeds current local seismic code requirements.

B.

Plumbness of shelving units: 1/8” maximum deviation between level of bottom shelf and canopy top, measured on the edge of any upright in any direction.

C.

Resistance of shelving units to lateral loads: 1/4” maximum deflection from vertical under a horizontal force of 100# at top of upright. Permanent set after load is removed shall not be more than 1/8 of an inch.

D.

Deflection of uprights under load: Maximum deflection of upright in any direction with all shelves evenly spaced and all shelves on one side of the range evenly loaded at 50# per lineal shelf foot shall not exceed 1.00” at top of upright. Permanent set after lad is removed shall not be more that 1/8 of an inch.

E.

Shelf loading and deflection: Shelves shall support loads of 50# per lineal shelf foot without deflection in excess of 3/16” and without permanent set after load is removed.

1.4

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.

C.

Samples: For shelving, uprights, and accessories.

D.

Maintenance data.

LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS

11054 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E. 1.5

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Warranty (see 1.6 below). QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be trained and approved by manufacturer, with a minimum of two years experience installing the specified library shelving system.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain library stack system and all components through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.6 A.

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of library stack system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2.

1.7 A.

Failures include, but are not limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish 5 percent of amount of shelf units installed for each size and type indicated, but no fewer than 10 units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

STEEL MATERIALS Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, steel sheet substrate ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

complying

with

STEEL BRACKET SHELVING

A.

Steel Bracket Library Shelving: Shelving consisting of two upright support columns per section, with adjustable shelves cantilever-hung by brackets on one or both sides of uprights, and complying with ANSI Z39.73.

B.

Upright Post Frames: Welded 1.

Upright Posts: Vertical upright columns, minimum 14 gauge steel, 2” deep with a 1-1/4” face with 1/2” return flanges. The uprights are fully welded to a tubular top spreader and a channel bottom spreader. The uprights shall have shelf attachment slots on 1 inch increments the entire length of the uprights. Uprights shall include location indicators the length of upright on 6” centers.

LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS

11054 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Spreaders: Top spreader shall be a minimum of 14 gauge steel tube 2-1/2” tall and 1” wide. The bottom spreader channel shall be minimum 16 gauge channel.

C.

Base Supports: The support shall be minimum of 14 gauge steel and provide lateral unit stability.

D.

Leveler Kits: Single and double faced as required, with 3/8-1i6 UNC cage nuts and levelers held by the base support.

E.

Base Shelves: One-piece shelves with integral back stops, 18 gauge cold-rolled steel, designed to fit snugly around upright columns, with kick plate 3 inches high. Provide sloped units unless indicated otherwise. Provide 2 brackets per base shelf.

F.

Adjustable Steel Shelves: Manufacturer’s standard shelves, minimum 18 gauge coldrolled steel. The front edge shall consist of three 90 degree bends to form a shelf thickness of 3/4”. The rear edge of the shelf shall be upturned 2 inches to form a shelf backstop unless otherwise noted.

G.

Shelf End Brackets: Minimum 16 gauge steel of a depth not less that that of the shelf on which they are used, and shall extend not less than 6” above the top surface of the shelf. The upper front corner shall have a minimum radius of 1”. Shelf brackets shall have a minimum of two hooks at the top for engaging into the upright posts and one safety lug to prevent accidental dislodgement at the bottom.

H.

End Panels and Canopy Tops: Wood end panels and canopy tops are covered in Section 06410 – Architectural Wood Casework.

I.

Bookstack Unit Types 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Type: Single-faced and Double-faced units as shown. Frame Style: Welded Upright Post Frame. Width: 36 inches unless otherwise noted. Height: Manufacturers standard heights of 42 inches, 66 inches, 78 inches and 84 inches. Number of Shelves: Two, Four, Five, or Six adjustable shelves depending on unit height; one sloping base shelf. Shelf Depth: 8 inches, 9 inches, 10 inches or 12 inches nominal as shown. Shelf Types: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

Flat with low integral backstops. Sloping with integral backstops. Adjustable divider with integral backstops. Fixed periodical. Hinged periodical. Zigzag paperback shelf. Cascade newspaper display. Horizontal newspaper display. Multimedia browser bin. Media shelf tier. Videocassette shelf.

LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS

11054 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC l. m. 2.3 A.

A.

Hinged flipper door unit. Bag rack.

ACCESSORIES Findable Book Supports: Unattached book support, 6 inches high, with cork pad on bottom, for use on shelf surface. 1.

2.4

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide two per shelf.

STEEL FINISHES All components to be painted with an electrostatically applied Powder Coat Finish. Color to be “Frost”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2

PREPARATION Clean all finished flooring over which shelving is to be installed. INSTALLATION

A.

Install library stack systems according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Level library stack units with integral adjustable leveling devices to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.

C.

Install using anchorage or bracing as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability.

D.

Install shelves at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, at equal spacing in each unit. Insure that ADA clearance requirements are met.

3.3 A.

CLEANING Clean all library stack shelving units and all components.

END OF SECTION 11054

LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS

11054 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.2

Public-use washroom accessories. Warm-air dryers. Childcare accessories. Underlavatory guards.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. 2.

Identify locations using room designations indicated. Identify products using designations indicated.

C.

Maintenance data.

D.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. WARRANTY Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser; #3: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Model 2490. Description: Lever-actuated mechanism permits controlled delivery of paper rolls in preset lengths per stroke. Mounting: Surface mounted. Minimum Capacity: 8-inch- wide, 800-foot- long roll . Material and Finish: Heavy gage steel body with navy translucent high impact plastic door. Lockset: Tumbler type.

Waste Receptacle; #10: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

E.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2892. Description: Two-roll unit with sliding panel to expose other roll. Mounting: Surface mounted. Capacity: 9- or 10-inch- diameter rolls. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Lockset: Tumbler type. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front.

Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser ; #1: 1. 2.

D.

A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-364. Mounting: Open top, recessed . Minimum Capacity: 12 gal. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) . Liner: Bobrick Part No. 3944-12; Reusable vinyl liner . Lockset: Tumbler type for waste-receptacle.

Liquid-Soap Dispenser; #-2: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-306.. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. Mounting: Horizontally oriented, recessed . Capacity: 45 fluid oz.

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5. 6. 7. F.

Materials: Molded plastic reservoir with stainless steel inner spring and spot. Chrome-plated brass housing. Lockset: Tumbler type. Refill Indicator: Window type.

Grab Bar #5 and #6: 1. 2. 3.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-5806. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a.

4. 5.

Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

G.

Grab Bar #7: As indicated on Drawings.

H.

Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit; #4: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-221. Mounting: Surface mounted. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Lockset: Tumbler type.

Folding Utility Shelf; #15: 1. 2. 3. 4.

K.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-254 Mounting: Surface mounted. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. Receptacle: Removable. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

Seat-Cover Dispenser; #13: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

J.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-287. Description: Hinged unit with spring-loaded shelf that automatically returns to vertical position. Nominal Size: 15-1/2 inches long by 5-3/4 inches wide. Material and Finish: 18 gage Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

Utility Shelf; #9: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Basis-of-Design Product: ASI Model 0694. Description: Surface mounted shelf Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC L.

Mirror Unit; #8: 1. 2.

Basis-of-Design Product: ASI Model 0600. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.

3.

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. b.

4. 2.2 A.

Size: As indicated on Drawings.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Dryer, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Excel Dryer Corporation. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. World Dryer Corporation.

Warm-Air Dryer; #11: 1. 2. 3.

Basis-of-Design Product: Sloan Valve Company; Model EHD-501. Mounting: Surface mounted. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. a.

4. 5. 2.3 A.

One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

WARM-AIR DRYERS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Operation Time: 30 to 40 seconds.

Cover Material and Finish: Chrome-plated steel . Electrical Requirements: 110/120 VAC, 1500 W.

CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2.

American Specialties, Inc. Brocar Products, Inc.

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.

Diaper Deck & Company, Inc. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Koala Kare Products; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. SSC, Inc. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.

Diaper-Changing Station#14: 1. 2.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Model 962. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a.

3. 4. 5. 6. 2.4 A.

2.5 A.

Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.

Mounting: Semirecessed, with unit projecting not more than 1 inch from wall when closed. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), exterior shell with rounded plastic corners; HDPE interior in manufacturer's standard color . Liner Dispenser: Built in.

UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. FABRICATION Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.

END OF SECTION 10801

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10671 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY Section includes post-and-beam metal storage shelving. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Delegated Design: Design metal storage shelving, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance for Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: withstanding the loads indicated according to MH 28.2.

C.

Seismic Performance: Metal storage shelving shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.5 .

1.3

Capable of

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: For customized metal storage shelving. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include installation details of connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal storage shelving indicated to comply with performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.

METAL STORAGE SHELVING

10671 - 1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

Seismic Qualification Certificates: components, from manufacturer.

G.

Product certificates.

H.

Maintenance data.

1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

For metal storage shelving, accessories, and

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Floor Anchors: Galvanized-steel, post-installed expansion anchors, power-actuated fasteners or threaded concrete screws. Provide number per unit recommended by manufacturer unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.

B.

Wall Anchors: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel anchors designed to secure metal storage shelving to adjacent wall. Provide one per shelving unit for each shelving unit adjacent to a wall unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.

2.2

POST-AND-BEAM METAL STORAGE SHELVING

A.

General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding, post-and-beam metal storage shelving system, designed for shelves to be supported by beams that span between and are supported by corner posts, with beams adjustable over the entire height of shelving unit. Fabricate initial shelving unit with a post at each corner. Fabricate additional shelving units as add-on units, designed to share two corner posts with initial shelving unit. Provide fixed top and bottom beams, adjustable intermediate beams, and accessories indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Durham Manufacturing Company (The). b. Equipto. c. Penco Products, Inc. d. Schaefer Systems International, Inc. e. Tennsco. f. Unicor; Federal Prison Industries, Inc.

B.

Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 1000 lb.

METAL STORAGE SHELVING

10671 - 2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Posts: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel of thickness required for load-carrying capacity per shelf and number of shelves; in manufacturer's standard open-box shape; with perforations at 1-1/2 inches o.c. to receive beam-to-post connectors. 1. Add-On Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel, T-shape; perforated to match main posts and of same thickness. 2. Post Base: Cold-rolled steel floor plate, drilled for floor anchors.

D.

Beams: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel of thickness required for load-carrying capacity per shelf; in manufacturer's standard shape; with projecting manufacturer's standard beam-to-post connectors at each end designed to engage posts. Provide beam at each side of each shelf, with center supports as required for load-carrying capacity of shelf. 1. Provide top, bottom, and intermediate shelf beams with [single] [double] beamto-post connectors. 2. Provide top and bottom shelf beams with double beam-to-post connectors and intermediate shelf beams with single beam-to-post connectors. 3. Provide beams for the number of shelves required.

E.

Flat Metal Shelves: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet of thickness required for load-carrying capacity per shelf. Fabricate backs and sides of shelves with boxformed edges, with corners lapped and welded.

F.

Unit Dimensions and Number of Shelves or Beams Without Shelves: As shown on Drawings.

G.

Accessories: 1. Tie Plates: Cold-rolled steel, finished to match posts; designed for joining posts of adjacent shelving units. 2. Supports: Back-to-wall type that bolt to posts; as required for shelving unit stability.

H.

Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

2.3

FABRICATION

A.

Shop Fabrication: Prefabricate shelving components in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field fabrication.

B.

Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid, with posts plumb and true and shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping. 1. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners, and similar items.

C.

Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form backs of shelving units up to 48 inches wide from one piece.

METAL STORAGE SHELVING

10671 - 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Remove burrs.

E.

Weld corners and seams continuously to develop strength, minimize distortion, and maintain the corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed locations, finish welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Examine walls and ceilings to which metal storage shelving will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.

B.

Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping. 1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. 2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support shelf loading and as required for stability. 3. Adjust post-base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation. 4. Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor plate to achieve level and plumb installation. 5. Install seismic restraints. 6. Connect side-to-side shelving units together. 7. Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at equal spacing. a. Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with beam-to-post connectors fully engaged in post perforations.

C.

Accessories: 1. Install finished end panels and trim at exposed ends of shelving units.

3.2 A.

3.3 A.

ERECTION TOLERANCES Erect post-and-beam metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/4 inch in 84 inches of height. ADJUSTING Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage accurately and securely.

METAL STORAGE SHELVING

10671 - 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 10671

METAL STORAGE SHELVING

10671 - 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Operation and maintenance data.

D.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B.

Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.4 A.

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.

Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10523 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

B.

PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. b. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. c. Fire End & Croker Corporation. d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

2.

Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 5 gallon nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 1.

2.2 A.

MOUNTING BRACKETS Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish. 1.

B.

UL Rating: As indicated on Drawing Sheet A-0.00.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. b. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. c. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1.

Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a.

Orientation: Vertical .

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10523 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1.

B.

Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

C.

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

Mounting Brackets: locations indicated.

Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at

END OF SECTION 10523

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10523 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C.

Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Maintenance data.

1.3

Include plans, elevations, sections,

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B.

Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C.

Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear) .

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

10522 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIRE PROTECTION CABINET Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; “Cosmopolitan” b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; c. Potter Roemer LLC; “Alta”.

B.

Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C.

Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

D.

Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

E.

Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

F.

Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

G.

Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H.

Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

I.

Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J.

Accessories: 1.

2. 3.

Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect . a.

Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER ." 1) 2) 3) 4)

K.

Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. Application Process: Silk-screened. Lettering Color: Black. Orientation: Vertical.

Finishes:

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

10522 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

2.3 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.

Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Interior of cabinet.

2.

Stainless Steel: No. 4.

FABRICATION Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B.

Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D.

Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. integral locking devices operate properly.

E.

Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

Verify that

END OF SECTION 10522

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

10522 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

1.2

Standard metal lockers.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E.

Maintenance data.

F.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

METAL LOCKERS

10505 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

B.

Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.

C.

Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with selflocking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.

D.

Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 1. 2.

2.2

Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

STANDARD METAL LOCKERS

A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Penco Products, Inc.; Vanguard Lockers. 2. Tennsco Corp.; Tennsco Lockers.

B.

Locker Arrangement:

C.

Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D.

Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

E.

Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.

F.

Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. 2. 3.

4.

Triple tier, as indicated on Drawings.

Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch nominalthickness steel sheet. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom.

METAL LOCKERS

10505 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G.

Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factoryinstalled rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.

H.

Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal resistant. 1.

2.

Latch Hooks: Equip doors less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.

I.

Combination Padlocks: Provided by user.

J.

Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Triple-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook.

K.

Accessories: 1.

2. L.

A.

Color(s):

As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

FABRICATION Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 1. 2.

B.

a. Height: 4 inches . Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 1.

2.3

Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation.

Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

METAL LOCKERS

10505 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for nominal assembly at Project site.

D.

Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. 2.

Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches above the floor.

E.

Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

F.

Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped plastic plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.

G.

Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

H.

Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

I.

Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

2.4

STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A.

Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

B.

Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1.

Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

METAL LOCKERS

10505 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C.

Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. 2.

Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. a.

3.

Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.

END OF SECTION 10505

METAL LOCKERS

10505 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 2. Wall vents (brick vents).

B.

See Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.

C.

See Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.

1.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on 90 mph wind speed, B exposure and 1.15 importance factor.

C.

Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 . 1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is 0.154 g. 2. Component Importance Factor is 1.25 .

D.

Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

1.3 A.

SUBMITTALS LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

B.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

C.

Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

D.

Samples: For each type of metal finish required.

E.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F.

Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B.

Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C.

Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.2

FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

B.

Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3 A.

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. All-Lite Architectural Products. c. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. d. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Louver Depth: 6 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.080 inch for frames. 4. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 50% for louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 600 fpm free-area intake velocity. d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 800fpm free-area exhaust velocity. 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. LOUVER SCREENS

A.

General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

B.

Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

C.

Louver Screening: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. 2. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick.

2.5 A.

WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS) Extruded-Aluminum Wall Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. e. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Extruded-aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 0.125-inch nominal thickness, assembled by welding; with 18-by-14- mesh, aluminum insect screening on inside face; incorporating weep holes, continuous drip at sill, and integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load-bearing design and construction.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.6 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ALUMINUM FINISHES High-Performance Organic Finish: 3 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to be selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B.

Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C.

Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

D.

Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

E.

Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint.

END OF SECTION 10200

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10185 – UNIT SHOWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Unit Shower fabricated from

gel coat fiberglass with integral plywood backing.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

3. C.

Shop Drawings: For shower unit. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Product certificates.

F.

Maintenance data.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] [75] [200] or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for shower and dressing compartments designated as accessible.

UNIT SHOWER

10185 - 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FIBERGLASS SHOWER UNIT

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Accessibility Professionals “Accessible Corner Shower” #API3LEN4242B75B or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Lasco Bathware. 2. or equal.

B.

Corner Shower Unit: 1. Configuration: 3 piece module; as shown on Drawings. a. Sides: Fiberglass panels with 8 inch tile appearance. b. Floor: Multi-layer fiberglass, non-skid, reinforced bottom. c. Corner: Molded soap ledges. 2. Size: 43 inches x 43 inches x 78 inches. 3. Finish: Gelcoat. 4. Color: White.

C.

Accessories: 1. Grab bars: 2. Curtain Rod 3. Curtain: Weighted. 4. Handheld Shower: 5. Collapsible Water Retainer: 6. Drain: caulkless.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install compartments rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure compartments in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B.

Curtains: Install curtains to specified length and verify that they hang vertically without stress points or diagonal folds.

3.2 A.

ADJUSTING Curtain Adjustment: After hanging curtains, test and adjust each track or rod to produce unencumbered, smooth operation. Steam and dress down curtains as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. Remove and replace curtains that are stained or soiled or that have stress points or diagonal folds.

END OF SECTION 10185

UNIT SHOWER

10185 - 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Product certificates.

F.

Maintenance data.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10155 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Stainless Steel Sheet: Leveled, Type 304..

B.

Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

C.

Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45-lb density, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.2

STAINLESS-STEEL UNITS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. All American Metal Corp. b. Flush Metal Partition Corp. c. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. d. Global Steel Products Corp. e. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. f. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. g. Metpar Corp. h. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. i. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.

B.

Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung.

C.

Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-andformed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resinimpregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters. 2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

D.

Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses standard with manufacturer:

E.

Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel.

F.

Stainless-Steel Finish: Custom textured finish as selected by Architect on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10155 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ACCESSORIES

A.

Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 270 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B.

Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rustresistant, protective-coated steel.

2.4

FABRICATION

A.

Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.

B.

Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B.

Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10155 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

3.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. ADJUSTING Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 10155

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10155 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 10101 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Markerboards. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. details, and attachments to other work. 1.

Include plans, elevations, sections,

Show locations of panel joints, if any.

B.

Samples: For each exposed product.

C.

Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.

D.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4

WARRANTY

A.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS, GENERAL

2.2

MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES; EQ-4

A.

Magnetic,Glass, Dry-Erase Markerboards: Shop-fabricated, glass surface laminated to enamel coated steel backing. 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Glass Whiteboard “Foreverwhite Glass Whiteboard.” a. Size: As indicated on Drawings. b. Steel: 1) Coating: White enamel baked-on coating. c. Glass: 6 mm thick, tempered, low-iron glass with 1-inch bevel edges and radius corners.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

10101 - 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC d. 2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, acrylic adhesive.

MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES

A.

General: Provide 1 set of each accessory for each markerboard.

B.

Marker Pens: Set of 4 dry-erase maker pens (black, red, blue and green) with magnetic organizer.

C.

Magnet Indicator: Two, round, rate-earth magnets.

D.

Markerboard Cleaner: “GFC-2000” glass and furniture cleaner.

E.

Mounting Hardware: 1. Edge Grips: Four, round, brushed stainless steel. 2. 3/16 inch toggle bolts.

2.4 A.

SHOP FABRICATION Markerboard Assemblies: Laminate glass face sheet to steel material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair installation of visual display surfaces onto wall surfaces.

B.

General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide clips, backing materials, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

3.2

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Clean markerboards promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B.

Protect installed markerboards from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION 10101

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

10101 - 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09991 - ENCAPSULATION COATING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and the application of encapsulation coatings on the following existing interior substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

1.2

Concrete. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Steel. Galvanized metal. Wood. Gypsum board. Plaster.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1.

1.3 A.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC content.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b.

2. 3.

Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a.

If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

ENCAPSULATION COATING SYSTEM

09991 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

WARRANTY Provide manufacturer’s 20 year limited warranty against manufacturing defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ENCASEMENT COATING SYSTEM

A.

General: Water-based, acrylic, non-toxic liquid protective coating system complying with ASTM E-1795 for encasement of leaded paint.

B.

System Manufacturer and Products: 1. Primer: Global Encasement, Inc.; “PrepLESS Primer” or equal. 2. Protective Coating: Global Encasement, Inc. ; “LeadLock” or equal.

C.

VOC Content: Less than 0.0001 pounds per gallon (0.1 g/l).

D.

Nonflammable.

E.

Moisture Vapor Transmission:

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

When measured with an electronic

Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Plaster: 12 percent.

C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

ENCAPSULATION COATING SYSTEM

09991 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease.

3.3 A.

INTERIOR ENCAPSULATION SCHEDULE As indicated on Drawings and Hazardous Materials Report.

END OF SECTION 09912

ENCAPSULATION COATING SYSTEM

09991 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09931 - WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1.

1.2

Interior Substrates: a. Exposed wood panel products.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 01352 including: 1.

Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior primers, stains, and transparent finishes, including printed statement of VOC content.

C.

Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

D.

Product List: Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE MPI Standards: 1. 2.

B.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.

Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. b.

2.

Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

Final approval of stain color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

09931 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a.

1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS, GENERAL Material Compatibility: 1.

2. B.

VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Primers, Stains, and Transparent Finishes: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to primers, stains, and transparent finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

C. 2.2

Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

Flat Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples . PRIMERS AND SEALERS

A.

Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI #84.

B.

Shellac: MPI #88.

WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

09931 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3 A. 2.4 A. 2.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

STAINS Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90. VARNISHES Exterior Marine Spar Varnish (Gloss): MPI #28, Gloss Level 7. LACQUERS Lacquer (Clear Gloss): MPI #86, Gloss Level 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.2

Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an electronic moisture meter. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and conditions.

PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B.

Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.

C.

Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.

WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

09931 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3 A.

INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE Finish Carpentry Substrates: 1.

Lacquer Over Stain and Sealer System: MPI INT 6.3F. a. b. c.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent). Seal Coat: Lacquer sanding sealer. Two Finish Coats : Lacquer (clear gloss).

Exposed Wood Panel-Product Substrates: 1.

Lacquer Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.4Y. a. b.

Seal Coat: Lacquer sanding sealer. Two Finish Coats: Lacquer (clear gloss).

END OF SECTION 09931

WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

09931 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following new and existing interior substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.2

Concrete. Wood. Gypsum board. Plaster.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

C.

Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

D.

LEED Submittal: 1.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE MPI Standards: 1. 2.

B.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC content.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b.

Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3.

Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a.

1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

PAINT, GENERAL Material Compatibility: 1.

2. B.

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. C.

Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.

Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1.

2.

Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y.

D. 2.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Colors:

Acrolein. Acrylonitrile. Antimony. Benzene. Butyl benzyl phthalate. Cadmium. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. Di-n-butyl phthalate. Di-n-octyl phthalate. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. Diethyl phthalate. Dimethyl phthalate. Ethylbenzene. Formaldehyde. Hexavalent chromium. Isophorone. Lead. Mercury. Methyl ethyl ketone. Methyl isobutyl ketone. Methylene chloride. Naphthalene. Toluene (methylbenzene). 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Vinyl chloride. As indicated in a color schedule .

PRIMERS/SEALERS Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

2.3 A. 2.4 A.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. METAL PRIMERS Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. WOOD PRIMERS Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 1. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. LATEX PAINTS

A.

High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2).

B.

High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).

C.

High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).

2.6 A.

FLOOR COATINGS Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

When measured with an electronic

Concrete: 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Plaster: 12 percent.

C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 3.2 A.

Examine areas to be repainted, or refinished and conditions under which paint or finish is to be applied. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. Where existing finishes are indicated to be removed, verify that finishes, undercoats, and adhesives have been completely removed, exposing bare substrates free of films or coatings.

Requirements for Existing Painted Surfaces: 1.

C.

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

PREPARATION AND PAINTING OF EXISTING SURFACES

1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Except where otherwise indicated, where existing paint is essentially sound, remove only loose and peeling paint, rust, oil, grease, dust, soiling, and other substances which would affect bond or appearance of new paint.

Removing Paint: 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

For limited paint removal, use abrasive methods, including scraping and sanding. Use hand tools. Avoid gouging substrates. Use mechanical abrasive methods such as orbital sanders and belt sanders only with approval in each case. Do not use rotary sanders, sandblasting, or water-blasting. Chemicals formulated for the purpose, such as solvent based strippers and caustic strippers, may be used for total paint removal. Use care and follow manufacturer's direction exactly. Protect workers and others against harm, including vapor inhalation, fire, eye damage, chemical poisoning from skin contact with chemicals, and other dangers associated with use of chemicals. Dispose of lead residue and other harmful substances properly. Grind smooth and sand as necessary to remove shoulders at edges of sound paint to prevent flaws from photographing through new paint. Where manufacturer recommends, feather paint edges using drywall joint compound or other method paint manufacturer recommends. Where existing surfaces to be painted, repainted, finished, or refinished are glossy, roughen the surface by sanding or other accepted method that will produce a surface tooth sufficient to properly receive new paint or finish. Existing surfaces indicated to be cleaned but not painted, finished, repainted, or prefinished: a. Remove soiling, stains, dirt, grease, oil, and other unsightly contaminants. Use detergents and cleaning compounds that are compatible with surfaces and that will not damage existing finishes. Materials and methods used are subject to approval. Refinish surfaces damaged by using incorrect products or improperly using cleaning as agents, at no additional cost. Scrub existing paint to be repainted using household cleaner and water. Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry before painting. Water Stained Surfaces: Prime each such interior surface, and the interior finish surface applied as directly to exterior walls, indicated to be painted. Use an oil

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

8.

D.

base coating or paint product specifically recommended by the manufacturer to conceal water stain marks so that they will not show through scheduled paint coats. This prime coat shall be in addition to coats in indicated in Painting Schedule. Before starting painting, repainting, finishing, or refinishing in each area, broom clean and remove excessive dust. After beginning operations in a given area, do not broom-clean; clean only with commercial vacuum cleaning equipment. a. Surfaces to be painted or finished shall be clean, dry, smooth, and free from dust and foreign matter that will adversely affect adhesion or appearance.

Previously Painted Wood: 1.

E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Existing Natural Finish Wood Surfaces: a. Where surfaces to be refinished are in good condition, remove old wax and polish by wiping with mineral spirits. Change rags frequently. Sand lightly until dull; remove dust using a tack rag. Where surfaces are porous or in poor condition, and where existing finish is scratched or otherwise damaged, remove old finish completely, clean surfaces and treat as for new wood. b. From surfaces to be refinished, remove grease, wax, oil, and other materials that might interfere with adhesion.

Application to Existing Surfaces: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

10.

Paint, repaint, finish, or refinish indicated surfaces. Paint or finish previously painted, unpainted, or natural finished surfaces in accordance with color schedule. Where surfaces were previously concealed and are exposed by the Work under this Contract, paint to match adjacent work in color, texture, degree of gloss, and type of paint used. Existing painted surfaces damaged during the work under this contract: Entire surface to natural breaks such as corners or projections. Existing painted surfaces repaired, extended, or patched under this contract: Entire surface to natural breaks such as corners or projections. Existing painted and natural finished surfaces indicated to be repainted or refinished: Entire surface to natural breaks such as corners or projections. Existing natural finish surfaces damaged during the work under this contract: entire surface. Where surface cannot be refinished without affecting edges and projections, also refinish edges and projections. Paint, repaint, finish, and refinish existing surfaces after completing patchwork, extension, or repair work and new Work in the space. When applying flat finish over previously painted surfaces, apply all coats as scheduled for new Work. When applying semi-gloss or gloss finish over previously painted surfaces, apply first coat (primer) in accordance with paint manufacturer's specifications and final coats as if on new Work Before painting or finishing over existing paint or finishes, paint or finish small inconspicuous locations representing each condition to test for compatibility. Notify Architect of incompatibility; do not proceed without instructions.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

Number of Coats: Number indicated is minimum number acceptable; shall produce a fully covered, workmanlike, presentable job; and must be applied in heavy body, without improper thinning. 1.

2.

3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply every coat indicated, other than primer coat, to every surface to be covered, including previously painted surfaces indicated to be painted or finished, even when the existing paint is sound. When stain, dirt, or undercoats show through final coat of paint, correct defects and cover surface with additional coats until paint or coating, film is uniform finish, color, appearance, and cover-age, at no additional costs to the Owner.

PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D.

Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1.

Mechanical Work: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.

Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

Electrical Work: a. b. c.

Switchgear. Panelboards. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

F.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.4 A.

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1.

High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.1C. a. b. c.

B.

Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)].

Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1.

Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G. a. b.

First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).

END OF SECTION 09912

INTERIOR PAINTING

09912 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Wood. 3. Plastic trim fabrications. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

C.

Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE MPI Standards: 1. 2.

B.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b.

2.

Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a.

If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09911 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

PAINT, GENERAL Material Compatibility: 1.

2. B. 2.2

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

Colors:

As indicated in a color schedule .

PRIMERS/SEALERS

A.

Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.

B.

Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.

C.

Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated.

2.3 A. 2.4 A. 2.5 A.

METAL PRIMERS Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134. WOOD PRIMERS Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI #5. EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09911 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.6 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent.

C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.

3.2

When measured with an electronic

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09911 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3 A.

EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Steel Substrates: 1.

Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A. a. b. c.

B.

Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.3A. a. b. c.

Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including board siding. 1.

Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.2A. a. b. c.

D.

Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).

Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork. 1.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: 1.

Latex System: MPI EXT 6.8A. a. b. c.

Prime Coat: Bonding primer (water based). Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

END OF SECTION 09911

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09911 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3

SUMMARY Section includes woven carpet. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

2.

3.

4.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants indicating that products comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168: Credit EQ 4.3: Product data a. b. c.

5.

C.

For carpet, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. For carpet cushion, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label" program. For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content.

Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For carpet and installation adhesives, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."

Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1.

CARPET

Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet.

09680 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. D. 1.4

Carpet type, color, and dye lot. Seam locations, types, and methods. Pile direction.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Product test reports.

B.

Warrant: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 A. 1.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1.7 A. 1.8 A. 1.9 A.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with CRI 104. FIELD CONDITIONS Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. WARRANTY Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2.

3.

CARPET

Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. Warranty Period: Lifetime Commercial Limited

09680 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

WOVEN CARPET; CPT-1 Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.

.

B.

Recycled Content: As indicated on Drawings.

C.

Color: Match Architect's samples.

D.

Pattern: Match Architect's samples.

E.

Fiber Content: ”eco solution Q nylon.”

F.

Pile Characteristic: Multi-Level Pattern loop.

G.

Gauge: 1/12

H.

Stitches per Inch: 11.0

I.

Avg. Density: 8,852 oz./cu. yd..

J.

Pile Thickness: 0.122 inch for finished carpet.

K.

Face Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd..

L.

Dye Method: 100% solution dyed.

M.

Tufted Pattern Repeat: 72 inches W x 48 inches L.

N.

Backing: eco worx performance broadloom.

O.

Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: S.S.P. Shaw Soil Protection.

P.

Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646. 2. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 4. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

2.2 A.

WOVEN CARPET; CPT-2 Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.

CARPET

.

09680 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Recycled Content: As indicated on Drawings.

C.

Color: Match Architect's samples.

D.

Pattern: Match Architect's samples.

E.

Fiber Content: ”eco solution q(R) nylon.”

F.

Pile Characteristic: Multi-Level Pattern loop.

G.

Gauge: 1/10

H.

Stitches per Inch: 12.0.

I.

Avg. Density: 6,067 oz./cu. yd..

J.

Pile Thickness: 0.178 inch for finished carpet.

K.

Face Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd..

L.

Dye Method: 100% solution dyed.

M.

Tufted Pattern Repeat: 3 feet x 5 feet.

N.

Backing: eco worx(R) broadloom.

O.

Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: S.S.P. Shaw Soil Protection.

P.

Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646. 2. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 4. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

2.3

CPT-3: Not Used.

2.4

WOVEN CARPET; CPT-4

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.

.

B.

Recycled Content: As indicated on Drawings.

C.

Color: Match Architect's samples.

D.

Pattern: Match Architect's samples.

CARPET

09680 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Fiber Content: ”eco solution Q nylon.”

F.

Pile Characteristic: Multi-Level Pattern cut loop.

G.

Gauge: 1/10,

H.

Stitches per Inch: 11.0.

I.

Avg. Density: 8,852 oz./cu. yd..

J.

Pile Thickness: 0.146 inch for finished carpet.

K.

Face Weight: 32 oz./sq. yd..

L.

Dye Method: 100% solution dyed.

M.

Tufted Pattern Repeat: 122 inches x 12 inches.

N.

Backing: eco worx performance broadloom.

O.

Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: S.S.P. Shaw Soil Protection.

P.

Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646. 2. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 4. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

2.5

CPT-3: Not Used.

2.6

CPT-5: As specified in Section 12484 “Floor Mats and Frames.”

2.7

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cementbased formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B.

Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer . 1. 2.

CARPET

Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

09680 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D.

Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

E.

Installation: Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's instructions for the following: 1.

Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Down Installation."

written installation

Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-

F.

Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

G.

Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

H.

Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

I.

Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

J.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

K.

Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

L.

Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.

CARPET

09680 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC M.

Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. 2. 3.

N.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

END OF SECTION 09680

CARPET

09680 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09654 - LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

1.2

Linoleum sheet flooring.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 5: Include location and distance from Project of material manufacturer. 2. Product Data for Credit MR 6.0: For linoleum flooring, including printed statement of costs for each rapidly renewable material. 3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

C.

Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

D.

Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required.

E.

Maintenance data.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.

1.4

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor coverings.

B.

Until Substantial Completion, recommended by manufacturer.

maintain

LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS

ambient

temperatures

within

range

09654 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D.

Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation.

E.

Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A.

MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Marmoleum. (Basis of Design) 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; ”Marmorette.” 3. Or equal product. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING MCT -1 and MCT-2 Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing . 1.

Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide.

B.

MCT-1: 1. Product: Marmoleum Real. 2. Thickness: 2.5 mm 3. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.

C.

MCT-2: 1. Product: Marmoleum Fresco. 2. Thickness:2.0 mm 3. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.

2.3

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. 1.

C.

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

when

Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS

09654 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.

B.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a.

b.

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D.

Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1.

E.

3.2

Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.

B.

Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.

C.

Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS

09654 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

E.

Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.3

LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A.

Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

B.

Lay out sheet floorings as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.4 A. 3.5

Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. Avoid cross seams. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks).

LINOLEUM SHEET DESK TOP INSTALLATION According to manufacturer’s installation instructions and as indicated on Drawings. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings.

B.

Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before applying liquid floor polish. 1.

C.

Apply two coats.

After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09654

LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS

09654 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Resilient base. Resilient molding accessories.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1. 2.

3.

C.

1.3 A.

Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.

1.4

Credit EQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.

B.

Until Substantial Completion, recommended by manufacturer.

maintain

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

ambient

temperatures

within

range

09653 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

RESILIENT BASE ; RB-1 Resilient Base: 1.

B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Johnsonite. c. Roppe Corporation, USA. (Basis of Design)

Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2. 3.

Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). Style: Cove (base with toe).

C.

Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch.

D.

Height: 4 inches.

E.

Lengths:

F.

Outside Corners: Preformed.

G.

Inside Corners: Preformed.

H.

Finish:

I.

Colors and Patterns:

2.2 A.

Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY Resilient Molding Accessory: 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Johnsonite. b. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B.

Description: Transition strips.

C.

Material: Vinyl.

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09653 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

E.

Colors and Patterns:

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1.

Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a.

Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C.

Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

D.

Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C.

Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.

D.

3.2 A.

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09653 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C.

Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D.

Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E.

Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

3.3

RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B.

Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet, resilient floor covering and other floor finishes as indicated by Architect that would otherwise be exposed.

3.4

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B.

Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09653

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09653 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For VCT, include recycled content data. 2. Product Data for Credit MR 5: Include location and distance from Project of material manufacturer. 3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

C.

Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

D.

Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

E.

Maintenance data.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.

1.4

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile.

B.

Until Substantial Completion, recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D.

Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

maintain

ambient

temperatures

within

range

09651 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE ; VCT-1

A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; ”Migrations.” (Basis of Design) 2. or equal product by one of the following: a. Congoleum Corporation. b. Mannington Mills, Inc.. c. Tarkett, Inc..

B.

Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C.

Recycled Content: 1. Pre-Consumer: 10% minimum.

D.

Wearing Surface: Smooth.

E.

Thickness: 0.125 inch.

F.

Size: 12 by 12 inches.

G.

Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Material Schedule on Drawings. Match Architect's sample .

2.2

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1.

Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a.

C.

VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

09651 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a.

b.

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D.

Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1.

E.

3.2

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B.

Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1.

Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

09651 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1.

Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D.

Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E.

Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G.

Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.3

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Allow adhesive to dry for at least 96 hours.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

C.

Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying manufacturer’s recommended liquid floor polish.

D.

Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09651

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

09651 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09629 - CORK FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

1.2

Cork floor tile.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content.

C.

Shop Drawings: For each type of cork flooring. Include cork flooring layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

D.

Samples: Full-size units of each shade, pattern, and finish of cork flooring required.

E.

Maintenance data.

1.3 A.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE Product Certificates: For cork floating floor system, from manufacturer, certifying that MDF core contains no urea-formaldehyde resins. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive cork flooring.

B.

Until Substantial Completion, recommended by manufacturer.

CORK FLOORING

maintain

ambient

temperatures

within

range

09629 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

CORK FLOOR TILE ; CK-1 and CK-2 Cork Floor Tile: Composed of 100 percent natural cork bark and recycled cork granules and set in a natural or synthetic, flexible resin matrix; homogeneous and uniform in composition throughout the tile thickness. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

CERES Cork Flooring Products. Cork Direct. Dodge-Regupol, Inc. (Basis of Design) Expanko, Inc. Gerbert Limited. Globus Cork. Jelinek Cork Group. Natural Cork Company. Nova Distinctive Floors. WE Cork Inc.

B.

Provide cork floor tile made with adhesives and binders that do not contain ureaformaldehyde resins.

C.

Thickness: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.

D.

Size: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.

E.

Shade: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

F.

Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.

G.

Finish: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.2

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cementbased or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by cork flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.

Adhesive: Water-resistant products as recommended by manufacturer to suit cork flooring and substrate conditions indicated. 1.

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

CORK FLOORING

when

09629 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Prepare substrates according to cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of cork flooring.

B.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a.

b.

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisturevapor emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D.

Do not install cork flooring until materials are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1.

E.

3.2

Move cork flooring products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.

Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by cork flooring products. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions for installing cork flooring.

B.

Mix floor tiles from each carton together to ensure uniform distribution of shade.

C.

Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles.

CORK FLOORING

09629 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

E.

Lay floor tiles in pattern indicated.

F.

Apply adhesive to substrate and set floor tiles in adhesive.

G.

Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

H.

Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

I.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

3.3

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting cork flooring.

B.

Cover cork flooring until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09629

CORK FLOORING

09629 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical tile ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items. Show size and location of initial access modules.

C.

Samples: For each exposed finish.

D.

LEED Submittal: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

E.

Product test reports.

F.

Research/evaluation reports.

G.

Maintenance data.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1.

Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a.

Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09512 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. a.

C.

2.

3.

4.

1.4 A.

Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings-Seismic Zones 0-2." CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4." ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

E.

Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 1.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.

Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 1.

B.

Recycled Content: Provide acoustical tiles with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 40 percent by weight.

Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09512 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

C.

Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1.

2.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Anchors in Concrete: Expansion or Bonded anchors fabricated from corrosionresistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1.

Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

E.

Seismic struts and seismic clips.

F.

Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

2.2

ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING; ACT-1

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings Armstrong, “Bravada II” #936 or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. USG Interiors, Inc..

B.

Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: 1.

Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; Pattern F.

C.

Color: As indicated on Drawings.

D.

LR: Not less than 0.80.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09512 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

NRC: Not less than 0.55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.

F.

CAC: Not less than 33.

G.

Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular Edge.

H.

Thickness: 5/8 inch.

I.

Modular Size: 24 by 24 24 x24 inches.

2.3 A.

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude 15/16 Exposed Grid. USG Interiors, Inc.; .

B.

Direct-Hung, Fire-Rated Suspension System: Intermediate duty structural classification.

C.

Access: Upward, with each access unit identified by manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B.

Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.

C.

Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. 2.

Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09512 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E.

Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F.

Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.

END OF SECTION 09512

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09512 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Tile backing panels. 5. Metal edge strips. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1. Product data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

C.

Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

CERAMIC TILE

09310 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

TILE PRODUCTS

A.

ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B.

General: 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

C.

Tile Types TL-1, 2, 3 & 4: Unglazed ceramic tile. 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Module Size: a. 6 x 6 inches; TL-1. b. 12 x 12 inches; TL-2. c. 12 x 18 inches; TL-3. d. 18 x 18 inches; TL-4. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain. 5. Finish: unglazed. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: Dal Tile “Villa Valleta.” As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings. 7. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a.

D.

American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. Crossville, Inc. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. Interceramic. Lone Star Ceramics Company. Portobello America, Inc. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

Base Cove; TL-5: Cove, module size 6 x 12 inches.

Tile Type TL-6 & TL-7: Unglazed ceramic tile. 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Module Sizes: a. 2-1/8 x 8-1/2 inches. b. 4-1/4 x 12-3/4 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain. 5. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: Dal Tile “Modern Dimensions.” Colors as indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings. 7. Grout Color: To be determined by Architect.

CERAMIC TILE

09310 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 8.

Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. b. c. d.

2.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Base Cove: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 1 inch. Internal Corners: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across nominal 4-inch dimension.

THRESHOLDS

A.

General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B.

Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Match Architect's sample.

2.3 A.

TILE BACKING PANELS Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. 2.4

a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. Thickness: As indicated.

WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A.

General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

B.

Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane. b. Bostik, Inc.; [Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane] [Hydroment Gold].

CERAMIC TILE

09310 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. d. e. C.

b. c. d. e.

A.

Boiardi Products, a QEP company; Elastiment 323 Cement Based Waterproofing, Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane. C-Cure; UltraCure 971. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic (PRP 315). Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; Triple Flex Waterproofing, Crack Isolation Membrane & Mortar.

SETTING MATERIALS Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] or comparable product by one of the following:

2. B.

Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing.

Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

CERAMIC TILE

Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products.

09310 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

2. 3. 2.6 A.

f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

GROUT MATERIALS Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

2.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Jamo Inc. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A.

General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B.

One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

CERAMIC TILE

DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.

09310 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. d. e. f. 2.8

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B.

Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. PREPARATION

A.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B.

Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C.

Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D.

Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

CERAMIC TILE

09310 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B.

Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D.

Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch. 3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

F.

Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G.

Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

H.

Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).

CERAMIC TILE

09310 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

I.

Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.

J.

Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

K.

Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

3.4 A.

INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F122: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA F122. a. b. c. d.

B.

Tile Type: TL-4. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. Grout Joint Size: 1/16 inch.

Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W???: Thin-set mortar on “green” board;

2.

a. Tile Type: TL-5. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout. d. Grout Joint Size: ¼ inch. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units; TCA W244. a. b. c. d.

Tile Type: TL-5. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded Water-cleanable epoxy grout. Grout Joint Size: ¼ inch.

END OF SECTION 09310

CERAMIC TILE

09310 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

09280 ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Replicating plaster trim and castings to replace deteriorated or missing trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Plaster Repair." 2. Section 09215; veneer plaster wall restoration. 3. Section 09991; encapsulation coating system. C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for plaster trim replacement are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances." D. Unit Prices:Plaster trim replacement to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: 1. For each product indicated. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Schedule of Work: Submit a schedule of spaces that require ornamental plaster, and a list of ornamental plaster items or areas that require repair or replacement in each of the affected spaces. Indicate procedures to be used, and time requirements.

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 1/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E. Restoration program for each phase of the cleaning and repair process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the cleaning and repair work. 1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced plaster cleaning and repair firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for cleaning work and 1 for repair/replication work. 2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that plaster restoration and cleaning are in progress. B. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing plaster cleaners and consolidants that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost. C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. 1. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. 2. Plaster repair: Prepare sample panels of 9 square feet for each type of restoration proposed. Maintain the sample panel throughout the restoration to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship expected. 3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 9 square feet for each type of surface condition. a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 4. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of plaster restoration and cleaning.

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 2/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. D. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests. E. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for plaster replacement from a single source for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons. B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers. C. Store gypsum materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Keep the room temperature above 55oF until the plaster/joint compound has set. 2. Provide ample ventilation as the plaster dries. 1.8 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Specifications: ANSI, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications: ASTM, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187, 215/299-5400. C. U.S. Gypsum Association, 810 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002 202/289-5440 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPLICATING ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM A. REPLICATING ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM 1. MANUFACTURERS a. National Gypsum Co. Gold Bond Building Products Division P.O. Box 25884 Charlotte, NC 28229

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 3/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

704/536-0023 b. United States Gypsum Association 10 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002 202/289-5440, FAX 202/289-3707

c. Plastic Tooling Co. 303 Commerce Dr. Exton, PA 19341 610/363-5440 d. Charles Street Supply Co. 54 Charles St. Boston, MA 02114 617/367-9046 B. MATERIALS 1. Gypsum Plaster Materials: a. Base coat plasters: ASTM C28, types as indicated below. 1) Gypsum neat plaster such as "Red Top Gypsum Plaster", "Red Top TwoPurpose Plaster (United States Gypsum Association), "Two-Way Hardwall Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal. 2) High strength gypsum neat plaster with a minimum average dry compressive strength of 2,800 psi per ASTM C472 for a mix of 100 lbs. plaster and 2 cu. ft. of sand such as "Structo-Base" (United States Gypsum Association), or approved equal. b. Finish coat plasters: Types as indicated below: 1) Gypsum gauging plaster, ASTM C28; for flatwork such as "Champion Gauging Plaster", "Red Top Gypsum Plaster", "Star Gauging Plaster" (U.S. Gypsum Association), "Super-White Gauging Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal. 2) Gypsum molding plaster, ASTM C59; for crown moldings such as "USG Molding Plaster" (United States Gypsum Association), "Super-White Molding Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal. 3) Gypsum casting plaster, ASTM C59; for ornamental plaster such as "USG No. 1 Casting Plaster" (United States Gypsum Association), or approved equal. c. Finishing Hydrated Limes: ASTM C206; Type S, such as "Ivory Finish Lime", "Snowdrift Finish Lime" (United States Gypsum Association", or approved equal. ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 4/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

d. Aggregates for Base Coat Plasters: ASTM C35, sand. e. Clean, potable water f.

Bonding Compound for Gypsum Plaster: ASTM C631.

g. Plaster Molds: Urethane rubber liquid mold material that can produce detailed impressions (Perma Flex Mold Co.), or approved equal. h. Reinforcing Fibers: Sisal hemp fibers, or polypropylene fibers, not more than 2" long (Plastic Tooling Co.), or approved equal. i.

Anchors for Reattachment of Existing Plaster: Zinc plated washers with appropriate mechanical fasteners for existing substrates, (Charles Street Supply Co.), or approved equal.

C. MIXES 1. Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's directions for gypsum plaster base coat proportions for three-coat work: 2. Scratch Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand. 3. Brown Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand. D. For Finish Coat: Proportion casting plaster and molding plaster to comply with the manufacturer's instructions. Proportion gypsum gauging plaster to comply with ASTM C842; 1 part plaster and 2 parts lime. 2.2 DUPLICATING PLASTER CASTINGS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Rubber Casting Materials: a. Industrial Plastic Supply 309 Canal Street New York, NY 10013 212/226-2010 b. Polytek Development Corp. P.O. Box 384 Lebanon, NJ 08833 908/534-5990 c. Smooth-On, Inc. 1000 Valley Road Gillette, NJ 07933 908/647-5800

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 5/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Rubber Latex: #660: a. Cementex Co. 336 Canal St. New York, NY 10013 212/741-1770 3. Plaster: a. Gold Bond Building Products Division National Gypsum Co. P.O. Box 25884 Charlotte, NC 28229 704/536-0023 b. U.S. Gypsum Association 810 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002 202/289-5440, FAX 202/289-3707 B. MATERIALS 1. Plaster of Paris: "Kal-Kote Finishing Plaster" (Gold Bond, National Gypsum Co.), "Red Top Molding Plaster (U.S. Gypsum Association), or approved equal. 2. Spackle or patching compound 3. Rubber latex such as #660 (Cementex Co.) 4. Paper towels 5. Plywood 6. Clean, potable water 7. Cheese cloth or burlap strips C. EQUIPMENT 1. Stiff bristle brushes 2. Heating lamp, electric hair dryer or warm oven D. MIXES 1. NOTE: VERIFY MIX WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 2. 7 parts plaster 3. 4 parts water

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 6/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPLICATING ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM

A. EXAMINATION 1. Examine surfaces to receive ornamental plaster and conditions under which the ornamental plaster will be installed. Proceed with the ornamental plaster work only when substrate surfaces and conditions comply with referenced standards, to ensure satisfactory installations. 2. Promptly notify the contracting officer of conditions that need to be corrected or coordinated. B. PREPARATION 1. Surface Preparation: a. Remove ornamental plaster that is damaged or loose and requires replacement, or that has to be reset. b. Reinforce and secure loose ornamental plaster that is to remain, using appropriate concealed methods. c. Make molds or screeds as necessary for replacement of ornamental plaster. Match existing plaster profiles. d. Make accurate reproductions for missing, deteriorated or damaged ornamental plaster. e. Clean plaster surfaces to be restored, to remove loose and deleterious materials that may affect adhesion or application of new plaster. Re-attach loose lath or install new lath as required. f.

Spray existing plaster to be pointed or patched with water, or use bonding agent, to ensure adhesion of new plaster. Install keying systems for larger pieces as necessary. Comply with referenced standards.

g. All existing plaster to be painted shall be stripped down to a bare finish plaster surface with a non-water based solvent of paint stripper which cannot be water flushed clean. h. Measure and layout ornamental plaster accurately to maintain pattern and alignment of the work. C. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION 1. NOTE: Conform to the requirements of the "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Association concerning application of ornamental plaster.

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 7/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Make a template from sheets of metal (brass) cut full-scale in shapes to match existing; use to screed or form gypsum plaster to desired shapes and contours. 3. Coat metal sheet with layout dye - a blue dye that makes the scribed pattern easier to follow. 4. When the dye is dry, scribe, cut and carefully file the template to remove any roughness or other imperfections that might be transferred to the finished work. 5. Use a sled to guide the template as it is pushed through the plastic mass. Basic parts of the sled include a "slipper-board" and the board to which the template is nailed. a. For bench work the sled is guided by the table edge. Bench-run molds are installed on the job with mechanical fasteners or adhesively attached with gypsum plaster. b. For run-in-place work, a guide strip is attached to the wall or ceiling and forms one edge of the pattern; after work is completed the guide strip is removed. 6. For circular shapes: a. Follow procedures described above, except scribe the center line of the circular shape on the template. b. Center a pivot plate to this line and attach to the template board. 7. Mix Plaster: Use special plaster designed and manufactured for ornamental plaster work. a. NOTE: Mix the plaster a little below normal consistency for the first mix, then allow the mix to "cream" a bit before placing it on the bench in front of the template. For run-in-place work a slightly stiffer consistency is desirable. 8. For Hand Mixing: a. Weigh the plaster, and measure or weigh the water. b. Sift plaster into water evenly. Do not drop handsful of plaster into the water at one time. c. Allow to soak 2 minutes undisturbed, then mix thoroughly. Stir from bottom, forcing material to top. Take care to avoid beating air into mix. Proper mixing forces air out of mix. d. Continue mixing until a smooth, even mass is produced. 9. For Mechanical Mixing: Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standards and with recommendations of plasters manufacturer.

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 8/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Weigh plaster and measure water accurately. b. Sift or strew plaster slowly and evenly. c. Allow it to soak 2 to 5 minutes, and mix for 2 to 5 minutes. 1) NOTE: For batches of 10 to 50 lbs., use a 3" diameter, 3-blade, 25 degree pitch propeller with 1/4 or 1/3 hp. 1,760 rpm direct-drive motor. For batches of 50 to 200 lb., use a 4" diameter, 3-blade, 25 degree pitch propeller with 1/2 hp. 1,760 rpm direct-drive motor. 10. Replicate the Ornamental Trim: a. For Run Work or Straight Mold: 1) NOTE: This method is used to produce staff work or pattern stock having parallel edges or to form a straight molding. b. For bench work, some plaster should be allowed to lap over the end of the bench to act as an anchor and prevent the mold from loosening from the bench before work is completed. c. Press small lumps of modeling clay onto the bench before the plaster is placed to provide a grip for the plaster and help hold it in place. 11. For Circular Shapes (Turning): Like run work, turning can be done in the shop or run-in-place. a. For bench work, place a center post in a hole in the bench. b. For run-in-place work, position the center post accurately at the center of the circular shape to be formed and securely attach or brace to the structural supports. 1) NOTE: THE CENTER POST SHOULD HAVE A RUNNING THREAD, WITH A DOUBLE NUT FOR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. THE PIVOT POINT MUST BE ABSOLUTELY RIGID AND SET HIGHER THAN THE TOP OF THE PATTERN TO BE MADE, SO THAT THE TEMPLATE WILL SCREED CLEARLY AS IT ROTATES AROUND THE PIVOT POINT. 12. Duplicate plaster molds by taking impressions from existing plaster molds; create new rubber molds from these impressions and cast plaster into these molds. 13. Remove plaster molds after plaster has cured, following plaster manufacturer's instructions. 14. Strip and clean existing decoration to produce a clean, sharp mold. D. ADJUSTING/CLEANING 1. When replication and plasterwork is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment. Clean floors and adjacent surfaces of all plaster debris, including plaster droppings daily.

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 9/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to the RHPO, which ensure ornamental plaster being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

3.2 DUPLICATING PLASTER CASTINGS A. PREPARATION 1. Surface Preparation: a. Remove ornamental plaster that is damaged or loose and requires replacement, or that has to be reset. b. Reinforce and secure loose ornamental plaster that is to remain, using appropriate concealed methods. c. Clean plaster surfaces to be restored, to remove loose and deleterious materials that may affect adhesion or application of new plaster. Reattach loose lath or install new lath as required. d. Spray existing plaster to be pointed or patched with water, or use bonding agent, to ensure adhesion of new plaster. Install keying systems for larger pieces as necessary. Comply with referenced standards. e. All existing plaster to be repaired shall be stripped down to a bare finish plaster surface with a non-water based solvent or paint stripper which is not water flushed clean. B. ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION 1. NOTE: IT IS NOT ALWAYS NECESSARY TO DETACH THE PLASTER ORNAMENT IN ORDER TO DUPLICATE IT. HOWEVER, IF THE PLASTER ORNAMENT CAN NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE WALL OR CEILING TO MAKE THE MOLD, CURING MAY TAKE SEVERAL DAYS BETWEEN LATEX COATS AND SEVERAL WEEKS FOR THE FINAL CURING. 2. Making the Mold: a. Detach from the ceiling or wall plaster casting to be duplicated. b. Patch the fragment or fill in any damaged portions of the pattern using spackle or other patching compound. c. Carefully clean the fragment for mold making. d. Brush the master piece with the rubber latex. e. Cure the latex at a temperature of about 110oF.; Use an infrared heating lamp, an electric hair dryer, or a warm oven to provide the source of heat; Cure for about 1 hour using heat. ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 10/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

f.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

When the rubber has cured, apply a second latex coating (the number of coats required is dictated by the size of the original and the depth of the relief); Cure as above.

3. Building the Mother: a. The purpose of the mother is to support the mold when it is filled with wet plaster. b. Fill any undercuts in the latex mold with wet paper towels; Lay a thin layer of wet paper towels over the entire surface of the rubber mold. c. Build a frame around the mold to pour the mother into; The mother should be at least 1/2 inch thick at the highest point of the mold. d. Separate the mother from the rubber mold as soon as the plaster has set (in less than an hour). e. Wash the interior of the mold with soap and water and remove any residual byproducts left from the curing process. 4. Mixing the Plaster: a. Add 7 parts by volume of plaster to 4 parts water; Use cold water to retard the set-up time. b. Sprinkle plaster powder in slowly; Stir as little as possible. 5. Casting the Plaster: a. Before pouring plaster into mold, fill the mold with water and then pour water out (this will moisten the walls and ensure penetration of the plaster into all crevices). b. Add plaster and cheesecloth or burlap strips for strength; Jog the plaster-filled mold gently to nudge plaster into all the indentations. c. Level the plaster; Plaster should be hard enough to remove from the mold in 30 minutes; Allow 24 hours to air dry before installing. 6. Install the plaster casting using a thin coat of plaster of paris as an adhesive; Hold the piece in place for a few minutes until the plaster sets; A mastic adhesive or epoxy or gypsum board joint cement are other good adhesives for light pieces.

END OF SECTION 09280

ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT

09280 - 11/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Shaft-wall enclosures. Stair enclosures. Horizontal enclosures.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. 2.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

1.3

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency.

B.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

09265 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.2 A.

American Gypsum Company. BPB America Inc. G-P Gypsum. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistancerated assemblies indicated. 1. 2.

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.

PANEL PRODUCTS

A.

Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content.

B.

Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1.

Type X: faces. a. b.

C. 2.4

Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper

Core: 1 inch thick. Long Edges: Double bevel.

Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

A.

Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B.

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

2.

2.5 A.

Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

09265 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaftwall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

C.

Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."

D.

Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. 1.

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E.

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1.

2.

G.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. 2.

H. 2.6

Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content.

Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: qualified testing agency.

B.

Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.

C.

STC Rating: As indicated.

D.

Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a

09265 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. E.

Depth: As indicated. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.

Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1.

F.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.

Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

Dietrich Metal Framing; The System by Metal-Lite, Inc. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.

G.

Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.

H.

Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.

I.

Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation.

J.

Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

PREPARATION Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 1.

B.

Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fireresistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

09265 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INSTALLATION General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. 2.

ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.

B.

Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.

C.

Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. 2.

At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum board face-layer panel.

D.

Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods.

E.

At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.

F.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

G.

Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

H.

Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaftwall assemblies.

I.

Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

09265 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC J.

In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1.

2. K.

3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. PROTECTION

A.

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09265

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

09265 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.

1.2

Interior gypsum board. Tile backing panels.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: For the following products: 1.

C.

Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

2.

1.3

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, including printed statement of VOC content.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C.

Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Install mockups for the following:

GYPSUM BOARD

09250 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. 2. 3. 4.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A.

RECYCLED CONTENT OF GYPSUM PANELS Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content t. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

B.

Type X: 1. 2.

2.3 A.

American Gypsum Co. BPB America Inc. G-P Gypsum. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. PABCO Gypsum. Temple. USG Corporation.

Thickness: 5/8 inch. Long Edges: Tapered.

TILE BACKING PANELS Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1. 1. 2.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.

GYPSUM BOARD

Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.

09250 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. 3. 2.4 A.

Thickness: As indicated on Drawings .

Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

2.

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet . Shapes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Cornerbead. Bullnose bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

2. 3.

2.5

USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

TRIM ACCESSORIES

1.

B.

Fry Reglet Corp. Gordon, Inc. Pittcon Industries.

Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified .

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A.

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B.

Joint Tape: 1. 2. 3.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

GYPSUM BOARD

09250 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a.

3. 4. 5. D.

2.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use setting-type accessories.

compound

for

installing

paper-faced

metal

trim

Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.

Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1.

C.

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

D.

Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. 2.

E.

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content.

Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.

Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F.

Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

G.

Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

GYPSUM BOARD

09250 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A.

Comply with ASTM C 840.

B.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

3.2 A.

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. 2.

3.3

Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings . Type X: As indicated on Drawings .

APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A.

Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B.

Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive waterresistant panels.

C.

Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.4

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A.

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect].

C.

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges . L-Bead: Use where indicated . U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges . Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

GYPSUM BOARD

09250 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D. 3.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings . FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A.

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B.

Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D.

Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. 2. 3.

Level 5: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. Level 5: Panels that are substrate for tile. Level 5: Typical for locations not specified above. a.

E. 3.6

Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. PROTECTION

A.

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09250

GYPSUM BOARD

09250 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09215 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Gypsum veneer plaster over existing plaster walls. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control joints, and reveals and trim; include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

C.

Samples: For the following products: 1. 2.

D.

Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch length for each trim accessory. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish and on rigid backing.

LEED Submittals: 1. 2.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

3.

1.3

Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled content. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a single manufacturer.

B.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency.

GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

09215 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.

D.

Mockups: Provide a full-thickness finish mockup for each type and finish of gypsum veneer plaster and substrate to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Architect will select representative surfaces and conditions for application of each type of gypsum veneer plaster and substrate. Provide mockups of partitions in sizes of at least 100 sq. ft.. Apply gypsum veneer plaster, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, with separate formulations; one for base-coat and one for finish-coat application over substrates. 1.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.

National Gypsum Company: 1) 2)

b.

USG Corporation: 1) 2)

2.2

Base Coat: Kal-Kote Plaster Base. Smooth Finish Coat: Kal-Kote Smooth Finish.

Base Coat: Diamond Veneer Basecoat Plaster. Smooth Finish Coat: Diamond Interior Finish Plaster.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.

Bonding Agent: ASTM C 631, polyvinyl acetate.

C.

Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.

Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

09215 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

2.3 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Patching Mortar: Dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 21/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

PREPARATION Existing Plaster Substrates: Prepare according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations and as follows: 1.

2. B. 3.2

Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles, grease, oil, incompatible curing compounds, form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with gypsum veneer plaster. Apply bonding agent on dry and cured concrete substrates.

Apply “LeadLock” encapsulation coating as specified in Section 09991. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

A.

Bonding Agent: Apply bonding agent on dry existing plaster according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.

Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: a. b. 2. 3.

C.

Base Coat: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections. Finish Coat: Trowel apply finish-coat plaster over base-coat plaster to uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.

Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect.

Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the following areas

GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

09215 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC ratings: D.

3.3

Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: indicated .

Level 5, smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise

PROTECTION

A.

Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B.

Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09215

GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

09215 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

09210 PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

PART 1---GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Patching hairline cracks in plaster with reinforcing tape and joint compound. 2. Patching holes in plaster. The extent of work described includes: a. Removing deteriorated plaster, and b. Applying three coats of plaster to the damaged area. 3. Patching small chips, cracks or depressions in plaster surfaces. 4. Resecuring a sagging suspended plaster ceiling by lifting the sag with heavy gauge wire. a. Common causes of sagging plaster include: 1) Wood shrinkage and weight of plaster pull the ceiling away from the joists. 2) Lath pulling loose from the ceiling. 3) Broken vertical ties. 5. Removing efflorescence from plaster surfaces. 6. Concealing water stains on plaster walls or ceilings using a shellac-based primer sealer. A product, such as white-pigmented shellac can be used to seal, prime and block out existing stains, prohibiting them from bleeding through finish layers of paint. B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

Division 9 Section "Plaster Trim and Casting Replication."

C.

Allowances: Quantity allowances for marble restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

D.

Unit Prices: marble restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.2

SUBMITTALS

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 1/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B.

Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: 1. For each product indicated.

C.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D.

Restoration program for each phase of the cleaning and repair process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the cleaning and repair work. 1.

1.3 A.

If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced plaster cleaning and repair firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. 2.

At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for cleaning work and 1 for repair/replication work. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that plaster restoration and cleaning are in progress.

B.

Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing plaster cleaners and consolidants that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.

C.

Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. 1. 2.

3.

Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. Plaster repair: Prepare sample panels of 9 square feet for each type of restoration proposed. Maintain the sample panel throughout the restoration to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship expected. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 9 square feet for each type of surface condition.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 2/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a.

4. 5. 6.

Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of plaster restoration and cleaning. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

D.

Preconstruction Testing: Contractor will engage an independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement material for testing.

E.

Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests.

F.

Source of Materials: Obtain materials for plaster cleaning and repair from a single source for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.

B.

Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.

C.

Store gypsum materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

D.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

1.2 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A.

Environmental Requirements: 1. Keep the room temperature above 55oF until the plaster/joint compound has set. 2. Provide ample ventilation as the plaster dries.

1.3 REFERENCES A. B.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Specifications: ANSI, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications: ASTM, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187, 215/299-5400.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 3/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

U.S. Gypsum Association, 810 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002 202/2895440

PART 2---PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. U.S. Gypsum Co. 125 South Franklin Street P.O. Box 806278 Chicago IL 60680-4124 1 (877) 874-6655 www.usg.com B.Tuff-Kote Company, Inc. 210 Seminary Avenue Woodstock IL 6009 815/338-2006 C. William Zinsser & Co., Inc. 173 Belmont Drive Somerset, NJ 08875 800/469-4539 FAX 908/469-4539 D. Masterchem Industries, Inc. Antonia Missouri 1 (800) 325-3552 www.masterchem.com E. Sika Corporation

2.2 PRODUCTS A. For patching hairline cracks: 1. Joint compound such as "Durabond Wallboard Compound" (U.S. Gypsum Co.), "Krack-Kote" (Tuff-Kote Co.), or approved equal. 2. Reinforcing tape (cloth or paper) 3. Acrylic latex caulk B. For patching holes in 3 coat plaster: 1. Expanded Metal Diamond Mesh Lath a. 3.4 lbs./sq. yard min. b. Cut from copper bearing steel plate c. Coated with rust inhibitive paint 2. 18 Gauge Tie Wire and Drywall Nails 3. Scratch and brown coats: aggregated gypsum plaster ASTM C 28

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 4/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Use of Perlite as an aggregate is not allowed without compensating for shrinkage rate of finish coat. 4. Finish Coat Gauging Plaster, Finish Lime 5. Drywall screws 6. Cloth mesh tape 7. Joint compound such as "Durabond Wallboard Compound” (U.S. Gypsum Co.), "Krack-Kote" (Tuff-Kote Co.), or approved equal. 8. Fiber a. Fiberglass b. 2” maximum length, ½” minimum length 9. Reinforcing Wire a. 1/8” dia. stainless steel, type 302 b. threaded c. preformed to patch shape 10. Epoxy Adhesive a. Two component b. Solvent free c. Moisture insensitive d. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod or approved equal C. For patching small chips: 1. Gypsum Plaster Materials: a. General: gypsum plastering materials shall conform to ANSI A42.1. Provide neat or ready-mixed materials at installer's option unless indicated otherwise. b. Base coat plaster: gypsum plaster ASTM C 28 c. Base coat aggregate: Sand, ASTM C 35 d. Finish Coat Gauging Plaster, Finish Lime 8. Bonding Materials: Bonding agent shall conform to ASTM C631. 9. Fiber a. Fiberglass b. 2” maximum length, ½” minimum length D. For repairing broken vertical ties: 1. Lag bolts 2. Heavy-gauge wire E. For concealing water stains in plaster: 1. White-pigmented shellac such as "Kilz" (Masterchem Industries, Inc.), "Bin" (William Zinsser & Co., Inc.), or approved equal. F. For re-adhering existing plaster: 1. Pre-wetting agent 2. thickener gel a. 5% Rohm and Haas Acrysol ASE-60 diluted with 81.9 parts water and 1.3 parts concentrated ammonia by weight. b. Gel pH: 8 3. unfilled adhesive a. Rohm and Haas acrylic resin b. Rhoplex MC-76 c. Rhoplex LC-67.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 5/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. filled adhesive a. glass microballoons b. lime c. coke d. Rohm and Haas acrylic resin e. Rhoplex MC-76 f. Rhoplex LC-67 g. gel thickener G. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (dry method) 1. Scum –X pad or other rubber or vinyl eraser H. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (wet method) 1. Vulpex soap 2. gum turpentine 3. Naptha 4. B-72 Acryloid resin (Rohm and Haas) 5. acetone. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. For patching hairline cracks: 1. Wide joint knife (approximately 5-6 inches wide) 2. Sponge or heavy-nap cloth 3. Caulking gun 4. Crack widener or triangular can opener 5. Stiff bristle brushes or vacuum B. For patching holes in 3 coat plaster: 1. Hawk 2. Slicker (flexible straight-edge) 3. Plasterer's trowel 4. Margin trowel 5. Mortarboard and mudpan 6. Pointing trowel 7. Plywood scrap 8. 6 inch taping knife 9. 12 inch taping knife 10. Joint tape (cloth mesh preferred) 11. Stiff putty knife 12. Goggles, work gloves, and dust mask 13. Hammer and cold chisel 14. Needlenose pliers and wire cutter 15. Screwgun and drill 16. Spray bottle and dropcloths 17. Tin snips 18. Shop-vac 19. Paint brush C. For patching small chips:

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 6/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Joint knife Sponge or heavy-nap cloth Crack widener or triangular can opener Stiff bristle brushes Hawk Slicker (flexible straight-edge) Plasterer's trowel Margin trowel Mortarboard and mudpan Pointing trowel

D. For repairing broken vertical ties: 1. Ladder 2. Wood 2x4s for T-brace 3. Phillips head screwdriver 4. Electric drill E. For removing effluorescence: 1. Clean sponge 2. Stiff, fiber bristle brush F. For concealing water stains: 1. Clean sponge 2. Stiff, fiber bristle brush 3. Paint brush, roller or airless sprayer G. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (dry method) 1. Vacuum 2. soft brush H. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (wet method) 1. soft clean cloths

PART 3---EXECUTION 3.1 PATCHING HAIRLINE CRACKS A.

Examination 1.

B.

Types of plaster cracking include, map cracking, alligatoring, settlement cracks, hairline cracks, stress related cracks and cracks due to moisture. If a wall has an enormous number of cracks to be taped, replaster the surface.

Application 1. Slightly widen the crack with a sharp, pointed tool like a crack widener or a triangular can opener. 2. Brush or vacuum surface to remove dust and debris.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 7/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Apply joint compound with a wide joint knife; Butter the compound into the crack, spreading it about 3 inches on either side of the crack. 4. Center mesh reinforcing tape over the crack, and force the tape down into the bed of the joint compound with the knife; Remove any excess compound by wiping with the joint knife. 5. When the tape is bedded, cover surface with a thin layer of compound and smooth as much as possible by working with the joint knife. 6. When the first coat has dried (at least 24 hours), smooth out any ridges by "wet sanding" with a damp sponge or a heavy-nap cloth folded flat or wrapped around a suitable block. 7. Apply a second thin coat of joint compound and feather the edge at least 1 inch beyond the first coat. 8. After the second coat has dried, wet-sand lightly and apply a thin finishing coat. 9. Lightly sand the surface again, and clean off the area with damp sponge. 10. After the surface has dried, brush off any plaster residue or dust. 11. For gaps between plaster surfaces and surrounding woodwork, apply acrylic latex caulk using a caulking gun. 3.2 PATCHING HOLES IN 3 COAT PLASTER A.

Examination 1. Determine the extent of unsound plaster and evaluate work requirements and causes before proceeding. Signs of damaged plaster in need of replacing include: a) Holes b) Water Stains: Brownish rings on the plaster, especially the ceilings, indicate that the plaster has been wet. If the water was stopped quickly, the surface may only need to be sealed with pigmented shellac to prevent the stain from bleeding through the new paint or wallpaper. However, if the leak continued for a long period, the plaster may need to be replaced, and will often have a powdery appearance. c) Chipping, flaking and delamination of plaster due to water infiltration.

B.

Application 1. Removing Deteriorated Plaster: a) Use plaster washers to re-secure weakly-keyed areas of otherwise sound plaster to the wall or ceiling. b) Wear a dust mask, goggles and gloves and pull loose plaster from the walls with your hands or a flat prybar. c) To remove sound plaster, drill holes in the line of cut with a carbide drill bit; Holding the chisel at a shallow angle, carefully cut directly from hole to hole with a cold chisel; Cut the resulting plaster free from the lath by chipping the keys from the side. d) Cut the plaster back to the studs, if necessary, and re-secure the lath with drywall nails. e) Knock any plaster stuck between the lath back into the wall cavity. f) Vacuum all dust, loose plaster, and other debris from the hole with a shop-vac, or brush it out with a stiff bristle brush. 2. Lathing the Hole:

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 8/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a) Install metal lath over the wood lath (metal lath lessens the likelihood of cracking caused by the old wood lath drawing too much moisture out of the plaster). b) If 2 hands are necessary to secure new metal lath, drive a finishing nail into an exposed stud; take a piece of lath slightly larger than the hole and hang it on the nail; with both hands now free, cut the lath to shape with tin snips. c) Use tie wire to secure the metal lath over the wood lath. d) To make a tie wire, bend a 6 inch long piece of wire into an elongated "U" and pull it around the old wood lath; space the tie wires every 6 inches. e) To secure the lath at studs, drive 1 inch drywall screws between the lath into the stud. f) Provide reinforcing rod at areas unsuited for expanded metal lath. 3. Applying the Scratch and Brown Coats: a) Thoroughly moisten the old wood lath with a spray bottle, so it will not draw moisture out of the wet plaster used for patching. b) Apply the base coat (scratch coat) of plaster to the wall in an arching motion; Keep the hawk close to the wall under the trowel to catch falling plaster; Use a margin trowel to work the plaster into edges and corners. The thickness of the new scratch coat should not exceed that of the old scratch coat (about 1/8 to 1/4 inch). c) As it starts to set, score shallow, random scratches in it diagonally about every inch or so to provide keys for the next layer; Let the scratch coat set for 48 hours. d) Apply the second coat (brown coat) using the same plaster that was used for the scratch coat. e) Run a slicker (a long flexible straight edge) over the entire patch; Keep the brown coat below the level of the surrounding finish coat by about 1/8 inch. f) As the brown coat starts to set, knock off any high spots; Let the brown coat set for 48 hours before applying the finish coat. 4. Mixing the Finish Coat a) Place approximately 2 quarts of cold, potable water into a 5 gallon plastic bucket. b) Scoop in autoclave finish lime until it starts to float. NOTE: WEAR GOGGLES, A DUST MASK OR RESPIRATOR, AND LATEX GLOVES WHEN MIXING LIME. c) If using single-hydrated lime, sift it into the water the day before and leave to slake overnight. d) Mix thoroughly with a mixer attachment on an electric drill, or by hand with a pointing trowel. e) Add small amounts of water or lime as necessary until all the lime is wet and there are no lumps or standing water. f) Use a scrap of plywood for a mortarboard and toss some lime putty onto it. g) Form the putty into a ring using the margin trowel; Fill the center of the ring about 2/3 full with cold, clear water. h) Slowly sprinkle in gauging plaster until all the water is absorbed; The mix should consist of 1 part gauging plaster to 3 parts lime putty. i) Mix the water and the plaster in the middle of the ring; It should be slightly stiffer than the lime putty.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 9/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC j)

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Fold in the lime putty and mix until all of the ingredients are stirred up.

5. Applying the Finish Coat: a) If applying the finish coat over an old brown coat, the existing brown coat must be moistened well before applying the finish coat (unnecessary on a newlyapplied brown coat). NOTE: Finishing plaster over an old brown coat occasionally fails because the new plaster does not bond to the dry, old substrate, even if it is wet down. Furthermore, the old plaster will absorb water faster, causing cracks in the finish coat as it starts to dry. b) Following the same motions used when applying the first two coats, trowel the finish coat onto the patch. c) Fill in any hollows by dabbing with plaster and smooth out ridges. d) Spray a fine mist of water onto the plaster and trowel over the patch again to get a slick finish; Straighten edges and corners with margin trowel. e) Let the finish coat cure for about 1 week; Check it for shrinkage. f) Tape any small cracks with cloth mesh tape and joint compound. g) Wash down new plaster with a zinc sulphate solution (2 lbs./gallon of water) and allow to dry. 3.3 PATCHING SMALL CHIPS AND CRACKS A. Application 1.

Scrape loose or damaged finish plaster and peeling paint from surface with chisel or joint knife. Remove material where required to enlarge cracks, chips, holes, etc. to at least 1/2 inch across and undercut to improve bonding of new material.

2.

Brush or vacuum surface to remove dust and debris.

3.

Moisten the surface by lightly spraying a fine mist of clean water from a spray bottle.

4.

Apply skim finish coat over low areas to bring entire finished surface out flush with the projecting firm and sound layers of adjacent plaster or paint. Form plaster as required to match original configuration and design or ornamental plaster.

5.

Once dry, sand by hand to produce a surface without bumps, cracks or depressions, ready to receive finish treatment.

3.4 REPAIRING BROKEN VERTICAL TIES A. Application 1. 2. 3. 4.

Determine direction, location, and spacing of nailers (they are usually perpendicular to the rafters). Dig out all previously patched cracks. T-brace and gently lift the sag (it may be necessary to remove or cut back the old wood vertical ties). From above the ceiling, screw lag bolts into the rafter every 24 inches on center in both directions.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 10/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5. 6.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Using heavy-gauge wire, sling the nailers from the bolts through the rafters; Double the wire and wrap it around the lag bolt. Bring it down, threading it between the lath and the nailer in a void near a plaster key, and wrap it back around the nailer; Twist it tightly around itself.

3.5 REMOVING EFFLUORESCENCE A. Examination 1.

Before proceeding with steps to remove efflorescence, examine the plaster and substrate material for potential sources of moisture and make repairs as required: a. Determine the age of the structure: Efflorescence on older buildings is typically caused by the presence of soluble salts in the construction combined with moisture. b. Determine the location of the efflorescence: Examination may show where the water is entering. c. If possible, examine the condition of the back-up material: 1) Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings that could allow water to enter the building. a) Are joints properly caulked or sealed? b) Are flashings and drips in good condition? c) Are there open or eroded mortar joints in copings or in sills? 2) Carefully note the condition and profile of the mortar joints. 3) Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding with the cleaning operations. d. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry. e. Examine laboratory test reports on the materials: The problem may stem from the composition or misuse of the material.

B. Application 1. 2.

Carefully remove any surface deposits using a stiff fiber bristle brush only. Wipe the surface with a clean, damp cloth.

3.6 CONCEALING WATER STAINS IN PLASTER A. Examination 1. Before proceeding with steps to conceal water stains, examine the plaster and substrate material for potential sources of moisture and make repairs as required. a. Look for signs of water infiltration: Examination may show where the water is entering. b. If possible, examine the condition of the back-up material: 1) Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings that could allow water to enter the building. 2) Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding with the cleaning operations. c. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 11/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Application 1. After source of moisture has been eliminated, allow the surface to thoroughly dry out. 2. Carefully remove any surface deposits and loose paint using a stiff fiber bristle brush only. Fill cracks and holes as required. 3. Wipe the surface with a clean, damp cloth. 4. Apply white-pigmented shellac over the stained area using a brush, roller or airless sprayer. Follow manufacturer's instructions. a. Depending on the severity of the stain, multiple coats may be required. If so, allow the first coat to thoroughly dry (typically 45 minutes) before proceeding with additional coats. b. If using a brush or roller, apply additional coats in the same direction as the first coat. b. If the surface is to be repainted with a high-hiding paint, spot-priming only the stained areas is acceptable. However, if a high-hiding paint is NOT used to finish the surface, spot-priming is NOT RECOMMENDED, as primed areas may appear shiny through the paint finish. (Note: Many ceiling paints have little hiding strength). In such cases, the entire wall or ceiling surface should be primed with the white-pigmented shellac before repainting to produce a more uniform final appearance. 5. Prime and repaint the entire surface with oil or latex paint as required. 3.7 RE-ADHERING EXISTING PLASTER A. B. C. D.

Identify areas needing consolidation for approval by Architect. Drill 3/16” diameter holes at 6-8” on center in face of plaster for injection of adhesive. Pre-wet plaster by injecting pre-wetting mixture through holes. Inject adhesive into each hole using a caulk gun until all voids are filled or until significant back pressure is built up.

3.8 CLEANING DECORATIVE PAINTED PLASTER (DRY METHOD) A. Brush and vacuum surface to remove all loose dirt. B. Rub Scum-X pad or eraser gently over surface of gilding and painted ground. C. Remove all dust and eraser residue using a soft brush and vacuum. 3.9 CLEANING DECORATIVE PAINTED PLASTER (WET METHOD) A. Brush and vacuum surface to remove all loose dirt. B. Apply a 10% solution of Vulpex soap in gum turpentine. Agitate with a small brush. Wipe off with a clean, soft cloth. C. Neutralize surface with Naptha. Wipe off with a clean, soft cloth. D. After surface is completely dry and cleaning is complete, apply 15% by volume B-72 Acryloid resin in acetone.

3.10 ADJUSTING/CLEANING

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 12/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls and other adjacent surfaces that are stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by work in this procedure shall be cleaned and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and perfect condition. B. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building operations and effects of weather. Protection shall be by methods recommended by the manufacturer of installed materials. C. Clean all affected surfaces of room and furnishings to their prior condition. D. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. END OF SECTION 09210

PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR

09210 - 13/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. 2.

1.2

Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

2.

1.3

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B.

Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09111 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B.

Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. 2.

2.2 A.

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.

SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.3

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A.

Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

B.

Firestop Track: As specified in Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

C.

Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1.

D.

Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- wide flanges. 1. 2.

E.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. 2.

Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09111 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1.

G.

3.

2.4 A.

Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- wide flanges. 1. 2.

H.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inchdiameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. AUXILIARY MATERIALS Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 1. 2.

Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A.

Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

B.

Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09111 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a.

2.

5. 6.

Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a.

3. 4.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards .

Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

C.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

D.

Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E.

Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.3

INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B.

Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. b.

Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09111 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. 2.

3.

5.

b.

Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

Z-Furring Members: 1. 2.

3.

D.

Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fireresistance-rated assembly indicated.

Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. Curved Partitions: a.

C.

Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a.

4.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION 09111

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09111 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08892 - GLAZING REPAIR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

This section includes guidance on replacing cracked, broken or missing panes of glass, replacing cracked or missing window putty and cleaning glazing.

B.

Related sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section “Historic Treatment of Wood Windows”.

1.2 A.

1.3

DEFINITIONS A window glass is in proper condition when it is set securely and tightly into the window frame, is properly caulked, and is not scratched, cracked, or broken. SUBMITTALS

A.

Submittals for this Section to be submitted with submittals for the following Sections: 1. Division 8, Door and Window Sections. 2. Section 08800, “Glazing.” 3. Section 08990, “Glazing Repair.”

B.

Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements.

C.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

1.4 A.

1.5 A.

QUALIFICATION DATA: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordination of Work: The coordination of glass repairing/replacing with other proposed work on the windows must be coordinated.

GLAZING REPAIR

08890 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A. B.

MANUFACTURERS For Glass: 1. Advanced Coating Technology 2. AFG Industries, Inc. 3. Cardinal IG 4. Environmental Glass Products 5. Falconer Glass Industries 6. Ford Glass Division 7. Guardian Industries Corp. 8. Hordis Brothers, Inc. 9. LOF Glass, Inc. 10. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited (wire glass) 11. PPG Industries, Inc. 12. Saint-Gobain/Euroglass 13. Spectrum Glass Prod. Div., H. H. Robertson Co. 14. Viracon, Inc. MATERIALS Linseed oil putty (for wood windows) Materials for Removing Glazing Compound: 1. Paint remover -OR2. Mineral Spirits (for lacquer thinner): a. A petroleum distillate that is used especially as a paint or varnish thinner. b. Other chemical or common names include Benzine* (not Benzene); Naphtha*; Petroleum spirits*; Solvent naphtha*. c. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. d. Safety Precautions: 1) AVOID REPEATED OR PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT. 2) ALWAYS wear rubber gloves when handling mineral spirits. 3) If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap and water. e. Available from construction specialties distributor, hardware store, paint store, or printer's supply distributor. -OR3. Muriatic acid (generally available in 18 degree and 20 degree Baume solutions): a. A strong corrosive irritating acid. b. Other chemical or common names include Chlorhydric acid; Hydrochloric acid; Hydrogen chloride; Marine acid*; Spirit of salt*; Spirit of sea salt*. c. Potential Hazards: TOXIC, CORROSIVE TO FLESH; CORROSIVE TO CONCRETE, STEEL, WOOD OR GLASS, FLAMMABLE. d. Available from chemical supply house, drugstore or pharmaceutical supply distributor, or hardware store. -OR-

GLAZING REPAIR

08890 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4.

Linseed oil or thinned prime

C.

Glass to match existing

D.

Glazier's points (if old ones are not usable)

E.

Neoprene setting blocks and shims

F.

Clean, potable water

G.

Ammonia

H.

Paper towels or rags

2.3 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

EQUIPMENT For Replacing a Window Pane: 1. Goggles and gloves for protection when removing broken glass 2. Hammer and chisel 3. Soldering iron wrapped in foil, or a heat plate to remove old glazing compound 4. Pliers and chisels for maneuvering glazier's points 5. Sandpaper 6. Very fine 0000 steel wool 7. Paint brush to apply primer 8. Glass cutter and straight edge 9. Putty knife or glazier's tool for smoothing glazing compound

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Check for cracked, broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged glass.

B.

Inspect glazing putty on both sides of pane for cracked, loose, or missing sections which allow water to attack the metal components, especially at the joints.

C.

Examine the condition of the metal window components for corrosion, loose connections, etc. 1. Verify glass rattle or movement in the glazing system. 2. Verify that glass stops intact.

D.

Inspect all surfaces which are to receive glass and/or glazing sealant for any defects or condition which will interfere with, or prevent a satisfactory installation.

E.

Correct all defects prior to installation of new glass.

F.

Verify the glass type in each window type prior to the installation of new glass.

GLAZING REPAIR

08890 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PREPARATION

A.

3.3

Surface Preparation: 1. Prior to reglazing, remove all oil, dirt, rust and other materials from the glass and the metal framing members using solvents such as toluol or xylol or using other rust removal techniques. 2. Prime and clean all glazing rabbets prior to glazing. 3. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION

NOTE: BE SURE TO WEAR HEAVY GLOVES AND OTHER PROTECTIVE GEAR WHEN HANDLING GLASS. A.

Remove existing glazing compound using one of the following four methods: 1. A hammer and chisel (at the risk of adjacent glazing). 2. A soldering iron wrapped in foil or heat plate (can soften the compound to ease removal). 3. Chemicals such as a paint remover, mineral spirits or muriatic acid.

CAUTION: THESE ARE POTENTIALLY HARMFUL AND SHOULD BE USED IN WELL VENTILATED AREAS ONLY. 4.

Linseed oil (if the putty is linseed oil based - which most are).

B.

Remove glazier's points with pliers and reserve for reinstallation.

C.

Special Procedures For Wood Windows: 1. Thoroughly clean the sash of any remaining compound and sand grooves smooth. 2. Apply linseed oil or thinned oil based primer to grooves to prevent wood from absorbing oil from new putty. If primer is used it should be applied in two coats, 24 hours apart.

D.

Cut new glass 1/8" smaller in length and width, than the opening. 1. Practice cutting on an unusable piece of glass first. 2. Make sure the working surface is perfectly clean and do not press too hard with the glass cutter. a. Old window glass is often quite thin, and also contains impurities and irregular internal tensions. b. Pressure from the wheel cutter on even a tiny piece of dirt can cause the pane to split or "run" in all the directions. 3. Cut straight pieces, use a straight edge as a guide. a. Score the piece with one firm, even stroke of a sharp glass cutter dipped in oil. b. Tap along the line to break it off. Plastic glass-cutter's pliers can also be used to break the glass with a quick, downward snap.

E.

Apply a small bead of glazing compound around the groove to cushion the new glass and then install glass spaced evenly on all sides.

GLAZING REPAIR

08890 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Replace glazier's points 4" to 6" apart around perimeter, tap them halfway in.

G.

Form glazing compound into a 3/8" diameter rope and press around perimeter of new glass. Using a putty knife, triangulate the surface of the compound. Hold the knife at a 45 degree angle and align compound with the muntin on the interior.

H.

Allow the compound to dry for a week, then paint accordingly with a 1/16" moisture seal extending onto the surface of the glass.

3.4 A.

ADJUSTING/CLEANING After the installation of each light, remove all markings and labels from the glass.

B. Wash the glass on both sides with a mild solution of soapy water. NOTE: IN NO CASE SHALL ALKALINE OR ABRASIVE AGENTS BE USED TO CLEAN GLASS. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN DURING CLEANING TO AVOID SCRATCHING OF GLASS SURFACES BY USING GRITTY MATERIALS OR DRY CLOTHS. C.

Rinse thoroughly with clean, clear water or as recommended by the glass manufacturer.

D.

Dry both sides of glass with a soft cotton dry cloth.

E.

Clean and trim excess glazing compound from glass, frames and sash promptly after installation.

F.

Clean adjacent surfaces if spills have occurred.

END OF SECTION 08890

GLAZING REPAIR

08890 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.2 A.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. 2. 3.

4.

1.3 A.

Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for shortduration load. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1.

1.4

Windows. Doors. Glazed entrances. Interior borrowed lites.

Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

GLAZING

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

08800 - 1/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

D.

Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F.

Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

1.5 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. 2. 3.

GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B.

Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C.

Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fireresistance rating in minutes.

D.

Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

1.6 A.

WARRANTY Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written

GLAZING

08800 - 2/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A.

Glass Types: Provide glass to match existing glass. Exterior glazing to have uniform color appearance. Apply glass film on new and existing glass.

B.

Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

C.

Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heattreated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

D.

Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. 2. 3.

2.2

U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

GLASS PRODUCTS

A.

Float Glass: indicated.

B.

Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

2.3 A.

ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise

LAMINATED GLASS Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

GLAZING

08800 - 3/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 2.4 A.

Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

INSULATING GLASS Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. 2.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Sealing System: Dual seal. Spacer: [Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction] [Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish] [Aluminum with black, color anodic finish] [Aluminum with bronze, color anodic finish] [Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish in color selected by Architect] [Galvanized steel] [Stainless steel] [Polypropylene covered stainless steel in color selected by Architect] [Thermally broken aluminum] [Nonmetallic laminate] [Nonmetallic tube] MATCH EXISTING.

FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A.

Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.

B.

Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

2.6 A.

Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus. (Basis of Design) Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.

GLAZING GASKETS Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. 2. 3.

GLAZING

Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

08800 - 4/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. B.

A.

Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1.

2.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

GLAZING SEALANTS General: 1.

2.

3. 4.

Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B.

Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

C.

Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

D.

Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.8 A.

GLAZING TAPES Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. 2.

GLAZING

AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

08800 - 5/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. B.

AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. 2.

2.9

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A.

Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: manufacturer.

B.

Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

C.

Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D.

Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

E.

Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

F.

Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.10 A.

MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Clear [float glass] [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass]. 1. 2.

2.11 A.

Types recommended by sealant or gasket

Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Provide safety glazing labeling.

LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Clear laminated glass with two plies of [float glass] [heatstrengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass] [ultraclear float glass] [ultraclear heat-strengthened float glass] [ultraclear fully tempered float glass].

GLAZING

08800 - 6/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. B.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

A.

Thickness of Each Glass Ply: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] [As indicated] . Interlayer Thickness: [0.030 inch] [0.060 inch] [0.090 inch]. Provide safety glazing labeling.

Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Low-e-coated, laminated vision glass with two plies of clear [float glass] [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass]. 1.

2.12

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Thickness of Each Glass Ply: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] [As indicated] . Interlayer Thickness: [0.030 inch] [0.060 inch] [0.090 inch]. Low-E Coating: [Pyrolytic on second] [Pyrolytic on third] [Sputtered on second] [Sputtered on third] [Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third] surface. Visible Light Transmittance: percent minimum. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: maximum. Summer Daytime U-Factor: maximum. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: maximum. Provide safety glazing labeling.

INSULATING-GLASS TYPES Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

6.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

GLAZING

Overall Unit Thickness: [1 inch] [5/8 inch] . Thickness of Each Glass Lite: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] . Outdoor Lite: [Float glass] [Heat-strengthened float glass] [Fully tempered float glass] [Ultraclear float glass] [Ultraclear heat-strengthened float glass] [Ultraclear fully tempered float glass]. Interspace Content: [Air] [Argon]. Indoor Lite: [Float glass] [Heat-strengthened float glass] [Fully tempered float glass] [Ultraclear float glass] [Ultraclear heat-strengthened float glass] [Ultraclear fully tempered float glass]. Low-E Coating: [Pyrolytic on second] [Pyrolytic on third] [Sputtered on second] [Sputtered on third] [Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third] surface. Visible Light Transmittance: percent minimum. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: maximum. Summer Daytime U-Factor: maximum. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: maximum. Provide safety glazing labeling. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: maximum. Summer Daytime U-Factor: maximum. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: maximum. Provide safety glazing labeling.

08800 - 7/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.13 A.

FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 45-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise limitation. 1.

B.

Provide safety glazing labeling.

Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 60-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise limitation. 1.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide safety glazing labeling.

Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 90-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise limitation. 1.

Provide safety glazing labeling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

GLAZING, GENERAL

A.

Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B.

Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C.

Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D.

Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E.

Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F.

Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G.

Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

H.

Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

GLAZING

08800 - 8/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

TAPE GLAZING

A.

Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B.

Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C.

Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D.

Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E.

Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F.

Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G.

Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3

GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A.

Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B.

Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C.

Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D.

Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E.

Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

GLAZING

08800 - 9/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A.

Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B.

Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C.

Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.5

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C.

Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D.

Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

END OF SECTION 08800

GLAZING

08800 - 10/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08716 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3

SUMMARY Section includes power-assist door operators for swinging doors. DEFINITIONS Single Swing Heavy Door: SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Product certificates.

F.

Field quality-control reports.

G.

Maintenance data.

H.

Sample warranty.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

08716 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C.

Exit-Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for doors with automatic door operators serving as a component of a required means of egress.

D.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .

1.5 A.

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.2 A.

MATERIALS Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with standards indicated below: 1. 2.

B.

2.3 A.

Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. DORMA Architectural Hardware. KM Systems, Inc. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. Stanley Access Technologies; Division of The Stanley Works.

Sheet: ASTM B 209. Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated; and complying with

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

08716 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1.

2.

Emergency Breakaway: Where indicated for center-pivoted doors, provide emergency breakaway feature for reverse swing of doors. Equip system to discontinue power to automatic door operator when door is in emergency breakaway position, and to return to closed position after breakaway and automatically reset. Wind Load: Provide door operators on exterior doors that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to wind load of indicated on Drawings.

B.

Electromechanical Operating System: Self-contained unit powered by permanentmagnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor, connections for power and activationdevice wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off.

C.

Electrohydraulic Operating System: Self-contained low-pressure unit; with separate cylinders for power and checking, connections for power and activation-device wiring, manual operation including spring closing when power is off.

D.

Hinges: See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for type of hinge for each door that door operator shall accommodate.

E.

Housing for Overhead Concealed Operators: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inchthick, extruded or formed aluminum and extending full width of door opening including door jambs to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.

F.

Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

2.4

POWER-ASSIST DOOR OPERATORS

A.

Standard: BHMA A156.19.

B.

Performance Requirements: 1.

Opening Force: a.

b. 2. C.

If Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.

Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

Configuration: Operator to control single swinging door .

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

08716 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Traffic Pattern: Two way, outward swing . Operator Mounting: Overhead concealed.

D.

Operation: Power-assisted opening that reduces force to open door and powerassisted spring closing. Pushing or pulling on door activates the operator. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator shall function as manual door closer, with or without electrical power.

E.

Operating System: Electromechanical .

F.

Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls.

G.

Features: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

H.

Exposed Finish: Finish exposed components with 1.

2.5

Adjustable opening and closing speed. Adjustable opening and closing force. Adjustable backcheck. Adjustable latch speed. Adjustable hold-open time from zero to 30 seconds. Adjustable time delay. Adjustable acceleration. Obstruction recycle. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator; key operated.

Color:

finish matching door hardware .

Oil-rubbed bronze.

ACTIVATION DEVICES

A.

General: Provide devices in accordance with BHMA standards, for condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms.

B.

Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact door control switch with flat push-plate actuator with contrasting-colored, engraved message. 1.

Configuration: Square push plate with 4-by-4-inch junction box. a.

2. 3.

Mounting: 1) Interior: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall 2) Exterior: Recess mounted in exterior wall.

Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Message: International symbol of accessibility.

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

08716 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

2.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. FABRICATION

A.

Factory fabricate automatic door operators to comply with indicated standards.

B.

Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within operator enclosure to the exterior.

C.

Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match operator.

2.7 A.

ALUMINUM FINISHES Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic door operator installation.

B.

Verify that full-height finger guards are installed at each door with pivot hinges where door has a clearance at hinge side greater than 1/4 inch and less than 3/4 inch with door in any position.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install complete automatic door operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, including activation devices, control wiring, and remote power units if any; connection to the building's power supply; and signage.

B.

Activation Devices: Install devices and wiring according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for type of operator and direction of pedestrian travel. Connect device wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C.

Access-Control System: Connect operators to access-control system as specified in Division 13 Section "Security Access."

D.

Adjusting: Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly and for weathertight closure, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards.

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

08716 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Readjust automatic door operators after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

Demonstration: Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators.

END OF SECTION 08716

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

08716 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08710 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood doors. B. Hardware for fire rated doors. C. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 – Rough Hardware B. Section 06110 – Provisions for installation of work in this section C. Section 08100 – Hollow Metal Frames D. Section 08210 – Stile and Rail Wood Doors E. Section 08215 – Sound Rated Door and Frame Assemblies F. Section 08410 – Fire Frames 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 – Standard for Accessibility and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2003 B. BHMA A156.1 – Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2000 C. BHMA A156.3 – Standard for Exit Devices; 2001 D. BHMA A156.4 – Standard for Door Controls-Closers; 2000 E. BHMA A156.5 – Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products; 2001 F. BHMA A156.6 – Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2001 G. BHMA A156.7 – Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; 2003 H. BHMA A156.8 – Standard for Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders; 2000 I.

BHMA A156.13 – Standard for Mortise Locks and Latches; 2002

J. BHMA A156.16 – Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2002

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 1/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

K. BHMA A156.18 – Standard for Material and Finishes; 2000 L. BHMA A156.21 – Standard for Thresholds; 2001 M. BHMA A156.22 – Standard for Door Gasketing Systems; 2003 N. BHMA A156.28 – Standard for Keying Systems; 2000 O. BHMA A156.29 – Standard for Exit Locks, Exit Locks with Exit Alarms, Exit Alarms and Alarms for Exits; 2001 P. DHI A115 Series – Specification for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; current edition Q. DHI (LOCS) – Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990 R. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007 S. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Agency; 2006 T. UL (BMD) – Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.; current edition 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking. The hardware schedule shall clearly indicate the architect’s hardware set and manufacturer of each proposed item. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the hardware schedule. 2. Provide two (2) copies of illustrations from the manufacturers catalogs and data in brochure form. 3. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable items and proposed substitutions in the hardware schedule. 4. Furnish hardware samples for design and finish as requested by the architect. These samples may remain part of the project as long as product is protected from damage and remain in new condition.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 2/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

5. Provide a keying schedule using keyset symbols referenced in the Door and Hardware Institute manual “Keying Systems and Nomenclature”. The keying schedule shall be indexed by door number, keyset and hardware heading number and shall include cross keying instructions and special stamping instructions. 6. Provide a complete and detailed system of operating and elevation diagrams specifically developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens and door position switches are specified. Provide these diagrams with the hardware schedule submittal, for approval. The following shall be included: a. System schematic b. Point to point wiring diagram c. Riser diagram d. Elevation of each door e. Detail interface between electrified hardware and associated trades B. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: 1. Provide manufacturers written installation and adjustment instructions for each item of hardware. Send installation instructions to the site with hardware. C. Maintenance Data: 1. Submit three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing the following information: a. Complete information in the care, maintenance, lubrication, adjustment and preservation of finishes. b. Data on repair and replacement parts. c. Catalog pages for each product. d. Name, address and phone number of the local representative for each manufacturer. D. Keys: 1. Deliver with identifying tags to the Owner by security shipment direct from the hardware supplier. E. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturers written warranty and assure that forms have been completed in the Owners name and registered with the manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. NFPA 101 2. NFPA 80 B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. Obtain each item of hardware (i.e. hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, closers) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 3/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. The hardware supplier shall have warehousing facilities with-in 100 miles of the project and employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. This consultant shall be available to the architect and general contractor during normal operating hours. D. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality and design. Any substitution of products not listed in the specifications must be approved by the architect ten (10) days prior to bid date to allow sufficient time for addendum to be added to the bid documents. All requests are to be in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements and are to be in writing, hand delivered to the architect. All requests are to be accompanied by three (3) copies of the manufacturers brochures and a physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish. E. Six (6) months after substantial completion of the project a factory representative of the provided material shall perform a jobsite walk through. This will be done to determine if products are performing as recommended by the manufacturer and meet all fire and life safety requirements. Deficiencies due to installation shall be corrected by the general contractor and defective material shall be replaced by the hardware distributor. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements pertaining to fire rated doors and frames. B. All Hardware on Fire Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one (1) month prior to commencing work of this section with the owner to establish final keying and masterkey groups. B. Prior to installation of the hardware, manufacturers representatives for locksets, exit devices and closers shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractors personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the architect and owner. C. The general contractor shall arrange a meeting with the architect and owner to establish security requirements for this project. This meeting shall be conducted prior to erection of interior and exterior partitions to establish wire runs and location of junction boxes and power supplies.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 4/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door number and hardware item code to match the hardware schedule. B. Deliver, store and handle packaged hardware to prevent damage to finishes and deterioration in the product due to the elements. C. Inventory door hardware upon receipt and provide a secure lock-up. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other trades directly affected involving the manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Furnish two (2) complete sets of templates for door and frame preparation with copies of the final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to the hollow metal, wood door and aluminum door (if applicable) fabricators so as not to delay production. C. Coordinate Owners keying requirements during the course of the work. D. The general contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all Electrical System rough-in and connections to electrified door hardware. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of substantial completion for all items of hardware unless noted otherwise. B. The warranty period for exit devices shall be five (5) years from the date of substantial completion. C. The warranty period for manual door closers shall be ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion. D. All manufacturers screws and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be installed to maintain the warranty. 1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools as applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by the hardware component manufacturer.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 5/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Furnish three (3) dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type and finish used with the hardware items provided. These screws and fasteners are to be delivered to the hardware installer for use during installation. All extra screws and fasteners and all special installation tools furnished with the hardware shall be turned over to the owner at the completion of the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. McKinney Products Company (MC) 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BM) 3. Lawrence Brothers (LA) B. Floor Closers and Pivots: 1. Rixson (RX) 2. Chase Doors (CH) 3. Jackson Corporation (JA) C. Latchsets and Locksets: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 8200 Series (SA) 2. Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series (CR) 3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 8800 Series (YA) D. Exit Devices: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 80 Series (SA) 2. Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series (CR) 3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 7100 Series (YA) E. Push/Pulls: 1. McKinney Products Company (MC) 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI) 3. Trimco (TR) F. Manual Door Closers: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 1431/351 Series (SA) 2. Corbin Russwin DC3000/DC6000 Series (CR) 3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 3501/4400 Series (YA) G. Cam Action Closers: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 421 Series (SA) 2. Norton Door Controls 2800ST Series (NO) H. Overhead Stops and Holders: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company (SA) 2. Rixson (RX) 3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RO)

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 6/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

I.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Manual Bolts: 1. McKinney Products Company (MC) 2. Door Controls International (DC) 3. Trimco (TR)

J. Protection Plates: 1. McKinney Products Company (MC) 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI) 3. Trimco (TR) K. Door Stops: 1. McKinney Products Company (MC) 2. Door Controls International (DC) 3. Trimco (TR) L. Thresholds: 1. McKinney Products Company (MW) 2. Pemko Manufacturing Company (PE) 3. Zero International (ZE) M. Gasketing and Door Bottoms: 1. McKinney Products Company (MW) 2. Pemko Manufacturing Company (PE) 3. Zero International (ZE) N. Key Cabinet: 1. Telkee (TE) 2. Aladin (AD) 3. Lund (LU) 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1 American National Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101 Life Safety Codes. 4. Applicable provisions of NFPA 80 Fire Rated Doors. 5. All hardware on fire rated doors and frames as listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: Identified in the hardware sets at the end of this section.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 7/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.03 HINGES A. Provide hinges as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Provide non-removable pin (NRP) feature, utilizing a pointed set screw, at exterior openings and where listed in the hardware sets. 2. Screws shall be flat-head Phillips finished to match the hinge. 3. Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12 x 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood screws provided by the manufacturer for wood doors. 2.04 PIVOTS A. Provide pivots as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Pivot sets shall be selected based upon the weight of the door. 2. Intermediate pivots shall allow for vertical door adjustment with shims at bottom arm. 3. Pivots tested and approved for use for fire rated doors shall have a steel base material plated to the specified finish. Where non-rated or 20 minute rated doors are listed, provide pivots of cast brass or bronze. 4. Provide pivots of the same manufacturer as the floor closer to insure visible components match in appearance and adjustability. 2.05 MORTISE LOCKSETS A. Provide lock functions and trim as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches. 2. Locks shall have field adjustable, beveled armored front, with a 1/8 inch thickness minimum. 3. Cylinders shall be manufacturers restricted keyway, six pin. 4. Latchbolt shall be solid one-piece ¾ inch throw anti-friction stainless steel. 5. Deadbolt shall be a full one inch throw made of stainless steel and have two (2) hardened steel roller inserts. 6. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. 2.06 EXIT DEVICES A. Provide exit device series and functions as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors shall be UL listed as “Fire Exit Hardware”. 2. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lockset levers. Exit device lever trim shall withstand 1000 inch pounds of torque without allowing access and be free-wheeling where listed. 3. Provide cylinders for exit devices with locking trim and cylinder dogging. Cylinders shall be manufacturers restricted keyway, six pin.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 8/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. All exit devices shall be heavy duty push rail and cast chassis type construction. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze not less than .072 inches thick. Painted or anodized aluminum shall not be considered heavy duty and are not acceptable. 5. All exit devices shall be provided with flush end caps as designated in the hardware sets as prefix (43). 6. Provide protective lexan touchpad on the exit device push rail to prevent scratches and serve as a visible guide to the user. 7. Provide cylinder dogging feature for all non-rated exit devices. 2.07 KEYING A. All locks and cylinders to be Grandmaster or Masterkeyed to a new restricted keyway key system as required by the owner. B. All locks and cylinders to be construction masterkeyed using the lost ball method. C. Keying requirements to be coordinated and completed at factory to protect the integrity of the system. Field keying will not be permitted and will be considered as just cause for rejection of supplier. D. Cylinders shall be an integral part of the locks as manufactured by specified lock supplier. Substitution of foreign made cylinders or components will not be allowed and also will be cause for rejection of supplier. E. All cylinders to be furnished with the manufacturers standard six pin tumbler. F. Provide quantities of keys as follows: 1. Six (6) each grandmasterkeys 2. Six (6) each masterkeys each group 3. Ten (10) each construction masterkeys 4. Three (3) each change keys per lock or cylinder G. Provide nickel-silver keys. H. All keys to be stamped with the keyset symbol and “DO NOT DUPLICATE” I.

Provide a factory issued bitting list indicating the key cut numbers corresponding with the keyset symbol.

J. Provide a key control system BHMA grade 1 including key holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key gathering envelopes and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in a metal cabinet with baked enamel finish and locking hardware. The general contractor shall verify that the key cabinet is installed per the owners location. 1. Furnish a wall mounted cabinet with hinged panel door equipped with key holding panels and pin tumbler cylinder door lock. 2. Furnish key holding capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks and cylinders.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 9/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Furnish a cross index system. 4. Key cabinet to be set-up by the hardware supplier and to include three-way indexing paper schedules in a hard bound binder, CD-ROM disc copy, tagging of change keys and installing tags on the key cabinet hooks. K. The hardware supplier shall review the key system with the owners representative after all of the operating keys have been tested in all cylinders by the general contractor, and the construction masterkeying is voided. 2.08 CLOSERS A. Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA. B. Heavy duty arms shall be provided with cast iron heavy duty soffit brackets. Stamped bracket material will not be acceptable. C. Provide drop plates, brackets or adaptors for door and frame as required to suit conditions. D. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior of exterior doors and stair side of stairway doors, unless noted otherwise. E. Provide back-check for all closers. F. Back-check and delayed-action feature (where specified) shall be provided with a standard pressure relief valve to protect the door from excessive force. G. Closing speed, latching speed and back-check shall be controlled be separate key operated valves. All valves to be captivated. H. Closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade, secured by machine screws. Projection of the closer body from the door shall not exceed 2-3/16 inches. 2.09 FLOOR CLOSERS A. Provide floor closers as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Floor closers shall be furnished with a rust proof cycolac cement case. Furnish four machine screws for attachment. 2. Floor closers shall have a helical torsion spring with adjustable spring power. Double acting closers shall have adjustable independent springs and closing speed valves for each direction of door swing. Compression springs will not be acceptable. 3. Floor closers shall have independent adjustment valves for closing speed, latch speed, back check and delayed action. All features shall be adjustable without removing the door or threshold. Separate and independent piston and cylinder for hydraulic back check shall be provided. Dual action valves are not acceptable.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 10/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. Provide non-hold open units unless otherwise listed in the hardware sets. Where hold open units are required, furnish closers designed for specific degree of opening built into the spindle assembly and at same point as the dead stop. Where hold open is listed, provide one of the following: a. AHO – Automatically holds open at the specified degree. b. SHO – Selective hold open may be switched ON/OFF by a separate valve 5. Provide floor closers with permanent solid one-piece non-removable spindles that allow vertical adjustment of the door. Provide specific size extended one piece spindles to match the undercut of the door. 6. For exterior doors, provide floor closers with built-in dead stop and installed with overhead stop; coordinated to provide simultaneous cushion and dead stop at the top and bottom of the door. Closers, pivots and overhead stops shall be of the same manufacturer to assure proper templating and door coordination. 7. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically disabled (PH prefix), provide units complying to ICC/ANSI A117.1, or other governing codes and standards, with provisions for opening force and delayed action closing. 8. Exterior doors shall be provided with sealed cement cases. 9. Provide floor closers of the same manufacturer as pivot sets to insure visible components match in appearance and adjustability. 10. Floor closers shall have the capability of being shimmed without removing the door. 11. Proved one 185 “Quickspotter” or similar device for each two floor closers furnished. 2.10 DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES A. Kickplates shall be .050 gauge and two (2) inches less the door width at single openings, and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware sets. B. Mop plates shall be .050 gauge and one (1) inch less the door width at single openings and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified. C. Push/Pull plates shall be stainless steel and beveled on all four (4) edges, unless otherwise noted. D. Push/Pull plates shall be cut for cylinders and thumb-turns as required. E. Provide all protection plates with countersunk screw holes and pan head machine or self tapping screws.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 11/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.11 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Provide overhead stops and holders as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. All overhead stops and holders shall be provided with extruded bronze channels and arms. 2. All overhead stops and holders shall be provided with metal end caps finished to match the channel. 2.12 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND DOOR SEALS A. Provide thresholds as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners. 2. Where thresholds are indicated to be used with floor closers or pivots, they shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Thresholds shall be fluted on ramp portion. 3. Provide machine screws and expansion bolts for all thresholds at concrete floors. 4. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weatherstripping and door seals being applied to hollow metal frames. 5. Where thresholds are specified at openings exposed to pools or high corrosive areas stainless steel or zinc plated fasteners shall be provided. 2.13 EXISTING HARDWARE A. All hardware for doors listed as existing to remain on the door schedule or in the hardware sets will remain. The general contractor shall clean and adjust these items for proper alignment and operation. 2.14 EXISTING HARDWARE PREPS B. The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware specified for existing doors and frames will work with the existing hardware preparations. Lack of verification, that requires additional work to the existing doors and frames or additional material, will be the responsibility of the general contractor.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. The general contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free from defects. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 12/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and applicable codes. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in any other way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in Division 9 sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. B. Use templates provided by the hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Set units level. Plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to which it is set. F. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centerline of hardware item: 1. For steel doors and frames and wood doors comply with DHI Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Hardware locations for steel and wood doors shall be the same. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilation equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. B. Clean hardware surfaces soiled by installation or by work in adjacent areas. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage door hardware or finish.

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 13/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.05 DOOR HARDWARE SETS SET #1 Doors: 000A 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Alarmed Exit Device Closer/Stop Mounting Plate Kickplate Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 43 AL 8810 J x restricted keyway 351 CPS 351-D KP50 8" x 40" CSK HB4E MCK171 B x 42" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-42” x 2pcs-84”) MCK345 DNB x 42" MCK346 D x 46"

10B 10B EB EB US10B

MC SA SA SA MC MW MW MW MW

T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8243 TRS x restricted keyway 351 CPS 351-D KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E MCK171 B x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-36” x 2pcs-84”) MCK345 DNB x 36" MCK346 D x 40"

10B 10B EB EB US10B

MC SA SA SA MC MW MW MW MW

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 76 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 1431 O FS16 MCK151 B x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCKPK52 BL x 18' MCK434 APKL x 36"

10B 10B EB US10B

MC SA SA MC MW MW MW

SET #2 Doors: 001A 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Entrance Lockset Closer/Stop Mounting Plate Kickplate Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

SET #3 Doors: 002A, 310A 3 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Closer Door Stop Threshold Kerfed Door Seal Automatic Door Bottom

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 14/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #3.1 Doors: 306A, 311A 3 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Closer Door Stop Threshold Kerfed Door Seal Automatic Door Bottom

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 76 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 1431 P10 FS29 MCK151 B x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCKPK52 BL x 18' MCK434 APKL x 36"

10B 10B EB US10B

MC SA SA MC MW MW MW

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 8255 TRS x restricted keyway FB01M-12" DPS1 351 O

10B 10B US10B US10 EB

MC SA MC MC SA

KP50 8" x 35" CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

US10B US10B

MC MC MC

SET #4 Doors: 003A 6 1 2 1 1

Hinge Office Lockset Flush Bolt Dust Proof Strike Closer (For active leaf of pair only) 2 Kickplate 2 Wall Stop 2 Silencer

Wood astragal furnished by door manufacturer Salvaged doors to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps SET #5 Doors: 005A 6 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 1 Classroom Lockset 21 8237 TRS x restricted keyway (For LH leaf of pair) 2 Flush Bolt FB01M-12" 1 Dust Proof Strike DPS1 1 Closer 351 O (For active leaf of pair only) 2 Kickplate KP50 8" x 35" CSK HB4E 1 Door Stop & Holder ADH03 (Install at top of door-for active leaf of pair only) 1 Overhead Holder 598H x 195 x 90 deg (Pull side mount) 1 Angle Bracket 195 2 Silencer S2W

DOOR HARDWARE

10B 10B

MC SA

US10B US10 EB

MC MC SA

US10B US10B

MC MC

10B

SA

10B

SA MC

08710 - 15/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Wood astragal furnished by door manufacturer SET #6 Doors: 007A 6 Hinge 1 Exit Device 1 Exit Device 2 2 1 1

Closer/Holder Kickplate Kerfed Door Seal Astragal

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 16 21 43 NB 8713 F x 713-8 ETS x restricted keyway 16 21 43 NB 8710 F x 710 ETS-DT x restricted keyway 351 CPSH KP50 8" x 35" CSK HB4E MCKPK52 BL x 20' MCK351 DS x MCK354 DV x 84"

10B 10B

MC SA

10B

SA

EB US10B

SA MC MW MW

T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 16 21 43 8810 F x restricted keyway 351 CPS KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E MCK171 B x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-36” x 2pcs-84”) MCK345 DNB x 36" MCK346 D x 40"

10B 10B EB US10B

MC SA SA MC MW MW MW MW

10B 10B 10B US10B US10 EB

MC SA SA MC MC SA

US10B 10B

MC SA

SET #7 Doors: 007B, 013A 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Exit Device Closer/Stop Kickplate Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

SET #8 Doors: 008A, 009A, 010A 6 1 1 2 1 1

Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP Storeroom Lockset 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway Dummy Lever 8293 TRS Flush Bolt FB02W Dust Proof Strike DPS1 Closer/Stop 1431 CPS (For active leaf of pair only) 2 Kickplate KP50 8" x 33" CSK HB4E 1 Overhead Stop 598S x 90 deg (For inactive leaf of pair only) 2 Silencer S2W

MC

Astragal furnished by door manufacturer

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 16/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #9 Doors: 011A 6 2 2 2 2

Hinge Roller Latch Dummy Lever Overhead Stop Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 RL1 8293 TRS 598S x 90 deg S2W

10B US10B 10B 10B

MC MC SA SA MC

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway KP50 4" x 32" CSK HB4E KP50 4" x 33" CSK HB4E 598S x 90 deg S2W

26D 26D US32D US32D 26D

MC SA MC MC SA MC

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 487 x restricted keyway DP503 4 x 16 421 CTB KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E KP50 4" x 35" CSK HB4E P053RC 4 x 16 FS29 S2W

26D 10B/26D US32D EN US10B US32D US10B US26D

MC SA MC SA MC MC MC MC MC

Roller latch to be installed at the top of each leaf SET #10 Doors: 012A 3 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Kickplate Mop Plate Overhead Stop Silencer

SET #11 Doors: 015A, 016A 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Classroom Deadlock Pull Plate Cam Action Closer Kickplate Mop Plate Push Plate Door Stop Silencer

Salvaged door to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 17/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #12 Doors: 017A 3 1 1 1 3

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Mop Plate Wall Stop Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway KP50 4" x 33" CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

26D 26D US32D US32D

MC SA MC MC MC

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8237 TRS x restricted keyway 351 CPS 351-D KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E S2W

10B 10B EB EB US10B

MC SA SA SA MC MC

SET #13 Doors: 018A 3 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Classroom Lockset Closer/Stop Mounting Plate Kickplate Silencer

Salvaged door to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps SET #14 Doors: 019A, 025A 3 1 1 3

Hinge Office Lockset Wall Stop Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 8255 TRS x restricted keyway WS01 S2W

10B 10B US10B

MC SA MC MC

Salvaged door to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps SET #15 Doors: 020A, 204A, 205A, 206A 3 1 1 3

Hinge Passage Set Overhead Stop Silencer

DOOR HARDWARE

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 8215 TRS 598S x 90 deg S2W

10B 10B 10B

08710 - 18/27

MC SA SA MC

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #15.1 Doors: 203A 3 1 1 3

Hinge Passage Set Wall Stop Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 8215 TRS WS01 S2W

10B 10B US10B

MC SA MC MC

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 49 8265 TRS KP50 4" x 34" CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

26D 10B/26D US32D US10B

MC SA MC MC MC

SET #16 Doors: 022A 3 1 1 1 3

Hinge Privacy Set Kickplate Wall Stop Silencer

Salvaged door to reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps SET #17 Doors: 023A 6 1 2 1 2 2

Hinge Passage Set Flush Bolt Dust Proof Strike Overhead Stop Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 8215 TRS FB01M-12" DPS1 598S x 90 deg S2W

10B 10B US10B US10 10B

MC SA MC MC SA MC

Astragal furnished by door manufacturer Salvaged doors to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps SET #18 Doors: 024A 3 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Exit Device Cam Action Closer Kickplate Wall Stop Silencer

DOOR HARDWARE

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 12 43 8815 F x 715-8 ETS 421 CTB KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

10B 10B EB US10B US10B

08710 - 19/27

MC SA SA MC MC MC

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #19 Doors: 024B 3 Hinge 1 Exit Device 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Closer/Stop Mounting Plate Kickplate Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 16 21 43 8804 F x 704 ETS x restricted keyway 351 CPS 351-D KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E MCK171 B x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-36” x 2pcs-84”) MCK345 DNB x 36" MCK346 D x 40"

10B 10B

MC SA

EB EB US10B

SA SA MC MW MW MW MW

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 1431 O FS16 S2W

10B 10B EB US10B

MC SA SA MC MC

SET #20 Doors: 026A 3 1 1 1 3

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Closer Door Stop Silencer

Salvaged door to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps SET #21 Doors: 103A 1 Floor Closer 1 Intermediate Pivot 1 Exit Device 1 1 1 1

Overhead Stop Threshold Kerfed Door Seal Door Bottom Seal

DOOR HARDWARE

27SHO x 90 deg x less floor plate M19 16 21 43 8813 F x 713-8 ETS x restricted keyway 698S x 90 deg Type 5 x 400 x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCKPK52 BL x 18' MCK234 AV x 36"

613 613 10B

RX RX SA

10B BR

SA RX MW MW

08710 - 20/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #22 Doors: 103B 1 Floor Closer 1 Intermediate Pivot 1 Exit Device 1 1 1 1 1

Overhead Stop Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

27SHO x 90 deg x SC x less floor plate M19 16 21 43 8804 G x 704 ETS x restricted keyway 699S x 90 deg Type 5 x 400 x 48" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-36” x 2pcs-84”) MCK345 DNB x 48" MCK346 D x 52"

613 613 10B

RX RX SA

10B BR

SA RX MW MW MW

147 M19 16 21 43 8706 E x 706 ETS x restricted keyway 16 21 43 8710 E x 710 ETS x restricted keyway Refer to Specification Section 08716 Refer to Specification Section 08716 697S x 90 deg Type 5 x 400 x 48" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-48” x 2pcs-100”) MCK345 DNB x 24" MCK346 D x 52" MKA x 24VDC 21 42 x restricted keyway Furnished by hardware supplier

613 613 10B

RX RX SA

10B

SA

SET #23 Doors: 104A 2 Pivot 4 Intermediate Pivot 1 Exit Device 1 Exit Device 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1

Automatic Door Operator Press Wall Switch Overhead Stop Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip Key Switch Mortise Cylinder Wiring Diagram

10B BR

10B

Exit devices must be set in the dogged position before automatic door operator is activated Key switch to be used to activate and deactivate the automatic door operator

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 21/27

XX XX SA RX MW MW MW SN SA XX

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #24 Doors: 104B 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1

Pivot Intermediate Pivot Push Plate Pull Plate Automatic Door Operator (For active leaf of pair only) Press Wall Switch Closer Mounting Plate Kickplate Door Stop Threshold Kerfed Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Astragal

147 M19 P053RC 4 x 16 DP503 4 x 16 Refer to Specification Section 08716 Refer to Specification Section 08716 351 P10 351-D KP50 8" x 33" CSK HB4E FS29 MCK171 B x 68" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCKPK52 BL x 20' MCK234 AV x 34" MCK351 DS x MCK354 DV x 84"

613 613 US10B US32D

EB EB US10B US26D

RX RX MC MC XX XX SA SA MC MC MW MW MW MW

SET #25 Doors: S1A, S1C, S1D All hardware furnished by door manufacturer SET #26 Doors: S2A 2 Floor Closer 4 Intermediate Pivot 1 Exit Device 1 Exit Device 2 1 1 2 1 1

Overhead Stop Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Astragal Drip Strip

DOOR HARDWARE

27SHO x 90 deg x SC x less floor plate M19 16 21 43 8706 E x 706 ETS x restricted keyway 16 21 43 8710 E x 710 ETS x restricted keyway 697S x 90 deg Type 5 x 400 x 48" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-48” x 2pcs-100”) MCK345 DNB x 24" MCK351 DS x MCK354 DV x 100" MCK346 D x 52"

613 613 10B

RX RX SA

10B

SA

10B BR

SA RX MW MW MW MW

08710 - 22/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #27 Doors: 207A 3 1 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Privacy Set Cam Action Closer Kickplate Mop Plate Wall Stop Silencer

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 49 8265 TRS 421 CTB KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E KP50 4" x 35" CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

26D 10B/26D EN US10B US32D US32D

MC SA SA MC MC MC MC

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 49 8265 TRS 351 P10 KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

10B 10B/26D EN US32D US10B

MC SA SA MC MC MC

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 12 21 43 AL 8815 F x 715-8 ETS x restricted keyway 421 CTB KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E FS29 S1M

10B 10B

MC SA

EB US10B US10B

SA MC MC MC

T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8237 TRS x restricted keyway 351 CPS 770SPB KP50 8" x 34" CSK HB4E

10B 10B EB USP US10B

MC SA SA ZE MC

SET #27.1 Doors: 208A 3 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Privacy Set Closer Kickplate Wall Stop Silencer

SET #28 Doors: S2B, S2C 3 Hinge 1 Alarmed Exit Device 1 1 1 3

Cam Action Closer Kickplate Door Stop Silencer

SET #29 Doors: 300A, 305A 3 1 1 1 1

Hinge Classroom Lockset Closer/Stop Mounting Bracket Kickplate

STC 45 assembly-threshold, sound seal and automatic door bottom furnished by door manufacturer

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 23/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #30 Doors: 301A 3 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Office Lockset Closer Kickplate Wall Stop Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 8255 TRS x restricted keyway 1431 O KP50 8” x 34” CSK HB4E WS01 S2W

10B 10B EB US10B US32D

MC SA SA MC MC MC

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 1431 O FS29 S2W

10B 10B EB US10B

MC SA SA MC MC

147 M19 16 21 43 8804 G x 704 ETS x restricted keyway Refer to Specification Section 08716 Refer to Specification Section 08716 699S x 90 deg Type 5 x 400 x 48" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-48” x 2pcs-84”) MCK345 DNB x 48" MCK346 D x 52" MKA x 24VDC 21 42 x restricted keyway Furnished by hardware supplier

613 613 10B

RX RX SA

SET #31 Doors: 309A 3 1 1 1 3

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Closer Door Stop Silencer

SET #32 Doors: S1B 1 Pivot 1 Intermediate Pivot 1 Exit Device 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Automatic Door Operator Press Wall Switch Overhead Stop Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip Key Switch Mortise Cylinder Wiring Diagram

10B BR

10B

Exit device must be set in the dogged position before automatic door operator is activated Key switch to be used to activate and deactivate the automatic door operator

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 24/27

XX XX SA RX MW MW MW SN SA XX

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SET #33 Doors: T1A 4 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Overhead Holder Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

TA2314 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8251 TRS x restricted keyway 598H x 90 deg MCK171 B x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-36” x 2pcs-96”) MCK345 DNB x 36" MCK346 D x 40"

10B 10B 10B

MC SA SA MW MW MW MW

Existing door and frame to remain The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door and frame preps SET #34 Doors: T2A 8 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1

Hinge Storeroom Lockset Flush Bolt (Top) Flush Bolt Overhead Holder Threshold Door Seal Door Bottom Seal Drip Strip

TA2314 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 21 8251 TRS x restricted keyway FB01M-24” FB01M-12” 598H x 90 deg MCK171 B x 72" x 1/4-20 ms & la MCK316 DS (1pc-72” x 2pcs-96”) MCK345 DNB x 36" MCK346 D x 76"

10B 10B 10B 10B 10B

MC SA MC MC SA MW MW MW MW

10B 10B

MC SA

EB US10B

SA MC MC

Wood astragal furnished by door manufacturer SET #35 Doors: 027A 3 Hinge 1 Exit Device 1 Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencer

TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 16 21 43 8804 F x 704 ETS x restricted keyway 1431 P10 FS16 S2W

Salvaged door to be reused The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door preps

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 25/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Opening List Opening 000A 001A 002A 003A 005A 007A 007B 008A 009A 010A 011A 012A 013A 015A 016A 017A 018A 019A 020A 022A 023A 024A 024B 025A 026A 027A 103A 103B 104A 104B 203A 204A 205A 206A 207A 208A 300A 301A 305A 306A 309A

DOOR HARDWARE

Hardware Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 9 10 7 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 14 20 35 21 22 23 24 15.1 15 15 15 27 27.1 29 30 29 3.1 31

08710 - 26/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

310A 311A S1A S1B S1C S1D S2A S2B

Opening S2C T1A T2A

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3 3.1 25 32 25 25 26 28

Hardware Set 28 33 34

END OF SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

08710 - 27/27

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08592 - HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

1.2 A.

1.3

Wood window repair and replacement. Reglazing. Window hardware repair, refinishing, and replacement.

UNIT PRICES Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." DEFINITIONS

A.

General: See Division 1 Section "Special Procedures for Historic Treatment" for other definitions.

B.

Design Reference Sample: A Sample that represents Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or specially produced for Project.

C.

Window: Includes window frame and sash, unless otherwise indicated by the context.

1.4 A.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified historic treatment specialist to perform preconstruction testing on historic wood windows. 1. 2. 3.

1.5

Select sizes and configurations of existing work to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with requirements. Test historic treatment methods for effectiveness and compliance with specified requirements. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when testing will be performed.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals:

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 1/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.

C.

Shop Drawings: For repair and replacement of historic wood windows and components. Show location and extent of replacement work, with enlarged details of replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing, method of splicing into or attaching to existing wood window, accessory items, and finishes.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Qualification Data: For qualified historic treatment specialist.

F.

Preconstruction Test Reports: For historic treatment of wood windows.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: specialist.

B.

Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Prepare mockups so they are inconspicuous or reversible. 1. 2.

A qualified historic wood window

Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect . Wood Window Repair: Prepare one entire window unit to serve as mockup to demonstrate sample repairs of wood window members including frame, sash, glazing, and hardware.

C.

AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for construction, finishes, grades of wood windows, and other requirements.

D.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

REPLACEMENT WOOD MATERIALS Wood: Clear fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide. 1.

Species: Match species of each existing type of wood product .

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 2/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2 A.

WOOD REPAIR MATERIALS Wood Consolidant: Ready-to-use product designed to penetrate, consolidate, and strengthen soft fibers of wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay and designed specifically to enhance the bond of wood-patching compound to existing wood. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

B.

Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100. Wood Care Systems; ROTFIX.

Wood-Patching Compound: Two-part epoxy-resin wood-patching compound; knifegrade formulation as recommended by manufacturer for type of wood repair indicated, tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be designed for filling voids in damaged wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay. Compound shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood with WoodEpox. Advanced Repair Technology, Inc.; Primatrate with Flex-Tec HV. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 with Flexible Epoxy Patch 200. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; QuickWood. West System Inc.; West System. Wood Care Systems; ROTFIX with SCULPWOOD.

GLAZING MATERIALS

A.

Glass and Glazing Materials: See Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B.

Glazing System: Primer as recommended by glazing material manufacturer, with tape glazing or sealant glazing according to Division 8 Section "Glazing."

2.4

WINDOW HARDWARE

A.

General: Provide complete sets of window hardware consisting of sash balances, hinges, pulls, latches, and accessories indicated for each window or required for proper operation. Window hardware shall smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows and be sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions.

B.

Replacement Window Hardware: hardware with new hardware.

Replace existing damaged or missing window

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 3/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Material and Design: 1. 2. 3.

4.

5. D.

2.5 A.

REPLICATED WOOD WINDOWS Replicated Wood Windows and Window Sash: Custom-fabricated replacement wood windows and trim, with operating and latching hardware; fabricated according to AWI Section 1000 requirements for Custom Grade.

3. 4. 5.

A.

Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action; completely concealed when window is closed. Weather-Stripping Material: Match existing materials and profiles as much as possible unless otherwise indicated.

Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric; complying with AAMA 701/702. 1.

C.

Wood Species: Match wood species of exterior window trim and frame parts . Wood Window Members and Trim: Match profiles and detail of existing window members and trim. Glazing Stops: Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. Exposed Hardware: [Reuse] [Match] existing exposed window hardware. Weather Stripping: Full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each operable sash.

WEATHER STRIPPING

1. B.

Material: Match existing. Design: Custom hardware to replicate existing hardware. Weight and Pulley Sash-Balance: Concealed weight and pulley balance system including steel or cast iron weights, cast-bronze pulleys, synthetic sash cord or sash chain; size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. Spring Sash-Balance: Concealed [tape-spring] [spiral-tube] [spring-loaded, block-and-tackle] type; size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. Replacement Window Hardware: Match existing window hardware.

Window Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for base material and finish requirements indicated.

1. 2.

2.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Weather Seals: Elastomeric preformed seal with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material.

Metal Weather Stripping: Bronze weather stripping as indicated on Drawings; designed either as one piece to seal by sliding into a groove in the sash or as two pieces that interlock with each other; and completely concealed when wood window is closed.

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 4/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Borate Preservative Treatment: Inorganic, borate-based solution, with disodium octaborate tetrahydrate as the primary ingredient; manufactured for preserving weathered and decayed wood from further damage by decay fungi and wood-boring insects; complying with AWPA P5; containing no boric acid.

B.

Cleaning Materials: 1.

2.

Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of solution required. Mildewcide: Provide commercial proprietary mildewcide or a solution prepared by mixing 1/3 cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water.

C.

Adhesives: Wood adhesives for exterior exposure, with minimum 15- to 45-minute cure at 70 deg F, in gunnable and liquid formulations as recommended by adhesive manufacturer for each type of repair.

D.

Fasteners: Fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Use metals that are noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

E.

2.8 A.

Match existing fasteners in material and type of fastener unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed fasteners for interconnecting wood components. Use concealed fasteners for attaching items to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or the existing fastening method. For exposed fasteners, use Phillips-type machine screws of head profile flush with metal surface unless otherwise indicated. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of metal fastened unless otherwise indicated.

Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with requirements in ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (Severe) service condition. WOOD WINDOW FINISHES Factory-Finished Windows: Alkyd finish system consisting of primer and two finish coats on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces. 1.

2.

Finish Coats: Match intermediate coat and topcoat products used for adjacent, repaired wood windows, as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting Restoration." . Color and Gloss: Match colors indicated on Drawings .

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 5/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Protect adjacent materials from damage by historic treatment of wood windows.

B.

Clean existing wood windows of mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint, grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Allow to dry before repairing or painting.

C.

Condition replacement wood members and replacement windows to prevailing conditions at installation areas before installing.

3.2 A.

HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES, GENERAL General: Have historic treatment of wood windows directed and performed by a qualified historic treatment specialist. Ensure that historic treatment specialist's field supervisors are present when historic treatment of wood windows begins and during its progress. In treating historic items, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Apply each product according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. Stabilize and repair wood windows to reestablish structural integrity and weather resistance while maintaining the existing form of each item. Stop the progress of deterioration by removing coatings and applying borate preservative treatment before repair. Repair items in place where possible and retain as much original material as possible. Replace or reproduce historic items where indicated or scheduled. Make historic treatment of materials reversible whenever possible. Install temporary protective measures to protect wood window work that is indicated to be completed later.

B.

Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use only the gentlest mechanical methods, such as scraping and natural-fiber bristle brushing, that will not abrade wood substrate, reducing clarity of detail. Do not use abrasive methods such as sanding, wire brushing, or power tools except as indicated as part of the historic treatment program and as approved by Architect.

C.

Repair and Refinish Existing Hardware: refinish it to match finish samples.

D.

Repair Wood Windows: Match existing materials and features, retaining as much original material as possible to perform repairs.

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

Dismantle window hardware; repair and

08592 - 6/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2. E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Unless otherwise indicated, repair wood windows by consolidating, patching, splicing, or otherwise reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood or with salvaged, sound, original wood. Where indicated, repair wood windows by limited replacement matching existing material.

Replace Wood Window Units: Where indicated, duplicate and replace units with salvaged, sound, original wood or with new wood matching existing wood. Use surviving prototypes to create patterns for duplicate replacements. 1. 2.

Do not use substitute materials unless otherwise indicated. Compatible substitute materials may be used.

F.

Protection of Openings: Where sash or windows are indicated for removal, cover resultant openings with temporary enclosures so that openings are weathertight during repair period.

G.

Identify removed windows, sash, and members with numbering system corresponding to window locations to ensure reinstallation in same location. Key windows, sash, and members to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently stamp units in a location that will be concealed after reinstallation.

3.3

GLAZING

A.

Remove cracked and damaged glass and glazing materials from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

B.

Remove existing glass and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

C.

Remove glass and glazing from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

D.

Reinstall glass with indicated glazing system and according to Division 8 Section "Glazing."

E.

Disposal of Removed Glass: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of it unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 A.

WOOD WINDOW PATCH-TYPE REPAIR General: Patch wood members that are damaged and exhibit depressions, holes, or similar voids, and that have limited rotted or decayed wood. 1.

2. B.

Treat wood members with wood consolidant prior to application of patching compound. Allow treatment to harden before filling void with patching compound. Remove rotted or decayed wood down to sound wood.

Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces either before applying wood consolidant or after removing rotted or decayed wood.

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 7/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Apply wood-patching compound to fill depressions, nicks, cracks, and other voids created by removed or missing wood. 1. 2.

3.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply patching compound in layers as recommended by manufacturer until the void is completely filled. Finish patch surface to match contour of adjacent wood member. Sand patching compound smooth and flush, matching contour of existing wood member.

WOOD WINDOW MEMBER-REPLACEMENT REPAIR General: Replace parts of or entire wood window members at locations scheduled and where damage is too extensive to patch . 1. 2. 3.

4.

Remove sash from windows before performing member-replacement repairs unless otherwise indicated. Remove broken, rotted, and decayed wood down to sound wood. Custom fabricate new wood to replace missing wood; either replace entire wood member or splice new wood part into existing member. Fabricate replacement members according to AWI Section 1000 requirements for Custom Grade. Secure new wood using finger joints or multiple dowels with adhesive and nailing to ensure maximum structural integrity at each splice. Use only concealed fasteners. Fill nail holes and patch surface to match surrounding wood.

B.

Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces after replacements are made.

C.

Repair remaining depressions, holes, or similar voids with patch-type repairs.

D.

Glazing: Reglaze units prior to reinstallation. 1. 2. 3.

Mill new and existing glazed members to accommodate new glass thickness. Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match contour of sash frames.

E.

Reinstall units removed for repair into original openings.

F.

Weather Stripping: Replace nonfunctioning and install missing weather stripping to ensure full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each operable sash.

3.6

WOOD WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT

A.

General: Replace existing wood window and sash units with new custom-fabricated units to match existing at locations scheduled and where damage is too extensive to repair .

B.

Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces before finishing.

C.

Mill glazed members to accommodate glass thickness. Glaze units prior to installation.

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 8/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, trim, and other adjacent construction.

E.

Set sill members in bed of sealant for weathertight construction unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Install window units with new anchors into existing openings.

G.

Weather Stripping: Install full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each operable sash.

H.

Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

I.

Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of them unless otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION 08592

HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS

08592 - 9/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes unfinished wood-framed windows. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

B.

Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1.

Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. b. c.

2.

1.3

Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. Importance Factor: 1.15. Exposure Category: B.

Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

WOOD WINDOWS

08550 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details.

D.

Samples: For each exposed finish.

E.

Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F.

Product test reports.

G.

Maintenance data.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer who is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

C.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

E.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .

1.5 A.

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Failure to meet performance requirements. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. Deterioration of wood, metals, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. Failure of insulating glass.

Warranty Period: a. b.

WOOD WINDOWS

Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

08550 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Unfinished Wood Windows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

2.2 A.

2.3

BiltBest Windows and Patio Doors. Crestline; a brand of Peachtree Companies, Inc. (The); TPC Acquisition, Inc. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company. Hurd Millwork Company. Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc. Marvin Windows and Doors. Norco Premium Collection; JELD-WEN, Inc. Pella Corporation. Pozzi Custom Collection; JELD-WEN, Inc. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.

MATERIALS Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated. WINDOW

A.

Window Types: As indicated on Drawings.

B.

Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: AW 45.

C.

Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide wood windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45 .

D.

Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.

E.

U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less.

Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.50, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.

WOOD WINDOWS

08550 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

GLAZING

A.

Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.

B.

Glass : Clear, insulating-glass units complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing."

C.

Glazing System: weathertight seal.

2.5

Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces

FABRICATION

A.

Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.

B.

Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator.

C.

Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied.

D.

Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.

E.

Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.

2.6 A.

WOOD FINISHES Factory-Primed Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat complying with WDMA T.M. 11 on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B.

Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C.

Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.

WOOD WINDOWS

08550 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

E.

Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

F.

Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

G.

Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

H.

Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION 08550

WOOD WINDOWS

08550 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08450 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Interior manual-swinging all-glass entrance doors. All-glass transoms.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B.

Delegated Design: Design all-glass systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

C.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. 2. 3.

Plans, elevations, and sections. Details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of patch fittings. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.

D.

Samples: For each type of exposed finish indicated.

E.

Other Action Submittals: 1.

Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08450 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For all-glass systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

G.

Product test reports.

H.

Maintenance data.

I.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for all-glass systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

C.

Source Limitations: manufacturer.

D.

Accessible All-Glass Entrance Doors: ICC/ANSI A117.1.

E.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 A.

Obtain all-glass systems from single source from single Comply with applicable provisions in

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. 2. Virginia Glass Products Corporation; a subsidiary of Virginia Mirror Company.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08450 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2 A.

MATERIALS Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1.

Class 1: Clear monolithic. a. b.

2. 3. 4. B.

2.3 A.

Thickness: 1/2 inch . Locations: As indicated .

Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished. Butt Edges: Flat ground. Corner Edges: Lap-joint corners with exposed edges polished.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5. 1. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304. METAL COMPONENTS Fitting Configuration: 1.

Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors and sill on pivot side only .

B.

Patch Fittings:

C.

Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Transoms: Patch fittings at head

Stainless-steel-clad aluminum.

ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A.

General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of patch fittings .

B.

Push-Pull Set: description.

2.5 A.

As selected from manufacturer's full range As indicated Insert

FABRICATION Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1.

Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08450 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

2.6 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible. STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1.

Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.

C.

Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.

D.

Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.

F.

Install joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION 08450

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08450 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08352 - ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.

1.2 A.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. 2.

B.

Power-operated accordion fire door system.

Summary of forces imposed on walls by doors. Fire-Rated Doors: Include description of fire-release system including testing and resetting instructions.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Product certificates.

E.

Operation and maintenance data: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining the doors under this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the product.

F.

Product Test Reports: Submit copy of manufacturer’s actual burn test report clearly detailing the description of product, fire endurance method, test results and test conclusions of actual burn test as conducted and witnessed by UL or WH.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. 2.

Test Pressure: Test at as close to neutral pressure as possible. Provide units with permanently fastened testing agency labels showing temperature-rise ratings.

ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM

08352 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Testing: Provide documentation from a certified testing agency that the fire door operator and self closing governor mechanism has been tested for a minimum of 50,000 cycles and 500 trip tests.

D.

Manufacturer Requirements: Door manufacturer shall have been in the business of and have experience in manufacturing the type of product covered under this specification section as well as giving credible service for a minimum of five (5) years. Provide list of at least ten (10) completed projects which include the products covered under this section.

1.4 A.

WARRANTY Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEMS

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model AC8600-7SD-SS (Stainless Steel) as manufactured by McKeon Door Company or a comparable product.

B.

Fire-Protection Rating: 60 minutes.

C.

General: Each unit shall consist of an interlocking single folding panel curtain suspended from stainless steel head track system. Curtain shall be designed to travel in a horizontal plane, smoothly and without binding. Curtain shall be driven to the open and close position by a positive action sprocket drive chain system designed and built by the door manufacturer. 1. Panels: Shall be fabricated of interlocking 18 gauge stainless steel panels with an approximate cross section not greater than 7" wide.

D.

Leading Edge: Each curtain shall be furnished of a stainless steel member of tubular design to provide stiffness, limit deflection of curtain and provide for a tight fitting closure.

E.

Perimeter Smoke Seals: Provided UL classified perimeter smoke seals and sweeps.

F.

Head Track System: Shall be fabricated of not less than 1/8" thick stainless steel formed shape with removable pan and integral positive action drive chain system. Overall track width shall not be greater than 9”.

ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM

08352 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G.

Counterbalance Unit: The fire door shall be counterbalanced by means of an adjustable steel counterweight system located in the area indicated in the construction drawings.

H.

Electric Motor Operator: Each door shall be provided with a compact power unit designed and built by the door manufacturer. Operators shall be equipped with an adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal governor, spring-set solenoid-operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust, and moisture. Operator is to be NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with the unit. 1. Motor: Shall be totally enclosed, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be ½ hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size which ever is greater. 2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 24 volt control circuit. 3. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction. 4. Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the operators housing. 5. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station.

I.

Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire door shall be designed with a centrifugal governor as an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall be triggered by a smoke detector or fire alarm. When triggered the door is released and begins to close due to the captured counterbalance unit force. The speed of the door shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating speed of the door, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6" per second. The fire door shall self-close under it’s own power, battery back-up systems to achieve self closing are not acceptable.

J.

Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the door shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire door from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed, the fire door shall self-close without the aid of electricity or battery back-up systems. Once power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the fire door shall reset.

K.

Safety Edge: Each fire door shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the closing operation, the door shall stop, reverse and return to the open position.

L.

Easy Trip Test Feature: Each fire door shall be designed so that it may be trip-tested simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the door shall self-close without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the fire door has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the door or the time delay unit.

ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM

08352 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC M.

2.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Finish: 1. After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt. Steel components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer. Stainless steel components shall be of stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish. STEEL FINISHES Stainless Steel Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt. Steel components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer. Stainless steel components shall be of stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work.

B.

Verify dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify Architect in any instance where dimensions vary.

C.

Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of door manufacturer.

B.

Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight and true.

C.

Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation.

D.

Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.

E.

Install fire doors according to NFPA 80 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of door operation indicated and fire-protection rating required. 1.

F.

Interface fire-detection devices with building's fire alarm system.

Drill necessary holes cleanly, with no broken areas or spalls, for installation of fasteners in concrete or masonry. Remove and replace damaged masonry as directed.

ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM

08352 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3 A.

ADJUSTING AND TESTING Operate sliding metal fire doors on completion of installation to ensure satisfactory operation. Check moving parts for proper alignment and lubrication. Make adjustments for smooth, easy operation. 1.

3.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected, fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.

PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A.

Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation until accepted by owner.

B.

Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.

C.

Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and methods.

END OF SECTION 08352

ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM

08352 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08335 - SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes open-curtain self-opening coiling grilles.

B.

Related Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type and size of coiling grille and accessory.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including:

1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E.

Maintenance data.

SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES

08335 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C.

Motor Operator and Self-Opening Governor Mechanisms: Tested by certified testing agency for a minimum of 50,000 cycles and 500 trip tests.

1.5 A.

WARRANTY Grille Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SELF-OPENING COILING SECURITY GRILLES

A.

Basis of Design Manufacturer and Model: Model G1000-G-SS-ST1 as manufactured by McKeon Door Company. Provide basis of design product or equal product that meets specified requirements.

B.

Grille Curtain: ST1 pattern consisting of 5/16" diameter solid galvanized steel rods, encased by 3/8” stainless steel tubular spacers 4-1/2” long. The vertical links are made of 1/16” x 5/8” stainless steel and are set in a staggered pattern. The vertical spacing shall be 9” while the horizontal spacing is 2”.

C.

Bottom Bar: Stainless steel tubular section of not less than 1½” x 3" formed to fit curtain and finished to match grille curtain.

D.

Guides: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a minimum 3" x 3" steel angle or support tube with a 2” x 3” stainless steel inner guide angle and a 3” x 3” stainless steel outer guide angle. Guides shall be shall be finished to match grille curtain.

E.

Mounting Brackets: Hot rolled 3/16” steel plate. Brackets shall be provided to house both ends of the counterbalance assembly.

F.

Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose coiled curtain and counterbalance assembly. Hood shall be fabricated of 22 gauge stainless steel and designed to match brackets. Top and bottom shall be bent and reinforced to provide stiffness.

G.

Counterbalance Assembly: Grille shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting

SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES

08335 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel which shall be fabricated of hot formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe. H.

Electric Motor Operator: Grille shall be provided with a compact power unit designed and built by the grille manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal governor, spring-set solenoid operated brake and a fail safe magnetic release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture. Operator is to be NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with the unit. 1. Motor: Shall be totally, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start, polyphase shall be squirrel cage induction. Horsepower of motor is to be ½ hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size, which ever is greater. 2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt control circuit. 3. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction. 4. Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the operator's housing. 5. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open, close and stop.

I.

Self-Opening Mechanism: The grille shall be designed with a centrifugal governor as an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall be triggered by smoke detector or fire alarm. When triggered the grille is released and begins to fully open due to the captured torsion spring force. The speed of the grille shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating speed of the grille, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6" per second. The grille shall self-open under its own power, battery back-up systems to achieve self-opening and grilles that partially open are not acceptable.

J.

Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the grille shall begin to self-open. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the grille from opening for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed, the grille shall self-open without the aid of electricity or battery back-up systems. Once power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the grille shall reset themselves.

K.

Safety Edge: Each grille shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the closing operation, the grille shall stop, reverse and return to the fully open position.

L.

Easy Trip Test Feature: Each grille shall be designed so that it may be trip-tested simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the grille shall self-open without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the grille has

SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES

08335 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

satisfactorily opened, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the grille or the time delay unit. M.

Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt. 1. Steel components: Two coats of rust inhibitive primer. 2. Stainless steel components: Stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work.

B.

Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any instance where dimensions vary.

C.

Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the grille manufacturer.

B.

Install grille assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight and true.

C.

Adjust grille installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation.

D.

Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.

E.

Test grille opening sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset grille after successful test.

3.3

PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A.

Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation until accepted by owner.

B.

Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.

C.

Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and methods.

SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES

08335 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles.

END OF SECTION 08335

SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES

08335 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings . SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.

E.

Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. 2.

1.4 A.

NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.

COORDINATION Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08311 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

STEEL MATERIALS Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. 2.

ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B.

Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C.

Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1.

Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.

D.

Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.

E.

Manufacturer's standard finish.

2.2 A.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Acudor Products, Inc. Karp Associates, Inc. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type. Latch: Cam latch with interior release. Lock: Mortise cylinder. a.

C.

Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: steel sheet. 1. 2. 3.

Fabricated from

Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08311 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch . Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead. Hinges: Concealed-pin type. Automatic Closer: Spring type. Latch: Self-latching device operated by ring turn with interior release. Lock: Self-latching device with mortise cylinder lock. a.

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "Door Hardware ."

FABRICATION

A.

General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B.

Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

C.

Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

D.

Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1.

For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B.

Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C.

Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces to receive finish material.

3.2

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B.

Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION 08311

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08311 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

08290 – WOOD DOOR REFINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.

1.3

Cleaning door hardware.

DEFINITIONS

A.

Allowances: Quantity allowances for refinishing are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

B.

Unit Prices: Door refinishing to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.4 A.

B.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. LEED Submittals:

1.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.

C.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D.

If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. E.

Samples: 1. 2.

1.5

Submit sample of wood stain and finish for approval of Architect. Prepare a sample refinishing area for review of color and finish.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Restoration Specialist: Engage a firm with at least 5 years experience in hardware cleaning. The firm must submit Qualification Data that it has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B.

Mock-Ups: Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall prepare examples of each type of hardware to be cleaned for the Architect’s approval.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

1.7 A.

1.8 A.

1.9

PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Dispose of all used solutions, finishing products, solvent residue and soiled rags in sealed noncombustible containers to prevent a fire hazard daily. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordinating Work: Coordinate hardware cleaning so that it will not conflict with the work of other trades. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

The intent of refinishing is to restore the color, finish and overall surface uniformity of the historic doors, consistent with the original design intent. A like new appearance is neither expected nor desired.

B.

Splotches, streaks, runs or other inconsistencies caused by improper application of finishing products will not be accepted.

C.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with municipal and Federal regulations governing the refinishing operations, chemical waste disposal and scaffolding.

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.10 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Existing Conditions: Determine that surfaces to which finishes are to be applied are even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects affecting proper application. Correct or report defective surfaces to Contracting Officer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

A.

The Sherwin Williams Company101 Prospect Ave. N.W.Cleveland, OH 216/566-2000

B.

3M CompanyP.O. Box 33053St. Paul, MN 55133-3053612/737-6501 or 800/364-3577

C.

Klean Strip, Inc.Division 38113901/775-0100

D.

Pyrock Chemical Co.Long Island city, NY

2.2

of

W.M.

Barr

Inc.P.O.

Box

44101

13146Memphis,

TN

MATERIALS

A.

Commercial Stripper such as "Kwick Superfast paint and Varnish Remover" (Klean Strip, Inc.), "Rock Miracle" (Pyrock Chemical Co.), or approved equal.

B.

Stain: Penetrating, permanent oil-based stain such as "Oil Stain" (Sherwin Williams), or approved equal, colored to match existing interior and exterior wood.

C.

Varnish: Linseed-tung-oil modified phenolic spar varnish such as "Rexpar" (Sherwin Williams), or approved equal.

D.

Solvent: Mineral spirits, turpentine or denatured alcohol.

E.

Mineral Spirits: A petroleum distillate that is used especially as a paint or varnish thinner.

F.

Other chemical or common names include Benzine* (not Benzene); Naphtha*; Petroleum spirits*; Solvent naphtha*. 1. 2.

Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. Safety Precautions: a. b. c.

G.

AVOID REPEATED OR PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT. Always wear rubber gloves when handling mineral spirits. If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap and water.

Turpentine: Typically used as a solvent and thinner.

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. Safety Precautions: a. b. c.

H.

Potential hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. Denatured alcohol should be a satisfactory substitute for ethyl alcohol for stain removing purposes.

Alternative Solvent: A mixture of 75% toluene, 24% acetone and 1% butyl acetate. 1.

2. J.

Work in a well ventilated area. Observe safety rules as turpentine is flammable, and the fumes can trip an ionization smoke detection system. Store soiled cloths in a metal safety container to guard against spontaneous combustion.

Denatured Alcohol: Other chemical or common names include Methylated spirit. 1. 2.

I.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Toluene (C7H8): A liquid, aromatic hydrocarbon that resembles benzene but is less volatile, flammable and toxic; Is produced commercially from light oils from coke-oven gas and coal tar and from petroleum, and is used as a solvent, in organic synthesis and an antiknock agent for gasoline. Other chemical or common names include Toluol. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE.

Acetone (C3H6O): A volatile fragrant flammable liquid ketone used chiefly as a solvent and in organic synthesis. Other chemical or common names include Dimethyl ketone; Propanone 1.

Potential Hazards: VOLATILE AND FLAMMABLE SOLVENT

K.

Detergent containing trisodium phosphate, such as "Spic n' Span", or approved equal.

L.

Steel Wool: Grade 000 steel wool

M.

Aluminum oxide sandpaper - 220 grit

N.

Silicone carbide paper - 400 grit

O.

Bronze wool

P.

Sandpaper - 80 and 120 grit

Q.

Shellac burn-in sticks

R.

Tack rag

S.

Clean cotton cloths

T.

Soft, natural bristle brushes

U.

Mild soap such as "Ivory Liquid", "Joy", or approved equal.

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC V.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Abrasive pad such as "Scotch-brite" (3M Company), or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

EXAMINATION Verification of Conditions: Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which would interfere or prevent a satisfactory application of materials under this Section. PREPARATION

A.

Surface Preparation: Remove all non-original door louvers, panels and transom panels taking care not to damage the remainder of the door, frame or paneling.

B.

Replace the non-original elements with new wood which matches the species of the original wood and which matches the detailing of the original millwork.

C.

Hardware: Remove existing hardware, door numbers, and other applied elements, and store for reinstallation.

D.

Make minor repairs to doors as required:

E.

Fill holes exceeding 1 inch in diameter with matching dutchmen.

F.

Fill smaller holes with patching compound tinted to match wood.

G.

Protection: 1. Make sure work area is well-ventilated and wear protective clothing and rubber gloves. Do not allow smoking in the work area. 2. Place a fire extinguisher for Class B fires at entrances for emergency use. 3. Change clothes as often as necessary to be effective in cleaning. 4. Daily, dispose of all used solutions, finishing products, solvent residue and soiled rags in sealed noncombustible containers to prevent a fire hazard. 5. Protect all surfaces adjacent to wood being refinished. 6. Maintain a healthy level of air circulation within the space being treated. Regularly employ and maintain exhaust fans or other air moving devices to the satisfaction of the Architect. 7. Curtain off areas being treated from other trades and occupants to prevent fumes from reaching other parts of the building. 8. Wear appropriate safety devices such as respirators fitted with the correct cartridge, gloves, and other protective clothing.

3.3 A.

APPLICATION Strip the existing varnish finish:

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2. 3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the door to remove varnish build-up and smooth out checked surface. Replace soiled steel wool frequently with clean and continue with wiping process until a smooth, even-colored surface is achieved. Use no water on wood surface under any circumstances. Work only one 4' square area at a time. Work area should be within a comfortable arms reach. If solvent affects the stained color of the wood, discontinue use and use an alternative solvent mixture as listed in Section 2.02 Materials.

B.

Allow surface to dry thoroughly; no less than 24 hours -OR- Apply commercial stripper following manufacturer's instructions.

C.

Wash the surface with acetone to remove stripper residue.

D.

Lightly sand the surface with 220 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper as needed to remove carbon soiling and finish damage not removed by solvent application.

E.

Wipe surface with a tack rag to remove traces of bronze wool, sand and dust prior to applying new finishes.

F.

Remove shallow scratches: 1. Lightly sand, in the direction of the grain only to remove shallow scratches, against the grain sanding, and finish damage not removed by stripper application. 2. Remove scratches using 80 grit sandpaper. Finish using 120 grit sandpaper until smooth surface is attained. Smooth surface sufficiently to ensure uniform stain absorption. 3. Wipe surface with a tack rag to remove traces of steel wool, sand, and dust prior to applying new finishes.

G.

Apply the Stain: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Color mix stain to match original finish. Apply stain to bare wood surfaces using a soft cloth or bristle brush. Allow stain to set as required for proper color match and maximum surface uniformity. Wipe off excess stain by rubbing parallel to the grain with a soft dry cloth. Allow surface to dry for at least 24 hours.

H.

Fill deep scratches and gouges with shellac burn sticks tinted to match the wood stain.

I.

Apply the finish coating: 1. 2. 3.

Make sure that surface is clean, level and free of defects. Promptly report to the Architect any unanticipated conditions which may affect the quality of the finish. Brush or spray apply 3 coats of varnish to produce a uniform sheen and appearance. Allow each coat to dry for at least 4 hours.

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

J.

Lightly sand with #400 grit silicone carbon paper or rub with fine steel wool between coats. Vacuum surface and wipe with a dry tack rag to remove all grit and dust prior to applying next finish coat.

K.

After curing, lightly rub surface with fine steel wool to replicate original finish.

L.

Replace glazing as required.

M.

Clean glazing as required: 1. Remove adhesive residues, paint spatters, and other soiling using soft cloths and detergent. 2. Use a mild solvent and Scotch Brite pad or bristle brush to remove stubborn residues. 3. Remove paint splatters with solvent or by scraping gently with a razor blade held at a shallow angle. DO NOT USE TOOLS OR CLEANING PRODUCTS WHICH MAY ETCH THE GLASS.

N.

Reinstall kickplates and other hardware as required.

O.

Remove and repaint louvers to match original as required.

P.

Refinish jambs and frames to match original as required.

3.4

ADJUSTING/CLEANING

A.

Adjust door to assure proper operation. Replace or rehang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely. Replace worn hinge pins with replicates.

B.

Refinish or replace job-finished doors damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION 08290

WOOD DOOR REFINISHING

08290 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.2

Exterior stile and rail wood doors. Interior stile and rail wood doors. Interior fire-rated, stile and rail wood doors. Priming and on-site finishing stile and rail wood doors. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. Prehanging doors in frames.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352.

C.

Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.

D.

Samples: Representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible.

B.

Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites with wet-use adhesives.

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

08212 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

2.2 A.

Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. EXTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Exterior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Types A, D & F: Exterior doors complying with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

A.

Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Door Company. Eggers Industries. Enjo Architectural Millwork. Maiman Company (The). Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.

2. 3.

Grade: Premium. Finish: Opaque.

4.

Door Construction for Opaque Finish: a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered edge- and end-glued lumber. Glass: Uncoated, clear, match existing glass , complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing."

5.

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Types A, C, D and G: Interior doors complying with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Door Company. Eggers Industries. Enjo Architectural Millwork. Maiman Company (The). Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

Grade: Premium. Finish: Transparent. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawed/sliced. Door Construction for Transparent Finish:

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

08212 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6. B.

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing."

Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Type A: Fire-rated (90-minute rating) doors complying with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Door Company. Eggers Industries. Enjo Architectural Millwork. Maiman Company (The). Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.

Grade: Premium. Finish: Transparent . Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawed/cliced. Interior Fire-Rated Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch- thick, edged and veneered mineral-core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch- thick, veneered mineral-core raised panels. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION

A.

Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting.

B.

Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a.

2. 3. C.

Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

08212 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.

E.

Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.

F.

Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction.

G.

Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.

H.

Prehung Doors: Provide stile and rail doors as prehung units including doors, frames, weather stripping, and hardware. 1. 2.

2.5

Provide wood door frames, other than fire-rated wood door frames, that comply with Division 6 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork." Provide hardware, including weather stripping and thresholds, that complies with Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

FINISHING

A.

Finish wood doors on-site to match re-finished doors and woodwork.

B.

Transparent Finish: To be determined by Architect. 1.

Grade: Premium.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1.

Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth.

B.

Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

C.

Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, [WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors,"] [AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,"] [WI's "Manual of Millwork,"] [WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors,"] and other requirements specified. 1.

Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

08212 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1.

Clearances: As shown on Drawings.

2.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

END OF SECTION 08212

STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

08212 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of door indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

C.

1.3

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

B.

Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B .

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A.

Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

B.

WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

D.

Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

E.

Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 A.

VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH Interior Solid-Core Doors ; Type I: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Match existing doors. 3. Cut: Quarter sliced. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6. 7. 8.

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

FABRICATION

A.

Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B.

Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C.

Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B.

Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C.

Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D.

Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E.

Factory-Finished Doors: required at Project site.

Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

END OF SECTION 08211

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08113 – GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. Fire rated door and framing systems for installation as full vision fire rated doors and windows.

B.

Related Sections include the following:

C.

Related Sections: 1. Section “Structural Steel Framing:” Steel attachment members 2. Section “Metal Fabrications:” Steel attachment members inserts and anchors 3. Section “Air Barriers:” Perimeter air, water and vapor seal between the work of this section and adjacent construction 4. Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” Flashing between this work and other work 5. Section “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other fire resistive assemblies. 6. Section “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the work of this section 7. Section “Automatic Door Operators” opener for door to comply with ADA and Local Authority opening force requirements.

1.2

REFERENCES

A.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E2074-00: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. 2. ASTM E2010-01: Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.

B.

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and Materials. 3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.

C.

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 2. UL 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. UL 263: Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.

E.

Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II: Glazing Materials.

1.3 A.

1.4

Safety Standard for Architectural

DEFINITIONS Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass, fabricated glass or framing as defined in referenced glazing publications. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Duration -- Doors: Capable of providing a fire rating for

B.

Fire Rating -- Window Assembly: Capable of providing a fire rating for 60 minutes.

C.

Opening Applications in fire rated partitions or area separation walls and corridors where opening protection is specified to provide 60 minute rating.

D.

Design Requirements: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Construction: Roll formed and profiled steel tubes, factory-welded or complete with mechanical joints for simplified installation or shipped spliced for assembly at the building site or for fitting through available building openings. a. Knock down frames are not permitted.

1.5

60 minutes.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product descriptions and technical data.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 .

C.

Shop Drawings: Show doors, frames, hardware and steel frame components as shown on drawings and schedules. Detail any need for on-site fabrication on shop drawings.

D.

Hardware schedule: list of manufacture supplied hardware and verification of cylinder size complying with Section08710.

E.

Samples for Initial Color Selection: For steel frames with factory-applied powder coat color finishes. 1. Duplicate copies of manufacturer's powder coating color charts showing the full range of colors available.

F.

Samples: For following products: 1. Two 8-inch by 10-inch samples for glass.

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Sample of Stainless Steel frame Verification Sample of selected finish on steel frame piece

G.

Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

H.

Certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. 1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C.

Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain framing system, glazing and glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.

D.

Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.

E.

Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.

F.

Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by Underwriter Laboratory maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.

1.7

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

1.8

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Conduct a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to the work of this section. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer. For details on storage and product handling, please contact Technical Glass Products and request information on storage and product handling.

B.

Deliver materials to specified destination in manufacturer or distributor’s packaging undamaged.

C.

Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.

1.9

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of other sections. 1. Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop drawings.

B.

Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to: other interior components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section.

1.10 A.

WARRANTY Provide limited five year warranty dated from substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS - FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLY AND WINDOW

A.

Glass Material: Pilkington Pyrostop™ fire-rated glazing as fabricated and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail [email protected], web site http://www.fireglass.com.

B.

Frame System for Door: “Heat Barrier Series Frame System” by TGP; fire-rated steel frame system as manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800-426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail [email protected] web site http://www.fireglass.com.

C.

Custom Frame System for Window: Field constructed as indicated on Drawings. 1. Testing Standards: ASTM E-119 and UL263. 2. Fire Rating: 60 Minute.

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D. 2.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Substitutions: Substitutions for Glazing Material and Frame System not permitted. MATERIALS - GLASS

A.

Fire Rated Glazing: ASTM C 1036 and ASTM C 1048.

B.

Composition: Composed of multiple sheets of “Optiwhite” high visible light transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer.

C.

Thickness of Glazing Material: 7/8” Pilkington Pyrostop™ .

D.

Approximate Visible Transmission: percent).

E.

Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL® only), fire rating period, safety glazing standards, and date of manufacture.

F.

Performance: Glass must be rated to stop fire from either direction and must meet all testing requirements including the required hose-stream test (where fire-rating exceeds 20 minutes).

2.3 A.

2.4

Varies with thickness (approximate range 88

MATERIALS – STEEL FRAMES AND DOORS Steel Framing System for 60-minute rated doors. 1. Steel: Profiled steel tubing formed using cold drawn and profiled steel tubing. 2. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer 3. Glazing Accessories: calcium silicate setting blocks. 4. Glazing Compounds: a. Pilkington Pyrostop™: Approved, pure silicone sealant. FABRICATION

A.

Furnish frame assemblies pre-welded. 1. When necessary, splice frames too large for shop fabrication or shipping or to fit in available building openings. 2. Fit with suitable fasteners. 3. Knock-down frames are not permitted

B.

Field glaze door and frame assemblies.

C.

Factory prepares steel door assemblies for field mounting of hardware when necessary.

D.

Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to field dimensions.

E.

Obtain approved shop drawings prior to fabrication.

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FINISHES, GENERAL

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Finish frames after assembly.

C.

Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

D.

Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

2.6

DOOR HARDWARE

A.

Furnish hardware with 60 minute fire door by the manufacturer.

B.

Select hardware from door manufacturer's standard recommended and approved hardware groups as specified in Division 8 Section – Door Hardware.

C.

Provide high traffic areas or areas requiring a door motion force of greater than 20 pounds with power assisted hardware for use with manufacturer’s frame system.

D.

Operating hardware for Fireframes® Heat Barrierr Series Single Outswing Doors with Exit Device. Each to have the following. Item

Description

Manufacturer

3

Hanging Devices

Weld on Pivots

1 1

Exit Device Lever Trim

F5300 Rim Rectangular lever handles

1

Cylinder

1

Closing Devices

1 1

Auto door Bottom Weather Seal

ANSI Mortise Schlage C Keyway TS 93 Surface Applied Closer 420APKL Smoke Seal Perimeter Gasket

Technical Glass Products Dorma Technical Glass Products Technical Glass Products Dorma Pemko Technical Glass Products

Finish * PTM 630 630 626 689 MA

Balance of hardware by others * FINISH LEGEND: PTM Painted to match frame MA Mill Finish Aluminum 689 Aluminum Paint 630 Satin Stainless Steel 626 Satin Chrome Plated

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.7 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ACCESSORY MATERIALS Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine substrates and members to which the work of this section attaches or adjoins prior to frame installation.

B.

Provide openings plumb, square and within allowable tolerances. 1. Provide 3/8 inch shim space at all walls

C.

Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall and door system.

D.

Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

Install fire window and door by a specialty contractor with appropriate experience qualifications; and in strict accordance with the reviewed shop drawings.

B.

Install fire safing / fire stopping at edges of system.

C.

Install glazing in strict accordance with fire resistant glazing material manufacturer’s specifications. 1. Field cutting or tampering is not permissible.

D.

Do not install damaged frames or chipped glassing units.

E.

Install plumb and true. Limit out of plumb or true to 1/8 inch in 10’-0” in any dimension.

3.3

REPAIR AND TOUCH UP

A.

Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended products. 1. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view.

B.

Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.

3.4 A.

ADJUSTING Adjust door function and hardware for smooth operation. Coordinate with other hardware suppliers for function and use of any other attached hardware.

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A.

Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent. 2. Do not use any of the following: a. Steam jets b. Abrasives c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones, alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface

B.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C.

Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 08113

GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM

08113 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 08110 - STEEL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

1.2

Standard hollow metal frames.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

D.

Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

F.

Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

STEEL FRAMES

08110 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Pioneer Industries, Inc. MATERIALS

A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B.

Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.

C.

Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D.

Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.

For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E.

Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F.

Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

H.

Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing."

I.

Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.3

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A.

General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B.

Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. 2. 3.

Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

STEEL FRAMES

08110 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. C.

4. 5. 6.

2.4 A.

FRAME ANCHORS Jamb Anchors:

2. 3. 4.

Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. 2.

2.5

Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

1.

B.

Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. 2. 3.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A.

Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as frames.

STEEL FRAMES

08110 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

2.6 A. 2.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a [45] [90]-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. ACCESSORIES Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. FABRICATION

A.

Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B.

Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.

Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b.

Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

c.

STEEL FRAMES

Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.

08110 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC d. 6.

3.

4.

2. 3. 4. 5.

A.

Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

STEEL FINISHES Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1.

B.

Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 electrical Sections.

Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1.

2.8

Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. 2.

D.

Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. b.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

Factory-Applied Paint Finish: ANSI/SDI A250.3. 1.

Color and Gloss:

STEEL FRAMES

As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

08110 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1.

Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b.

c. d. e. f. g. 2.

Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a.

3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

STEEL FRAMES

08110 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 9.

Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. b. c. d.

B.

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B.

Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C.

Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 08110

STEEL FRAMES

08110 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.2

Silicone joint sealants. Latex joint sealants. Preformed joint sealants. Acoustical joint sealants.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

C.

Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

D.

Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. Joint-sealant formulation. Joint-sealant color.

E.

Product test reports.

F.

Warranties.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

WARRANTY Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS, GENERAL VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3.

B.

Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1.

Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D.

Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2.2 A.

SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant : ASTM C 920. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. c. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation.

JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC e. f. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 A.

A.

Type: [Single component (S)] [or] [multicomponent (M)]. Grade: [Pourable (P)] [or] [nonsag (NS)]. Class: [100/50] [50] [25]. Uses Related to Exposure: [Traffic (T)] [Nontraffic (NT)].

Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. May National Associates, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated.

PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.5 A.

Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. Tremco Incorporated.

LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

1.

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. Sandell Manufacturing Co. Schul International, Inc. Willseal USA, LLC.

ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Pecora Corporation. USG Corporation.

JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.7

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B.

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.

B.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. INSTALLATION

A.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

C.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Acoustical Sealant Installation: written recommendations.

G.

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

JOINT SEALANTS

Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's

07920 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3 A.

JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. B.

C.

D.

E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Control and expansion joints in brick pavers. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. Joints between different materials listed above.

Joint Sealant: Silicone. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. Joints in dimension stone cladding.

2. 3.

Joint Sealant: Silicone. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.

2. 3.

Joint Sealant: Silicone. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and stone. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances.

2. 3.

Joint Sealant: Latex. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Joint Sealant Location: a. b. c.

2. 3. F.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. Other joints as indicated.

Joint Sealant: Silicone. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Location: a.

2. 3.

Acoustical joints where indicated.

Joint Sealant: Acoustical. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

END OF SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1.

C.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.

Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

D.

Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

E.

Product test reports.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

07841 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

2.2

A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. Grace Construction Products. Hilti, Inc. Johns Manville. Nelson Firestop Products. NUCO Inc. Passive Fire Protection Partners. RectorSeal Corporation. Specified Technologies Inc. 3M Fire Protection Products. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. USG Corporation.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A.

Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B.

Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1.

C.

Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. 2.

D.

F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: determined per UL 1479.

Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

07841 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E.

Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F.

VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3.

G.

Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C.

Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1.

D.

After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. 2. 3.

Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

07841 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2 A.

IDENTIFICATION Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." Contractor's name, address, and phone number. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Date of installation. Manufacturer's name. Installer's name.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B.

Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C.

Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.4

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A.

Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B.

Firestopping with No Penetrating Items[ FS-<#>]: 1.

C.

Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]: 1.

D.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- and W-L- 2000 Series.

Firestopping for Electrical Cables[ FS-<#>]: 1.

F.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 1000 and 1001 Series.

Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]: 1.

E.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 000 Series.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- and W-L- 3000 Series.

Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables[ FS-<#>]:

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

07841 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. G.

W-L- 5000 Series.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 6000 Series.

Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]: 1.

J.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-A-

Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]: 1.

I.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- and W-J- 4000 Series.

Firestopping for Insulated Pipes[ FS-<#>]: 1.

H.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 7000 Series.

Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants[ FS-<#>]: 1.

UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 8000 Series.

END OF SECTION 07841

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

07841 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes SFRMs applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction and fire-resistance rating, applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and minimum thicknesses.

C.

Product certificates and test reports.

D.

Compatibility and adhesion test reports.

E.

Research/evaluation reports.

F.

Field quality-control test reports.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by SFRM manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B.

SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1.

2.

3.

SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fireresistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. C.

Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1.

2. D.

Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide products identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

2.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

E.

Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."

F.

Mockups: Apply mockups to [verify selections made under sample submittals] [and to set quality standards for materials and execution]. 1. 2.

G. 1.4

Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product indicated. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B.

Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly.

C.

Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

1.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fireresistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications.

WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.

Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

CONCEALED SFRM Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Concealed Cementitious SFRM: a. b. c. d.

2.

Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco Blaze-Shield II.

Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, or either of the following: 1.

2.

C.

Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6 . Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300. Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; Type 5.

Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: a.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied product.

Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1.

2.

Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per ASTM E 605: a.

b.

c.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft..

Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft.. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 7. 8.

9.

Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surfaceburning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. b.

10. 2.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less . Smoke-Developed Index: 0 .

Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B.

Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1.

2.

Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM.

D.

Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.

E.

Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of SFRM.

F.

Sealer for Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Transparent-drying, waterdispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material.

G.

Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM.

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireresistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B.

Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.

C.

Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed.

D.

Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E.

Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during application.

F.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

G.

Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.

H.

Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath and fabric to substrate.

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

I.

Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated.

J.

Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.

K.

Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.

L.

Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over which they are applied.

M.

Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.

N.

Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating and where indicated.

O.

Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.

P.

Apply sealer to concealed SFRM where indicated.

Q.

Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM where indicated.

R.

Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

S.

Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.

3.2 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and prepare reports: 1.

B.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.

C.

SFRM.

Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements.

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fireresistance design. 1.

2.

3.

4.

Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a.

b.

5.

Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.

If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.

D.

Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.

E.

Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION 07811

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07811 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.

C.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.

D.

Maintenance data.

E.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

B.

Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including built-in gutter fascia fascia trim, approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D. 1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. WARRANTY Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SHEET METALS

A.

General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B.

Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper. 1. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill.

2.2 A. 2.3

UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or Series 300 stainless steel.

C.

Solder: 1. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.

D.

Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E.

2.4 A.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. REGLETS Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Copper, 16 oz./sq. ft. . 2. Finish: Mill . FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B.

Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

C.

Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

D.

Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E.

Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

F.

Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.]

G.

Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.]

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.6 A.

ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated. 1. Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen . 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a.

B.

2.7

Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Hanger Style: Banded. 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. . STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.

Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

B.

Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

C.

Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

D.

Eave, Rake, Ridge, and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

2.8 A.

WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 1 inch beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B.

Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C.

Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D.

Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws metal decking

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance . E.

Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

F.

Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.

G.

Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.3

ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B.

Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment. 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

C.

Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

D.

Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch below gutter discharge.

E.

Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.

3.4 A.

ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.

C.

Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers.

D.

Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

E.

Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant.

F.

Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5

WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B.

Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies ."

C.

Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in [Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies].

D.

Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 1 inch beyond wall openings.

3.6

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B.

Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

END OF SECTION 07620

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07315 - SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Slate shingles. Underlayment.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: 1. 2.

C. 1.3 A.

1.4 A.

Slate Shingle: Full size, of each color, size, texture, and shape. Ridge Cap : 12 inches long.

Sample warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain each color of slate shingle from single quarry capable of producing slate of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace slate roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period:

10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

SLATE SHINGLES Slate Shingles: ASTM C 406, Grade S1; heavy texture roofing slate; hard, dense, and sound; chamfered edges, with nail holes machine punched or drilled and countersunk. No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof. 1. Basis of Design: Black Diamond Slate; “Dover Black.”

SLATE SHINGLES

07315 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.

2.2

Thickness: Nominal 1/4 to 3/8 inch . Surface Texture: Rough. Size: 20 inches long by 12 inches wide. Nail Holes: Minimum of Two per shingle. Butt Shape: Standard square cut. Color: Black,. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Unfading.

Starter Slate: Slate shingles with chamfered nail holes front-side punched. 1.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Length: Exposure of slate shingle plus head lap.

Ridge Slate: Slate shingles fabricated with vertical grain orientation. UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A.

Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated.

B.

Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBSmodified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.

2.3

ACCESSORIES

A.

Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B.

Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in slate-shingle roofing and remain watertight.

C.

Slating Nails: ASTM F 1667, copper, smooth shanked, wire nails; 0.135-inch minimum thickness; sharp pointed; with 3/8-inch- minimum diameter flat head; of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch into sheathing. 1.

D.

2.4 A.

Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.

Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section " Miscellaneous Carpentry." METAL FLASHING AND TRIM General: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.

Sheet Metal: Copper.

SLATE SHINGLES

07315 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1.

B.

Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment.

Double-Layer Felt Underlayment, where required: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses 19 inches in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1.

2.

Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Terminate felt underlayment extended up not less than 4 inches against sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projections.

C.

Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

D.

Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch- wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches. Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt underlayment nails. 1.

3.2 A.

Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches.

METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.

Install metal flashings according to recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

SLATE SHINGLES

07315 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3 A.

SLATE-SHINGLE INSTALLATION General: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to written instructions of manufacturer and details and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 1. 2.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Install wood nailer strip cant at eave edges. Install shingle starter course chamfered face down.

Install first and succeeding shingle courses with chamfered face up. Install full-width first course at rake edge. 1.

Offset joints of uniform-width slate shingles by half the shingle width in succeeding courses.

C.

Maintain a 4-inch- minimum head lap between succeeding shingle courses.

D.

Maintain uniform exposure of shingle courses [between eaves and ridge] [midway between eaves and ridge and increase head lap of succeeding shingle courses to ensure uniform exposure on remaining shingle courses].

E.

Extend shingle starter course and first course 2 inches over fasciae at eaves.

F.

Extend shingle starter course and succeeding courses 1 inch over fasciae at rakes.

G.

Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof.

H.

Hang slate with two slating nails for each shingle with nail heads lightly touching slate. Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shingle above.

I.

Ridges: Install ridge slate in saddle configuration. 1.

2. J.

Hips: Install and anchor slate hips in saddle configuration. 1.

2. 3. K.

Install and anchor wood nailer strips of thicknesses to match abutting courses of slate shingles, terminating nailer strip 3 to 4 inches from the eave. Cover with felt underlayment strip, extending to underlying slate but concealed by ridge slate. Anchor ridge slate to supporting wood nailer strip with two nails for each slate shingle without nails penetrating underlying slate.

Install and anchor wood nailer strips of thickness to match abutting courses of slate shingles. Cover nailer strip with felt underlayment strip, extending on to underlying slate but concealed by hip slate. Anchor hip slate to nailer strip with two nails located in upper third of hip-slate length. Notch starter shingle and first shingle course at hip to fit around nailer strips so no wood is exposed at ridge eave. Lay hip slate in bed of asphalt roofing cement or butyl sealant.

Remove and replace damaged or broken slate shingles.

SLATE SHINGLES

07315 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 07315

SLATE SHINGLES

07315 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07271 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

1.3

SUMMARY This Section includes self-adhering, vapor-retarding, modified bituminous sheet air barriers. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 1.

Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.

C.

Product certificates.

D.

Qualification data.

E.

Product test reports.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.

Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assembly , 150 sq. ft. , incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS

07271 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIER Modified Bituminous Sheet: 40-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

3.

Physical and Performance Properties: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2.2 A.

Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier. Henry Company; Blueskin SA. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Air-Shield. NEI; AC AirSeal. Rubber Polymer Corporation; Rub-R-Wall SA. Tremco, Incorporated; ExoAir 110.

Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F ; ASTM D 1970. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms ; ASTM E 96, Water Method.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS

07271 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material.

C.

Butyl Strip: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil- thick, self adhering; polyethylene-filmreinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive, with release liner backing.

D.

Modified Bituminous Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, selfadhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

E.

Termination Mastic: Cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.

F.

Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

G.

Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft. density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

H.

Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

I.

Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with galvanized steel termination bars and fasteners.

J.

Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a singlecomponent, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

K.

Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

B.

Install modified bituminous sheets according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135. 1.

When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, modified bituminous air barrier sheets produced for low-

SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS

07271 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. C.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1.

D.

Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

Apply and firmly adhere modified bituminous sheets horizontally over area to receive air barrier sheets. Accurately align sheets and maintain a uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation. 1. 2.

Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water without interception by any exposed sheet edges. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.

E.

Apply continuous modified bituminous sheets over modified bituminous strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

F.

Install air barrier sheets and auxiliary materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.

G.

Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings using accessory materials .

H.

Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply elastomeric flashing sheet so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

I.

Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

J.

Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

K.

Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

L.

Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS

07271 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements.

C.

Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency as follows: 1.

D. 3.3 A.

Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization .

Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above. PROTECTION Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days.

END OF SECTION 07271

SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS

07271 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 2. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 3. Loose-fill insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C.

Product test reports.

D.

Research/evaluation reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Building Products, Inc. Johns Manville. Knauf Insulation. Owens Corning.

Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

BUILDING INSULATION

07210 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2 A.

MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Fibrex Insulations Inc. Owens Corning. Roxul Inc. Thermafiber.

Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. LOOSE-FILL INSULATION

A.

Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flameresistance, processing, and handling characteristics.

B.

Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

2.4

VAPOR RETARDERS

A.

Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

ASTM D 4397,

10 mils thick, with maximum

B.

Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vaporretarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B.

Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C.

Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

BUILDING INSULATION

07210 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A.

Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B.

Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. b.

C.

Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1.

D.

Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction . Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity .

For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."

Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1.

Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

BUILDING INSULATION

07210 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A.

Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B.

Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1. 2.

3.

Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vaporretarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

C.

Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

D.

Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

END OF SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

07210 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07162 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY Section includes crystalline waterproofing for negative-side application to concrete. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Product certificates.

C.

Product test reports.

D.

LEED Submittals: 1. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

E.

Field quality-control reports.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying crystalline waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed only after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.

B.

Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at 40 deg F or above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and kept free of water.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

07162 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

WATERPROOFING MATERIALS Crystalline Waterproofing: Prepackaged, gray -colored proprietary blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and applied, penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts chemically with the byproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within substrate capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof substrate; that has VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction; with properties meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.

2. 3.

2.2

American PERMAQUIK Inc.; Super 200. AQUAFIN, Inc.; AQUAFIN-1C. IPA Systems, Inc.; Drycon. Vandex USA LLC; Vandex Super/Super White.

Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 30 feet when tested according to CE CRD-C 48. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A.

Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

D.

Sand: ASTM C 144.

E.

Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture designed to improve adhesion to prepared substrates and not to create a vapor barrier.

F.

Water: Potable.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

07162 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MIXES

A.

Crystalline Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to water according to manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand to required consistency.

B.

Protective Topping: Measure, batch, and mix portland cement and sand in the proportion of 1:3 and water. Blend together with mechanical mixer to required consistency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.

B.

Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or annular spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.

C.

Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

D.

Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces.

3.2 A.

APPLICATION General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application and curing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application and maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water. Apply waterproofing to surfaces indicated on Drawings. Number of Coats: Number required for specified water permeability . Application Method: Brush . Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is in full contact with substrate or previous coat. Dampen surface between coats.

B.

Final Coat Finish: Brushed .

C.

Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three days immediately after final coat has set, followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by manufacturer.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

07162 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows: 1. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pits, sumps and similar offsets and features.

E.

Protective Topping: Apply 1-inch- thick, protective topping over floor surfaces.

3.3 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspection: Engage manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application and provide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 07162

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

07162 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07140 – COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete placement, curing, and finishing. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for joint sealant materials and installation.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.4

Surface preparation and substrate treatment. Waterproofing membrane. Auxiliary materials. Protection course. Drainage panels.

General: Provide a waterproofing system that prevents the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and complies with physical requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of manufacturer’s current waterproofing formulations and system design.

SUBMITTALS A.

Submit Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including manufacturer’s printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating the substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. B. Project Data - Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing, including details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing, penetrations, and other termination conditions. C. Samples – Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 1. 2. 3.

Waterproof membrane material. Protection Course Material. Prefabricated Drainage Mat.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 1/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Geo-textile and detailing sheet as required.

D. Installer Certificates – Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the “Quality Assurance” Article. 1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing and approved by waterproofing manufacturer EPRO Services, Inc. for the installation of the SYSTEM III Plus Waterproofing System.

B.

Manufacturer Qualification: Obtain waterproofing materials and system components from a single manufacturer EPRO Services, Inc.

C. Field Sample: Apply waterproofing system field sample to 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m.) of deck or wall to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship. 1. 2. 3.

Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when field sample will be prepared. If Architect determines that field sample, does not meet requirements; reapply waterproofing until field sample is approved. Retain and maintain approved field sample during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed waterproofing. An undamaged field sample may become part of the completed Work.

D. Pre-installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to application of the waterproofing system to assure proper substrate and installation conditions, to include contractor, applicator, architect/engineer and special inspector (if any). E.

1.6

Installation inspections by manufacturer representative or other qualified independent third party may be required.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver materials to Project site as specified by manufacturer labeled with manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B.

Store materials as specified by the waterproofing manufacturer in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 2/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Protect all adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to other finish surfaces.

B.

Perform work only when existing and forecast weather conditions are within manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and application method used.

C. A minimum over excavations of 24 inches is required for spray application of product. For areas with less than 24-inch clearance, the product may be applied by hand using ECOLINE-R. D. Ambient temperature shall be within manufacturer’s specifications. (Greater than 19ºF/-7ºC.)

1.8

E.

All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing through the waterproof membrane shall be positively secured in their proper positions and appropriately protected prior to membrane application.

F.

Waterproof membrane shall be installed before placement of reinforcing steel. When not possible, all exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General Contractor prior to membrane application.

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width. 1. Standard Warranty Period: 5-years after date of Substantial Completion or as specified in terms agreed upon by manufacturer and applicator.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.

SYSTEM III Plus; EPRO Services, Inc., Wichita, KS, 800-882-1896 1. Spray-Applied ECOLINE-S or roller-applied ECOLINE-R. 2. Protection ECOSHIELD-E10. 3. Drainage mat ECODRAIN-E or ECODRAIN-S6000.

2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 3/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Fluid applied waterproofing system – ECOLINE-S; a single course, high build, polymer modified, asphalt emulsion. Waterborne and spray applied at ambient temperatures. Applied to a thickness of 60 dry mils, unless specified otherwise. Non-toxic and odorless. ECOLINE-R has similar properties with greater viscosity and is roller or brush applied. Manufactured by EPRO Services, Inc.

B.

Fluid applied waterproofing physical properties. ECOLINE-S TYPICAL PROPERTIES (MEMBRANE ONLY) TYPICAL UNCURED PROPERTIES Specific Gravity Viscosity PH Flammability Color Non-Toxic Shelf Life TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES Initial Cure Final Cure * Tensile Strength Elongation Resistance To Decay Accelerated Aging Moisture Vapor Transmission Hydrostatic Water Pressure Perm Rating (US PERMS) Methane Transmission Rate Adhesion To Concrete & Masonry

ASTM D 244 ASTM D 1200 ASTM D 3143

ASTM 412 ASTM 412 ASTM E 154 Section 13 ASTM G 23 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 751 ASTM E 96 (US Persm) ASTM D 1434 ASTM C 836 & ASTM C 704

Hardness Crack Bridging Low Temp. Flexibility Resistance To Acids: Acetic Sulfuric and Hydrochloric *See curings, protection and cleaning sections for further explanation.

ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836-00

1 > 25 centipoise 12.3 500° F Brown to Black No Solvents 6 months

32 psi 4140% 4% Perm Loss No Effect 0.026 g/sq. ft. /hr. 26 psi 0.21 0 11 lbf./inch 80 No Cracking No Cracking @ -20° C 30% 13%

ECOLINE-R – TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 4/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC TYPICAL UNCURED PROPERTIES Specific Gravity ASTM D 244 Viscosity ASTM D 1200 PH Flammability ASTM D 3143 Color Non-Toxic Shelf Life TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES Initial Cure Final Cure* ASTM 412 Tensile Strength Elongation ASTM 412 Resistance to Decay ASTM E 154 Section 13 Accelerated Aging Moisture Vapor Transmission Hydrostatic Water Pressure Perm rating (US Perms) Methane transmission rate Adhesion to Concrete & Masonry Hardness Crack Bridging Low Temp. Flexibility

ASTM G 23 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 751 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 1434 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836-00

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 1.034 9m-13m centipoise 11.5 270° F Brown to Black No Solvents 6 months 10 minutes 24 -48 hours 32 psi 3860% 9% Perm Loss

No Effect .026 g/sq. ft. /hr. 28 psi 0.17 0 7 lbf./inch 85 No Cracking No Cracking at –20ºC

Resistance to Acids: Acetic Sulfuric and Hydrochloric *See curings, protection and cleaning sections for further explanation.

30% 13%

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

Sheet Flashing: 60-mil reinforced modified asphalt sheet good with double-sided adhesive.

B.

Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer’s polyester fabric.

C. Joint Detailing Sealant Mastic. 1. Ecoline-T, a high viscosity polymer modified water-based asphalt material. 2. Single component urethane sealants, as approved by manufacturer. 3. Back Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam. D.

Eprostop HDPL waterstop.

2.4 PROTECTION COURSE A.

ECOSHIELD-E physical properties.

Ecoshield-E Properties 8-mil

Puncture Resistance Tensile Strength Tear Resistance Low Temperature Impact Water Vapor Trans. Rate Perm Rating Chemical or Environmental Resistance Methane Gas Modified

ASTM D 1709 ASTM E 154 ASTM D 4533 ASTM D 1790 ASTM E 96 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 1434

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

10-mil 15-mil 876 g 1593 g. 1898 g. 24.59 lbs. MD 34.6 lbs. MD 39.7 lbs. MD 3.48 lbs. 5.98 lbs. 8.74 lbs. Resistant to -105°C Resistant to -105 C Resistant to -105 C .00711 g/ft/hr .00621 g./ft./hr. .00585 g./ft./hr. 0.0143 0.0133 0.0123 Excellent Excellent Excellent 0 0 0

07140 - 5/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL A.

For vertical structures of 20 feet or less. 1. ECODRAIN-E, a HDPE composite drainage panel, 3-diminsional, nonbiodegradable with a permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core. 2.

B.

ECODRAIN-E Specification Table. Ecodrain-E Properties CORE Color Weight Compressive Strength Thickness

ASTM D 3776 ASTM D 1621 ASTM D 1777

HDPE Brown 1.90 oz/ft² 5,200 lbs/ft² 0.31 in.

Filter Fabric (Polypropylene) Grab Tensile Strength Elongation Trapexoidal Tear Puncture Strength Apparent Operating Size Mullen Burst Permittivity Water Flow Rate Weight Typical UV Resistance

ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4533 ASTM D 4833 ASTM D 4751 ASTM D 3786 ASTM D 4491 ASTM D 4491 ASTM D 5261 ASTM D 4355

130 lbs. 60% 60 lbs. 40 lbs. 70 sieve size 140 psi 0.7 sec. 55 gpm/ft² 4.0 oz/yd² 70% (500 hrs.)

Composite System Water Flow Rate (V) Water Flow Rate (H) Roll Size Roll Weight

ASTM D 4716 ASTM D 4716 ASTM D 4716 ASTM D 4716

5.1 gal/min/ft 6.0 ft x 65.5 ft, 8.0 ft x 65.5 ft 60 lbs, 73 lbs

For vertical structures of over 20 feet. 1. 2.

ECODRAIN-S6000, a polystyrene composite drainage panel, 3-diminsional, non-biodegradable with a permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core. ECODRAIN-S6000 Specification Table. ECODRAIN-S6000 Physical Properties Core Color ASTM D 3776 Weight Compressive Strength ASTM D 1621 Thickness ASTM 1777 FILTER FABRIC ASTM D 4632 Grab Tensile Strength Elongation ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4533 Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D 4833 Punchture Strength ASTM D 4751 Apparent Operating Size ASTM D 4751 Mullen Burst ASTM D 4491 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 Water Flow Rate ASTM D 5261 Weight Typical ASTM D 4355 UV Resistance COMPOSITE SYSTEM ASTM D 4716 Water Flow Rate (V) ASTM D 4716 Water Flow Rate (H) ASTM D 4716 Roll Size ASTM D 4716 Roll Weight

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

Polypropylene Black 2.85 oz/ft² 17,000 psf 0.40 in. 160 lbs. 50% 65 lbs. 90 lbs. 80 sieve size 315 psi 1.6 sec 110 gpm/ft² 6.0 oz/yd° 70% (500 hrs.) 17 gal/min/ft 2.8 gal/min/ft. 6.0 ft. x 50 ft. 65 lbs.

07140 - 6/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

*Note: These depths are approximate guidelines and appropriate drainage panel determination may require consultation with soils engineer to determine soil type, soil compaction and seismic activity. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A.

Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

B.

Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over spray affecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. E.

Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with ECOLINE-T, hydraulic cement, or rapidset grout.

3.3 PREPARATIONS AND TREATMENT AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A.

Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations, at penetrations through waterproofing material, and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer’s recommendations.

B.

Apply two coats ECOLINE-R (30-mil wet) and embed polyester reinforcing strip in preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded polyester reinforcing strip ensuring its complete saturation and covering. 1. 2.

Terminations should be treated 3-inches up vertical and 3-inches on horizontal. Penetrations should be treated in a 3-inch radius around penetration and 3 inches onto penetrating object.

3.4 PREPARATIONS AND TREATMENT OF JOINTS AND CRACKS A.

Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 7/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Vertical - Apply two coats of ECOLINE-R (30-mil wet) waterproofing, 3-inches on each side of joint and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring to complete saturation and covering.

3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A.

Set up spray equipment according to manufacturer’s instructions.

B.

Mix materials according to manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative or approved 3rd party inspector. D. Apply waterproofing, according to manufacturer’s recommendations, by spray (ECOLINE-S) or roller (ECOLINE-R). E.

Apply one spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three roller coats of ECOLINE-R waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm).

F.

Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and details.

G. Verify film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m). 3.6 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION A.

Install ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course with minimum 6” overlapped seams over nominally cured membrane no later than recommended by manufacturer and before starting subsequent construction operations.

B.

Secure ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course seams with ECOTAPE and attach with adhesive strips, shot pins or as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A.

Place and secure drainage panels to substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Use adhesives, adhesive strips and/or termination bars fastened with shot pins or as recommended by manufacturer. Overlap edges of dimpled core and ends of geo-textile a minimum of 6” to maintain continuity. Protect installed panels during subsequent construction.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Membrane may be checked for coverage with a lightly oiled, needle nose depth gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area, every 500 square feet. Record the minimum reading. Mark the test area for repair.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 8/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Test areas are to be patched over with ECOLINE-S or R to a 60-mil minimum dry thickness, extending a minimum of one inch (1”) beyond the test perimeter.

3.9 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A.

Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer’s recommendations. It should be noted normal curing time is 24 to 48 hours to achieve a permanent water barrier. However, in some conditions such as a saturated substrate, extremely cold conditions and/or high humidity, the full adhesion of the membrane may be delayed. The length of delay may be subject the membrane thickness and severity of conditions.

B.

Take care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07140

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS)

07140 - 9/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing, fabric reinforced. 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 3. Insulation. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.

D.

Special warranties.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.

B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.

1.4 A.

Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

07131 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1.

Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C.

Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

D.

Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity.

E.

Substrate Patching Membrane: coating.

F.

Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.

G.

Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

H.

Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

2.2

Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified

MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A.

Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage."

B.

Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft..

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

07131 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INSULATION

A.

Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square edged. 1. Type VII, 60-psi minimum compressive strength.

B.

Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi or Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.

C.

Geotextile-Faced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

SURFACE PREPARATION

A.

Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B.

Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C.

Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D.

Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E.

Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

F.

Bridge and cover isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips. 1.

Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.

G.

Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

H.

Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

07131 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

APPLICATION

A.

Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C.

Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

D.

Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point of decks to ensure that side laps shed water.

E.

Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

F.

Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic.

G.

Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.

H.

Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

I.

Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.

J.

Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.3 A.

MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1.

3.4 A.

For vertical applications, install board insulation panels.

before installing drainage

INSULATION INSTALLATION Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

07131 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

3.5

PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A.

Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B.

Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C.

Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

D.

Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 07131

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

07131 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 07123 – COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete placement, curing, and finishing Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for joint sealant materials and installation.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.4

Surface preparation and substrate treatment. Waterproofing membrane. Sheet flashing and accessories. Protection course.

General: Provide a waterproofing system that prevents the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and complies with physical requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of manufacturer’s current waterproofing formulations and system design.

SUBMITTALS A.

Submit Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including manufacturer’s printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating the substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties.

B.

Project Data - Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing, including details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing, penetrations, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples – Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 1. 2. 3.

Waterproof membrane material. Protection Course Material. Geo-textile and detailing sheet as required.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Installer Certificates – Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the “Quality Assurance” Article. 1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing and approved by waterproofing manufacturer EPRO Services, L. C. for the installation of the SYSTEM III Plus Waterproofing System.

B.

Manufacturer Qualification: Obtain waterproofing materials and system components from a single manufacturer EPRO Services, L. C.

C. Field Sample: Apply waterproofing system field sample to 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m.) of deck or wall to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship. 1. 2. 3.

Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when field sample will be prepared. If Architect determines that field sample, does not meet requirements; reapply waterproofing until field sample is approved. Retain and maintain approved field sample during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed waterproofing. An undamaged field sample may become part of the completed Work.

D. Pre-installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to application of the waterproofing system to assure proper substrate and installation conditions, to include contractor, applicator, architect/engineer and special inspector (if any). 1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver materials to Project site as specified by manufacturer labeled with manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B.

Store materials as specified by the waterproofing manufacturer in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Protect all adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to other finish surfaces.

B.

Perform work only when existing and for-cast weather conditions are within manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and application method used.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Minimum clearance of 24 inches is required for application of product. For areas with less than 24-inch clearance, the product may be applied by hand using ECOLINE-R. D. Ambient temperature shall be within manufacturer’s specifications. (Greater than +19ºF/-7ºC.)

1.8

E.

All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing through the waterproof membrane shall be positively secured in their proper positions and appropriately protected prior to membrane application.

F.

Waterproof membrane shall be installed before placement of reinforcing steel. When not possible, all exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General Contractor prior to membrane application.

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width. 1.

Warranty Period: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.

SYSTEM III Plus; EPRO Services, Inc., Wichita, KS, 800-882-1896 1. Spray-Applied ECOLINE-S or roller-applied ECOLINE-R. 2. Protection ECOSHIELD-E10 or E-15 or ECOSHIELD-P.

2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A.

Fluid applied waterproofing system – ECOLINE-S: a single course, high build, polymer modified, asphalt emulsion. Waterborne and spray applied at ambient temperatures. A nominal thickness of 80 dry mils (60 mil minimum), unless specified otherwise. Non-toxic and odorless. ECOLINE-R has similar properties with greater viscosity and is roller or brush applied. Manufactured by EPRO Services, Inc.

B.

Fluid applied waterproofing physical properties.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ECOLINE-S – TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES (MEMBRANE ONLY) Tensile Strength Elongation Resistance to Decay Accelerated Aging Moisture Vapor Transmission Hydrostatic Water Pressure Perm rating Methane transmission rate Adhesion to Concrete & Masonry

ASTM 412 ASTM 412 ASTM E 154 Section 13 ASTM G 23 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 751 ASTM E 96 (US Perms) ASTM D 1434 ASTM C 836 & ASTM C 704

32 psi 4140% 4% Perm Loss No Effect .026 g/sq. ft. /hr. 26 psi 0.21 0 11 lbf./inch

ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836-00

80 No Cracking No Cracking at –20ºC

Hardness Crack Bridging Low Temp. Flexibility Resistance to Acids: Acetic Sulfuric and Hydrochloric Temperature Effect: Stable Flexible

30% 13% 248ºF 13ºF

ECOLINE-R – TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES Tensile Strength Elongation Resistance to Decay Accelerated Aging Moisture Vapor Transmission Hydrostatic Water Pressure Perm rating (US Perms) Methane transmission rate Adhesion to Concrete & Masonry Hardness Crack Bridging Low Temp. Flexibility Resistance to Acids: Acetic Sulfuric and Hydrochloric Temperature Effect: Stable Flexible

ASTM 412 ASTM 412 ASTM E 154 Section 13 ASTM G 23 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 751 ASTM E 96 ASTM D 1434 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836 ASTM C 836-00

32 psi 3860% 9% Perm Loss No Effect .026 g/sq. ft. /hr. 28 psi 0.17 0 7 lbf./inch 85 No Cracking No Cracking at –20ºC 30% 13% 248ºF 13ºF

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

Sheet Flashing: 60-mil reinforced modified asphalt sheet good with double-sided adhesive.

B.

Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer’s recommended polypropylene and polyester fabric.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Joint Detailing Sealant Mastic: ECOLINE-T, a high viscosity polymer modified water based asphalt material. 1. Back Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam. 2.4 PROTECTION COURSE A.

Protection Course Usage 1. 2.

B.

On vertical surfaces, use ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course or other protection as approved by the manufacturer. On horizontal surfaces, use ECOSHIELD-E10 or ECOSHIELD-P.

ECOSHIELD-E physical properties.

Ecoshield-E Properties Puncture Resistance Tensile Strength Tear Resistance Low Temperature Impact Water Vapor Trans. Rate Perm Rating Chemical or Environmental Resistance Methane Gas Modified

ASTM D 1709 ASTM E 154 ASTM D 4533 ASTM D 1790 ASTM E 96 ASTM E 96

8-mil 876 g 24.59 lbs. MD 3.48 lbs. Resistant to -105°C .00711 g/ft/hr 0.0143 Excellent

ASTM D 1434

10-mil 1593 g. 34.6 lbs. MD 5.98 lbs. Resistant to -105 C .00621 g./ft./hr. 0.0133 Excellent 0

15-mil 1898 g. 39.7 lbs. MD 8.74 lbs. Resistant to -105 C .00585 g./ft./hr. 0.0123 Excellent 0 0

C. ECOSHIELD-P physical properties. Grab Tensile Strength Grab Tensile Elongation Mullen Burst Puncture UV Resistance Light Reflectance

ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 3786 ASTM D 4833 ASTM D 4355 ASTM E 97

120 lbs. 50% 240 psi 70 lbs. 70% (after 150 hrs. exposure) 70%

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A.

Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over spray affecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. E.

Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with ECOLINE-T, hydraulic cement, or rapidset grout.

3.3 PREPARATION AND TREATMENT AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A.

Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at 90-degree terminations, at penetrations through waterproofing material, and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer’s recommendations.

B.

Apply two coats of ECOLINE-T (30 mil each) and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring its complete saturation and covering. 1. 2.

Terminations should be treated 6 inches on each side for both vertical and horizontal. Penetrations should be treated in a 6inch radius around penetration and 3 inches onto penetrating object.

3.4 PREPARATIONS AND TREATMENT OF JOINTS AND CRACKS A.

Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.

B.

Less than 1/16 in. - Apply two coats of ECOLINE-T waterproofing, 6 inches on each side of joint or crack and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring to complete saturation and covering.

C. Greater then 1/16 in. – Rout joint or crack, install backer-rod and sealant to bring flush to surface. Apply a coat of ECOLINE-T or R to joint or crack, 6 in. on each side, embed a joint reinforcement strip and apply a second coat, where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A.

Set up spray equipment according to manufacturer’s instructions if spray-applying material.

B.

Mix materials according to manufacturer’s instructions.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative. D. Apply waterproofing, according to manufacturer’s recommendations, by spray (ECOLINE-S) or roller (ECOLINE-R). E.

Apply a base spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three 27 mil (wet) coats of ECOLINE-R, to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.25 mm) at any point.

F.

Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and details.

G. Lay 3’ wide, polyester on and into the base coat of the membrane overlapping it 3”,(a light tack coat of ECOLINE-R or ECOLINE-S may be used around the edges of the polyester to temporarily hold it in place). H. Apply a second spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three 27-mil (wet) coats of ECOLINE-R to obtain a composite reinforced membrane with average dry film thickness of 120 mils and a nominal thickness of 100 mils. I.

Verify film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m).

3.6 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION A.

Install ECOSHIELD-E15 protection course with overlapped seams over nominally cured membrane no later than recommended by manufacturer and before starting subsequent construction operations.

B.

Secure ECOSHIELD-E15 protection course seams with ECOSHIELD Tape and attach to adhesive strips (sheet flashing that does not penetrate waterproofing) as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Membrane may be checked for coverage with a lightly oiled, needle nose depth gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area, every 500 square feet. Record the minimum reading. Mark the test area for repair.

B.

Test areas are to be patched over with ECOLINE-S to an 80-mil minimum dry thickness, extending a minimum of one-inch (1”) beyond the test perimeter.

3.8 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A.

Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer’s recommendations. It should be noted normal curing time is 24 to 48 hours to achieve a permanent water barrier. However, in some conditions such as a saturated substrate, extremely cold temperatures and/or high humidity, the full adhesion of the membrane may be delayed. The length of the delay is subject to the membrane and severity of those conditions.

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Take care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages, curing and subsequent construction.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07123

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)

07123 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06642 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. Glass fiber reinforced plastic replication for exterior roof wood cornice.

B.

Field painting as specified in Section 09911.

1.2

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A.

Installed fiberglass fabrications and fastening systems shall meet applicable building code requirements and withstand: 1. 70 mph. 2. 10 lbs/sq/inch live load with deflection limited to 1/360 of span. 3. Self supporting dead load with deflection limited to 1/360 of span. 4. 10 psf snow load.

B.

Design loads shall not be cumulative.

C.

Installed products shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative wind pressure without structural failure, cracking, permanent distortion or displacement.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show location of cornice, large-scale details, finishes, joint treatment, attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations. 1. Include sequence of erection.

C.

Samples: 12 inch long full-size sample of GFRP cornice showing finish, color and texture.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum of 10 years experience in products typical of work required for this Project.

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP)

06642 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

Transport and handle units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses or damage. 1. Type “E” random chopped fibers.

B.

Store units level on a clean and dry surface in an area protected from weather, soil contact and damage, preferably in an upright position.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

GFRP FABRICATORS Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GFRP cornice by one of the following: 1. Edon Corporation; Horsham, PA. 2. Fibertech Inc.; Pendleton, SC. MATERIALS

A.

Glass Cloth, Matt and “Chop”: Products of PPG-Owens Corning or equal.

B.

Polyester Resins: Class A, flame retardant, promoted isophythalic polyester resin designed for use in hand lay-up and spray-up processes. 1. Resin is specifically formulated for use in applications that require an ASTM E84, Class 1 flame spread rating, without the use of fillers or antimony trioxide. a. Flame Spread; ASTM E-84: Less than 25 unfilled. b. Smoke Density: Under 450. 2. Gel Coat: UV inhibited, NPG-ISO polyester coat, 18-22 mils thick.

C.

Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester: 1. Flexural strength; ASTM D-790: 15,000 – 20,000 psi. 2. Tensile strength; ASTM D-638; 10,000 – 20,000 psi. 3. Compressive strength; ASTM D-695: 15,000 – 20,000 psi. 4. Barcol hardener: 45-55. 5. Glass content: 25 – 30%.

2.3 A.

2.4 A.

ACCESSORIES Metal reinforcement anchorage clops, brackets, fasteners: Stainless steel. 1. Components: As indicated in shop drawings. FABRICATION Cornice: Fiberglass reinforced polyester components shall be manufactured using the specified resins, reinforced with chopped glass fibers. 1. Exposed surface finish: Colored gel-coat with UV inhibitor. 2. Concealed surface finish: Prime coat.

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP)

06642 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Minimum Fiberglass Thickness: 3/16 inch.

C.

Joints in components shall be matched at the factory and numbered for field installation. Components shall be fabricated to minimize exposed fasteners.

D.

Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1.

E.

2.5

Shop fabricate cornice in lengths to provide pieces that are uninterrupted by joints. Machine edges of cornice units to provide joint profiles indicated.

Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Part Location: +/- 1/16 inch. 2. Length: +/- 1/8 inch. 3. Gel Coat Thickness: =/- 2.5 mils. SHOP FINISHING

A.

General: Finish cornice at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B.

Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cornice.

C.

Gel Coat: 1. Thickness: .015 inches to 0.25 inches. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sheen: Gloss, 80-100 gloss units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A.

Prior to manufacturing: Check dimensions and conditions not shown on Drawings for inclusion by manufacturer’s shop drawings.

B.

Prior to installation: Check job site dimensions. Contact Architect and Construction Manager if there are any discrepancies between design and field dimensions. Do not proceed until discrepancies are corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

Lift units carefully and without damage with suitable devices at points indicated by manufacturer.

B.

Install cornice level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 96 inches.

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP)

06642 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Fasten units with screws (through the face of from the back), bolting or welding as shown on shop drawings. 1. Provide temporary supports to maintain units in place.

D.

Cement butt joints together with approved mastic.

3.3

REPAIRS

A.

Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy of unit and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Architect and Construction Manager.

B.

Blend and mix patching materials and repair cured patches to match color, texture and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.

C.

Remove and replace damaged units when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.4 A.

CLEANING Clean soiled units with detergent and water using soft brushes and sponges. Rinse with clean water. Prevent damage to surfaces and adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION 06642

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP)

06642 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 06614 - COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

SECTION INCLUDES A.

1.2

1.3

This Section includes composite surfacing for the following applications: 1. Bathroom vanities.

RELATED SECTIONS A.

Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Blocking.

B.

Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Plywood substrate.

C.

Section 07920 - Joint Sealers: Joint sealant and backing materials.

SUBMITTALS A.

Submit under provisions of Division 1 Section “Submittal Requirements.

B.

Product Data : Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Product description. 2. Fabrication instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods.

C.

Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions, edge configurations, cutouts, and relationship to adjacent construction. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

D.

Samples: 1. For each type of product indicated. a. Submit minimum 4 by 4 inch (101 by 101 mm) sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for Work.

E.

Manufacturer Certificates: 1. Compliance Certificate: Signed by manufacturer, indicating compliance with specified performance requirements.

F.

Maintenance Data: Cleaning instructions, scratch removal procedures, and materials harmful to countertops.

G.

LEED Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01352 LEED Requirements: 1. Credit MR 4.1, Recycled Content: 10 percent (post-consumer plus 1/2

COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS

06614- 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. 3. 4.

1.4

1.5

1.6

pre-consumer.) Credit MR 5.1, Regional Materials: 10 percent manufactured regionally. Credit EQ 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating[ chemical composition and] VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to

REFERENCES A.

ASTM C 97 - Test Method for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimensional Stone.

B.

ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch (50-mm) Cube Specimens).

C.

ASTM C 293 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center-Point Loading).

D.

ASTM C 642 - Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete.

E.

ASTM C 666 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing (Superseded).

F.

ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

G.

ASTM C 1260 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method).

H.

ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

B.

Installer: Trained and approved by simulated stone manufacturer.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Do not deliver components to project site until products are ready for installation.

B.

Store components indoors prior to installation.

COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS

06614- 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.7

C.

Handle materials to prevent damage.

D.

Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

2.2

Basis of Design Manufacturer: IceStone, 63 Flushing Avenue, Unit 283, Bldg. 12, Brooklyn, NY 11205. Telephone: (718) 624-4900. Fax: (718) 6244002. Web: www.icestone.biz. E-mail: [email protected].

MATERIAL, ST-3 A.

Approved Product: “IceStone.” 1. Composition: 100 percent recycled glass in a cement matrix. 2. Physical Performance Characteristics: a. Compressive Strength: 13,000 psi (914 Km/cm), in accordance with ASTM C 109. b. Flexural Strength: 890 psi (63 Km/cm), in accordance with ASTM C 293. c. Specific Gravity: 2.31, in accordance with ASTM C 97. d. Porosity/Absorption: 0.18 percent, unsealed, in accordance with ASTM C 642. e. Chemical Durability: 0.05 percent expansion, in accordance with ASTM C 1260 for ASR Reactivity. f. Freeze Thaw: 0.49 percent expansion, 300 cycles, in accordance with ASTM C666. g. Fire Rating: Class 1 (A), in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame spread index: 0. Fuel contribution: 0. Smoke density index: 0. h. Coefficient of Static Friction: 0.78 (dry), in accordance with ASTM C 1028. 3. Weight and Size: a. Weight: 16.3 pounds per square foot at 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick. b. Maximum Slab Size: 52-1/2 inches (1334 mm) wide, 96 inches (2438 mm) long and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick. c. Finished Thickness: 1-1/4 inch (31 mm). 4. Edge Detail: a. Half bullnose. 5. Color: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Surface Finish: a. Polished, high-gloss.

COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS

06614- 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 2.3

2.4

ACCESSORIES A.

Sealant: Low-VOC or no-VOC mildew-resistant sealant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant for food contact, to match durable surface. 1. Product: As recommended by durable surface manufacturer.

B.

Available Sealer Manufacturers and Products: 1. Penetrating Sealer by Aquamix. 2. National Look Sealer by Buddy Rhodes. 3. Satin Sealer by Buddy Rhodes.

FACTORY FABRICATION A.

Shop Assembly: Fabricate using standard stone cutting equipment in accordance with manufacturer's fabrication and installation guidelines. 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Form joints between components without conspicuous joints. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on Drawings. 4. Rout and finish component edges with minimum radius of 1/8 (3 mm). a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Shape inside corner radius to minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to relieve corner stress. c. Smooth edges. d. Repair or replace defective and inaccurate work.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

3.2

3.3

EXAMINATION A.

Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B.

If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

PREPARATION A.

Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B.

Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

INSTALLATION A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including but not limited to the following: 1. Four-Sided Perimeter Support: Provide a four-sided perimeter frame for countertops, and Icestone will not require a substrate. Provide front-to-back support every 36 inches (914 mm), in addition to the strong perimeter support, for spans within cabinets.

COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS

06614- 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION B.

3.4

Clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's care and maintenance instructions including the following: 1. Cleaner: Clean spills promptly. Longer exposure to spills may result in a stain. 2. Manufacturer Recommended Cleaner: a.IceStone recommends TileLab OneStep Cleaner & Resealer, Seventh Generation All Purpose Cleaner, Simple Green Stone Cleaner. Pledge Multipurpose Pads, clean and offer a light layer of wax protection. Generally low Ph cleaners work best. 3. Polish: Manufacturer recommended; IceStone recommends Simple Green Stone Polish, and Cheng's Concrete Countertop Wax used sparingly.

PROTECTION A.

Protect installed products until completion of project.

B.

Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion, as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION 06614

COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS

06614- 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06410 – ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A. This Section includes 1. Check Out Desk 2. Information Desks 3. Assorted Freestanding and Wall Mounted Casework Units 4. End Panels and Canopy Tops for Metal Shelving System 5. All other casework items indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for a complete assembly. B. Co-ordinate with the work of Division 16 for the installation of power and data.

1.2

REFERENCES A. Comply with the requirements of the following organizations: 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards (AWI) 2. Builder's Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA) 3. American Plywood Association (APA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 5. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA)

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature for the following: 1. Product description showing construction, components, dimensions, features, and finishes. 2. Installation instructions showing rough-in requirements, construction details, and recommended procedures. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing plans, elevations, sections, and details indicating all materials and dimensions. 1. Show layout pattern, fabrication details and attachment methods. 2. Indicate juncture with adjacent materials. 3. Indicate all fixtures and equipment to be incorporated. D. Samples: Submit samples of material, color, and finish. Submit additional samples until all products are approved. 1. Stained and varnished door and drawer fronts for veneers and solid stock, actual size. 2. 12" x 12" sample of stained and varnished drawer box and cabinet interior. 3. 12" x 12" sample of countertop material showing leading edge and back splash. 4. An actual example of each accessory or items of hardware.

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06410 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.04

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards Precedence: In case of conflict with published industry standards/specifications and the projection specifications, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. B. Organizations and Standards: 1. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium Grade Standards. C. Qualifications 1. The cabinetmaker shall be certified by the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 2. The contractor shall have demonstrated experience and the ability to furnish adequate supervision, equipment and production capacity. The firm shall be a member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 3. The field superintendent shall have demonstrated experience producing the work. 4. The installer shall be a qualified journeyman. Apprentices may work under the direction of a journeyman in accordance with trade regulations. D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to initiating the work, convene a meeting with the general contractor, manufacturer, installer, owner's representative, and architect in attendance.

1.05

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Furnish products in accordance with Section 01600 – Product Requirements. B. All materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer’s sealed packages with labels intact and seals unbroken. 1. Do not deliver custom cabinets to building until "wet work" such as concrete, plaster and gypsum wallboard work has been completed and cured. C. Store materials above ground and in original protective packages. Store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions to prevent damage due to moisture, temperature, and contaminants. D. Handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.06

PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide installation conditions in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The work area shall be enclosed, provide properly regulated heat and ventilation. 1. Acceptable temperature range is 50°F to 90°F. 2. Maximum humidity is 80%.

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06410 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC PART 2 2.01

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PRODUCTS

WOOD MATERIALS A. Dimension Lumber; Standing and Running Trim for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: AWI Premium Grade except as amended by more stringent requirements herein. 2. Species: Maple to match existing woodwork.

B. Miscellaneous Lumber for Concealed Applications: 1. AWI Grade III or better; species Contractor's option, subject to compliance with applicable requirements for fire resistance where treated applications are required. 2.02

SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: 1. Grade: AWI Premium Grade except as amended by more stringent requirements herein 2. Core: Veneer 3. Face Species: Maple 4. Adhesive: As recommended for application 5. Components: a. Door and Drawer Fronts: Maple b. Drawer Construction: Maple c. Ends and Backs: Maple

2.03

COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. See Section 09654 Linoleum Floor Coverings & Desk Tops.

2.04

HARDWARE A. Drawer slides shall be manufactured by Accuride. The number and style shall be confirmed by the cabinetmaker. 1. Drawers 24" or less in width: model number 7437. 2. Drawers 24" to 42" in width: model number 3640. B. Drawer pulls: 1. Manufacturer: Amerock 2. Model: #BP865 3. Finish: oil rubbed bronze D. Cabinet Locks at Circulation Desk: 1. Manufacturer: Schlage 2. Model: 46-002 3. Finish: 613

2.05

ACCESSORIES A. Bronze Grommets:

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06410 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Manufacturer: Mockett 2. Model: 2-1/2” MM Series 3. Finish: Antique Bronze B. Recessed Shelf Standard: 1. Manufacturer: K & V 2. Model: #255 3. Finish: Brown C. Shelf Supports: 1. Manufacturer: K & V 2. Model: #256 3. Finish: Brown 2.06

FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinetry in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium. B. Shop-assemble cabinetry for delivery to the site in easily handled units and sized to pass through existing openings. C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. E. Provide cutouts for fixtures and fittings. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.

2.07

FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. Use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and that is recommended for applied finishes. C. Finish work in the factory in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium. 1. AWI Finish System: TR-6 a. 1 coat transparent stain to match Architect’s sample b. 3 coats polyurethane c. semi-gloss sheen

PART 3 3.01

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect the work of other trades and the installation conditions. Confirm that the conditions meet the installation requirements. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. 1. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06410 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

HWA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.02

PREPARATION A. Prior to starting work, protect the surrounding areas and surfaces. B. Confirm that sufficient materials are stored on site to complete the space.

3.03

INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. F. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

3.04

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. During the execution of the work keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition. At the end of each working day, remove all refuse and dispose of it properly. B. Upon completion of this portion of the work. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. C. Repair or replace or otherwise restore to new condition all items damaged by work of this section.

END OF SECTION 06410

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06410 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.

B.

1.2

Interior standing and running trim. Interior frames and jambs.

Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. SUBMITTALS

A.

Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale details, attachment devices, and other components.

B.

Samples: 1.

C.

Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: a. b.

D.

1.3

For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde.

Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: Program certificates .

AWI Quality Certification

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.

B.

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06402 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

WOODWORK FABRICATORS Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following: MATERIALS

A.

Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple.

B.

Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.

C.

Wood Products: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.3

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A.

Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.

B.

Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

C.

Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06402 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fireretardant-treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B.

Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2.5 A.

FABRICATION General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. 2.

B.

Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom . Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.

Fire Rating: 20 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B.

Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

C.

Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Shim as required with concealed shims.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06402 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E.

Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F.

Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulllength pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

END OF SECTION 06402

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06402 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior frames and jambs. 2. Exterior ornamental work. 3. Shop priming exterior woodwork. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For wood-preservative-treated materials and finishes indicated.

B.

Samples: For lumber for exterior wood stain finish , for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.

C.

Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: Program certificates .

1.3 A.

AWI Quality Certification

QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

WOODWORK FABRICATORS Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exterior architectural woodwork by one of the following: MATERIALS

A.

Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with AWPA N1 using the following preservative for woodwork items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative treatment: 1. Water-Repellent Preservative/Insecticide: Formulation containing 3-iodo-2propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) as its active ingredient, combined with an insecticide containing chlorpyrifos as its active ingredient, both complying with AWPA P8.

B.

Nails: stainless steel.

EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06401 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C. 2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Screws: stainless steel. FABRICATION

A.

Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent.

B.

Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C.

Woodwork for Opaque Finish: 1. 2.

Grade: Premium. Wood Species: Maple.

D.

Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

E.

Shop Priming: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1.

F.

Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

Shop Finishing: Entire finish of exterior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section. To greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup and cleaning until after installation. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Grade: Premium . Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane. Sheen: Semigloss 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06401 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for type of woodwork involved.

C.

Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D.

Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

E.

Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

F.

Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

G.

Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed.

H.

Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.

I.

Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

Touch up shop-applied

END OF SECTION 06401

EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06401 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06400 – INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Repair of damaged woodwork 2. Refinishing interior woodwork. 3. Staining and lacquering woodwork 4. Replacing deteriorated woodwork 1.3 SUMMARY A. This procedure provides supplemental guidelines to be used when specifying any type of repair to damaged woodwork. Guidelines for materials, fabrication and general guidelines for installation are included. B. Specifications for the repair of woodwork shall include all work, materials and equipment required to: 1. Carefully remove required woodwork and securely reinstall it to its original place and position. Use experienced riggers for the removal and transportation of woodwork. 2. Repair woodwork to conservator quality standards. 3. Document work done through photography. 1.4 REFERENCES A.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work in this specification with appropriate work of other specifications to ensure proper scheduling for fabrication and installation of the work specified herein. B. Verify all dimensions in the field before fabrication of all architectural woodwork to assure proper fit.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 1/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for interior woodwork refinishing are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances." D. Unit Prices: Interior woodwork refinishing to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material 2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval. C. Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: D. Each type of refinished and repaired woodwork in the form of samples 2 linear feet long. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration work. G. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. H. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used. I.

If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for refinishing and repair work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 2/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced woodwork refinishing and repair firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for refinishing work and 1 for repair work. C. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that woodwork refinishing and repair are in progress. D. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. E. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. F. Woodwork Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of material indicated to be patched, refinished, or repaired. Erect sample panels of an existing woodwork, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship. G. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect.Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. I.

Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of woodwork refinishing and repair.

J. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. K. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for woodwork refinishing and repair from a single source for each type of material. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 3/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.1 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WOODWORK A. MATERIALS 1. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried lumber with an average moisture content range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the above range. 2. Replacement Wood: Match species, grade, grain pattern, and other special characteristics of woodwork. 3. Provide wood blocking, anchorages and fasteners for above: a. Screws: 1) Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and as recommended by RHPO. 2) For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. b. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and as recommended by RHPO. c. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 4. Fire-Retardant Materials: a. Fire-retardant treated lumber shall be lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with ASTM C20 and C27, respectively; provide materials which are pressure impregnated with fire retardant chemicals and comply with the following requirements. 1) Fire-Retardant Chemicals: Use chemicals of type which do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated lumber from untreated lumber. a) Low Hygroscopic Type: Halogen anD sulfate-free solution intended for interior applications not exposed to relative humidity more than 95%; with treated material having an equilibrium moisture content of not over 28% per ASTM D3201 at 92 ñ 2% relative humidity.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 4/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2) Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a) "Dricon" (Koppers Co., Inc.). b) "Flameproof LHC" (Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of America, Inc.). c) "Protex" (Hoover Universal, Wood Preserving Division). b. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials which are identical to those tested per ASTM methods and are marked and listed for fire performance characteristics by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and comply with the following requirements: 1) Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does not affect listed fire performance characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspection agency. 2) Marking: Identify treated lumber with separable paper classification marking of inspecting and testing agency, unless otherwise indicated. 3) Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values shown below, tested per ASTM E84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. a) Flame Spread: 25. b) Smoke Developed: 50. 4) Kiln-dry woodwork after treatment to levels required for non-fire-retardant woodwork 5) materials. Maintain moisture content required by kiln drying, before and after treatment. 6) Discard treated lumber that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise damaged or defective lumber. B. FABRICATION 1. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. 2. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details provided and approved by RHPO. 3. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble compoINTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 5/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

nents only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 4. Wood Surrounds and Trim: Fabricate to profiles required in single lengths for jamb and head conditions. Provisions for securing through face of trim shall include plugs to match surface. 5. Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. 6. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. a. Where the sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would delay the project, continue with fabrication (without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit. 7. Preservative Treatment by Non-Pressure Method: Comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard for nonpressure treatment of woodwork with nonaqueous water repellent solution, except as indicated. Treat units of woodwork after cutting, machining, sanding, gluing and assembling has been completed to the greatest extent possible. Coat surfaces cut after treatment with heavy brush coating of same preservative. 2.2 PRODUCTS CLEANING AND REFINISHING A. MATERIALS 1. Wood Stain 2. Floor Varnish 3. Shellac 4. Alcohol 5. Paste Wax - Proprietary or job-mixed compound containing carnauba, beeswax, cadelilla, or ceresin mixed with turpentine. 6. Floor Wax 7. Wood Bleach: Solution of sodium perborate, hydrogen peroxide or proprietary mixture suitable for oak. 8. Wood Filler

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 6/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

9. Steel Wool 10. Sandpaper: Extra Fine Grit.

B. PRODUCTS REFINISHING INTERIOR WOOD 1. MANUFACTURERS a. Bonakemi USA, Inc. 14805 East Moncrieff Place Aurora, CO8001 1800/872-5515 or 303/371-1411 b. Butcher Polish Company 120 Bartlett Street Marlborough, MA 617/481-5700 c. 3M Consumer Products Group Box 33053 St. Paul, MN 55133 3053612/737-6501 or 800/364-3577 d. The Sherwin Williams Co. 101 Prospect Ave. NW Cleveland, OH 44101 216/566-2000 e. Specialty Environmental Technologies, Inc. 4520 Glenmeade Lane Auburn Hills, MI 48326 810/340-0400 C. MATERIALS 1. NOTE: Chemical products are sometimes sold under a common name. This usually means that the substance is not as pure as the same chemical sold under its chemical name. The grade of purity of common name substances, however, is usually adequate for stain removal work, and these products should be purchased when available, as they may be less expensive. 2. Commercial Paint and Varnish Remover such as "Citristrip" (Specialties Environmental Technologies, Inc.), "Safest Stripper" (3M), or approved equal 3. Mineral Spirits: a. A petroleum distillate that is used especially as paint or varnish thinner. b. Other chemical or common names include Benzine* (not Benzene); Naphtha*; Petroleum spirits*; Solvent naphtha*.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 7/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

c. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. d. Safety Precautions: 1) AVOID REPEATED OR PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT. 2) ALWAYS wear rubber gloves when handling mineral spirits. 3) If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap and water. OR4. Turpentine: a. Typically used as a solvent and thinner. b. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. c. Safety Precautions: 1) Work in a well ventilated area. 2) Observe safety rules as turpentine is flammable, and the fumes can trip an ionization smoke detection system. 3) Store soiled cloths in a metal safety container to guard against spontaneous combustion. -OR5. Solvent Wax Remover such as "Woodline Renovator" (Bonakemi USA, Inc.), or approved equal. 6. Wood filler in color to match original stain. a. CAUTION: WOOD FILLERS CONTAINING A LINSEED OIL VEHICLE MAY CAUSE WHITE SPOTS TO DEVELOP IN THE LACQUER FINISH COAT. 7. Oil stain or universal stain (Sherwin Williams), or approved equal. 8. Alkyd or urethane-base satin varnish (Sherwin Williams), or approved equal. 9. Paste wax (non-yellowing) such as "Butcher's Paste Wax" (Butcher Polish Company), or approved equal. D. EQUIPMENT 1. 000 steel wool 2. Steel or brass wire brushes 3. Stiff fiber bristle brushes 4. Putty knife or broad knife 5. Clean, dry cloths (cheese cloth or gauze) 6. Orbital Sander

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 8/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

7. Electric floor polisher 8. Nylon web scrubbing pads 9. Lamb's wool buffing pads 2.3 PRODUCTS STAINING AND LACQUERING WOODWORK A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Mohawk Finishing Products, Inc. Route 30 N. Amsterdam, NY 12010 B. MATERIALS 1. Wood Filler: Paste wood filler shall be blended silica in aromatic mineral spirits solvent with an alkyd resin base, color as required to match original stain (Mohawk Finishing Products, Inc.), or approved equal. 2. NOTE: USE OF WOOD FILLER WITH LINSEED OIL VEHICLE MAY CAUSE WHITE SPOTS IN LACQUER FINISH COAT OR INHIBIT ITS PROPER DRYING. 3. Sanding Sealer: Lacquer based sanding sealer, formulated for brushing, composed of the following products (Mohawk Finishing Products), or approved equal. 4. Note: Amounts of products listed below make one (1) gallon of sanding sealer. The ratio of constituents shall remain constant if a greater quantity is required. a. b. c. d.

Product #610-160 High solids sanding sealer #650-010 Lacquer thinner #502-000 Solar lux retarder

Amount 50 oz. 12 oz. 2 oz.

5. Wood stain: Solvent (aromatic) reducible, pigmented wiping surface stain with an alkyd binder, color matched to original stain, such as (Mohawk Finishing Products, Inc.), or approved equal. 6. Lacquer 7. Tack Rags 8. Steel wool: Grade 0000 9. Cloths: Soft, clean and lint free 10. Vegetable Oil Soap: Potassium soap of vegetable oil containing no acids, abrasives, caustics or solvents, such as "Murphy's Oil Soap" (Murphy-Phoenix Company), OR approved equal.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 9/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. NOTE: NON-IONIC DETERGENTS ARE NOT RECOMMENDED; THEY ARE TOO HARSH. C. EQUIPMENT 1. Soft, Natural Bristle Brush 2.4 PRODUCTS REPLACING DETERIORATED WOODWORK A. MATERIALS 1. New or Replacement Materials: a. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried lumber with an average moisture content range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the above range. b. Replacement Wood: Match species, grade, grain pattern, and other special characteristics of existing woodwork. 2. Clean, soft cloths PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WOODWORK A. EXAMINATION 1. Conserve as much of the original material as possible, repairing and restoring damaged existing woodwork rather than replacing it wherever practicable. Use salvaged material where practical in spaces with some existing woodwork to remain. If not practical, replace all woodwork with new materials that replicate the existing items; maintain RHPO approval. 2. Do a thorough examination of the existing wood condition. Do any necessary tests on an inconspicuous surface to learn the current condition and appropriate steps and materials necessary for restoration of all existing wood surfaces. B. PREPARATION 1. Protection: a. Protect adjacent surfaces with polyethylene covers during wood removal operations. b. Protect persons and surrounding surfaces of building interiors whose wood surfaces are being restored from damage resulting from wood restoration work. 2. Surface Preparation: INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 10/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Condition woodwork according to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. b. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3. Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at project site before delivery of architectural woodwork and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. Include in meeting the contractor; RHPO, contracting officer, and other owner representatives (if any); installers of architectural woodwork, wet work such as plastering, other finishes, painting, mechanical work and electrical work; and firms or persons responsible for continued operation (whether temporary or permanent) of HVAC system as required to maintain temperature and humidity conditions. Proceed with woodwork installation only when everyone concerned agrees that required ambient conditions can be maintained. 4. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates, well ahead of time substrates are to be built. C. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION 1. General: a. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for type of woodwork involved. b. Carefully remove at locations indicated any damaged or deteriorated woodwork. Unless indicated otherwise, replace the entire length of the existing damaged piece to the next butt joint. c. For partial replacement of existing pieces, use a neat, well-fitted level cut with grain aligned in transparent finish wood. 2. Replacing Deteriorated Material: Install new pieces as follows: a. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surface, 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. b. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop-fabricated or shop-cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. c. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 11/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for joinery. 1) Reuse salvage material as required. Use only trim that can be reinstalled and refinished to an acceptable condition consistent with the existing trim to remain. 2) Where salvage material will not match existing, remove and replace with new to replicate existing. d. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is suggested. e. Finish replacement woodwork to match adjacent woodwork surfaces. D. ADJUSTING/CLEANING 1. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls and other adjacent surfaces stained, marred, otherwise damaged by work under this section shall be cleaned and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and perfect condition. 2. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building operations and effects of 3. weather. Protection shall be by methods recommended by the manufacturer of installed materials and as approved by the RHPO. 4. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 5. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factoryapplied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. E. PROTECTION 1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be restored or not, against damage by restoration work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, as acceptable to RHPO. At completion of work of other trades, restore all damaged or defaced surfaces. 2. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 12/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.2 CLEANING AND REFINISHING A. PREPARATION 1. Protection: Mask all adjacent surfaces and protect other exposed surfaces in the work area. 2. Surface Preparation: a. Select an inconspicuous area on which to test materials and application for each method type b. required. Test area must be approved by the Contracting Officer. After each test area has been c. prepared, receive approval from the Contracting Officer before commencing general application. d. Fill any split in existing wood and sand smooth prior to sealer application. B. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION 1. General: a. Follow manufacturer's application instructions. b. Final appearance of woodwork must be uniform in all respects. 2. Refinishing When Removal of Existing Shellac is Required: a. Coat wood with denatured alcohol. Apply with soft cloth. Scrape up residue as quickly as possible. Repeat application of alcohol until all shellac is removed. b. Sand smooth. c. Apply one coat of shellac with soft cloth. d. Apply mixture of shellac and alcohol with soft cloth and allow to dry overnight. e. Apply liberal amount of paste wax with soft cloth and allow to dry. f.

Buff wood lightly with steel wool.

g. Buff wood with soft brush. h. Polish with soft cloth. i.

Other processes may be used as long as final results conform to quality standards and give uniform appearance.

3. Refinishing When Removal of Existing Wax is Required:

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 13/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Rub wood with a soft cloth moistened in turpentine. b. Apply liberal amount of paste wax with soft cloth and allow to dry. c. Polish wood with soft cloth. 4. Refinishing Wood Floor: a. Remove existing finish by sanding two or three times until bare wood is exposed. b. Repair scratched or broken boards. Do not replace boards unless approved by the Contracting Officer. c. Clean area of dust and sawdust. d. Apply stain of same color as existing. Allow to dry overnight. e. Apply two coats of floor varnish. f.

Apply two coats of floor wax.

C. ADJUSTING/CLEANING 1. Wash woodwork with mild detergent and water. 2. Dry immediately with clean cloth. 3. Apply a liberal amount of paste wax and allow to dry. 3.3 REFINISHING INTERIOR WOOD A. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION 1. Remove Existing Coating: a. Work in areas approximately 4' by 4' at one time. b. Apply chemical stripper using a brush or roller. Follow manufacturer's instructions. c. Allow stripper to stand for length of time as recommended by manufacturer, depending upon the number of surface layers to be stripped; if necessary, cover with plastic sheeting to keep the stripper moist. d. Using a broad knife or scrapper, remove paint and stripper from the surface. e. Safely dispose of paint and stripper residue. Follow EPA regulations for disposal of lead-base paint. f.

Specifically for varnish buildup:

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 14/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1) Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the wood surface to remove varnish buildup and to smooth out any checks in the surface. 2) Replace steel wool frequently with clean, and continue the wiping process until a smooth surface is achieved. 3) NOTE: DO NOT USE WATER ON THE WOOD SURFACE. g. Wipe wood with a clean cloth soaked in mineral spirits to remove chemical residue. h. Allow to dry and dry-brush loose material from the surface using a short fiber bristle brush. i.

Repeat as necessary to sufficiently remove the previous coating.

2. Special Procedures for Varnished Wood Floors: a. Sand the floor with an orbital sander to remove stains, old finish and indentations in the wood. Sand in direction of wood grain. b. NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE MORE THAN 1/16" OF THE WOOD SURFACE. c. Remove dust from floor with vacuum and tack cloth. B. Special Procedures for Waxed Wood Floors: 1. NOTE: Some sophisticated modern waxes, formulated for long wear and for high production commercial use, require special strippers that most often are not appropriate for historic materials because the ingredients cannot be readily detected. Some silicon waxes can only be removed by abrasion. 2. NOTE: WORK IN A WELL-VENTILATED ROOM. OBSERVE SAFETY RULES AS BOTH THE TURPENTINE AND THE WAX ARE FLAMMABLE, AND THE FUMES CAN TRIP AN IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM. STORE SOILED CLOTHS IN A METAL SAFETY CONTAINER TO GUARD AGAINST SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION. a. Dampen small area of floor with turpentine or mineral spirits, or apply wax remover evenly over the floor following manufacturer's instructions. b. Using a 16" electric floor machine, scrub lightly with a piece of 000 steel wool or nylon web scrubbing pad. Change steel wool or pads as they become clogged with old wax. c. Wipe up solvent and wax with clean cloths. d. Continue cleaning in this manner until all of the old wax has been removed. Allow floor to dry, approximately 15-20 minutes after the last area has been cleaned.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 15/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

e. Apply wax and buff as described 06200-01-P. Apply two or more thin coats rather than one thick coat. Buff after each coat. 3. Fill scratches, gouges and dents with wood filler. 4. Apply a high quality paste wood filler with a brush to all open grain wood species (i.e., Oak) before staining. 5. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits and wipe the paste off across the grain of the wood to enable the filler to remain in the grain depressions. 6. Allow the filler to fully dry before applying the stain or varnish. 7. Stain and Varnish the Wood: a. On a SAMPLE area 12 inches square, brush apply oil stain or universal stain. b. Allow the stain to penetrate the wood for at least 5-10 minutes. c. Remove excess stain with a clean, lint-free cloth. Rub the wood parallel to the grain. d. Allow the stain to dry at least 12 hours before applying varnish. e. Brush apply one coat of alkyd or urethane-base satin varnish. Varnish should be thin, but not watery. f.

Allow to dry for at least 24 hours.

g. When dry, buff the surface with 000 steel wool and dry-brush with a fiber bristle brush to remove any h. metal particles left behind from the steel wool. A tack rag may also be used to remove dust from the surface. i.

Apply second coat of satin varnish (full-strength).

j.

Allow to fully dry.

k. Buff the surface with 000 steel wool and dry-brush with a fiber bristle brush to remove any metal particles left behind from the steel wool. l.

If sample is approved by RHPO, follow the same procedures for all remaining wood.

m. For areas subject to wear (i.e., handrails, wainscot, etc.): 1) After buffing the final coat of varnish, apply one coat of non-yellowing paste wax 3.4 STAINING AND LACQUERING WOODWORK A. PREPARATION INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 16/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Surface Preparation: a. b. c. d.

Lightly sand abraded veneer of windows and areas damaged by chairs. Make sure that all wood surfaces are clean and smooth.

2. Fill all gouges and scratches with compatible surface putty color matched to stain. Sand smooth. B. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION 1. Staining Procedures: a. Color mix stain to match original. b. Apply stain to all bare wood surfaces with a stiff flat bristle brush. c. Allow stain to set as required for proper color match as determined by testing process. d. Wipe off excess stain by rubbing parallel to the grain with a soft, dry cloth. e. Apply one (1) coat of sanding sealer rub with 0000 steel wool and wipe with a tack rag. (May not be required, test during preparation of sample areas.) f.

Finish Coating: 1) Make sure that surface is clean, level and free of defects. 2) Rub with 0000 steel wool and wipe with a tack rag. 3) Apply a minimum of three finish coats. Brush on lacquer using a wide, moderately full brush to flow a continuous, wet coat onto the surface with minimum of retrace or back brushing - preferably none. Work area small enough so that by working with long, fast, continuous strokes, each succeeding stroke works against the wet edge of the last stroke. A dry tack rag moving ahead of the brush will help to keep the surface dust free. 4) Allow each coat to dry at least two, preferably four hours. 5) Sand with 4/0 to 6/0 paper, only if necessary to remove defects and level surface for next coat. 6) Before adding the next coat, vacuum and wipe the surface with a dry tack rag in order to remove all grit and dust.

3.5 REPLACING DETERIORATED WOODWORK

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 17/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A. PREPARATION 1. Surface Preparation: a. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. b. Back prime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of Back prime coat before installation of woodwork. c. Remove miscellaneous hardware, nails, etc., from all existing woodwork as required to provide a first class installation of new or replacement woodwork. 2. Prior to installation of new architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. B. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION 1. Carefully remove at locations indicated any damaged or deteriorated woodwork. Unless indicated otherwise, replace the entire length of the existing damaged piece. 2. For partial replacement of existing pieces, use a neat, well-fitted level cut with grain aligned in transparent finished wood. 3. Install new pieces as described below: a. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using b. concealed shims. c. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop-fabricated or shop-cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. d. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for joinery. e. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 18/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1) Finish replacement woodwork to match adjacent woodwork surfaces C. ADJUSTING/CLEANING 1. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls, and other adjacent surfaces that are stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by work under this section shall be cleaned and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and perfect condition. 2. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building operations and effects of weather. Protection shall be by methods recommended by the manufacturer of installed materials and as approved by the RHPO. 3. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 4. Clean woodwork: Dust and damp wipe woodwork with a soft cloth dampened in clean water; dry rub with soft cloth to maintain the polish, rubbing along the grain of the wood. 5. Stain and Spot Removal: a. Stains may be cleaned by prompt damp wiping with cloth dampened in clear water or rubbing with cloth dampened in solvent. Dry the wood with a soft cloth. b. White spots may be removed by rubbing them with a small amount of linseed oil. END OF SECTION 06400

INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING

Page 19/19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06202 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. MDO paneling. 2. Shelving.

B.

See Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section.

1.2

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

B.

Samples: For each type of paneling indicated.

C.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and glues used at Project site, including printed statement of VOC content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A.

MATERIALS, GENERAL MDO Plywood: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. PANELING Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels complying with HPVA HP-1. 1.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

2.

Chesapeake Hardwood Products, Inc. Davidson Plywood; a division of Do+Able Products, Inc. Georgia-Pacific Corp.

Face Veneer Species and Cut: [Rotary-cut white birch] [Plain-sliced red oak] [Plain-sliced hickory] .

INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

06202 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4. B.

2.3 A.

2.4 A.

Veneer Matching: [Random match] [Selected for similar color and grain]. Thickness: [1/8 inch] [5/32 inch] [5 mm] [1/4 inch] [5/16 inch] [7/16 inch].

MDO Paneling: 1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge. SHELVING Shelving: Made from the following material , 3/4 inch thick. 1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue. 1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.

Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2 A.

PREPARATION Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. 2. 3.

3.3 A.

Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset.

PANELING INSTALLATION Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch gap to

INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

06202 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 1. 2. B.

3.4

Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.

Hardboard Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching paneling color. SHELVING INSTALLATION

A.

Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth.

B.

Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c.

C.

Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.

D.

Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.

END OF SECTION 06202

INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

06202 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Roof sheathing. 2. Subflooring. 3. Underlayment. 4. Building paper. 5. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment. 6. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

C.

A.

1.4 A.

Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Include data for wood-preservative treatment and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.

Preservative-treated plywood. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

SHEATHING

06160 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A.

Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

2.2

PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A.

Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.

B.

Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 A.

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. 1. 2. 3.

Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

C.

Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.

2.4 A. 2.5 A. 2.6 A.

ROOF SHEATHING Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I; Exterior sheathing. SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT Plywood Subflooring: Exterior, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.

SHEATHING

06160 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.7 A.

2.8 A.

For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER Building Paper: unperforated.

ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt),

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a highdensity, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2.

NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

B.

Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.

C.

Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

3.2 A.

WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." 1.

B.

Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above.

Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1.

SHEATHING

Subflooring:

06160 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. 2.

3.3 A.

3.4 A.

A.

WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:

A.

Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated.

Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

3.6

Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.

Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials.

2.

3.5

Glue and nail to wood framing.

GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Seal other penetrations and openings.

FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.

END OF SECTION 06160

SHEATHING

06160 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.2 A.

Framing with dimension lumber. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. Wood furring. Wood sleepers. Plywood backing panels.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 1.

Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352.

C.

Research/Evaluation Reports: code in effect for Project: 1. 2. 3.

1.3 A.

For the following, showing compliance with building

Preservative-treated wood. Fire-retardant-treated wood. Power-driven fasteners.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. 2. 3. 4.

Dimension lumber framing. Miscellaneous lumber. Interior wood trim. Shelving and clothes rods.

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06105 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2. 3.

2.2 A.

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1.

Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C.

Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D.

Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 A.

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06105 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.4

Framing for raised platforms. Concealed blocking. Roof construction. Plywood backing panels.

DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A.

Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.

B.

Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

2.5 A.

Hem-fir (north); NLGA. Southern pine; SPIB. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Blocking. Nailers. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Cants. Furring. Utility shelving.

B.

For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C.

For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06105 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.6 A.

2.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC , fireretardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. FASTENERS

A.

General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressurepreservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B.

Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C.

Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

2.8 A.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a highdensity, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B.

Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

C.

Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06105 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservativetreated lumber.

F.

Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2. 3.

3.2 A.

NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.

PROTECTION Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION 06105

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06105 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05910 – ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

1.3 A.

B.

Stripping paint from metal. Removing dirt buildup on metal. Washing ornamental metal with and without detergents. Cleaning and polishing brass plate.

Unit Prices: Ornamental metal cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. LEED Submittals:

1.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.

C.

Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: 1. Each type of cleaner.

D.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E.

Restoration program for each phase of the restoration and cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration and cleaning work.

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 1/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

4.

1.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Product Data Work Plan Materials The names, quantity represented, and intended use for proprietary brands of materials proposed to be substituted for the specified materials when the required quantity of a particular batch is 200 liters 50 gallons or less. Manufacturer's current printed product description, material safety data sheets (MSDS) and technical data sheets for each product. Detailed mixing, thinning and application instructions, minimum and maximum application temperature, and curing and drying times shall be provided for each product submitted. Qualifications A statement certified by the Contractor attesting that the experience and qualifications of the workers (journeymen) comply with the specifications. Certificates Certificate stating that products proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control Districts having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced ornamental metal cleaning firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. The Contractor shall provide qualified workers trained and experienced in the preparation for painting of wood and metal surfaces in historic structures and shall submit documentation of 5 consecutive years of work of this type. A list of similar jobs shall be provided identifying when, where, and for whom the work was done. A current point-of-contact for identified references shall be provided. 1. 2.

At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: one for cleaning work and one for repair work. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that metal restoration and cleaning are in progress.

B.

Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing metal cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance.

C.

Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. Test adjacent non-metallic materials for possible reaction with cleaning and paint stripping materials.

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 2/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. Metal Restoration: Prepare sample panels of 3 linear feet for each type of restoration proposed. Maintain the sample panel throughout the restoration to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship expected. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 3 linear feet in length for each type of surface condition. a.

4. 5. 6.

Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. Obtain Architect's approval of completed mockup submittal before starting the remainder of metal restoration and cleaning. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

C.

Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests. 1. LOCATE INDEPENDENT TESTS IN SPEC.

D.

Source of Materials: Obtain materials for metal restoration from a single source for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.

B.

Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.

C.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

ALL CLEANING REMOVES SOME SURFACE METAL AND PATINA. THEREFORE, USE CAUTION, AS EXCESSIVE CLEANING CAN REMOVE THE TEXTURE AND FINISH OF THE METAL. THE CLEANING OR STRIPPING OF METALS MAY INVOLVE THE USE OF ABRASIVES, LIQUIDS OR SOLVENTS WHICH MAY SPLASH OR RUN OFF ONTO ADJACENT MATERIALS. TAKE SPECIAL CARE TO PROTECT ALL ADJACENT MATERIALS, AND DO NOT USE THIS PROCEDURE ON METALS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE SUMMARY. BEFORE UNDERTAKING ANY PROJECT INVOLVING PAINT REMOVAL, APPLICABLE STATE AND FEDERAL LAWS ON LEAD PAINT ABATEMENT AND DISPOSAL MUST BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT AND CAREFULLY FOLLOWED. STATE AND FEDERAL

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 3/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

REQUIREMENTS MAY AFFECT OPTIONS AVAILABLE TO OWNERS ON BOTH PAINT REMOVAL AND REPAINTING. THESE LAWS, AS WELL AS ANY REQUIREMENTS PROHIBITING VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOCs), SHOULD BE REQUESTED FROM THE STATE HISTORIC PRESERVATION OFFICER IN EACH STATE. (From Preservation Brief 28, "Painting Historic Interiors"). REGULATORY INFORMATION MAY ALSO BE REQUESTED FROM THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) REGIONAL OFFICE AND/OR THE STATE OFFICE OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY. 1.6

REFERENCES AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH-02

(1997) Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents Biological Exposure Indices

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D 1730

(1967; R 1993) Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Surfaces for Painting

ASTM D 1731

(1967; R 1993) Preparation of Hot-Dip Aluminum Surfaces for Painting

ASTM D 3274

(1995) Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation

ASTM D 3359

(1995a) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM D 4214

(1997) Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATING (SSPC) SSPC PA Guide 5

(1990) Guide to Maintenance Painting Programs

SSPC SP 1

(1982) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 2

(1995) Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 3

(1995) Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 5/NACE 1

(1994) White Metal Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 6/NACE 3

(1994) Commercial Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 7/NACE 4

(1994) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 10/NACE 2

(1994) Near-White Blast Cleaning

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 4/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.7 WORK PLAN A.

The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is to remain undisturbed, and coordination with other work in progress. The work plan shall include a Safety and Health plan describing procedures for handling monitoring, and disposition of VOCs and other hazardous and toxic materials. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations. The Contractor shall test the materials designated by the Contracting Officer.

1.8 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORING A.

Paint removers, solvents, and other chemicals used for surface preparation shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the designated name, formula or specification number, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special precautions, and name of manufacturer. Such materials shall be furnished in containers not larger than 20 liters; 5 gallons; they shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions; and as a minimum stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors and at temperatures between 4 and 35 degrees C. 40 and 95 degrees F.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A.

Unless otherwise recommended by the product manufacturer, the ambient temperature shall be between 7 and 35 degrees C 45 and 95 degrees F when applying paint removers, solvents, or other preparation materials.

1.9 SAFETY AND HEALTH A

Work shall comply with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity Hazard Analysis as specified in the CONTRACT CLAUSES. The Activity Hazard Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of surface preparation operations on personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone. Refer to Division 1 “Safety and Health”. 1.

Work shall be coordinated to minimize exposure of building occupants, other Contractor personnel, and visitors to mists and odors from surface preparation and cleaning operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 5/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2---PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. GAF Corporation 1361 Alps Road Wayne, NJ 07470 201/628-4127 B. Flitz International, Ltd. 821 Mohr Ave. Waterford, WI 53185 414/534-5898 C. ProSoCo, Inc. 755 Minnesota Avenue P.O. Box 1578 Kansas City, KS 66117 800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700 2.2 PRODUCTS NOTE: Chemical products are sometimes sold under a common name. This usually means that the substance is not as pure as the same chemical sold under its chemical name. The grade of purity of common name substances, however, is usually adequate for stain removal work, and these products should be purchased when available, as they tend to be less expensive. Common names are indicated below by an asterisk (*). A.

Mild detergent -ORB. Household Ammonia: 1. Other chemical or common names include Ammonium Hydroxide; Ammonia water*; Aqua ammonia*. -OR2. Mild Commercial Brass Cleaner (most brass cleaners will both clean and polish) such as "Simichrome", "Wenol", "Flitz" (Flitz International, Ltd.), or approved equal. NOTE: "Simichrome", "Wenol", and "Flitz" are German manufactured cleaners that come in tubes. They are generally more expensive than the liquids and harder to find. They have a finer feel than the liquids, and are best used as an intermediary or finishing polish. C.

Non-ionic detergent, such as "Zyfo" cleaner concentrate -a controlled suds, silicate buffered, non-ionic, rinseless-type synthetic detergent, containing no soap,free alkali, solvents, abrasives, acids, caustics or the like, "Igepal 630" (GAF Corporation) or approved equal.

D.

Chemical Paint Stripper: Thixotropic/alkaline formulation for removing paint coatings from ornamental metal work, such as "Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper," (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 6/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Chemical Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength acidic ornamental metal restoration cleaner, such as "Sure Klean 887 Stainless Steel Cleaner," (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.

F.

Protective Lacquer: Clear non-yellowing for protection of the finished metal surface.

G.

Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Liquid, film forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effect of acidic and alkaline cleaners, such as "Sure Klean Acid Stop," (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.

H.

Water for Cleaning: Clean, potable, free of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, and organic matter.

I.

Cleaning Pads: No. 4/0 fine steel wool or synthetic pads.

2.3 MATERIALS A.

Supplementary Materials for Bronze: 1. Bronze wool, extra fine, such as that manufactured by Brillo 2. Corrosion Inhibitor, Benzotriazole (BTA) such as "Cobratec" (GAF Corporation), or approved equal

B.

Supplementary Materials for Cast Iron: 1. 600 grit aluminum oxide paper, emery paper or fine steel wool 2. Complexing agent such as "Versene", or approved equal

C.

Clean, potable water

D.

Toweling or rags, clean, lint-free

2.4 EQUIPMENT A.

Buckets, molded rubber or plastic, such as the "Fortex" molded rubber pail - 12 or 14 quart size, or Rubbermaid

B.

Washing brushes: Available from local janitorial supply houses or hardware stores 1. Tampico fiber set in a hardwood block 2. "Whitewash brush" - ideal for most purposes 3. "Parts washing" brush - useful for small areas and crevices

C.

Rubber gloves and rain gear, if desired

D.

Garden hose

E.

Eye and skin protection

F.

Heavy gloves and protective gear

G.

Soft natural bristle brushes

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 7/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products.

B.

Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from Metal restoration work. 1.

2. 3. 4.

5.

6. 7.

Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact. Do not clean metal during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of marble restoration work. Provide ventilation to eliminate the spread of fumes to unaffected spaces. Protect unpainted metal from contact with alkali chemical cleaners by covering them either with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

C.

Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.

D.

Surface Preparation For Brass Plate Cleaning: 1.

3.2 A.

3.3

Before cleaning, determine if your brass surface is solid or plated: a. A magnet will stick to the steel beneath brass plating; it will not stick to solid brass. b. Solid brass can withstand much harsher treatment than brass plating can.

EXAMINATION Before proceeding with steps to clean brass, examine the surface(s) to determine the extent of the work required. Look for: 1. Broken, cracked, missing, distorted or loose parts. 2. Coating failures such as chips, losses, peeling, cracks, bubbling and wear. Corrosion - caused by moisture, deicing salts, acids, soils, gypsum plasters, magnesium oxychloride cements, ashes, clinkers and sulfur components. METAL CLEANING WITH WATER

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 8/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Fill one or two buckets with about two gallons of water. NOTE: Water washing alone will remove most common dirt and grime; however, at times supplemental materials will be needed to remove the deposits. 1. For Bronze: Add BTA to wash water to make a 1 to 3% solution of BTA to water. 2. For Detergent Washing: Add 1 to 3 ounces of detergent per gallon of water. B. Beginning at the top and gradually working down, scrub the metal surface lightly with the fiber brush to remove any superficial deposits. Take care to avoid scratching or otherwise damaging the protective coating. C. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water. 1. For Cast Iron: Rinse with 2% aqueous solution of "Versene". D. Dry with clean, lint-free toweling or rags. E. For tenacious mineral deposits or exudations of core material, treat locally with gentle abrasion using very fine bronze wool. Exercise great care to avoid damaging the coating and patina.

3.4

BRASS PLATE CLEANING

C.

Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. Brass-plate is a thin layer of brass bonded to steel. Solid brass is more durable than brass-plate and, therefore, can withstand more rigorous methods of cleaning.

D.

Brass may be unfinished or lacquered. Architectural brass hardware and trim is generally maintained in a highly polished, "bright" finish.

1. Unfinished brass MUST be polished frequently in order to maintain its luster. All polishing, however, removes some brass. 2. Lacquered brass will usually last about 10 years and does NOT require frequent polishing. 3. Lacquer protects the brass finish from deterioration, though some brilliance of its surface characteristics is sacrificed. Removal and reapplication of the lacquer, however, will not harm the brass surface. NOTE: WHEN CLEANING, TRY TO RETAIN THE BRASS PATINA, AS THIS PROTECTS THE BRASS FROM FURTHER CORROSION. NOTE: BRASS PLATE IS ALMOST ALWAYS PROTECTED WITH A CLEAR COATING. CAUTION: DO NOT USE STEEL WOOL OR METAL SCRAPERS ON BRASS PLATE. ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 9/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A. For unlacquered brass plate: 1. Clean with mild detergent or ammonia and a soft cloth. DO NOT USE ABRASIVES. Wear plastic gloves to prevent getting fingerprints on the surface. 2. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a clean, soft cloth. DO NOT BUFF BRASS-PLATE; THE PLATING WILL COME OFF. B. For lacquered brass plate: 1. Clean using ONLY a mild detergent and water. CAUTION: DO NOT USE AMMONIA-BASED CLEANERS ON LACQUERED BRASS. THEY WILL DETERIORATE THE COATING. 2. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a clean, soft cloth. C. For brass plate that is heavily tarnished: 1. Use a mild commercial polish such as "Simichrome", "Wenol", "Flitz" (Flitz International, Ltd.), or approved equal. NOTE: TEST POLISH FIRST IN A SMALL, INCONSPICUOUS AREA. 2. Wipe down cleaned and polished piece with lacquer thinner to remove all traces of cleaning solutions and polish.

3.5

DIRT REMOVAL

A. Brush apply chemical cleaner to ornamental metal surface in the concentration recommended by the manufacturer. B. Agitate surface with either steel wool or synthetic cleaning pad. Follow direction of grain in metal. Do not scratch or abrade surface. C. Thoroughly sponge or cloth rinse surface with clean water to remove chemical cleaner and loosened dirt. D. Machine or hand polish metal where indicated with buffing wheel or soft cloth using polishing compound typically recommended as standard industry practice and as approved by the RHPO. E. Repeat process as required to produce desired effect. F. Wipe surface completely dry with clean soft cloths. Do not touch cleaned ornamental metal surfaces. G. Immediately apply two coats of protective lacquer finish to surface.

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 10/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PREPARATION OF HISTORIC WOOD AND METAL SURFACES FOR PAINTING 3.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Methods used for preparation of historic wood and metal surfaces for painting shall be the gentlest possible to achieve the desired results. Historic substrate materials shall not be damaged or marred in the process of surface preparations. Samples of the existing paint finishes shall be collected and analyzed for the purpose of documentation or matching. Material and application requirements for paints are covered in Section 09900 PAINTING, GENERAL. 3.7 VENTILATION A. Interior work zones having a volume of 280 cubic meters 10,000 cubic feet or less shall be ventilated at a minimum of 2 air exchanges per hour. Ventilation in larger work zones shall be maintained by means of mechanical exhaust. Solvent vapors shall be exhausted outdoors, away from air intakes and workers. Return air inlets in the work zone shall be temporarily sealed before start of work until the prepared surfaces have dried. Operators and personnel in the vicinity of paint removal processes involving chemicals or mechanical action (sanding or blasting) shall wear respirators. 3.8 PROTECTION OF AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Items not to be painted which are in contact with or adjacent to painted surfaces shall be removed or protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Items removed prior to painting shall be replaced when painting is completed. Following completion of painting, workers skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Surfaces contaminated by preparation materials shall be restored to original condition. 3.9 CLEANING OF SURFACES A. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of grease, dirt, dust and other foreign matter before application of paint or surface treatments. After cleaning, surfaces shall exhibit a surface disfigurement rating of 7 or greater when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. Dirt and surface contaminants shall be cleaned by brush with solutions of water and detergent or trisodium phosphate, then rinsed clean with water and let dry. Surfaces on which mildew or other microbiological growth is present shall be cleaned with a detergent solution containing household bleach. Oil and grease shall be removed with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning solvents shall be of low toxicity with a flashpoint in excess of 38 degrees C. 100 degrees F. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on newly prepared or newly painted surfaces. 3.10 EXISTING PAINT A. Existing paint shall be tested for adhesion to substrate per ASTM D 3359, Test Method A and shall obtain a rating of 4 or better in order to be considered sound. Existing paint meeting this requirement may be considered a satisfactory base for repainting.

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 11/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.11 PAINT REMOVAL A. Flaking, cracking, blistering, peeling or otherwise deteriorated paint shall be removed by scraping with hand scrapers. After scraping, removal of large areas of paint or paint on architectural details shall be accomplished using sanders, heat guns or heat plates, or chemical paint removers. Paint shall be removed to bare substrate or first sound paint layer. Open flame heat devices shall not be used. Mechanical paint removal shall not damage or mar the substrate material. B.

Chemical Paint Removers Chemical paint removers shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If chemical strippers are used, substrate shall be neutralized after stripping to a pH of 5 to 8.5.

C.

Lead Paint In preparation of lead-based painted surfaces for repainting, procedures described in Section 13281 LEAD HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES shall be followed.

3.12 SURFACE PREPARATION After cleaning and removal of deteriorated paint, edges of remaining chipped paint shall be feather-edged and sanded smooth. Damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned per Spec section ____. Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214, the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8. New, proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings. If existing surfaces are glossy, the gloss shall be reduced. 3.13 METAL SURFACES A. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter. Programs for preparation of metal shall be per SSPC PA Guide 5. Grease, oil, and other soluble contaminants shall be removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP 1. Surfaces shall be free from soils and corrosion; e.g. grease, oil, solder flux, welding flux, weld spatter, sand, rust, scale, and other contaminants that might interfere with the application of the new finish. Cleaning methods shall be the gentlest possible to achieve the desired result. Metals which are soft, thin, or exhibit fine detail shall not be abrasively cleaned. Evidence of corrosion or contamination on a previously cleaned surface shall be cause for recleaning prior to painting. B.

Ferrous Surfaces Ferrous surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances shall be cleaned mechanically with hand tools according to SSPC SP 2, power tools according to SSPC SP 3 or by blast cleaning according to [SSPC SP 5/NACE 1], [SSPC SP 6/NACE 3], [SSPC SP 7/NACE 4], [SSPC SP 10/NACE 2]. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection.

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 12/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Nonferrous Metallic Surfaces Galvanized, aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 1. Aluminum Aluminum surfaces shall be treated per ASTM D 1730 or ASTM D 1731. Steel wool, steel brushes and uninhibited caustic etching solutions, such as sodium hydroxide, shall not be used on aluminum. 2. Zinc Zinc surfaces including zinc-coated substrates, shall be cleaned prior to painting as follows: degrease, soak in a mild and inhibited alkaline cleaner, rinse with clean overflowing water, clean anodically in an acid (e.g. 0.25 to 0.75 percent sulfuric acid), and rinse with clean overflowing water.

3.14 TIMING Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and otherwise prepared for painting shall be given a coat of the specified first coat as soon as practical after such pretreatment has been completed, but prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface. Unless otherwise directed, the first coat primer shall be applied within 48 hours of surface preparation. 3.15 SURFACES TO BE PREPARED FOR PAINTING Surfaces shall be prepared as specified and as shown in the painting schedule. 3.16

ADJUSTING/CLEANING

A.

During the work, remove from the site discarded cleaning and coating materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day.

B.

Upon completion of coating work, remove all protective coverings and coatings, and clean window glass and other coating-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by proper methods as recommended by coating manufacturer, using care not to damage adjacent surfaces.

C.

Cloths, cotton waste and other debris that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers and removed at the end of each day. Containers shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an approved manner. Preparation materials and other deposits on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left clean and ready for painting.

END OF SECTION 05910

ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING

05910 - 13/13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05811 - ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes architectural joint systems for building interiors and exteriors. SUBMITTALS

A.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

B.

Shop Drawings: Provide placement drawings, including line diagrams and details, and a tabular schedule of architectural joint systems.

1.3 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Product Options: Drawings are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1.

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval.

B.

Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.

C.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural joint system and fire-barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 1.

B.

Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.

Moisture Barriers:

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS

05811 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. C.

2.2 A.

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL General: Provide joint systems of design indicated.

2.

Furnish in longest practicable lengths to minimize splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces to provide continuous joint systems.

Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics: 1. 2. 3.

2.3

PVC , minimum 30 mils thick. Santoprene.

Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, and other accessories as required for complete installations.

1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. Movement Capability: As scheduled. Type of Movement: Thermal.

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.

B.

Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems: 1.

Basis-of-Design Products: Construction Specialties Inc.; “GFPS-200” with “RFX2F” fire barrier.

2.

Type: Metal center plate with gasket seal. a.

Exposed Metal: Aluminum . 1)

b. 3. C.

Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.

Seal Material: Santoprene .

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hours.

Wall-to-Ceiling and Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint Systems: 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Construction Specialties, Inc.; “FWS-200.”

2.

Type: Metal frame withextruded thermoplastic seal .

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS

05811 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a.

Exposed Metal: Aluminum . 1)

b.

A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products or a comparable product by one of the following: Architectural Art Mfg., Inc. Capital Services. Construction Specialties, Inc. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. E-Poxy Engineered Materials, LLC. Erie Metal Specialties. R. J. Watson, Inc. Schul International, Inc. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.

Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Horizontal Surfaces: 1. 2.

Basis-of-Design Product: Construction Specialties, Inc.; “GFRW-200.” Type: Metal frame with extruded gasket and recessed metal center plate. a.

Exposed Metal: Aluminum . 1)

b.

Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.

Seal Material: Santoprene. 1)

2.5

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B.

Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.

Seal Material: Extruded flexible PVC . 1)

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

FINISHES

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS

05811 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout.

C.

Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction.

D.

Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B.

Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

C.

Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 1. 2.

D.

A.

Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 1.

3.3

Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Support underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in service. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.

Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.

PROTECTION Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS

05811 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.

END OF SECTION 05811

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS

05811 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: Exterior ornamental railings. 1. Steel and iron decorative railings.

B.

Related Sections: 1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair. 2. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 3. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated with monumental stairs. 4. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for new cast iron historic railings.

1.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. b. c.

2.

Infill of Guards: a. b.

C.

1.3 A.

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups.

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

05721 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 1.4 A.

Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

E.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F.

Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

G.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

H.

Preconstruction test reports.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval.

B.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

05721 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Steel and Iron Decorative Railings: a. b. c.

2.2 A.

2.3

Architectural Iron Designs, Inc. Bavarian Iron Works Co.; TT Triebenbacher. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.

METALS, GENERAL Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. STEEL AND IRON

A.

Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B.

Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

C.

Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D.

Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 A.

FASTENERS Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

with

B.

Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors .

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

05721 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

B.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C.

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

D.

Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: [Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#26] [Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134].

E.

Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

F.

Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.

G.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

H.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6

FABRICATION

A.

General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B.

Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1.

At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

D.

Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.

E.

Form changes in direction By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

F.

Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

G.

Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

H.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

05721 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC I.

2.7 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanized Railings: 1. 2. 3.

Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

B.

For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C.

Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

D.

Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E.

Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1.

F.

High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1. 1.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. 2.

B.

Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with grout.

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

05721 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with grout.

D.

Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose.

E.

Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry as indicated on Drawings.

F.

Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. 1. 2.

G.

Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. 2.

H.

Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage]. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 05721

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

05721 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

05720 - NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This procedure includes guidance on replacing deteriorated handrails and railing systems with new or original factory refurbished brass, steel or iron ornamental rails to match the historic. B. Related Sections: 1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair. 2. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 3. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated with monumental stairs. 4. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior ornamental pipe and tube railings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), 1000 - 16th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20036.

C. Steel Structures Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA 15213. D.

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), 221 N. LaSalle Street, Chicago, IL 60601.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: B. For cold-formed structural steel: AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 1/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by using metals that are compatible with one another. In some instances the corrosion can be prevented by inserting a plastic insulator between the dissimilar materials. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over-stressing of components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1. Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer handrails and railing systems by qualified professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located. C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for handrails and railings similar in material, design,

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 2/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

and extent to that indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful inservice performance. D. Restoration Specialist: Work must be performed by a firm having not less than 5 years successful experience in comparable restoration projects and employing personnel skilled in the restoration processes and operations indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Mount handrails only on completed surfaces. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Stan Chemical Company 401 Berlin Street East Berlin, CT 06023 203/828-0571 2.2 MATERIALS A. NOTE: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying with the following requirements: 1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade B, unless otherwise indicated or required by structural loads.

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 3/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C. For exterior installations and as required, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53. D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. E. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grout and Anchoring Cement: 1. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this procedure such as "Bonsal Construction Grout" (W. R Bonsal Co.), "DiamondCrete Grout" (Concrete Service Materials Co.), "Euco N-S Grout" (Euclid Chemical Co.), or approved equal. B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. C. Paint: 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with SSPC-Paint-20. 2. Zinc Chromate Primer D. Fasteners: 1. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings. a. For steel railings and fittings use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 2. For copper alloy railings provide fasteners fabricated from same base metal as railing components or from type 304. 3. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: a. Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. b. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for their attachment to other work except where exposed fasteners are unavoidable. 4. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 4/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E. Cast-In-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Cast-in-place anchors and expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Form changes in direction of railing members by insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings, by radius bends of radius as designated, and by bending, as required. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. E. Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface match those adjacent. F. Non-welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of members by means of railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this represents manufacturer's standard splicing method. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for connection of handrail and railing members to other construction. H. Provide inserts and the anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 5/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

withstanding loadings imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. I.

For existing cast iron posts to be reset in concrete: Examine existing anchors to determine if suitable for reuse. Do not reuse unless in good condition. Provide new anchors where necessary of same configurations as existing.

J. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. K. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. M. For handrails and railing systems that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members. N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. O. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members by use of manufacturer's standard prefabricated end fittings. P. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of the railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less. Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate filler of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. R. Finishes: 1. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. 2. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are not acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 3. Buffed Finish: CDA M21 (Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth specular). 4. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: CDA M21 Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth specular; Coating: clear organic, air dry, such as "Incralac" (Stan Chemical Company), or approved equal.

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 6/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Apply by air-spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's directions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1.0 mil. S.

Galvanized Finish: 1. General: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made form rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips. 2. For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel tubing with galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

T. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply air-dried primer immediately following cleaning and pretreatment, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils per applied coat, to surfaces that will be exposed after assembly and installation and to concealed, nongalvanized surfaces. 1. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of handrails and railing components, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. 2. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, "universal" primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.2 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION A. General: 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of handrails and railings. Set handrails and railing accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. TAKE CARE SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE ADJACENT HISTORIC MATERIALS, SUCH AS MARBLE, GRANITE, OR LIMESTONE.

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 7/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, which will be in contact with grout, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer. F. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by structural loads. MATCH ORIGINAL LOCATION AND SPACING TO AVOID GHOST MARKS. G. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railing to in-place construction. INSPECT AND REUSE SOUND CONNECTIONS WHEN POSSIBLE. H. Railing Connections: 1. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact or use manufacturer's standard fitting designed for this purpose. I.

Non-Welded Connections: Use manufacturer's standard mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed lock screws using plastic filler cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing systems.

J. Anchoring Posts: 1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. a. Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout: Exterior anchors, if in good condition, may be reused b. if suitable. To be set in new concrete stairs. NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 8/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

K. Interior posts may be set in existing anchor holes if suitable. L. Cover interior anchorage joint with a flange of the same metal as post; attach to post by welding after placement of anchoring material. M. Leave exterior anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. N. For steel railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. O. Anchoring Rail Ends: 1. Anchor rail ends to concrete and masonry with required flanges, connected to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with post-installed anchors and bolts. P. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with required flanges. Weld flanges to rail ends, and bolt flanges to metal surfaces. Q. Attachment of Handrails to Walls: INSPECT AND RE-USE SOUND CONNECTIONS WHEN POSSIBLE. ALSO WHEN POSSIBLE, MATCH ORIGINAL LOCATION AND SPACING TO AVOID GHOST MARKS. 1. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. R. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. S. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. T. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lab bolt, as applicable. U. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads. V. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during cleaning period by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 9/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05720

NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC

05720 - 10/10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05710 - MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

1.2

1.3

SECTION INCLUDES A.

Monumental stair framing.

B.

Ornamental railing system.

C.

Cladding for monumental stair.

D.

Handrails.

RELATED SECTIONS A.

Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B.

Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.

C.

Section 05100 - Structural Steel.

D.

Section 05730 - Ornamental Formed Metal.

E.

See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.

F.

See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.

G.

See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for new cast iron historic railings.

H.

See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior ornamental pipe and tube railings.

I. J.

Section 09310 – Ceramic Tile: Tile infill in treads and landings.

K.

Section 09912 - Interior Painting.

L.

Section 16510 – Interior Lighting; for lighting underneath stairs.

REFERENCES A.

Aluminum Association (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

B.

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Manual of Steel Construction.

C.

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specification for Design of Cold

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION Formed Steel Structural Members.

1.4

D.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

E.

AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2002.

F.

NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; 1992, Fifth Edition.

G.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 - Structural Steel. 2. A167 - Seamless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 3. A307 - Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 4. A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 5. A569 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled, Commercial Quality. 6. A570 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. 7. B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape and Tube. 8. C1048 - Heat Treated Flat Glass, Coated and Uncoated Glass.

H.

Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork.

I.

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Structural Design: Comply with AISC and ANSI requirements.

B.

Stair: Design stair assembly to support the following loads: 1. Uniform Live Load: 100 pounds (45 kg) minimum per square foot of projected plan area. 2. Concentrated Live Load: 300 pounds (136 kg) minimum applied anywhere on tread. 3. Dead Load: Weight of stair, railing system, concrete fill, and finishes. 4. Use defection limits appropriate for types of applied finish materials.

C.

Railing: Design railing assemblies to withstand the following loads: 1. Minimum uniform lateral loading of 50 pounds (23 kg) per linear foot (8,8 kN/m). 2. Minimum concentrated lateral load of 200 pounds (91 kg) at any point 42 inches (1067 mm) above finished floor.

D.

Live Load Deflection: Use span measured at horizontal projection of outside

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION stringer. Tread finishes may require higher deflection limits. 1. 1/180 of span maximum. 2. 1/240 of span maximum. 3. 1/360 of span maximum. E.

1.5

1.6

1.7

Cantilevered Stairs: Support stair at top and bottom landings only without intermediate columns or hangers.

SUBMITTALS A.

Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B.

Product Data: Manufacturer's Product Data substantiating compliance with Contract Documents. Include manufacturer's installation instructions.

C.

Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for stairs and railings. 1. Include plans, elevations, and details. 2. Show connection and accessory items and locations for anchor and bolt installation. 3. Include design loads, structural calculations, and material properties. 4. Provide Shop Drawings signed and sealed by structural engineer licensed in the state and jurisdiction in which Project is located.

D.

Samples: Submit the following Samples: 1. 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) size glass illustrating color, thickness, and edge conditions. 2. 12 inch (305 mm) long section of handrail illustrating color, finish ,sheet and connection detail. 3. 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) section of each type of metal indicating finish.

E.

Maintenance Instructions: Provide cleaning and maintenance instructions for each type of finish material.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Single Source Responsibility: Work of this section shall be designed, fabricated, shipped and installed by a single source company which has specialized in ornamental handrails and railings with ten years minimum experience.

B.

Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be performed by the fabricator or a company acceptable to the fabricator.

C.

Templates: Supply installation templates, required reinforcing, and recessed anchorage devices in timely fashion to installers of related work that will receive products of this section.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.8

A.

Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B.

Store in a weathertight location and protect from corrosion, distortion, and other damage during delivery storage and handling.

SCHEDULING A.

Coordinate delivery and installation of stair on project schedule as specified in section 01310.

B.

Allow sufficient time for fabrication, delivery, and erection of stair after building structure is in place and field dimensions are taken.

C.

Allow sufficient time for closing in of building after delivery of stair and for installation of finishes and related work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

2.2

Available Manufacturers: Couturier Iron Craft, Inc., 5050 West River Drive, P. O. Box 308, Comstock Park, MI 49321-0308. ASD. Toll Free Tel: (800) 670-6123. Tel: (616) 784-6780. Fax: (616)784-5077. Web: www.couturierironcraft.com.or equal.

MATERIALS A.

Steel: 1. Shapes, Plate, and Bar: ASTM A 36. 2. Sheet: ASTM A569 or ASTM A 570. 3. Pipe: Welded and seamless steel pipe. ASTM A 53. 4. Tubing: Cold formed. ASTM A 500; hot rolled, ASTM a 501. 5. Iron Castings: Malleable ASTM A 47.

B.

Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526, G 90 coating.

C.

Material: Stainless steel tubing. 1. Tubing Diameter: 1.9 inches (48 mm). 2. Thickness: 16 gage; 0.065 inches (1.7 mm). 3. Elbows and Tees: Flush design. 4. Dimensions and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Assembly: Welded. 6. Decorative Flanges for Embedded Posts: a. Circular, collard cover plate, no screw holes, for setting in concrete. 7. Wall Mounted Components: Components necessary to support railing with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance from wall, and as follows: a. Underslung support brackets: Supports at maximum 60 inches (1524 mm).

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION b.

8. 9.

2.3

2.4

2.5

Wall return without support: Terminates 1/4 inch (6 mm) from side wall. c. Fasteners: Concealed. Picket Rail Components: Pickets of 5/8 inch (15 mm) stainless steel, shape and lengths as indicated. Finish: Stainless No. 4 satin.

STRUCTURAL GLASS RAILING SYSTEM A.

Railings: Tempered glass structural balusters mounted in aluminum bottom rail, with metal top rail and accessories. 1. Mounting: As detailed on Drawings.

B.

Glass: 1/2 inch (12 mm) tempered float glass.

C.

Handrails: Metal tubing handrail fastened to glass balusters at heights indicated. 1. Material: Satin finish stainless steel, 1.9 inches (48 mm) diameter. 2. End Caps: Match handrails. 3. Brackets: Custom cast wall brackets, matching handrails. 4. Dimensions and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.

ACCESSORIES A.

Primer: Corrosion resistant metal primer.

B.

Anchors and Bolts: ASTM A307.

C.

Fasteners: Type best suited for application.

D.

Welding Material: Comply with AWS D1.1.

E.

Grout: Non-shrink, high strength.

F.

Clear sealer: Clear, tarnish resistant, acrylic lacquer.

FABRICATION A.

Manufacturer shall verify site dimensions prior to shop fabrication.

B.

Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted, flush, and secure.

C.

Fit and fabricate assembled sections in largest practical sizes, for handling through building openings.

D.

Grind exposed edges flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E.

Stair Components:

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.6

Stringers: 2 stringers, 1 on each side of stair. Treads: Steel pan for concrete fill specified in Section 03300; Ceramic Tile specified in Section 09310. Riser: Closed type; with metal mesh. Soffit: Enclose underside of stair with finish as specified in Section 05500.

F.

Railings and Handrails: 1. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A554, Type 304. 2. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes, and Moldings: ASTM A276, Type 304.

G.

Structural Glass Railings: 1. Glass Base: Extruded aluminum, Couturier EB4. a. At stairs and landings: Recess glass into stringers. b. At floor openings: 4 inch (102 mm) high base. c. At floor openings: Mount flush with floor. 2. Handrails, Balusters, and Cap Rail: Material size, profile and height indicated on the Drawings. 3. Handrail Brackets: Manufacturer's standard metal bracket matching rail.

H.

Cladding: 1. General: Provide cladding with smooth, flat surfaces free from damage or disfiguration, of premium quality workmanship. 2. Material: Use material thickness that will provide required appearance as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Attachment: Provide sub-framing, retainers, and supports as required for proper installation of cladding without exposed fasteners. 4. Locations: Clad exposed surfaces of stringers, railing base members and fascia at floor openings.

FINISHES A.

Exposed Stainless Steel: NAMM No. 4 Satin finish.

B.

Exposed Aluminum: Provide the following finish on exposed aluminum surfaces. 1. Painted: Prime paint and finish as follows: a. Shop applied finish.

C.

Provide protection against galvanic action between dissimilar metals, and between metal and concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Verify that field measurements are acceptable to suit stair assembly tolerances.

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590 Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.2

3.3

3.4

B.

Verify supports and anchors are correctly and securely positioned.

C.

Start of installation indicates installer's acceptance of substrate and conditions.

INSTALLATION A.

Install stair assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B.

Anchor components rigidly and securely to building structure, plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects.

C.

Fit exposed connections to form tight hairline joints.

D.

Weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of size limitations. 1. Perform field welding of steel in accordance with AWS D 1.1. Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding. 2. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. 3. Touch up shop primer.

ERECTION TOLERANCES A.

Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) for full height of stair.

B.

Maximum Variation from Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3000 mm).

C.

Maximum Angular Variation of the Tread from True Position: 3 degrees.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

Remove manufacturer's protective coverings from exposed surfaces after installation.

B.

Clean surfaces using materials and methods as recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Protect finishes from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings acceptable to the manufacturer.

D.

After installation of system is complete, advise General Contractor of methods necessary for protection until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 05710

MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS

05710 -7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

B.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

Decorative Grilles.

2.

Decorative Railing Caps.

Related Sections: 1.

Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for decorative metal railings.

2.

Division 5 Section “Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates” for ornamental fences.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

2.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.

D.

Patterns, Models, or Plaster Castings: For each custom casting required.

E.

Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

COPPER ALLOYS Extruded Shapes, Bronze: bronze).

ORNAMENTAL METAL

ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural

05700 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B. 2.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Castings, Brass: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass). FASTENERS

A.

Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Copper-Alloy Items: Silicon bronze fasteners. 2. Dissimilar Metals: Stainless-steel fasteners.

B.

Provide Phillips and tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2.3

FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.

B.

Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

C.

Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.

2.4 A.

DECORATIVE MECHANICAL GRILLES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Architectural Grille; Division of Giumenta Corporation. Beaux-Artes. Reggio Register Company, Inc. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.

Fabricate decorative grilles from perforated brass sheet or plate of thickness, size, and pattern indicated. 1.

Drawings indicate perforated metal patterns required and are based on products of one manufacturer. Perforated metal patterns produced by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations are minor and do not change design concept as judged solely by Architect.

2.

Refer to Details 7 and 8 of Drawing Sheet A-7.03.

ORNAMENTAL METAL

05700 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.5 A.

2.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

DECORATIVE RAILING CAP Basis of Design: Alumina Railing Products, Inc, “TC06 2-5/8 inch bronze decorative cap.” 1. Refer to Detail 15 on Drawing Sheet AS-0.03. FINISHES, GENERAL

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

2.7

COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES

A.

Finish designations for copper alloys comply with the system established for designating copper-alloy finish systems defined in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products."

B.

Blackened, Bright Relieved, and Lacquered: M33-O60-M2x-O6x (directionally textured, coarse satin; black, air drying coating; buffed; coating as specified below): 1.

Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction.

B.

Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels.

C.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.

D.

Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.

E.

Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.

F.

Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work.

ORNAMENTAL METAL

05700 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC G.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

END OF SECTION 05700

ORNAMENTAL METAL

05700 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

B.

1.2

Steel pipe and tube railings for railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.

Related Sections: 1.

See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.

2.

See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated with monumental stairs.

3.

See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for new cast iron historic railings.

4.

See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior ornamental pipe and tube railings.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. b. c.

2.

Infill of Guards: a. b.

C.

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05521 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.3 A.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. Railing brackets. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

E.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. b.

2.2 A.

Pisor Industries, Inc. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.

METALS, GENERAL Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05521 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

STEEL AND IRON

A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B.

Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

C.

Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

D.

Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

E.

Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 A.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fasteners: Provide the following: 1. 2.

Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

B.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C.

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

D.

Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

E.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F.

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

G.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

H.

Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

I.

Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: [Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#26] [Water based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134].

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05521 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

J.

Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

K.

Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.

L.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

M.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.5

FABRICATION

A.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B.

Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C.

Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D.

Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

E.

Form changes in direction [by bending] [or] [by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings].

F.

Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.

G.

Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

H.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

I.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1.

At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05521 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.6 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanized Railings: 1. 2. 3.

Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

B.

Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

C.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D.

Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1.

E.

Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1.

2. 3.

B.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05521 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into [preset metal pipe sleeves] [formed or core-drilled holes] and grouting annular space.

D.

Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.

E.

Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.

F.

Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.

G.

Attach railings to wall with wall brackets[, except where end flanges are used]. Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage].

H.

Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

3.2

For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardanttreated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 05521

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05521 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.

Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.

2.

Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.

3.

Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.

B.

Related Sections: 1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair. 2. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated with monumental stairs. 3. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for new cast iron historic railings. 4. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior ornamental pipe and tube railings.

C.

See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.

1.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

C.

1.

Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..

2.

Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..

3.

Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

4.

Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above.

5.

Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a.

METAL STAIRS

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.

05511 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b. c. 2.

Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1.

1.3

Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Infill of Guards: a. b.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For metal stairs.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

3.

Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to

C.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.

Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

METALS Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

METAL STAIRS

05511 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 20 percent.

C.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

E.

Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

2.2 A.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Abrasive Nosings: 1.

Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish.

2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Granite State Casting Co. b. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc. c. Wooster Products Inc.

B.

Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.

C.

Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

D.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

E.

Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 A.

B.

FABRICATION, GENERAL Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1.

Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2.

Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

3.

Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.

Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

METAL STAIRS

05511 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.

E.

Weld connections to comply with the following: 1.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2.

Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3.

Remove welding flux immediately.

4.

Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

5.

At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint .

F.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G.

Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.4 A.

B.

C.

STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Alfab, Inc.

2.

American Stair, Inc.

3.

Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).

Stair Framing: 1.

Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.

2.

Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements .

3.

If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

4.

Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.

5.

Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch.

METAL STAIRS

05511 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.5 A.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication.

STAIR RAILINGS Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1.

Rails and Posts: square posts.

1-5/8-inch- diameter

top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-

2.

Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.

Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1.

Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

C.

Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

D.

Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling.

E.

Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.

G.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 1.

H.

2.6

Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.

Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. FINISHES

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Finish metal stairs after assembly.

C.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning ."

METAL STAIRS

05511 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B.

Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D.

Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

E.

Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.

F. 3.2 A.

Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.

Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt . ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 05511

METAL STAIRS

05511 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. 2. 3.

1.2 A.

A.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Loose steel lintels. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. 1.3

Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. Shelf angles. Metal ladders. Metal floor plate and supports. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

Prefabricated building columns. Metal nosings and treads. Paint products. Grout.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1.

Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2

METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: blemishes.

Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without

FERROUS METALS

A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 20 percent.

B.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C.

Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E.

Steel Pipe: indicated.

F.

Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. 2.

2.3

ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise

Size of Channels: As indicated. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.

FASTENERS

A.

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.

B.

Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors .

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. D.

2.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

B.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C.

Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

D.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G.

Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5

FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E.

Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F.

Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c.

2.6

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A.

General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B.

Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

2.7

SHELF ANGLES

A.

Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B.

For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C.

Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D.

Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

E.

Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8

METAL LADDERS

A.

General: 1. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.

B.

Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches apart. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 1-inch- diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung. 6. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.9 A.

METAL FLOOR PLATE Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate. 1.

B. 2.10 A.

2.11

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Thickness: As indicated.

Provide steel angle supports as indicated. LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A.

Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B.

Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

C.

Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.12 A.

2.13

STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. FINISHES, GENERAL

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B.

Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Preparation for Shop Priming: indicated below: 1. 2.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Prepare surfaces to comply with

requirements

Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2

INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A.

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B.

Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C. 3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Roof framing. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.

Design Loads: As follows: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

1.3

Dead Loads: Weights of materials and construction. Live Loads: Minimum 30 psf. Roof Loads: 30 psf. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.. b. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. c. Roof Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 1/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1.

For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. This includes but not limited to roof framing.

D.

Welding certificates.

E.

Qualification data.

F.

Product test reports.

G.

Research/evaluation reports.

1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

B.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for ColdFormed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. 2.

Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B.

Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. 2.

Grade: As required by structural performance . Coating: G90 or equivalent .

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 2/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. Section Properties: Conform to AISI specifications and standards.

B.

Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.

C.

Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

2.3 A.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. Flange Width: 2 inches. Section Properties: Conform to AISI specifications and standards.

EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. Section Properties: Conform to AISI specifications and standards.

B.

Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.

C.

Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

D.

Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.

E.

Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

2.4 A.

ROOF FRAMING Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 3/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. B.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. Flange Width: 2 inches , minimum. Section Properties: Conform to AISI specifications and standards.

Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists. Flange Width: 2 inches, minimum.

FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A.

Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

C.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C .

D.

Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E.

Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F.

Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, selftapping steel drill screws. 1.

2.6

Head Type: elsewhere.

Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B.

Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C.

Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 4/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

B.

Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B.

Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

C.

Install framing members in one-piece lengths.

D.

Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

E.

Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

F.

Install insulation, specified inDivision 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

G.

Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

H.

Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1.

Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 5/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3 A.

LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Anchor Spacing: 32 inches.

Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1.

Stud Spacing: 12 inches.

C.

Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D.

Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E.

Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F.

Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

G.

Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1.

2.

H.

Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1.

I.

Where

If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches. intersection. 1.

Fasten at each stud

Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 6/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J.

Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

K.

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.4

EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A.

Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B.

Fasten both flanges of studs to[ top and] bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1.

Stud Spacing: 16 inches.

C.

Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D.

Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. 2. 3.

E.

Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building structure.

Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1.

Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a.

2.

Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers.

Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 7/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

4. F.

3.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system. JOIST INSTALLATION

A.

Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B.

Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. 2.

C.

Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows: 1.

Joist Spacing: 12 inches.

D.

Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

E.

Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1.

F.

Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. 2.

G.

Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 8/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC H.

3.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C.

Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D.

Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E.

Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A.

Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 05400

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 - 9/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Composite floor deck. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C.

Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

D.

Product certificates.

E.

Welding certificates.

F.

Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

G.

Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

STEEL DECK

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

05310 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

D.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B.

Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A.

2.3

MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers’ plants shall reside within 500 miles of the project site. COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: 3 inches. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. ACCESSORIES

A.

General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B.

Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C.

Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbonsteel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D.

Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

STEEL DECK

or

05310 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F.

Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section, and as indicated.

B.

Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

C.

Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

D.

Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

E.

Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

F.

Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

G.

Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

H.

End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2 inches.

I.

Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

J.

Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

3.2 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

STEEL DECK

05310 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C.

Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D.

Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E.

Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.3 A.

REPAIRS Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 05310

STEEL DECK

05310 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes structural steel and grout.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

DEFINITIONS Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. 2.

B. 1.4

Division 5 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated . Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittal: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

D.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator and testing agency.

E.

Welding certificates.

F.

Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC G. 1.5

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Source quality-control reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B.

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D.

Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. 2. 3.

E.

personnel

according

to

AISC 303. AISC 360. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 50 percent.

B.

W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M .

C.

Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.

D.

Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.

E.

Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

F.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

G.

Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 A.

BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, coldfinished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

C.

Unheaded Anchor Rods: weldable]. 1. 2.

D.

Finish: Plain .

Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M . 1.

2.3

Configuration: Hooked. Finish: Plain .

Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , straight. 1.

E.

[ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55,

Finish: Plain .

PRIMER

A.

Primer: Comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

B.

Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I , zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

C.

Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.4 A.

2.5

GROUT Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. FABRICATION

A.

Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

B.

Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

2.6 A.

SHOP CONNECTIONS High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. B.

2.7 A.

SHOP PRIMING Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

2. 3. 4. 5.

2.8 A.

Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. Surfaces to be field welded. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). Galvanized surfaces.

Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. 2.

C.

Joint Type: Slip critical.

Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1.

B.

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.

Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B.

Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C.

Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D.

Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1.

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3. 4.

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

ERECTION

A.

Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B.

Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. 2. 3.

4.

C.

3.3 A.

Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." FIELD CONNECTIONS High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1.

Joint Type: Slip critical.

STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1.

3.4

RSD/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B.

Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C.

Welded Connections: AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1.

In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. b.

c. d. D.

Field welds will be visually inspected according to

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 04904 - MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.

Removing efflorescence from masonry Removing soluble salts from within brick and stone masonry. Two methods of salt removal - or desalination - are described and include the application of a clay poultice and the application of a sand:lime render.

B.

Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

C.

Unit Prices: Clay masonry restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A.

Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).

B.

Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi (2750 to 5500 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).

C.

High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi (5500 to 8250 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).

1.4

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material 2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: 1.

Each type of chemical cleaner.

D.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E.

Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration work. 1.

F.

Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used. 1.

1.5 A.

If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. 2.

At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for cleaning work and 1 for repair work. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress.

B.

Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.

C.

Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. Masonry effluorescence removal: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of masonry material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample panels into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) in area for each type of clay masonry and surface condition. a.

4. 5. 6.

Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 30 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of masonry cleaning. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

D.

Preconstruction Testing: Contractor will engage an independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement brick for testing.

E.

Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests.

F.

Source of Materials: Obtain materials for masonry effluorescence removal from a single source for each type of material required to ensure a match of continuous quality.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.

B.

Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.

C.

Store materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

D.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

1.7 A.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.8

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.

Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work.

B.

Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Remove plant growth. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. Clean masonry surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT

A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Materials for removing effluorescence: a. Clean, potable water 2. Materials for removing dissolved salts: a. Clean natural fiber rags b. Poulticing Materials: 1) Filler material for poultice: Use absorbent clay or diatomaceous earth (attapulgite or sepiolite clay). c. Distilled water d. Sacrificial Render Materials: 1) Lime putty 2) Sand e. Clean, potable water

B.

Equipment: 1. Equipment for removing effluorescence: a. Garden hose and nozzle b. Stiff bristle brushes (nonmetallic) c. Wood or plastic scrapers 2. Equipment for removing dissolved salts: a. Plastic sheeting b. Poultice Equipment: 1) Plasterer's float or broad trowel 2) Galvanized wire mesh 3) Galvanized staples 4) Pliers 5) Plastic sacks

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Sacrificial Render Equipment: 1) Mesh screens 2) Plasterer's float or broad trowel 3) Hacksaw blade

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products. 1. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry restoration work. 2. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact. 3. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 4. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. 5. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

B.

Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of masonry restoration work. 1. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. 2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry.

3.2

CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL

A.

Revise below to suit building configuration and job conditions.

B.

Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the building for each scaffold drop.

C.

Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. 1. Use natural-fiber brushes only.

D.

Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry.

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Equip units with pressure gauges.

E.

For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees.

F.

For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F (60 and 71 deg C) at flow rates indicated.

G.

Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.

3.3

REMOVING EFFLUORESCENCE

A.

Before proceeding with steps to remove efflorescence, first decide the cause and extent of the problem and make repairs as required:

B.

Determine the location of the efflorescence. Examination may show where the water is entering.

C.

Examine the condition of the masonry:

D.

Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings that could allow water to enter the building.

E.

Carefully note the condition and profile of the mortar joints.

F.

Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding with the cleaning operations.

G.

Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.

H.

Examine laboratory test reports on the materials. The problem may stem from the composition or misuse of the material.

3.4

APPLICATION

A.

Dry brush the surface with a stiff bristle (nonmetallic) brush, or wash it with clean, clear water from a garden hose, supplemented by scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush if necessary.

B.

Remove sulfate crusts using a heavy wooden scraper.

C.

If efflorescence is a persistent problem, it may be necessary to reduce the level of soluble salts present within the masonry, outlined below.

3.5 A.

REMOVING DISSOLVED SALTS: Applying a Clay Poultice: 1. Saturate the wall for several days by spraying with mists of clean, clear water.

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Mist the water evenly over the masonry surface at 18 gallons per hour from fine spray heads mounted to a boom. b. The length of time it takes to fully saturate the wall will depend on the type of masonry, and its porosity (typically 72 hours). c. Collect water run-off and drain safely away from the building during the cleaning process. When the wall is thoroughly saturated, mix filler material with enough distilled water to form a soft, sticky paste. Mix by hand or use a small mechanical mixer. Add the clay to the water, not water to clay. Apply the poultice to the saturated wall in a single layer (no more than 1 inch thick) using a plasterer's float or broad trowel. To help bond the clay to the wall surface, press a light-gauge galvanized wire mesh into the poultice and tack it carefully into joints with galvanized staples. Protect the treated area from direct sun or rain with tarpaulins as needed. Allow the poultice to remain in place about 1 month. As the poultice dries, the clay will eventually lighten in color, crack, shrink and detach from the wall. Remove the staples using pliers and roll up the clay and wire mesh. Discard materials safely from the site. Thoroughly rinse the treated area with clean, clear water and allow to dry. Repeat the cycle of wetting and poulticing as needed to reduce the salts to an acceptable level; Repointing may be required at the end of the desalination treatment.

OR: B.

3.6 A.

Applying a Sand:Lime Sacrificial Render: 1. Thoroughly saturate the wall with clean, clear water. 2. Mix 1 part slaked and screened lime putty with 4 parts fine sand. 3. Apply the sacrificial render at least 1/2 inch thick to both sides of the wall (if possible) to a height of 2 inches above the salt crystallization/evaporation zone. 4. As the render surface begins to stiffen, roughen it with the fine-toothed edge of a hacksaw blade. The salts from the wall will migrate into the render. As the salts crystalize, the render will begin to crack and crumble. 5. Completely remove the dried render from the surface using a stiff bristle (nonmetallic) brush. 6. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water and allow to dry. 7. Repeat the entire application process as necessary to achieve the desired level of cleanliness. ADJUSTING/CLEANING Upon completion of the masonry cleaning work, clean window glass and spattered adjacent surface. Select 1 of 3 subparagraphs below.

END OF SECTION 04904

MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL

04904 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 04903 – MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Removing paints and stains. Repairing marble, including replacing damaged units. Cleaning marble surfaces. Repointing marble joints.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

Division 4 Section "Stone Restoration and Cleaning."

C.

Allowances: Quantity allowances for marble restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

D.

Unit Prices: marble restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.3 A.

B.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. LEED Submittals:

1.

2. C.

Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.

Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: 1.

Each type of mortar for pointing and marble rebuilding and repair in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches (150 mm) long by 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 1/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Each type of chemical cleaner.

D.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E.

Restoration program for each phase of the restoration and cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration and cleaning work. 1.

1.4 A.

If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced marble restoration and cleaning firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. 2.

At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for cleaning work and 1 for repair work. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that marble restoration and cleaning are in progress.

B.

Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing marble cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.

C.

Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. 1. 2.

3.

Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. Marble Restoration: Prepare sample panels of 3 linear feet for each type of restoration proposed. Maintain the sample panel throughout the restoration to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship expected. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 2 linear feet in length overlapping restored marble for each type of surface condition. a.

Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect.

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 2/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b. 4.

5. 6. 7.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.

Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas for each type of repointing required; 1 for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of marble restoration and cleaning. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

D.

Preconstruction Testing: Owner will engage an independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement brick for testing.

E.

Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests.

F.

Source of Materials: Obtain materials for marble restoration from a single source for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.

B.

Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.

C.

Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

D.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

1.6

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Do not repoint mortar joints unless air temperature is between and 40 and 80 deg F (4 and 27 deg C) and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.

B.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for marble repair and mortar-joint pointing: 1.

When air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat mortar ingredients, marble repair materials, and existing walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 3/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and 4 deg C), cover completed Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and pointing. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after repair and pointing.

C.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect restoration work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above.

D.

Clean marble surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.

E.

Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding marble and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact with exposed marble and other surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

A.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1.

Oil paint on marble: a.

b.

2.

Materials 1. Baking soda or some other alkaline cleaner to be used to form the poultice paste: Available from hardware store. 2. Liquid laundry bleach for making the paste 3. Mineral water 4. Plastic sheeting 5. Clean dry towels for blotting the area after treatment Equipment 1. Glass or ceramic container for mixing the solution 2. Wooden utensil for stirring the ingredients 3. Wood or plastic spatula 4. Masking tape

Latex and acrylic paint on marble: a.

Manufacturers 1. ProSoCo, Inc. 755 Minnesota Avenue P.O. Box 1578

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 4/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

b.

c.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Kansas City, KS 66117 800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700 Materials 1. Heavy liquid methylene chloride paint stripper such as "509 Stripper" (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal. Equipment 1. Wood or plastic spatulas and stiff fibre or jute brushes or removing the sludge and curdled paint. 2. Stiff bristle brushes (non-metallic)

Dirt on marble: a.

Manufacturers: 1. BASF-Wyandotte Corporation Chemical Specialties Division 1609 Biddle Wyandotte, MI 48192 313/246-6100 2. ProSoCo, Inc. 755 Minnesota Avenue P.O. Box 1578 Kansas City, KS 66117 800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700 3. Eastern Marble Supply Company P.O. Box 392 Scotch Plains, NJ 07076 908/789-6400

b. Materials 1. Liquid Marble Cleaner: A water-soluble non-acidic chemical cleaner manufactured specifically for restorative type cleaning of polished and honed marble surfaces. Cleaner shall contain no abrasives, grease,lye, or other caustic or corrosive ingredients, such as "Sure Klean Liquid Marble Cleaner" (ProSoCo, Inc.) or approved equal. -ORCleaning Detergent: A mildly alkaline phosphorous-free biodegradable liquid soap. -ORHousehold ammonia and distilled water 2. Cleaning Compound for Buffing a Honed Finish: An abrasive cleaning compound, containing no caustic or harsh fillers, manufactured specifically for restorative type cleaning of honed marble surfaces such as "Wyandotte Detergent" (BASF-Wyandotte Corporation) or approved equal. -ORPolishing Agent for Buffing a Polished Finish: A finely ground buffing powder manufactured specifically for restorative type polishing of polished marble surfaces, such as "Marbalite #52" (Eastern Marble Supply Company) or approved equal.

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 5/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3. Clean, potable water c.

2.2 A.

Equipment 1. Buffing pads for Polished Finish: Fiber brush pads manufactured specifically for restorative type polishing of polished marble surfaces -ORBuffing Pads for Honed Finish: Synthetic pads manufactured specifically for restorative type cleaning of honed marble surfaces 2. Soft natural bristle brushes (DO NOT USE WIRE BRUSHES OR STEEL WOOL) 3. Circular buffing machine (for floors) -ORHand-held buffing machine (for surfaces other than floors) 4. Mop and bucket (non-metallic) 5. Sponges 6. Clean, dry cloths

MORTAR MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 1.

Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C.

Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime.

D.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.

Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color indicated. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.

E.

Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in marble mortars.

F.

Water: Potable.

2.3

CLEANING MATERIALS

A.

Water for Cleaning: Potable.

B.

Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F (60 to 71 deg C).

C.

Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup (125 mL) of laundry detergent (Tide, All,

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 6/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

etc.), 5 quarts (5 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts (15 L) of warm water for each 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required. D.

Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard nonacidic gel containing detergents and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning marble surfaces. Cleaner shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous waste according to 40 CFR 261.

E.

Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood.

2.4 A.

MORTAR MIXES Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1.

B.

Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.

Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Architect's approval. 1.

Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.

C.

Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1.

Pointing Mortar: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts coloredor natural-mortar aggregate. a.

Add mortar pigments to produce mortar color required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

PREPARATION General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products.

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 7/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from marble restoration work. 1.

2. 3. 4.

5.

C.

3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact. Do not clean marble during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of marble restoration work.

Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. OIL PAINT ON MARBLE:

A.

EXAMINATION 1.

B.

Examine the marble CAREFULLY to determine the cause of staining before proceeding with any cleaning operation.

ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION

NOTE: DO NOT USE BLEACH ON DARK COLORED STONES AS THIS WILL CAUSE THE STONE TO LIGHTEN. 1. Protect adjacent painted surfaces. 2. Rinse the area to be treated with mineral water. 3. Pour the liquid laundry bleach in a glass or ceramic bowl. 4. Thoroughly moisten the stained surface with this liquid. Be sure to dampen well beyond the stain. 5. Mix the remaining liquid with the white absorbent material to form a paste the consistency of oatmeal or cake icing. (Approximately one pound of paste is needed for every square foot of surface area to be treated.) 6. Using a wooden or plastic spatula, apply the paste to the stained surface in layers no more than 1/4 inch thick. The poultice should extend well beyond the stain to prevent forcing the stain into previously clean stone. 7. Check the coating for air pockets or voids. 8. After the poultice has been applied, cover it with damp cloths to keep the poultice moist. 9. Leave the cloths in place overnight. 10. Remove the cloths and wet the poultice with mineral water.

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 8/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 11. 12. 13. 3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Remove the poultice with a wooden or plastic spatula to avoid scratching the surface. Thoroughly rinse the treated area with mineral water, blot, and allow to dry completely. If there is residual staining, repeat the procedure.

LATEX AND ACRYLIC PAINT ON MARBLE:

A.

Examination 1. Examine the marble surface CAREFULLY to determine the cause of staining before proceeding with any cleaning operation.

B.

Application 1. Thoroughly rinse the stained area with clean, clear water. 2. Apply a thixotropic paste of methylene chloride paint stripper to the surface and allow to dry; follow manufacturer's instructions. 3. Remove dried paste with a wooden spatula. 4. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water and allow to dry. 5. Repeat the process as necessary to sufficiently remove the stain.

3.4

DIRT ON MARBLE:

A.

Preparation 1. Protection: Prevent chemical cleaning and stain removal solutions from coming into contact with other surfaces which could be damaged by such contact. 2. Surface Preparation: a. Prior to cleaning, remove cellophane tape, masking tape, etc. from surface.

B.

Application NOTE: Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner which results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, interstices and which produces an even effect without streaking or damage to marble surfaces. CLEAN TO ACHIEVE A DESIRED (NOT NEW) APPEARANCE. 1. Cleaning Honed Marble: a. Machine buff with a cleaning compound (see Materials, Section 2.02 B. above): 1) Thoroughly wet honed marble surface with hot water. 2) Sprinkle cleaning compound onto surface. 3) Buff surfaces using a large circular buffing machine with a synthetic pad for floors or a hand-held machine for other surfaces to lift dirt build-up. 4) Treat edges and corners of surfaces not accessible with the hand-held machine. 5) Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean, clear water to remove loosened dirt and standing water. Change rinse water frequently and repeat rinsing as required to completely remove water and dirt residue from surface. 6) Repeat process as to achieve the desired appearance. 7) Dry surfaces with clean, dry cloths or dry mop floors after rinsing to prevent streaking. -OR-

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 9/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

b. Follow procedures in Section 3. below.

3.5

2.

Cleaning Polished Marble: a. Machine buff with a polishing agent (see Materials, Section 2.02 B. above): 1) Mix polishing agent with water to create a paste compound as recommended by manufacturer. 2) Apply paste mixture to surface and buff using a hand-held machine with a fiber brush buffing pad. Treat areas of approximately 9 sq. ft. at a time, first running the pad horizontally and then vertically across surface. 3) Repeat process as necessary to achieve the desired appearance. 4) Final polish by first wetting with clean water followed by running a clean buffing pad across the surface until dry. -ORb. Follow procedures in Section 3. below.

3.

Cleaning Either Honed or Polished Marble: a. Apply a liquid marble cleaner to the surface (see Materials, Section 2.02 A. above): 1) Apply cleaner to honed or polished marble surface using a stiff bristle brush. 2) Allow cleaner to remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer taking care not to allow cleaning material to dry. 3) Sponge rinse surface thoroughly using clean, clear water to completely remove dirt and cleaner residue. Change rinse water frequently. 4) Repeat process as necessary to achieve the desired level of cleanliness. 5) Wipe the surface with a clean, dry cloth to prevent streaking. -ORb. Apply a mild detergent solution to the surface (see Materials, Section 2.02 A. above): 1) Mix mild detergent with warm water to create cleaning solution -OR- mix 1 ounce soft soap, 1 quart warm distilled water and 1 ounce household ammonia. 2) Thoroughly wet the honed or polished marble surface with hot water. 3) Apply cleaning solution with a cloth, sponge or soft-fibered brush. Wash in small overlapping areas. 4) Sponge rinse surface thoroughly using clean, clear water to completely remove dirt and cleaner residue. Change rinse water frequently. 5) Wipe the surface dry with clean, soft cloths to prevent streaking.

REPOINTING MARBLE

A.

Examination 1. Examine the marble surface CAREFULLY to determine the extent of loose and missing joints before proceeding with any raking and repointing operation.

B.

Rake out joints as follows: 1.

Rake out loose mortar from joints to depths not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar.

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 10/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

Remove mortar from marble surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose marble for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. Do not spall edges of marble or widen joints. Replace damaged marble. a. b.

C.

Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damaging marble. Quality-control program shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.

Point joints as follows: 1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

3.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Rinse marble surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing marble, allow mortar to harden at least 14 days before beginning cleaning work.

FINAL CLEANING

A.

After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed marble surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray applied at a low pressure.

B.

Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.

C.

Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

END OF SECTION 04903

MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04903 - 11/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

04902 CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. This Section includes the following: a. Removing plant growth. b. Repairing stonework, including replacing damaged units. c. Cleaning exposed stone surfaces. d. Repointing mortar joints. e. Stone consolidation treatment. 2. Related Sections include the following: a. Division 4 Section "Clay Masonry Restoration and Cleaning." b. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in restored stone construction. 3. Allowances: Quantity allowances for stone restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances." 4. Unit Prices: Stone restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm. C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. LEED Submittals: 1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material 2.

If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.

B. Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following:

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 1/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Each new exposed material to be used for replacing existing materials. Include in each set of samples the full range of colors and textures to be expected in the completed Work. a. 12-by-12-inch minimum stone samples. 2. Each type of mortar for pointing and stone rebuilding and repair in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. a. Each type of repair anchor. b. Each type of adhesive. c. Each type of chemical cleaner. 3. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 4. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration work. a. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. b. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used. c. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced stone restoration and cleaning firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for cleaning work and 1 for repair work. 2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that stone restoration and cleaning are in progress 3. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 2/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

4. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. a. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. b. Stonework Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of stone material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample panels into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship. c. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of stone and surface condition. 1) Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. 2) Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 3) Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required; one for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints. 4) Stone Consolidation Treatment: Demonstrate materials and methods to be used on a sample panel approximately 4 sq. ft. in area. 5) Insert other mockups as required. 6) Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. 7) Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of stone restoration and cleaning. 8) Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 5.

Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests. a. Preconstruction Stone Tests: Test stone according to ASTM C 97 for absorption and bulk specific gravity, ASTM C 99 for modulus of rupture, and ASTM C 170 for compressive strength. b. Test each proposed type of replacement stone.

6. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for stone restoration from a single source for each type of material required (stone, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship stone and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in crates or heavy-duty containers.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 3/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of product and manufacturer. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. D. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair stone unless air temperature is between 40 and 80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for stone repair and mortar-joint pointing: 1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, stone repair materials, and existing walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. a. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and pointing. b. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after repair and pointing. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect restoration work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above. 1. Clean stone surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning. D. Apply stone consolidation treatment only when surface and air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F and rain is not expected within 24 hours. E. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding stone and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact with exposed stone and other surfaces. 1. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work. B. Perform stone restoration work in the following sequence:

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 4/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1. Remove plant growth. 2. Repair existing stonework, including replacing existing stone with new stone materials. 3. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 4. Clean stone surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning. 5. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. 6. Point existing mortar joints of stone indicated to be restored. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar: a. Jahn Restoration Mortar; Cathedral Stone Products, Inc. b. Custom System 45; Edison Chemical Systems, Inc. 2. Non-acidic Gel Cleaner: a. Sure Klean 942 Masonry Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. 3. Non-acidic Liquid Cleaner: a. Bio-Cleanse; Dominion Restoration, Inc. 4. Mild Acidic Cleaner: a. DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner; Dominion Restoration, Inc. b. Sure Klean Light-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. 5. Acidic Cleaner: a. Diedrich 101-G Granite, Terra Cotta, and Brick Cleaner; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Hydroclean Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra Cotta Cleaner (HT-626); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. c. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. d. Sure Klean Interior Stone Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. e. Sure Klean 1028 Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. f.

Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.

6. One-Part Limestone Cleaner: a. Hydroclean Limestone and Marble Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.

Cleaner

and

Brightener

(HT-907);

b. Sure Klean Limestone Restorer; ProSoCo, Inc.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 5/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

7. Two-Part Limestone Cleaner: a. Diedrich Limestone Cleaner Prerinse (707) and Neutralizer After-Rinse (707N); Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Hydroclean Limestone and Marble Precleaner (HT-704) and Hydroclean Limestone and Marble Cleaner and Brightener (HT-907); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. c. Sure Klean Limestone Prewash and Afterwash; ProSoCo, Inc. 8. Alkaline Paint Remover: a. Diedrich 404/606/606X Paint Remover; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Hydroclean Heavy Duty Paint Remover (HT-716); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. c. Enviro Strip #1; ProSoCo, Inc. d. Enviro Strip #2; ProSoCo, Inc. e. 1217 Poultice/Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. f.

Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.

9. Solvent-Type Paint Remover: a. Diedrich 505 Special Coatings Stripper; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Diedrich 505X Dry Strip; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. c. Dominion Multi-Layer Paint & Graffiti Remover; Dominion Restoration, Inc. d. Hydroclean Solvent Paint Remover (HT-300); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. e. Non-Methylene Chloride Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. f.

Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.

g. Sure Klean 859 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. h. Sure Klean 940 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. 10. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: a. Enviro Strip #3; ProSoCo, Inc. b. Enviro Strip #4; ProSoCo, Inc. 11. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: a. Diedrich Acid Guard; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Sure Klean Acid Stop; ProSoCo, Inc. 12. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: a. A-199-T/B-439-T; Bonstone Materials Corp. b. Akemi; Wood and Stone Co. 13. Mortar-to-Stone Adhesive: a. Sikadur Hi-Mod Epoxy, Sikastix 370; Sika Corporation. 14. Stone Consolidation Treatment:

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 6/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Conservare OH Stone Strengthener; ProSoCo, Inc. 15. Stone Consolidation and Water-Repellent Treatment: 16. Conservare H Stone Strengthener; ProSoCo, Inc. 2.02 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. Cast Stone: Provide cast building stone of variety, color, finish, size, and shape to match existing stone. 2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. B. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color indicated. a. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. b. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible. c. If known, indicate source of sand and size and gradation. 5. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars. 6. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar: Cement-based vapor-permeable mortar, custommanufactured for patching stone and formulated to match stone in color and texture. 7. Water: Potable. 2.04 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water for Cleaning: Potable. 1. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. B. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent (Tide, All, etc.), 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of solution required. C. Non-acidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard Non-acidic gel containing detergents and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning stone surfaces. Cleaner shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous waste according to 40 CFR 261.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 7/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. Non-acidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood. E. Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no hydrochloric, hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; chlorine bleaches; or caustic soda. F. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength acidic stone restoration cleaner composed of hydrofluoric acid blended with other acids, including a trace of phosphoric acid, and combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors. G. One-Part Limestone Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard one-part acidic formulation for cleaning limestone. H. Two-Part Limestone Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard 2-part system consisting of an alkaline cleaner for prewash and an acid neutralizer for afterwash. I.

Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.

J. Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard thixotropic, water-rinsable solvent formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry. K. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, thixotropic, water-rinsable solvent formulation, containing no methanol or methylene chloride, for removing paint coatings from masonry. L. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal, and polished stone surfaces from the damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: 2-part polyester or epoxy-resin stone adhesive with a 15- to 45-minute cure at 70 deg F, in formulation (knife or flowing grade) recommended by adhesive manufacturer for type of stone repair indicated, and matching stone color. B. Mortar-to-Stone Adhesive: High-modulus, high-strength, moisture-insensitive epoxy adhesive with a pot life of 30 minutes at 40 deg F. C. Stone Consolidation Treatment: Ready-to-use product designed for the consolidation of masonry materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and exposure to pollutants. Treatment shall be composed of silicic-ethyl esters, a neutral catalyst, and solvents. D. Stone Consolidation and Water-Repellent Treatment: Ready-to-use product designed for the consolidation and water-repellent treatment of masonry materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and exposure to pollutants. Treatment shall be composed of silicic-ethyl esters, a neutral catalyst, a silane water repellent, and solvents. E. Stone Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing anchors in size and type. Fabricate anchors and dowels from Type 304 stainless steel.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 8/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

2.06 MORTAR A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. B. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Architect's approval. 1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-tocement ratio of 1:10 by weight. 2. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: a. Pointing Mortar for Stone: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts colored- or natural-mortar aggregate. b. Pointing Mortar for Stone: 1 part white portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts colored- or natural-mortar aggregate c. Rebuilding Mortar: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts coloredor natural-mortar aggregate. d. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N, unless otherwise indicated, with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime. e. Patching Mortar for Stone: Provide mix composed of white and gray cement combined with lime and selected aggregates to produce a color matching the color of existing stone. Proportion mix with 2 parts cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts aggregate. 2.07 CHEMICAL CLEANING A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions of concentration recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Unpolished Stone: Unless otherwise indicated, dilute with water to produce a hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. 1. Use only on unpolished granite, unpolished dolomite marbles, and siliceous sandstone. 2. Acidic Cleaner for Polished Stone: Dilute with water to a concentration demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage the polished surface, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 9/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Use only on polished granites and polished dolomite marbles. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products. B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from stone restoration work. 1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact. 2. Do not clean stone during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. 4. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of stone restoration work 5. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. 3.02 STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, stone that has deteriorated, shifted, or is damaged beyond repair. B. Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. C. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged stone and stone surrounding removed units to prepare for resetting. D. Replace removed stone with salvaged stone, where possible, or with new stone matching existing stone, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tool joints after setting to match joints of surrounding stone. F. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 10/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.03 STONE REPAIR A. Carefully remove loose stone fragments in areas to be repaired. Reuse only pieces of spalled stone that are in sound condition. B. Remove soil, loose stone particles, mortar, and other debris or foreign material from the surfaces to be bonded on both the fragment and the building stone from which fragment was removed by cleaning with a stiff-fiber brush. C. Apply adhesive to comply with adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. Coat bonding surface of building stone with stone-to-stone adhesive, completely filling all voids and covering all surfaces. Fit stone fragments onto building stone while adhesive is still tacky and hold fragment securely in place until adhesive has cured. 1. After adhesive has fully cured, further anchor stone fragments with 1/4-inch diameter, plain stainless-steel rods set into 1/4-inch diameter holes drilled at a 45-degree downward angle through the face of the stone. Center and space anchor rods between 3 and 5 inches apart and at least 2 inches from any edge. Insert rods at least 2 inches into backing stone and 2 inches into fragment with end countersunk at least 3/4 inch from the exposed face of the stone. 2. Clean residual adhesive from edges. Wet stone, fill chipped areas, and drill holes with patching mortar. Avoid featheredging. Finish patched areas to match texture of and be level with adjacent stone surfaces. Keep patching mortar damp for 72 hours. 3.04 STONE PATCHING A. Cut out deteriorated stone and adjacent stone that has begun to deteriorate. Remove additional stone so patch will not have feathered edges and will be at least 1/4 inch thick. B. Remove loose particles, soil, debris, oil, and other contaminants from existing stone units at locations indicated by cleaning with a stiff-fiber brush. C. Brush-coat stone surfaces with mortar-to-stone adhesive complying with manufacturer's written instructions. -ORD. Brush-coat stone surfaces with a slurry coat of patching mortar complying with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Place patching mortar in layers no thicker than 2 inches. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for the next layer. F. Build patch up 1/4 inch above surrounding stone and carve surface to match adjoining stone after mortar has hardened. G. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until mortar has set. H. Unacceptable patches are those with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone at edges, and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture. Remove patches and refill to provide patches free of these defects.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 11/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

3.05 CLEANING STONE, GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the building for each scaffold drop. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each stone material and location. 1. Use natural-fiber brushes only. C. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage stonework. 1. Equip units with pressure gages. D. For chemical cleaner spray application, use a low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped spray tip. E. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. 1. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. 2. For steam application, use a steam generator capable of delivering live steam at nozzle. F. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging stone surfaces G. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from stone surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil or debris from open joints to whatever depth they occur. 1. Apply ammonium sulfamate or another acceptable root-killing material to plant roots according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply materials to plants that are to remain. H. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply with the following: 1. Prolonged Spraying: Soak stone surfaces by applying water continuously and uniformly to a limited area for the time indicated. Apply water at low pressures and low volumes in multiple fine sprays using perforated hoses or multiple spray nozzles. Erect a protective enclosure constructed of polyethylene sheeting to cover area being sprayed. I.

Spray Applications: Spray apply water to stone surfaces to comply with requirements indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure, volume, and equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of stone

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 12/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

and apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect. 1. Steam Wash: Apply steam to stone surfaces at pressures not exceeding 80 psi. Hold nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of stone and apply steam from side to side or in direction of tooling in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect. J. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to stone surfaces to comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option, unless otherwise indicated. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. K. Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same stone surfaces more than twice. If additional cleaning is required, use a steam wash. 2. Bottom to top rinsing helps ensure a thorough and uniform rinse; rinse water leaving bottom of wall while top is being rinsed will only be clear if entire wall is thoroughly rinsed. Also, entire wall will be wet when rinsing is completed, resulting in more uniform drying and less streaking. 3. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. 3.06 CLEANING STONEWORK A. Detergent Cleaning: Clean stonework with a detergent solution applied as follows: 1. Wet stone with waterof a temperature recommended by the manufacturer applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub stonework with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that stone surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with cold water to remove detergent solution and soil: a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. b. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. B. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: follows:

Clean stone with a mild acidic cleaner applied as

1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply cleaner to stone. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. 3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 13/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice. C. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: applied as follows:

Clean stonework with a Non-acidic gel cleaner

1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply Non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being cleaned. 3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As established by mockup. 4. Remove bulk of Non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal. 5. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 6. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice. D. One-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning: cleaner applied as follows:

Clean limestone with one-part limestone

1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply one-part limestone cleaner to stone by using a soft-fiber brush or low-pressure spray equipment. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. 3. Immediately repeat application of one-part limestone cleaner as indicated above over the same area. 4. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. E. Two-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning: Clean limestone with 2-part limestone cleaner applied as follows: 1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply alkaline prewash cleaner to stone by brush or roller. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 3. A specific time should be inserted in subparagraph above as determined by preliminary testing. Time will vary depending on temperature and relative humidity. 4. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 5. Apply an afterwash acid neutralizer to stone, while surface is still wet, using lowpressure spray equipment, a deep-nap roller, or a soft-fiber brush. Let neutralizer

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 14/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 7. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice. F. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from stonework as follows: 1. Apply paint remover to dry, painted stonework with brushes. 2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. 3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 4. Apply an acidic cleaner to stonework, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. G. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Remove paint from stonework as follows: 1. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted stonework with natural-fiber cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush. 2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. Agitate periodically with a stiff-fiber brush. 3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue. 4. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 3.07 REPOINTING STONEWORK A. Rake out joints as follows: 1. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. 2. Remove mortar from stonework surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose stone for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of stone units or widen joints. Replace damaged stone units. 4. Cut out old mortar from vertical joints by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated. The use of a small-diameter (4”) blade power-operated grinder to cut horizontal joints only is permitted based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damaging stone. The quality-control program includes provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 15/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B. Point joints as follows: 1. Rinse stonework-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. 2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer. 3. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in 3 layers with first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth; third layer, the remaining one-fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing stone has rounded edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed stone surfaces or to featheredge mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. 5. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours. 6. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing stone, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.08 STONE CONSOLIDATION TREATMENT A. Apply treatment to clean, dry surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove areas of blind exfoliation and delamination before applying. B. Apply in cycles (repeated applications) to small sections of stonework, not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. Each cycle shall consist of 3 successive saturating applications, applied at 5- to 15-minute intervals, depending on drying conditions. C. Apply by low-pressure spray to the point of rejection in each application. Apply from bottom of section to top. D. Apply 3 cycles, allowing treated surface to dry for 60 to 90 minutes between cycles. E. Protect treated surfaces from rain for 48 hours after treatment. F. Allow treated surfaces to dry for at least 21 days before repointing, patching, or applying water repellents or sealants. 3.09 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stonework surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray applied at a low pressure. B. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. C. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 16/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 04902

CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING

04902 - 17/17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 04901 - CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Removing plant growth. Repairing clay masonry, including replacing damaged units. Reanchoring veneers. Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces. Repointing mortar joints.

B.

Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

C.

Unit Prices: Clay masonry restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A.

Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi ; 4 to 6 gpm.

B.

Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

C.

High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

1.4

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B.

Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following: 1.

2. 3.

Each type of mortar for pointing and masonry rebuilding and repair in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. Each type of repair anchor. Each type of chemical cleaner.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 1/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D.

Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration work. 1.

E.

Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used. 1.

1.5 A.

If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. 2.

At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for cleaning work and 1 for repair work. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress.

B.

Terra Cotta Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacturing architectural terra cotta units of similar size and complexity as those required for the Work.

C.

Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.

D.

Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 2/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

3.

Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. Masonry Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of masonry material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample panels into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of clay masonry and surface condition. a.

b. 4.

5. 6. 7.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.

Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required; 1 for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of clay masonry restoration and cleaning. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

E.

Preconstruction Testing: Owner will engage an independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement brick for testing.

F.

Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform preconstruction tests. 1.

Preconstruction Brick Tests: Test brick according to sampling and testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water absorption, 5-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of absorption (suction). a. b.

G.

1.6

Test each proposed type of replacement brick. Test each type of existing brick indicated for replacement. remove existing bricks from locations designated by Architect.

Carefully

Source of Materials: Obtain materials for masonry restoration from a single source for each type of material required (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 3/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.

B.

Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.

C.

Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

D.

Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

E.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry unless air temperature is between and 40 and 80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.

B.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing: 1.

2.

3.

When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and pointing. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after repair and pointing.

C.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect restoration work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above.

D.

Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.

E.

Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.

F.

Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

1.8

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 4/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work.

B.

Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Remove plant growth. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. Clean masonry surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MANUFACTURERS Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Diedrich Chemicals Restoration Technologies, Inc. 300A East Oak Street Oak Creek, WI 53154 414/764-0058 or 800/323-3565

2.

ProSoCo, Inc. 755 Minnesota Avenue P.O. Box 1578 Kansas City, KS 66117 800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700

3.

Union Carbide Corporation Old Ridgebury Road Danbury, CT 06817 203/794-2000

4.

Rohm & Haas Independence Mall West Philadelphia, PA 19105 215/592-3000

5.

GAF Corporation 1361 Alps Road Wayne, NJ 07470 201/628-4127

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 5/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Ashland Chemical 4550 N. East Expressway Doraville, GA 30340 404/448-7010

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1.

Terra Cotta: a. b. c. d.

2.

Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: a.

3.

DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner; Dominion Restoration, Inc. Sure Klean Light-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.

Acidic Cleaner: a. b. c. d. e.

7.

Sure Klean 766 Prewash; ProSoCo, Inc.

Mild Acidic Cleaner: a. b.

6.

Bio-Cleanse; Dominion Restoration, Inc.

Alkaline Prewash Cleaner: a.

5.

Sure Klean 942 Masonry Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.

Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: a.

4.

Gladding, McBean & Co. Studio S. Pottery. Superior Clay Co. W. D. Virtue Co.

Diedrich 101G Granite, Terra Cotta, and Brick Cleaner; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Hydroclean Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra Cotta Cleaner (HT-626); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean 1028 Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.

Alkaline Paint Remover: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Diedrich 404/606/606X Paint Remover; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Hydroclean Heavy Duty Paint Remover (HT-716); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. Enviro Strip #1; ProSoCo, Inc. Enviro Strip #2; ProSoCo, Inc. 1217 Poultice/Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 6/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 8.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Adhesive Residue Remover: a.

Commercially available emulsified, non-corrosive, non-caustic liquid solvent cleaner specifically formulated for removal of asphalt, grease, oil and similar stains from brick, stone and other masonry surfaces, such as "Sure Klean Asphalt and Tar Remover" (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.

9.

Ferrous-Based Stain Remover: a. Commercially available liquid stain removing compound made up of blended organic acids in combination with special chelating and wetting agents specifically formulated for treatment and removal of metallic oxides from masonry, such as "Sure Klean Ferrous Stain Remover" (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.

10.

Non-ionic detergent: a. "Zyfo" or "Tergitol" (Union Carbide, or Ashland Chemical) b. "Triton" (Rohm & Haas) c. "Igepal" (GAF Corporation), or approved equal.

11.

Trisodium Phosphate: a. b.

12.

Strong base-type powdered cleaning material sold under brand names. Other chemical or common names include Sodium Orthophosphate; Tribasic sodium phosphate; Trisodium orthophosphate; TSP*; Phosphate of soda.

Solvent-Type Paint Remover: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

Diedrich 505 Special Coatings Stripper; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Diedrich 505X Dry Strip; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Dominion Multi-Layer Paint & Graffiti Remover; Dominion Restoration, Inc. Hydroclean Solvent Paint Remover (HT-300); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. Non-Methylene Chloride Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean 859 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean 940 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.

13.

Solvents such as acetone, lacquer thinner, N-methy-2-pyrrolidone Acetone (C3H6O): a. A volatile fragrant flammable liquid ketone used chiefly as a solvent and in organic synthesis. b. Other chemical or common names include Dimethyl ketone; Propanone

14.

Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: a. Enviro Strip #3; ProSoCo, Inc. b. Enviro Strip #4; ProSoCo, Inc.

15.

Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: a. Diedrich Acid Guard; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 7/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Sure Klean Acid Stop; ProSoCo, Inc.

16.

Filler material such as attapulgite clay, kaolin, fuller's earth, talc, chalk, cotton pads, acid-free paper. (Do not use chalk or iron-containing clay with an acid solvent as their chemical reaction will cancel the effectiveness of the acid).

17.

Masonry Repair Anchors, Expansion Type: a. Mechanical Repair Anchors; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. #521RA Repair/Restoration Anchor; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

18.

Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type: a. b. c. d.

2.2 A.

MASONRY MATERIALS Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including specially molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. 1.

2. B.

2.3 A.

Grade SW where in contact with earth. Grade SW, MW, or NW for concealed backup.

Terra Cotta: Provide new terra cotta units to match existing terra cotta units in compressive strength, color, gloss, surface texture, thickness and composition of surface glaze, composition of body, profile, and dimensions. MORTAR MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 1.

B.

Provide units with color, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brick work and with physical properties not less than those determined from preconstruction testing of selected existing units. Provide units with color, surface texture, and physical properties to match Architect's sample. Match existing units in size and shape.

Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62, of same vertical dimension as face brick, for masonry work concealed from view. 1. 2.

C.

Dur-O-Flex; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. #391 Spiro Remedial Tie; Heckman Building Products, Inc. Helifix HRT60; Helifix Ltd. Helifix HRT80; Helifix Ltd.

Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 8/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime.

D.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.

Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color indicated. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.

E.

Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.

F.

Water: Potable.

2.4

CLEANING MATERIALS

A.

Water for Cleaning: Potable.

B.

Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.

C.

Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent (Tide, All, etc.), 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of solution required.

D.

Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard nonacidic gel containing detergents and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning masonry surfaces. Cleaner shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous waste according to 40 CFR 261.

E.

Non-acidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood.

F.

Alkaline Prewash Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard alkaline cleaner for prewash applications used only where followed by an acidic cleaner of type indicated for afterwash.

G.

Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no hydrochloric, hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; chlorine bleaches; or caustic soda.

H.

Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength acidic masonry restoration cleaner composed of hydrofluoric acid blended with other acids, including a trace of phosphoric acid, and combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors.

I.

Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 9/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

J.

Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard thixotropic, water-rinsable solvent formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.

K.

Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, thixotropic, water-rinsable solvent formulation, containing no methanol or methylene chloride, for removing paint coatings from masonry.

L.

Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal, and polished stone surfaces from the damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.

2.5

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Masonry Repair Anchors, Expansion Type: Mechanical fasteners designed for masonry veneer stabilization consisting of a 1/4-inch diameter, Type 304 stainlesssteel rod with brass expanding shells at each end and a water-shedding washer in the middle. Expanding shells shall be designed to provide positive mechanical anchorage to veneer on one end and backup masonry on other end.

B.

Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type: Type 304 stainless-steel spiral rods designed to anchor to backing and veneer. Anchors are flexible in plane of veneer but rigid perpendicular to it. 1.

2.

Provide adhesive installed anchors complete with manufacturer's standard epoxy adhesive and injection tubes, screens, sleeves, or other devices required for installation. Provide driven in anchors designed to be installed in drilled holes and relying on screw effect rather than adhesive to secure them to backup and veneer.

C.

Brushes: Natural fiber bristle only. The use of wire brushes or steel wool is not permitted.

D.

Wood spatula

2.6

MORTAR MIXES

A.

Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1.

Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 10/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. C.

Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Architect's approval. 1.

Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.

D.

Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1. 2. 3.

2.7

Pointing Mortar for Brick: 1 part portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts colored- or natural-mortar aggregate. Rebuilding Mortar: Same as pointing mortar. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N, unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material content limited to portland cement and lime.

CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS

A.

Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions of concentration recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Acidic Cleaner Solution for Brick: Unless otherwise indicated, dilute with water to produce a hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.

C.

Acidic Cleaner Solution for Terra Cotta: Dilute with water to a concentration demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage terra cotta surface, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products.

B.

Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry restoration work. 1.

Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 11/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4.

5.

C.

3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of masonry restoration work.

Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A.

Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit replacement with full-size units without damaging surrounding masonry.

B.

Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.

C.

Salvage as many whole, undamaged bricks as possible.

D.

Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged brick by cleaning with brushes and water. Store brick for reuse.

E.

Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement.

F.

Install new or salvaged brick to replace removed brick. Fit replacement units into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

G.

Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g per 30 sq. in. per min. Use wetting methods that ensure units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing units. 1. 2.

3.3

Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry.

TERRA COTTA REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 12/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A.

Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, terra cotta units that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit replacement with full-size units without damaging surrounding masonry.

B.

Support and protect remaining masonry that was supported by removed units.

C.

Remove mortar, dust, and loose particles from existing masonry surrounding removed units in preparation for replacement. Clean with stiff-fiber brushes or by flushing with water and compressed air.

D.

Set replacement units in a full bed of mortar with both horizontal and vertical joints of same width as existing units. Replace existing anchors with new anchors that match existing anchors in size and type. 1.

E.

3.4

Embed anchors in and fill voids behind units with grout to match existing construction.

Point new mortar joints to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and rake out mortar used for laying terra cotta units before mortar sets. REANCHORING VENEERS

A.

Install masonry repair anchors in horizontal mortar joints and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install at not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally, unless otherwise indicated. Install at locations to avoid penetrating flashing.

B.

Recess anchors at least 5/8 inch from surface of mortar joint and fill recess with pointing mortar.

3.5

CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL

A.

Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the building for each scaffold drop.

B.

Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. 1. 2.

Use natural-fiber brushes only. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. a.

3.

Equip units with pressure gauges.

For chemical cleaner spray application, use a low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped spray tip.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 13/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. 5. 6. 7.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. For high-pressure water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. For steam application, use a steam generator capable of delivering live steam at nozzle.

C.

Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.

D.

Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur. 1.

E.

Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply with the following: 1.

2.

F.

2.

3.6

Spray Applications: Spray apply water to masonry surfaces to comply with requirements indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure, volume, and equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of masonry and apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect. Steam Wash: Apply steam to masonry surfaces at pressures not exceeding 80 psi. Hold nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of masonry and apply steam from side to side or in direction of tooling in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect.

Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option, unless otherwise indicated. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. 1.

G.

Apply ammonium sulfamate or another acceptable root-killing material to plant roots according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply materials to plants that are to remain.

Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi, unless otherwise indicated. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same masonry surfaces more than twice. If additional cleaning is required, use a steam wash.

Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. CLEANING BRICKWORK

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 14/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC A.

Cold-Water Wash: Clean brick masonry with cold water applied as follows: 1.

B.

Low-pressure spray.

Warm-Water Wash: Clean brick masonry with warm water applied as follows: 1.

C.

Low-pressure spray.

Detergent Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a detergent solution applied as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. Wet masonry with warm water applied by low-pressure spray. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that masonry surface remains wet. Rinse with cold water to remove detergent solution and soil. Rinse with warm water to remove detergent solution and soil. a.

6. D.

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup.

Non-acidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a non-acidic liquid cleaner applied as follows: 1. 2.

Wet masonry with water of a temperature recommended by the manufacturer applied by low-pressure spray. Apply cleaner to masonry. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a.

3.

4.

As determined by testing during the mockup.

Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a mild acidic cleaner applied as follows: 1. 2.

Wet masonry with water of a temperature recommended by the manufacturer applied by low-pressure spray. Apply cleaner to masonry. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a.

As determined by testing during the mockup.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 15/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

4. F.

2.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

3.

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a non-acidic gel cleaner applied as follows: 1. 2.

3.

Wet masonry with water of a temperature recommended by manufacturer applied by low-pressure spray. Apply non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being cleaned. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a.

4. 5.

6.

As determined by testing during the mockup.

Remove bulk of non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

H.

As determined by testing during the mockup.

Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

4.

Clean brick masonry with an acidic cleaner applied as

Wet masonry with water of a temperature recommended by the manufacturer applied by low-pressure spray. Apply cleaner to masonry. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a.

G.

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Acidic Chemical Cleaning: follows: 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from masonry surfaces as follows: 1.

Apply paint remover to dry, painted masonry with brushes.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 16/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4.

Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and paint residue. a.

5.

6.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Remove large accumulations by mechanical scraping with a wood spatula taking care to avoid damage to masonry. Brush apply solvent-based water rinse-able cleaner with a fine bristle brush to area damaged by tape residue. Allow to dwell for three to five minutes. Agitate with a stiff fiber bristle brush as necessary. Thoroughly rinse with low pressure water (400 psi). Repeat application to remove persistent stains and deeply embedded residues.

Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: surfaces as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Remove paint from masonry

Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted masonry with natural-fiber cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. Agitate periodically with a stiff-fiber brush. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue. a.

3.7

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Adhesive Removal: 1.

J.

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Apply an acidic cleaner to masonry, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

I.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

GRAFFITTI REMOVAL A. Identify the substance used to create the graffiti. B. Examine the surrounding area for signs of what may have been used to create the graffiti (i.e. spray cans or other debris). C. Begin with the least harsh method of removing paint. 1. Wash the area with a solution of trisodium phosphate (TSP) and water. Apply with a non-metallic brush. 2. When the paint has softened, scrape off as much as possible with a wooden scraper. 3. Wash the area again using a non-ionic detergent and water. 4. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 17/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D. If a stronger method is necessary: 1. Brush on a commercial paint remover (either a solvent such as lacquer thinner or acetone, or a methylene chloride-based remover may be used) with a non-metallic brush. Follow manufacturers instructions for application and dwell time. 2. When the paint has softened, scrape off as much as possible with a wooden scraper. 3. Wash the area again using a detergent and soapy water and rinse thoroughly with clean water. E. For felt tip marks, use a poultice: 1. Pre-wet surface using denatured alcohol. Saturate a soft cloth with a mixture of acetone, lacquer thinner and N-methy-2pyrrolidone. Test proportions to find the most effective mixture. 2. Gently rub the stain with the saturated cloth. 3. To remove remaining stain, prepare a poultice using the same solvent mixture as used in C.2. above mixed with a filler material such as attapulgite clay, kalin or fuller's earth (all clays), talc, chalk or whiting, shredded acid-free paper, or cotton pads. Mix to form a thick paste. 4. Thoroughly wet the masonry surface to be treated with clean, clear water. 5. Apply the mixture to the stained area in a 1/4" to 3/4 " thick layer using a wood or plastic spatula and allow to dry. Be sure to spread the poultice well beyond the stained area. The liquid portion of the paste will migrate into the concrete where it will dissolve some of the staining material. Then the liquid will gradually move back beyond the concrete surface and into the poultice, where it will evaporate, leaving the dissolved staining material in the poultice. 6. Keep poultice moist until stain has lifted. Exact length of time will vary and will require periodic inspection of the substrate. 7. Once it appears that the stain has lifted, allow the poultice to dry out. As the poultice dries, the solvent is re-absorbed by the poultice material bringing with it the stain. 8. When the poultice has dried, brush or scrape it off with a wooden scraper. 9. Using a stiff bristle brush, scrub the surface with scouring powder and clean water to remove any residual staining. 10. Wash all residue using a non-ionic detergent. 11. Thoroughly rinse the area with clean, clear water and allow to dry. 12. Repeat the process as necessary to sufficiently remove the stain. 3.8 A.

FERROUS STAIN REMOVAL Surface Preparation: 1. Commence ferrous stain removal immediately after general cleaning of masonry. 2. Proceed from the top of the wall downward. Work shall not be considered complete until the Contracting Officer's representative has so notified the Contractor in writing. 3. Filter the water with a 5 micron particulate filter placed in line with the water supply. Replace the filter as needed during the work.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 18/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Application: 1. Prewet wall with clean, clear water immediately before applying ferrous-based stain remover. 2. Apply ferrous-based stain remover with natural fiber bristle brush. Allow to dwell on the surface for three to five minutes. 3. Rinse all traces of chemical and residue with pressurized cold water. Repeat procedure if necessary. Rinse water pressure shall not exceed 300 psi, and shall be sprayed through nozzles fitted with 15 to 20 wide nozzle tips. Nozzles shall be held perpendicular to the surface at a working distance of 1.5 to 2.5 feet. All pressure pumps shall be equipped with working pressure gauges. 4. Repeat procedure if necessary to remove all traces of ferrous stain.

3.7 A.

CLEANING TERRA COTTA Warm-Water Wash: Clean terra cotta with warm water applied as follows: 1.

Low-pressure spray.

B.

Steam Cleaning: Remove soil from terra cotta by applying live steam.

C.

Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: applied as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Wet terra cotta with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. Wet terra cotta with warm water applied by low-pressure spray. Apply non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being cleaned. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a.

5. 6. 7.

As established by mockup.

Remove bulk of non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

8.

Clean terra cotta with non-acidic gel cleaner

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

D.

Non-acidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with a non-acidic liquid cleaner applied as follows:

E.

Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with a mild acidic cleaner applied as follows: 1.

Wet terra cotta with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 19/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

Apply cleaner to terra cotta. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a.

3.

F.

4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

A.

Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.

Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

Two-Part Chemical Cleaning: At locations indicated, clean terra cotta with 2-part system using chemical cleaners applied as follows: 1. 2. 3.

3.8

As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.

Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a.

4.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Wet terra cotta with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. Wet terra cotta with warm water applied by low-pressure spray. Apply alkaline prewash cleaner to terra cotta by brush or roller. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. Rinse with warm water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. Apply acidic cleaner to terra cotta, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment, a deep-nap roller, or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.

REPOINTING MASONRY Rake out joints as follows: 1.

2.

3.

Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace damaged masonry units. a. b.

Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 20/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry. Quality-control program shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. B.

Point joints as follows: 1.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

3.9

Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in 3 layers with first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth; third layer, the remaining one-fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge mortar. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.

FINAL CLEANING

A.

After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray applied at a low pressure.

B.

Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.

C.

Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

END OF SECTION 04901

CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION

04901 - 21/21

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 04860 - STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section includes the following applications of stone masonry: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Limestone Stairs Anchored to concrete backup. Limestone Wall capping Anchored to unit masonry backup. Bluestone wall veneer & capping Anchored to unit masonry backup.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

C.

Product Data for Credit MRc5

Samples: 1. 2.

1.3

For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include test data indicating compliance with physical properties specified.

For each stone type indicated. For each color of mortar required.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.

B.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.

C.

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 1 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

LIMESTONE A.

2.2

Limestone: Comply with ASTM C 568.

BLUESTONE A.

2.3

Bluestone: Comply with ASTM C 615.

MORTAR MATERIALS A.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1.

Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

D.

Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

E.

Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.

Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime or masonry cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. 2.

Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.

Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 1) 2) 3)

b.

STONE MASONRY

Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. Lafarge North America; Eaglebond. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement.

Colored Masonry Cement:

04860 - 2 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1) 2) 3) 4) F.

For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

H.

2.4

Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment-in-Color. Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. Lafarge North America; [Florida Custom Color Masonry] [or] [Magnolia Masonry Cement]. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.

Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

G.

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Boiardi Products Corporation. Bonsal. Bostik Findley Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. DAP Inc. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corp. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company.

Water: Potable.

VENEER ANCHORS A.

Materials: 1. 2.

Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, [Type 304] [Type 316].

B.

Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel wire.

C.

Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch- thick by 7/8-inch- wide hot-dip galvanized or stainless]steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch.

D.

Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 3 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. b. c. d. 2. 3.

4.

E.

Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10, DW-10HS or DW-10-X. Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III or RJ-711.

Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised ribstiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inchdiameter, hot-dip galvanized stainless-steel wire.

Seismic Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in stone masonry mortar joint. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [vailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

2.5

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; D/A 213S. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10-X-Seismiclip. Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond Clip.

Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 6 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for inserting continuous wire. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon or stainless]-steel wire. Continuous Wire: 0.188-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel wire.

EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A.

Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing[, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated,] complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere.

B.

Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Copper-Laminated Flashing: [5-oz./sq. ft.] [7-oz./sq. ft.] copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2)

STONE MASONRY

Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing.

04860 - 4 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3) 4) 5) 6) 2.

Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Copper Fabric Flashing. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing.

Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. a.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)

2.6

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Dur-O-Barrier-44. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-ABarrier Wall Flashing. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing. Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.

MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.

Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that are nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors and attachments.

B.

Weep Hole/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Round Plastic Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by thickness of stone masonry.

C.

Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1.

Provide one of the following configurations: a. b. c. d.

2.

Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity with additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of cavity.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the followin]: a. b.

STONE MASONRY

Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break Mortar Break II. CavClear/Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.

04860 - 5 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. d.

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Polytite MortarStop. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

D.

Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.

E.

Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch mesh with minimum 0.0625-inchdiameter, galvanized-steel wire.

2.7

MASONRY CLEANERS A.

Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.8

Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Dominion Restoration Products. EaCo Chem, Inc. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. Prosoco, Inc.

MORTAR MIXES A.

General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.

B.

Do not use calcium chloride. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.

Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. 2.

Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N .

C.

Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.

D.

Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency similar to that of thick cream. 1.

For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 6 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

E.

Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.

F.

Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.

G.

Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. 2.

2.9

Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.

FABRICATION A.

Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.

C.

Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as follows: 1.

D.

Sawed-bed, range ashlar with uniform course heights and uniform lengths as indicated on Drawings.

Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A.

Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation.

B.

Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing.

3.2

SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A.

Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. 1. 2.

B.

Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces.

Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 7 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

C.

Arrange stones in range ashlar pattern with course heights as indicated, uniform lengths, and uniform joint widths, with offset between vertical joints as indicated.

D.

Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance.

E.

Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch at narrowest points or more than 3/8 inch at widest points.

F.

Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. 2.

Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

G.

Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 2. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 4. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

H.

Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofing as follows: 1. 2.

3.3

Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-grade elevations. Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below grade.

CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A.

Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

B.

Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

C.

Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.

3.4

INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY A.

Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in concrete.

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 8 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

B.

Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect anchors to masonry joint reinforcement by inserting pintles into eyes of masonry joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.

C.

Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect anchors to masonry joint reinforcement with vertical rods inserted through anchors and through eyes of masonry joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.

D.

Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 11/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 1.

Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints and attach to seismic veneer anchors as stone is set.

E.

Space anchors to provide not less than 1 anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12 inches.

F.

Space anchors not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12 inches.

G.

Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors into mortar joints as stone is set.

H.

Fill space between back of stone masonry and weather-resistant sheathing paper with mortar as stone is set.

I.

Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

3.5

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 9 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.6

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A.

Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soilcontaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1.

Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

END OF SECTION 04860

STONE MASONRY

04860 - 10 of 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management” for disposal of masonry construction waste.

2.

Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

3.

1.2 A.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

1.3 A.

Concrete masonry units (CMU's). Building (common) brick.

Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 1/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

C.

Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

D.

Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar.

E.

Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

F.

Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1.

2.

1.4

Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B.

Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1.

1.5 A.

Build sample panels for typical exterior wall long by 48 inches high by full thickness.

in sizes approximately 48 inches

PROJECT CONDITIONS Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 2/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A.

Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A.

Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B.

Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

C.

CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. 2.

2.3

Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi . Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.

MASONRY LINTELS

A.

General: Provide one of the following:

B.

Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.

2.4 A.

BRICK Regional Materials: Provide brick that has been manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 3/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1.

2. C.

For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade SW. 1. 2. 3.

2.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2100 psi. Size: Match size of existing face brick. Color: Match color of existing face brick.

MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A.

Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for coldweather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

C.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D.

Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

E.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

F.

Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

G.

Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from masonry cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.

Colored Masonry Cement: 1) 2) 3) 4)

Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Richcolor Masonry Cement. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment-in-Color. Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 4/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5) 6) 7) H.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Lafarge North America Inc.; U.S. Cement Custom Color Masonry Cement. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. 2. 3.

For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

I.

Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

J.

Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

K.

Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

L.

Color: Pointing mortar to match existing façade mortar color after façade cleaning.

M.

Water: Potable.

2.6

REINFORCEMENT

A.

Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: Grade 60.

B.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet , with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon -steel continuous wire.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,

04810 - 5/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.7 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

TIES AND ANCHORS Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.

Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B.

Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

C.

Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1.

D.

Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. 2.

E.

Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1.

2. 3.

F.

Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication . Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face.

Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 6/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC G.

Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1.

2.8 A.

Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M .

EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"" and as follows: 1.

2.

3. B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees[ and hemmed]. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, crosslaminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than [0.030 inch] [0.040 inch].

2.

Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.

3.

EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick.

C.

Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:[ As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]

D.

Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.9

MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A.

Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from [neoprene] [urethane] [or] [PVC].

B.

Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805] [or] [PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406] and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 7/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D.

Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UVresistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

E.

Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.

2.

2.10 A.

Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

Advanced Building Products Inc.; [Mortar Break] [Mortar Break II]. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

Provide one of the following configurations: a. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.

MASONRY CLEANERS Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

Diedrich Technologies, Inc. EaCo Chem, Inc. ProSoCo, Inc.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 8/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.11 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B.

Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, [Proportion] [Property] Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. 2. 3.

4. D.

Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product[ or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products]. 1. 2. 3.

E.

Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Face brick. b. Hollow brick.

Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. 2.

F.

For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M . For reinforced masonry, use Type S . For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

Mix to match existing mortar. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Face brick. b. Hollow brick.

Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 9/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2. 3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 . Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B.

Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures similar to existing façade.

C.

Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.2 A.

TOLERANCES Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. 2. 3.

B.

For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

Lines and Levels: 1. 2.

3. 4.

For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 10/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5. 6. C.

For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. Match horizontal lines of existing building watertable.

Joints: 1. 2. 3.

3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A.

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B.

Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern matching existing building façade.

C.

Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D.

Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 A.

MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 11/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 A.

MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. 2. 3.

Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B.

Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 A.

ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1.

2. 3.

3.7 A.

Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonryveneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1.

Fasten screw-attached and seismic anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 12/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3. 4.

3.8

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.

FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A.

General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B.

Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1.

2.

3.

4.

C.

Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill insulation.

D.

Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

E.

Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. weep/vent products to form vents. 1.

Use specified

Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 13/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.9 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1.

2.

Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B.

Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C.

Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. 2.

3.10

Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches .

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B.

Inspections: [Level 1] [Level 2] special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. 2. 3.

Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C.

Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D.

Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

E.

Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F.

Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): according to ASTM C 780.

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

For each mix provided,

04810 - 14/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G.

Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H.

Grout Test (Compressive Strength): ASTM C 1019.

3.11

For each mix provided, according to

REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.12 A.

Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 04810

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 - 15/15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 03541 - GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Gypsum underlayment for use below interior floor coverings. Underlayment primer. Underlayment sealer.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals:

C. 1.3

1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

Qualification data. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

B.

Slump test and field sample results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENTS Underlayment: Gypsum cementitious self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1.

Basis of Design: “USG LEVELROCK 2500 Green Floor Underlayment” by U. S. Gypsum Company.

GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT

03541 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% Final Construction

a.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Available Manufacturers: Provide Basis of Design product or equal; subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Maxxon Corporation. 2) Or equal allowed under UL Design L524. If alternates proposed, contractor shall submit information documenting sound and fire performance equivalent to the Basis of Design system, along with the manufacturer’s specifications for installation. Minimum density 115 pounds per cubic foot. Manufactured with recaptured gypsum. Minimum Post Industrial content 85%. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2500 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C472.

B.

Sand Aggregate: Well-washed sand, 1/8 inch or less; as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Meets ASTM C33 standards.

C.

Water: Potable, free from impurities, and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

D.

Primer: “USG LEVELROCK” brand floor primer” or product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

E.

Sealer: “USG LEVELROCK” brand top seal or product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for conditions and application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

PREPARATION Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1.

2. B.

Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer’s written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. 1.

C.

Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT

03541 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% Final Construction

D.

Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

E.

Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.

F.

At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

3.2

UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION WITHOUT SOUND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

A.

Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

B.

Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface with thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 1.

Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

C.

Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. contamination during application and curing processes.

D.

Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.3

Prevent

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Slump Test: Underlayment mix shall be tested for slump as it's being pumped using a 2 inch by 4 inch cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 inches plus or minus 1 inch diameter.

B.

Field Samples: At least one set of 3 molded cube samples shall be taken from each day's pour during the underlayment application. Test in accordance with modified ASTM C 472.

3.4 A. 3.5

ISOLATION STRIP STAPLE REMOVAL Remove staples and trim isolation strips to height of finished floor. PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF FINISH FLOOR

A.

Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

B.

Sealing: Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods according to underlayment manufacturer. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Use sealer to seal underlayment prior to installation of glue down floor goods. Where floor goods manufacturers require

GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT

03541 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% Final Construction

special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations. C.

3.6 A.

Floor Goods Procedures: Prepare floor according to underlayment manufacturer’s guidelines for installing finished floor goods. PROTECTION Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 03541

GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT

03541 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B.

See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.2

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.

2.

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements.

C.

Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

D.

Shop Drawings: certificates.

1.3 A.

Material test reports and

QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.

B.

For steel reinforcement and formwork.

Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2.

ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A.

Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B.

Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.2

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 50 percent.

B.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 1. 2.

Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class [I] [II] zinc coated after fabrication and bending. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.

C.

Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

D.

Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

E.

Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.

F.

Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: Type 1, deformed steel.

G.

Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.3 A.

ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from

ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated,

CONCRETE MATERIALS Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I and II . Supplement with one of the following: a. b.

B.

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C F. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarseaggregate size. 1.

Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C.

Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D.

Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

E.

Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

F.

Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

G.

2.4 A.

2.5

Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1 inch long. VAPOR RETARDERS Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. CURING MATERIALS

A.

Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B.

Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Moisture-Retaining Cover: polyethylene sheet.

D.

Water: Potable.

E.

Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

2.6 A.

2.7

ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

RELATED MATERIALS Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: cork.

ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding

CONCRETE MIXTURES

A.

Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B.

Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

C.

Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. D.

Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery at concrete exposed to weather. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd..

Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 115 lb/cu. ft. , plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as determined by ASTM C 567. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd..

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.8 A. 2.9 A.

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1.

When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

FORMWORK

A.

Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B.

Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C.

Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 A.

3.3 A.

EMBEDDED ITEMS Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. VAPOR RETARDERS Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

3.4 A.

Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1.

Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.5

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

JOINTS

A.

General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B.

Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C.

Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1.

2.

D.

3.6

Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A.

Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B.

Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1.

Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

C.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

D.

Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.7 A.

FINISHING FORMED SURFACES Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

3.8

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A.

General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B.

Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1.

C.

3.9

Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A.

General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B.

Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C.

Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. 2.

3.

Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a.

After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4.

3.10 A.

3.11 A.

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.

Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.

END OF SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02930 - EXTERIOR PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Plants. Planting soils.

DEFINITIONS A.

Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B.

Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

C.

Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

D.

Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

E.

Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

F.

Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G.

Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

H.

Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

I.

Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

J.

Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

K.

Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 1 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.3

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

B.

Samples of mineral mulch.

C.

Product certificates.

D.

Maintenance Instructions: calendar year.

E.

LEED Submittals: 1.

1.4

Recommended procedures for maintenance of plants during a

Product Data for Credit WE1.1: For plant materials that are native and adaptive.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

B.

Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, Contractor shall furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. 1. 2.

The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a.

b.

State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

C.

Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

D.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.

B.

Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

C.

Handle planting stock by root ball.

D.

Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 2 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E.

1.6

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.

b. 2.

Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion: a. b.

1.7

Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.

Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.

Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. 2.

Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 12 months from date of planting completion. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Six months from date of planting completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PLANT MATERIAL A.

General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B.

Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

2.2

INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A.

Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 3 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A.

Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

B.

Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

2.4

FERTILIZERS A.

Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1.

B.

Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1.

Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2.5

PLANTING SOILS 1. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content. Existing, in-place surface soil. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

2.6

MULCHES A.

2.7

Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood.

WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A.

Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd..

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 4 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A.

Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. 2. 3.

B.

3.2

Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. Spread planting soil to a depth of 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A.

Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. 2. 3.

B.

3.3

Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.

Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil.

TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A.

Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.

B.

Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C.

Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. 2.

3.

Use planting soil for backfill. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. Balled and Potted and Container-Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 5 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4.

5.

3.4

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A.

Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B.

Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

3.5

GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A.

Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing.

B.

Use planting soil for backfill.

C.

Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D.

Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

E.

Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

F.

Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.6

PLANTING AREA MULCHING A.

Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B.

Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

3.7

PLANT MAINTENANCE A.

Maintain plantings by watering pruning, cultivating, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B.

Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C.

Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 6 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

D.

Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

E.

Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

END OF SECTION 02930

EXTERIOR PLANTS

02930 - 7 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Seeding. Sodding.

DEFINITIONS A.

Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B.

Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C.

Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D.

Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E.

Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F.

Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

G.

Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H.

Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I.

Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Certification of grass seed. 1.

Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod.

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 1 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Product certificates.

D.

Topsoil Test Reports

E.

LEED Submittals: 1.

1.4

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Product Data for Credit WE1.1: For native or adaptive plant materials.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

B.

Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, Contractor shall furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. 1. 2.

The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a.

b.

1.5

State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B.

Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

1.6

MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.

Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1.

Seeded Turf: Native Turf Mix: 120 days from date of planting completion. a.

2.

When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

Native Sodded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion.

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 2 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SEED A.

Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B.

Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows: 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or comparative alternative a.

Ernst Conservation Seeds: Autumn Bent Grass Mix 1-800-873-3321

2.2

TURFGRASS SOD A.

Turfgrass Sod: Certified], including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects], complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B.

Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows: 1 Autumn Bentgrass Sod.

2.3

INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A.

Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1.

Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.

B.

Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

C.

Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D.

Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E.

Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F.

Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

G.

Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 3 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

H.

Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

I.

Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.4

ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A.

2.5

Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through [1-inch] sieve; soluble salt content of [5 to 10] decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

FERTILIZERS A.

Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of [4] percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.

B.

Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C.

Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1.

D.

Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1.

2.6

Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

PLANTING SOILS A.

Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Have soil tested to determine the amount of soil amendments and fertilizer quantities needed. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers to produce planting soil: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. Lime Sulfur . Agricultural Gypsum. Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth : Bonemeal : Superphosphate: Commercial Fertilizer

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 4 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 9.

2.7

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Slow-Release Fertilizer.

MULCHES A.

2.8

Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

PESTICIDES A.

General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

TURF AREA PREPARATION A.

Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. 2. 3.

Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a.

B.

Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. 2.

Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a.

3. 4.

C.

Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.

Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 5 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

D.

Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

E.

Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2

SEEDING A.

Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B.

Sow seed at a total rate of : See manufacturer specifications.

C.

Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D.

Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches] in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1.

E.

3.3

Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.

Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch] within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.

SODDING A.

Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B.

Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. 2.

C.

3.4

Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

TURF MAINTENANCE A.

Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 6 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

B.

Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.

C.

Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

3.5

SATISFACTORY TURF A.

Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1.

2.

B.

Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches . Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, evencolored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

END OF SECTION 02920

LAWNS AND GRASSES

02920 - 7 of 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Seating. Bicycle racks. Trash receptacles.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Material Certificates: For site furnishings, signed by manufacturers.

C.

Maintenance Data.

D.

LEED Submittals: 1.

Product Data for Credit: MRc4 and MRc5: Recycled Content and Local /Regional Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A.

Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes.

B.

Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes.

C.

Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: coated or noncorrodible materials.

D.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

E.

Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

SITE FURNISHINGS

Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-

02870 - 1 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SEATING A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Landscape Forms, Plainwell #785915 .

B.

Seat with Back

2.3

1.

Color/Material: Wood Seat (FSC certified) for exterior use.

2.

Size: 72”

3.

Arms: Three, one on each end and one center arm.

BICYCLE RACKS A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Victor Stanley ; BK6 or a comparable product.

B.

Bicycle Rack Construction:

2.4

1.

Frame: Poweder Coated Steet: VS Black

2.

Style: Double-side parking

3.

a. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than two bicycles. Installation Method: Cast in concrete

TRASH RECEPTACLES & RECYCLE BIN A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Victor Stanley, Steelsites Series – NSDC – 36 or a comparable product .

B.

Steel Finish: [Powder Coated VS Black.

2.5

FABRICATION A.

Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

B.

Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

SITE FURNISHINGS

02870 - 2 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

B.

Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing plumb or at correct angle and aligned and at correct height and spacing.

C.

Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

D.

Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 02870

SITE FURNISHINGS

02870 - 3 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02826 - ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A. 1.3

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Decorative wrought iron fences. 2. Swing gates. Related Sections: Division 5 “Ornamental Metal” for decorative railing caps. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352 including: 1.

Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2.

Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material

C.

Shop Drawings: For gates and fence. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D.

Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.

E.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for decorative steel fences, including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

STEEL AND IRON

A.

Wrought Iron:

B.

Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES

02826 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

2.2

Bars (Pickets): Grade 1010.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M,

COATING MATERIALS

A.

Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with coating specified to be applied over it.

B.

Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

C.

Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.

2.3

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Concrete: Normal-weight concrete complying with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size.

B.

Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

2.4 A.

GROUNDING MATERIALS Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger. 1. 2.

B. 2.5 A.

Material above Finished Grade: Copper. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.

Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467. DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES; Trident Wrought Iron Fence Decorative Steel Fences: Fences made from steel bars and shapes. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.

A & T Iron Works, Inc.

B.

Posts: As indicated on Drawings.

C.

Post Caps:

D.

Rails: As indicated on Drawings.

Steel castings.

ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES

02826 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Pickets: As indicated on Drawings. 1.

Picket Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

F.

Infill: Forge-welded steel bar grating; as indicated on Drawings.

G.

Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts and tamperproof nuts.

H.

Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by welding pickets to rails.

I.

Finish for Bar Grating Infill: Powder coating.

J.

Finish for Steel Items Other than Bar Grating Infill: High-performance coating.

2.6

SWING GATES

A.

Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square steel tubing as indicated on Drawings.

B.

Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.

C.

Steel Finish: Shop primed and painted with high-performance coating.

2.7 A.

STEEL FINISHES Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 1.

B.

After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

Powder Coating: 2-coat finish consisting of epoxy primer and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils. 1.

C.

SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

Color and Gloss:

Black, semigloss.

High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated surfaces. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1.

Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage.

ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES

02826 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION

A.

Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening infill panels to posts.

C.

Post Excavation: Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that fence height exceeds 4 feet.

D.

Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into existing stone wall. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.2 A.

3.3 A.

Hold posts in position during setting with concrete. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete. Space posts uniformly at existing post locations.

EXISTING GATE INSTALLATION Re-install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. GROUNDING AND BONDING Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows: 1.

Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet . a.

Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. Bond metal gates to gate posts.

B.

Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.

C.

Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.

D.

Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES

02826 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Grounding-Resistance Testing: and inspections.

Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests

END OF SECTION 02826

ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES

02826 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02781 - POROUS UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.2

Porous paving consisting of concrete pavers set in aggregate setting beds.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For materials other than aggregates.

B.

Sieve Analyses: For aggregate materials, according to ASTM C 136.

C.

Samples for unit pavers and aggregate fill.

D.

LEED Submittals: 1.

1.3

Product Data for Credit SSc6.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS A.

Solid Concrete Pavers for Porous Paving: Solid interlocking paving units of shapes that provide openings between units, complying with ASTM C 936, resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, and made from normal-weight aggregates. a.

2. 3. 4.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
Thickness: 3-1/8 inches . Face Size and Shape: 4 ½” x 9”. Color: Slate Blend.

POROUS UNIT PAVING

02781 - 1 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.2

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A.

Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with STM D 448 for Size No. 57 For size No. 2

B.

Graded Aggregate for Base Course: ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8

C.

Graded Aggregate for Leveling Course: ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.

Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with

D.

Graded Aggregate for Porous Paver Fill: ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.

Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with

1. E.

Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with

Provide stone of color to match Architect's sample.

Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. 2.

Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be structurally unsound or visible in finished work.

B.

Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment[ or a block splitter] to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

C.

Tolerances: 1. 2.

D.

3.2

Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush. Variation from Level or Indicated Slope: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet or a maximum of 1/2 inch.

Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

SETTING-BED INSTALLATION A.

Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.

B.

Place drainage geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches.

POROUS UNIT PAVING

02781 - 2 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

C.

Place aggregate Open graded base compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated.

D.

Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 2 to 2-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.

3.3

PAVER INSTALLATION A.

Set unit pavers on leveling course, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have lugs or spacer bars to control spacing, place pavers hand tight against lugs or spacer bars. If pavers do not have lugs or spacer bars, place pavers with a 1/16-inch- minimum and 1/8-inchmaximum joint width.

B.

Compact pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.

C.

Place graded aggregate fill immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Spread and screed aggregate fill level with tops of pavers.

D.

Remove and replace pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

END OF SECTION 02781

POROUS UNIT PAVING

02781 - 3 of 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Brick pavers set in mortar setting beds. Rough-stone pavers set in mortar setting beds. Steel edge restraints.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B.

Samples for unit pavers, joint materials and edge restraints.

C.

LEED Submittals: 1.

1.3

Product Data for Credit MRc4 and MRc5: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver. 1.

1.4

Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds.

B.

Cold-Weather Requirements for Mortar and Grout: Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Protect unit paver work against freezing for 24 hours after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

BRICK PAVERS A.

Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX, Type I , Application PX. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.

UNIT PAVERS

02780 - 1 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

B.

2.2

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Brick shall match the brick specified for the building façade and walls. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the name of product and samples as follows:

2. 3. 4.

Thickness: 2-1/4 inches Face Size: [3-5/8 by 7-5/8 inches Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products.

BLUE-STONE PAVERS A.

Rough-Stone Pavers: Rectangular paving stones, with split faces and edges, made from granite complying with ASTM C 615. 1.

Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

a. Luckstone, Varigated Bluestone, or comparable product to match existing paving. Thickness: 2 inches; Face Size: Varies, based on dimensions of existing blue stone pavers.

2.3

ACCESSORIES A.

Steel Edge Restraints: Painted steel edging 3/16 inch thick by 4 inches high with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36 inches o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches long for each loop. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.

Border Concepts, Inc. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc. J. D. Russell Company (The). Ryerson, J. T. & Son, Inc. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation.

Color: Black

B.

Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.

C.

Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.

2.4

MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS A.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

B.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C.

Sand: ASTM C 144.

UNIT PAVERS

02780 - 2 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

D.

Latex Additive: Water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.

E.

Water: Potable.

2.5

GROUT MATERIALS A.

Polymer-Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded grout; in color to match grout of the building and walls. 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering polymer-modified grouts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation. b. Bonsal, W. R. Company. c. Bostik Findley Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. DAP Inc. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corp. j. SGM. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company. Product Type: Either dry mix, containing ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or two-component mix, containing liquidlatex and prepackaged dry-grout mix.

B.

Grout Colors: to match the grout color of the building and walls.

C.

Water: Potable.

2.6

MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A.

General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.

B.

Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: consistency.

C.

Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

D.

Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Comply with written instructions of latexadditive manufacturer to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive pavers.

E.

Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Mix portland cement, sand, and latex additive to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer.

UNIT PAVERS

Mix neat cement or cement and sand with water to a creamy

02780 - 3 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Polymer-Modified Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

B.

Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. 1.

For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.

C.

Joint Pattern: As indicated on drawings.

D.

Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

E.

Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.

F.

Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

3.2

MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS A.

Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.

B.

Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.

C.

Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed to subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.

D.

Mix and place only that amount of mortar that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Cut back and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing pavers.

E.

Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

F.

Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers, apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver.

G.

Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.

UNIT PAVERS

02780 - 4 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

H.

Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 1/2-inch nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch.

I.

Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. 1. 2.

Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard.

J.

Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.

K.

Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean. 1.

Remove temporary protective coating from brick pavers as recommended by protective coating manufacturer and as acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

END OF SECTION 02780

UNIT PAVERS

02780 - 5 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02764 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.2

Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B.

Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant samples in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C.

Product Certificates: manufacturer.

D.

Qualification Data: For Installer.

E.

Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. 2.

F.

1.3

For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product

Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B.

Source Limitations: manufacturer.

C.

Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1.

2.

Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

02764 - 1 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4. 5.

D.

Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

Product Testing: Contractor shall obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work. 1.

1.4

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B.

Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

2.2

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.

MATERIALS, GENERAL A.

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

02764 - 2 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B.

2.3

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A.

Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS. 1.

Available Products: a. b. c.

2.4

Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. Or Approved Equal

JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A.

General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B.

Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C.

Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

D.

Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.5

PRIMERS A.

Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. 1.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

02764 - 3 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

PREPARATION A.

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by jointsealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C.

Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.

D.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2.

Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F.

Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

02764 - 4 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.4

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

CLEANING A.

3.5

Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

PROTECTION A.

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

END OF SECTION 02764

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

02764 - 5 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

Section Includes: 1. Paver sub base.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

LEED Submittals: 1.

2.

Product Data for Credit SSc7.1, MRc4 and MRc5: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced.

C.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D.

Other Action Submittals: 1.

1.3

Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing readymixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B.

ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.

Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 1 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

B.

Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C.

Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

E.

Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

F.

Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

G.

Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

H.

Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.

2.2

CONCRETE MATERIALS A.

Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, white portland cement Type I/II

B.

Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C.

Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D.

Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E.

Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

2.3

CURING MATERIALS A.

Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B.

Water: Potable.

C.

Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

2.4

RELATED MATERIALS A.

Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork in preformed strips.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 2 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

2.5

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

WHEEL STOPS A.

Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE, or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled rubber or plastic; UV stabilized]. 1. 2. 3.

2.6

Color: Gray]. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel stop manufacturer for application to concrete pavement.

CONCRETE MIXTURES A.

Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: . Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.

[0.45] [0.50]

B.

Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.

2.7

CONCRETE MIXING A.

Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A.

Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

B.

Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 3 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A.

Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B.

Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3

STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.

3.4

General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

JOINTS A.

General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

C.

Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D.

Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

3.5

CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.

Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B.

Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C.

Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.

D.

Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and consolidating concrete.

E.

Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F.

Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 4 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC G.

3.6

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

FLOAT FINISHING A.

General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B.

Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.7

CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A.

General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B.

Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C.

Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D.

Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E.

Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing. 1.

Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c.

3.8

Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

PAVING TOLERANCES A.

Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Elevation: 1/4 inch. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 5 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.9

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

WHEEL STOPS A.

Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer.

B.

Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels located at one-quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.

3.10

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A.

Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B.

Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C.

Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION 02751

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 6 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes exterior non-pressure storm sewer piping and related components from the property line to the building, with the following components. 1. 2.

Cleanouts. Precast concrete manholes.

B.

All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT). The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.

C.

Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.

1.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.3

Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: For manholes and catch basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and manhole frames and covers and catch basin frames and grates.

C.

Field quality-control test reports. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PIPING MATERIALS A.

2.2

Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

DUCTILE-IRON, CULVERT PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Pipe: ASTM A 716, for push-on joints.

B.

Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.

C.

Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.

D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. STORM DRAINAGE

02630 - 1 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PE PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. 2. 3.

2.4

Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 (DN 250) and Larger: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.

PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

2.5

PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and Smaller: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40.

NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A.

Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B.

Sleeve Materials: 1. 2.

C.

2.6

For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined.

Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

CLEANOUTS A.

Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 1. 2.

2.7

Top-Loading Classification(s): heavy duty. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 PVC

MANHOLES A.

Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. 2. 3.

4.

Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated.

STORM DRAINAGE

02630 - 2 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

10. 11.

Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inchminimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." a.

2.8

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated.

CONCRETE A.

General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 aximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. 2.

2.9

Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable.

Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.

CATCH BASINS A.

Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1.

2. 3. B.

Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.

Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading. Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inchdiameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings. 1.

Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

STORM DRAINAGE

02630 - 3 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PIPING APPLICATIONS A.

Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a.

3.2

Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C.

Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D.

Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E.

Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

F.

3.3

Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated. Install piping with 24-inch minimum cover. Install piping below frost line. Install ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomericgasket joints. 3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

STORM DRAINAGE

02630 - 4 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.4

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A.

Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use Schedule 40 PVC for cleanouts assembly. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1.

Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in all areas.

B.

Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops flush with surrounding grade.

C.

Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.5

MANHOLE INSTALLATION A.

General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B.

Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C.

Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops flush with finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6

CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A.

3.7

Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

CONNECTIONS A.

Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's storm building drains specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."

B.

Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1.

3.8

Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for on-site work.

B.

Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2.

Submit separate report for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. b. c.

STORM DRAINAGE

Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 02630 - 5 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC d. e. 3. 4. C.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. Submit separate report for each test. Air Tests: Test storm drainage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a.

Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.

D.

Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

E.

Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

END OF SECTION 02630

STORM DRAINAGE

02630 - 6 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2 A.

Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. Geotextile filter fabrics.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For geotextile filter fabrics.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

2.2 A. 2.3

PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: corrugated, for coupled joints.

ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP;

SOIL MATERIALS Soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS

A.

Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.

B.

Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament. 1. 2.

Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2. Styles: Flat and sock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

EARTHWORK Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

SUBDRAINAGE

02620 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A.

Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide.

B.

Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

C.

Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.

D.

Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with tape.

E.

Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage.

F.

Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests.

G.

After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.

H.

Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

I.

Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches.

J.

Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building.

3.3

UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A.

Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.

B.

Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

C.

Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.

D.

Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with tape.

E.

Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab subdrainage.

SUBDRAINAGE

02620 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests.

G.

After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

3.4 A.

PIPING INSTALLATION Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36 inches unless otherwise indicated. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping level. Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater piping system, install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36 inches unless otherwise indicated. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.

B.

Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.

C.

Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.

3.5

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.

Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose banded, coupled, or push-on joints.

B.

Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.

3.6

BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage."

B.

Install horizontal backwater valves in header piping downstream from perforated subdrainage piping.

C.

Install horizontal backwater valves in piping in manholes where indicated.

SUBDRAINAGE

02620 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage."

B.

Cleanouts for Foundation and Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: 1.

2.

3.

4. C.

Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage: 1.

2.

3.8

Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above grade. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete."

Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. Use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab.

CONNECTIONS

A.

Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm drainage system.

C.

Where required, connect low elevations of foundation and underslab subdrainage to stormwater sump pumps. Comply with requirements for sump pumps specified in Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps."

3.9 A.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests and Inspections: 1. 2.

After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.

SUBDRAINAGE

02620 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 A.

CLEANING Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 02620

SUBDRAINAGE

02620 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes exterior non-pressure sanitary sewer piping and related components from the property line to the building, with the following components. 1. 2.

Cleanouts. Precast concrete manholes.

B.

All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT). The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.

C.

Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.

1.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.3

Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.

SUBMITTALS A.

Field quality-control test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PIPING MATERIALS A.

2.2

Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

2.3

PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A.

Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B.

Sleeve Materials: 1.

For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

SANITARY SEWERAGE

02530 - 1 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

C.

2.4

For Dissimilar Pipes: materials being joined.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

CLEANOUTS A.

Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 1. 2.

2.5

Top-Loading Classification: Heavy duty. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: PVC Schedule 40 pipe and fittings.

MANHOLES A.

Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

10. 11.

Diameter: Minimum 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inchminimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." a.

2.6

Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated.

CONCRETE A.

General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. SANITARY SEWERAGE

02530 - 2 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4. B.

C.

Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable.

Portland Cement Design Mix: materials ratio. 1. 2.

4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious

Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.

Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes. 1.

Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. a.

2.

Invert Slope: Minimum 2 percent through manhole.

Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. a.

D.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Slope: Minimum 4 percent.

Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 1. 2.

Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PIPING APPLICATIONS A.

Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a.

B.

Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials: 1.

3.2

Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

Schedule 40 PVC sewer pipe and fittings.

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

SANITARY SEWERAGE

02530 - 3 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C.

Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D.

Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E.

Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

F.

3.3

Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. Install piping below frost line. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2.

3.4

Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomericgasket joints. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.

MANHOLE INSTALLATION A.

General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B.

Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C.

Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

D.

Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.

3.5

CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A.

Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings for cleanout assemblies. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1.

Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in all areas.

SANITARY SEWERAGE

02530 - 4 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops flush with surrounding grade.

C.

Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.6

CONNECTIONS A.

3.7

Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for on-site work.

B.

Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2.

Submit separate report for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

3. 4. C.

Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. Submit separate report for each test. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24-hour period. Close openings in system and fill with water. Purge air and refill with water. Disconnect water supply. Test and inspect joints for leaks. Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.

SANITARY SEWERAGE

02530 - 5 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 6.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. b.

Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924.

D.

Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

E.

Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

END OF SECTION 02530

SANITARY SEWERAGE

02530 - 6 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for domestic water building services, fire-services for buildings, and water mains.

B.

All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT). The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.

C.

Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

D.

Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Field quality-control test reports.

C.

Operation and maintenance data.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Regulatory Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

DC WASA standards and specifications for work in the DC right-of-way/public space. DC Plumbing Code. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B.

Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C.

Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fireservice-main products.

D.

NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

E.

NSF Compliance:

WATER DISTRIBUTION

02510 - 1 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

1.4

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.5

Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Architect's written permission.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate connection to water main and work in the DC right-of-way/public space with the DC WASA inspector.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. 2.

B.

Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. 2.

2.2

Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining materials.

B.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

2.3

PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

02510 - 2 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.4

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES A.

Valve Boxes: per the DC WASA standards and specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EARTHWORK A.

3.2

Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

PIPING APPLICATIONS A.

General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B.

Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D.

Underground water-service piping 3” diameter and larger shall be the following:

E.

3.3

1.

Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints

2.

Mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping shall be the following: 1.

Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints

2.

Mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.

3.4

See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for piping-system common requirements.

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B.

Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C.

Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

D.

Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

E.

Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 4 feet.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

02510 - 3 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1.

Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

G.

Sleeves are specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods and 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

H.

Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.5

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B.

Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. 2. 3.

3.6

Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities Basic Materials and Methods" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A.

Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with mechanical restrained joints in accordance with the DC WASA standards and specifications and the DC Plumbing Code.

B.

Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. 2. 3.

C.

3.7

Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire-suppression piping.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

02510 - 4 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.8

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for on-site work.

B.

Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

C.

Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1.

D.

3.9

Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

Prepare reports of testing activities.

IDENTIFICATION A.

3.10 A.

Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

CLEANING Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. 2.

3.

Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. b. c. d.

B.

Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

END OF SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION

02510 - 5 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02371 - MICROPILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section specifies requirements for design and installation of a micropile foundation system.

B.

The work consists of furnishing all necessary engineering and design services, supervision, labor, materials, and equipment to perform any work necessary to install and test micropiles for the project, as shown on the design drawings. The micropile contractor shall install a micropile system meeting the load capacities indicated on the drawings.

C.

Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section “Cast in Place Concrete” for material strength testing.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A.

Certificate of design: Signed and sealed statement from Contractor’s Engineer indicating that design of micropiles is appropriate for the required load. Design shall be based on a rational and standard approach as approved by the Deep Foundations Institute and/or the International Association of Foundation Drilling.

B.

Working Drawings: Signed and sealed drawings indicating materials and procedures to be used in completion of the work. Drawings shall include at a minimum: 1. Detailed description of construction procedures proposed, including a schedule. 2. Pile numbering system, and layout directions. 3. Design load of micropiles. 4. Type and size of reinforcing steel to be provided. 5. Minimum total bond length. 6. Total micropile length. 7. Grouting volumes and maximum pressures. 8. Micropile top attachment 9. Micropile cutoff attachment

C.

Shop drawings for structural steel, including all pile components, including the following: 1. Corrosion protection system 2. Pile top attachment 3. Bond length details 4. Mill test reports for reinforcing steel 5. Representative coupon tests for steel pipe used as permanent casing

D.

Design Mixtures: For grout used to fill piles, including 1. Cementitious materials.

MICROPILES

02371 - 1/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.4

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Admixtures. Procedures for mixing Procedures for placing Certified test reports verifying capacity of mix designs

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Micropile contractor shall be fully experienced in all aspects of micropile design and construction, and shall furnish all necessary equipment, materials, skilled labor, and supervision required to carry out the contract. Contractor must have successfully completed at least five projects in the previous five years of similar or greater scope. He must provide resumes of key personnel who will be present on site for the duration of the work.

B.

Referenced Standards 1. ASCE 20-96, “Standard Guidelines for the Design and Installation of Pile Foundations.” 2. API RP 138-1, “Recommended Practice – Standard Procedure for Field Testing Water Based Drilling Fluids.” 3. ASTM documents as referenced under materials section.

C.

Allowable Tolerances 1. Centerline of piling shall not be more than 3” from indicated plan location. 2. Pile hole alignment shall be within 2% of design alignment. 3. Top elevation of pile shall be within 1” of design vertical elevation. 4. Centerline of core reinforcing shall be not more than ¾” from centerline of piling.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Steel Reinforcement and casings: Deliver, store, and handle steel to prevent bending, damage, and/or corrosion.

B.

Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B.

Reinforcement Accessories: Bar couplers to be compatible with efficient load transfer and overall reinforcement performance requirements.

C.

Fabricate all reinforcement in accordance with CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice.”

2.2 A.

STRUCTURAL STEEL Steel Pipe Casings shall be supplied in accordance with ASTM A252 Grade 3, with minimum yield strength as indicated in the design submittal and minimum 15% elongation.

MICROPILES

02371 - 2/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B. 2.3

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Plates and shapes for pile top attachment shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A57250. GROUT MATERIALS

A.

Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989 Grade 100 or 120. a. GGBS used in grout mix must also be present in mix tested and submitted under section 1.3D. Substitution of GGBS for Portland Cement may not exceed 30% by weight.

B.

Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 fine aggregate. Provide aggregates from a single source, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C.

Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.4

ADMIXTURES

A.

Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

B.

Use admixtures according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

2.5 A.

2.6 A.

ACCESSORIES Bar Centralizers – fabricated from plastic, steel or similar material not detrimental to the reinforcing steel. Wood bar spacers shall not be utilized. Centralizers must permit free flow of grout without misalignment of the reinforcing. GROUT MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

GENERAL Micropile installation technique shall be consistant with geotechnical, logistical, and environmental conditions of the project. Micropile Contractor shall select drilling and grouting procedures to successfully perform the work. Selections shall be detailed on working drawing submission made before commencement of sitework.

MICROPILES

02371 - 3/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Drilling equipment and methods shall be suitable for drilling through conditions anticipated on site with minimal disturbance to those conditions or any overlying or adjacent structures or services. Boreholes must be provided open to the defined nominal diameter for their full length prior to placing grout and reinforcement. If soils encountered on site do not permit uncased installation, provide hole support as required.

C.

Hole support may consist of any of the following, subject to design and installation by the Contractor: 1. Steel pipe casings, permanent or temporary 2. Grout injection through hollow stem auger 3. Hole stabilizing drilling fluid, certified to have no adverse effect on geotechnical bond development and no potential effect on local groundwater.

D.

Schedule project work to prevent damage to piles where grout has not achieved final set.

3.2

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A.

General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B.

Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C.

Central reinforcing steel with physical centralizers shall be lowered into the stabilized drill holes to desired depth with no difficulty. Partially inserted bars shall not be driven or forced into the hole.

D.

Bar centralizers shall be placed at 10’ maximum vertical spacing along the bars. Uppermost centralizer shall be maximum 5’ from the top of the micropile. No micropile reinforcing shall be installed with less than 3 centralizers, regardless of bar length.

3.3

CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A.

Before placing concrete, verify hole integrity and reinforcement are as anticipated, and hardware for pile top connection is on hand. Perform all inspections required prior to placement of concrete. Flush hole with water and/or air to remove drill cuttings and loose debris prior to concreting.

B.

Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by on-site testing agency.

C.

Contractor shall provide systems and equipment to measure grout quality, quantity, and pumping pressure during grouting operations. Grout pump shall be equipped with a pressure gauge capable of measuring a minimum of 150 psi. Grouting equipment shall be sized to enable placement of a full pile in one continuous operation.

D.

Inject grout from the lowest point of the drill hole by tremie until clean, pure grout flows from the top of the pile. Grout may be pumped through tubes, augers, or drill rods. All grouting operations must ensure complete continuity of the grout column. Grout pressures shall be controlled to prevent excessive heave in cohesive soils or fracturing of soil formations.

MICROPILES

02371 - 4/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

The use of compressed air to directly pressurize the fluid grout is not permitted.

F.

Grout within piles shall be allowed to attain minimum design strength prior to loading.

G.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

H.

Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3. Apply layer of repair overlayment at top of wall and infill, set cast stone seating plinth directly on wet overlayment and fasten in place.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Installation records: Testing agency shall prepare records of all installed piles, including the following minimum information: 1. Pile drilling duration and observations 2. Information on soil and rock encountered, including description of strata and water. 3. Approximate final tip elevation. 4. Cut-off elevation. 5. Design Loads 6. Description of any unusual installation behavior or conditions 7. Any deviations from intended parameters or procedures. 8. Grout pressures attained 9. Grout quantities pumped 10. Pile materials and dimensions

C.

As-built drawings showing location of piles, depth and inclination, and details of composition shall be submitted within 14 calendar days of the project completion.

D.

Inspections and testing after concreting 1. Verify pile top elevation and adjust all installed piles to planned elevations. 2. Testing of grout shall comply with provisions in section 03300, “Cast in Place Concrete.”

MICROPILES

02371 - 5/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

RDS/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 02371

MICROPILES

02371 - 6/6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Bait-station system. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.

B.

Product certificates.

C.

Bait-Station System Application Report: Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. D. 1.3

Location of areas and sites conducive to termite feeding and activity. Plan drawing showing number and locations of bait stations. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence indicating level of termite activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial Completion. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. Quantities of nontoxic termite bait used. Schedule of inspections for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label.

C.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .

1.4 A.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with

TERMITE CONTROL

02361 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B.

1.5 A.

Install bait-station system during construction to determine areas of termite activity and after construction, including landscaping, is completed. MAINTENANCE SERVICE Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, terms for agreement period, and terms for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

BAIT-STATION SYSTEM Provide bait stations based on the dimensions of building perimeter indicated on Drawings, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for product, manufacturer's written instructions, and the following: 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Subterfuge. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Sentricon System. Ensystex, Inc.; Exterra System. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; First Line. Whitmire Micro-Gen Research Laboratories, Inc.; Advance TBS.

No fewer than one bait station per 20 linear feet .

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2 A.

APPLICATION, GENERAL General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. INSTALLING BAIT-STATION SYSTEM Place bait stations according to the EPA-Registered Label for the product and manufacturer's written instructions, in the following areas that are conducive to termite feeding and activity:

TERMITE CONTROL

02361 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Conducive sites and locations indicated on Drawings. In and around infested trees and stumps. In mulch beds. Where wood directly contacts soil. Areas of high soil moisture. Near irrigation sprinkler heads. Each area where roof drainage system, including downspouts and scuppers, drains to soil. Along driplines of roof overhangs without gutters. Where condensate lines from mechanical equipment drip or drain to soil. At plumbing penetrations through ground-supported slabs. Other sites and locations as determined by licensed Installer.

Inspect and service bait stations from time of their application until Substantial Completion unless extended by continuing service agreement, according to the EPARegistered Label for product and manufacturer's written instructions for termite management system and bait products. 1.

Service Frequency: month(s).

Inspect bait stations not less than once

every three

END OF SECTION 02361

TERMITE CONTROL

02361 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

1.3

Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and exterior plants. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.

DEFINITIONS A.

Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. 2.

Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B.

Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C.

Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D.

Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E.

Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F.

Excavation: Removal of material encountered above proposed subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. 2.

EARTHWORK

Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. 02300 - 1 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

G.

Fill: Compacted soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H.

Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

I.

Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

J.

Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

K.

Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

L.

Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

M.

Geotechnical Engineer: a licensed soils engineer contracted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner.

N.

DC DOT: District of Columbia Department of Transportation

O.

DC WASA: District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.5

Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.

B.

Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Sections.

1.6

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

EARTHWORK

02300 - 2 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B.

Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Disconnect and abandon private utility laterals on site indicated to be abandoned.

C.

Utility service shut-off, disconnection, capping and sealing, temporary service, removal, alteration, and abandonment shall be coordinated with the utility provider and shall be performed in accordance with the utility provider’s regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SOIL MATERIALS A.

General: Provide borrow soil materials, approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B.

Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GC, GM, SW, SP, SM, & SC, or a combination of these groups; with a liquid limit not greater than 30 and a maximum plasticity index less of 10 per ASTM D 4318; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, ashes, cinders, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. All offsite borrow materials or imported materials that may be borrow material, select fill, or other approved material shall consist of soils meeting Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) of SC or coarser.

C.

Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups ML, CL, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1.

Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D.

Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E.

Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F.

Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Maximum liquid limit shall be 30 and maximum plasticity index shall be 10 per ASTM D 4318.

G.

Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H.

Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

EARTHWORK

02300 - 3 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

I.

Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

J.

Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

K.

Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2

GEOTEXTILES A.

Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.3

Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

ACCESSORIES A.

Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Red: Electric. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. Orange: Telephone and other communications. Blue: Water systems. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

GENERAL A.

3.2

All work performed in the public space / right of way shall comply with DC DOT and DC WASA standards.

PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

EARTHWORK

02300 - 4 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C.

Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.

D.

Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost.

3.3

DEWATERING A.

Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B.

Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.

2.

3.4

Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

EXPLOSIVES A.

3.5

Explosives: Do not use explosives.

EXCAVATION, GENERAL A.

Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to proposed subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. 2.

If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. b. c. d.

3.6

24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe.

EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.

Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

EARTHWORK

02300 - 5 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2. 3.

3.7

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A.

3.8

Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A.

Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1.

B.

Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

C.

Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. 2.

3.

3.9

Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multipleduct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

SUBGRADE INSPECTION A.

Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B.

If the Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C.

Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

EARTHWORK

02300 - 6 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Getechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D.

Provide subgrade testing per the remainder of this specification section.

E.

Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.

F.

Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.10 A.

UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1.

3.11 A.

STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Install silt fence around soil stockpile. 1.

3.12 A.

Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

BACKFILL Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by the Architect.

Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

EARTHWORK

02300 - 7 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.13

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A.

Water, sewer, and storm sewer work within the public space / right of way shall comply with DC WASA standards.

B.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C.

Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

D.

Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

E.

Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1.

Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F.

Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

G.

Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

H.

Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.14

SOIL FILL

A.

Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B.

Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

3.15 A.

Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. 2.

EARTHWORK

Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 02300 - 8 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.16

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A.

Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B.

Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C.

Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 unless otherwise noted: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.17 A.

GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. 2.

B.

3.18 A.

Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Structural fills: under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95% AASHTO T-180 (ASTM D-1557). Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.

Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10foot straightedge.

SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1.

EARTHWORK

Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

02300 - 9 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. 2.

3.19

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

DRAINAGE COURSE

A.

Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabson-grade as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.20

Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Contractor will contract a qualified, independent, Owner-approved geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B.

Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C.

Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D.

Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following minimum locations and frequencies: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

EARTHWORK

Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 1000 sq. ft. or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 200 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Additional tests may be required by the geotechnical engineer.

02300 - 10 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E.

3.21

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

PROTECTION

A.

Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B.

Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.

C.

Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.

3.22

Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A.

Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

B.

Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1.

Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 312000

EARTHWORK

02300 - 11 of 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A.

SUMMARY Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1.

1.3

Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system.

B.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C.

LEED Submittals: 1.

1.4 A. 1.5 A.

Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PROJECT CONDITIONS Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

02260 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B.

Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, ASTM A 690, or ASTM A 992.

C.

Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328, ASTM A 572, or ASTM A 690; with continuous interlocks.

D.

Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application.

E.

Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

F.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION

A.

Sheet Piling: Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment . Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.

B.

Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1. 2. 3.

Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless otherwise approved by Architect. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

02260 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

REMOVAL AND REPAIRS Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1.

Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlaying construction and abandon remainder.

END OF SECTION 02260

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

02260 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

SECTION 02231 - TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.3

Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings,

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: For each type of organic mulch in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight, protection-zone fencing

C.

Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.

D.

Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.

E.

Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work.

F.

Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA, licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located, current member of ASCA, or registered Consulting Arborist as designated by ASCA.

B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

02231 - 1 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Parking vehicles or equipment. Foot traffic. Erection of sheds or structures. Impoundment of water. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.

C.

Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS A.

Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than [1 inch] in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials.

B.

Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood free from deleterious materials.

C.

Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting[ one of] the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. 1.

2. 3.

D.

Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch opening, 0.148-inch- diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 23/8-inch- OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts; with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails and 0.177-inch- diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. Height of Fencing: 4 feet Gates: Swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones.

Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A.

Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

02231 - 2 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

B.

Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

C.

Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones and other areas indicated with 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.

3.2

PROTECTION ZONES A.

Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. 1. 2.

Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect.

B.

Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect.

C.

Repair or replace trees, indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

D.

Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site.

3.3

EXCAVATION A.

General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

B.

Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning.

C.

Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill.

3.4

ROOT PRUNING A.

Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently covered with soil. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

02231 - 3 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

B.

Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation.

C.

Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

3.5

CROWN PRUNING A.

Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1.

2. 3. 4. B.

3.6

Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following: Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site.

REGRADING A.

Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

B.

Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

C.

Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.

3.7

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

3.8

Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A.

General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. Perform repairs within 24 hours. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

02231 - 4 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.9

LPA/7590 100% Final Construction

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.

Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 02231

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

02231 - 5 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Related Division 2 Sections include the following: 1. 2.

C.

1.3

Protecting existing trees to remain. Removing existing trees and grass. Clearing and grubbing. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing site utilities. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. Division 2 Section “Lawns and Grasses” and "Exterior Plants" for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.

Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.

DEFINITIONS A.

Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

B.

Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

DCRA: District of Columbia Department of Consumer & Regulatory Affairs

D.

DC DOT: District of Columbia Department of Transportation

E.

DOE: District of Columbia Department of the Environment

F.

Geotechnical Engineer: a licensed soils engineer contracted by the Owner or Architect.

SITE CLEARING

02230 - 1 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.

1.5

Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property, shall be removed from the Project site, and shall be disposed of at a legal off-site area.

SUBMITTALS A.

Contractor shall obtain (immediately prior to the start of construction) and maintain photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B.

Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.7

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. 2. 3.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction (DC DOT). Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. Prepare and submit a Traffic Control Plan to the DCRA Permit Center for DC DOT approval and acquire the associated permit to perform work in the public space / right-ofway.

B.

Adjoining Property: Do not disturb adjoining private property.

C.

Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and provide to and store on-site (unless otherwise agreed) in an Owner-approved location.

D.

Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for location and surface marking of subsurface utiltities within the Project area prior to site clearing.

E.

Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

SITE CLEARING

02230 - 2 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

2.1

SOIL MATERIALS A.

Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 1.

Obtain off-site borrow soil materials, approved by the geotechnical engineer, when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION A.

Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B.

Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C.

Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1.

3.2

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A.

Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and sediment and erosion control Drawings.

B.

Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C.

Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D.

Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with the DOE approved plan and DOE regulations.

3.3

TREE PROTECTION A.

Refer to Section 02231 Tree Protection and Trimming. Comply with the following Tree Protection specifications if this section is not included in the documents.

B.

Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. 2. 3.

Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

SITE CLEARING

02230 - 3 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. 2. 3. 4.

E.

Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. 2.

3.4

Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.

Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.

UTILITIES A.

Contractor will arrange for shutting off utility service for existing structures before site clearing, when required. 1.

B.

Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. 2.

C.

Disconnect and cap utilities before proceeding with site clearing.

Arrange with utility providers to shut off indicated utilities. Owner will assist in shutting off utilities, if required, as requested by Contractor.

Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

D.

Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

E.

Utility service shut-off, disconnection, capping and sealing, temporary service, removal, alteration, and abandonment shall be coorinated with the utility provider and shall be performed in accordance with the utility provider’s regulations.

F.

Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities.

3.5

CLEARING AND GRUBBING A.

Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

SITE CLEARING

02230 - 4 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B.

Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1.

3.6

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Unless otherwise indicated in Division 2 Sections covering earthwork: For fill in areas to remain grass or landscaped, place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.

Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B.

Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.

C.

Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Install silt fence around topsoil stockpile. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.7

Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.

Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B.

Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. 2.

3.8

Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing slabs, paving, curbs, and gutters to remain before removing existing portions. Saw-cut faces vertically. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

DISPOSAL A.

Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off of Owner's property.

SITE CLEARING

02230 - 5 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

END OF SECTION 02230

SITE CLEARING

02230 - 6 of 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 02080 - PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section covers installation of exterior water, sanitary sewer, and storm lines from the property line to the building.

B.

All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT). The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.

C.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Piping joining materials. Grout. Piping system common requirements. Equipment installation common requirements. Concrete bases.

Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

B.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.2

SLEEVES A.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

B.

Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

C.

PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D.

Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

02080 - 1 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.3

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

GROUT A.

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

noncorrosive,

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping systems.

B.

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.

C.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E.

Install piping at indicated slopes.

F.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

G.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H.

Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I.

Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

J.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2.

Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. a. b.

L.

PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

02080 - 2 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC M.

3.2

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping systems.

B.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E.

Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

F.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.

G.

Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

H.

Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

I.

Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2.

3.

Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J.

Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K.

Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L.

Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. 2.

Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

02080 - 3 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC M.

3.3

AMT, LLC/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

CONCRETE BASES A.

Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1.

3.4

Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

GROUTING A.

Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D.

Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F.

Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G.

Place grout around anchors.

H.

Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 02080

PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

02080 - 4 of 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. 2.

1.2 A.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1.

1.3 A.

Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Demonstration and Training : Submit six copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1.

1.4

Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B.

Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C.

Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01820 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B.

Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A.

Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B.

Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1.

Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2.

Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

3.

System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Regulatory requirements. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves.

Emergency manuals. Operations manuals. Maintenance manuals. Project record documents. Identification systems. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a.

Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01820 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b. c. d. e. f. 4.

Diagnostic instructions. Test and inspection procedures.

Maintenance: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

8.

Alignments. Checking adjustments. Noise and vibration adjustments. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. b.

7.

Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Control sequences. Safety procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Operating procedures for emergencies. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.

Adjustments: Include the following: a. b. c. d.

6.

Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.

Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

5.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Procedures for routine cleaning Procedures for preventive maintenance. Procedures for routine maintenance. Instruction on use of special tools.

Repairs: Include the following: a. b. c. d.

Diagnosis instructions. Repair instructions. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and reassembly instructions. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

replacement;

and

01820 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC e.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

PREPARATION Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data." INSTRUCTION

A.

Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B.

Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. 2. 3.

C.

Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1.

D.

Contractor will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

Schedule training with Owner , through Construction Manager, with at least seven days' advance notice.

Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test.

END OF SECTION 01820

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01820 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

SECTION 01810 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B.

OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.

1.2

SUMMARY A.

Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.

B.

Related Sections: 1. Division 15 “Mechanical Systems Commissioning”. 2. Division 16 “ Electrical Systems Commissioning”.

1.3

DEFINITIONS A.

BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.

B.

Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

C.

CxA, CA: Commissioning Authority.

D.

OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.

E.

Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.4

MJA/7590 GMP SET

COMMISSIONING TEAM A.

Members Appointed by Contractor: Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.

B.

Members Appointed by Owner: 1.

2. 3. 1.5

CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. Architect and engineering design professionals.

OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A.

Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use.

B.

Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities.

C.

Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan.

1.6

CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A.

Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a monthly bases or as required by the CxA. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. Create construction checklists (Equipment Start-up / Prefunctional Checklist) and submit to the CxA for review, and comment. Contractor is to document and sign Start-up and Prefunctional checklists as each piece of equipment start-up is preformed. Complete paper as well as electronic construction checklists as work is completed and provide to the Commissioning Authority on a two week basis. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures (functional testing) provided by the Commissioning Authority.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

8. 9.

1.7

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Complete commissioning process test procedures. Contractor is to review and clearly understand all LEED commissioning requirements.

CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A.

Organize and lead the commissioning team.

B.

Provide commissioning plan.

C.

Review OPR & BOD

D.

Convene commissioning team meetings.

E.

Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures. Contractor to submit their start-up checklists, and manufactures start-up documents, and assist in the creation of all test procedures.

F.

Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.

G.

Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.

H.

Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.

I.

Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and random component startup.

J.

Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates, and include them in the Cx Report

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

PART 2 - EXECUTION Commissioning Plan

Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning LEED NC 2.2, EA Fundamental Cx Project: GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION WASHINGTON, DC Prepared by: ALLEN & SHARIFF CORPORATION 7061 Deepage Drive • Columbia, Maryland 21045 Phone: 410-381-7100 • Fax: 410-381-7110 Commissioning Authority Warren Isaac, CxA, LEED®AP 443-545-1159 June 29, 2009 Preliminary Commissioning Plan

Table of Contents 1. Overview 1.1 Abbreviations and Definitions 1.2 Purpose of the Commissioning Plan 1.3 Commissioning Scope 1.4 Commissioned Systems 1.5 N/A 2. General Building Information 3. Construction / Cx Team Data 4. Roles and Responsibilities 4.1 Cx Team Members 4.2 General Management Plan 4.3 General Descriptions of Roles GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

5. Commissioning Process 5.1 Commissioning Scoping Meeting 5.2 Final Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase 5.3 Site Observation 5.4 Meetings 5.5 Management Protocols 5.6 Progress Reporting and Logs 5.7 N/A 5.8 Prefunctional Checklists, Tests and Startup 5.9 Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures 5.10 Execution of Functional Testing Procedures 5.11 N/A 5.12 N/A 5.13 N/A 7. Schedule 7.1 General Issues 7.2 Project Schedule General LEED Functional Commissioning Outline

1.

Overview

1.1

Abbreviations and Definitions

The following are common abbreviations used in this document. A/EArchitect and design engineers FTCA or Commissioning authority GC or CM CxA BASControls contractor MCATC CM or Construction Manager MfrGC CxCommissioning PCCx Plan- Commissioning Plan document SubsECElectrical contractor TAB-

1.2

Functional Performance Test General contractor Mechanical contractor Manufacturer Prefunctional Checklist Subcontractors to General Test and Balance Contractor

Purpose of The Commissioning Plan

The purpose of the commissioning plan is to provide direction for the commissioning process, particularly providing resolution for issues and providing details that cannot be, or were not, fully developed during design, such as scheduling, participation of various parties of this particular project, actual lines of reporting and approvals, coordination, etc. This plan does not provide a detailed explanation of required testing procedures. The detailed testing requirements and procedures will be developed from the equipment manufacturers start-up procedures and recommendations and from the project specifications. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

1.3

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Commissioning Scope

Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. The commissioning process for a LEED project focuses on the performance of systems related to LEED prerequisites and credits. Commissioning during the construction of this project is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: According to the Contract Documents: Ensure that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly and receive adequate start-up and operational checkout by installing contractors. Verify the design meets LEED and Owner intent. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.

1.4

Commissioned Systems

The following systems will be commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to be commissioned.

Preliminary List of Systems to be Commissioned • Building Automation System (BAS) • Building Exhaust Systems • Hydronic Hot Water Heating System • Chilled Water System • D/X Systems • Mis. Heating Units • Fan Coil Units • Energy Recovery System • VAV Terminals • Domestic Hot Water Systems

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 6

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

• Lighting Controls

1.5 N/A

2. General Building Information Project: Georgetown Library

Building Type: Recreation Center Number of stories: 4 Const. Period: 1 year 3.

Construction/Cx Team Data (primary parties) TO BE COMPLETED AT AWARD OF PROJECT Team Member Company, Address & Contact Names

Owner

Contact Information

District Of Columbia Public Library

Project Manager

General Contractor

Site Contact

Commissioning Company Commissioning Authority

Allen & Shariff Corporation 7061 Deepage Drive Columbia, MD 21045 Warren Isaac

Fax: 410-381-7110

Office: 443-656-1056 Cell: 410-340-5363 Email: [email protected]

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Martinez & Johnson Architecture Architect & Planners

Project Manager

Project Architect

John J Christie & associates MEP Designers & Engineers

Project Manager

Mechanical Contractor

Site Contact Plumbing Contractor Site Contact

Electrical Contractor

Site Contact

TAB Contractor

Site Contact

BAS/ATC Contractor

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Site Contact

4.

Roles and Responsibilities

4.1

Team Members

The members of the commissioning team consist of the Owner’s representative, CxA, assigned members of the GC, A/E (particularly the mechanical engineer), the mechanical contractor, plumbing contractor, and any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. If known, the Owner’s building engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.

All contractor personnel on the commissioning team are to make themselves familiar with LEED NC 2.2 Prerequisite 1 EA commissioning process. 4.2

General Management Plan

The CxA responsibilities are directly to the Owner. In general, the CxA coordinates the commissioning activities and reports to the Owner through the Architect. The CxA’s responsibilities, along with all other contractors’ commissioning responsibilities are detailed in the Cx plan portion of the specifications. All members of the Cx Team are to work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents. Refer to the management protocols section below.

4.3

General Descriptions of Roles

General descriptions of the commissioning roles are as follows: CxA : Coordinates the Cx process, writes tests, oversees and documents performance tests GC : Facilitates the Cx process, ensures that Subs perform their responsibilities and integrates Cx into the construction process and schedule Subs : Demonstrate proper system performance and provide all necessary equipment for testing A/E : Perform construction observation, approve O&M manuals and assist in resolving problems Mfr. : The equipment manufacturers and vendors provide documentation to facilitate the commissioning work and perform contracted equipment startup

5.

Commissioning Process

This section sequentially details the commissioning process by commissioning task or activity.

5.1

Commissioning Scoping Meeting

A commissioning scoping meeting is planned and conducted by the CxA. In attendance are the representatives of the Owner, GC, A/E and the mechanical, electrical, and plumbing contractors. At the meeting, commissioning parties are introduced, the commissioning process is reviewed, and management and reporting lines are determined. The flow of documents, how much submittal data the CxA will receive, etc. are also discussed. The Cx Plan is reviewed, process questions are addressed, lines of reporting and GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

communications determined and the work products list is discussed. Also covered are the general list of each party’s responsibilities, which party is responsible to develop the startup plan for each piece of equipment and the proposed commissioning schedule. The outcome of the meeting is to increased understanding by all parties of the commissioning process and their respective responsibilities. The meeting provides the CxA additional information needed to finalize or modify the Cx Plan, including the commissioning schedule. Prior to this meeting the CxA is given all drawings and specifications and the construction schedule by trade. The GC is responsible for taking meeting minutes and distribute them to each team member.

5.2 Final Commissioning Plan--Construction Phase The CxA finalizes the Cx Plan using the information gathered from the scoping meeting. The initial commissioning schedule is also developed along with a detailed timeline. The timeline is fine-tuned as construction progresses. In particular, 60 days prior to startup of the primary equipment, the CxA meets with the GC and develops a detailed commissioning schedule. The CxA approves the commissioning plan. Updates to the Cx Plan by the CxA, is an ongoing process throughout project construction.

5.3

Site Observation

The CxA make periodic visits to the site, as necessary and per the Cx contract, to witness equipment and system installations.

5.4

Meetings

The CxA may attend selected planning and job-site meetings at their prerogative, in order to remain informed on construction progress and to update parties involved in commissioning. The GC is to provide the CxA with information regarding substitutions, change orders and any Architect’s Supplemental Instructions (ASI) that may affect commissioning equipment, systems or the commissioning schedule. The CA may review construction-meeting minutes, change orders or ASI's for the same purpose. Later during construction, necessary meetings between various commissioning team parties will be scheduled by the as required by the CxA, through the GC.

5.5

Management Protocols

The following protocols will be used on this project. Issue For requests for information (RFI) or formal documentation requests: For minor or verbal information and clarifications: For notifying contractors of deficiencies: For scheduling functional tests or training: For scheduling commissioning meetings:

Protocol The CxA goes first: __x_ direct to A/E, ___through the GC, The CxA goes direct to the informed party. The CxA documents deficiencies through the GC, but may discuss deficiency issues with contractors prior to notifying the GC. The CxA may provide input for some coordination of training and testing, but does not do any scheduling. The CxA selects the date and schedules through the: __x_GC. ___The CA schedules and notifies attendees directly.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 10

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

For making a request for significant changes:

The CxA has no authority to issue change orders.

For making small changes in specified sequences of operations:

The CxA may not make changes to specified sequences without approval from the A/E.

Subcontractors disagreeing with requests or interpretations by the CxA shall: ______________________________ ___ ______________________________ ___

Try and resolve with the CxA first. Then work through GC who will work with CxA directly to resolve the situation.

5.6

____________________________________________________ _____ ____________________________________________________ _____

Progress Reporting and Logs

At the beginning of construction, the GC provides the CxA with monthly progress reports. Thirty (30) days prior to the startup of the first piece of major equipment, the frequency of progress reports is increased to twice per month, until startup is completed. Thirty (30) days before Prefunctional or Functional testing of equipment begins, weekly progress reports are required until testing and all non-conformance issues are resolved. The CxA may adjust the reporting frequency as needed. The progress reports contain, an update of the schedule with list of requested schedule changes and new items added to the schedule, a list of new and outstanding deficiencies, a description of commissioning progress corresponding to the plan, etc. The CxA keeps a log of all commissioning-related issues that require current or future attention. The CxA regularly communicates with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling issues through memos, progress reports, etc.. The CxA will keep all commissioning materials in an organized notebook.

5.7

Initial Submittals and Documentation

N/A

5.8

Prefunctional Checklists, Tests and Startup

Prefunctional checklists (PC) are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are installed and operational and that Functional Performance Testing may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full prefunctional checkout by the Contractor. No sampling strategies are used. In general, the prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system. Prefunctional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., oil levels OK, fan belt tension, labels affixed, gages in place, sensor calibration, etc.). However, some prefunctional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word prefunctional refers to before functional testing. Prefunctional checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Contractors typically already perform some, if not many, of the prefunctional checklist items the commissioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. This project requires that the procedures be documented in writing by the installing technician. The CxA does not witness much of the prefunctional check listing, except for testing of larger or more critical pieces of equipment and some spot-checking. CONTRACTOR IS TO SUBMIT TO THE CxA THEIR PREFUNCTIONAL STARTUP DOCUMENT FORMS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT 4 WEEKS PRIOR TO STARTING SYSTEMS.

5.8.1 Start-up Plan The CxA assists the commissioning team members responsible for startup in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The parties responsible for each part of startup and initial checkout are noted on the prefunctional checklists. The following procedures will be used for this project: (the contractor is responsible for the plan development): The CxA adapts and enhances, if necessary, the representative prefunctional checklists (PC) and procedures, and develops original lists, as necessary. The CxA transmits them to the GC who designates which trade or contractor is responsible to fill out each line item on the Prefunctional Checklist from the CxA. The GC then transmits the checklist to the responsible Subs. The Sub designated to develop the Start-up Plan obtains manufacturer installation, start-up and checkout data, including actual field checkout sheets used by the field technicians. The Sub copies all pages with important instructional data and procedures (not covered in manufacturer field checkout sheets) from the start-up and checkout manuals and adds a signature line in the column by each procedure. The copied pages, along with the prefunctional checklist provided by the GC (originally from the CxA) and the manufacturer field checkout sheets become the “Start-up and Checkout Plan.” For systems that may not have adequate manufacturer start-up and checkout procedures, particularly for components being integrated with other equipment, the Sub should provide the added necessary detail and documenting format to the CxA for approval, prior to execution. The Sub transmits the full Start-up Plan to the CxA for review and approval. The CxA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them and noting any procedures that need to be added, and conveys to the GC. The GC then transmits the full start-up plan to the Subs for their review and use. (This usually means that the Prefunctional Checklist, alone, will go to more than one Sub, while the full plan will go to the primary installing contractor.)

5.8.2 Execution of Checklists and Startup Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and initial checkout with the GC and CxA. The startup and initial checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. The CxA, and GC if necessary, observes, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiples. For components of equipment, (e.g., condensing units), the CxA observes a portion of the prefunctional and start-up procedures. To document the process of startup and checkout, the site technician performing the line item task initials and dates each paragraph of procedures in the “Startup Plan” and GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 12

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

checks off items on the prefunctional and manufacturer field checkout sheets, as they are completed. Only individuals having direct knowledge of a line item being completed shall check or initial the forms. The Subs and vendors execute the checklists and tests and submit a signed copy of the completed start-up and prefunctional tests and checklists to the CxA. The CxA may review prefunctional checklists in progress, as necessary.

5.8.3 Sampling Strategy for CxA Observation of Prefunctional Checkout and Startup At the discretion of the CxA a small percentage of equipment as determined by the CxA shall be witnessed during prefunctional checkout and startup.

5.8.4 Deficiencies and Non-Conformance The Subs clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully at the bottom of the prefunctional test form. The information for the deficiencies are provided to the CxA within two days of test completion. The CxA works with the Contractors, Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items, involving the GC and others as necessary. The installing Subs or vendors correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete according to the checklists and tests. The GC recommends approval of the startup and initial checkout of each system to the CxA when complete. The CxA does not document approval for individual equipment or systems, and does not negate ongoing design issues or punch list items. 5.8.5 TAB The TAB contractor submits the outline of the TAB plan and approach to the CxA and the controls contractor four weeks prior to starting the TAB. The CxA reviews the plan and approach for understanding and coordination issues and may comment, but does not “approve.” The TAB submits weekly written reports of discrepancies, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA and GC. This facilitates quicker resolution of problems and will result in a more complete TAB before functional testing begins. TAB work shall be coordinated with the Control and Mechanical Contractors to assure systems can be properly balanced. Any system which is being scheduled by the GC to be balanced, but can not be properly balanced for what ever reason at the requested time should be refused and reported to the CxA. Project schedules are very important, but not at the expense of a properly balanced system.

5.8.6 Controls Checkout Plan The controls contractor is to develop and submit a written step-by-step plan to the CxA, which describes the process they intend to follow in verifying proper performance of the control system, and the forms on which they will document the process. The controls contractor will also meet with the TAB contractor prior to the start of TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system for use in TAB. The controls contractor shall also provide a technician qualified to operate the controls to assist the TAB contractor in performing TAB. The controls contractor shall verify proper operation and document of each field installed control devise, connecting wiring and front-end system. Accuracy of sensors and point to point testing shall be verified and documented prior to functional testing. The controls contractor shall be an active participant for all Functional Testing.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 13

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

5.9

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures

5.9.1 Overview Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all of the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is performed by the installing contractor or vendor. The CxA only is to witness and document the testing. All hands on is performed by the contractor or their subs. Contractor is to supply all test equipment necessary to perform the functional testing as outlined by the CxA. The CxA shall have the authority to postpone functional testing if he feels the systems have not been properly prepared for Functional Testing. It is then the contractor’s responsibility to retest systems as required.

5.9.2 Scope of Testing (Additional) All specific testing requirements are to be included in the bid documents per the original specifications. 5.9.3 Development Process Before test procedures are written, the CxA obtains all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, control sequences and set points. The CxA develops specific test procedures to verify proper operation of each piece of equipment and system, using the testing requirements and the representative test procedure. The GC obtains clarification, as needed, from contractors and the A/E regarding sequences and operation to develop these tests. Prior to execution, the GC provides a copy of the primary equipment tests to the installing Sub who reviews the tests for feasibility, safety, warranty and equipment protection. Functional testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The CxA shall determine which method is most appropriate.

5.9.4 Testing Plan Overview To provide the contractors with a better idea of where functional testing lies in the schedule, what issues are preventing the start of testing, which contractors are needed for each test and how much time might be expected from them, Form for Commissioning Functional Testing Plan Overview, is used. This form is filled out after most equipment has been started up and when functional testing dates are not too far off. The form is provided to the Contractors to assist in moving more efficiently to functional testing. The CxA must be updated with construction schedules.

5.10

Execution of Functional Testing Procedures

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 14

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

5.10.1 Overview and Process The CxA schedules functional tests through the GC and affected Subs. For any given system, prior to performing functional testing, the CxA waits until the prefunctional checklist has been submitted with the necessary signatures, confirming that the system is ready for functional testing. The CxA oversees and witnesses the functional testing as necessary, of equipment and systems according to the Cx Plan. The Subs execute the tests. The control system is tested before it is used to verify performance of other components or systems. The air balancing is completed before functional testing of air-related systems. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems and finally to interlocks and connections between systems. Functional testing shall not take place prior to completed TAB work and report.

5.10.2 Deficiencies and Retesting The CxA documents the results of the functional test. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified are made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. The CxA records the results of the test on the procedure or test form. Deficiencies or non-conformance issues are noted and reported to the GC through Issues Log. Subs correct deficiencies, notify the GC and return their copy of the log certifying correction. The GC schedules retesting. Decisions regarding deficiencies and corrections are made at as low a level as possible, preferably between GC and Sub. For areas in dispute, final authority, besides the Owner’s, resides with the CxA and A/E. In the event that any scheduled equipment or system functional performance tests are terminated more than once because the CxA or mechanical engineer discover deficient or incomplete work, or due to the non-attendance of required contractor or supplier personnel, the contractor or subcontractor responsible for the termination shall also be responsible for paying reasonable costs of time and travel expenses for the representatives who were physically present for the purpose of witnessing the start-up or test.

5.10.3 Facility Staff Participation The Owner’s facilities operating staff are encouraged to attend and participate in the testing process. The contractor is to document a list of personnel present to witness functional testing. This form does not describe their involvement in formal training. The GC will notify the CxA of who will attend, and then notify the facility staff when the commissioning events will occur.

5.10.4 Sampling Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. The CxA shall determine this sampling per past sampling success.

6. N/A

7. Schedule

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 15

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

7.1

MJA/7590 GMP SET

General Issues

The following sequential priorities are followed: Equipment is not “temporarily” started (for heating or cooling), until pre-start checklist items and all manufacturers pre-start procedures are completed and moisture, dust and other environmental and building integrity issues have been addressed. Functional testing is not begun until prefunctional and start-up and TAB is completed, for a given system. The controls system and equipment it controls are not functionally tested until all points have been calibrated and pre-functional testing completed. TAB is not performed until the controls system has been sufficiently functionally tested and approved by the CxA for TAB work. TAB is not performed until the envelope is completely enclosed and ceiling complete, unless the return is ducted.

7.2

Project Schedule

The initial commissioning schedule is summarized in Table 7-1. A more detailed schedule is contained in Form C-10, Detailed Commissioning Schedule Table 7-1. Initial Commissioning Schedule Summary TO BE COORDINATED WITH GC AT START OF PROJECT Estimated Start Date Task / Activity Initial scoping meeting and final plan Submittals obtained and reviewed Begin construction site visits/inspections

Estimated End Date

Prefunctional forms developed and distributed Startup and initial checkout plans Startup and initial checkout executed TAB Air Temperature Testing Functional performance tests O&M documentation review and verification Training and training verification Final commissioning report Seasonal testing, (If Necessary)

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 16

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

LEED Fundamental Commissioning Outline: General: The systems outlined in the specifications, project documents, and commissioning plan are to be fully verified as functional working systems through the effort of the commissioning team with the leadership of the Cx authority. The Cx process shall begin with a review and comment of the design concept, and continue through the final operational verifications. The system design review by the CxA is indented as a cursory review of the overall systems design to verify that it meets the LEED criteria outlined for this project. The owner project requirements (OPR), and the MEP bases of design (BOD) shall be reviewed for their intent and compatibility. All design issues or recommendations shall be forwarded to the design team for their review and action as deemed appropriate. As the project enters the construction phase the Cx authority shall meet with the Cx team, which shall consist of but is not limited to the following professionals and tradesmen. The commissioning is led by the Commissioning Authority (CxA), whom is acting on the owners behalf, and is the lead person of the Cx team. Owners Representative (OR), which may in some cases be the CxA Building Operational Personnel (BOP), Design Engineers (EA), Architect (AE) General Contractor (GC) Mechanical Contractor (MC) Electrical Contractor (EC) TAB Contractor (TAB) Building Automation System Contractor (BAS) Other professionals or tradesmen that may be necessary for the particular portion or scope of the project. The intent is to have qualified personnel as members of the Cx team who have the authority to execute the commissioning plan and who are dedicated to the LEED process and the owner’s objectives relative to sustainability and green building design.

The construction process is the phase of the project, which obviously receives the majority of attention during commissioning. A brief description of the intended process is to follow. Equipment outlined in the Cx process is used for commissioning process description only, and may not represent the actual/installed MEP devises and equipment used on this project. The description is generic in nature and is intended to create an understanding of the general construction commissioning process for the referenced project. A general description of the Cx activities from the design phase through the construction and acceptance phases is outlined for a general understanding of the commissioning LEED NC 2.2 prerequisite and enhanced commissioning activities required for this project. It is to be understood that the commissioning process requires a total team effort to be successful.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 17

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

Early Construction Phase: During the early stages of construction, the CxA or commissioning team member(s) chosen by the CxA, shall review the equipment submittals as they relate to the BOD and LEED requirements. The CxA submittal review responsibilities are limited to LEED Cx requirements, with the final action/disposition being the responsibility of the design team and/or owner. The general contractor (GC) is to create a construction schedule during this phase of construction, and issue the schedule to the entire commissioning team for review and comment. The schedule is to be reevaluated by the GC and owner on a monthly (or more frequent) basis and submitted to the commissioning team for review and Cx scheduling coordination purposes. During the later part of this phase, the first of a series of commissioning meetings is to take place. The first commissioning meeting shall be referred to as the commissioning “Kick Off “meeting. The kick off meeting is to include a brief discussion of the commissioning plan, selection of the Cx team members and review and discussion of the project schedule. The GC, through the direction of the CxA, shall have the responsibility of scheduling all meetings throughout the entire construction and Cx process. Construction Phase: The construction phase is the project evolvement from early construction to the start of the acceptance phase. During the construction phase, the CxA shall schedule commissioning meetings as necessary through the GC. Meetings are to take place only in the event that the commissioning process is not being followed properly, or if scheduling issues arise. A meeting shall be scheduled just prior to contractor starting equipment designated as “Commissioned Equipment “(such as, HVAC , major electrical and plumbing systems) for the first time. In lieu of non scheduled Cx meetings, most ongoing Cx related issues may be addressed via phone conferences with the CxA. Meeting minutes generated from noncommissioning meetings are to be submitted to the CxA within one week of the meeting. Minutes of scheduled commissioning meetings shall be the responsibility of the CxA or someone appointed by the CxA. During construction, MEP systems testing is to be verified by designated member of the Cx team and associated record documents shall be signed by both the contractor and the designated Cx team witness and shall be submitted to the CxA within one week of testing. The test record shall be reviewed and inserted in the final commissioning report by the CxA. Test documents may also be required to be submitted to the design engineer as specified. Prior to startup of equipment, which is part of the construction phase, the contractor is to submit manufacturer’s startup procedure documents to the CxA for review and comment. Further startup procedures/requirements may be submitted from the CxA to the contractor in the form of prefunctional test documents. This process is intended to ensure proper and safe system startup in preparation for successful functional testing, which will take place during the acceptance phase of the project. It is of the greatest importance that the contractor complete all startup document checklists for EACH piece of equipment and submit them to the CxA within one week of successful equipment startup. Once the equipment has been successfully started, and startup documents submitted to the CxA, the control contractor is to perform the point to point checkout of the BAS system. The control contractor is then to assist the TAB contractor in total system balance as outlined in the construction documents. Prior to the BAS and the TAB contractor verification process, they are to submit their verification procedures narrative to the CxA for review and comment. At the completion of the TAB system verification, the TAB contractor is to also submit a copy of the balance report to the CxA for review. The CxA shall witness portions of the equipment startup and BAS/TAB verification processes’ on an unannounced basis, and submit any issues that arise in writing to the architect for distribution.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 18

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

At this juncture of the project, the building should be 98% complete and close to readiness for occupancy. The commissioning process should now to move to the acceptance phase. Construction Acceptance Phase: As we enter the acceptance phase of the project the building should be basically ready for occupancy. Normal building utilities services are to be completely functional, and the contractor’s and architect’s punch lists should be close to completion. The contractors shall have submitted all required documents and verified readiness for systems functional testing. (Note: CxA is to receive all required startup documents at least three weeks prior to functional testing to allow adequate time for the creation of the functional testing documents) The CxA shall then create the functional test procedures for all systems outlined in the commissioning plan and specifications. Functional testing shall include all normal, emergency, and failure modes of operation. Functional testing shall verify all control point to point operations and the TAB results on a random sampling basis. The CxA shall only witness and document the functional testing. The appointed commissioning team contractor technician or factory representative, shall perform the actual testing of the systems. This may require multiple commissioning team members, such as, contractor technicians from the mechanical, electrical, BAS, TAB, GC, ect., as needed for each system to be tested. Some systems under functional testing may require only a portion of the systems to be tested, such as, multiple small systems like VAV’s or small split D/X equipment. These systems shall be tested on a representative sampling basis of total systems of the same type. These systems shall be tested at the discretion of the CxA until a satisfactory quantity of systems is successfully demonstrated. It is recommended that building maintenance personnel be present during functional testing to aid in their knowledge of operation of the systems. Systems, which cannot be satisfactorily functionally tested due to weather conditions, are to be rescheduled at a date and time that is more advantages for testing. All Cx team members are required to perform such seasonal testing as part of this Cx project. CxA shall prepare and submit final Cx report documenting the Cx process up to this point.

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01810 - 19

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.2 A.

Operation and maintenance documentation directory. Emergency manuals. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. Product maintenance manuals. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1.

PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronicallyindexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a.

b. 2.

B.

Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

Two paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies.

Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments. 1.

Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Agent's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Agent's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

REQUIREMENTS MANUALS

EMERGENCY,

OPERATION,

AND

MAINTENANCE

Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. 2. 3.

B.

FOR

Title page. Table of contents. Manual contents.

Title Page: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of Owner. Date of submittal. Name and contact information for Contractor. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. Name and contact information for Architect. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C.

Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

D.

Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E.

Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1.

2.

Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC F.

Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1.

Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a.

2.

3. 4.

b.

A.

If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

EMERGENCY MANUALS Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name,and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, crossreferenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a.

2.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Type of emergency. Emergency instructions. Emergency procedures.

Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Fire. Flood. Gas leak. Water leak. Power failure. Water outage. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. Chemical release or spill.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D.

Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.3 A.

OPERATION MANUALS Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

B.

System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Operating procedures. Operating logs. Wiring diagrams. Control diagrams. Piped system diagrams. Precautions against improper use. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

Descriptions: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

C.

Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.

Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. Manufacturer's name. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves. Engineering data and tests. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 7. 8. 9.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D.

Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E.

Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4

PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.

Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B.

Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C.

Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Color, pattern, and texture. Material and chemical composition. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. Repair instructions.

E.

Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F.

Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 A.

SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B.

Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C.

Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Test and inspection instructions. Troubleshooting guide. Precautions against improper maintenance. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E.

Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F.

Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G.

Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H.

Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

MANUAL PREPARATION

A.

Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B.

Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

D.

Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E.

Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1.

F.

Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION 01782

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

B.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1.

Record Drawings.

2.

Record Specifications.

3.

Record Product Data.

Related Sections: 1.

Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements.”

2.

Division 1 Section “Submittal Requirements.”

3.

Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

4.

Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1.

Number of Copies: Submit six set(s) of marked-up record prints.

B.

Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy addenda and contract modifications.

C.

Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

of Project's Specifications, including

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

RECORD DRAWINGS Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01781 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. b. c.

B.

A.

Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2.

Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3.

Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4.

Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1.

Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2.

Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

3.

Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4.

Identification: As follows: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Project name. Date. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." Name of Architect and Construction Manager. Name of Contractor.

RECORD SPECIFICATIONS Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01781 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

2.3 A.

2.4 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.

Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2.

Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3.

Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4.

Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

RECORD PRODUCT DATA Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1.

Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2.

Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3.

Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A.

Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B.

Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01781 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 01781

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01781 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

1.2 A.

Substantial Completion procedures. Final completion procedures. Warranties. Final cleaning.

Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for submitting final LEED documentation including LEED online templates. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01770 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. B.

2.

A.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

FINAL COMPLETION Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. B.

Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.

1.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01770 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.[ Use CSI Form 14.1A.] 1. 2. 3.

1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. Six paper copies, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies.

WARRANTIES

A.

Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B.

Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1.

2.

3. 4.

C.

Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01770 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

FINAL CLEANING

A.

General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B.

Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a.

b. c. d. e. f.

g.

h. i. j.

k. l.

Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, eventextured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, visionobscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01770 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1) m.

n. o. p. q.

r.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C.

Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D.

IAQ Management Plan: Complete filter change and air testing as required by approved IAQ Management Plan.

END OF SECTION 01770

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01770 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B.

Related Sections: 1. See Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for LEED prerequisites and credits including SS Credit 3, MR Credit 1 and MR Credit 2. 2. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. 3. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.2

DEFINITIONS

A.

Historic Preservation Definitions: As indicated on Drawing Sheet A-0.03.

B.

Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

C.

Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.

D.

Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

E.

Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 A.

SUBMITTALS Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

01732 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B.

Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: certification program.

C.

LEED Requirements for Building Reuse: 1. Credit MR 1.1: Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor) and envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing material) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated limits.

D.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

E.

Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

F.

Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .

1.5

Certified by an EPA-approved

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B.

Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Loose furniture. b. Interior doors. c. Molding and trim. d. Cornice remnants.

C.

Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D.

Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials have been removed by Owner under a separate contract. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

E.

Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F.

Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

01732 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B.

Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C.

Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D.

When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E.

Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

F.

Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs . 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation."

G.

Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2

UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A.

Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B.

Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

01732 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PREPARATION

A.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debrisremoval operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B.

Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

C.

Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A.

General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B.

Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. 1. Building Structure and Shell: 75 percent. 2. Nonshell Elements: 50 percent.

C.

Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner . 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D.

Removed and Reinstalled Items:

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

01732 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4.

E.

3.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A.

General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

B.

Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C.

Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 A.

CLEANING Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 01732

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

01732 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

1.2

Construction layout. Field engineering and surveying. Installation of the Work. Cutting and patching. Progress cleaning. Starting and adjusting. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the Work.

Related Sections: 1. Division 1 “LEED Requirements.” 2. Division 1 “Construction Waste Management.” 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

B.

Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1. Submit receipts showing amount (by weight or volume – one method through out project) of materials disposed or recycled.

C.

Certified Surveys: Submit three copies signed by professional engineer.

D.

Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 1/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B.

Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1.4 A.

1.

Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2.

Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

WARRANTY Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

MATERIALS General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1.

B.

For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements."

In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1.

If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 2/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

EXAMINATION Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities,mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1.

2. B.

Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.2

Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

PREPARATION

A.

Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to [local utility] [Owner] that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C.

Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D.

Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 3/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC according to requirements Coordination." 3.3

in

Division 1

Section

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION "Project

Management

and

CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A.

Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.

B.

General: Engage a surveying practices. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted

Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D.

Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E.

Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.

3.4

FIELD ENGINEERING

A.

Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

B.

Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 4/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

C.

Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

D.

Final Property Survey: Engage a professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1.

3.5 A.

Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

INSTALLATION General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. 2. 3.

Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C.

Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D.

Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E.

Tools and Equipment: levels.

F.

Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G.

Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise

01700 - 5/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H.

Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I.

Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

J.

Comply with IAQ Management Plan.

3.6 A.

CUTTING AND PATCHING Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1.

Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B.

Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C.

Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D.

Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

E.

Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1.

2. 3.

In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 6/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. 5.

6. F.

2.

3.

4. 5.

3.7 A.

Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1.

G.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. PROGRESS CLEANING General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3.

Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B.

Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C.

Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1.

Remove liquid spills promptly.

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 7/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D.

Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E.

Concealed Spaces: space.

F.

Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G.

Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with Construction Waste Management Plan.

H.

During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I.

Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J.

Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8

Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the

STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A.

Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B.

Adjust equipment for proper operation. operation without binding.

C.

Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

Remove

Adjust operating components for proper

01700 - 8/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.9

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 A.

CORRECTION OF THE WORK Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1.

Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B.

Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C.

Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D.

Repair components that do not operate properly. components that cannot be repaired.

E.

Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

Remove and replace operating

END OF SECTION 01700

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 - 9/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01635 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B.

Related Section:

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

1.

Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

2.

Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for LEED requirements.

DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. SUBMITTALS Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. 2.

Substitution Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.1A] [facsimile of form provided in the Project Manual]. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. b. c.

d.

Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. Confirmation that substituted product meets applicable LEED requirements. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

01635 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

l. m.

n.

3.

b.

A.

Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from [ICC-ES] . Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within fourteen days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a.

1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

01635 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1.

Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

B.

Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed . 1.

Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a.

b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

01635 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC i.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01635

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

01635 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B.

Related Sections:

1.2 A.

1.

Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

2.

Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements.”

DEFINITIONS Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1.

2.

3.

B.

1.3 A.

Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. ACTION SUBMITTALS Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 14 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b.

B.

1.4 A.

1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Delivery and Handling: 1. 2.

3.

4.

C.

Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

Storage: 1. 2. 3.

Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 4. 5. 6. 1.6 A.

Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

2.

Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. 2. 3.

C.

Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

PRODUCT WARRANTIES

1.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

Submittal Time: Procedures."

Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5. B.

Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

in

the

Product Selection Procedures: 1.

2.

3.

Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Products: a.

b.

4.

b.

5.

Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

Manufacturers: a.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience [will] [will not] be considered[, unless otherwise indicated]. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1.

If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC D.

2.2 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product meets applicable LEED credit requirements. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B.

Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.2

DEFINITIONS

A.

Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B.

Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C.

Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E.

Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F.

Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.3 A.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ACTION SUBMITTALS Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 21 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed . INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Hauler name and destination of diverted materials. 3. Generation point of waste. 4. Total quantity of waste by volume or weight. Use one method consistently throughout project. 5. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual by volume or weight. 6. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual iby volume or weight. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) by volume or weight. 8. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B.

Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C.

Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D.

Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E.

Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F.

Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G.

LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met.

H.

Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator .

I.

Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.6

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: certified by USGBC.

B.

Refrigerant Recovery certification program.

C.

Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7

Technician

Qualifications:

LEED Accredited Professional, Certified

by

EPA-approved

WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A.

General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B.

Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C.

Waste Location: Indicate specific area on-site for collection of commingled or segregated recyclable material.

D.

Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A.

General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B.

Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C.

Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2

SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A.

Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B.

Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C.

Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area [off-site] [designated by Owner].

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5. 3.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A.

General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B.

Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall [accrue to Owner] [accrue to Contractor] [be shared equally by Owner and Contractor].

C.

Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a.

2.

3. 4. 5.

3.4

Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.

B.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

C.

Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.

D.

Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize masonry to maximum [3/4-inch] [1-inch] [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size. 2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

E.

Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

F.

Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

G.

Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.

H.

Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

I.

Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

J.

Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5

RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A.

Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B.

Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees [on-site] [at landfill facility].

C.

Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

D.

Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.6

DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A.

General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B.

Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished.

D.

Disposal: Transport waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.

E.

Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7

SAMPLE FORMS

END OF SECTION 01524

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01524 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B.

Related Section:

1.2

1.

Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions.

2.

Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for SS Prerequisite 1, EQ Credit 3.1 and EQ Credit 3.2.

3.

Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management.”

USE CHARGES

A.

General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C.

Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.3

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B.

Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B.

Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C.

Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and] ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.5 A.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A.

Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B.

Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 1 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly.

C.

Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.2

EQUIPMENT

A.

Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B.

HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1.

Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1.

B.

3.2 A.

Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1.

Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B.

Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

C.

Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D.

Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E.

Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. F.

Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

G.

Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1.

H.

Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1.

Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a.

2.

At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

3.

3.3 A.

Police and fire departments. Ambulance service. Contractor's home office. Architect's office. Engineers' offices. Owner's office. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION General: Comply with the following: 1.

2.

B.

Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C.

Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D.

Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. 2.

E.

Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

Project Signs: permitted. 1. 2.

Unauthorized signs are not

Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a.

3.

Provide Project signs as indicated.

Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

F.

Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."

G.

Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1.

Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

H.

Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted.

I.

Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. 1.

J.

3.4 A.

Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to to maintain means of egress.

Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B.

Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings.

C.

Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

D.

Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E.

Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

F.

Site Enclosure Fence: Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1.

2.

Extent of Fence: [As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations] [As indicated on Drawings]. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.[ Furnish one set of keys to Owner.]

G.

Security Enclosure and Lockup: Lock entrances at end of each work day.

H.

Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I.

Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1.

J.

Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1.

Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

3.

4.

3.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A.

Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B.

Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

C.

Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. 2.

3.6

Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A.

Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B.

Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C.

Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D.

Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1.

2.

Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DEFINITIONS

A.

General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B.

Historic Preservation Terms and Definitions: As indicated on Drawing Sheet A-0.03.

C.

"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

D.

"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

E.

"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

F.

"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

G.

"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

H.

"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

I.

"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

J.

"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.2 A.

INDUSTRY STANDARDS Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

REFERENCES

01420 - 1/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1.

1.3

Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A.

Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B.

Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

AA

Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)

AABC

Associated Air Balance Council

AAMA

American Architectural Manufacturers Association

AATCC

American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

ABAA

Air Barrier Association of America

ABMA

American Bearing Manufacturers Association

ACI

American Concrete Institute

AEIC

Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)

AF&PA

American Forest & Paper Association

AGA

American Gas Association

AGC

Associated General Contractors of America (The)

AHA

American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)

AHAM

Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

AI

Asphalt Institute

REFERENCES

01420 - 2/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

AIA

American Institute of Architects (The)

AISC

American Institute of Steel Construction

AISI

American Iron and Steel Institute

ALCA

Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)

ALSC

American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated

AMCA

Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

APA

Architectural Precast Association

APA

APA - The Engineered Wood Association

APA EWS

APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems (See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)

ARI

Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute

ASCE

American Society of Civil Engineers

ASCE/SEI

American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE)

ASHRAE

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

ASME

ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)

ASSE

American Society of Sanitary Engineering

ASTM

ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International)

AWCI

Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry

AWCMA

American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA)

AWI

Architectural Woodwork Institute

AWPA

American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)

AWS

American Welding Society

REFERENCES

01420 - 3/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

AWWA

American Water Works Association

BHMA

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

BIA

Brick Industry Association (The)

BIFMA

BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)

CDA

Copper Development Association

CEA

Consumer Electronics Association

CIMA

Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association

CISCA

Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association

CISPI

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CRRC

Cool Roof Rating Council

CPA

Composite Panel Association

CPPA

Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association

CRI

Carpet and Rug Institute (The)

CRSI

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CSI

Cast Stone Institute

CSI

Construction Specifications Institute (The)

DHI

Door and Hardware Institute

EIA

Electronic Industries Alliance

EJCDC

Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee

EJMA

Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.

ESD

ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association)

ETL SEMCO

Intertek ETL SEMCO (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)

REFERENCES

01420 - 4/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

FSA

Fluid Sealing Association

FSC

Forest Stewardship Council

GA

Gypsum Association

GANA

Glass Association of North America

GRI

(Part of GSI)

GS

Green Seal

GSI

Geosynthetic Institute

HI

Hydronics Institute

HMMA

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)

HPVA

Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

HPW

H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.

ICEA

Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.

ICRI

International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)

IESNA

Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

IEST IGMA

Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance

ISO

International Organization for Standardization Available from ANSI

ISSFA

International Solid Surface Fabricators Association

ITS

Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO)

ITU

International Telecommunication Union

LMA

Laminating Materials Association

REFERENCES

01420 - 5/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

(Now part of CPA) LPI

Lightning Protection Institute

MFMA

Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.

MH

Material Handling (Now MHIA)

MHIA

Material Handling Industry of America

MIA

Marble Institute of America

MPI

Master Painters Institute

MSS

Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

NAAMM

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

NACE

NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)

NADCA

National Air Duct Cleaners Association

NAIMA

North American Insulation Manufacturers Association

NCMA

National Concrete Masonry Association

NCPI

National Clay Pipe Institute

NCTA

National Cable & Telecommunications Association

NEBB

National Environmental Balancing Bureau

NECA

National Electrical Contractors Association

NeLMA

Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association

NEMA

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NETA

InterNational Electrical Testing Association

NFPA

NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

NFRC

National Fenestration Rating Council

NGA

National Glass Association

REFERENCES

01420 - 6/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

NHLA

National Hardwood Lumber Association

NLGA

National Lumber Grades Authority

NOFMA

NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)

NOMMA

National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association

NRCA

National Roofing Contractors Association

NRMCA

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association

NSF

NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International)

NSSGA

National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association

NWWDA

National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)

PCI

Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute

PDCA

Painting & Decorating Contractors of America

PDI

Plumbing & Drainage Institute

PGI

PVC Geomembrane Institute

PLANET

Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America)

RCSC

Research Council on Structural Connections

RFCI

Resilient Floor Covering Institute

SAE

SAE International

SDI

Steel Deck Institute

SDI

Steel Door Institute

REFERENCES

01420 - 7/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SEI/ASCE

Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE)

SGCC

Safety Glazing Certification Council

SIA

Security Industry Association

SIGMA

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA)

SJI

Steel Joist Institute

SMA

Screen Manufacturers Association

SMACNA

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

SPFA

Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)

SPIB

Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)

SSINA

Specialty Steel Industry of North America

SSPC

SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

STI

Steel Tank Institute

SWI

Steel Window Institute

SWRI

Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute

TCA

Tile Council of America, Inc. (Now TCNA)

TCNA

Tile Council of North America, Inc.

TIA/EIA

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance

TMS

The Masonry Society

TPI

Truss Plate Institute, Inc.

REFERENCES

01420 - 8/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

TPI

Turfgrass Producers International

UL

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

UNI

Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association

USGBC

U.S. Green Building Council

WASTEC

Waste Equipment Technology Association

WCLIB

West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

WCMA

Window Covering Manufacturers Association

WCSC

Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association)

WDMA

Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)

WI

Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)

WMMPA

Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association

WWPA

Western Wood Products Association

C.

Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

IAPMO

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

ICC

International Code Council

ICC-ES

ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

D.

Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE

Army Corps of Engineers

CPSC

Consumer Product Safety Commission

REFERENCES

01420 - 9/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

EPA

Environmental Protection Agency

GSA

General Services Administration

HUD

Department of Housing and Urban Development

NIST

National Institute of Standards and Technology

OSHA

Occupational Safety & Health Administration

PBS

Public Buildings Service (See GSA)

PHS

Office of Public Health and Science

USDA

Department of Agriculture

USPS

Postal Service

E.

Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board

CFR

Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office

FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FTMS

Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)

UFAS

Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board

REFERENCES

01420 - 10/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420

REFERENCES

01420 - 11/11

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B.

Related Documents: Solicitation, Part 1, E.1 “Inspections and Tests.”

C.

Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

D.

Related Sections: 1. Division 1 “LEED Requirements” for LEED requirements including EQ Credit 3.1/ 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2

DEFINITIONS

A.

Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B.

Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C.

Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

D.

Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

E.

Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

F.

Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

G.

Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H.

Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

I.

Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3

CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A.

Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B.

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.4

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems. 1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect. 2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

B.

Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A.

Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C.

Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C.

Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E.

Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F.

Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 ; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H.

Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I.

Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, ; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.7

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

C.

Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D.

Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E.

Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 7. F.

1.8 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required qualityassurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A.

General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements."

B.

Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C.

Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

END OF SECTION 01400

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01352 - LEED REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Silver certification based on LEED-NC, Version 2.2.

B.

Related Sections: 1. Divisions 1 through 16 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED.

1.2

DEFINITIONS

A.

Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B.

LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design.

C.

Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.

D.

Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.

E.

Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from Project site. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the building product that is installed at Project site.

F.

Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured materials made from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles from Project site.

G.

Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by weight. 1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

H.

1.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

"Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer). 1. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with other constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of the same product are not recycled materials. 2. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as constituents in another manufacturing process are pre-consumer recycled materials. SUBMITTALS

A.

Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following categories of items: 1. Furniture. 2. Plumbing. 3. Mechanical. 4. Electrical. 5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment. 6. Wood-based construction materials.

B.

LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met: 1. Credit MR 2.1: List of materials to be diverted from disposal and whether the materials will be sorted on-site or comingled. Provide calculations by weight or volume; calculationmethod consistent throughout project. 2. Credit MR 4.1: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. 3. Credit MR 5.1: List of proposed regionally manufactured materials. a.

4.

Identify each regionally manufactured material, including its source and cost. b. Identify each regionally extracted and manufactured material, including its source and cost. Credit EQ 3.1 [and EQ3.2]: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.

C.

LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans as well as reports on completed LEED online templates.

D.

LEED Documentation Submittals: Submit the following and complete related LEED online templates. Provide manufacturer’s documentation.

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Credit MR 4.1: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. Credit MR 5.1: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material and for each regionally extracted and manufactured material. a.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Include statement indicating distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material. b. Include statement indicating location of and distance from Project to point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Credit EQ 3.1: a. Product data for temporary filtration media. b. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. c. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the indoorair-quality management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials. Photos should show full range of SMACNA guidelines followed throughout construction. Credit EQ 3.2: a. Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-airquality testing and documentation showing compliance with indoor-airquality testing procedures and requirements. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168. Credit EQ 4.3: List of each carpet and carpet cushion installed in building interior. Confirm product complies with CRI Green Label Plus testing program. Product data for carpet. Indicated VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #116.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS Credit MR 4.1: Provide building materials with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent of cost of materials used for Project.

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.

3.

2.2 A.

2.3 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty items such as elevators and equipment in the calculation.

REGIONAL MATERIALS Credit MR 5.1: Provide a minimum of 10 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regional materials. LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168: 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 19. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L. 20. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 21. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 22. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 23. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 24. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 25. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 26. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 27. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.

B.

Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1113, Green Seal Standard GS-11 and GS3 and the following chemical restrictions: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 9. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 10. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 11. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 12. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 13. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 14. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 15. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 16. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 17. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 18. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 19. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 20. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L. 21. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L. 22. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L. 23. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 24. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride.

C.

Credit EQ4.3:

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Carpet and cushion systems shall comply with testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus Program. Carpet adhesive must meet VOC limit of 50 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

3.2

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING-AGENT REMOVAL Credit EA 4: Remove clean-agent fire-extinguishing agents that contain HCFCs or halons and replace with agent that does not contain HCFCs or halons. See Division 13 Section "Clean-Agent Extinguishing Systems" for additional requirements. CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT

A.

Credit EQ 3.1: Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction." 1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction period as specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls," install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction. 2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.

B.

Credit EQ 3.2: 1. Air-Quality Testing: a.

b.

Conduct baseline indoor-air-quality testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using testing protocols consistent with the EPA's "Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air," and as additionally detailed in the USGBC's "LEED-NC : Reference Guide." Demonstrate that the contaminant maximum concentrations listed below are not exceeded: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

c.

d.

Formaldehyde: 50 ppb. Particulates (PM10): 50 micrograms/cu. m. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): 500 micrograms/cu. m. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 6.5 micrograms/cu. m. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor levels.

For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When retesting noncomplying building areas, take samples from same locations as in the first test. Air-sample testing shall be conducted as follows:

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1)

2)

3)

4)

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

All measurements shall be conducted prior to occupancy but during normal occupied hours, and with building ventilation system starting at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outside air flow rate for the occupied mode throughout the duration of the air testing. Building shall have all interior finishes installed including, but not limited to, millwork, doors, paint, carpet, and acoustic tiles. Nonfixed furnishings such as workstations and partitions are encouraged, but not required, to be in place for the testing. Number of sampling locations will vary depending on the size of building and number of ventilation systems. For each portion of building served by a separate ventilation system, the number of sampling points shall not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft. or for each contiguous floor area, whichever is larger, and shall include areas with the least ventilation and greatest presumed source strength. Air samples shall be collected between 3 and 6 feet from the floor to represent the breathing zone of occupants, and over a minimum fourhour period.

END OF SECTION 01352

LEED REQUIREMENTS

01352 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01351 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01

SUMMARY:

A.

Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to complete the special procedures for historic treatment work as shown on the drawings or specified, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Storage and protection of existing historic materials. 2. Temporary protection of historic materials during construction. 3. Protection during application of chemicals. 4. Protection during use of heat-generating equipment. 5. Historic treatment procedures.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01732 Selective Demolition 2. Section 04904 Marble Cleaning and Restoration 3. Section 04901 Clay Masonry Cleaning and Restoration 4. Section 05700 Ornamental Metal Cleaning and Restoration 5. Section 06400 Interior Woodwork Refinishing 6. Section 08210 Wood Door Refinishing 7. Section 08620 Wood Window Repair 8. Section 08700 Door Hardware Cleaning and Restoration 9. Section 08815 Glazing Repair 10. Section 09200 Ornamental Plaster Trim and Casting Replacement 11. Section 09210 Plaster Cleaning and Repair

C.

Qualifications of Restorations Artisans and Craftsman Subcontractors are specified in Section 01352.

1.02

SUBMITTALS:

A. Historic Treatment Program: Submit a written plan for each phase or process including protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, and equipment to be used in each phase of work. B. If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any phase of work, provide a written description including evidence of successful use on other, comparable projects, and program of testing to demonstrate effectiveness for use on this Project. C. For historic treatment specialists and supervisory personnel. Include list of completed projects with the scope of work and budget for each. D. Using photographs, show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by historic treatment operations. Submit before work begins.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT

01351 - 1 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E. Record Documents shall include modifications to the manufacturer’s written instructions and procedures, as documents as the Work progresses. 1.03 A. B.

1.04

QUALITY ASSURANCE: Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: Refer to Section 01352. Historic Treatment Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to record procedures established as a result of the review and distribute to affected parties. STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS:

A.

Removed and Salvaged Historic Materials: 1. Transport items to Owner’s storage area designated by Owner. 2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3. Do not dispose of items removed from existing construction without prior written consent of Owner.

C.

Removed and Reinstalled Historic materials: a. Clean and repair historic items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. b. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. c. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. d. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D.

Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during historic treatment. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable protected storage location during historic treatment and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after historic treatment operations are complete.

E.

When removed from their existing location, store historic materials within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from wetting by rain, snow, or ground water, and temperature variations. Secure stored materials to protect from theft. 1. Identify removed items with an inconspicuous mark indicating their original location.

1.05 A.

PROJECT-SITE CONDITIONS: Exterior Cleaning and Repairing: 1. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable. a. Do not attempt repairs during rainy or foggy weather. Do not apply primer, paint, putty, or epoxy when the relative humidity is above 80%. Do not remove exterior elements of structures when rain is forecast or in progress. b. Do not perform exterior wet work when the air temperature is below 40o F. c. Do not begin cleaning, patching, or repairing when there is any likelihood of frost or freezing. d. Do not begin cleaning when either the air or the surface temperature is below 45o F unless approved means are provided for maintaining a 45p F temperature of the air and materials during, and for 48 hours subsequent to, cleaning. 2. Perform cleaning and rinsing of the exterior only during daylight hours.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT

01351 - 2 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Properties immediately adjacent to historic treatment area may be occupied during the Work. Conduct historic treatment so that operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to adjacent property owner of act ivies that will affect their operations.

PART 2

PRODUCTS

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

(NOT USED)

PROTECTION, GENERAL:

A.

Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for precautions and effects of products and procedures on adjacent building materials, components, and vegetation.

B.

Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.

C.

Temporary Protection of Historic Materials during Construction. 1. Protect existing materials during installation of temporary protections and construction. Do not deface or remove existing materials. 2. Attachment of temporary protection to existing construction shall be approved by the Architect prior to installation.

D.

Prior to the start of work or any cleaning operations, test existing drains and other water removal systems to ensure that drains and systems are functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of drains or systems that are stopped or blocked. Do not begin Work of this Section until the drains are in working order.

3.02

1.

Provide a method to prevent solids including stone or mortar residue from entering the drains or drain lines. Cleanout drains and drain lines that become blocked or filled by sand or any other solids because of work performed under this Contract.

2.

Protect storm drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass.

PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS – GENERAL:

A.

Refer to Sections 04904, 05700, and 06400 for additional information.

B.

Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from applications of chemical cleaners and paint removers.

C.

Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners selected fro Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use covering materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT

01351 - 3 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Do not clean surfaces during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces.

E.

Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and dispose of off Owner’s property.

F.

Dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

3.03

PROTECTION DURING USE OF HEAT-GENEATING EQUIPMENT:

A. Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment, including welding, cutting, soldering, brazing, paint removal with heat, and other operations where open flames or implements utilizing heat are used: 1.

Obtain Owner’s approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding equipment. (a) Notification shall be given for each occurrence and location of work with heatgenerating equipment. 2.

As far as practical, use heat-generating equipment in shop areas or outside the building

3.

Before work with heat-generating equipment commences, furnish personnel to serve as a fire watch (or watches) for location (s) where work is to be performed.

4.

Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present to thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.

5.

Remove and keep the area free of combustibles, including, rubbish, paper, waste, etc., within area of operations. (a) If combustible materials cannot be removed, provide fireproof blankets to cover such materials.

3.04

6.

Where possible, furnish and use baffles of metal or gypsum board to prevent the spraying of sparks or hot slag into surrounding combustible material.

7.

Prevent the extension of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings roofs, and other openings.

8.

Inspect each location of the day’s work not sooner than 30 minutes after completion of operations to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper housekeeping is maintained. HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES:

A. The principal aim of preservation work is to halt the process of deterioration and stabilize the item’s condition, unless otherwise indicated. Repair is required where specifically indicated. The following procedures shall be followed:

SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT

01351 - 4 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

1.

Retain as much existing material as possible; repair and consolidate rather than replace.

2.

Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and support existing materials or structure.

3.

Use reversible processes wherever possible.

4.

Use traditional replacement materials and techniques. New work shall be distinguishable to the trained eye, on closed inspection, from old work.

5.

Record the work before the procedure with pre-construction photos and during the work with periodic construction photos.

B. Prohibit smoking by personnel performing work on or near historic structures. C. Obtain Architect’s review and written approval in the form of a Constructive Change Directive or Supplemental Instruction before making changes or additions to construction or removing historic materials. D. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether due to environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing; or due to structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion. E. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect. F. Where missing features are indicated to be repaired or replaced, provide features whose designs are based on accurate duplications rather than on conjectural designs, subject to the approval of Architect and Preservation Specialist. G. Where Work requires existing features to be removed, cleaned, and reused, perform these operations without damage to the materials itself, to adjacent materials, or to the substrate. H. Identify new or replacement materials and features with inconspicuous, permanent marks to distinguish them from original materials. Record the legend of identification marks and the locations of these marks on Record Drawings. I. When cleaning, match samples of existing materials that have been cleaned and identified for acceptable cleaning levels. Avoid over-cleaning to prevent damage to existing materials during cleaning.

END OF SECTION 01351

SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT

01351 - 5 of 5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01350 – QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS AND CRAFTSMEN SUBCONTRACTORS PART 1 1.01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:

A.

The Georgetown Neighborhood Library is a contributing building to the Georgetown Historic District. The interior and exterior features and materials are significant character defining elements and are to be protected in place during construction and not disturbed until restored by qualified restoration artists and craftsmen. The destruction or removal of said material by any tradesman or subcontractor, whether intended or inadvertent, could jeopardize approvals and certifications required of State and Federal preservation review agencies. It shall be the sole responsibility of the General Contractor to protect the historic building at all times.

B.

The subcontractors who will be responsible for the execution of the restoration of the historic materials and surfaces on the interior and exterior of the Georgetown Neighborhood Library, including but not limited to the following, shall meet the levels of experience and abilities noted herein: 1. Historic Decorative Plaster 2. Historic Stone 3. Historic Marble 4. Historic Glass 5. Historic Wood 6. Historic Metal 7. Historic Clay Masonry

C.

In order to successfully propose the scope of work for the historic materials on the project, subcontracting companies must demonstrate a proven capability to execute work that qualifies under the Secretary of the Interior’s Guideline for the Rehabilitation of Historic Structures.

D.

Acceptable evidence of such qualifications will include, at a minimum, all of the following: 1. A proven understanding of the Secretary’s Guidelines with a minimum of ten years experience with projects of similar size and scope as that of the Takoma Park Library, provide in writing. 2. Presentation of three (3) similar projects that have been certified by the National Park Service as having met the Standards, provide in writing. 3. Names and resumes of the project foreman and crewmembers to be assigned to the project listing projects successfully completed and contact names and phone numbers for the Owners of the projects. The foreman and crewmembers proposed for the project shall not be changed without written acceptance and agreement of the Owner to the change. 4. Upon direction of the Architect and prior to the approval of the proposed subcontractor, the proposed subcontractor will execute a mockup of finished work with his proposed crew for Architect’s approval. 5. With each bid the subcontractor shall provide a written description of his onsite procedures and methods demonstration an understanding of both the requirements of the Project Specifications and the sensitivities involved in working around and with delicate historic material to be conserved and restored. QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS AND CRAFTSMEN SUBCONTRACTORS 01350 - 1 of 2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

List of Pre-approved Subcontractors: 1. The attached list of subcontractors has demonstrated the required skills and levels of experience for a project such as the Georgetown Neighborhood Library and may be considered to be pre-qualified for the project. C.A. Lindman 10401 Guilford Road Jessup, MD 20794 p. 301.470.4700 f. 301.470.4708

Hayles & Howe 3500 Parkdale Ave. Building One West, Ground Floor Baltimore, MD 21211 p. 410.462.0986, f. 410.462.0989

Worcester Eisenbrandt 2100 Gable Avenue Baltimore, MD 21230 p. 410.644.6580 f. 410.644.5895

Atlantic Refinishing & Restoration, Inc. 2320 Old Washington Road Waldorf, MD 20601 p. 301.843.8331 f. 301.870.8156

Crenshaw Lighting 2430 Floyd Hwy North Floyd, VA p. 540.745.3900 f. 540.745.3911

PART 2

PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

(NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 01350

QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS AND CRAFTSMEN SUBCONTRACTORS

01350 - 2 of 2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.2

Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for submitting LEED plans, online templates and other LEED items. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

DEFINITIONS

A.

Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action.

B.

Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 1/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2.

Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a.

C.

Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1.

2. 3. D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. [Architect] [Construction Manager] will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. 2.

3.

Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Project name. Date. Name of Architect. Name of Construction Manager. Name of Contractor. Name of subcontractor. Name of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1)

Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 2/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC j. k. l. m.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. Other necessary identification.

E.

Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.

F.

Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G.

Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1.

H.

Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect and Construction Manager will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. 2.

I.

Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect and Construction Manager.

Transmittal Form: Use [AIA Document G810] [CSI Form 12.1A] [facsimile of sample form included in Project Manual]. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

Resubmittals: submittal. 1. 2. 3.

Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial

Note date and content of previous submittal. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect'sand Construction Manager's action stamp.

J.

Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K.

Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect'sand Construction Manager's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 3/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. B.

Action Submittals: Submit six paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies. Informational Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1.

2. 3.

If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

4.

5. 6.

Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Manufacturer's product specifications. Standard color charts. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. Testing by recognized testing agency. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of coordination requirements. Availability and delivery time information.

For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. b. c. d.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Clearances required to other construction, accompanying Shop Drawings.

if

not

indicated

on

Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. Six paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return Three copies.

Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 4/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.

3.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Identification of products. Schedules. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. Six opaque copies of each submittal. Architect and Construction Manager will retain three copies; remainder will be returned.

Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. 2.

Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. b. c. d.

3.

Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a.

b. 4.

Generic description of Sample. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a.

Number of Samples: Submit six full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 5/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5.

Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a.

Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project record sample. 1)

E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1.

Submit product schedule in the following format: a. Six paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies.

F.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

G.

Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1.

H.

Submit subcontract list in the following format: a. Number of Copies: Six paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies.

LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements." 1.

Submit LEED submittals in the following format: a. b.

PDF electronic file. Three paper copies of LEED submittals, unless otherwise indicated.

I.

Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

J.

Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 6/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K.

Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L.

Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M.

Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N.

Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O.

Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P.

Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q.

Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R.

Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

S.

Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

T.

Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U.

Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V.

Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 7/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

W.

Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

X.

Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 A.

DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1.

B.

If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit six paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1.

Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A.

Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Construction Manager.

B.

Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

C.

Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Refer to requirements in

01330 - 8/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION

A.

General: Architect and Construction Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B.

Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect and Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: 1. 2.

3.

4.

“NO EXCEPTION TAKEN”: Proceed with fabrication, purchase, or both of items include in submittal. “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”: Proceed with fabrication, purchase, or both of items include in submittal subject to revisions included in Architect’s review comments. “REVISE & RESUBMIT”: A portion of the submittal is unacceptable. Correct and resubmit the part of submittal in question. Do NOT proceed until submittal is approved. “REJECTED”: Do NOT order materials and Do NOT use in construction.

C.

Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect and Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D.

Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E.

Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION 01330

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01330 - 9/9

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. 2.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.2

Preconstruction photographs. Periodic construction photographs.

Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.

photographic

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each [photograph] [video recording]. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B.

Digital Photographs: Submit image files within [three] days of taking photographs. 1. 2.

Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of [8] megapixels. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. b. c. d.

C.

Name of Project. Name and contact information for photographer. Date photograph was taken. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

Construction Photographs: Submit [two] prints of each photographic view within [seven] days of taking photographs. 1.

2.

Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercialgrade photographic paper, [mounted on linen or card stock to allow a 1-inchwide margin and] [enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are] punched for standard three-ring binder. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a.

Name of Project.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

01322 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC b. c. d. e. f. g. 1.3 A.

1.4 A.

1.5 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Name and contact information for photographer. Name of Architect[ and Construction Manager]. Name of Contractor. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. COORDINATION Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs. USAGE RIGHTS Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of [8] megapixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A.

Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B.

General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1.

Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

01322 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC C.

Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. 2.

D.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect[ and Construction Manager].

Preconstruction Photographs: Before [commencement of excavation] [commencement of demolition] [starting construction], take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by [Architect] [Construction Manager]. 1. 2. 3.

Flag [excavation areas] [construction limits] before taking construction photographs. Take [20] photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. Take [20] photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.

E.

Periodic Construction Photographs: Take [20] photographs [monthly, coinciding] [weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide] with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

F.

Indoor Air Quality Management Photographs: Take a set of eight photos minimum at three different times during construction that document the Indoor Air Quality Management goals and Materials & Resource and Indoor Environmental Quality Credits.

G.

Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take [20] color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. [Architect] [Construction Manager] will inform photographer of desired vantage points.

H.

Additional Photographs: Architect[ or Construction Manager] may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum[ or in the allowance for construction photographs]. 1. 2. 3.

Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

Special events planned at Project site. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

01322 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC c. d. e. f.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.

END OF SECTION 01322

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

01322 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Section: 1.

1.2 A.

Contractor's construction schedule. Daily construction reports. Field condition reports.

Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for preparing a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule.

DEFINITIONS Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. 2. 3.

Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B.

CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.

C.

Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D.

Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1.

Float time [belongs to Owner] [is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date].

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 1/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. [Six] paper copies.

B.

Start-up Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

C.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.

D.

Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] until most recent Application for Payment.

E.

Daily Construction Reports: Submit at [weekly] [monthly] intervals.

F.

Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

G.

LEED Construction Progress Reports: Summary of progress in achieving Waste Management goals, Materials & Resource credits, Indoor Environmental Quality credits and other LEED submittals.

1.4

COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B.

Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values,[list of subcontracts,] submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1.

Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 2/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice of Award] [the Notice to Proceed] to date of [Substantial Completion] [final completion]. 1.

B.

Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. 2.

Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than [20] days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. a.

3.

4. 5.

6. C.

.

Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than [15] days for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's[ and Construction Manager's] administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than [30] days for punch list and final completion.

Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 3/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 5. 6. D.

Coordination with existing construction. Limitations of continued occupancies. Uninterruptible services. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. Use of premises restrictions. Provisions for future construction. Seasonal variations. Environmental control.

Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. Other Constraints: .

Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion[.][, and the following interim milestones:] 1.

E.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

.

Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Unresolved issues. Unanswered RFIs. Rejected or unreturned submittals. Notations on returned submittals.

F.

Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.

G.

Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 1.

2.2

Utilize [Microsoft Project] [Primavera] [Prolog] [scheduling component of project Web site software specified in Division 1 Section " Project Management and Coordination"] , for [Windows XP] [Windows Vista] [Macintosh OS X] operating system.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A.

Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Ganttchart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within [30] days of date established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of Award].

B.

Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 4/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2.3

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in [10] percent increments within time bar.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A.

General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B.

Start-up Network Diagram: Submit diagram within [14] days of date established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of Award]. Outline significant construction activities for the first [90] days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C.

CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a[ cost- and resource-loaded,] time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1.

Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than [60] days after date established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of Award]. a.

2.

3.

D.

Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and request dates. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in correlate with Contract Time.

and for payment Indicate order to

CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1.

Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Preparation and processing of submittals. Mobilization and demobilization. Purchase of materials. Delivery. Fabrication. Utility interruptions. Installation. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. Testing and commissioning.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 5/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC j. k. 2.

3.

4.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Punch list and final completion. Activities occurring following final completion.

Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, timescaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a.

Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E.

Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F.

Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

G.

Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

2.4 A.

Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. Description of activity. Principal events of activity. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. Early and late start dates. Early and late finish dates. Activity duration in workdays. Total float or slack time. Average size of workforce. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

Identification of activities that have changed. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time.

REPORTS Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 6/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

List of subcontractors at Project site. List of separate contractors at Project site. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. Accidents. Meetings and significant decisions. Unusual events. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Change Orders received and implemented. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups. Partial completions and occupancies. Substantial Completions authorized.

Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At [monthly] intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule [one week] before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1.

2.

3. B.

Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. 2.

Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 7/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01320 - 8/8

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

2.

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the division of work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

DEFINITIONS RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction. COORDINATION Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.

2. 3. B.

Coordination drawings. Requests for Information (RFIs). Project meetings.

Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 1/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1. C.

A.

Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Preparation of the schedule of values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Preinstallation conferences. Project closeout activities. Startup and adjustment of systems. Project closeout activities.

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. 2.

B.

Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activitiesand activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Project name. Project number. Date. Name of Contractor. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. RFI number, numbered sequentially. RFI subject. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. Contractor's signature. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 2/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

D.

Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Construction Manager after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1.

The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.

3.

Requests for approval of submittals. Requests for approval of substitutions. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a.

If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E.

On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect and Construction Manager within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F.

RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly. Software log with not less than the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Project name. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 3/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.5 A.

PROJECT MEETINGS General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

2. 3.

B.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, within five days of the meeting.

Preconstruction Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1.

2.

Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Architect, Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w.

Tentative construction schedule. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. Designation of key personnel and their duties. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for RFIs. Procedures for testing and inspecting. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of the Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. Sustainable design requirements. Preparation of record documents. Use of the premises and existing building. Work restrictions. Working hours. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Procedures Indoor Air Quality Management Procedures including moisture and mold control. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. Construction waste management and recycling. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First aid. Security.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 4/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC x. 3. C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Progress cleaning.

Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1.

2.

Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, Construction Manager , and Owner's Commissioning Authority, of scheduled meeting dates. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. aa.

3. 4.

Contract Documents. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan and other required LEED plans. LEED requirements. Options. Related RFIs. Related Change Orders. Purchases, including LEED-compliant materials. Deliveries. Submittals. Review of mockups. Possible conflicts. Compatibility problems. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's written recommendations. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities and controls. Space and access limitations. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and inspecting requirements. Installation procedures. Coordination with other work. Required performance results. Protection of adjacent work. Protection of construction and personnel.

Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 5/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 5.

D.

Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

Progress Meetings: intervals. 1.

2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Construction Manager will conduct progress meetings at weekly

Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority , Construction Manager, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1)

b.

Review schedule for next period.

Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18)

Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Status of correction of deficient items. Field observations. Status of RFIs. Status of proposal requests. Pending changes. Status of Change Orders. Pending claims and disputes. Documentation of information for payment requests, including LEED documentation progress.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 6/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a.

Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01310 - 7/7

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.[ Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values.] 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. b. c.

2.

3.

B.

Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. Submittal schedule. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. Submit the schedule of values to Architect[ through Construction Manager] at earliest possible date but no later than [seven] days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

2. 3.

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703 . Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of [five] percent of Contract Sum.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01290 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

a.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for LEED documentation and other project closeout requirements in an amount totaling [five] percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a.

9.

10.

1.3

Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. LEED submittals: Update progress on LEED submittals including LEED plans and online templates.

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A.

Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect[ and Construction Manager] and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B.

Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C.

Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the [last day of the month] .

D.

Application for Payment Forms: Use [AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703] [AIA Document G702/CMa and AIA Document G703] [EJCDC Document C-620] as form for Applications for Payment.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01290 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

E.

Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in the Project Manual.

F.

Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. [Architect] [Construction Manager] will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

G.

Transmittal: Submit [three] signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to [Architect] [Construction Manager] by a method ensuring receipt[ within 24 hours]. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

H.

Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

I.

LEED Submittals: progress update.

J.

Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

With each Application for Payment, provide LEED submittals

01290 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

K.

Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

L.

Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Evidence of completion of LEED submittals including online templates. 3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 5. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 6. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 7. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 8. Evidence that claims have been settled. 9. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 10. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01290 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B.

Related Section: 1.

1.2 A.

1.3

Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

DEFINITIONS Unit price is[ an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as] a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. PROCEDURES

A.

Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, [applicable taxes, ]overhead, and profit.

B.

Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C.

Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D.

List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.

UNIT PRICES

01270 - 1/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES Unit Price No. - : 1. 2. 3.

Description: according to Division Section "." Unit of Measurement: . Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements of Division 1 Section " Allowances."

END OF SECTION 01270

UNIT PRICES

01270 - 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

1.3 A.

SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK Architect will issue[ through Construction Manager] supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on [AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."] [form included in the Project Manual.] PROPOSAL REQUESTS Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: [Architect] [Construction Manager] will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. 2.

Proposal Requests issued by [Architect] [Construction Manager] are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within [time specified in Proposal Request] [or] [20 days, when not otherwise specified,] after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a.

b. c. d.

e. f.

Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Indicate LEED credits that may be affected by the change. Quotation Form: Use [CSI Form 13.6B "Proposal Worksheet Summary" and 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail"] [forms provided by Owner. Sample copies are included in the Project Manual] [forms acceptable to Architect].

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01250 - 1/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC B.

Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to [Architect] [Construction Manager]. 1.

2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.Indicate LEED credits that may be affected by the change. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. Proposal Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.6A "Change Order Request (Proposal)" with attachments CSI Form 13.6B "Proposal Worksheet Summary" and 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail"] [form provided by Owner. Sample copy is included in Project Manual] [form acceptable to Architect].

ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A.

Allowance Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

B.

Unit Price Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit price work.

1.5 A.

1.6 A.

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, [Architect] [Construction Manager] will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on [AIA Document G701] [form included in Project Manual]. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE [Construction] [Work] Change Directive: [Architect] [Construction Manager] may issue a [Construction] [Work] Change Directive on [AIA Document G714] [EJCDC Document C-940] [form included in Project Manual]. [Construction] [Work]

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01250 - 2/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1.

B.

[Construction] [Work] Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the [Construction] [Work] Change Directive. 1.

After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01250 - 3/3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

B.

Types of allowances include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

1.2

Lump-sum allowances. Unit-cost allowances. Quantity allowances. Contingency allowances. Testing and inspecting allowances.

Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting.

SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A.

At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B.

At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C.

Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A.

Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

B.

Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

C.

Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

D.

Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

ALLOWANCES

01210 - 1/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.4 A.

1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

COORDINATION Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. [LUMP-SUM] [UNIT-COST] [AND] [QUANTITY] ALLOWANCES

A.

Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include [taxes,]freight, and delivery to Project site.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials [ordered by Owner] [selected by Architect] under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C.

Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1.

1.6

If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A.

Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B.

Contractor's[ overhead, profit, and] related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation[, taxes], insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C.

Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.

D.

At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.7

TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES

A.

Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.

B.

The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

ALLOWANCES

01210 - 2/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

C.

Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.

D.

At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.8 A.

ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1.

2.

Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.

EXAMINATION Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

ALLOWANCES

01210 - 3/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3.2 A.

3.3 A.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PREPARATION Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Allowance No. : [Lump-Sum] [Unit-Cost] [Quantity] [Contingency] [Testing and Inspecting] Allowance: Include the sum of : Include as specified in Division Section ""[ and as shown on Drawings]. 1. 2.

This allowance includes [material cost] [receiving, handling, and installation] [and] [Contractor overhead and profit]. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with corresponding unit price requirements of Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

END OF SECTION 01210

ALLOWANCES

01210 - 4/4

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01125 - SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY

A.

Section includes a summary of each contract, including responsibilities for coordination and temporary facilities and controls.

B.

Specific requirements for work of each contract are also indicated in individual Specification Sections and on Drawings.

C.

Related Section: 1.

1.2 A.

1.3

Division 1 Section "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents, restrictions on use of the project site and work restrictions.

DEFINITIONS Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, the condition at which roofing is insulated and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures equivalent in weather protection to permanent construction. PROJECT COORDINATOR

A.

Project Manager shall be responsible for coordination between the General Construction Contract and .

B.

[Mechanical/electrical] coordinator, who shall be under the direction of the Project coordinator, shall be responsible for coordination between the [Plumbing Contract] [HVAC Contract] [Electrical Contract] [and] . 1.

1.4 A.

[HVAC Contractor] [Electrical Contractor] [Plumbing Contractor] shall act as mechanical/electrical coordinator. [Mechanical/electrical coordinator shall be licensed to practice as a professional engineer in location of Project.]

COORDINATION ACTIVITIES Coordination activities of Project Manager include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2.

Provide overall coordination of the Work. Coordinate shared access to workspaces.

SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS

01125 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

19. 20. 21.

B.

2.

A.

Coordinate product selections for compatibility. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary utilities, including those necessary to make connections for temporary services. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each Contract and separate contracts. Prepare coordination drawings in collaboration with each contractor to coordinate work by more than one contract. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work including a combined Contractors' construction schedule for entire Project. Provide quality-assurance and quality-control services specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and coordinate schedule of tests and inspections. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures affected by construction. Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points, and establish permanent benchmarks on Project site. Provide field surveys of in-progress construction and site work[ and final property survey]. Coordinate cutting and patching. Coordinate protection of the Work. Coordinate firestopping. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items. Coordinate preparation of Project record documents if information from more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form one combined record. Print and submit record documents if installations by more than one contractor are indicated on the same contract drawing or shop drawing. Collect record Specification Sections from contractors, collate Sections into numeric order, and submit complete set. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information from more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form one combined record.

Responsibilities of Project Manager for temporary facilities and controls include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

1.5

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Provide telephone service for common-use facilities.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTS Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the work, requirements indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine which contract includes a specific element of Project.

SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS

01125 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2. 3.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, the work described in this Section for each contract shall be complete systems and assemblies, including products, components, accessories, and installation required by the Contract Documents. Trenches and other excavation for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work]. Blocking, backing panels, sleeves, and metal fabrication supports for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work]. Furnishing of access panels for the work of each contract shall be the work of each contract for its own work. Installation of access panels shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work]. Equipment pads for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work]. Painting for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract]. Cutting and Patching: [Each contract shall perform its own cutting; patching shall be under the General Construction Contract]. Through-penetration firestopping for the work of each contract shall be provided by [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work]. Contractors' Preliminary Construction Schedule: Within [ten] 10 working days after preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule submittal has been received from Project Manager, submit a matching preliminary horizontal bar-chart schedule showing construction operations sequenced and coordinated with overall construction.

Substitutions: Each contractor shall cooperate with other contractors involved to coordinate approved substitutions with remainder of the work. 1.

C.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Project Manager shall coordinate substitutions.

Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls," each contractor is responsible for the following: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility necessary for its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges associated with each facility, except as otherwise provided for in this Section. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task lighting, and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities. Its own field office, complete with necessary furniture, utilities, and telephone service. Its own storage and fabrication sheds. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities. Staging and scaffolding for its own construction activities. General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities, up to 2 tons. Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials. Progress cleaning of work areas affected by its operations on a daily basis. Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively for its own construction activities.

SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS

01125 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

D.

Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation, including utility-use charges, temporary meters, and temporary connections.

E.

Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation after permanent enclosure of building is complete and Owner will pay utility-use charges.

F.

Use Charges: Comply with the following: 1. 2.

3.

1.6 A.

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Work in the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. 2.

B.

2.

A.

Temporary facilities and controls that are not otherwise specifically assigned to the . .

Work in the Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1.

B.

Remaining work not identified as work under other contracts. .

Temporary facilities and controls in the General Construction Contract include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

1.7

Sewer Service: Include the cost for sewer service use by all parties engaged in construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract. Water Service: Include the cost for water service, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract. Electric Power Service: Include the cost for electric power service, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract.

.

Temporary facilities and controls in the Contract include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

.

SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS

01125 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01125

SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS

01125 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

1.2 A.

See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for the Work. WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Project Identification: number.> 1.

B.

Work covered by the Contract Documents. Work phases. Work under other contracts. Use of premises. Owner's occupancy requirements. Specification formats and conventions.


Project Location:

Owner: 1.

Owner's Representative: representative.>


name

C.

Architect:

D.

The Work consists of the following: 1. 2.

E. 1.3 A.

and

address

of

Owner's

The Work includes . Project is designed to comply with a Certification Level according to the U.S. Green Building Council's Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED) Rating System, as specified in Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements."

Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. WORK PHASES The Work shall be conducted in phases in the following order, with each phase substantially complete before beginning the next phase:

SUMMARY

01100 - 1/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 1.

2. B.

1.4

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Phase : Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within after [the Notice to Proceed] [commencement of construction of this phase]. Phase : The remaining Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion.

Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A.

General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B.

Preceding Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1.

C.

Concurrent Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1.

D.

A.

: A separate contract [has been] [will be] awarded to [to] [for] .

Future Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the following additional work to be performed at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1.

1.5

: A separate contract [has been] [will be] awarded to [to] [for] .

: A separate contract [has been] [will be] awarded to [to] [for] .

USE OF PREMISES General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

SUMMARY

01100 - 2/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

B.

General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.

C.

Use of Site: Limit use of premises to [work in areas] [areas within the Contract limits] indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.

Limits: Confine constructions operations to . a.

2. 3.

Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site[ and use by the public]. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways[ parking garage,] [ loading areas,] and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. b.

D.

1.6 A.

Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and [existing] [adjacent] building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

B.

Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet beyond building perimeter; 10 feet beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches in diameter; 15 feet beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area.

Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the

SUMMARY

01100 - 3/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

C.

Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. 2. 3.

4.

1.7 A.

1.8 A.

Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

WORK RESTRICTIONS Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1.

B.

Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.

SUMMARY

Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

01100 - 4/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC 2.

MJA/7590 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a.

The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100END OF SECTION 01100

SUMMARY

01100 - 5/5

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY WASHINGTON, DC

INDEX OF DRAWINGS (228) SHT. #

A-0.00 A-0.01 A-0.02 A-0.03 A-0.04

SHEET NAME: COVER SHEET ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS, SPOT ELEVATIONS DRAWING LIST DEMOLITION AND PRESERVATION NOTES HISTORIC PRESERVATION NOTES AND GLOSSARY HISTORIC PRESERVATION NOTES

CIVIL DRAWINGS

(16)

C1.00 C1.10

EXISTING CONDITIONS DEMOLITION PLAN

C2.00

SITE IMPROVEMENTS PLAN

C3.00 C3.10 C3.20 C3.30 C3.40 C3.50

UTILITY PLAN UTILITY PROFILES UTILITY DETAILS 1 UTILITY DETAILS 2 UTILITY DETAILS 3 UTILITY DETAILS 5

C4.00 C4.10 C4.20

GRADING AND STORMWATER PLAN STORMWATER MANAGEMENT DETAILS 1 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT DETAILS 2

C5.00 C5.10 C5.20 C5.30

ESC PLAN PHASE 1 ESC PLAN PHASE 2 ESC DETAILS ESC NOTES

LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS

(14)

L1.01 L1.02 L1.03 L1.04 L1.05

SITE REFERENCE PLAN SITE PLAN SITE PLAN LAYOUT PLAN LAYOUT PLAN

L2.01 L2.02

PLANTING PLAN PLANTING PLAN

L3.01 L3.02 L3.03 L3.04 L3.05 L3.06 L3.07

HARDSCAPE DETAILS HARDSCAPE DETAILS - LOWER TERRACE HARDSCAPE DETAILS HARDSCAPE DETAILS HARDSCAPE DETAILS SITE FURNISHING DETAILS PLANTING DETAILS

1

7/10/2009

EGRESS DRAWINGS AE-0.00 AE-1.00

(2)

CODE ANALYSIS, EGRESS CALCULATIONS AND TABLES EGRESS PLANS

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS

(112)

AS-0.00 AS-0.01 AS-0.02 AS-0.03

SITE VICINITY PLAN ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN SITE DETAILS SITE DETAILS

AD-1.00 AD-1.01 AD-1.02 AD-1.03 AD-1.04

LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN ROOF LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

AD-2.00 AD-2.01

DEMOLITION NORTH AND SOUTH ELEVATIONS DEMOLITION EAST AND WEST ELEVATIONS

A-1.00 A-1.01 A-1.02 A-1.03 A-1.04

LOWER LEVEL PLAN FIRST LEVEL PLAN SECOND LEVEL PLAN THIRD LEVEL PLAN ROOF PLAN

A-1.09 A-1.10 A-1.11 A-1.12 A-1.13

LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SECOND LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN THIRD LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A-1.20 A-1.21 A-1.22 A-1.23 A-1.24

ENLARGED PLAN LOWER LEVEL ENLARGED PLAN LOWER LEVEL ENLARGED PLAN FIRST LEVEL ENLARGED PLAN SECOND LEVEL ENLARGED THIRD LEVEL PLAN

A-1.40 A-1.41 A-142

PLAN DETAILS PLAN DETAILS PLAN DETAILS

A-2.00 A-2.01 A-2.02 A-2.03

NORTH ELEVATION SOUTH ELEVATION EAST ELEVATION WEST ELEVATION

A-3.00 A-3.01 A-3.02 A-3.03

BUILDING SECTION LONGITUDINAL LOOKING NORTH BUILDING SECTION TRANSVERSE LOOKING WEST BUILDING SECTION TRANSVERSE LOOKING WEST BUILDING SECTION LONGITUDINAL LOOKING SOUTH

A-3.10 A-3.11 A-3.12 A-3.13

WALL SECTIONS WALL SECTIONS WALL SECTIONS WALL SECTIONS

2

7/10/2009

A-3.14 A-3.15 A-3.16

WALL SECTIONS WALL SECTIONS WALL SECTIONS

A-3.20 A-3.21 A-3.22

WALL SECTION DETAILS WALL SECTION DETAILS WALL SECTION DETAILS

A-4.00 A-4.01 A-4.03 A-4.04

ROOF DETAILS ROOF DETAILS CUPOLA DETAILS DORMER ELEVATION & MOULDING DETAILS

A-5.00

PARTITION SCHEDULE

A-5.10 A-5.11 A-5.12

DOOR SCHEDULE, DOOR FRAMES AND TYPES DOOR HEAD, JAMB, AND SILL DETAILS DOOR HEAD, JAMB, AND SILL DETAILS

A-5.20 A-5.21

WINDOW SCHEDULE AND DETAILS WINDOW DETAILS

A-5.30 A-5.31 A-5.32 A-5.33 A-5.34 A-5.35 A-5.36 A-5.37 A-5.38 A-5.39 A-5.40 A-5.41 A-5.42 A-5.43 A-5.44 A-5.45 A-5.46 A-5.47

CASEWORK PLAN LOWER LEVEL CASEWORK FIRST FLOOR PLAN CASEWORK SECOND FLOOR PLAN CASEWORK THIRD FLOOR PLAN CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS CASEWORK AND SHELVING SCHEDULE METAL SHELVING ELEVATIONS METAL SHELVING ELEVATIONS

A-5.50 A-5.51 A-5.52

MATERIAL SCHEDULE FINISH AND PAINT SCHEDULES FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES

A-5.60 A-5.61 A-5.62 A-5.63

FINISH FLOOR PLAN - LOWER LEVEL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - FIRST LEVEL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - SECOND LEVEL FINISH FLOOR PLAN - THIRD LEVEL

A-5.70 A-5.71 A-5.72 A-5.73 A-5.74

LOWER LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN FIRST LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN SECOND LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN THIRD LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN FURNITURE

3

7/10/2009

A-5.75

FURNITURE

A-6.00 A-6.01 A-6.02 A-6.03 A-6.04 A-6.05 A-6.06 A-6.07 A-6.08

LOWER LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS LOWER LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS LOWER LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FIRST LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FIRST LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FIRST LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SECOND LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SECOND LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS THIRD LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

A-6.10 A-6.11 A-6.12

TOILET ROOM ACCESSORY SCHEDULE AND TYPICAL DETAILS TOILET ROOMS, ENLARGED PLANS, AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS TILE DETAILS

A-7.00 A-7.01 A-7.02 A-7.03 A-7.04 A-7.05

ARCH ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS COLUMN DETAILS WAINSCOT AND PANELING ELEVATIONS AND PROFILES CABINET DETAILS MOULDINGS CORNICE DETAILS

A-8.00 A-8.01 A-8.02 A-8.03 A-8.04

STAIR S1 SECTION AND PLANS STAIR S2 SECTION AND PLANS STAIR S3 SECTION AND PLANS, STAIR DETAILS STAIR DETAILS RAMP DETAIL

A-9.00 A-9.01

ELEVATOR SECTION AND PLANS ELEVATOR INTERIOR ELEVATION AND DETAILS

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

(21)

S1.0

GENERAL NOTES

S2.0D S2.1D S2.1MD S2.2D

LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

S2.0 S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4

LOWER LEVEL FRAMING PLAN FIRST LEVEL FRAMING PLAN SECOND LEVEL FRAMING PLAN THIRD LEVEL FRAMING PLAN ROOF FRAMING PLAN

S3.1 S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5

TYPICAL DETAILS TYPICAL DETAILS TYPICAL DETAILS TYPICAL DETAILS TYPICAL DETAILS

S4.1 S4.2

SECTIONS AND DETAILS SECTIONS AND DETAILS

4

7/10/2009

S4.3 S4.4 S4.5 S4.6

SECTIONS AND DETAILS SECTIONS AND DETAILS SECTIONS AND DETAILS SECTIONS AND DETAILS

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

(23)

M-0.01

SYMBOL LIST AND ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL NOTES

DM-1.01 DM-1.02 DM-1.03 DM-1.04

LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

M-1.01 M-1.02 M-1.03 M-1.04 M-1.05

LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN FIRST LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN SECOND LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN THIRD LEVEL AND ATTIC MECHANICAL PLAN ROOF MECHANICAL PLAN

M-2.01 M-2.02 M-2.03 M-2.04 M-2.05

SCHEDULES MECHANICAL SCHEDULES MECHANICAL SCHEDULES MECHANICAL CONTORL DIAGRAM MECHANICAL CONTORL DIAGRAM MECHANICAL

M-3.01 M-3.02

DETAILS MECHANICAL DETAILS MECHANICAL

M-4.01

PLAN AND SECTION MECHANICAL

MP-1.01 MP-1.02 MP-1.03 MP-1.04 MP-1.05

LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL FIRST LEVEL PLAN MECHANICAL SECOND LEVEL PLAN MECHANICAL THIRD LEVEL & ATTIC PLAN MECHANICAL RISER DIAGRAM

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E00 E01 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11

(17) GENERAL NOTES, FIRE ALARM NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST, ABBREVIATIONS & LIGHTING SITE EXTERIOR LIGHTING LOWER LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING FIRST LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING SECOND LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING THIRD LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING LOWER LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM FIRST LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM SECOND LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM THIRD LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM POWER & FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAMS PANEL SCHEDULES LIGHTNING PROTECTION

ED1.00 ED1.01 ED1.02 ED1.03

LOWER LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN FIRST LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN SECOND LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN

5

7/10/2009

PLUMBING DRAWINGS

(17)

P-0.01

SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES AND SCHE.

PD1.01 PD1.02 PD1.03 PD1.04

LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

P-1.01 P-1.02 P-1.03 P-1.04 P-1.05

LOWER LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING FIRST LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING SECOND LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING THIRD LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING ROOF PLAN PLUMBING

P-2.01

ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS - PLUMBING

P-3.01 P-3.02 P-3.03

SANITARY / STORM RISER DIAGRAMS WATER / FIRE RISER DIAGRAMS GAS RISER DIAGRAMS

P-4.01

DETAILS

TA DRAWINGS

(20)

TA001

A/V PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES ABBREVIATIONS, ABD DETAILS

TA100 TA101 TA102 TA103 TA104 TA105 TA106 TA107 TA201

A/V LOWER LEVEL PLAN A/V FIRST LEVEL PLAN A/V SECOND LEVEL PLAN A/V THIRD LEVEL PLAN A/V LOWER LEVEL RCP A/V FIRST LEVEL RCP A/V SECOND LEVEL RCP A/V THIRD LEVEL RCP A/V ELEVATION

TA501

A/V DETAILS

TA601

A/V LINE DIAGRAMS

TA701 TA801

A/V PLATES AND PANELS A/V RACK DETAILS

TN DRAWINGS

(16)

TN001

TELECOM PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES, ABBREVIATION, AND DETAILS

TN100 TN101 TN102 TN103

TELECOM LOWER LEVEL PLAN TELECOM FIRST LEVEL PLAN TELECOM SECOND LEVEL PLAN TELECOM THIRD LEVEL PLAN

TY DRAWINGS TY001

(10)

SECURITY PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES, ABBREVIATION, AND DETAILS

6

7/10/2009

TY100 TY101 TY102 TY103 TY104 TY105 TY106 TY107 TY 501

SECURITY LOWER LEVEL PLAN SECURITY FIRST LEVEL PLAN SECURITY SECOND LEVEL PLAN SECURITY THIRD LEVEL PLAN SECURITY LOWER LEVEL RCP SECURITY FIRST LEVEL RCP SECURITY SECOND LEVEL RCP SECURITY THIRD LEVEL RCP A/V DETAILS

7

7/10/2009

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

SECTION 16995 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01

DESCRIPTION

A.

The purpose of this section is to define Division 16 responsibilities in the commissioning process.

B.

Refer to Section 01810 and 15995 for additional commissioning requirements.

C.

Commissioning requires the participation of Division 16 to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 16 shall be familiar with all parts of Division 1 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.

D.

With respect to commissioning, the Electrical contractors shall: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.02 A.

Include cost for the commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this section, in the quoted price. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA. Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all electrical services provided. Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional performance testing as required by the CA. Review specification Division 1 and 15 to fully understand their responsibilities as they pertain to the commissioning processes.

RESPONSIBILITIES Electrical Contractor: The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only): Construction and Acceptance Phases 1. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price. 2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data, training, etc. 3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings to facilitate the Cx process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a regular agenda item during the normal construction meetings, and minutes submitted to CxA.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

16995-1

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

4. Contractors shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the CxA of commissioned equipment. 5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the CxA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures. a.

Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up, and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the CxA.

b.

The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process.

c.

This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.

6. Provide a copy of the O&M manual submittals of commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval. 7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures. Submit manufacturer’s detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and procedures and other requested equipment documentation to CxA for review. 9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical-related portions of the prefunctional checklists provided by the CxA for all commissioned equipment. 10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CxA. 11. Address current A/E punch list and Action List items before functional testing. 12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist in the functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed-upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving. 13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CxA and A/E and retest the equipment. 14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

16995-2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

MJA/7590 GMP SET

15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD asbuilts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of commissioning. 16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified. 17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty. Warranty Period 1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.

1.03

RELATED WORK

A.

Refer to Division 1, & 15 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are found.

B.

Refer to Division 1, 15, & Cx Plan for systems to be commissioned and for functional testing requirements.

1.04

COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS

A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral controls) will be commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to be commissioned. Electrical Systems and Equipment: Assist with electrical commissioning of mechanical equipment and systems identified as to be commissioned. Refer to 15995

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01

TEST EQUIPMENT

A.

Division 16 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division.

B.

Refer to specification Division 1, & 15 for additional Division 16 requirements.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 A.

SUBMITTALS Division 16 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in this Section , & Division 1 & 15

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

16995-3

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION Washington, DC

3.02 A.

3.03

MJA/7590 GMP SET

START-UP PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT The electrical contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this section and in Division 1. Division 16 has start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner. FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS

A.

Refer to Division 1, 15, & CX Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned

B.

Contractor is to supply all testing equipment, tools and labor to perform functional testing

3.04

TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS

A.

Refer to this section for specific details on non-conformance issues relating to prefunctional checklists and tests.

B.

Refer to Division 1 and 15 for issues relating to functional performance tests.

3.05

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS

A.

Division 16 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in Division 16 and deliver to the CM/GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this section. This does not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these Specifications

B.

Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.

C.

Review and Approvals: Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall be made by the A/E. Refer to Division 1.

3.06 A.

WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan described in Division 1, 15, & Cx Plan and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional checklists.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

16995-4